ETABS User's Manual

Keyboard Shortcuts for Making Selections of Objects Onscreen
Keystroke Purpose
E Puts you in a mode to select edges of area objects
Spacebar Removes you from the mode where you can select area object edges
Ctrl key + left click Pops up a dialog box where you choose which overlapping item you would like to select
Ctrl key + right click Pops up a dialog box where you choose which overlapping item's right click information you
would like to see
Keyboard Shortcuts for Various ETABS Menu Items

Keystroke Corresponding Menu Command
Ctrl+N File menu > New Model
Ctrl+O File menu > Open
Ctrl+S File menu > Save
Ctrl+P File menu > Print Graphics
Alt+F4 File menu > Exit
Ctrl+X Edit menu > Cut

Ctrl+C Edit menu > Copy
Ctrl+V Edit menu > Paste
Del Edit menu > Delete
Ctrl+A Select menu > Select All

F5 Analysis menu > Run
F1 Help menu > Search for Help On
Keyboard Shortcuts for Making Selections in List Boxes

First left click to select an item in the list box. Then:
Keystroke Purpose
Ctrl key + left click Select more items in list box that are either adjacent or non-adjacent to the first selection
Shift key + left click Select all items in list box from the first one clicked on to the last one clicked on, inclusive
(Note: You can also hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to select a block of items in a list box)
Keyboard Shortcuts for Constraints Used While Drawing Objects

Keystroke Purpose
X Constrain current line or edge to have a constant X coordinate
Y Constrain current line or edge to have a constant Y coordinate
Z Constrain current line or edge to have a constant Z coordinate
A Constrain current line or edge to a specified angle
Spacebar Remove current constraint option
Keyboard Shortcuts for Constraints Used While Reshaping Objects

Keystroke Purpose
X Constrain object or edge movement to have a constant X coordinate
Y Constrain object or edge movement to have a constant Y coordinate
Z Constrain object or edge movement to have a constant Z coordinate
A Constrain object or edge movement to a specified angle
Spacebar Remove current constraint option
Main (Top) Toolbar Buttons Side Toolbar Buttons
New Model Pointer
Open .EDB File Reshaper
Save Model Draw Point Objects (displays flyout button)

Undo Create Points (plan, elev, 3D)
Redo Draw Line Objects (displays flyout buttons)
Refresh Window Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D)

Lock/Unlock Model Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (all views)
Run Analysis Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (plan)
Rubber Band Zoom Create 2ndary Beams in Region or at Clicks (plan)
Restore Full View Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (elev)
Restore Previous Zoom Draw Area Objects (displays flyout buttons)
Zoom In One Step Draw Areas (plan, 3D)
Zoom Out One Step Draw Rectangular Areas (plan, elev)
Pan Create Areas at Click (plan, elev)
3D View Draw Walls (plan)
Plan View Create Walls in Region or at Clicks (plan)
Elevation View Select All
Rotate 3D View Restore Previous Selection
Perspective Toggle Clear Selection
Move Up in List Set Intersecting Line Select Mode
Move Down in List Snap to Points
Object Shrink Toggle Snap to Middle and Ends
Set Building View Options Snap to Intersections
Show Undeformed Shape Snap to Perpendicular
Display Static Deformed Shape Snap to Lines and Edges
Display Mode Shape Snap to Invisible Grid
Display Member Force Diagram
Display Output Tables

ETABS®
Three Dimensional Analysis and Design
of Building Systems
ETABS USER’S MANUAL

Volume 1
Computers and Structures, Inc. First Edition

Berkeley, California, USA December 1999
Copyright
The computer program ETABS and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and
Structures, Inc. Unlicensed use of the program or reproduction of the documentation in
any form, without prior written authorization from Computers and Structures, Inc., is
explicitly prohibited.
Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:
Computers and Structures, Inc.

1995 University Avenue
Berkeley, California 94704 USA
Phone: (510) 845-2177

FAX: (510) 845-4096
e-mail: [email protected] (for general questions)
e-mail: [email protected] (for technical support questions)
web: www.csiberkeley.com
ã Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-1999.

The CSI Logo is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
DISCLAIMER
CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENTATION OF ETABS. THE PROGRAM HAS
BEEN THOROUGHLY TESTED AND USED. IN USING THE PROGRAM,
HOWEVER, THE USER ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY
IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS
ON THE ACCURACY OR THE RELIABILITY OF THE PROGRAM.
THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

PROGRAM AND MUST INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Thanks are due to all of the numerous structural engineers, who over the years have given
valuable feedback that has contributed toward the enhancement of this product to its
current state.
Special recognition is due Dr. Edward L. Wilson, Professor Emeritus, University of

California at Berkeley, who was responsible for the conception and development of the
original ETABS and whose continued originality has produced many unique concepts
that have been implemented in this version.
C
Volume 1 Contents
Tip:
The Table of Contents for Volume 1 of this manual consists of a
chapter list that covers both Volumes 1 and 2 followed by an ex-
If you are just panded table of contents for Volume 1 only. The chapter list de-
getting started votes one line to each chapter. It shows you the chapter number
with ETABS (if applicable), chapter title and the pages that the chapter covers.
Version 7 we
suggest that
Subheadings are provided in the chapter list section to help give
you read you a sense of how this manual is divided into several different
Chapters 1 parts.
through 6 in
Volume 1 and Following the chapter list is the expanded table of contents for
then use the Volume 1. Here all section headers and subsection headers are
rest of the man- listed along with their associated page numbers for each chapter
ual (Volumes 1 in Volume 1.
and 2) as a
reference guide When searching through the manual for a particular chapter, the
on an as- highlighted tabs at the edge of each page may help you locate the
needed basis. If chapter more quickly.
you are not
responsible for If you are new to ETABS we suggest that you read Chapters 1
installing through 6 in Volume 1 and then use the rest of the manual (Vol-
ETABS then umes 1 and 2) as a reference guide on an as-needed basis. If you
you can skip
are not responsible for installing ETABS then you can skip
Chapter 2.
Chapter 2.
i
ETABS User’s Manual - Volume 1
C ETABS User’s Manual Chapter List

Volume 1
Volume 1 Contents
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Chapter List................................................................... i to vi
N. A. Expanded Table of Contents...................................... vi to xx
Note:
Chapter 4 pro-
vides a com- Introduction and Getting Started Information
prehensive de- Chapter Title Pages
scription of the
various parts of 1 Introduction .......................................................... 1-1 to 1-10
the ETABS
graphic inter- 2 Installation ............................................................ 2-1 to 2-14
face.
3 Getting Help ........................................................... 3-1 to 3-7
General Overview of ETABS

Note:
Chapter Title Pages
Chapter 6 pro- 4 The ETABS Graphical User Interface .................. 4-1 to 4-16
vides informa-
tion on how to 5 Overview of an ETABS Model................................ 5-1 to 5-5
create an
ETABS model. 6 ETABS Modeling Tips .......................................... 6-1 to 6-10
ii
Volume 1 Contents
C
The ETABS Menus
Chapter Title Pages
7 Overview of the ETABS Menus ............................. 7-1 to 7-2
Note: 8 The ETABS File Menu ......................................... 8-1 to 8-30

Chapters 8 9 The ETABS Edit Menu......................................... 9-1 to 9-43
through 19
document most 10 The ETABS View Menu ....................................10-1 to 10-30
of the menu
commands and 11 The ETABS Define Menu..................................11-1 to 11-65
toolbar button
shortcuts avail- 12 The ETABS Draw Menu....................................12-1 to 12-22
able in ETABS.
13 The ETABS Select Menu ....................................13-1 to 13-6
14 The ETABS Assign Menu .................................14-1 to 14-64
15 The ETABS Analyze Menu .................................15-1 to 15-9
16 The ETABS Display Menu ................................16-1 to 16-40
17 The ETABS Design Menu...................................17-1 to 17-6
18 The ETABS Options Menu................................18-1 to 18-23
19 The ETABS Help Menu.......................................19-1 to 19-2
Other Information
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. References.............................References-1 to References-4
N. A. Index .......................................................Index-1 to Index-12
iii
C Volume 2
Volume 2 Contents
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Expanded Table of Contents......................................vi to xxi
Detailed Information on Selected ETABS Topics

Chapter Title Pages
20 Units ................................................................... 20-1 to 20-5
21 Coordinate Systems........................................... 21-1 to 21-7
22 Story Level Data................................................. 22-1 to 22-5
23 Area Objects .................................................... 23-1 to 23-21

Note:
24 Line Objects ..................................................... 24-1 to 24-31
Volume 2 pro-
vides detailed 25 Point Objects.................................................... 25-1 to 25-12
information on
a variety of 26 Groups and Section Cuts ................................. 26-1 to 26-12
ETABS sub-
jects. 27 Load Cases, Load Combinations and Mass..... 27-1 to 27-13
28 Automatic Seismic Loads ................................. 28-1 to 28-37
29 Automatic Wind Loads ..................................... 29-1 to 29-19
30 Automatic Meshing of Area and Line Objects .. 30-1 to 30-12
31 Manual Meshing of Area Objects ..................... 31-1 to 31-16
32 Transformation of Loads into the ETABS

Analysis Model ............................................ 32-1 to 32-32
33 Overview of ETABS Analysis Techniques........ 33-1 to 33-24
iv
Volume 1 Contents
ETABS Analysis Output C

Chapter Title Pages
34 Point Object Output Conventions........................34-1 to 34-5

Note:
Chapters 34 35 Frame Element Output Conventions...................35-1 to 35-5
through 43
document the 36 Shell Element Output Conventions ...................36-1 to 36-14
ETABS analysis
output. Design 37 Link Element Output Conventions.......................37-1 to 37-7
information is
documented in 38 Wall Pier and Spandrel Output Conventions.......38-1 to 38-6
the design
manuals. 39 Section Cut Output Conventions.........................39-1 to 39-4
40 Printed Input Tables............................................40-1 to 40-3
41 Printed Output Tables .......................................41-1 to 41-14
42 Database Input/Output Tables ............................42-1 to 42-2
43 The ETABS Log and Out Files............................43-1 to 43-6
44 Inserting ETABS Output into Written Reports .....44-1 to 44-3
Introduction to the ETABS Design Postprocessors

Note: Chapter Title Pages
Chapters 45 45 Steel Frame Design ..........................................45-1 to 45-17
through 48
provide infor- 46 Concrete Frame Design....................................46-1 to 46-15
mation on how
to use the 47 Composite Beam Design ..................................47-1 to 47-19
ETABS design
postprocessors 48 Shear Wall Design ............................................48-1 to 48-28
v
C
Other Information
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Appendix 1 - The ETABS Menu Structure....... A1-1 to A1-13
ETABS User’s Manual - Volume 1 - Expanded Contents
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Welcome to ETABS! 1-1
Organization of This Manual 1-3
ETABS: A Special Purpose Program 1-4
Significant Features of ETABS 1-5
Modeling Features 1-5
Analysis Features 1-6
Design Features 1-8
Advantages of ETABS over Other Programs 1-9
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
What Your ETABS Package Includes 2-2
System Requirements 2-2
Installation of the ETABS Program 2-3
Single User Installation 2-4
Network Server Installation 2-5
Network Workstation Installation 2-6
vi
Volume 1 Contents
Installing From Your ETABS CD 2-8 C

Installing from a Network Server 2-8
Removing ETABS from Your System 2-9
Installing the Sentinel Driver 2-9
Using the Hardware Key Device 2-11
Using the Hardware Key Device on a Single Computer 2-11
Using the Hardware Key Device on a Local Area Network 2-12
The NSRVGX Program 2-13
Troubleshooting ETABS Installation Problems 2-14
Upgrading from ETABS 6 2-14
CHAPTER 3: GETTING HELP

User Manuals Provided With ETABS 3-1
Reference Book Provided With ETABS 3-2
On-Line Help 3-2
Technical Notes on Our Web Site 3-3
Phone, Fax and E-Mail Technical Support 3-3
Phone Support 3-4
Fax Support 3-4
E-Mail Support 3-5
Help Us to Provide You Technical Support 3-5
“Hands On” Training 3-6
Seminars 3-7
CHAPTER 4: THE ETABS GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

Features of the Graphical User Interface 4-1
Main Window 4-1
Main Title Bar 4-2
Menu Bar 4-2
vii
C Main (Top) Toolbar 4-3

Side Toolbar 4-3
Display Windows 4-4
Display Title Bar 4-5
Status Bar 4-5
Mouse Pointer Position Coordinates 4-6
Plan View Drawing and Assignment Similarity 4-6
Current Units 4-7
The ETABS Aerial View 4-8
Using the Mouse 4-9
Starting a Model 4-11
The Two Modes of ETABS 4-12
Locking and Unlocking a Model 4-13
Undo Features in ETABS 4-14
Tips for Using the Graphical User Interface 4-15
CHAPTER 5: OVERVIEW OF AN ETABS MODEL

The Concept of Objects 5-2
The ETABS Analysis Model 5-4
CHAPTER 6: ETABS MODELING TIPS

Modeling Process 6-1
Modeling Tips 6-5
CHAPTER 7: OVERVIEW OF THE ETABS MENUS

General 7-1
CHAPTER 8: THE ETABS FILE MENU

General 8-1
viii
Volume 1 Contents
Starting a New Model 8-1 C

Initialization of a New Model 8-2
Defining a Grid System 8-4
Defining Story Data 8-5
Adding Structural Objects from a Template 8-6
Steel Floor System Template 8-8
Flat Slab Template 8-10
Flat Slab with Perimeter Beams Template 8-12
Two-Way Slab Template 8-13
Waffle Slab Template 8-15
Ribbed Slab Template 8-17
Opening an Existing Model 8-19
Saving Models 8-20
Importing Files 8-21
Exporting Files 8-22
Creating Videos 8-26
Printing from ETABS 8-27
Printing Graphics 8-27
Printing Text Input and Output Tables 8-28
Printing Analysis Input Data 8-28
Printing Analysis Output Data 8-29
User Comments and Session Log 8-29
Displaying Input/Output Text Files 8-29
Exiting ETABS 8-30
CHAPTER 9: THE ETABS EDIT MENU

General 9-1
Cut, Copy and Paste 9-2
Point Object Headings in Spreadsheet 9-3
ix
C Line Object Headings in Spreadsheet 9-4

Area Object Headings in Spreadsheet 9-6
Delete 9-7
Add to Model From Template 9-7
Two-Dimensional Frame 9-8
Three-Dimensional Frame 9-8
Replicating Objects 9-9
Linear Replication 9-9
Radial Replication 9-9
Mirror Replication 9-11
Story Replication 9-11
Assignments that are Replicated 9-13
Editing Coordinate System Grid Line Data 9-14
Editing Story Data 9-17
Inserting a New Story Level 9-17
Deleting a Story Level 9-18
Reference Planes and Reference Lines 9-18
Merging Points 9-19
Aligning Points, Lines and Edges 9-20
Coordinate System 9-22
Align Options 9-22
Align to X, Y or Z-Coordinate 9-23
Align to X or Y Grid Lines 9-23
Trim or Extend Selected Lines 9-25
Align Selected Points 9-27
Align Tolerance 9-28
Moving Point, Line and Area Objects 9-29
Moving Objects in the Z Direction 9-30
Expanding and Shrinking Areas 9-30
x
Volume 1 Contents
Merging Areas 9-32 C

Joining Lines 9-33
Dividing Lines 9-35
Reshaper Tool 9-37
Reshaping Area Objects 9-38
Reshaping Line Objects 9-39
Reshaping Dimension Lines 9-40
Reshaping Point Objects 9-40
Moving/Reshaping Objects in the Z Direction 9-41
The ETABS Nudge Feature 9-42
CHAPTER 10: THE ETABS VIEW MENU

General 10-1
Types of Views 10-1
Three Dimensional (3D) Views 10-2
Plan Views 10-5
Elevation Views 10-6
Perspective Views 10-8
Perspective Toggle in a Plan View 10-8
Perspective Toggle in an Elevation View 10-8
Perspective Toggle in a Three-Dimensional View 10-9
Custom Views 10-9
Viewing Tools Available in ETABS 10-10
View Limits 10-10
Show Selection Only and Show All 10-11
Zoom Features 10-11
Pan Feature 10-13
Refresh Views and Windows 10-14
Change Axes Location 10-15
xi
C Make Measurements in your ETABS Model 10-15

Building View Options 10-16
View by Colors 10-17
Special Effects 10-18
Object Visibility 10-19
Object View Options 10-22
Piers and Spandrels 10-23
Other Visibility Options 10-24
Special Frame Items 10-26
Other Special Items 10-29
CHAPTER 11: THE ETABS DEFINE MENU

General 11-1
Material Properties 11-1
Frame Section Properties 11-6
Importing Sections from a Database 11-7
Adding User-Defined Frame Section Properties 11-9
Adding Frame Section Properties using Section Designer 11-11
Nonprismatic Sections 11-13
Segment Lengths 11-15
Starting and Ending Sections 11-15
Variation of Properties 11-16
Effect upon End Offsets Along the Length of Frame Elements 11-17
Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties 11-17
Reinforcing Information for Beams 11-17
Reinforcing Information for Columns 11-19
Wall/Slab/Deck Section Properties 11-21
Defining Wall and Slab Sections 11-21
Defining Deck Sections 11-23
xii
Volume 1 Contents
Link Properties 11-26 C

Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties 11-27
Section Cuts 11-27
Defining Section Cuts 11-28
Response Spectrum Functions 11-29
Response Spectrum Functions from a File 11-30
User-Defined Response Spectrum Functions 11-32
Code Specific Response Spectrum Functions 11-33
1994 UBC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-34
1997 UBC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-34
1996 BOCA Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-35
1995 NBCC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-35
IBC2000 Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-36
1997 NEHRP Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function 11-36
1998 Eurocode 8 Parameters for a Response Spectrum
Function 11-37
1992 NZS 4203 Parameters for a Response Spectrum
Function 11-37
Modifying and Deleting Response Spectrum Functions 11-38
Time History Functions 11-38
Time History Functions from a File 11-38
User-Defined Time History Functions 11-41
ETABS Template Time History Functions 11-42
Sine Time History Function Template Parameters 11-43
Cosine Time History Function Template Parameters 11-44
Ramp Time History Function Template Parameters 11-44
Sawtooth Time History Function Template Parameters 11-45
Triangular Time History Function Template Parameters 11-46
Static Load Cases 11-46
xiii
C Response Spectrum Cases 11-50

Spectrum Case Name 11-50
Structural and Function Damping 11-50
Modal Combination 11-52
Directional Combination 11-53
Input Response Spectra 11-55
Excitation Angle 11-55
Time History Cases 11-56
History Case Name 11-56
Options 11-56
Load Assignments 11-60
Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases 11-63
Load Combinations 11-63
Mass Source 11-64
CHAPTER 12: THE ETABS DRAW MENU

General 12-1
The ETABS Similar Stories Feature 12-2
Drawing Point Objects 12-3
Drawing Line Objects 12-3
Floating Properties of Object Window for Line Objects 12-8
Drawing Area Objects 12-9
Floating Properties of Object Window for Area Objects 12-12
Developed Elevations 12-12
Dimension Lines 12-17
Special Drawing Controls 12-18
ETABS Snap Options 12-18
Drawing Constraints in ETABS 12-21
xiv
Volume 1 Contents
CHAPTER 13: THE ETABS SELECT MENU C

General 13-1
Basic Methods of Selecting Objects 13-1
Other Methods of Selecting Objects 13-4
Deselecting Objects 13-6
CHAPTER 14: THE ETABS ASSIGN MENU

General 14-1
Assignments to Point Objects 14-1
Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Point Objects 14-2
Panel Zone Assignments to Point Objects 14-3
Properties 14-4
Connectivity 14-6
Local 2-Axis 14-8
Options 14-9
Restraint (Support) Assignments to Point Objects 14-9
Point Spring Assignments to Point Objects 14-10
Coupled Springs 14-12
Link Property Assignments to Point Objects 14-13
Additional Point Mass Assignments to Point Objects 14-14
Force Loads to Point Objects 14-16
Ground Displacement Assignments to Point Objects 14-18
Temperature Loads Assignments to Point Objects 14-20
Assignments to Line Objects 14-22
Frame Section Assignments to Line Objects 14-22
Frame Releases and Partial Fixity Assignments to Line Objects 14-23
Unstable End Releases 14-24
Frame Rigid Offset Assignments to Line Objects 14-24
Rigid End Offsets Along the Length of Frame Elements 14-25
xv
C Automatically Calculated End Offset Lengths 14-25

End Offset Properties and the Rigid-Zone Factor 14-26
Rigid Frame Joint Offsets 14-27
Frame Output Station Assignments to Line Objects 14-28
Local Axes Assignments to Line Objects 14-29
Frame Property Modifier Assignments to Line Objects 14-31
Link Property Assignments to Line Objects 14-32
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Assignments to Line Objects 14-32
Pier Label Assignments to Line Objects 14-34
Spandrel Label Assignments to Line Objects 14-35
Line Spring Assignments to Line Objects 14-36
Additional Line Mass Assignments to Line Objects 14-38
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to Line Objects 14-39
Point Load Assignments to Line Objects 14-40
Distributed Load Assignments to Line Objects 14-42
Temperature Load Assignments to Line Objects 14-46
Assignments to Area Objects 14-48
Wall, Slab and Deck Section Assignments to Area Objects 14-48
Opening Assignments to Area Objects 14-49
Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Area Objects 14-49
Local Axes Assignments to Area Objects 14-50
Shell Stiffness Modifiers Assignments to Area Objects 14-51
Pier Label Assignments to Area Objects 14-52
Spandrel Label Assignments to Area Objects 14-53
Area Spring Assignments to Area Objects 14-54
Additional Area Mass Assignments to Area Objects 14-56
Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to Area
Objects 14-57
Uniform Surface Load Assignments to Area Objects 14-58
xvi
Volume 1 Contents
Temperature Load Assignments to Area Objects 14-60 C

Group Name Assignments 14-63
Clear Display of Assigns 14-64
CHAPTER 15: THE ETABS ANALYZE MENU

Analysis Options 15-1
Building Active Degrees of Freedom 15-1
Dynamic Analysis Parameters 15-3
P-Delta Analysis Parameters 15-5
Run Analysis 15-8
Analyze Window 15-9
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis 15-9
CHAPTER 16: THE ETABS DISPLAY MENU

General 16-1
Undeformed Shape 16-1
Loads 16-2
Joint/Point Loads 16-2
Frame/Line Loads 16-3
Shell/Area Loads 16-5
Input Table Mode 16-6
Deformed Shape 16-7
Mode Shape 16-12
Member Force and Stress Diagrams 16-14
Support and Spring Reactions 16-14
Frame Element, Pier and Spandrel Forces 16-17
Shell Forces and Stresses 16-20
Load 16-21
Component Type 16-21
xvii
C Component 16-21
Contour Range 16-24
Stress Averaging 16-24
Miscellaneous Notes about Shell Element Forces and Stresses 16-26
Link Element Forces 16-26
Energy Diagram 16-27
Response Spectrum Curves 16-29
Define Tab 16-29
Axes Tab 16-30
Options Tab 16-31
Frequency/Period Tab 16-32
Damping Tab 16-33
Time History Traces 16-34
Static Pushover Curve 16-39
Section Cut Forces 16-39
Output Table Mode 16-40
CHAPTER 17: THE ETABS DESIGN MENU

Overview 17-1
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure 17-2
Background 17-2
ETABS Default Design Procedure Assignments 17-3
The Overwrite Frame Design Procedure Command 17-4
CHAPTER 18: THE ETABS OPTIONS MENU

General 18-1
Preferences 18-1
Dimensions and Tolerances 18-2
Output Decimals 18-6
xviii
Volume 1 Contents
Reinforcement Bar Sizes 18-7 C

Overview 18-7
Reinforcing Bar Sizes Dialog Box 18-9
Live Load Reduction 18-10
General 18-10
Method Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog Box 18-10
No Live Load Reduction 18-10
Tributary Area Live Load Reduction 18-11
Influence Area Live Load Reduction 18-11
User-Defined Live Load Reduction 18-12
Minimum Factor Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog
Box 18-13
Application Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog Box 18-13
Application to Columns Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog
Box 18-14
Tributary Area 18-14
Colors 18-14
Display Colors 18-15
Output Colors 18-17
Other Option Items 18-20
Windows 18-20
Startup Tips 18-20
Bounding Plane 18-21
Moment Diagrams on Tension Side 18-22
Sound 18-22
Lock Model 18-22
Aerial View Window 18-23
Floating Property Window 18-23
Crosshairs 18-23
xix
C CHAPTER 19: THE ETABS HELP MENU

The ETABS Help File 19-1
About ETABS 19-1
REFERENCES
INDEX
xx
1
Chapter 1
Introduction
ETABS is a special purpose computer program developed spe-
cifically for building systems. The concept of special purpose
programs for building type structures was introduced over 35
years ago [R. W. Clough, et al., 1963]. However, the need for
special purpose programs, such as ETABS, has never been more
evident as Structural Engineers put nonlinear static and dynamic
analysis into practice and use the greater computer power avail-
able today to create larger, more complex analytical models.
Welcome to ETABS!
ETABS version 7 is by far the most sophisticated and user-
friendly release of the ETABS series of programs. This is the
first version of ETABS that is completely integrated within Mi-
crosoft Windows. It features a powerful graphical user interface
that is unmatched in terms of ease-of-use and productivity.
1-1
ETABS User's Manual - Volume 1
Creating and modifying a model, executing the analysis, design,

1 and optimizing the design are all done through this single inter-
face. Graphical displays of the results, including real-time dis-
play of time-history displacements, are easily produced. Printed
output, to a printer or to a file, for selected elements or for all
elements, is also easily produced. This program provides a
quantum leap forward in the way models are created, modified,
analyzed and designed.
The analytical capabilities of ETABS are just as powerful, repre-

senting the latest research in numerical techniques and solution
algorithms.
Note: The ETABS program is comprised of the following modules all

All of the
integrated into and controlled by a single Windows-based
ETABS modules graphical user interface:
are integrated
into a single, • Drafting module for model generation.
user-friendly
graphical user • Seismic and wind load generation module.
interface.
• Gravity load distribution module for the distribution of
vertical loads to columns and beams when plate bending
floor elements are not provided as a part of the floor
system.
• Finite element based linear static and dynamic analysis

module.
• Finite element based nonlinear static and dynamic analy-

sis module (available in ETABS Nonlinear version
only).
• Output display and report generation module.
• Steel frame design module (column, beam and brace).
• Concrete frame design module (column and beam).
• Composite beam design module.
• Shear wall design module.
1-2 Welcome to ETABS!

Chapter 1 - Introduction
ETABS Version 7 is available in the following two versions:

1
• ETABS Plus - Includes all of the capabilities of ETABS
except that nonlinear static and dynamic analysis is not
Note: included. The steel frame design, concrete frame design,
Both ETABS
composite beam design and shear wall design modules
Plus and are all included.
ETABS Nonlin-
ear have no • ETABS Nonlinear - Includes all of the capabilities of
limits set on the ETABS including nonlinear static and dynamic analysis
allowable num- The steel frame design, concrete frame design, compos-
ber of joints ite beam design and shear wall design modules are all
and/or equa- included.
tions.
Organization of This Manual

We have tailored the content of all of the ETABS manuals more
Tip:
toward a design engineer than a computer analyst. This manual
If you are just is divided into six parts in two separate volumes that are de-
getting started scribed below:
with ETABS
Version 7 we Volume 1
suggest that
you begin by • Chapters 1 through 3: General introduction and infor-
reading Chap- mation on installation and getting help. This is the "Get-
ters 1 through 6
ting Started" portion of the manual.
in Volume 1 of
this manual. If
you are not
• Chapters 4 through 6: A general overview of ETABS.
responsible for Chapter 6 provides useful information about how to cre-
installing ate models in ETABS.
ETABS then
you can skip • Chapters 7 through 19: Detailed discussion of each of
Chapter 2. We the ETABS menus.
further suggest
that you use the Volume 2
rest of the man-
ual (Volumes 1 • Chapters 20 through 33: Additional detailed informa-
and 2) as a tion on selected ETABS topics.
reference guide
on an as- • Chapters 34 through 44: Documentation of the analy-
needed basis. sis output for ETABS.
Organization of This Manual 1-3

• Chapters 45 through 48: Introduction to the ETABS

1 design postprocessors. This includes the Steel Frame
Design, Concrete Steel Frame Design, Composite Beam
design and Shear Wall Design postprocessors.
We suggest that you start by reading Chapters 1 through 6 in

Volume 1 of this manual. If you are not responsible for installing
ETABS then you can skip Chapter 2. We further suggest that
you use the rest of the manual (Volumes 1 and 2) as a reference
guide on an as-needed basis. Refer to Chapter 3, “Getting Help”,
for information on additional ETABS documentation.
ETABS: A Special Purpose Program

A wide variety of general-purpose computer software is cur-
rently available for the static and dynamic structural analysis of
complex frame structures. Most of these programs can be used
for the analysis of multistory frame and shear wall buildings.
However, from an analytical point of view, building systems rep-
resent a unique class of structures that deserve special treatment.
ETABS is a special purpose computer program for the linear and

nonlinear, static and dynamic analysis of buildings. Special pur-
pose computer programs for addressing such problems, such as
ETABS, have proven to be very practical and efficient, resulting
in significant savings in the time associated with data prepara-
tion, output interpretation and execution throughput over general
purpose computer programs for the following reasons:
• The input and output conventions of the user interfaces

correspond to common building terminology. The mod-
els are defined logically floor-by-floor, column-by-
column, bay-by-bay and wall-by-wall and not as a
stream of non-descript nodes and elements as in general
purpose computer programs. Thus the structural defini-
tion is simple, concise and meaningful.
• The results produced by the programs are in a form di-

rectly usable by the engineer. General-purpose computer
programs produce results in a general form that may
need additional processing before they are usable in
structural design.
1-4 ETABS: A Special Purpose Program

Significant Features of ETABS 1
Modeling Features
The ETABS building is idealized as an assemblage of area, line
and point objects. These objects are used to represent column,
beam, brace, wall, floor and link/spring objects. The basic frame
geometry is defined with reference to a simple three-dimensional
grid system. With relatively simple modeling techniques very
complex framing situations may be considered.
Tip: The buildings may be unsymmetrical and non-rectangular in

plan. Torsional behavior of the floors and interstory compatibil-
Simple yet so-
ity of the floors are accurately reflected in the results. The solu-
phisticated
drawing tools
tion enforces complete three-dimensional displacement compati-
are available in bility, making it possible to capture tubular effects associated
ETABS to help with the behavior of tall structures having relatively closely
you create your spaced columns.
model.
Semi-rigid floor diaphragms may be modeled to capture the ef-
fects of in-plane floor deformations. Floor elements may span
between adjacent levels to create sloped floors (ramps). This is
useful for modeling parking garage structures.
Modeling of partial diaphragms, such as in mezzanines, set-

backs, atriums and floor openings is possible. It is also possible
to model situations with multiple independent diaphragms at
each level thereby allowing the modeling of buildings consisting
of several towers rising from a combined structure below or
vice-versa.
The column, beam and brace elements may be non-prismatic,

and they may have partial fixity at their end connections. They
may also have uniform, partial uniform or trapezoidal load pat-
terns, and they may have temperature loads. The effects of the
finite dimensions of the beams and columns on the stiffness of a
frame system are included using end offsets that can be auto-
matically calculated. It is possible to define shear, moment, axial
and PMM nonlinear hinges at any location on a column, beam or
brace element for use in a static nonlinear pushover analysis.

The floors and walls can be modeled as membrane elements with

1 in-plane stiffness only, plate bending elements with out-of-plane
stiffness only or full shell-type elements which combine both in-
plane and out-of-plane stiffness. Floor and wall elements may
have uniform load patterns in or out-of-plane, and they may have
temperature loads. The required meshing of the membrane floor
elements for gravity load transfer is handled automatically by the
program. The user merely needs to define the outline of a floor,
and define the outline of any openings, and the program will
automatically create the required mesh for the floor elements.
The column, beam, brace, floor and wall elements are all com-
patible with one another.
Special formulations of one-point nonlinear spring elements and

two-point nonlinear link elements are included to allow the mod-
eling of biaxial hysteretic and friction pendulum base isolation
devices. Uniaxial gap, damper and plasticity options are also
Note: available. These elements may be used for the modeling of
The nonlinear added stiffness and damping elements, slotted-bolted energy dis-
elements are sipaters, supplemental dampers and other passive energy devices
only active in and also for evaluating the effects of three dimensional structural
the nonlinear pounding. A linear or nonlinear link element is also available for
version of modeling panel zones in frame structures. The link elements can
ETABS. be used in static linear analysis, static nonlinear analysis (push-
over), dynamic (time history) linear analysis and dynamic non-
linear analysis.
Analysis Features
Static analyses for user specified vertical and lateral floor or
story loads are possible. If floor elements with plate bending ca-
pability are modeled, then vertical uniform loads on the floor are
transferred to the beams and columns through bending of the
floor elements. Otherwise, vertical uniform loads on the floor are
automatically converted to span loads on adjoining beams, or
point loads on adjacent columns, thereby automating the tedious
task of transferring floor tributary loads to the floor beams with-
out explicit modeling of the secondary framing. Lateral wind and
seismic load patterns meeting the requirements of various build-
ing codes can be automatically generated by the program.
1-6 Significant Features of ETABS

Three-dimensional mode shapes and frequencies, modal partici-

pation factors, direction factors and participating mass percent- 1
ages are evaluated using either eigenvector or ritz-vector analy-
sis.
Tip: The P-delta effects are included in the basic formulation of the
structural lateral stiffness matrix as a geometric correction. This
The theoretical
causes equilibrium to be satisfied in the deformed position and
basis for many
of the numeri-
the P-delta problem is solved exactly with minimal numerical ef-
cal analysis fort. Also, as the correction is on the lateral stiffness matrix, the
techniques used P-delta effects appear in the static analysis and filter into the ei-
in ETABS is gen, response spectrum and time history analyses.
discussed in
Professor Wil- Response spectrum analysis is based upon the mode superposi-
son’s book ti- tion method using either the complete quadratic modal combina-
tled “Three tion (CQC) technique [E. L. Wilson, et al., 1981b and A. K.
Dimensional Gupta, 1990], the square root of the sum of the squares (SRSS)
Static and Dy- technique, the absolute sum (ABS) technique, or the general mo-
namic Analysis dal combination (GMC) technique. The structure may be excited
of Structures.” from three different directions in any one run with independent
spectra. The direction combination can be by either the SRSS or
the ABS technique. Composite modal damping effects from sup-
plemental dampers are included in the analysis.
The linear time history analysis uses a variable time step closed
form integration technique for the evaluation of the modal coor-
dinates [E. L. Wilson, et al., 1981a]. Time-dependent ground ac-
celerations or load cases can excite the structure concurrently in
any three orthogonal directions with independent excitations.
The nonlinear time history analysis is based upon a very efficient
iterative vector superposition integration scheme [E. L. Wilson,
1993 and E. L. Wilson, et al., 1989]. The time history results
may be displayed as time-functions (such as displacement vs.
time) or as function-function (such as force vs. deformation).
Response spectrum curves may be created from acceleration
time histories generated by ETABS.
Thermal stress analyses for user specified distributions of tem-

perature are possible.

Three-dimensional static nonlinear (pushover) analysis for uni-

1 form load patterns, load patterns based on mode shapes, and any
arbitrarily defined load pattern is possible. Nonlinear hinge
property definition data is set up such that both user-defined
hinge properties and the hinge properties designated in the ATC-
40 and FEMA-273 documents can be easily assigned. Capacity
spectrum analysis is automatically performed and graphical as
well as printed output is provided.
Tip: The static nonlinear analysis capabilities of ETABS allow you to

perform incremental construction analysis where the structure is
The File menu
analyzed accounting for forces that arise as a result of the se-
> Print Tables
command is a
quence of construction.
very powerful
way to get out-
Results from the various static load conditions may be combined
put printed to a with each other or with the results from the dynamic response
printer or to a spectrum or time history analyses.
file.
The output can be viewed graphically, displayed in a tabular
form on the screen, printed to a printer, or printed to an ASCII
file. Types of output available include mode shapes and partici-
pation factors, static and dynamic story displacements and story
shears, inter-story drifts, and joint displacements, reactions and
member forces, time history traces, and more. For static nonlin-
ear analysis the types of output available include force-
deformation (pushover) and capacity spectrum curves, step-by-
step deformation, step-by-step member forces, and step-by-step
hinge state.
Design Features
The ETABS program includes a fully integrated set of design
Tip: post processors for steel and concrete design. Design post proc-
essors included in the package are for steel frame design, con-
The building
crete frame design, composite beam design and shear wall de-
code used for
design is speci- sign.
fied or viewed
using the Op-
Many different building codes are included in the design mod-
tions menu > ules. Not all of these design codes are included for each design
Preferences module. To see the specific codes available for a given design
command. module click the Options menu > Preferences command. For
steel design the codes considered include:
1-8 Significant Features of ETABS

• AISC ASD89 (American)

1
• AISC LRFD93 (American)
• BS 5950-90 (British)
• CISC 95 (Canadian)
• Eurocode 3-1992 (European)
For concrete design the building codes included are:
• ACI 318-99 (American)
• 1997 UBC (American)
• BS 8110-89 (British)
• CAN3-A23.3-M94 (Canadian)
• Eurocode 2-1991 (European)
• NZS 3101-95 (New Zealand)
ETABS can automatically create the load combinations, with the

appropriate load factors, required for each of these codes. The
user can modify these load combinations or add to them.
Advantages of ETABS over Other Programs

Using ETABS can result in a significant decrease in required
man-hours to complete the model, a significant decrease in proc-
essing time and possibly a significant increase in solution accu-
racy because ETABS takes advantage of the characteristics that
are inherent in the basic nature of a building type structure that a
general structural analysis program may not recognize. These
characteristics of buildings include:
• Most buildings are of simple geometry with horizontal

beams and vertical columns. A simple grid system de-
fined by horizontal floor lines and vertical column lines
can establish such geometry with minimal effort.
Advantages of ETABS over Other Programs 1-9

• Many of the floor levels in buildings are typical. Most

1 general programs do not recognize this fact; therefore,
for typical regions of the structure many of the internal
calculations may be unnecessarily duplicated.
• In most buildings the dimensions of the members are

large in relation to the bay widths and story heights.
These dimensions have a significant effect on the stiff-
ness of the frame. Corrections for these effects must be
included in the formulation of the member stiffness.
Most general-purpose programs work on centerline di-
mensions and such stiffness corrections are usually very
tedious to implement.
• In the analysis of buildings the member forces need to be

produced at the outer faces of the supports of the mem-
bers. Such transformations are not automatic in general-
purpose programs.
• The loading in building systems is of a restricted form.

Loads, in general, are either vertically down (dead or
live) or lateral (wind or seismic). The vertical loads are
usually applied on the floors and beams and the lateral
loads are generated at the story levels. Tributary floor
loads need to be automatically transferred to the building
frames. Also, various code-loading requirements need
special options that allow convenient generation and
combination of the vertical and lateral static and dy-
namic loading.
• It is desirable to have a building analysis computer out-

put printed in a special format, such as, in terms of a
particular story, column, beam, brace or wall. Also, spe-
cial output, such as lateral story displacements and inter-
story drifts are required.
All of the above mentioned characteristics of building systems

are recognized by ETABS, making it ideally suited for the spe-
cific application of building systems.
1 - 10 Advantages of ETABS over Other Programs

2
Chapter 2
Installation
If you are just getting started with ETABS Version 7 we suggest
that you first read Chapter 1 of this manual. Then you can follow
the instructions in this chapter to install the ETABS program
and, if necessary, the Sentinel Driver.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• What Your ETABS Package Includes
• System Requirements
• Installation of the ETABS Program
• Removing ETABS from Your System
• Installing the Sentinel Driver
• Using the Hardware Key Device
• Troubleshooting ETABS Installation Problems
• Upgrading from ETABS 6
2-1
ETABS Users Manual - Volume 1
What Your ETABS Package Includes

2 Your ETABS package includes the following:
• A single Compact Disk (CD) containing the Setup pro-

Tip:
gram, executable files, support files, and sample data
Check your files for the version you ordered (ETABS Plus, or
ETABS package ETABS Nonlinear).
carefully as
soon as you • Three Dimensional Static and Dynamic Analysis of
open it to verify Structures, by Edward L. Wilson.
that you re-
ceived all of • The ETABS users manuals.
these items.
• A Hardware key device.
System Requirements
ETABS will work on any Windows-based personal computer
with at least the following configuration:
Tip: • Intel Pentium, or higher, processor.
Although
ETABS runs • A minimum of 64 MB of RAM.
using an 800 by
600 resolution • At least 200 MB of free hard disk space. Program files
monitor, for require about 20 MB. The remainder is needed for ana-
optimum per- lytical scratch (temporary) files. Large projects may re-
formance a quire much more disk space.
monitor sup-
porting 1024 by • Microsoft Windows 95/98/NT-4.0/2000 or higher oper-
768 resolution ating system.
or better is rec-
ommended. • Windows-compatible graphics card and monitor sup-
porting at least 800 by 600 resolution and 256 colors.
Note that 1024 by 768 resolution is recommended as a
practical minimum.
2-2 What Your ETABS Package Includes

Chapter 2 - Installation
Installation of the ETABS Program 2

If you already have ETABS installed on your machine, please
uninstall it first before installing the new version. To do this,
follow the directions in the next topic entitled “Removing
ETABS from Your System.”
Tip: Three types of installation are available:

A Network • Single User installation installs the entire ETABS pro-
Server installa- gram on your local computer. Use this type of installa-
tion does not
tion if you are not connected to a network or you want
actually install
the ETABS your installation to be independent of a network.
program. It
only copies the • Network Server installation copies the entire ETABS
files to the net- program to a network server. This would typically be
work for use in performed by a network administrator to make ETABS
Network Work- available for subsequent installation and execution by
station instal- network workstations.
lations.
• Network Workstation installation installs ETABS on a
network workstation using a minimum amount of local
disk space. This requires that ETABS already be in-
stalled on a network server that is available to the work-
station whenever the program is used.
If you are not sure what to do, choose Single-User installa-

tion.
The type of program installation you choose is independent of

how you access the hardware key device. For example, a single-
user installation can access the key device over the network. Al-
ternatively, a network-workstation installation can access the key
on the local workstation. See the topic “Using the Hardware Key
Device” later in this chapter for more information.

Single User Installation

2 To install the entire ETABS program on your local computer:
• Turn on your computer and start Windows.
• IMPORTANT! No other applications should be running

during the installation procedure. Close all other appli-
cations before proceeding!
• Follow the instructions below under either the subtopic

Tip: “Installing From Your ETABS CD”, or the subtopic “In-
If you are un- stalling From a Network Server.”
sure of which
type of instal- • You will be asked to choose the destination folder or di-
lation to rectory in which to store the program and support files
choose, then on your local machine.
select the Sin-
gle User in- • When asked to select the type of Setup, choose “Single
stallation op- User.”
tion.
• Respond to the remaining prompts from SETUP to com-
plete the installation.
• If you are going to attach the hardware key device to this

computer then follow the instructions provided in the
section titled “Installing the Sentinel Driver.”
The SETUP program will:
• Copy system files to your Windows folder.
• Copy program and support files to the folder or directory

that you specify on your local machine.
• Optionally copy sample data files to a subfolder called

EXAMPLES.
• Optionally copy program manual files to a subfolder

called MANUALS.
• Register ETABS for use in Windows.
• Add ETABS to the Start menu for Windows.
2-4 Installation of the ETABS Program

If you have trouble with your ETABS installation please refer to

the section titled “Troubleshooting ETABS Installation Prob-
lems.” 2
The Readme.txt File
IMPORTANT! After any installation, please read the Readme.txt file in the ETABS
directory where you installed the program. This file contains important information
that may be more current than the program manuals. You may use any editor or word-
processor to review this file. If you download an intermediate update of ETABS from
our web site then please read the Readme.txt file that came with the update.
Network Server Installation

To copy the entire ETABS program to a network server for sub-
sequent installation and execution by network workstations:
Tip: • You must perform the installation from a Windows ma-

chine, but you can install it onto any Windows, Novell,
A Network
or other type of file server that can be accessed from
Server installa-
tion does not Windows workstations.
actually install
the ETABS • You must have sufficient rights to create files on the
program. It server.
only copies the
files to the net- • IMPORTANT! No other applications should be running
work for use in during the installation procedure. Close all other appli-
Network Work- cations before proceeding!
station instal-
lations. • Follow the instructions below under the subtopic “In-
stalling From Your ETABS CD”, or the subtopic “In-
stalling From a Network Server.”
• You will be asked to choose the destination folder or di-

rectory in which to store the setup, system, program, and
support files on the network server.
• When asked to select the type of Setup, choose “Net-

work Server.”

• Respond to the remaining prompts from SETUP to com-

plete the installation.
2 The SETUP program will:
• Copy setup, system, program, and support files to the

folder or directory that you specify on the network
server.
• Copy sample data files to a subfolder called EXAM-

PLES.
• Copy program manual files to a subfolder called

MANUALS.
IMPORTANT! You will not be able to run ETABS after this in-
stallation. You must still perform a single-user or network-
workstation setup from the network server in order to use the
program.

lems.”
Network Workstation Installation

To install ETABS on your network workstation to run from a
network server:
• Turn on your workstation (computer) and start Win-

dows.

during the installation procedure. Close all other appli-
cations before proceeding!
• Follow the instructions below under subtopic “Installing

From a Network Server.” You should not perform this
installation from a CD.

Tip: • You will be asked to choose the destination folder or di-

rectory in which to store small support files on your lo-
Always perform
a network
cal workstation. 2
workstation
installation
• When asked to select the type of Setup, choose “Net-
from your network Workstation.”
work server,
not from the • Respond to the remaining prompts from SETUP to com-
ETABS CD. plete the installation.
You must per-
form a network • If you are going to attach the hardware key device to this
server installa- workstation then follow the instructions provided in the
tion before you section titled “Installing the Sentinel Driver.”
perform a net-
work worksta- The SETUP program will:
tion installa-
tion. • Copy system files to the Windows folder on your work-
station.
• Copy support files to the folder or directory that you

specify on your local machine.
• Optionally copy sample data files to a subfolder called

EXAMPLES.
• Optionally copy program manual files to a subfolder

called MANUALS.
• Register ETABS for use with Windows.
• Add ETABS to the Start menu for Windows.
Whenever you run ETABS your workstation must have access to

the network server from which you installed ETABS.

lems.”

Installing From Your ETABS CD

2 To install ETABS from the CD:
• Insert the ETABS CD into your CD-ROM drive.
• Wait for the ETABS setup program to start automati-

cally. If the setup program does not automatically start
then:
ü Select Run from the Windows Start menu.
ü Type “D:\SETUP.EXE” without the quotes in the

Note:
command line of the Run dialog box. If your CD is
Do not perform in a drive other than D:, then substitute the appropri-
a network ate drive letter for D.
workstation
installation ü Click OK in the Run dialog box to start the setup
from the CD. program.
• Follow the remaining instructions in the appropriate

subtopic above (Single User Installation, Network
Server Installation) for the type of installation you are
performing.
Installing from a Network Server

To install ETABS from a network server:
• Ask your network administrator for the location of an

existing ETABS network-server installation.
• Select Run from the Start menu.
• On the Command Line in the Run dialog box, type in the

complete path to the ETABS Setup.exe program as
given to you by your network administrator.
• Click OK in the Run dialog box to start the installation.

• Follow the remaining instructions in the subtopic above

(Single User Installation, Network Server Installation,
Network Workstation Installation) for the type of instal- 2
lation you are performing.
Removing ETABS from Your System

If you need to remove ETABS from your system, or before in-
stalling a new version of ETABS:

during this procedure. Close all other applications be-
fore proceeding!
• From the Windows Start menu choose Settings and

then choose Control Panel from the submenu to display
the Control panel window. Double click Add Remove
Programs, highlight ETABS in the scroll box and then
click the Add/Remove button.
• Follow the prompts. When asked, you may safely re-

move all shared components that reside in the ETABS
folder or directory.
Installing the Sentinel Driver

In order to use the hardware key device on a Windows machine,
either in local mode or as a key server, you must install the Sen-
tinel Driver for Windows. This driver is NOT automatically in-
stalled by the ETABS setup program and must be separately in-
stalled. The driver is not required for machines accessing the
key across the network; it is only required for machines with
the key device attached.
Removing ETABS from Your System 2-9

The installation of the Sentinel driver is a one-time process that

needs to be performed on each machine that may have a hard-
2 ware key device attached to its parallel port. After that, the Sen-
tinel driver will automatically run every time you start your
computer.
Note: The Sentinel drivers for the hardware key device are located on
the ETABS CD in a directory called NETDRIVE.
The Sentinel
driver installa- To install the Sentinel driver on any machine:
tion program
automatically • Insert the ETABS CD in the CD drive on the machine
uninstalls any
where you want to install the Sentinel driver.
previous in-
stallation of a
• Select Run from the Windows Start menu.
Sentinel driver.
Thus it is not
necessary for
• Type “D:\NETDRIVE\SETUP.EXE” without the quotes
you to uninstall in the command line of the Run dialog box. If your CD
any previously is in a drive other than D:, then substitute the appropriate
installed Senti- drive letter for D.
nel driver prior
to implementing • Click OK in the Run dialog box to start the Sentinel
this installation driver setup program.
process.
The installation takes only a few seconds. It proceeds quietly,
requiring no input from you, and displaying no messages
unless an error occurs. After the installation is done (the hour-
glass disappears, this typically takes five seconds or less), you
should restart your system.
If an error occurs during installation of the Sentinel driver check

the following:
• If you are installing the Sentinel driver on a Windows

NT machine make sure that you have administrative
rights to the NT machine.
• Restart your computer, make sure all applications are

closed, and try installing the Sentinel driver again.
If the Sentinel driver installation error persists then contact CSI

technical support. See the section titled “Phone, Fax and E-Mail
Technical Support” in Chapter 3 for information on contacting
CSI.
2 - 10 Installing the Sentinel Driver

Using the Hardware Key Device 2

The ETABS program is copy-protected with a hardware key de-
vice that is provided with the software. This hardware key device
must always be accessible to ETABS whenever you use the pro-
gram. This is done by attaching the key device to the parallel
port of your local workstation or to that of another workstation
on your local area network, as described below. The same key
device may be used in either local or network access modes.
If ETABS cannot find the hardware key device while you are
using the program, ETABS will enter display-only mode, with
the following implications:
• You can save your current model.
• You cannot make changes to your model.
• You cannot perform analysis or design.
If the hardware key device inadvertently becomes unavailable

while you are using ETABS, you should save your model, exit
the program, and then re-attach the key device before restarting
ETABS.
Using the Hardware Key Device on a Single Computer

If you are normally going to use ETABS on a single computer, it
Note: is simplest to attach the hardware key device directly to that
The NSRVGX computer.
program does
not need to be Attach the key device to any parallel printer port on your work-
run if you are station. The key device should be directly attached to the com-
using the hard- puter port. Any printers, data switches, or other devices that use
ware key device the port may then be attached to the other end of the key device.
on a single The hardware key device does not require a printer to be con-
computer only. nected or, if connected, for it to be powered.
However, the
Sentinel driver You may connect an extension cable between the computer port
should be in-
and the hardware key device, and/or between the key device and
stalled on that
computer.
any printer or other devices. Use a straight-through DB-25 male
to DB-25 female cable.
Using the Hardware Key Device 2 - 11

Hardware key devices for different programs can usually be at-

tached to the same parallel port. Contact CSI technical support, if
2 you are using multiple key devices and are experiencing con-
flicts. See the section titled “Phone, Fax and E-Mail Technical
Support” in Chapter 3 for information on contacting CSI.
Using the Hardware Key Device on a Local Area Network

If you are going to use ETABS on multiple workstations, it may
be more convenient to attach the hardware key device to one
workstation and access it from other workstations across a local
area network.
The hardware key device works with the IPX/SPX and/or the
NETBEUI/NETBIOS network protocol. You need to have one
of these protocols installed for the hardware device to work re-
liably over a network. The hardware device does not work with
the TCP/IP protocol; the device does work if TCP/IP is installed
concurrently with another network protocol. For Windows 95 it
is very important that these protocols be set up exactly the same
on all machines on the network. Many people have had success
setting IPX/SPX as the default protocol for Windows 95 com-
puters, and then enabling NetBIOS over IPX/SPX.
The workstation to which the hardware key device is attached is

called the key server. The key device is attached to the key
server as described above for a local workstation. The key server
must be running Windows, and running the key-server program
NSRVGX as described below. Also, the Sentinel driver must be
installed on the key server as described in the section titled “In-
stalling the Sentinel Driver.”
The standard, single-user key will allow different workstations to

access ETABS at different times. Multiple-user keys are avail-
able that will allow simultaneous use of ETABS by more than
one workstation. Several key devices can exist on the same net-
work by using multiple key servers. Each key server may con-
nect to one or more key devices on one or more ports. Concur-
rent usage of ETABS is allowed from different workstations up
to the sum of the license limits of all key devices on all key serv-
ers.
2 - 12 Using the Hardware Key Device

The NSRVGX Program

Each key server must be running NSRVGX in order for the key
device to be accessible across the network. Without NSRVGX, 2
the key device is available locally only to the key-server work-
station itself.
The key device should be attached to the parallel port before

starting NSRVGX. Use the Start menu or Windows Explorer to
start NSRVGX.EXE, which is located in the ETABS folder. Af-
ter a few seconds of initialization, NSRVGX will run minimized
as an icon. You may open the NSRVGX window to see how
many other workstations are currently accessing the hardware
key devices attached to the key server. You may minimize the
window, but do not stop NSRVGX or shut down the key-server
workstation while other workstations are accessing the attached
key device.
Note that it may take a few moments for ETABS to access a

hardware key device across a network, particularly if the net-
work is busy or if the key server is performing other tasks. Fi-
nally, please read the important note in the box at the bottom of
this page regarding NSRVGX.
Important Note Regarding NSRVGX
The present version of NSRVGX is unable to run if it is located under a folder (di-
rectory) whose name contains a space character. By default, ETABS is installed in an
ETABS subfolder under the folder “Program Files”. Since this folder name contains a
space character, NSRVGX will not run.
To remedy this situation, copy NSRVGX.EXE to another folder so that there are no
space characters anywhere on the path, and run it from that folder. This problem
should be fixed in a subsequent release of ETABS.
Using the Hardware Key Device 2 - 13

2 Troubleshooting ETABS Installation Problems

If you have trouble with your ETABS installation please check
the following:
Tip: • Verify that you have installed the latest service pack
available for your particular Windows operating system.
If all else fails
The service packs are available on Microsoft’s web site.
contact CSI
technical sup-
port as de-
• Restart your computer, make sure all applications are
scribed in closed, and try installing the ETABS again.
Chapter 3.
• If you are performing a network server installation verify
with your network administrator that you have sufficient
rights to copy files to the network server.
If the ETABS installation problem persists then contact CSI

technical support. See the section titled “Phone, Fax and E-Mail
Technical Support” in Chapter 3 for information on contacting
CSI.
Upgrading from ETABS 6

Most modeling and analysis features available in ETABS 6 are
also present in ETABS 7, and many new features have been
added.
ETABS 6 input data files can be imported directly into the

ETABS version 7 graphical user interface. Note that only the
Version 6 analysis input file can be imported. The Version 6
Steeler, Conker and Waller input files cannot be imported. The
imported analysis models can be displayed, modified, analyzed
and designed. Input data files for ETABS versions earlier than
Tip:
ETABS 6 need to be first converted to ETABS 6 files before
If you convert they can be imported into ETABS 7.
ETABS 6 files
to ETABS 7, WARNING! Some imported data may be interpreted differently
then check the by ETABS 7 than by ETABS 6. Be sure to check your imported
conversion model carefully! Compare the results of analyses using both
carefully. ETABS 6 and ETABS 7 before making further use of the im-
ported ETABS 6 model!
2 - 14 Troubleshooting ETABS Installation Problems

3
Chapter 3
Getting Help
There are multiple options available for obtaining help for the
ETABS program. These options include the User’s Manuals and
Reference book provided with ETABS, on-line help that is in-
cluded as a menu option in the program; technical notes that are
provided on our web site; phone, fax and e-mail technical sup-
port; “hands on” training which is provided at our office in Ber-
keley, California; and occasional seminars held throughout the
country and the world. Each of these options is described in de-
tail in this chapter.
User Manuals Provided With ETABS

The ETABS users manuals are provided with your ETABS pro-
gram. The main intent of these manuals is to provide you with
detailed reference material regarding the use of ETABS that you
can refer to as you use the program on an as-needed basis. The
users manuals are not, in general, intended to be read from cover
to cover in a single sitting.
3-1
Reference Book Provided With ETABS

The reference book titled “Three Dimensional Static and Dy-
3 namic Analysis of Structures”, by Edward L. Wilson is provided
with your ETABS package. The major purpose of Professor Wil-
Note: son’s book is to present the theoretical background required so
Add Professor that users of structural analysis computer programs such as
Wilson’s book ETABS can understand the basic assumptions and approxima-
to your refer- tions used in the program and thus can adequately verify the re-
ence library. sults of the analyses.
This book provides a detailed overview of the theoretical basis

for the analysis capabilities that are included in ETABS. It is cur-
rently used as a textbook in various universities.
On-Line Help
The ETABS program includes extensive on-line help. This help
can be accessed any time the graphical user interface is open by
either clicking on the Help menu and selecting Search For Help
Shortcut: On…, or by pressing the F1 function key on the keyboard. If you
From within the
press the F1 key while a dialog box is open you will bring up
graphical user context-sensitive help related to that dialog box.
interface press
the F1 function The data included in the on-line help is mainly focused on as-
key on the key- sisting you with the nuts and bolts of using the graphic interface.
board at any It is mainly intended to help you enter data into dialog boxes and
time to activate to inform you what the data you enter into dialog boxes means.
the ETABS on- For example, if you want to find out how to assign gravity load
line help. to a beam in the graphic interface you can find the answer in the
on-line help. If you want to find out what a scale factor used in a
response spectrum load case actually scales, you can find it in
the on-line help. The on-line help does not in general address
other items such as tips and tricks for creating models, the theo-
retical basis for the analysis engine in ETABS, the formulas and
algorithms used in the design modules, in-depth descriptions of
each element in ETABS, etc.
3-2 Reference Book Provided With ETABS

Chapter 3 - Getting Help
Technical Notes on Our Web Site

We expect to provide a series of technical notes for ETABS on
our web site at www.csiberkeley.com. These notes are in *.pdf 3
format and they can be downloaded and then viewed and/or
printed using the Adobe Acrobat Reader. These notes are in-
tended to be a supplement to the User’s Manuals and are pro-
vided for the following purposes:
• Provide errata for the User’s Manuals if needed.
• Provide documentation for new features that are added

to the program.
Tip: • Provide additional information for selected topics in the

User’s Manuals on an as-needed basis. An example of
Check our web
site on a regu-
this might be an in-depth explanation and example of the
lar basis to see different geometric nonlinearity effects available for a
if new or up- static nonlinear analysis (pushover).
dated ETABS
technical notes • Provide information on how some of the algorithms in-
have been ternal to the program work on an as-needed basis. An
added. example of this might be a technical note describing ex-
actly how ETABS calculates the unbraced length of a
column.
• Provide additional theoretical information expanding on

some topic discussed in Professor Wilson’s book.
Check our web site on a regular basis to see if new or updated

ETABS technical notes have been added.
Phone, Fax and E-Mail Technical Support

Free technical support is available from CSI via phone, fax or e-
mail for 90 days after the software is purchased. Technical sup-
port is available after 90 days if you have a current maintenance
agreement with CSI. Maintenance agreements also provide for
free or reduced cost upgrades to the program. Please call CSI to
inquire about a maintenance agreement.
Technical Notes on Our Web Site 3-3

Technical support is provided only according to the terms of the

Software License Agreement that comes with the program.
3 If you are experiencing problems with the software, please:
• Consult the documentation and other printed information

included with your product.
• Check the ETABS help file. See Chapter 19.
If you can not find a solution then contact us as described below.
Phone Support
Standard phone support is available in the United States, from
CSI support engineers, via a toll call between 8:30 A.M. and
5:00 P.M., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding
holidays.
Note: You can contact CSI’s office via phone at (510) 845-2177. When
you call, please, if possible, be at your computer and have your
Our phone
program manuals at hand.
number is (510)
845-2177 Note that sometimes when you call us with a technical support
question we will request that you e-mail us your input file ad-
dressed to [email protected] so that we can better under-
stand and determine the cause of your problem.
Fax Support
You can fax CSI twenty-four hours a day at (510) 845-4096.
Structural engineers are available to review and respond to your
fax between 8:30 A.M. and 5:00 P.M., Pacific Time Monday
Note: through Friday, excluding holidays.
Our fax number
When you send a fax with questions about your model please in-
is (510) 845-
4096
clude a picture of your model if possible. This will often times
be a considerable help to us in understanding your question.
3-4 Phone, Fax and E-Mail Technical Support

When you send a fax please be certain that you have provided us
with your fax number so that we have somewhere to send our re-
sponse. If your fax number is in your company letterhead in a
relatively small font it is helpful if you repeat the fax number in
the body of your fax because often the small fax numbers in
3
company letterheads are difficult to read or completely indeci-
pherable when we receive the fax.
Note that it is general more efficient for you to email your entire
model (*.edb and/or *.$et and/or *.e2k input file) than to fax us
pictures or descriptions of it.
E-Mail Support
You can e-mail CSI for technical support twenty-four hours a
day at [email protected]. Structural engineers are avail-
able to review and respond to your e-mail between 8:30 A.M.
and 4:30 P.M., Pacific Time, Monday through Friday, excluding
holidays.
Note: If your question is about a specific model it is always helpful and

sometimes necessary for you to include your model (*.edb
Our e-mail ad-
and/or *.$et and/or *.e2k input file) as an attachment to your e-
dress for tech-
nical support is
mail. When you send us a model as part of a technical support
support@ question we will not reveal that model to anyone outside the
csiberkeley.com company or use it in any advertising without first requesting and
obtaining your permission in writing. Note that many of the
models used in our advertising are actual models created by our
customers.
Help Us to Provide You Technical Support

CSI takes pride in providing timely and effective technical sup-
port. If you send us a one word e-mail that says “Help”, we will
most certainly respond, perhaps with an equally wordy response
such as “How?”, but more likely with a response that asks you to
provide us with some or all of the information listed in the
bulleted items below. We recognize that much of the time engi-
neers requesting help are under tight deadline pressure and thus
would like to receive answers to their questions as quickly as
possible. In light of that, whenever you contact us with a techni-
cal support question, if you provide us with all or even some of
Phone, Fax and E-Mail Technical Support 3-5

the following information, as appropriate to your circumstances,

we will be able to serve you better and faster.
3 • The name and the version number of the program you

are using. See the section titled “About ETABS” in
Chapter 19 for more information on this.
Shortcut: • If you are faxing us a description of your model then in-

For a shortcut
clude a picture of the model, if possible. E-mailing the
to faster and entire model (*.edb and/or *.$et and/or *.e2k input file)
more effective is generally more efficient than faxing a description of it.
service when
requesting • A description of what problem occurred and what you
technical sup- were doing when the problem occurred.
port, please
provide us with • The exact wording of any error messages that appeared
as much of the on your screen.
information
listed in adja- • Your computer configuration (make and model, proces-
cent bulleted sor, operating system, hard disk size and RAM size).
items as possi-
ble. • Your name, your company’s name and how we may
contact you (e.g. your phone number or e-mail address).
“Hands On” Training

CSI holds “hands on” training sessions for ETABS at our train-
ing facility in our office in Berkeley, California on a regular ba-
sis. The sessions focus on in-depth, hands-on training and covers
modeling of simple as well as complicated structures using
ETABS. These one-day sessions are geared toward training you
Note: in the use of the graphical user interface.
Many engineers Two full-time instructors are provided for these classes. To guar-
are extremely antee individual attention the class size is limited to six (6) at-
pleased with tendees, each provided with an individual computer. Class mem-
the one-on-one
bers are encouraged to bring their own projects to the training
attention they
receive in these sessions, but familiarity with the program is not a pre-requisite.
training ses-
sions.
In a typical training session the first quarter of the day the in-
structors provide an overview of the ETABS graphic interface
and do some live demonstrations creating models, analyzing
them and reviewing the results. For the remainder of the day the
3-6 “Hands On” Training

student works on the computer either with training problem

models developed by CSI or with their own projects which they
have brought in. The two instructors are available at all times to
answer questions and to provide helpful tips and comments. 3
If you are interested in attending a “hands on” training session at
CSI, or if you would like more information please call us at
(510) 845-2177 or e-mail us at [email protected].
Seminars
CSI occasionally holds technical seminars throughout the coun-
try and sometimes the world. Often these seminars are jointly
sponsored by CSI and a technical engineering association. Top-
ics of recent seminars have included Dynamic Analysis, Nonlin-
ear Dynamic Analysis, and Nonlinear Static Pushover Analysis.
Generally these seminars are one-day events. Often they are
scheduled to occur in conjunction with a technical convention. A
schedule for these seminars is posted on our web site at
www.csiberkeley.com.
Seminars 3-7
4
Chapter 4
The ETABS Graphical User Interface

This chapter provides a brief overview of the ETABS graphical
user interface.
Features of the Graphical User Interface

The ETABS graphical user interface is shown in Figure 4-1. In
the figure several important features of the interface are labeled.
These features include the main window, main title bar, display
title bar, menu bar, main toolbar, side toolbar, display windows,
status bar, mouse pointer position coordinates and the current
units. Each of these items is discussed below.
Main Window
The main window contains the entire graphical user interface.
This window may be moved, resized, maximized, minimized, or
closed using standard Windows operations. You can refer to
your Windows help, available on the Start menu, for additional
information on these items.
4-1
Main Title Bar Display Title Bar Menu Bar Main (Top)
4 Toolbar
Side Toolbar Window Separator Display Title Bar
Active Display Window Inactive Display Window
Coordinate System used Current Units

for Mouse Coordinates
Plan View Drawing and
Assignment Options,
(similar stories feature)
Status Mouse Pointer Position
Bar Coordinates
Main Title Bar

(Above) The main title bar, located at the top of the main window, in-
Figure 4-1: cludes the program name and the model name. When ETABS is
The ETABS graphi- the active program the main title bar is highlighted. You can
cal user interface move the main window by left clicking in the main title bar and
holding down the mouse button as you drag the window around
your screen.
Menu Bar
The menu bar contains all of the menus for ETABS. The menus
Tip: contain all of the operations that you can perform with ETABS.
The menu items To access a menu simply left click on it. This will cause the
can be accessed menu to drop down giving you access to various commands on
using shortcut the menu.
keystrokes.
You will notice that some of the commands on the menus have
three dots after them like this, ..., and others have a filled trian-
gular section adjacent to them on the right hand margin of the
menu, like this, . The three dots after a menu item indicates that
a dialog box will appear when you click on the menu item. The
triangle indicates that a submenu will appear when you click on
4-2 Features of the Graphical User Interface

Chapter 4 - The ETABS Graphical User Interface
the menu item. The commands with neither of these items after
them execute as soon as you click them. There are no submenus
or dialog boxes for these commands.
Main (Top) Toolbar

4
The main (or top) toolbar provides quick access to some com-
monly used commands, particularly file, viewing and analysis
output display options. You execute a main toolbar operation by
left clicking on a main toolbar button. If you hold your mouse
pointer over a main toolbar button for a few seconds without
clicking or holding down any mouse buttons then a short de-
scription of the toolbar button function will pop up in a small
text box. All of the operations available on the main toolbar can
also be accessed from the menu bar. The main toolbar is not user
customizable.
Side Toolbar
The side toolbar provides quick access to some commonly used
drawing options. You execute a side toolbar operation by left
Tip: clicking on a side toolbar button. If you hold your mouse pointer
Hold your over a side toolbar button for a few seconds without clicking or
mouse pointer holding down any mouse buttons then a short description of the
over a toolbar toolbar button function will pop up in a small text box. All of the
button for a few operations available on the side toolbar can also be accessed
seconds and a from the menu bar. The side toolbar is not user customizable.
pop up box
describing the When you click the drawing buttons on the side toolbar that have
button’s func- a small triangle in the bottom right-hand corner of the button,
tion will ap- like this, , you will see additional toolbar buttons fly out from
pear. the original toolbar button. In these cases the additional fly out
buttons are the ones that actually perform an ETABS operation.
The function of the original button is to display the fly out but-
tons. You simply left click on one of the fly out buttons to per-
form an operation. Figure 4-2 shows an example of some fly out
buttons.

Fly Out Toolbar Buttons
Display Windows
(Above) Display windows show the geometry of the model and may also
Figure 4-2: include display of properties, loading and analysis or design re-
Example of ETABS sults. You may have from one to four display windows present at
fly out toolbar but- any time.
tons Each display window may have its own view orientation, type of
display, and display options. For example, the undeformed shape
could be displayed in one window, applied loads in another, an
animated deformed shape in a third, and design stress ratios in
Shortcut: the fourth window. Alternatively, you could have four different
views of the undeformed shape or other type of display. These
You can close a
four different views might be a plan view, two elevations and a
display window
by clicking the three-dimensional perspective view.
“X” in the up-
per right hand
Only one display window is active at a time. Viewing and dis-
corner of the playing actions only affect the active window. You may make
display win- any display window active by clicking on its display title bar or
dow. clicking anywhere within the window. You can always tell
which display window is active because its title bar will be high-
lighted.

After performing certain operations the display window may

need to be redrawn. Normally this is done automatically, but on
some occasions you may have to manually refresh the display
window. This sometimes occurs after you delete some elements.
You can use the View menu > Refresh Window command, or
the Refresh Window button, , on the main toolbar to redraw
4
the window.
You can close a display window by left clicking the “X” button
at the top of the window to the right of the display title bar. You
must always have at least one display window open.
Display Title Bar

The display title bar is located at the top of the display window.
The display title bar is highlighted when the associated display
window is active. The text in the display title bar typically in-
cludes the type and location of the view in the associated display
window. If you are displaying results on the model then the title
bar typically also tells you what results are currently displayed.
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the main ETABS win-
dow. Text describing the current status of the program is dis-
Tip: played on the left side of the status bar. Most of the time this text
provides information about the type and location of the view in
Keep an eye on
the active display window. When you are displaying results on
the status bar
for useful in-
the screen the text may tell you what you can do. For example,
formation and when the deformed shape is displayed, this text prompts you to
messages. "Right click on any point for displacement values."
The right side of the status bar includes the mouse pointer posi-
tion coordinates and the associated coordinate system, a drop-
down box with options for plan view drawing and assignment
similarity (only available when you are in plan view), and a
drop-down box for setting the current units.

When you are displaying deformed shapes, including mode

shapes, animation controls are also available on the right hand
side of the status bar. When displaying element forces for a par-
ticular load case, arrow buttons are available on the right hand
4 side of the status bar that allow you to step the display forward
and backward through the available load case.
Mouse Pointer Position Coordinates

The mouse pointer position coordinates are displayed on the
right hand side of the status bar. The coordinates displayed here
are always in the coordinate system specified in the drop-down
box on the right-hand side of the status bar just to the left of the
current units drop-down box. Note that you can use the Edit
menu > Edit Grid Data command to define alternate coordinate
systems.
A window does not need to be active for the mouse pointer posi-
tion coordinates to be displayed. It is only necessary that the
mouse pointer be over the window.
In a two-dimensional plan or elevation view the mouse pointer

position coordinates are always displayed. In a three-dimensional
view the mouse pointer position coordinates are only displayed
when the mouse pointer snaps to a point or a grid line intersec-
tion.
Plan View Drawing and Assignment Similarity

When drawing or making assignments while working in a plan
view the Plan View Drawing and Assignment Options drop-
down box on the right side of the status bar controls what hap-
pens.
There are three options in this drop-down box. They are:
• One Story: An object drawn is only applied to the story

level that you drew it on. An assignment is only made to
the actually selected elements.

• All Stories: An object drawn in the plan view is applied

to all story levels in the model at the same plan location.
An assignment is made to the actually selected elements
and to all other elements in the same plan location at all
other story levels. 4
• Similar Stories: An object drawn in the plan view is ap-
plied to all similar story levels in the model at the same
plan location. An assignment is made to the actually se-
lected elements and to all other elements in the same
plan location at all similar story levels.
Similar stories are specified in the Story Data dialog box

which can be accessed by clicking Edit menu > Edit
Story Data > Edit command.
The three options only apply at the time the object is drawn or
the assignment is made. These options do not apply retroac-
tively. For example if you draw an element at one story level,
and then after you have drawn the element change the Plan View
Drawing and Assignment option to "All Stories", the program
does not retroactively change something you have previously
drawn or assigned.
Current Units
The current units are displayed in a drop-down box located on
the far right hand side of the status bar. You can change the cur-
rent units on the fly at any time by simply clicking the drop-
down box and selecting a new set of units. You can also change
the current units using drop-down boxes that are located inside
some of the ETABS dialog boxes. See the section titled “Units”
in Chapter 20 for more information.

Aerial View
4
The ETABS Aerial View

The ETABS aerial view is a small window that can float over the
(Above) main ETABS window. If the main window is not fully maxi-
Figure 4-3: mized, the aerial view can float outside the main window. An
Example of the example of the aerial view is shown in Figure 4-3. You can
ETABS aerial view switch the aerial view on or off using the Options menu > Show
Aerial View command as a toggle switch.
Tip:
The aerial view displays a full view of the active display win-
If the aerial dow’s drawing in a separate window so that you can quickly
view window is zoom into any area of your model without having to restore the
not needed
simply click the
full view first. The aerial view can also be used to help you de-
“X” in the up- termine which part of the model you are zoomed into when you
per right hand are working with large models. Each time the model is edited the
corner of the aerial view is updated.
aerial view
window to close For example, if the active window shows a plan view of story
it. You can re- level 4, and it is zoomed in to a small area of that story level, the
display it from aerial view will show the full view of story level 4. The portion
the Options of story level 4 that is shown in the active display window will
menu. be outlined by a bounding box in the aerial view.
4-8 The ETABS Aerial View

You can use the aerial view to zoom into any area in the active
display window. Simply draw a bounding box in the aerial view
window to specify the area that you want to zoom in on. To draw
the bounding box in the aerial view window put the mouse
pointer at one corner of the box that you want to draw, click the
left mouse button and hold it down while you drag the mouse to
4
the diagonally opposite corner of the box that you want to draw,
and release the mouse button. As you are dragging the mouse
you will see the current outline of the bounding box.
You will notice that in some instances after you draw the
bounding box its shape will change. This occurs because the as-
Tip: pect ratio of the bounding box is automatically adjusted to match
You can zoom the aspect ratio of the active display window. When changing the
quickly around aspect ratio of the bounding box that you drew to match that of
a large, com- the active window ETABS always maintains the longer dimen-
plex model us- sion of the box you drew. It only changes the shorter dimension.
ing the aerial
view. If you click the right mouse button inside the bounding box in
the aerial view window and hold the button down, then you can
drag the bounding box to a new location in the aerial view win-
dow. The display in the active window will be updated accord-
ingly once you release the right mouse button.
Left clicking once in the aerial view window restores the full
view.
If you pan the view in the active display window then the
bounding box shown in the aerial view will move also. You can
pan the view in the active display menu by choosing pan from
the View menu, or clicking the Pan button on the main toolbar
and then left clicking in the display window and holding down
the mouse button while you drag the mouse.
Using the Mouse

There are seven separate mouse actions that you can use in
ETABS. They are left click, right click, hold down the Ctrl key
on the keyboard and left click, hold down the Ctrl key on the
keyboard and right click, hold down the Shift key on the key-
board and left click, double click and drag.
Using the Mouse 4-9

Left click means to press down the left button on your mouse
and release it. In general you left click to select menu items, ac-
tivate toolbar buttons, and select objects in your model. In the
ETABS documentation if we say simply to click on something
4 we always mean to left click on it.
Right click means to press down the right button on your mouse
and release it. In general you right click on objects in your model
to display their assignments.
Sometimes you may have objects located one on top of another

in your model. In this case, if you want to select a specific object
in your model you can hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard
while you left click once on these objects. This left click will
Tip: bring up a dialog box from which you can choose the object that
you want to select. If you want to see the assignments for one of
When we tell
the objects that is located one on top of another then hold down
you to click on
something we
the Ctrl key on your keyboard while you right click once on the
mean to posi- objects. This will again bring up a dialog box from which you
tion the mouse can choose the object whose assignments you want to see.
pointer over
that something Another use for holding down the Ctrl key on your keyboard
and click the while you left click occurs in dialog boxes where you are trying
left mouse but- to select multiple items from a list box at the same time. Holding
ton. down the Ctrl key and left clicking on an item adds that item to
the selection. The selected items do not need to be adjacent to
one another. This feature is only available in the list boxes
where multiple selections make sense. One example of this can
be seen after you have run an analysis by clicking Display menu
> Set Output Table Mode and then clicking the Select Loads
button.
If you are in a dialog box and want to select multiple adjacent

items from a list box you can left click on the first item and then
hold down the Shift key on the keyboard and left click on the last
item. This will select the two items that you clicked plus all of
the items in between. This feature is only available in the list
boxes where multiple selections make sense.
4 - 10 Using the Mouse

Double click means to click the left mouse button twice in suc-
cession quickly. Be careful not to move your mouse while you
are double clicking. In ETABS double clicking is used as one
method of completing some drawing operations.
Finally you can drag the mouse. You drag the mouse by clicking 4
the left mouse button, holding the button down, sliding the
mouse to another location and then releasing the mouse button.
One example where you drag the mouse is to draw a bounding
box in an aerial view window to zoom in on your model. An-
other time you drag the mouse is when you use the Draw menu
> Reshape Object command.
Starting a Model
You start the ETABS graphical user interface by selecting the
ETABS program from the Windows Start menu or by clicking an
ETABS shortcut on your desktop. Once the graphical user inter-
face is started you can start a new model by selecting File menu
> New Model. Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on the
ETABS modeling process. Refer to the section titled "Starting a
New Model" in Chapter 8 for more information on starting a new
model.
Once your model is started you may want to make use of the on-
line help that is included in ETABS. You can access this help at
any time by clicking Help menu > Search for Help On com-
mand. Alternatively, you can press the F1 key on your keyboard
at any time to access the online help. If you are in a dialog box
when you press the F1 key then you will automatically jump to
context sensitive help for that dialog box. This is a very powerful
way to get relevant help for ETABS.
Note: Once you have started your model you should save it often. You
can use the File menu > Save command or the Save button,
Refer to Chap-
ter 6 for more , on the main toolbar to do this. Saving your file often is the
information on best protection against unforeseen problems such as a power
creating a failure or a computer crash. There is no AutoSave feature in
model. ETABS so it is up to you to save your file on a regular basis.
You may also want to occasionally copy backup copies of your
input file to another location for safekeeping. When you have
spent a significant amount of time creating your model it is al-
Starting a Model 4 - 11
ways better to err on the safe side when creating backup copies.
The files you might want to copy elsewhere are the *.edb file,
which is your input file in a binary format (edb is short for
ETABS database) and the *.$et or *.e2k file which is a text
4 backup file of your input data.
The Two Modes of ETABS

There are two distinct modes in ETABS. They are called draw
mode and select mode. The draw mode allows you to draw ob-
jects. The select mode allows you to select objects and is used
for such things as editing operations, making assignments to ob-
jects and viewing or printing results.
By default you are in select mode. You automatically enter draw

mode when you select one of the submenu options of the fol-
lowing commands from the Draw menu or click on the corre-
sponding button on the side toolbar:
• Draw Point Objects
• Draw Line Objects
• Draw Area Objects
• Draw Special Items
You remain in draw mode until you do one of the following to

Note:
return you to select mode:
When you edit
your mouse • Click the Pointer button located at the top of the side
properties in toolbar.
the Windows
Control Panel • Press the Esc key on the keyboard.
the change ap-
plies to all of • Select a command from either the Select menu or the
Windows, not Display menu.
just ETABS.
4 - 12 The Two Modes of ETABS

You can always tell which mode you are in by looking at

your mouse pointer. In select mode the mouse pointer is the
Normal Select pointer as defined by your mouse pointer proper-
ties. If you are using the default settings for your mouse proper-
ties then in select mode the mouse pointer will probably look
like this, .
4
In draw mode the mouse pointer is the Alternate Select pointer
as defined by your mouse pointer properties. If you are using the
default settings for your mouse properties then in draw mode the
mouse pointer will probably look like this, .
Note that if you are in draw mode and you run your mouse
pointer over the toolbar buttons or the menus the pointer tempo-
rarily changes back to the selection pointer. If you do not click
on one of the menus or toolbar buttons then when you move the
mouse pointer back into the display window it reverts to the
draw mode pointer again.
Typically you can set the properties for your mouse by clicking
on the Windows Start menu, then Settings, then Control panel
and finally clicking on Mouse to bring up your Mouse properties
dialog box.
Other mouse properties used at various special times in the pro-

gram include Help Select, Busy, Text Select, Vertical Resize,
Horizontal Resize, and Move. The appearance of each of these
mouse pointers will also change depending on the mouse pointer
properties you specify.
Locking and Unlocking a Model

ETABS has a feature that allows you to lock or unlock your
Shortcut: model. The toggle switch for this is available on the Options
menu and also on the main toolbar. When a model is locked no
Use the
changes can be made to it. You may at times want to lock your
Lock/Unlock
model to prevent further changes from being made to it. You can
button on the
main toolbar to unlock your model at any time to make changes to it.
quickly lock or
unlock your After an analysis is performed, ETABS automatically locks the
model. model to prevent any changes that would invalidate the analysis
results and subsequent design results that may be obtained. Typi-
Locking and Unlocking a Model 4 - 13

cally if you want to make changes to your model after you have
run an analysis then you must first unlock the model. When you
do this you are warned that the analysis results will be deleted. If
you do not want the analysis results to be deleted then you
4 should save your model under a different name before unlocking
it. Any subsequent changes will then be made to the new model.
Undo Features in ETABS

ETABS has a Undo feature for changes to model drawing (ge-
Shortcut: ometry changes) that works for multiple steps back to the last
time you saved your model. For example if you draw one or
Use the more objects and then decide you didn’t want them after all you
Undo button on
can use the Edit menu > Undo command to get rid of them. If
the main tool-
bar to undo a you then decide you really did want them there is an Edit menu
previous op- > Redo command that will bring them back. The Undo and Redo
eration. commands work sequentially. In other words, if you have just
finished the sixteenth operation since your last save you can use
the Undo feature to undo the sixteenth then fifteenth and so on
operation. You could not however decide that you just wanted to
undo the seventh operation.
The Undo and Redo features do not work for changes made in
dialog boxes. When an item is changed in a dialog box, the
change is not actually implemented until the OK button is
clicked. If the Cancel button is clicked the change is not made
and all values in the dialog box automatically go back to their
original values. If you are working in a sub-dialog box, that is, a
dialog box that is called from another dialog box, the changes are
not actually implemented until the OK button is clicked in the
topmost dialog box, that is, until the last dialog box is closed by
clicking the OK button.
Shortcut: Suppose for example that you are in a series of sub-dialog boxes
that go five levels deep. In order to have the changes made at the
Use the fifth level be accepted and implemented you must click the OK
Redo button on button at the fifth, fourth, third, second and topmost level.
the main tool- Clicking the Cancel button at any one of these levels would can-
bar to redo a cel any of the changes made at that level and at any lower levels.
previously un- Thus if you click the Cancel button in the topmost level of dia-
done operation.
log boxes no changes will be made at any level.
4 - 14 Undo Features in ETABS

Tips for Using the Graphical User Interface

Following are tips for using the ETABS graphical user interface:
• When you first start the ETABS graphical interface the

Startup Tips appear. You do not have to click the OK
4
button associated with the tip or click the "X" button in
the upper right hand corner of the tip window to con-
tinue. Simply left clicking anywhere in the entire
ETABS window closes the Tip of the Day window. For
example, as soon as you start the ETABS graphical in-
terface you can immediately click on the file menu and
the Startup Tips window closes and the File menu ap-
pears.
• You can work in the ETABS graphical user interface

most efficiently if you have at least a 17” monitor with
at least 1024x768 resolution.
• In ETABS you can work in from one to four windows.

Usually one window or two windows tiled vertically
works best. You can set the number of windows using
the Options menu > Windows command.
• The graphical user interface display colors can be cus-

tomized to suit your individual preferences using the
Options menu > Colors command.
• The maximum and minimum graphic font sizes used in

the display windows in the ETABS graphical user inter-
face can be modified using the Options menu > Prefer-
ences > Dimensions/Tolerances command.
• The menus in the interface are intended to be organized

logically so that you can easily locate any menu item.
What you need to think is, “What do I want to do?”
When creating or modifying a model you typically either
edit the model, change the view of the model, define
properties or load cases, draw something new in the
model, assign something to the model such as properties
or loads. Thus you can come up with a one word answer
to your what to do question which is either edit, view,
Tips for Using the Graphical User Interface 4 - 15

define, draw, or assign. Once you have this one word an-
swer you know which menu to go to.
• Right clicking on an object brings up a dialog box with

4 information about location, geometry and assignments
for that object. This information is for viewing only.
You can not edit the information in this dialog box.
• Save your model often.
• ETABS has an Undo feature that works for multiple

steps back to the last time you saved your model.
• Do not overlook the extensive online help for ETABS

that is available at the press of the F1 key on your key-
board. If you are in a dialog box when you press the F1
key you will bring up context sensitive help related to
that dialog box.
• Keep an eye on the text displayed on the left-hand side

of the status bar at the bottom of the ETABS main win-
dow. Useful information about your model is displayed
here.
• Try a few practice problems to get the hang of the

ETABS graphical user interface.
• If necessary, consider attending a CSI “hands on” train-

ing session for ETABS at our offices in Berkeley, Cali-
fornia. See the section titled “Hands on Training” in
Chapter 3 for more information.
• If you have used an earlier version of ETABS you may

want to import a familiar file to see how it looks in
ETABS version 7.
4 - 16 Tips for Using the Graphical User Interface

5
Chapter 5
Overview of an ETABS Model

An ETABS model is different from models produced in many
other structural analysis programs for two main reasons:
Note: • ETABS is optimized for modeling building systems.

Modeling procedures and design capabilities are all tai-
There are three
types of objects
lored toward buildings.
in ETABS. They
are area, line
• An ETABS model is object-based. It consists of area,
and point ob- line and point objects. You make assignments to these
jects. objects to define structural elements such as beams, col-
umns, braces, floors, walls, ramps and springs. You also
make assignments to these same objects to define loads.
When you run an analysis ETABS automatically converts your

object-based model into an element-based model that is used for
analysis. We refer to this element-based model as the analysis
model. The analysis model consists of joints, frame elements,
link elements and shell elements in contrast to the point, line and
area objects in the object-based ETABS model that you create.
The conversion to the analysis model is internal to the program
and essentially transparent (not visible) to the user.
5-1
After the analysis is run, the results are reported with respect to
the object-based model, not the analysis model. See the section
titled “The ETABS Analysis Model” later in this chapter for ad-
ditional information on the analysis model.
5 The Concept of Objects

In its simplest form developing a model in ETABS requires three
Tip: basic steps. They are:
Understanding • Draw a series of area, line and point objects that repre-
area, line and sent your building. You can use the drawing tools lo-
point objects is cated on the Draw menu to do this. See Chapter 12 for
probably the
documentation of the Draw menu commands.
most important
key to success-
Note that you could also create these objects directly
ful modeling in
ETABS.
from one of the built-in ETABS templates. See the sub-
section titled “Adding Structural Objects from a Tem-
plate” in Chapter 8, and the section titled “Add to Model
A Note about Objects
The concept of objects in a structural model may be new to you. It is extremely im-
portant that you grasp this concept because it is the basis for creating a model in
ETABS. It is not a difficult concept, but because it is new, it may take some time for
it to fully sink in and thus for you to become comfortable with it. Once you under-
stand the concept, and have worked with it for a little while, you should recognize the
simplicity of the object-based modeling, the ease with which you can create models
using objects, and the power of the concept for creating more complex models.
To become comfortable and familiar with objects it may be helpful for you to read
Chapters 23, 24 and 25 of this manual. These chapters discuss area, line and point
objects, respectively, in detail. In addition, it may be helpful to work through the
ETABS tutorial.
If after all of the above you have any trouble with the concept of objects, and have
specific questions, please contact CSI Technical Support as described in Chapter 3.
You may also want to consider attending one of the “hands on” training classes for
ETABS that CSI offers at its office in Berkeley, California, also described in Chapter
3.
5-2 The Concept of Objects

Chapter 5 - Overview of an ETABS Model
From Template” in Chapter 9 for more information.
• Assign structural properties and loads to these objects.

You can use the assign options located on the Assign
menu to do this. See Chapter 14 for documentation of
the Assign menu commands.
5
Note that you can also assign structural properties to
objects as you draw them using the floating Properties of
Object box that appears when you select a drawing
command. This feature is documented in Chapter 12.
• Manually mesh the area objects if they are not horizontal

membrane slab or deck sections that you are letting
ETABS fully automatically mesh into the analysis
model. See Chapter 30 for discussion of automatic
Tip:
meshing and Chapter 31 for discussion of manual
If you left click meshing.
any object then
the object is An understanding of these three steps is all you need to create a
selected. If you model in ETABS.
right click any
object while It is extremely important that you become familiar with the
you are in an ETABS objects. They are the basic building blocks for your
undeformed
model. If you are new to ETABS you should start by studying
shape view then
information
the area, line and point objects.
including its
Any single area, line or point object can have multiple assign-
exact dimen-
sions, location, ments made to it at the same time. We recommend that you
and assign- minimize the number of objects in your model by making multi-
ments is dis- ple assignments whenever possible.
played in a
pop-up dialog For example, suppose you have a beam with three point loads
box. applied to it. You would draw a line object to represent the beam
and assign it a frame section (beam) property. You could, al-
though we do not recommend it, draw three point objects located
on the beam and assign point loads to those point objects to cre-
ate the point loads on the beam. Alternatively, you could apply
the point loads directly to the line object using the Assign menu
> Frame/Line Loads> Point command, thereby eliminating the
need for the three point objects. We strongly recommend that
you assign the point loads directly to the line object.
The Concept of Objects 5-3

Understanding area, line and point objects is probably the most

important key to successful modeling in ETABS. Following is a
list of chapters in this manual that discuss the ETABS objects in
detail. The titles for each chapter are self-explanatory.
•
5 Chapter 23: Area Objects
• Chapter 24: Line Objects
• Chapter 25: Point Objects
The ETABS Analysis Model

In general, it is not necessary that you concern yourself with the
particulars of the ETABS analysis model. Nevertheless, it may
be helpful for you to know that when you run an analysis,
ETABS uses the data in your object-based model to create an
Tip: element-based analysis model (hereafter called the analysis
model). All of this happens internally in the program and is es-
If you are a sentially transparent (not visible) to you as the user.
SAP2000 user,
you can export The reason for converting from the object-based model to the
your object-
analysis model is to create a finite element representation of your
based ETABS
model to model that can be analyzed using standard finite element analy-
SAP2000 .s2k sis techniques.
file. The
SAP2000 model ETABS transforms your object-based model that is based on
is the same as area, line and point objects into an analysis model that is based
the element- on joints, frame elements and shell elements. In the process of
based analysis doing this it internally meshes (divides) some frame elements, as
model. This is a necessary, to provide connectivity to other frame and shell ele-
good way for ments in the analysis model. This is described in the section ti-
you to see an tled “Automatic Meshing of Line Objects” in Chapter 30.
ETABS analysis
model Also, if your model includes horizontal area objects that are as-
signed deck or slab properties with membrane behavior only,
then ETABS can automatically mesh the floor into the analysis
model. You do not need to mesh these types of floors in your
object-based model. See the section titled “Automatic Meshing
of Area Objects” in Chapter 30 for more information.
5-4 The ETABS Analysis Model

Chapter 5 - Overview of an ETABS Model
All other types of floors, and all ramps and walls must be ade-
quately meshed in your object-based model because ETABS
does not automatically mesh these into the analysis model. See
Chapter 31 for discussion of manual meshing techniques that are
available in ETABS.
Link elements are never meshed in the analysis model. They al- 5
ways maintain a one-to-one correspondence with the object-
based model.
Structural properties are transferred directly from the structural

objects to the corresponding elements in the analysis model.
Spring stiffnesses for area and line support springs are trans-
ferred to spring elements at the analysis joints in a consistent
manner based on tributary area.
Loads are transformed from the area, line and point objects in the
object-based model onto the frame elements and joints of the
analysis model. The process for this is described in Chapter 32.
We recommend that if you want to read this chapter you first
read Chapter 30 because it contains important background in-
formation (particularly the information about imaginary beams)
that will help you understand Chapter 32.
After the analysis is run, the results are typically reported with
respect to the objects in the object-based model, not the elements
in the analysis model.
The ETABS Analysis Model 5-5

6
Chapter 6
ETABS Modeling Tips

This chapters outlines a basic modeling process for creating your
ETABS models and then provides you with a list of modeling
tips.
Modeling Process
This section lays out a general process that you can follow to
create a model in ETABS. It is not necessary, or expected, that
you exactly follow the process here. The intent of this section is
to help keep you headed in the right direction as you create your
model and run the analysis.
Following is a process you might use to create a typical ETABS

model:
1. Set the current units to those that you will want to use most
often in your model. See Chapter 20 for more information.
6-1
2. Start your model by clicking the File menu > New Model
command and choose one of the file initialization methods.
See the subsection titled "Initialization of a New Model" in
3. Set up your grid lines. See the subsection titled "Defining a
6
Grid System" in Chapter 8 for more information.
4. Define your story levels. See the subsection titled "Defining

Story Data" in Chapter 8 for more information.
5. If desired add structural objects from one of the built-in

ETABS templates. See the subsection titled "Adding Struc-
tural Objects from Template" in Chapter 8 for more infor-
mation. In general we recommend that you start your model
by adding objects from a template whenever possible.
Tip: 6. Use the Options menu > Preferences command to modify

any of the default preferences if desired. See the section ti-
In general we
tled "Preferences" in Chapter 18 for more information
suggest that
when starting a 7. Use the Define menu to define frame section properties,
model you add
wall, slab and deck section properties and link properties as
structural ob-
jects from a required. See Chapter 11 for more information.
template and
then edit them 8. Use the Define menu > Static Load Cases command to de-
as necessary. fine your static load cases. See the section titled "Static Load
Cases" in Chapter 11 for more information.
9. If you are using mass in your model then use the Define
menu > Mass Source command to specify the source of
mass in your model. See the section titled "Mass Source" in
10. Use the commands available on the Draw menu to draw ad-
ditional area, line and point objects as needed. See Chapter
12 for documentation of the drawing features in ETABS.
When you draw the objects we recommend that you assign

structural properties to them as you draw them using the
floating properties of object box.
6-2 Modeling Process

Chapter 6 - ETABS Modeling Tips
The objects you draw may be assigned structural properties,

loads or masses. Also the line objects might be used as
guidelines for snapping (see Chapter 12), guidelines for ex-
tending or trimming other lines (see Chapter 8), or mesh
lines for manual meshing (see Chapter 31).
6
Note that mass is required if you are doing a modal analysis
to determine mode shapes (Chapter 33). It is also required
for the non-iterative method of considering P-Delta (Chapter
33). It is also required to convert static nonlinear force-
deformation results into the capacity spectrum ADRS for-
mat.
11. Use the Edit menu commands to modify and in some cases
tweak the geometry of your model as needed. See Chapter 9
for documentation of the various Edit menu features.
Tip: 12. Use the Assign menu commands to revise properties in your
template model, if necessary, and to make additional as-
The ETABS
signments to template members as well as to any other
similar stories
feature is a
members you might have drawn. See Chapter 14 for docu-
useful and mentation of the various Assign menu features.
powerful tool
that you can The types of assignments you make include section proper-
use when ties, loads, masses, moment releases, partial fixity, etc.
drawing, se-
lecting and To make an assignment to an object you first select the ob-
making assign- ject then you click the appropriate Assign menu command.
ments to objects
in plan view. 13. Use the Display menu > Show Loads command and the
See the section Display menu > Set Input Table Mode command to review
titled "Similar your input. Both of these commands are documented in
Story Levels" in Chapter 16.
Chapter 22 for
more informa- Another way to review your input is to right click on any
tion. object. This brings up a dialog box where you can review all
assignments to the object. See Chapter 23, 24 and 25 for
documentation of this feature for area, line and point objects,
respectively.
Modeling Process 6-3

You can also use the View menu > Set Building View Op-
tions command, or the Set Building View Options button,
, on the main top toolbar to toggle on the display of
various input items. Some examples are section properties,
member end releases, nonlinear hinges, diaphragm extent,
etc.
6 14. If desired, use the File menu > Print Tables > Input com-
mand to print input data to a file or to the printer. See the
section titled "Printing from ETABS" in Chapter 8 and see
Alternatively you can use the File menu > Export > Save
Input/Output as Access Database File command to save
the input data in a database file that can be reviewed, modi-
fied and printed using Microsoft Access.
Note:
15. Use the Analyze menu > Set Analysis Options to specify
Note that various analysis parameters such as the building degrees of
ETABS can freedom. See the section titled "Analysis Options" in Chap-
automatically ter 15 for more information.
mesh floors that
have membrane 16. If your model has floors, walls or ramps that require manual
properties only. meshing then use the manual meshing options available
through the Define menu > Mesh Areas command to mesh
these objects. See Chapter 31 for discussion of the manual
meshing features.
Note that ETABS can automatically mesh floors that have

membrane properties only. All other floors and all walls and
ramps must be manually meshed by you. We recommend
that you wait until just before you are ready to run the analy-
sis to perform this manual meshing.
Tip: 17. Use the Analyze menu > Run Analysis command to run
your analysis. See the section titled "Run Analysis" in
We recommend
Chapter 15 for more information. When the analysis is com-
that you run
large analyses
plete scroll through the text in the Analysis Window to
minimized. check for any warnings or errors that might invalidate your
analysis.
6-4 Modeling Process

18. Use the display features available on the Display menu to

display analysis results on your model or on the screen in a
tabular format. See Chapter 16 for documentation of the
Display menu features.
Note that output conventions for various objects and ele-
6
ments are discussed in Chapters 34 through 39.
Tip: 19. If desired, use the File menu > Print Tables > Analysis
Output command to print output to a file or to the printer.
Design is an
iterative proc-
See the section titled "Printing from ETABS" in Chapter 8
ess. Typically and see Chapter 41 for more information.
you will rerun
your analysis Alternatively you can use the File menu > Export > Save
and design sev- Input/Output as Access Database File command to save
eral times until the analysis output data in a database file that can be re-
your last used viewed, modified and printed using Microsoft Access.
analysis section
properties 20. If desired, use the features available on the Design menu to
match the de- run your building through one or more of the ETABS design
sign sections. postprocessors.
21. After you have run a design, save your model before exiting
ETABS. Otherwise your design is not saved.
Modeling Tips
Following is a list of modeling tips that may help you as you
create your models.
1. Create a Default.edb file that contains standard preferences

for your company and then use it. See the subsection titled
"Initialization of a New Model" in Chapter 8 for more in-
formation.
Tip: 2. Save your model often. It is also useful to occasionally save
Try to keep a backup of your model under a different name.
your models
less complex 3. With the powerful graphical interface of ETABS you can
rather than easily and quickly create large, complex models. This does
more complex. not mean you should. Resist the temptation to model every-
thing in the building. Only model those elements that are an
essential part of the vertical or lateral load path.
Modeling Tips 6-5

4. You can get an overview of the options available in ETABS

by "surfing" through the various ETABS menus. Also refer
to Appendix 1 which lists the complete ETABS menu struc-
ture.
5. The Edit menu > Undo command provides ETABS with
6
powerful Undo capabilities. Thus you should feel free to ex-
periment with options in ETABS because you can always
Undo them.
6. When you use auto select lists for your elements, resist the
temptation to put every possible steel section in the auto se-
lect list. Keeping the auto select lists shorter, say 20 to 30
sections long, will significantly speed up the time it takes to
design your model.
7. When creating your model, work in plan and elevation view

as much as possible. It is much easier to work in these 2D
views than it is to work in a 3D view.
Do not overlook the developed elevation feature available in

ETABS. This provides a powerful way for you to work on
multiple faces of your building in the same 2D view. See the
section titled "Developed Elevations" in Chapter 12 for more
information.
8. When creating or editing your model in plan view consider

using the similar stories feature of ETABS. See the section
titled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22. If you use the
Tip: similar stories feature, take care to keep track of when you
have it enabled (set to Similar Stories or All Stories) or dis-
In ETABS it is abled (set to None). This helps avoid using the feature when
easy for multi- you don't mean to.
ple engineers to
work separately 9. If you are working on a large steel frame building for which
on different
you plan to use the Composite Beam Design or Steel Frame
portions of a
large model Design postprocessor to design the floors and you also plan
and then later to design the lateral system of the building, we suggest the
combine those following.
portions into a
single model. a. Create a single story model for each floor level that is
different. Optimize the design of the floors in these sin-
gle story models.
6-6 Modeling Tips

b. Use the File menu > Import > Overwrite Story from
ETABS7 .edb File command to import the single story
floor framing into a model of the complete building.
Note that the similar stories feature is available when
you do this import.
6
c. Run the lateral analysis using the full building with the
floor levels imported from single story models.
For example, suppose you have a ten-story building.

Further suppose that floor levels 3 through 10 are ex-
actly the same, and floor level 2 and the roof are unique.
For floor design you can create three single story mod-
els. One single story model is for level 2, one is for lev-
els 3 through 10 and one is for the roof.
Perform your floor design in these three models and then

import the floors into a ten-story model for the lateral
analysis. Note that you can use the similar stories feature
when importing floors 3 through 10 so that you only
have to import the single story model once.
Alternatively you can just model everything in the ten-

story building. The disadvantage to this is that when you
do your floor design you will design floors 3 through 10
separately. Thus you will design 10 different story levels
instead of 3.
10. For a large building, or if you are working on a tight time

schedule, it may be advantageous to have multiple engineers
creating different story levels of your building. These story
levels can then be combined into one building using the File
menu > Import > Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb
File command.
11. If you are working with a large multistory model, and you
want to concentrate on just one story level of that model,
then you can use the File menu > Export > Save Story as
ETABS7 .edb File command to export a story to another file
as a single story model.
Modeling Tips 6-7

12. The ETABS aerial view feature can be useful when you are
doing a lot of zooming into and out of regions of your
model. See the section titled "The ETABS Aerial View" in
13. Your structure can be supported at any level. There is no
6
need for "dummy" levels to model nonstandard support con-
ditions.
14. Parking garages with sloping floors can be easily modeled in

ETABS using ramp objects. Create your story levels as you
Note: would for any building and connect them where appropriate
In ETABS you with ramp objects.
can easily
model struc- 15. You can easily model flexible diaphragms in ETABS. To do
tures with this assign slab or deck properties to the area object that rep-
sloping floors resents the floor. The membrane properties of the slab or
(ramps). For deck model the in-plane diaphragm flexibility. ETABS
example, you automatically lumps the floor mass at the shell element cor-
can easily ner points on a tributary area basis.
model parking
garages. 16. If desired, you can use the Define menu > Mass Source
command to indicate that the mass of your building is to be
determined based on a specified load combination. See the
section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11 for more infor-
mation.
17. When creating a model save the manual meshing of area

objects as the last thing you do before you run the analysis.
This allows you to take advantage of working with fewer
objects as you create your model.
18. ETABS automatically generates static lateral seismic and

wind loads based on building code requirements. See the
section titled "Static Load Cases" in Chapter 11 and see
Chapters 28 and 29 for more information.
19. When drawing objects in your model we recommend that

you assign structural properties to them as you draw them
using the floating properties of object box. See the sections
titled "Floating Properties of Object Window for Line Ob-
jects" and "Floating Properties of Object Window for Area
Objects" in Chapter 12 for more information.
6-8 Modeling Tips

Tip: 20. It is important that you draw your ETABS model accurately.
The ETABS snap options can help you do this. See the sub-
To help draw
section titled "ETABS Snap Options" in Chapter 12 for more
objects in your
model accu-
information.
rately make use
of the ETABS
If you do not draw your model accurately then ETABS may
6
snap options. not interpret the member connectivity in the way you intend.
Reference For example, suppose you draw a beam framing into a girder
planes and ref- but you stop the beam slightly short of the girder because
erence lines you did not have the snap options turned on. In this case, de-
can assist you pending on the tolerances set and how far the end of the
when snapping. beam is from the girder, ETABS may not interpret the beam
See the section as connecting to the girder. You can avoid this problem by
titled "Refer- using the ETABS snap options so that when the line object
ence Planes representing the beam is drawn it snaps on to the line object
and Reference
Lines" in
representing the girder. The snap option that would do this is
Chapter 9 for the Snap to Lines and Edges option.
more informa-
tion. If you have already drawn objects that are slightly mislo-
cated then you can use the Align features in ETABS to fix
the problem. See the section titled "Aligning Points, Lines
and Edges" in Chapter 9 for more information.
21. Groups can be a great benefit when creating a model in

Tip: ETABS. You can select elements by groups. Suppose you
have a braced frame model and that you assign all of your
Do not be shy braces to a group. You can then select all of the braces at
about defining
once by group using the Select menu > Select by Groups
groups in your
model. You will command. Once the braces are selected you can make as-
find many uses signments to them as a group or you can print input/output
for them as you tables for them as a group. You can also design elements as a
create your group. In this case, all of the elements in the design group
model, use the are given the same section property by the ETABS design
design postpro- postprocessor.
cessors and
review output See the section titled "Group Name Assignments" in Chapter
results. 14 and see Chapter 26 for more information.
22. In general, given the choice, it is better to make rigid dia-

phragm assignments to horizontal area objects (floors) rather
than to point objects.
Modeling Tips 6-9

23. This tip applies to loads assigned to line objects. In general,

where possible, we strongly recommend that you assign line
and point loads to line objects with frame section properties
(i.e., columns, beams and braces assigned to them) rather
than simply assigning the loads to null-type line objects lo-
cated somewhere on an area object. The transformation of
6 loads from your object-based model into the element-based
analysis model is more easily predicted when the loads are
assigned to a frame element. See Chapter 32 for more infor-
mation on transformation of loads into the analysis model.
24. Carefully review your input both graphically and in tables to

make sure you have modeled what you meant to model. One
of the most common problem areas is the frame member end
releases. Be sure to have a look at these.
25. After you run your analysis and before clicking the OK but-
ton in the Analysis Window scroll through the messages in
the Analysis Window checking for any warnings or error
messages that might invalidate your analysis.
26. Carefully review your analysis output results to make sure

that your model is behaving as you expect. If it is not, inves-
tigate to find out why.
6 - 10 Modeling Tips
7
Chapter 7
Overview of the ETABS Menus
General
There are eleven menus provided in ETABS. They are, in order,
working from left to right across the menu bar:
• File menu (see Chapter 8).
• Edit menu (see Chapter 9).
• View menu (see Chapter 10).
• Define menu (see Chapter 11).
• Draw menu (see Chapter 12).
• Select menu (see Chapter 13).
• Assign menu (see Chapter 14).
• Analyze menu (see Chapter 15).
7-1
• Display menu (see Chapter 16).
• Design menu (see Chapter 17).
• Options menu (see Chapter 18).
• Help menu (see Chapter 19).
7 Each of the menus is documented in a separate chapter as indi-

cated in the above list. Most of the commands available in the
menus are documented in these chapters. In addition, Appendix
1 lists the complete menu structure of ETABS including all of
the commands available on each menu.
For the most part the items in the menus are arranged in a logical
way. For example items associated with drawing objects are on
the Draw menu, items associated with making assignments to an
object are on the Assign menu and so on. Thus when you are
looking for a menu command and can not remember which menu
it is in think about what it is you are trying to do and in most
cases you can probably guess the menu that the command is on.
For example suppose you need to create some section properties

for your slab over metal deck and you can't remember where to
go to do this. Thinking logically and keeping the eleven ETABS
menus in mind, what you need to do is define the deck sections.
Thus you would go to the Define menu where you would find
the Define Wall/Slab/Deck Sections command.
7-2 General
8
Chapter 8
The ETABS File Menu
General
The File menu in ETABS provides basic file operations for cre-
ating new models, opening existing models and saving models. It
also provides options for printing input and output data as well
as controls for other miscellaneous features. This chapter dis-
cusses the features available on the File menu.
Starting a New Model

The File menu > New Model command is used to start/create a
new ETABS model. Alternatively you can click the New Model
button, , located on the main (top) toolbar. There are four
distinct stages in creating a new model. They are:
• Initialize the model
• Define a grid system
8-1
• Define story data
• Add structural objects from a template
There are default values provided for each of these stages such
that you can do little more than click a few OK buttons and you
will have a complete model created with default dimensions and
properties. More typically you will modify the default values
provided for each of these stages to specify the particular char-
8 acteristics of your model. The following four subsections de-
scribe each of these four stages of creating a new model.
Initialization of a New Model

When you execute the File menu > New Model command a
message is displayed asking if you want to initialize your new
model with definitions and preferences from an existing .edb
file. You can answer either Choose .edb, Default.edb or No to
this question.
If you answer Choose .edb then you specify an ETABS file that
has an .edb extension. ETABS then starts your new model with
the definitions and preferences from the specified .edb file. In
this case ETABS essentially imports the entire specified .edb file
into your new .edb file except for the following items:
• Grid lines
• Story data
Tip: • Objects
We recommend
that you create • Assignments to objects
your own cus-
tom Default.edb • Information on the number of windows and what is
file and place it showing in the windows.
in the directory
that contains If you answer Default.edb to the question then ETABS starts
the Etabs.exe your new model using definitions and preferences that are speci-
file. fied in the Default.edb file that is in the same directory as the
ETABS.exe file. If there is no Default.edb file that is in the same
directory as the ETABS.exe file, or if you answer No to the
8-2 Starting a New Model

Chapter 8 - The ETABS File Menu
question, then ETABS uses built-in values for all of the defini-
tions and preferences in your new model.
Our intent is that you use this feature in the following way:
• Create .edb files to initialize your model:
ü Create a Default.edb file that is specifically tailored

to the most common practices of your office. Store
this file in the same directory that your ETABS.exe
file is located in. Note that the Default.edb file is
8
simply a typical ETABS .edb file that has been
named Default.
Tip: ü If necessary create other ETABS .edb files that may

in certain circumstances be useful for initializing
You can ini-
your model. You may want to store these in a loca-
tialize a new
model based on
tion where all engineers have access to them or you
any .edb file. may want these to be more personalized and have
limited access. Either way is fine as far as ETABS is
concerned. It works best if these files have names
different from Default.edb so that you do not con-
fuse the files.
• When you start a new model and the message box asks if
you want to initialize your new model with definitions
and preferences from an existing .edb file do one of the
following:
ü Click the Default.edb button. This means that the

definitions and preferences will be initialized (get
their initial values) from the Default.edb file that is
in the same directory as your ETABS.exe file. If the
Default.edb file does not exist in this directory then
the definitions and preferences are initialized using
ETABS built-in defaults.
You should create your Default.edb file such that

you most commonly click this button.
ü In some cases you may want to click the Choose

.edb button and specify a different file from which
the definitions and preferences are to be initialized.
For example, a certain client or project may require
Starting a New Model 8-3

certain things in your model to be done in a certain

way that is different from your typical office stan-
dards. You could have a specific .edb file set up for
this client or project which could then be used to
initialize all models for the client or project.
ü Click the No button if you just want to use the built-

in ETABS defaults.
8
Defining a Grid System
Once you tell ETABS your intentions for model initialization the
Building Plan Grid System and Story Definition dialog box ap-
pears. In the Grid Dimensions (Plan) area of this dialog box you
can define a grid line system. There are two options for defining
the grid line system:
• Uniform Grid Spacing: For this option you specify the

number of grid lines in the X and Y direction and a uni-
form spacing for those lines. Note that the uniform
spacing in the X and Y directions can be different. This
option defines a grid system for the global coordinate
system only. You can later edit this information using
the Edit menu > Edit Grid Data command. Refer to the
section titled "Editing Coordinate System Grid Line
Data" in Chapter 9 for discussion of this command.
• Custom Grid Spacing: This option allows you to define

nonuniformly spaced grid lines in the X and Y directions
Tip: for the global coordinate system. After you choose this
The custom option you click the Edit Grid button and a dialog box
grid spacing appears where you can define the grid lines. This dialog
item that is box is the same one that appears when you execute the
available when Edit menu > Edit Grid Data command, highlight the
you start a new GLOBAL coordinate system and click the Modify/Show
model allows
System button.
you to immedi-
ately specify
There are several reasons why you should define a grid system
nonuniformly
spaced grid
for your model. They include:
lines.
• Default elevation views in the model occur at each de-
fined primary grid line in your model.

• If you add structural objects to your model from a tem-

plate then those objects are added based on the grid line
definitions in your model.
• You can snap to grid lines when you draw objects in

your model.
• You can mesh objects at their intersections with grid

lines.
• You can define the same grid lines, with the same
8
names, in your model as are on the building plans. This
may allow for easier identification of specific locations
in your model.
When you use the Custom Grid Spacing option, whatever is

specified for the Uniform Grid Spacing option is used to provide
the initial values in the grid definition dialog box. Note that the
data for the Uniform Grid Spacing option becomes grayed out
(inactive) when you select the Custom Grid Spacing option.
Regardless of which option you use to initially define grid lines

you can later define additional coordinate/grid systems in your
model using the Edit menu > Edit Grid Data command.
Defining Story Data

Story data is defined from the Story Dimensions area of the
Note:
Building Plan Grid System and Story Definition dialog box.
See the Section There are two options for defining the story data:
titled "Similar
Story Levels in • Simple Story Data: Here you simply define the number
Chapter 22 for of stories and a typical story height that is used for all
discussion of story levels. Using this option ETABS provides default
the ETABS
names for each story level and assumptions for story
similar stories
feature that
level similarity. You can later edit all of this information
allows you to using the Edit menu > Edit Story Data command. Re-
specify cus- fer to the section titled "Editing Story Data" in Chapter 9
tomized story for discussion of this command.
similarity.

• Custom Story Data: This option allows you to define

your own story names, story levels of nonuniform height
and customized story similarity. After you choose this
option you click the Edit Story Data button and the
Story Data dialog box appears. This dialog box is the
same one that appears when you execute the Edit menu
> Edit Story Data >Edit command. Refer to the section
titled "Editing Story Data" in Chapter 9 for discussion of
8
this command.
Note that when you use the Custom Story Data option whatever
is specified for the Simple Story Data option (which becomes
grayed out, that is, inactive when you select the Custom Story
Data option) is used to provide the initial values in the Story
Data dialog box.
Adding Structural Objects from a Template

Large models can be generated automatically using ETABS
built-in templates. The models can then be modified with
onscreen editing to satisfy specific situations.
Note: While you are in the Building Plan Grid System and Story Defi-
nition dialog box you can also add structural objects to your
You can create model from one of several built-in templates. It is not necessary
steel and con- that you add the structural objects from a template. You can al-
crete building
ways draw, import, copy or replicate structural objects later.
models using
built-in ETABS However, in many cases it is simplest, most convenient and
templates. quickest to start your model with structural objects added from a
These models template.
can then be
modified with The Add Structural Objects from Template area of the Building
onscreen edit- Plan Grid System and Story Definition dialog box is reproduced
ing to satisfy below for reference.
specific situa-
tions.

Note that there is one steel building template called Steel Deck,
five concrete building templates and a button for grids only
where no structural objects are added to the model from a tem-
plate. You can always tell which option (button) is currently se-
lected in Add Structural Objects from Template area because its
name is highlighted. When the dialog box is initially open the
Grid Only selection is selected.
You can choose any of the templates by simply left clicking its
associated button. When you choose one of the template buttons 8
another dialog box appears where you can specify various types
of data for the template. The data specified for each of the six
templates (one steel and five concrete) are discussed in subsec-
tions below.
When you are finished specifying data for a template you click
the OK button to return to the Building Plan Grid System and
Story Definition dialog box. You may notice that the button
name for the template that you just specified is highlighted. If
you then decide you defined the wrong type of template you can
simply click another template button and define that data for it.
When ETABS creates the model it only adds structural objects
based on the last button you clicked in the Add Structural Ob-
jects from Template area, that is, the highlighted button. If the
last button clicked was Grid Only then no structural objects are
added to your model from template. You will simply start out
with a grid system. You can then:
• Use the commands from the Draw menu to draw objects.
• Use the Edit menu > Add to Model from Template

command to add objects to your model. See the section
titled "Add to Model from Template" in Chapter 9.
• Import stories from a SAFE .f2k file. See the section ti-
tled "Importing Files" later in this chapter.
• Import stories from another ETABS .edb file. See the

section titled "Importing Files" later in this chapter.
• Copy objects (geometry only) from another ETABS .edb

file. See the section titled "Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete"
in Chapter 9.

• Copy objects (geometry only) from a spreadsheet. See

the section titled "Cut, Copy, Paste and Delete" in
Chapter 9.
• Use commands from the Edit menu to modify existing

objects.
Note that when using the ETABS concrete building templates

beams and slab ribs (joists) are normally modeled with depths
8 equal to the dimension from the top of the slab (not bottom of
slab) to the bottom of the beam or slab rib. Also note that in
ETABS beams are modeled as line elements. Thus slabs with
out-of-plane bending capability span from center of beam to
center of beam in the ETABS model.
Steel Floor System Template

This template allows you to define a steel floor system. Follow-
ing are discussions of each of the areas in this template:
• Slab Edge Distances: These are the distances from the

perimeter grid line to the edge of the slab/deck. These
distances must be greater than or equal to zero. They can
not be negative.
• Secondary Beams: Checking the secondary beams

check box means to include secondary (infill) beams. If
the check box is not checked then no secondary beams
are included. Secondary beams are the beams that do not
frame into columns. The direction of the beams can be X
or Y. Direction X means the span of the beams is paral-
lel to the X-axis. Direction Y means the span of the
beams is parallel to the Y-axis.
Tip: You can specify the number of secondary beams using

one of two methods. You can either specify a maximum
By default sec-
spacing in which case ETABS determines how many
ondary steel
beams are
beams fit in the bay or you can specify a number of
pinned. equally spaced beams.
Note that by default moment is released at the ends of all

secondary steel beams, that is, they are pinned.

• Structural System Type: There are three possible op-

tions for this item:
ü No Moment Frame: Moment is released at all beam

to column connections, that is, these connections are
pinned.
ü Perimeter Moment Frame: Moment is not released

at beam to column connections for perimeter col-
umns. Moment is released at beam to column con-
nections for all interior columns. In other words,
8
beam column connections at perimeter columns are
moment resistant and at interior columns they are
pinned.
ü Intersecting Moment Frame: Moment is not re-

leased at any beam to column connections, that is,
all beam to column connections are fully moment re-
sisting.
• Restraints at Bottom: You can specify no restraints

(supports) at the bottom of all columns, pinned restraints
(UX, UY and UZ restrained and RX, RY and RZ free),
or fixed restraints (UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ re-
strained).
• Structural System Properties: Here you specify frame

section properties to be assigned to columns and beams
and a deck section property for the deck/slab. The items
in this area are:
ü Lateral Column: Column where the beam to col-

umn connections are fully moment resisting.
ü Lateral Beam: Beam where the beam to column

connections are fully moment resisting.
ü Gravity Column: Column where the beam to col-

umn connections are pinned, that is, not fully mo-
ment resisting.
ü Gravity Beam: Beam where the beam to column

connections are pinned, that is, not fully moment re-
sisting.

ü Secondary Beam: All secondary beams.
ü Deck/Floor: The deck/slab.
• Load: The Dead Load Case drop down box lists all de-
fined static loads that are type Dead. You can choose any
one of these load cases in the drop down box (in most
cases there will probably only be one) and then define
additional uniformly distributed dead load for that case.
8 The word additional is used to indicate that it is in addi-
tion to the self weight you specify using the self weight
multiplier when you define the static load case.
The Live Load Case drop down box lists all defined
static loads that are type Live. You can choose any one
of these load cases in the drop down box and then define
uniformly distributed live load for that case.
• Create Rigid Floor Diaphragm: Checking this box ap-

plies a rigid diaphragm constraint to the area object rep-
resenting the slab/deck.
Flat Slab Template

This template allows you to define a concrete flat slab floor sys-
tem with drop panels. No beams are included in this floor sys-
tem. Following are discussions of each of the areas in this tem-
plate:

perimeter grid line to the edge of the slab. These dis-
tances must be greater than or equal to zero. They can
not be negative.
• Drop Panels: Checking the drop panels check box

means to include drop panels in the model. If the check
box is not checked no drop panels are included.
The drop panels are typically assumed to be square and

centered on the columns which are located at all grid line
intersections. The Size item for drop panels is the length
of one side of the drop panel. If the drop panel occurs at
a perimeter column and the edge distance at that location
8 - 10 Starting a New Model

is less than half of the drop panel size then the drop
panel is truncated at the edge of the slab.
Note that the thickness (depth) of the drop panel is con-

trolled by the section property assigned to it in the
Structural System Properties area of the dialog box.

8
strained).
• Structural System Properties: Here you specify a

frame section property to be assigned to the columns and
slab section properties to be assigned to the slab and
drop panels. The items in this area are:
ü Column: All columns in the template model.
ü Slab: The floor slab not including drop panels.
ü Drop: All drop panels in the template model.
The word additional is used to indicate that it is in addi-

resenting the slab and drop panels.
Starting a New Model 8 - 11

Flat Slab with Perimeter Beams Template

tem with drop panels and perimeter beams. The only difference
between this template and the Flat Slab template is that this one
includes beams framing between the perimeter columns. Note
that the connection between the beams and the columns is mod-
eled as fully moment resistant, as one would typically expect for
a concrete structure. Following are discussions of each of the ar-
8 eas in this template:

not be negative.
• Drop Panels: Checking the drop panels check box

means to include drop panels in the model. If the check
box is not checked no drop panels are included.
The drop panels are typically assumed to be square and

centered on the columns which are located at all grid line
intersections. The Size item for drop panels is the length
of one side of the drop panel. If the drop panel occurs at
a perimeter column and the edge distance at that location


strained).


section properties to be assigned to the columns and pe-
rimeter beams and you specify slab section properties to
be assigned to the slab and drop panels. The items in this
area are:
ü Beam: All perimeter beams in the template model.

8

Two-Way Slab Template

tem with beams interconnecting all of the columns. No drop
panels are included in this template. Note that the connection
between the beams and the columns is modeled as fully moment
resistant, as one would typically expect for a concrete structure.
Following are discussions of each of the areas in this template:



not be negative.

strained).
8 • Structural System Properties: Here you specify frame

section properties to be assigned to the columns and
beams and you specify slab section properties to be as-
signed to the slab. The items in this area are:
ü Beam X: All beams in the template model that span

in a direction parallel to the X-axis.
ü Beam Y: All beams in the template model that span

in a direction parallel to the Y-axis.
ü Slab: The floor slab.


Waffle Slab Template

This template allows you to define a concrete waffle slab floor
system with drop panels (solid column heads) and perimeter
beams. Note that the connections between the ribs and either
other ribs or the columns is modeled as fully moment resistant,
as one would typically expect for a concrete structure. Following
are discussions of each of the areas in this template:
•
Note:
Slab Edge Distances: These are the distances from the
perimeter grid line to the edge of the slab. These dis- 8
In waffle slabs tances must be greater than or equal to zero. They can
ETABS does not be negative.
not consider the
rectangular • Drop Panels and Ribs: Checking the drop panels check
space between
box means to include drop panels (solid heads) in the
the centerlines
of four adjacent
model. If the check box is not checked no drop panels
ribs (joists) to are included.
be filled with a
drop panel un- The drop panels are typically assumed to be square and
less the drop centered on the columns which are located at all grid line
panel size intersections. The Size item for drop panels is the length
specified fully of one side of the drop panel. If the drop panel occurs at
fills that space. a perimeter column and the edge distance at that location
The actual size of a drop panel included in a model may

be less than that you input into the template. This hap-
pens because in waffle slabs ETABS does not consider
the rectangular space between the centerlines of four
adjacent ribs (joists) to be filled with a drop panel unless
the drop panel size specified fully fills that space. The
drop panel is ignored in any rectangular space between
adjacent ribs that it does not fully fill.

Checking the ribs check box means to include waffle

slab ribs in the model. If the check box is not checked no
slab ribs are included.

Ribs are always provided interconnecting the columns.

The rib spacing specified is the typical center-of rib to
center-of-rib spacing that applies to each bay of the
structure. When the specified rib spacing is not an exact
multiple of the bay width the ribs are still typically
spaced at the specified rib spacing. Any required uneven
spacing all occurs between the ribs on the grid lines in-
terconnecting the columns and the first adjacent rib. This
uneven space is always larger than the specified rib
8 spacing. We assume that you will manually adjust the
width of the ribs (beams) on the grid lines if necessary to
maintain a constant form size for your waffle slab.
An example of this is shown in the next subsection for a

one-way ribbed slab.

strained).

section properties to be assigned to the columns and ribs
and you specify slab section properties to be assigned to
the slab and drop panels. The items in this area are:
ü Ribs: All waffle slab ribs (in both the X and Y di-
rections) in the template model.


Ribbed Slab Template

8
This template allows you to define a one-way ribbed concrete
floor slab system. No drop panels are included in this template.
Note that the connections between the elements are modeled as
fully moment resistant, as one would typically expect for a con-
crete structure. Following are discussions of each of the areas in
this template:

not be negative.
Ribs: Checking the ribs check box means to include the

one-way slab ribs (joists) in the model. If the check box
is not checked no slab ribs are included.
Ribs are always provided interconnecting the columns.

The rib spacing specified is the typical center-of rib to
center-of-rib spacing that applies to each bay of the
structure. When the specified rib spacing is not an exact
multiple of the bay width the ribs are still typically
spaced at the specified rib spacing. Any required uneven
spacing all occurs between the ribs on the grid lines in-
terconnecting the columns and the first adjacent rib. This
uneven space is always larger than the specified rib
spacing. We assume that you will manually adjust the
size of the ribs (beams) on the grid lines if necessary to
maintain a constant form size for your one-way ribbed
slab.
Consider the example shown in Figure 8-1. In this ex-

ample the dimension “a” is the specified rib spacing. The

Figure 8-1: “b” 7 spaces at “a” “b”

Example of rib
spacing for a one-
way ribbed slab a = specified rib spacing
(waffle slab similar) b = spacing between rib
interconnecting columns
and first adjacent rib
a ≤ b < 1.5 a
8
Rib Spacing for One-Way Ribbed Slab
dimension “b” is the spacing between the ribs intercon-

necting columns and the first adjacent rib. Note that
a ≤ b < 1.5a.
The direction of the ribs can be specified as either X or

Y. Specifying the rib direction as X means that the ribs
span in a direction parallel to the X-axis. Specifying the
rib direction as Y means that the ribs span in a direction
parallel to the Y-axis.

strained).

section properties to be assigned to the columns, beams
and ribs and you specify slab section properties to be as-
signed to the slab. The items in this area are:
ü Beams: All beams (girders) in the template model.

These span perpendicular to the slab ribs (joists).
ü Ribs: All one-way slab ribs in the template model.

ü Slab: The floor slab.
multiplier when you define the static load case. 8

Opening an Existing Model

To open an existing ETABS version 7 or later model click the
File menu > Open command or the Open .EDB File button,
, located on the main (top) toolbar and the Open Model File
dialog box appears. Find the name of the file you want to open in
this dialog box and double click on it so that it appears in the File
Name edit box. Alternatively you can just type the name of the
file in the File Name edit box, including the path if necessary.
Then click the Open button.
Another way to open an existing ETABS model is to select it

from the list of recently opened ETABS models that is displayed
near the bottom of the ETABS File menu. This list appears just
below the Display Input/Output Text Files item and just above
the Exit item. If the model you want to open appears in this list
then simply click on its name in this list to open it. Note that this
list is maintained in the ETABS.ini file that is kept in your Win-
dows or WinNT directory. If this file is moved or lost then your
list of recently used files disappears.
Opening an Existing Model 8 - 19

When you open an existing .edb file ETABS always creates a

backup of that file, as it is when you first open it. The backup file
has the same name as your .edb file but it has a .ebk extension.
The .ebk file is a binary file not a text file. If your edb file should
somehow become corrupted or lost you always have a backup of
the file as it was when you last opened it in the .ebk file. If you
need to access the .ebk file simply change its extension to .edb
and use it like a regular .edb file.
8
Saving Models
To save your ETABS model click the File menu > Save com-
Tip:
mand or click the Save Model button, , located on the main
Save your file
(top) toolbar. If you have just created your model and this is the
often!
first time you are saving your model the Save Model File As
dialog box appears where you can specify a location (directory)
and name for your model file. Specify the location and name in
the dialog box and click the Save button to save your model.
If your model previously existed or has been previously saved

then clicking the File menu > Save command or the Save
Model button immediately saves your model in the previously
specified location overwriting any earlier versions of the model.
Important Note: We recommend that you make it a habit to save

your model file early and often. This helps minimize the lost
work that may occur as a result of any power failures, computer
malfunctions or unforeseen software behavior. Note that there is
not an AutoSave feature in ETABS. Thus it is fully your respon-
sibility to save your file.
If you want to save your model in a new location and/or with a

new name then use the File menu > Save As command. The
Save Model File As dialog box appears where you can specify a
location (directory) and name for your model file.
When you save a model file ETABS actually saves two different
files. First it saves a text file with the same name as your .edb
file but with a .$et extension. Then it saves your ETABS data-
base file for your model with a .edb extension.
8 - 20 Saving Models
The text file with the .$et extension is intended as a text backup
file of your .edb file which is a binary file. If something happens
to your .edb file of your model, such as the file becomes cor-
rupted or is otherwise lost, you can restore your model by im-
porting the .$et file. Use the File menu > Import > Open
ETABS7.e2k Text File command to import a .$et file. Specify
the name of your .$et file, including the .$et extension, in the re-
sulting dialog box.
Note that a .$et file is exactly the same as a .e2k file that you can 8
export using the File menu > Export > Save Model as
ETABS7.e2k Text File command. The .$et file is created (and
the previous .$et file is overwritten) every time you save your
model. The .e2k files are only created when you use the File
menu > Export command, or when you copy a .$et file and give
it a .e2k extension, or when you create one from scratch. We do
not recommend that you try to create a text input file for
ETABS.
Importing Files
Note: You can import certain types of files into ETABS using the File
menu > Import command. Following are the options available
ETABS6 analy-
for this command.
sis input files
can be im-
ported into
• Open ETABS7.e2k Text File: This command is used to
ETABS7. import ETABS7 .e2k and .$et text input files. If another
ETABS6 model is currently open this command will close that
Steeler, Conker model (prompting you to save it if necessary) and open a
and Waller new one for the imported file.
input files can
not be imported • Open ETABS6 Text File: This command is used to im-
into ETABS7. port an ETABS6 text input file. ETABS6 Steeler,
Conker and Waller input files are not imported. If an-
other model is currently open this command will close
that model and open a new one for the imported file.
Importing Files 8 - 21
• Overwrite Stories from SAFE.f2k Text File: This

command behaves a little differently depending on
whether or not a model is open when you execute the
command.
If a model is currently open when you start this import

then ETABS deletes all of the objects and their assign-
ments at the specified story level in the currently open
model and replaces them with the objects and their as-
8 signments from the specified SAFE model. Grid lines
are not imported from the SAFE model in this case.
If no model is currently open then a one-story ETABS

model is created and the SAFE objects and their assign-
ments are imported into this model. The SAFE grid line
definitions are also imported in this case.
• Overwrite Stories from ETABS7.edb File: This com-

mand is only active if a model is currently open. It will
delete all of the objects and their assignments at the
specified story level in the currently open model and re-
place them with the objects and their assignments from a
specified story level in the file you are importing from.
The story level that you are importing to in the current
model can be different from the story level that you are
importing from. Grid lines are not imported using this
command.
Exporting Files
You can export certain types of files from ETABS using the File
menu > Export command. Following are the options available
for this command.
• Save Model as ETABS7.e2k Text File: This command

saves the model as a .e2k text input file. You can later
import this file/model back into ETABS using the File
menu > Import > Open ETABS7.e2k Text File com-
mand if you wish.
8 - 22 Exporting Files
• Save Model as SAP2000.s2k Text File: This command

saves the analysis model (an element-based model rather
than the ETABS object-based model) as a .s2k text input
Note:
file. You can later import this file/model into SAP2000
You can export if you wish.
the ETABS
analysis model Because the model is converted into an element-based
to a SAP2000 model you may not recognize the names of the elements.
.s2k file. The They may be different from the names of the objects in
element-based
analysis model
your object-based ETABS model. 8
is different from This command can be useful if you want to see exactly
the typical ob- what the analysis model looks like for your structure. It
ject-based
is also useful if you want to add certain other special
ETABS model.
See Chapter 5 purpose elements to your model that are not available in
for additional ETABS, such as Solid elements. Note however that once
information. you export your ETABS model to SAP2000 you can not
then import that SAP2000 model back into ETABS.
Thus you will no longer have access to the specialized
design features in ETABS.
• Save Story as SAFE.f2k Text File: This command

saves the specified story level as a SAFE.f2k text input
file. You can later import this file/model into SAFE if
you wish.
The items exported in this case are:
ü Structural objects and their assignments assuming

those assignments are valid in SAFE.
ü Grid line definitions.
ü Loads.
ü Information regarding columns above and below.
This command can be useful if you want to perform a

more refined analysis and design of a concrete floor in
your ETABS model.
Exporting Files 8 - 23
• Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File: This command saves

the specified story level as an ETABS7 .edb. If the story
you are exporting is the bottom story of a structure then
the restraints are included in the exported one-story
Note: model. If the story level exported is not the bottom level
The .DXF files of a structure then ETABS fixes the base of all columns
created by and walls in the exported one-story structure.
ETABS are
• Save Story Plan as .DXF: This command is only active
8
compatible with
AutoCad 2000. if the currently active window is showing a plan view.
This command only exports undeformed geometry of the
structure and text. It does not export any analysis output
results. All items that are exported must be showing in
the currently active window when the export is done.
Note that plan views that occur either at story levels or at

reference plane elevation can be exported to a .DXF file.
Only the elements that occur in the horizontal plane of
the plan view are exported. Other elements that are a part
of the story level that is associated with the plan view
are not exported.
The types of items listed below can be exported to a

Tip: .DXF file in a plan view. A layer name can be specified
When exporting for each of these types of items. You can put several dif-
a plan view to a ferent types of items on the same layer if you wish. If
.DXF file all you do not want to export a particular type of item even
items that are though it is showing in the plan view then set its layer
to be exported name to None.
must be visible
in a plan view ü Grid lines: These are exported to the .DXF file as
in the currently
lines. This item includes the grid line and the grid ID
active window.
bubble if it exists, but not the grid ID. The grid ID is
exported with the text.
ü Walls: These are exported to the .DXF file as

polylines so that their width can be graphically
shown.
ü Beams: These are exported to the .DXF file as lines.

You can also specify a beam offset. This is the dis-
tance between the end of the beam and its supporting
girder or column in the .DXF file.
8 - 24 Exporting Files
ü Moment connection block: This is exported to the

.DXF file as a block. It includes the moment con-
nection symbols for the beams. The moment con-
nections will only export if they are visible in the
currently active window. Use the Moment Connec-
tions check box in the Special Frame Items area of
the Set Building View Options dialog box to toggle
the display of moment connection symbols on and
off. You can use the View menu > Set Building
View Options command to access this dialog box. 8
ü Links: These are exported to the .DXF file as lines.
ü Slab/deck perimeter: This is exported to the .DXF

file as a polyline.
ü Column block: This is exported to the .DXF file as

a block. It shows the shapes of the columns as they
appear in the plan view.
ü Dimension lines: These are exported to the .DXF

file as dimension lines.
ü Text: Text is exported to the .DXF file as text. Only

text that is visible in the currently active window is
exported. Text associated with analysis output is not
exported.
• Save as 3D .DXF: This command only exports unde-

formed geometry of the structure. It does not export any
analysis output results and it does not export text.
Note: The types of items listed below can be exported to a 3D

.DXF file. A layer name can be specified for each of
ETABS does
these types of items. You can put several different types
not export
analysis results
of items on the same layer if you wish. If you do not
to .DXF files. want to export a particular type of item even though it is
showing in the plan view then set its layer name to
None.
ü Grid lines: These are exported to the .DXF file as

lines. This item includes the grid line but not the grid
ID bubble or the grid ID text. Grid lines exported in
this way are only shown at the base of the building.
Exporting Files 8 - 25
ü Areas: Area objects are exported to the .DXF file as

polylines.
ü Lines: Line objects are exported to the .DXF file as

lines. You can not specify a beam offset for a 3D
.DXF file like you can for a plan view .DXF file.
• Save Input/Output as an Access database file: This

command exports all of the model input and analysis
8 output as tables in a Microsoft Access database file
(.mdb file) that is compatible with Microsoft Access 97.
See Chapter 42 for documentation of this database file.
• Save Graphics as Enhanced Metafile: This command

exports all that is graphically showing in the currently
active window to a Windows enhanced metafile (.*.emf
file).
Creating Videos
You can create videos in ETABS showing the movement of the
structure during any time history analysis you have run. You can
also create videos showing animations of mode shapes and other
deformed shape plots of the structure. The videos are saved as
.avi files. They can be played back using the media player that
comes with Windows.
Use the File menu > Create Video > Time History Animation
Tip: command to create videos of time histories. Note the following
You can create for time history videos:
videos of time
history re- • The magnification factor controls how large the defor-
sponse in mations appear in the video.
ETABS (as .avi
files) and then • To record the time history file in real time animation
play back the make sure that the number of frames per second is equal
videos using the to one over the time increment. If you want to record the
media player time history video in slow or fast motion then the value
that comes with
of number of frames per second may be adjusted up or
Windows.
down to speed the animation up or down.
8 - 26 Creating Videos
The time increment controls how many different pictures

(frames) of the deformed shape of the structure are cre-
ated. For example a time increment of 0.1 means a pic-
ture (frame) of the deformed shape is created for every
one-tenth second of the time history. The Frames per
Second item controls how fast the time history is played
back.
• For best results make sure that all ETABS windows are
showing undeformed views before attempting to create a 8
time history video.
Use the File menu > Create Video > Cyclic Animation com-
mand to create videos of animated mode shapes and other de-
flected shapes. A mode shape or deformed shape must be show-
ing in the active window for this command to be available.
Printing from ETABS

The majority of the printing from ETABS is done using the print
commands available on the File menu. The two main printing
commands on the File menu are the File menu > Print Graph-
ics command and the File menu > Print Tables command.
Printing Graphics
Note: The File menu > Print Graphics command prints whatever
graphics are displayed in the active window to the printer that is
The File menu
currently specified active. The printer used may be either a black
> Print Preview
for Graphics
and white printer or a color printer. The gray scales or colors
command al- used for displaying various objects in the print out are controlled
lows you to in the Assign Display Colors dialog box which is accessed using
preview the the Options menu > Colors command.
printed output
for graphics The colors (grayscales) used for black and white printers are
before actually those displayed in the Assign Display Colors dialog box when
printing it. the Device Type option is set to Printer. The colors used for
color printers are those displayed in the Assign Display Colors
dialog box when the Device Type option is set to Color Printer.
The colors used for display on the screen are those displayed in
the Assign Display Colors dialog box when the Device Type op-
tion is set to Screen. If the object display colors are set differ-
Printing from ETABS 8 - 27

ently for screen display and color printing then the objects will
print in different colors than they display in on the screen.
Printing Text Input and Output Tables

You can use the File menu > Print Tables command to print
text tables either to a printer or to a text file. The following types
of tables can be printed using this command:
8 • Analysis input data
• Analysis output data
• Design input and output data for steel frame design, con-
crete frame design, composite beam design and shear
wall design.
Analysis input and output data are discussed in Chapters 40 and

41 of this manual. Design input and output data are discussed in
the design manuals.
When you use the File menu > Print Tables command note the
following:
• If you select some objects before executing the File

menu > Print Tables command then you will get
printed output for your selected objects only.
• If you do not select some objects before executing the

File menu > Print Tables command then you will get
printed output for all objects in your model.
Printing Analysis Input Data

Use the File menu > Print Tables > Input command to print
tables of analysis input data to a printer or to a text file. This
command brings up the Print Input Tables dialog box where you
can specify the types of input data that you want to print. See
Chapter 40 for documentation of the items that can be printed
from this dialog box.
8 - 28 Printing from ETABS

Note that you can use the Display menu > Set Input Table
Mode command to display similar data in a database format on
the screen. Data displayed in this manner can not be printed.
Printing Analysis Output Data

Use the File menu > Print Tables > Output command to print
tables of analysis output data to a printer or to a text file. This
8
command brings up the Print Output Tables dialog box where
you can specify the types of output data that you want to print.
See Chapter 41 for documentation of the items that can be
printed from this dialog box.
Note that you can use the Display menu > Set Output Table
Mode command to display similar data in a database format on
the screen. Data displayed in this manner can not be printed.
User Comments and Session Log

The File menu > User Comments and Session Log command
brings up a text window where you can type in any comments
that you want to make. These comments are saved with your
model and can be accessed and added to, modified or deleted at
any time using the File menu > User Comments and Session
Log command. Note that ETABS also occasionally adds com-
ments to this file. You can modify or delete those comments as
well.
Displaying Input/Output Text Files

The File menu > Display Input/Output Text Files command
provides a convenient way for you to view input and output text
files associated with ETABS. The input text files you might want
to view include those with the .$et and .e2k extensions and per-
haps any time history or response spectrum text files that you are
using. The output files that you might want to view are those
where you have printed output to a file rather than to a printer.
Typically these files have a .txt extension.
User Comments and Session Log 8 - 29

When you click the File menu > Display Input/Output Text
Files command and select a file to be displayed ETABS opens
the text file in the WordPad program that comes with Windows.
Exiting ETABS
You can use the File menu > Exit command to exit the ETABS
program. Other ways you might also exit the ETABS program
8 include clicking the X in the upper right hand corner of the
ETABS window and right clicking the ETABS program button
on your Windows taskbar and choosing Close from the resulting
popup menu. If you have made changes to your model since you
last saved it then ETABS prompts you to save your model when
you exit using any of these methods.
Note that exiting the ETABS program in any of these ways not
only closes your model but also closes the entire ETABS pro-
gram. If you simply want to close one model and open another
(or start a new one) then just click on the appropriate command
in the File menu to open another model or start a new one. If you
have made changes to your model since you last saved it then
ETABS prompts you to save your model before beginning work
on the next one.
8 - 30 Exiting ETABS
Chapter 9 9
The ETABS Edit Menu
General
The Edit menu in ETABS provides some basic tools for editing
(modifying) the geometry of your ETABS model. This chapter
discusses many of those tools. It also discusses the Reshaper tool
that is available on the side toolbar and in the Draw menu as well
as the ETABS nudge feature.
Some of the editing tools not discussed in this chapter are dis-
cussed in other places in this manual. The Undo and Redo com-
mands are described in the section titled "Undo Features in
ETABS" in Chapter 4. (Also see the section titled "Editing Story
Data" later in this chapter for additional information on the Undo
feature.) Meshing of area objects is explained in detail in Chap-
ter 31. Automatic relabeling of objects is discussed in the sub-
section titled "Relabeling Objects" in Chapter 23.
9-1
Cut, Copy and Paste

In general the cut, copy and paste commands work similarly to
the standard cut, copy and paste Windows commands. However
some of the behavior of these commands is specific to ETABS.
The cut, copy and paste commands are only active when the cur-
rently active window is in plan or plan perspective view.
• The Cut command deletes the selected objects that are

9 associated with the story level that is associated with the
plan view in the currently active window. When the ob-
jects are deleted all of their assignments are also deleted.
The geometry of the objects are copied to the Windows
clipboard. Also the names of any frame section proper-
ties assigned to selected line objects or the names of any
wall/slab/deck section properties assigned to selected
area objects are copied to the clipboard along with the
geometry. No other assignments to the object besides the
above-mentioned section property name are copied to
Tip: the clipboard. The geometry and section property names
associated with the cut objects can be pasted back into
The Cut and
Copy com- ETABS, or they can be copied to a spreadsheet, such as
mands copy Microsoft Excel, in a text format. Additional discussion
geometry and of the spreadsheet option is provided later in this section.
property names
only. Use the • The Copy command copies the geometry of the selected
Edit menu > objects that are associated with the story level that is as-
Replicate com- sociated with the plan view in the currently active win-
mand if you dow to the Windows clipboard. The names of any frame
want to copy an section properties assigned to selected line objects or the
object and its names of any wall/slab/deck section properties assigned
assignments. to selected area objects are copied to the clipboard along
with the geometry. The geometry and section property
names associated with the copied objects can be pasted
back into ETABS, or they can be copied to a spread-
sheet, such as Microsoft Excel, in a text format. Addi-
tional discussion of the spreadsheet option is provided
later in this section.
9-2 Cut, Copy and Paste

Chapter 9 - The ETABS Edit Menu
• The Paste command copies geometry and section prop-

erty names from the Windows clipboard into your
ETABS model on the story level that is shown in plan or
plan perspective view in the currently active window.
The geometry and section property names that are on the
Windows clipboard may have been copied to the clip-
board from ETABS or from a spreadsheet.
The similar stories feature of ETABS discussed in the

section titled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22 works
for pasting objects into ETABS. 9
It is important to note that the Cut and Copy commands only
copy the geometry and property name of the selected object to
the Windows clipboard. Other assignments made to the selected
object are not copied using these commands.
Note: You can edit geometry in a spreadsheet and then copy and paste
it into ETABS. Again note that you can only create and/or mod-
You can edit
ify geometry and some section properties in this fashion. You
geometry in a
spreadsheet
can not make assignments (loads, supports, end offsets, etc.)
and then copy through spreadsheet input.
and paste it into
ETABS. You can see the text format used when ETABS geometry is
copied to or from a spreadsheet by simply selecting a portion of
a model, clicking Edit menu > Copy to copy the selected ge-
ometry to the clipboard, and then opening a spreadsheet and us-
ing the Paste command in the spreadsheet to paste the geometry
data into the spreadsheet.
In the spreadsheet each object is described in one line. Following

are descriptions of the column headings for each of the three
object types (point, line and area).
Point Object Headings in Spreadsheet

Following are the definitions for the headings for point objects in
the spreadsheet data.
• Type: This is always POINT for point objects.
• X: This is the global X coordinate of the point object.

• Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the point object.
• DZ: This is the Z-direction distance from the story level

associated with the plan view where the object is pasted
into ETABS to the point object. DZ is 0 if the point ob-
ject falls at the associated story level. Otherwise it is a
positive number measured from the story level down.
Note that if the currently active plan view is showing a

reference plane then a DZ value of zero pastes the object
9 in at the story level associated with the reference plane,
not at the reference plane level. See the section titled
"Reference Planes and Reference Lines" later in this
chapter for discussion of reference planes.
Line Object Headings in Spreadsheet

Following are the definitions for the headings for line objects in
• Type: This is always LINE for line objects.
• Section: This is the name of the frame section property

assigned to the line object. If no frame section property
is assigned to the line object then it is NONE.
If a line object has a frame section property name in a

spreadsheet for which a frame section property is not al-
ready defined in the ETABS model, then ETABS sets
the frame section property assignment for that object to
None in ETABS when the spreadsheet data is pasted into
the model. For example, if a line object has a frame sec-
tion property name of COL1 in a spreadsheet, and there
is no previously defined frame section property named
COL1 in the ETABS model, then ETABS sets the prop-
erty assignment for that line object to None in the
ETABS model when the spreadsheet data is pasted into
the model.

The following items are provided for each end point of the line
object:
• XI (XJ): This is the global X coordinate of the consid-

ered end point of the line object.
• YI (YJ): This is the global Y coordinate of the consid-

ered end point of the line object.
• DZI (DZJ): This is the Z-direction distance from the

story level associated with the plan view where the line
object is pasted into ETABS to the considered end point
9
of the line object. DZ is 0 if the end point falls at the as-
sociated story level. Otherwise it is a positive number
measured from the story level down.

in at the story level associated with the reference plane,
• BelowI (BelowJ): This is a flag that indicates if the con-

sidered end point of the line object falls at the story level
below the story level associated with the plan view
where the line object is pasted into ETABS. This item
can either be Y for Yes or N for No. Y means it does fall
at the story level below where it is pasted; N means it
does not. When the item is Y any value input for DZ is
ignored and the end point is simply placed at the story
level below where it is pasted into ETABS.
An example where this is used is for a column. The bot-

tom end point of a column typically has this flag set to
Y. This way a column can be pasted into a story of any
height and it will always span from story level to story
level.

Area Object Headings in Spreadsheet

Following are the definitions for the headings for area objects in
• Type: This is always AREA for area objects.
• Section: This is the name of the wall, slab or deck sec-

tion property assigned to the area object. If no section
property is assigned to the area object then it is NONE.
9
If an area object has a property name for which a prop-
erty is not already defined, then ETABS sets the prop-
erty assignment for that object to None. For example if
an area object has a property name of WALL1 and there
is no previously defined wall, slab or deck section prop-
erty named WALL1 then ETABS sets the property as-
signment for that object to None.
• Points: This is the number of corner points in the area

object.
The following items are provided for each corner point, n, of the
area object where n represents a number 1 through the number of
corner points in the area object:
• X-n: This is the global X coordinate of the considered

corner point of the area object.
• Y-n: This is the global Y coordinate of the considered

corner point of the area object.
• DZ-n: This is the Z-direction distance from the story

level associated with the plan view where the area object
is pasted into ETABS to the considered corner point of
the area object. DZ is 0 if the corner point object falls at
the associated story level. Otherwise it is a positive
number measured from the story level down.


in at the story level associated with the reference plane,
• Below-n: This is a flag that indicates if the considered

corner point of the area object falls at the story level be-
low the story level associated with the plan view where
the area object is pasted into ETABS. This item can ei-
ther be Y for Yes or N for No. Y means it does fall at the
9
story level below where it is pasted; N means it does not.
When the item is Y any value input for DZ is ignored
and the corner point is simply placed at the story level
below where it is pasted into ETABS.
An example where this is used is for a wall. The bottom

corner points of a wall typically have this flag set to Y.
This way a wall can be pasted into a story of any height
and it will always span from story level to story level.
Delete
In general the delete command in ETABS works like the stan-
dard Windows delete command. This command deletes the se-
lected object(s) and all of its assignments (loads, properties, sup-
ports etc.). Alternatively you can select the objects and press the
Delete key on your keyboard to accomplish the same thing.
Add to Model From Template

You can use the Edit menu > Add to Model from Template
command to add two-dimensional and three-dimensional frames
to your model.
Our intent is that you use the two-dimensional option to locate

planar frames throughout a model. The three-dimensional option
is intended to assist in modeling conditions where several towers
rest on the same base structure.
Delete 9-7
Two-Dimensional Frame
You can add a two-dimensional frame or wall to your model us-
ing this feature. You specify the following data for this option:
• Number of stories. The two-dimensional frames are al-

ways assumed to start at the base of the building and
extend upward. This is different from the three-dimen-
sional frame option.
9 • Number of bays and typical bay width.
• Typical properties for columns and beams in a frame or

typical property for a wall.
• Location in plan. This is the location of one end of the

frame in global X and Y coordinates. You also specify a
plan orientation angle for the frame in degrees. The an-
gle is measured in the global X-Y plane from the posi-
tive global X-axis with positive angles counterclockwise
when you look down on the model.
• The base restraints are specified as pinned, fixed or

none.
Three-Dimensional Frame
You can add a three-dimensional frame to your model using this
feature. Except for the location data, the data you specify for this
option is similar to that specified when you start a model from
template. The following information is provided to locate the
added three dimensional frame:
• A coordinate system (grid system) is specified. By de-

fault the added three-dimensional frame fills all of the
specified bays and story levels in this coordinate system
(grid system). If you want to fill only some of the bays
or story levels in the specified coordinate system (grid
system) then click the Advanced button and fill in the
starting and ending grid line ID's and the story levels at
top and bottom of frame.
9-8 Add to Model From Template

Note that unlike an added two-dimensional frame, an added

three-dimensional frame can start at a story level above the base
level.
Replicating Objects
The Edit menu > Replicate command is a powerful way to copy
objects including most of their assignments. Four types of repli-
cation are available. They are linear, radial, mirror and story.
Each of these is discussed in a separate subsection below. In ad-
dition, the assignments that are and are not replicated and the
9
available user control on which assignments you want to repli-
cate are discussed in the subsection below titled "Assignments
that are Replicated."
Note: To replicate one or more objects you select the object(s) and then
use the Edit menu > Replicate command to specify the desired
Replication
replication option. The selected objects, including all of their as-
copies objects
and their as-
signments are replicated (copied) as indicated.
signments.
Important note: When using the replication feature if a repli-
cated object falls in exactly the same location as an existing ob-
ject then the replication is not done at that location. The existing
object remains as it was. The replication is still done at other lo-
cations.
Linear Replication
For linear replication you specify a dx, dy and a number of times
the object is to be replicated. The object and its assignments are
then copied the specified number of times each time increment-
ing the global X and Y coordinates by the specified dx and dy.
Radial Replication
For radial replication you specify a point to rotate about (the ro-
tation is in the global X-Y plane about the global Z-axis), a rota-
tion angle and a number of times the object is to be replicated.
The object and its assignments are then copied the specified
number of times, each time incrementing the location of the ob-
jects by the specified rotation angle.
Replicating Objects 9-9

Figure 9-1: (10, 40) Second Replication (30, 40)

Example of radial Y Y
replication
Third Replication
First Replication
X X
(20, 30) (20, 30)
(10, 20) (30, 20) (10, 20) Original (30, 20)

9 Plan Plan
a) Original Objects b) Replicated Objects
Two options are available for specifying the point to rotate

about. You can either tell ETABS to rotate about the center of
the selected objects or you can give it the global X and Y coor-
dinates of a specific point to rotate about.
When the rotation occurs about the center of the selected objects
ETABS calculates the location of that point as follows. ETABS
determines the maximum and minimum global X-coordinate of
all selected objects. The global X-coordinate of the center of the
selected objects is determined as the average of the coordinates
of the maximum and minimum X coordinates. The global Y-
coordinate of the center of the selected objects is determined in a
similar manner.
The rotation angle is input in degrees. Angles are measured from

the positive global X-axis. Positive angles appear counterclock-
wise when you view them from above.
Figure 9-1 shows an example of radial replication. Figure 9-1a

shows a plan view of a frame that extends from the point (10,
20) to the point (30, 20) where the coordinates are given in the
global coordinate system. The frame is selected and radial repli-
cation is specified about the point (20, 30). The angle is set to 90
degrees and the number is set to 3. Figure 9-1b shows the result
of the replication.
9 - 10 Replicating Objects
Figure 9-2: Pr
oj e
Example of mirror cti
o
Selected object
nl
replication i ne
(X2, Y2)
e
lan
e/p
Pr
oj e
lin
cti
g
o nl
rin
i ne
rro
Mi
ject
9
(X1, Y1) r or ed ob
Mir
Mirror Replication
For mirror replication you specify a line in the global X-Y plane
to mirror about or if you prefer you can think of it as a vertical
plane to mirror about. The vertical plane is defined by the speci-
fied line in the global X-Y plane and vertical line, parallel to the
global Z-axis, that intersects the specified line.
You specify the line in the X-Y plane by specifying two points
(X1, Y1) and (X2, Y2) in global coordinates. ETABS replicates
the selected objects by mirroring the objects and their assign-
ments about the specified line/plane. Figure 9-2 illustrates the
mirroring process. Note that the projection lines used in the mir-
roring process (shown dashed in the figure) are perpendicular to
the specified mirroring line/plane.
Story Replication
For story replication you specify a story that the selected objects
are to be replicated on. The object and its assignments are then
copied to that story level. If the story level where you select the
objects and the story level to which you replicate the objects
have different story heights then you should be aware of the fol-
lowing:
Replicating Objects 9 - 11
4th 4th
Replicated
Replicated
e d
lin cate area, line
line
10'
10'
8'
pli
3rd and point 3rd

Re
objects
10'
10'
2nd 2nd
Selected
Selected
line ted
12'
area, line
8'
line
lec
14'
14'
and point
9
Se
Base objects Base
a) Elevation b) Elevation
(Above) • Elements that extend from one story level to the next
Figure 9-3: still extend from one story to the next when they are
Examples of story replicated even if the story heights are different. Figure
replication 9-3a shows some examples.
• Distances are measured from the top of the story down.

If an object that is to be replicated to story level X falls
below the bottom of story level X, then that object is
placed at the bottom story level X, that is, it is placed at
story level (X - 1). This can happen when you are repli-
cating from a story level that is taller than the story level
you are replicating to.
Figure 9-3b shows some examples. Note that the height

of the lower replicated area object on the left side of
Figure 9-3b is reduced from 6 feet to 2 feet when it is
replicated in order to fit into the 4th story level. Also
note that the line object is taken to the bottom of the
story level since the 12-foot dimension that it is to be
replicated to exceeds the story height. Notice that the
plan location of the bottom of the line object remains the
same at each level, thus the slope of the line object is
different at the two levels. Similar to the line object, the
point object is placed at the bottom of the 4th story level.
9 - 12 Replicating Objects
Assignments that are Replicated

All assignments to area, line and point objects are replicated ex-
cept for:
• Rigid diaphragm assignments to point objects and area

objects.
• Pier label assignments to line and area objects.
• Spandrel label assignments to line and area objects.
For area and line objects some assignments are always replicated
9
and you have no control over them. Those assignments are listed
in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1: Line Object Assignments Area Object Assignments

Area and line object Frame section property Section property
assignments that are End releases (not partial fixity) Opening
always replicated Output stations Local axes
Local axes Automatic mesh/no mesh
Automatic mesh/no mesh
(Below)
Table 9-2: The area, line and point object assignments whose replication
Object assignments you can control if you wish are listed in Table 9-2.
whose replication
you can control
Point Object Assignments Line Object Assignments Area Object Assignments
Panel zones Additional masses Additional masses
Restraints (supports) Line springs Area springs
Additional masses Partial fixities Stiffness modifiers
Point springs End and joint offsets Uniform loads
Link properties Link properties Temperature Loads
Forces Nonlinear hinges (pushover)
Ground displacements Property modifiers
Temperatures Point loads
Distributed loads
Temperature loads
Replicating Objects 9 - 13
You can control these object assignments by clicking the Op-

tions button when you are in the Replicate dialog box. This
brings up the Replicating Object Assignments dialog box where
you can check or uncheck boxes to indicate which assignments
you want replicated. By default all assignments are replicated
except for the diaphragm, pier and spandrel label assignments
discussed at the beginning of the subsection which are never
replicated.
9 Editing Coordinate System Grid Line Data

The Edit menu > Edit Grid Data command is used to define
new coordinate systems, modify existing coordinate systems and
edit the grid line data associated with the coordinate systems.
The default global coordinate/grid system is a Cartesian (rectan-
gular) coordinate system. Additional coordinate/grid systems can
be defined that are either Cartesian or Cylindrical. Cylindrical
coordinate systems are based on a set of radial and circumferen-
tial grid lines. See Chapter 21 for additional information on co-
ordinate systems and grid lines.
Grid lines may be edited in one direction at a time. When editing

grid line data for a particular grid line the following information
can be provided:
Note: • Grid ID: This is an identifier for the grid line. It can be
In ETABS you
left blank if desired.
can have Car-
tesian (rectan- • Coordinate/Spacing: This is the location of the grid line
gular) and/or in the specified coordinate system. Grid line locations
cylindrical co- can be specified by their coordinate or by their spacing.
ordinate/grid
systems. • Primary/Secondary Grid Lines: You can specify a
grid line as either a primary or a secondary line. Primary
grid lines are intended to represent the main architectural
grid lines of the building. Secondary grid lines are in-
tended as temporary reference lines for modeling. They
do not have a bubble assigned to them for the grid ID.
You can use the View menu > Set Display Options
command to collectively hide the secondary grid lines
from view.
9 - 14 Editing Coordinate System Grid Line Data

• Hide Grid Line: Checking this box for either primary or

secondary grid lines marks them as hidden and they are
not displayed regardless of the setting specified in the
View menu > Set Display Options feature.
• Switch Bubble Location: Checking this box moves the

bubble location to the other end of the grid line.
• Color: Clicking on the Color box allows you to change

the color of the grid line.
Note: After changing the color of a grid line using this

9
color box if you subsequently change the default color of
grid lines using the Options menu > Colors command
all grid lines will be set to the new default color except
for those that you have changed using this color box.
• Bubble Size: The grid line bubbles are drawn as hexa-

gons. The bubble size indicates the distance between two
opposing faces of the hexagon measured in the current
units of the model. This size applies to all bubbles in the
coordinate/grid system.
• Hide All Grid Lines: If this box is checked then all grid
lines (primary and secondary) in this coordinate/grid
system only are hidden. If you want to hide grid lines in
all coordinate systems then use the View menu > Set
Building View Options command. When using the
View menu > Set Building View Options command be
sure to turn off both primary and secondary grid lines.
• Reset to Default Color: Clicking this button sets the

color of all grid lines in this coordinate/grid system back
to their default color. Note that you can use the Option
menu > Colors command to set the default color for
grid lines.
• Locate System Origin: Clicking this button brings up a

dialog box that allows you to specify the location of the
origin of the coordinate system relative to the global co-
ordinate system. Note that this button is not visible if
you are editing the global coordinate/grid system. In the
Editing Coordinate System Grid Line Data 9 - 15

Global Y
Global Y
Figure 9-4:
Example of rotation
angle used to specify Added System X
orientation of added Angle = +330°
coordinate/grid sys- Angle = +30°
Global X
tems relative to the
global coordi- Global X
nate/grid system Angle = -30°
Added System X
9 a) b)
Locate System Origin dialog box you specify the fol-

lowing:
ü Global X: This is the global X coordinate of the ori-

gin of the coordinate/grid system.
ü Global Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the ori-

gin of the coordinate/grid system.
ü Rotation (deg): This angle, input in degrees, speci-

fies the orientation of the positive X-axis (or theta
equals 0 degrees radial line in a cylindrical system)
of the coordinate system relative to the positive
global X-axis. The angle is measured from the posi-
tive global X-axis to the coordinate system X-axis.
Positive angles appear counterclockwise when
viewed from above.
Figure 9-4 shows some examples. The figure shows

the global X-axis and the orientation of the X-axis
for the added system. Figure 9-4a shows an example
where the rotation angle is specified as 30 degrees.
Figure 9-4b shows an example where the rotation
angle could be specified as either 330 degrees or -30
degrees.
9 - 16 Editing Coordinate System Grid Line Data

Editing Story Data

You can use the Edit menu > Edit Story Data command to edit
story information and to insert new story levels or delete existing
story levels. When you execute the Edit menu > Edit Story
Data command a submenu appears with three options. They are
edit, insert story and delete story.
Clicking the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Edit command
brings up the Story Data dialog box. The items in this dialog box
are described in the sections titled "Editing Story Level Data"
9
and "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22.
Cautionary Note: Once you change something in the story data

and close the dialog box by clicking the OK button you can not
undo the change.
Inserting a New Story Level

Clicking the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Insert Story
command brings up the Insert New Story dialog box. You spec-
ify the following items in this dialog box:
• Story ID: This is the name of the new story level.
• Story Height: This is the interstory height (not elevation

above the base level) of the new story level.
• Insert Above Level: This is the story level that the new
story level is to be inserted above. It can be any story
level that currently exists in the model.
• Replicate New Story: You can specify an existing story

level that the new story level is to be replicated from. If
you specify an existing story level instead of None then
all of the framing and all of the assignments in the speci-
fied existing story level will be copied to the new story
level.
Note that specifying an existing story level (say Story

Level X) for this option instead of None is equivalent to
the following:
Editing Story Data 9 - 17

ü Create the new story level (call it Story Level Y)

using the None option in the Replicate New Story
area of the Insert New Story dialog box.
ü Select all of the objects on Story Level X and click

the Edit menu > Replicate command to open the
Replicate dialog box.
ü Select the Story tab and highlight Story Level Y in

the Replicate on Stories area of the dialog box.
9 ü Click the OK button.
When a new story level is inserted all story levels above it are
automatically moved up.
Deleting a Story Level

Clicking the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Delete Story
command brings up the Select Story to Delete dialog box where
you can specify the story to be deleted. When a story level is
deleted all story levels above it are automatically moved down.
Reference Planes and Reference Lines

You can use the Edit menu to create, modify and delete reference
planes and reference lines. Use the Edit menu > Edit Reference
Planes and Edit menu > Edit Reference Lines commands.
Note: Reference planes are horizontal planes at user-specified Z-

ordinates. The main purpose of these planes is to provide a hori-
When drawing
zontal plane/line that you can snap to when drawing objects in
objects you can
snap to refer-
elevation views. You can also view reference planes in a plan
ence planes and view. This option can be useful for adding mezzanine-type
lines. framing when you have not specified the mezzanine as a story
level in the story data.
9 - 18 Reference Planes and Reference Lines

Note the following about reference planes:
• If you draw vertical line objects or vertical area objects

(columns or walls) in plan on a reference plane level
then ETABS inserts one object from the reference plane
to the story level below and another object from the ref-
erence plane to the story level above.
Note: • When you draw vertical line or area objects (columns or

walls) in plan on a story level and there is a reference
9
You can view
and draw on
plane in that story level ETABS does not break the verti-
reference cal object at the reference plane. A single object is drawn
planes in plan from the story level to the story level below.
view.
Reference lines are vertical lines at user-specified global X and
Y coordinates. The main purpose of these lines is to be available
for snapping when drawing objects in elevation or plan view.
Reference lines appear as points in plan view.
Merging Points
Under the Options menu > Preferences > Dimen-
sions/Tolerances command one of the options is the Auto
Merge Tolerance. When points are created (drawn, moved, cop-
ied, replicated, etc.) such that they fall closer together than the
Auto Merge Tolerance the new point is automatically merged
into the existing point by ETABS.
Any points in the model may be merged at any time using the
Edit menu > Merge Points command. To use this command
you first select the points that you want to merge. Then you exe-
cute the command and specify a merge tolerance. The merge
then takes place. ETABS uses the following logic to merge the
points:
1. ETABS orders the selected points based first on the

number of grid lines that pass through them and based
second on the order in which they were drawn.
2. ETABS merges all selected points that are within the

specified merge tolerance of the first point in the sorted
list (if any) with the first point in the selected list.
Merging Points 9 - 19
3. The sorted list is updated by deleting any point that has

been merged to the first point on the sorted list and by
deleting the first point on the sorted list. This creates a
new first point on the sorted list.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until all points have been de-
leted from the sorted list.
A couple of special cases exist for merging points. They are:
•
9 Suppose one point falls exactly at a story level (call it
Story Level X) and a second point falls a very short dis-
tance above the first point. Thus the second point is as-
sociated with Story Level (X+1). In this case the point
above always merges into the point located at Story
Level X assuming, of course, that the distance between
the points is within the specified merge tolerance.
• If one point is located just below a story level and an-

other point is located just above the same story level,
and thus is actually associated with the story level above,
then those two points will never merge. This is true re-
gardless of the specified merge tolerance.
Aligning Points, Lines and Edges

The Edit menu > Align Points/Lines/Edges command provides
some powerful tools for aligning objects in your model. To use
this command you select the objects to be aligned and then you
specify a coordinate system, align option and align tolerance.
These items are discussed in the subsections below.
Important: Note the following about aligning points, lines and

edges:
• If a point object is moved using the Edit menu > Align

Points/Lines/Edges command then all objects con-
nected to the point object are reoriented. For example, if
the point object at the top of a column-type line object is
aligned (moved) in plan then the top of the column-type
line object moves with the point object. The bottom of
the column-type line object does not move. Note that in
9 - 20 Aligning Points, Lines and Edges

this case since the column-type line object is no longer

vertical, ETABS automatically changes it to a brace-type
line object.
Tip: • Suppose a line object is selected but the points at the end
of the line object are not selected. Next suppose that the
Use the Edit Edit menu > Align Points/Lines/Edges command is
menu > Align used to align (move) this line object. In this case the line
Points/Lines/
object moves but the point objects at the end of the line
Edges com-
object do not move. New point objects are created at the
9
mand to align
objects in your ends of the line object in its new position if necessary.
model and to Any other objects that were connected to the point ob-
trim or extend jects at the ends of the line object in its original location
line objects. remain where they were; they do not move in any way.
Similarly any assignments to the point objects at the
ends of the line object in its original location remain
where they were. If no other objects are connected to the
point objects at the ends of the line object in its original
location, and if there are no assignments made to these
point objects, then ETABS deletes them after the line
object is moved.
• When ETABS aligns an edge of an area object only the

edge of the area object being aligned actually moves. All
other edges of the area object remain in their original lo-
cation. Thus when an area object is aligned its shape
changes.
• Suppose an area object is selected but the points at the

corners of the area object are not selected. Next suppose
that the Edit menu > Align Points/Lines/Edges com-
mand is used to align (move) an edge of this area object.
In this case the edge of the area object moves but the
point objects at the ends of the edge of the area object do
not move. New point objects are created at the ends of
the edge of the area object in its new position if neces-
sary. Any other objects that were connected to the point
objects at the ends of the edge of the area object in its
original location remain where they were; they do not
move in any way. Similarly any assignments to the point
objects at the ends of the edge of the area object in its
original location remain where they were. If no other
objects are connected to the point objects at the ends of
Aligning Points, Lines and Edges 9 - 21

the edge of the area object in its original location and if

there are no assignments made to these point objects
then ETABS deletes them after the edge of the area ob-
ject is moved.
Coordinate System
The coordinate system specified in the Edit menu > Align
Points/Lines/Edges command indicates which coordinate/grid
9
system is to be considered for the following align options:
• Align to X-coordinate of.
• Align to Y-coordinate of.
• Align to Z-coordinate of.
• Align to X grid lines.
• Align to Y grid lines.
Align Options
There are eight separate align options available for the Edit
menu > Align Points/Lines/Edges command in ETABS. They
are:
• Align to X-coordinate of.
• Align to Y-coordinate of.
• Align to Z-coordinate of.
• Align to X grid lines.
• Align to Y grid lines.
• Trim selected lines at.
• Extend selected lines to.
• Align selected points to.
These options are discussed in the subsections below.

Align to X, Y or Z-Coordinate
For these options you specify the location of the coordinate that
you want to align to. Then if the appropriate coordinate of the
selected object is within the maximum move allowed of the
specified coordinate, the appropriate coordinate of the selected
object is changed to the specified coordinate.
For example suppose that you choose to align to an X-coordinate

of 4 and suppose that your maximum move allowed is 0.2. Then:
• Any selected point object that has an X-coordinate be- 9

tween 3.8 and 4.2 (in the specified coordinate system) is
moved such that it has an X-coordinate of 4. Selected
point objects with X-coordinates outside of the 3.8 to 4.2
range are not moved.
• Any selected line object where each of the ends of the

line has an X-coordinate between 3.8 and 4.2 (in the
specified coordinate system) is moved such that each of
its ends has an X-coordinate of 4. Selected line objects
with the X-coordinates of one or both ends outside of the
3.8 to 4.2 range are not moved.
• Any selected area object where two adjacent corner

points each have an X-coordinate between 3.8 and 4.2
(in the specified coordinate system) is resized such that
two adjacent corner points have an X-coordinate of 4.
Selected area objects where there are not two adjacent
corner points each having an X-coordinate between 3.8
and 4.2 are not resized. Note that the effect of changing
the coordinates of two adjacent corner points of the area
object is to move one of its edges.
Align to X or Y Grid Lines

For these options you specify which grid line you want to align
to. Then if the appropriate coordinate of the selected object is
within the maximum move allowed of the specified grid line, the
appropriate coordinate of the selected object is changed to be the
same as the specified grid line.

When you are aligning to X grid lines the X-coordinate of the

selected object is examined and if it is in the appropriate range it
is modified. The Y and Z coordinates are not affected.
When you are aligning to Y grid lines the Y-coordinate of the

selected object is examined and if it is in the appropriate range it
is modified. The X and Z coordinates are not affected.
For example suppose that you choose to align to an X grid line at

a coordinate of 4 and suppose that your maximum move allowed
9 is 0.2. Then:
• Any selected point object that has an X-coordinate be-

tween 3.8 and 4.2 (in the specified coordinate system) is
moved such that it has an X-coordinate of 4 to match the
grid line. Selected point objects with X-coordinates out-
side of the 3.8 to 4.2 range are not moved.
• Any selected line object where each of the ends of the

line has an X-coordinate between 3.8 and 4.2 (in the
specified coordinate system) is moved such that each of
its ends has an X-coordinate of 4 to match the grid line.
Selected line objects with the X-coordinates of one or
both ends outside of the 3.8 to 4.2 range are not moved.
• Any selected area object where two adjacent corner

points each have an X-coordinate between 3.8 and 4.2
(in the specified coordinate system) is resized such that
two adjacent corner points have an X-coordinate of 4 to
match the grid line. Selected area objects where there are
not two adjacent corner points each having an X-
coordinate between 3.8 and 4.2 are not resized. Note that
the effect of changing the coordinates of two adjacent
corner points of the area object is to move one of its
edges.

Trim or Extend Selected Lines

These options allow you to trim or extend line objects. Recall
that in ETABS to insure that a beam is connected to a girder the
end of the beam should fall exactly on the girder, not some dis-
tance away as it might be drawn in the building plans. If you im-
port a floor plan from a *.DXF file it is likely that the beams will
be drawn such that they stop short of the girders. Similarly the
girders will be drawn such that they stop short of the columns.
9
These commands allow you to fix such things in your ETABS
model.
For these options you specify what you want the selected lines to
be trimmed at. Then if the end of the selected line object is
within the maximum move allowed of the specified trim (extend)
item, the line option is trimmed (extended) to that item.
Four different choices are available for the trim (extend) item.
They are:
• Any line object that has frame section properties as-

signed to it.
• Any line object or any edge of an area object.
• Any line object.
• Any edge of an area object.
Note that the specified trim (extend) item need not fall in the
same plane as the selected line objects. For example if you
choose line objects as your extend item and you select a girder as
the object to be extended then that girder can be extended to the
line object representing the column even though the girder falls
in a horizontal plane and the column falls in a vertical plane.
Consider the example shown in Figure 9-5. Figure 9-5a shows a

floor plan as it might be drawn on your building plans. Note that
the beams stop short of the girder and the beams and girders stop
short of the columns. Also, in this example the beams stop short
of the wall.

Column 1 Column 1
Beam 1 Beam 1
Wall Below
Wall Below
Girder 1
Girder 1
Beam 2 Beam 2
9 Column 2 Column 2
Beam 3 Beam 3
a) Floor Plan as Drawn in Building Plans b) Floor Plan in ETABS Model
(Above) You could select Beams 1, 2 and 3 and Girder 1 and execute the
Figure 9-5: Edit menu > Align Points/Lines/Edges command using the
Example of extend- "Extend selected lines to" align option and specifying that the
ing selected lines lines are to be extended to "Line or Edge" to obtain the model
shown in Figure 9-5b as long as the maximum required line ex-
tension is less than your specified maximum move allowed. This
would give your model the correct connectivity between the
various elements.
The left side of Beams 1, 2 and 3 are extended to meet the top
edge of the vertical area object that represents the wall below.
The right side of Beam 1 is extended to meet the vertical line
object that represents Column 1. The right side of Beam 2 is ex-
tended to meet the horizontal line object that represents Girder 1.
The right side of Beam 3 is extended to meet the vertical line
object that represents Column 2. The top side of Girder 1 is ex-
tended to meet the vertical line object that represents Column 1.
The bottom side of Girder 1 is extended to meet the vertical line
object that represents Column 2.
If you specified that the lines are to be extended to "Edge" then

only the left side of Beams 1, 2 and 3 are extended to meet the
top edge of the vertical area object that represents the wall be-
low. No other line extensions are done in this case.

Assume that the beams, girder and column are all assigned frame
section properties. If you specified that the lines are to be ex-
tended to "Frame Sections" then all of the extensions shown in
Figure 9-5b are done except that the left side of Beams 1, 2 and 3
are not extended to meet the top edge of the vertical area object
that represents the wall below.
Note the following about trimming and extending selected lines:
• If two or more specified trim (extend) items fall within

the maximum allowed move distance to the end of the
line then the trim (extend) is done to the item that is
9
closer to the end of the line.
For example, suppose that in Figure 9-5 the right end of

Beam 2 is within the specified maximum allowed move
distance to both Girder 1 and the edge of the slab. If you
select Beam 2 and specify that the lines are to be ex-
tended to "Line or Edge" then the right end of Beam 2 is
extended to Girder 1, not the edge of the slab, because
the right end of the beam is closer to Girder 1 than it is
to the edge of the slab.
• Line objects are always trimmed (extended) along their

longitudinal axis.
• Specified trim (extend) items (frame sections, line ob-

jects or edges of area objects) are only considered if they
are visible in the active window. You can use this fea-
ture together with the View menu > Show Selection
Only command to get additional control of the trimming
(extending) of line objects.
Align Selected Points

You can align selected points to the following items:
• Any line object that has frame section properties as-

signed to it.
• Any line object or any edge of an area object.
• Any line object.

• Any edge of an area object.
When you use this option any selected point is aligned with the
closest specified item if that item is within the specified maxi-
mum move allowed. Specified items (frame sections, line objects
or edges of area objects) are only considered if they are visible in
the active window. You can use this feature together with the
View menu > Show Selection Only command to get additional
control for aligning points.
9 When checking for the closest specified item to a selected point

ETABS measures the perpendicular distance to line and edges of
area objects. When a point is moved to align with an item it is
either moved perpendicular to the line object or edge of the area
object.
Align Tolerance
The align tolerance is a distance that is specified in the current
units. If the selected object is within the align tolerance distance
of whatever it is specified to be aligned with, then the selected
object is moved. If it is not within the align tolerance distance
then it is not moved.
When aligning line objects to an X, Y or Z coordinate or to an X

or Y grid line, the line object is only moved if both of the end
points of the line object are within the specified maximum move
allowed. If you have instead, or in addition, selected the point
objects at the ends of the line object then it is possible to have
one end of the line object move (align) and not the other. This
happens if the alignment is based on the point object since the
line object connected to the point object is reoriented when the
point object moves.
Similarly, when aligning the edge of an area object to an X, Y or

Z coordinate or to an X or Y grid line, the edge of the area object
is only moved if both of its end points are within the specified
maximum move allowed. If you have instead, or in addition, se-
lected the point objects at the ends of the edge of the area object
then it is possible to have just one of the point objects move
(align).

Moving Point, Line and Area Objects

You can use the Edit menu > Move Points/Lines/Areas com-
Tip:
mand to move selected objects in any direction. You can specify
When you move distances in the global X, Y and Z directions that the object is to
objects in the Z be moved. One restriction on the movement is that when you
direction they move objects in the Z direction they can not cross a story level.
can not cross a See the subsection below titled "Moving Objects in the Z Direc-
story level.
tion" for more information.
When you move a point object all line and area objects attached 9
to the point are reoriented or resized to account for the move-
ment. For example, if you move a point object at the top of a
column then the column will become sloped. (Note that ETABS
would then consider this column to be a brace).
When you move a line object the line object moves but the point
objects at the end of the line object do not move. New point ob-
jects are created at the ends of the line object in its new position
if necessary. Any other objects that were connected to the point
objects at the ends of the line object in its original location re-
main where they were; they do not move in any way. Similarly
any assignments to the point objects at the ends of the line object
in its original location remain where they were. If no other ob-
jects are connected to the point objects at the ends of the line
object in its original location and if there are no assignments
made to these point objects then ETABS deletes them after the
line object is moved.
Similarly, when you move an area object the area object moves
but the point objects at the corners of the area object do not
move. New point objects are created at the corners of the area
object in its new position if necessary. Any other objects that
were connected to the point objects at the corners of the area
object in its original location remain where they were; they do
not move in any way. Similarly any assignments to the point
objects at the corners of the area object in its original location
remain where they were. If no other objects are connected to the
point objects at the corners of the area object in its original loca-
tion and if there are no assignments made to these point objects
then ETABS deletes them after the area object is moved.
Moving Point, Line and Area Objects 9 - 29

Moving Objects in the Z Direction

You can only move objects in the Z-direction within their own
story level or to the story level below. You can not specify a
delta Z dimension that requires an object to move across a story
level.
For example, suppose you have a four-story building with 10-

foot high story heights at all levels. Thus the first story level is at
an elevation of 10 feet, the second story level is at 20 feet, the
9 third story level is at 30 feet and the fourth story level is at 40

feet. Further suppose that you are moving an area object corner
point that occurs at the midheight of the third story level, that is,
at an elevation of 25 feet.
You can specify a delta Z dimension for this corner point be-
tween -5 feet and +5 feet inclusive, that is between the distances
of the second and third story levels. If you specify a delta Z di-
mension less than the -5 feet then ETABS moves the point to the
second story level elevation. If you specify a Z coordinate
greater than +5 feet then ETABS moves the point to the third
story level elevation. If you specify a Z coordinate between -5
feet and +5 feet, inclusive, then ETABS moves the point to the
specified location.
Important Note: In some cases moving a point object in the Z

direction would cause line and/or area objects that are attached to
the point object to cross story levels. In such cases ETABS does
not allow the move to take place.
Expanding and Shrinking Areas

You can select an area object and then use the Edit menu > Ex-
pand/Shrink Areas command to expand or shrink an area ob-
Note: ject. When you specify an offset value each edge of the area ob-
ject is moved that amount in a direction perpendicular to the
Positive offset edge.
values expand
an area object Positive offset values cause the edges to move away from the
and negative interior of the area object, that is, they expand the object. Nega-
offset values
tive offset values cause the edges to move toward the exterior of
shrink it.
the area object, that is, they shrink the object.
9 - 30 Expanding and Shrinking Areas

If you specify a negative offset value that causes the area object
to collapse on itself then the command is ignored and the object
is not shrunk. For example suppose you have a rectangular area
object whose dimensions are 40 inches by 60 inches. If you
specify an offset value of -20 inches or less (e.g., -25 inches)
then the area object would collapse on itself because when each
of the sides that are 40 inches apart move toward each other by
20 inches the two sides are in the same location and the area ob-
ject is invalid. If the two sides that are 40 inches apart are each
moved toward the other more than 20 inches then the two sides
would have to cross (overlap) each other. This is not allowed. 9
Useful Feature: Typically when you select an area object and
use the Edit menu > Expand/Shrink Areas command all sides
of the area object are moved. It is possible to select one or more
sides of an area object individually and have the Edit menu >
Expand/Shrink Areas command only apply to the selected
sides of the area object. Use the following steps to do this:
• Press and release the E key on your keyboard to enter the

edge select mode. In this mode you can click on the edge
of an area object and that edge is selected. You are not
able to select entire area objects by clicking inside them
Tip:
in this mode.
You can expand
or shrink se- • Click on the area object edge(s) that you want to select.
lected edges of
area objects. • Use the Edit menu > Expand/Shrink Areas command
in the normal fashion.
• When you are finished selecting area objects edges press

and release the space bar on your keyboard to return to
the normal area object select mode where you select en-
tire area objects by clicking inside of them. Note that
you do not automatically return to the normal area object
select mode. You must specifically press and release the
space bar or the Esc key on your keyboard to do this.
Expanding and Shrinking Areas 9 - 31

9 c) Area Object with

a) Expanded Area Object b) Shrunk Area Object One Side Expanded
(Above) Figure 9-6 shows some examples of expanded and shrunk area
Figure 9-6: objects. In the figure the dashed line represents the original area
Example of ex- object and the solid line represents the final area object after it is
panded and shrunk expanded or shrunk. Note that in Figure 9-6c since only one edge
area objects of the area object is moved the solid line lies on top of the
dashed line for all other edges.
Merging Areas
You can select two area objects that have a common edge or
overlap and then use the Edit menu > Merge Areas command
to merge the area object into one area object. You can not merge
more than two area objects at a time in the same command.
When you merge two area objects the new area object takes on
the properties and assignments of the area object with the larger
area. If the two area objects have exactly the same area then the
property and assignments come from the first drawn area object.
Since you may not remember which area object was drawn first
you should carefully check the assignments to the new combined
area object in this case.
Figure 9-7 shows some examples of merged area objects.
9 - 32 Merging Areas
Figure 9-7:
Examples of merged a)
area objects
b)
c)
9
d)
e)
f)
Joining Lines
You can select two or more collinear line objects with common
end points and the same type of property (frame section, link or
none) and then use the Edit menu > Join Lines command to
combine the line objects into a single line object. Note the fol-
lowing about combined line objects.
• Combined line objects must be collinear.
• Combined line objects must have a common end point.
• Combined line objects must all have the same type of

property. In other words they must all have frame sec-
tion properties, or they must all have link properties or
they must all have no properties.
Joining Lines 9 - 33
• When line objects with frame section properties are

joined the section property assigned to the combined line
object is the one that had the largest area. If two of the
combined frame sections have the same area then the
property of the first drawn object is used.
• Load and mass assignments from the unjoined line ob-

jects are combined on the joined object.
• Assignments to the unjoined line objects that would be

9 illegal in middle of the joined line object are ignored.
For example frame member end releases, rigid end zones
and joint offsets that would occur in the center of joined
frame members are ignored.
Figure 9-8 shows some examples. Item a in the figure shows that
two collinear line objects with a common end point (and the
same property type assignment) are joined into one line object.
Item b shows that five collinear line objects can be joined at the
same time. Items c and d show that two sets of collinear line ob-
jects can be joined simultaneously. The two sets of line objects
can have different property type assignments but all of the prop-
erty type assignments within either set of line objects must be the
same.
Item e in Figure 9-8 illustrates that the collinear line objects must
have a common end point otherwise they are not joined. If you
want to join the example shown in Figure 9-8e you should move
one of the center joints so that it is coincident with the other
center joint and then perform the join.
Figure 9-8f illustrates that assignments to the unjoined line ob-

jects that would be illegal in middle of the joined line object are
ignored. In this case a moment release that is in the center of the
combined beam is ignored. If you want this moment release to
remain then you should not join the line objects.
9 - 34 Joining Lines
Figure 9-8: a) 1 2 1
Examples of joined
line objects
b) 1 2 3 4 5 1
c) 1 2 3 4 1 2
1 2 3 1 9
5
d) 2
4
1
Not a valid join. The two
e) line objects do not have
common end points.
f) 1 2 1
Moment
release
Dividing Lines
You can select one or more line objects and then use the Edit
menu > Divide Lines command to divide the line object into
multiple line objects. Several options are available for dividing
the line objects:
• Divide into Objects: This option divides the selected

line object(s) into the specified number of line objects.
The divided line objects are all the same length.
• Break at Intersections with Selected Lines and

Points: This option breaks each selected line at any
point where it intersects another selected line or point.
Figure 9-9 shows some examples.
Dividing Lines 9 - 35
Figure 9-9: 4 2
Examples of break-
1 1
ing line objects at 2 3
intersections with a)
selected lines and
points
5 5 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
9
b)
Figure 9-9a shows two crossing line objects. Initially the

line objects are not connected at their intersection. When
the two line objects are selected and the Break at Inter-
sections with Selected Lines and Points option is used to
divide the lines, each of the lines is broken into two ob-
jects at the intersection point.
Figure 9-9b shows a common situation in a chevron

braced frame. Notice that the line object representing the
top beam (labeled 5) spans from one column to the other
and is not broken at the intersection with the braces. To
break this beam at the intersection with the braces you
could select the beam and one of the braces (say you se-
lect the line objects labeled 2 and 5) and use the Break at
Intersections with Selected Lines and Points option. Al-
ternatively you could select the point at the top of the
braces and the top beam (line object labeled 5) to
achieve the same result.
In either case shown in Figure 9-9 ETABS would pro-

vide connectivity at the intersection points regardless of
whether or not the line objects are divided unless the in-
tersecting line objects are indicated not to be meshed
using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Automatic
Frame Mesh/No Mesh > Don't Mesh It command. In
most cases manual breaking up of intersecting line ob-
jects as shown in Figure 9-9 is not necessary unless dif-
ferent properties are to be assigned or a different label is
required. The example in Figure 9-9 is merely intended
9 - 36 Dividing Lines
to illustrate the Break at Intersections with Selected

Lines and Points option for dividing lines.
• Break at Intersections with Visible Grid Lines: This

option breaks each selected line at any location where it
intersects a visible grid line regardless of the coordinate
system associated with the grid line.
Note the following about divided line objects.
• The property assignments to divided line objects are the

same as the original line object. 9
• Load and mass assignments on the original line object
are appropriately broken up onto the divided line ob-
jects.
• Assignments that occur at the ends of the original line

object, such as releases and rigid end zones, occur at the
appropriate ends of the two end line objects when the
original object is divided.
Reshaper Tool
You can activate the reshaper tool by either clicking on the Re-
shaper button, , on the side toolbar or by clicking Draw
menu > Reshape Object. When you activate the reshaper tool
you enter reshape mode. Once you are in reshape mode you re-
main in that mode until you do one of the following:
• Click the Pointer button, , on the side toolbar.
• Press the Esc key on your keyboard.
• Choose one of the drawing options from the Draw menu

or the side toolbar.
• Click on one of the select items in the Select menu.
• Run an analysis.
Reshaper Tool 9 - 37
Once you are in reshape mode you can click on an area, line or
point object and modify it in one of several ways. The ways you
Tip: can modify each of these objects are described in the subsections
When you re-
below.
shape objects
Whether you are reshaping area, line or point objects be sure to
you can not
move them in read the subsection below titled "Moving/Reshaping Objects in
the Z direction the Z Direction."
such that they
cross a story Note that the drawing constraints discussed in the subsection ti-
9 level. tled "Drawing Constraints in ETABS" in Chapter 12 are avail-
able when you use the reshaper tool.
Reshaping Area Objects

When you are in reshape mode and you click on an area object a
series of selection handles (squares that are the opposite color
from the background color) appear at all corners of the area ob-
ject. You can then do any of the following:
• Left click on the area object and while holding down the
left mouse button drag it to a new location. The area ob-
ject retains its original shape; it is simply relocated. Note
that when you move the area object in this way the cor-
ner points of the area object are disconnected from any
other objects they might have been connected to. Thus
reshaping the area object in this manner only affects the
Note: area object, not any surrounding elements that it may be
The drawing connected to.
constraints
discussed in the • Left click on one of the corner points of the area object
subsection ti- and while holding down the left mouse button drag the
tled "Drawing corner point to a new location. The other corner points
Constraints in remain in their original locations; the area object takes
ETABS" in on a different shape. Note that when you move the cor-
Chapter 12 are ner point of an area object in this way the corner point is
available when disconnected from any other objects it might have been
you use the connected to. Thus reshaping the area object in this
reshaper tool.
manner only affects the area object, not any surrounding
elements that it may be connected to.
9 - 38 Reshaper Tool
• Right click on one of the corner points of the area object.

This brings up a dialog box where you can modify the
global X and/or Y and/or Z coordinates of the corner
point. The other corner points remain in their original lo-
cations; the area object takes on a different shape. Note
that when you move the corner point of an area object in
this way the corner point is disconnected from any other
objects it might have been connected to. Thus reshaping
the area object in this manner only affects the area ob-
ject, not any surrounding elements that it may be con-
nected to. 9
See the subsection below titled " Moving/Reshaping Objects in
the Z Direction."
Reshaping Line Objects

When you are in reshape mode and you click on a line object,
selection handles (squares that are the opposite color from the
background color) appear at the ends of the line object. You can
then do any of the following:
• Left click on the line object and while holding down the
left mouse button drag it to a new location. The line ob-
ject retains its original length; it is simply relocated.
Note that when you move the line object in this way the
end points of the line object are disconnected from any
other objects they might have been connected to. Thus
reshaping the line object in this manner only affects the
line object, not any surrounding elements that it may be
connected to.
• Left click on one of the end points of the line object and
while holding down the left mouse button drag the end
point to a new location. The other end point remains in
its original location; the length of the line object
changes. Note that when you move the end point of a
line object in this way the end point is disconnected from
any other objects it might have been connected to. Thus
reshaping the line object in this manner only affects the
line object, not any surrounding elements that it may be
connected to.
• Right click on one of the end points of the line object.

This brings up a dialog box where you can modify the
global X and/or Y and/or Z coordinates of the end point.
The other end point remains in its original location; the
length of the line object changes. Note that when you
move the end point of a line object in this way the end
point is disconnected from any other objects it might
have been connected to. Thus reshaping the line object
in this manner only affects the line object, not any sur-
rounding elements that it may be connected to.
9 See the subsection below titled " Moving/Reshaping Objects in
the Z Direction."
Reshaping Dimension Lines

Dimension lines are discussed in the subsection titled "Dimen-
sion Lines" in Chapter 12. You can use the reshaper tool to move
a dimension line to a new location. You can not lengthen or
shorten a dimension line, even using the reshaper tool.
To relocate the dimension line first click on the line so that the
selection handles (squares that are the opposite color from the
background color) appear at the ends of the dimension line. Then
Left click on the dimension line and while holding down the left
mouse button drag it to a new location. The dimension line re-
tains its original length; it is simply relocated. The leader lines
are automatically adjusted as needed.
Reshaping Point Objects

When you are in reshape mode and you click on a point object a
selection handle (square that is the opposite color from the back-
ground color) appears on the point object. You can then do any
of the following:
• Left click on the point object and while holding down

the left mouse button drag it to a new location. When
you move the point object in this way all of the objects
connected to the point move too; they are either reori-
ented or resized, or both. Unlike area and line objects the
9 - 40 Reshaper Tool
point object does not disconnect from the objects it is

attached to when it is reshaped/moved.
• Right click on the point object. This brings up a dialog

box where you can modify the global X and/or Y and/or
Z coordinates of the point. When you move the point
object in this way all of the objects connected to the
point move too; they are either reoriented or resized, or
both. Unlike area and line objects the point object does
not disconnect from the objects it is attached to when it
is reshaped/moved. 9
See the subsection below titled " Moving/Reshaping Objects in
the Z Direction."
Moving/Reshaping Objects in the Z Direction

You can only move/reshape objects in the Z-direction within
their own story level or to the story level below. You can not
specify a Z coordinate that requires an object to move across a
story level.
For example, suppose you have a four-story building with 10-

foot high story heights at all levels. Thus the first story level is at
an elevation of 10 feet, the second story level is at 20 feet, the
third story level is at 30 feet and the fourth story level is at 40
feet. Further suppose that you are relocating an area object cor-
ner point that occurs at the midheight of the third story level, that
is, at an elevation of 25 feet.
You can specify a new Z coordinate for this corner point be-
tween 20 feet and 30 feet inclusive, that is between the eleva-
tions of the second and third story levels inclusive. If you specify
a Z coordinate less than the second story level elevation then
ETABS moves the point to the second story level elevation. If
you specify a Z coordinate greater than the third story level ele-
vation then ETABS moves the point to the third story level ele-
vation. If you specify a Z coordinate between the second and
third story elevations, inclusive, then ETABS moves the point to
the specified elevation.
The ETABS Nudge Feature

ETABS includes a nudge feature that allows you to modify the
geometry of your model in a plan view. To use the nudge feature
you simply select the item(s) that you want to nudge and then
press the Ctrl key and one of the arrow keys on your keyboard
simultaneously. Note the following about the nudge feature:
• The nudge feature only works in plan view.
9 • You can nudge any selected point, line or area object.

You can also select dimensions lines and nudge them.
• Pressing the Ctrl key plus the right arrow key nudges the
object in the positive global X direction.
Tip: • Pressing the Ctrl key plus the left arrow key nudges the
object in the negative global X direction.
You can nudge
dimension • Pressing the Ctrl key plus the up arrow key nudges the
lines. object in the positive global Y direction.
• Pressing the Ctrl key plus the down arrow key nudges
the object in the negative global Y direction.
• The distance that the object(s) are nudged (moved) when

you press the Ctrl and arrow keys is specified in the
ETABS Dimension/Tolerance Preferences. You can see
this item by clicking Option menu > Preferences > Di-
mensions/Tolerances. The name of the item that controls
the movement is Plan Nudge Value.
• You can not nudge objects in the Z direction.
• Similar to the Edit menu > Move Points/Lines/Areas

command, when you nudge an area object without hav-
ing selected the corner points of the object the area ob-
ject moves but the point objects at the corners of the area
object do not move. New point objects are created at the
corners of the area object in its new position if neces-
sary. Any other objects that were connected to the point
objects at the corners of the area object in its original lo-
cation remain where they were; they do not move in any
9 - 42 The ETABS Nudge Feature

way. In other words the area object is disconnected from

other objects when it is nudged.

command, when you nudge a line object without having
selected the end points of the object the line object
moves but the point objects at the ends of the line object
do not move. New point objects are created at the ends
of the line object in its new position if necessary. Any
other objects that were connected to the point objects at
the ends of the line object in its original location remain
where they were; they do not move in any way. In other
9
words the line object is disconnected from other objects
when it is nudged.

command, when you nudge a point object all of the ob-
jects connected to the point move too; they are either re-
oriented or resized, or both. Unlike area and line objects
the point object does not disconnect from the objects it is
attached to when it is nudged.
The ETABS Nudge Feature 9 - 43

Chapter 10
10
The ETABS View Menu
General
The View menu in ETABS provides basic options and tools for
viewing your ETABS model. This chapter discusses those op-
tions and tools.
The viewing options available on the View menu should not be

confused with the display options available on the Display menu.
The View menu items control the type of view and the visibility
of objects. The Display menu items control the display of input
and output items. The Display menu is discussed in Chapter 16.
Types of Views
The following types of views are available in ETABS:
• Three-dimensional (3D)
• Plan
10 - 1
• Elevation
• Perspective
• Custom
Each of these types of views are briefly discussed in separate

subsections below.
Three Dimensional (3D) Views

10 You can set a window to a three-dimensional (3D) view either
by using the View menu > Set 3D View command or by click-
ing the 3D View button, , on the main (top) toolbar. If you
use the menu command the Set 3D View dialog box is opened
where you can define the view direction by specifying a plan an-
gle, elevation angle and an aperture angle. All angles are speci-
fied in degrees. The view direction defines the location where
you are standing as you view the building from the outside.
Figure 10-1a shows a three dimensional view of a building using

the default view direction of plan angle = 225 degrees, elevation
angle = 35 degrees and aperture angle = 60 degrees. Figures 10-
1b, c and d illustrate how the plan, elevation and aperture angles
are defined. Following are explanations of the terms used in Fig-
ure 10-1.
• Eye point: This is the location from which you are

viewing the building.
• Target point: This is the geometric center of the build-

ing.
• View direction: This is defined by a line drawn from the

eye point to the target point.
• Plan angle: This is the angle (in degrees) from the posi-
tive global X-axis to the line defining the view direction
measured in the horizontal global XY plane. A positive
angle appears counterclockwise as you look down on the
model. Any value between -360 degrees and +360 de-
grees, inclusive, is allowed for the plan angle.
10 - 2 Types of Views
Chapter 10 - The ETABS View Menu
Figure 10-1:
Illustration of plan, Y
elevation and aper- Plan
ture angles used to angle,
225°
define a 3D view
Z Building
X
X Target
Y
point
Plan angle = 225° View Plan view

Elevation angle = 35° Eye direction of building
Aperture angle = 60° point
10
a) Default 3D View b) Plan Angle
Z Eye
View
point
direction
Target
point
X, Y
Elevation
Elevation angle, 35°
view of
building
c) Elevation Angle
Target
point
Aperture 3D view
angle, 35° Z of building
X
Y
Eye
point
d) Aperture Angle
Types of Views 10 - 3
• Elevation angle: This is the angle (in degrees) from the

global XY plane to the line defining the view direction.
Note:
A positive angle starts from the global XY plane and
The plan and proceeds toward the positive global Z-axis. A negative
elevation an- angle starts from the global XY plane and proceeds to-
gles together ward the negative global Z-axis. Any value between -
control the di- 360 degrees and +360 degrees, inclusive, is allowed for
rection from the
the elevation angle.
eye point to the
target point.
• Aperture angle: The plan angle and the elevation angle
The aperture
together define the direction from the eye point to the
10
angle controls
the distance target point. The aperture angle sets the distance from
from the eye the eye point to the target point. This distance is set as
point to the follows:
target point.
ü ETABS constructs the view direction line from the
eye point to the target point.
ü ETABS constructs a 3D bounding rectangular box

that just encloses the model.
ü ETABS passes a plane through the target point and

perpendicular to the view direction line.
ü ETABS projects the eight corner points of the

bounding box onto the plane. Call these the pro-
jected corner points.
ü ETABS constructs lines from the eye point to the

projected corner points of the bounding box. Eight
such lines are constructed since there are eight cor-
ner points. Call these eight lines corner point lines.
ü ETABS locates the eye point along the view direc-

tion line such that the largest angle between the view
direction line and any of the eight corner point lines
is equal to one-half of the specified aperture angle.
This ensures that the entire structure is included in
the view.
Note that ETABS does not allow the eye point to be lo-
cated inside the structure.
The 3D View dialog box has four fast view buttons labeled 3-d,
xy, xz and yz. The fast view buttons automatically set the plan,
elevation and aperture angle to give you the specified 3D view.
The fast view 3D view is as shown in Figure 10-1. The other fast
views give you 3D perspective views of the specified planes.
Clicking the 3D View button, , on the toolbar gives you the

default 3D view with the plan, elevation and aperture angle as
specified in Figure 10-1.
When the active window is showing a 3D view you can click the
Rotate 3D View button, , on the main toolbar and use the 10
mouse to adjust the view direction. Once you have clicked the
button simply left click the mouse in the window with the 3D
view and while holding down the mouse left button drag the
mouse to adjust the view direction. Note that as soon as you left
click the mouse in the window with the 3D view a bounding box
(dashed lines enclosing the model) appears and that as you drag
the mouse the orientation of the bounding box changes showing
you the new orientation of the model. When you release the left
mouse button the entire model is redrawn in the new view direc-
tion.
Refer to the subsection below titled "Perspective Views" for ad-

ditional information on three-dimensional views.
Plan Views
Note: You can set a window to a plan view either by using the View
menu > Set Plan View command or by clicking the Plan View
You can create
plan views of button, , on the main (top) toolbar. When you click the menu
story levels and item or the toolbar button the Select Plan Level dialog box ap-
reference pears. From this dialog box you can select the story level or ref-
planes. erence plane for which you want to show a plan view. Refer to
the section titled "Reference Planes and Reference Lines" in
Chapter 9 for additional information on reference planes.
When the active window is a plan view you can use the Move
Up in List button, , and the Move Down in List button,
, to quickly change to other plan views. The list referred to is
the one you see in the Select Plan Level dialog box when you
initially set the plan view.
In plan view the following objects are visible assuming, of

course, that they are specified as visible in the Set Building View
Options dialog box that is accessed through the View menu >
Set Building View Options command:
• All area, line and point objects that lie in the horizontal
plane of the plan view. This horizontal plane occurs at
the story level elevation for plan views of story levels
10 and at the reference plane elevation for plan views of
reference planes.
• All column-type line objects that either have an end

point in the considered plan view or pass through the
considered plan view. Note that column-type line objects
can not pass through plan views at story levels. They can
only pass through plan views at reference plane levels.
• All wall-type area objects that either have corner points

in the considered plan view or pass through the consid-
ered plan view. Note that wall-type area objects can not
pass through plan views at story levels. They can only
pass through plan views at reference plane levels.
Note that braces and ramps are never visible in a plan view.
Braces are visible in elevation view and in any three-dimensional
view including all perspective views. Ramps are visible in any
three-dimensional view including all perspective views.

ditional information on plan views. See Chapter 13 for special
selection rules when windowing in plan view.
Elevation Views
By default ETABS defines elevation views along each of the de-
fined primary grid lines in your model. You can use the View
menu > Set Elevation View command or by clicking the Eleva-
tion View button, , on the main (top) toolbar to display the
Set Elevation View dialog box which allows you to add addi-
tional elevation views, modify or delete existing elevation views

and indicate which elevation view you want to display.
Developed elevation views can be displayed but not defined

from the Set Elevation View dialog box. Refer to the section ti-
tled "Developed Elevations" in Chapter 12 for an explanation of
developed elevations and information on defining developed
elevation views.
Note: The Set Elevation View dialog box includes a list of the defined
elevation names (including the names of defined developed ele-
Elevation views
are automati-
cally created
vations, if any) and several command buttons. To indicate the
elevation view that you want to display simply highlight the ap- 10
along primary propriate elevation name in the Set Elevation View dialog box
grid lines. They and click the OK button. To delete a defined elevation view
are not auto- highlight the elevation in the Set Elevation View dialog box and
matically cre- click the Delete Elevation Name button.
ated along sec-
ondary grid To define a new elevation view click the Add New Elevation
lines. button in the Set Elevation View dialog box. (Note: The Add
New Elevation button is not used to define developed eleva-
tions. Use the Draw menu > Draw Special Items > Draw De-
veloped Elevation Definition command to define a developed
elevation.) To modify an existing elevation view highlight the
elevation in the Set Elevation View dialog box and click the
Modify/Show Elevation button. Note that you can not modify
the default elevations along the grid lines that are created by
ETABS, however, you can delete them. Also you can not modify
user-defined developed elevations, however, you can delete
them.
Both the Add New Elevation and the Modify/Show Elevation

commands bring up the Elevation Data dialog box. Here you
specify a name, coordinate system and location for the elevation.
The location is either an X or Y ordinate in the specified coordi-
nate system. If you specify an X ordinate then the elevation is a
view of the YZ plane in the specified coordinate system at the
specified X ordinate. Similarly, if you specify a Y ordinate then
the elevation is a view of the XZ plane in the specified coordi-
nate system at the specified Y ordinate.
When the active window is an elevation view you can use the
Move Up in List button, , and the Move Down in List but-
ton, , to quickly change to other elevation views. The list re-

ferred to is the one you see in the Set Elevation View dialog box
when you initially set the elevation view.

ditional information on elevation views.
Perspective Views
The Perspective Toggle button, , located on the main (top)
10 toolbar is a useful tool. It has slightly different behavior de-

pending on whether it is used in a plan, elevation or three-
dimensional view.
Perspective Toggle in a Plan View

When you click the Perspective Toggle button in a plan view
the view switches to a 3D perspective view. If the plan view is of
a story level then the 3D perspective view only shows the objects
that are associated with that story level. Objects associated with
other story levels are not shown. If the plan view is of a refer-
ence plane then the perspective view only shows the objects that
are associated with the story level that the reference plane is as-
sociated with.
Note:
While in the perspective view the Rotate 3D View button, ,
A perspective
on the main toolbar is active and you can use it to adjust the view
view of a plan
view shows direction.
only the objects
that are a part As the name indicates, the Perspective Toggle button is a toggle
of the story switch. Thus you can use it once in a plan view to switch to a
level associated perspective view of a story level. If you later click the Perspec-
with the plan tive Toggle button again in this same view it will switch you
view. back to your original plan view.
Perspective Toggle in an Elevation View

When you click the Perspective Toggle button in an elevation
view the view switches to a 3D perspective view of the entire
structure. The initial direction of the 3D perspective view is
looking directly at the elevation that was displayed with the ele-
vation angle set to 0 degrees and the aperture angle set to 60 de-
grees. If the elevation displayed is a developed elevation then the
initial direction of the 3D perspective view is looking directly at
the first segment of the developed elevation.
While in the perspective view the Rotate 3D View button, ,

on the main toolbar is active and you can use it to adjust the view
direction.
As the name indicates, the Perspective Toggle button is a toggle

switch. Thus you can use it once in an elevation view to switch
to a perspective view of structure. If you later click the Perspec-
tive Toggle button again in this same view it will switch you
10
back to your original elevation view.
Perspective Toggle in a Three-Dimensional View

When you click the Perspective Toggle button in a three dimen-
sional window the view switched from a perspective view to an
isometric view. In other words, the aperture angle is toggled to 0
degrees.
As the name indicates, the Perspective Toggle button is a toggle

switch. Thus you can use it once in a 3D view to switch to an
isometric view of structure. If you later click the Perspective
Toggle button again in this same view it will switch you back to
your original perspective view.
Custom Views
The View menu > Save Custom View command allows you to
give any view a name and then save it. You can then later use the
View menu > Show Custom View command to restore your
named custom view.
These commands can be useful if you are going to use a certain

view over and over again and it takes you significant time to cre-
ate the view. For example if you have a view with special limits
set, and/or selected objects only displayed, and/or a special zoom
set and/or a special view angle set you may want to save it as a
custom view so that you can easily recreate it at a later time.
Viewing Tools Available in ETABS

The following viewing tools are available in ETABS:
• Specify view limits
• Show selection only and show all
• Zoom features
•
10 Pan feature
• Refresh views and windows
• Change axes locations
• Make measurements in your ETABS model
Each of these viewing tools are briefly discussed in separate sub-

sections below.
View Limits
You can use the View menu > Set Building View Limits com-
mand to display the Set Building View Limits dialog box and set
the limits for a view. When you set the view limits only objects
that fall entirely inside the view limits are displayed. The view
limits only affect objects; they have no effect on the coordi-
nate/grid systems which still show in their entirety.
The Set Limits dialog box allows you to specify X-axis, Y-axis
and story level (Z-axis) limits. The story level limits are set by
specifying a top story level and a bottom story level.
There are two different methods available for specifying the X

and Y-axis limits. Method one is to type in minimum and maxi-
mum X and Y coordinates. Method two is to graphically set the
limits in the small plan view located in the Plan Limits area of
the dialog box.
10 - 10 Viewing Tools Available in ETABS

In the Plan Limits area there is a dashed box with selection han-
dles on the four sides superimposed over a plan view of the
structure. The dashed box defines the view limits. You can mod-
ify the size and location of the dashed box as follows:
• Left click inside the dashed box and while holding down
the left mouse button drag the box to a new location.
• Left click on one of the selection handles on the sides of

the dashed box and while holding down the left mouse
button drag the mouse to resize the box.
10
Show Selection Only and Show All
Sometimes you may find that there are too many objects in a
view for you to clearly see whatever it may be that you want to
see. In such cases you may want to select just a few of the ob-
jects in the view and then use the View menu > Show Selection
Only command. This command will refresh the view such that
only the selected items are visible in the window. If you change
the view type in the window, say from a plan view to a 3D view
the originally selected items continue to be the only ones visible.
Use the View menu > Show All command to remove the effects
of the View menu > Show Selection Only command.
Zoom Features
There are five zoom features available in ETABS. These features
allow you to zoom in or out on a view. Zooming in shows you a
closer view of the model and zooming out shows you a farther
away view of the model. All five zoom features are available
both on the View menu and on the main (top) toolbar. The zoom
features and their associated toolbar buttons are:
• Rubber Band Zoom, : This command allows you

to zoom in on the model by windowing. To use the
command you depress and hold down the left button on
your mouse. While keeping the left button depressed
drag your mouse to "rubber band" a window around the
portion of the view that you want to zoom in on. The
rubber band window that shows the extent you have
dragged the mouse appears as a dashed line on your
Viewing Tools Available in ETABS 10 - 11

screen. When you release the mouse left button the new
view is displayed.
• Restore Full View, : This command has two uses.

First if you have zoomed in or out from the initial de-
fault view of a window this command returns you to the
original default view where the entire structure just fills
the window.
The second use for this command occurs if you have

used the View menu > Pan command to change the
10 view in the window. In this case the View menu > Re-
store Full View command returns you to the view you
were in right before you executed the View menu > Pan
command.
When you use both zoom commands and pan commands

together ETABS has one of the following behaviors de-
pending on the order you performed the zoom and pan
commands:
ü If you first perform a zoom command and then a pan

command clicking the View menu > Restore Full
View command once returns you to the view you
were in right before executing the pan command.
Clicking the View menu > Restore Full View
command a second time returns you to the original
default view for the window where the entire struc-
ture just fills the window.
ü If you first perform a pan command and then a zoom

command clicking the View menu > Restore Full
View command returns you to the original default
view for the window where the entire structure just
fills the window.
• Previous Zoom, : This command takes you back to

your immediately previous zoom settings. If you use the
View menu > Previous Zoom command repeatedly
without using other commands to change the zoom in
between then the effect is to toggle between two zoom
settings. You can not use the View menu > Previous
Zoom to go back more than one zoom setting.

The View menu > Previous Zoom command has no ef-

fect in the following circumstances:
ü Immediately after you first display a view in a win-

dow.
ü Immediately after you use the View menu > Pan

command.
• Zoom In One Step, : This command zooms in on

the model one step. The size of the step is controlled by
the Auto Zoom Step item in the Preferences dialog box
that you reach using the Options menu > Preferences >
10
Dimensions/Tolerances command.
The ETABS default value for the Auto Zoom Step is 10

percent. What this means is that when you use the View
menu > Zoom In One Step command ETABS increases
the magnification of all objects in the view by 10 per-
cent.
• Zoom Out One Step, : This command zooms out

on the model one step. The size of the step is controlled
by the Auto Zoom Step item in the Preferences dialog
box that you reach using the Options menu > Prefer-
ences > Dimensions/Tolerances command.
The ETABS default value for the Auto Zoom Step is 10

percent. What this means is that when you use the View
menu > Zoom Out One Step command ETABS de-
creases the magnification of all objects in the view by 10
percent.
Pan Feature
The pan feature allows you to move a view within the window
such that you can see beyond the original edges of the view. The
distance you can move beyond the original edge of the view is
controlled by the Pan Margin item that is set in the preferences.
The Options menu > Preferences > Dimensions/Tolerances
command gives you access to the Pan Margin preference item.
See the subsection titled "Dimensions and Tolerances" under the

section titled "Preferences" in Chapter 18 for more information

on the Pan Margin item.
Click the View menu > Pan command or the Pan button, ,
located on the main (top) toolbar to pan a view. Once you have
clicked the menu command or toolbar button click and hold
down the left mouse button in the view and drag the mouse
(while still holding down the left mouse button) to pan the view.
You must re-click the menu command or toolbar button every

time you pan. If you have panned a view one or more times then
10 clicking the View menu > Restore Full View command, or its
associated toolbar button on the main (top) toolbar returns you
to the view you were in right before you executed the first View
menu > Pan command.
Refresh Views and Windows

The View menu > Refresh Window command and the corre-
sponding Refresh Window button, , on the main (top) tool-
bar are used to refresh the view after drawing or editing objects.
This command redraws what is visible on the screen but does not
rescale it in any way.
The View menu > Refresh View command is also used to re-
fresh the view after drawing or editing objects. This command
redraws what is visible on the screen and returns the view to its
default full view where the entire model is visible. Note that the
default view is scaled based on all grid lines, story levels, and
objects being included in the view. Thus if any new grid lines,
story levels, or objects have been added outside of the original
model boundaries, this command rescales the default full view
such that all grid lines, story levels, and objects fit into it.
The refresh view and refresh window commands are similar.

However, unlike the refresh view command, the refresh window
command does not rescale the window or return it to a default
view.

Change Axes Location

By default the global axes are shown at the global origin. You
can use the View menu > Change Axes Location to display the
Axes Location dialog box that allows you to specify a new loca-
tion for the global axes. The new location is specified by enter-
ing global X, Y and Z coordinates.
Note the following about the global axes:
• A default view for a window is not scaled such that the

global axes fit in the window. Thus if you locate the
global axes a large distance from the rest of your struc- 10
ture they may not be visible in a default view. (The de-
fault view for a window is scaled based on story levels,
grid lines and area, line and point objects.)
• You can control the visibility of the global axes using

the View menu > Set Building View Options or the
corresponding Set Building View Options button, ,
on the main (top) toolbar.
Make Measurements in your ETABS Model

You can use the View menu > Measure command to make
measurements in your model. You can measure lines, areas and
Tip: angles. Each of these are described below.
You can use the
Draw menu >
• Lines: When you execute the View menu > Measure >
Draw Dimen- Line command you simply left click on two points to de-
sion Line fine the line you want to measure and ETABS reports
command to the length of the line in the status bar at the bottom of
draw dimension the ETABS window.
lines that in-
clude dimen- • Areas: When you execute the View menu > Measure >
sion text Area command you simply left click on the corner
(measure- points of an area you want to measure and ETABS re-
ments). ports the area and perimeter of the area in the status bar
at the bottom of the ETABS window.

When defining the last point for the area you should ei-
ther double left click or single left click and then press
the Enter key (or Esc key) on your keyboard.
• Angles: When you execute the View menu > Measure

> Angle command you simply left click on three points
to define two lines that have one common endpoint.
ETABS reports the angle between these lines in the
status bar at the bottom of the ETABS window. The an-
gle is always reported in degrees and it is always less
than or equal to 180 degrees.
10 Note the following about using the View menu > Measure
command.
• After you have drawn the line, area or angle and re-
viewed the measurement you can click anywhere and the
drawn line, area or angle is deleted.
• The measurements are always reported in the current

units.
Building View Options

You can control the building view options through the Set
Building View Options dialog box. You can access this dialog
box by clicking View menu > Set Building View Options or by
clicking the Set Building View Options button, , on the
main (top) toolbar. Note that the settings you make in this dia-
Note: log box only affect the currently active window.
The settings
made in the Set The Set Building View Options dialog box allows you to specify
Building View viewing options in the following categories:
Options dialog
box only affect • View by colors
the currently
active window. • Special effects
• Object visibility
• Object viewing options
10 - 16 Building View Options

• Piers and spandrels
• Other visibility options
• Special frame items
• Other special items.
Each of these building display option categories are briefly dis-

cussed in separate subsections below.
View by Colors 10
You can view your model by the colors of the following items:
• Objects: This option displays the model by the colors of

the objects as defined in the Assign Display Colors dia-
log box which you can access using the Options menu >
Colors command.
• Sections: This option displays the model by the colors

of the frame and wall/slab/deck section properties. Any
object that is not assigned frame section properties or
wall/slab/deck section properties is displayed in a color
that is the opposite of the background color. Note that
you assign display colors to frame section properties and
to wall/slab/deck section properties when you define the
section properties.
• Materials: This option displays the model by the colors

of the material properties assigned to the frame and
wall/slab/deck section properties. Any object that is not
assigned frame section properties or wall/slab/deck sec-
tion properties is displayed in a color that is the opposite
of the background color. Note that you assign display
colors to material properties when you define the mate-
rial properties.
Building View Options 10 - 17

• Groups: This option displays the model by the colors of

one or more selected groups. When you select this op-
tion be sure to click the associated Select button and se-
lect the groups. Any objects that are not part of any of
the specified groups are displayed in a color that is the
opposite of the background color. When an object is part
of more than one specified group it is displayed in the
color of the first defined group that it is a part of.
You also have the option of displaying the model in black and
white where all objects and text are displayed in black and the
10 background is white. This option can sometimes be useful when
you are cutting and pasting screen shots into a report that is done
in black and white.
Special Effects
Four special effects features are available. They are:
• Object Shrink: This feature shrinks line objects and

area objects. It is useful when you are trying to deter-
mine connectivity in your model. Also if you actually
want to see dots at point object locations then you must
shrink the area and line objects using this feature.
Line objects are shrunk by a percentage that is controlled

by the Shrink Factor in the Preferences dialog box that
you access using the Options menu > Preferences >
Dimensions/Tolerances command. See the subsection
titled "Dimensions and Tolerances" under the section ti-
tled "Preferences" in Chapter 18 for additional informa-
tion.
The object shrink feature can also be toggled on and off

using the Object Shrink Toggle button, , that is
available on the main (top) toolbar.
• Object Fill: This feature fills the area objects, that is

draws them solid. The color used is controlled in the As-
sign display Colors dialog box that is accessed using the
Options menu > Colors > Display command. See the
Object Edge item below for additional information.

• Object Edge: This feature displays the edges (outline)

of the area objects. The color used is controlled in the
Assign display Colors dialog box that is accessed using
the Options menu > Colors > Display command.
Note if neither the object fill or the object edge feature is

active you will not be able to see the area objects, how-
ever, if you click in the location where they are supposed
to be you will select them. If you want the area objects
to be invisible and not selectable then you should un-
check the appropriate boxes in the Object Visibility area
of the Set Building View Options dialog box. 10
Tip: • Extrusion: This feature shows the extruded shape of all
line objects with frame section properties assigned to
Showing extru-
sions is a con-
them. Line objects that do not have frame section prop-
venient way of erties assigned are shown non-extruded. Only line ob-
checking the jects are displayed when the extrusions feature is acti-
local axes ori- vated. Area objects and point objects are not displayed
entation of when extrusions are shown.
frame members.
When line objects are assigned auto select list frame
section properties ETABS displays the extruded shape of
the current analysis section. Note that before you have
run the first analysis the current analysis section is the
median (by weight) beam in the auto select list.
Showing extruded shapes is a very powerful tool for

verifying the local axes orientation for frame members.
Object Visibility
The Object Visibility area of the Set Building View Options
dialog box provides controls for the visibility of area, line and
point objects. When a check box in this area is checked the ob-
jects of that type are visible; when the box is not checked objects
are not visible. Note that when objects are not visible because the
appropriate check box in the Object Visibility area is not
checked you can not select the object. Contrast this with the in-
formation in the second paragraph describing the Object Edge
feature in the subsection above titled "Special Effects."

Following are the items for which you can control the object
Note:
visibility:
If an object
does not have • Floor (Area): All floor-type area objects, that is, all
its corre- horizontal area objects with wall/slab/deck section prop-
sponding check erty assignments.
box checked in
the Object Visi- • Wall (Area): All wall-type area objects, that is, all verti-
bility area of cal area objects with wall/slab/deck section property as-
the Set Building signments.
View Options
dialog box, then
•
10 you can not see
or select the
Ramp (Area): All ramp-type area objects, that is, all
sloped area objects (not vertical or horizontal area ob-
object. jects) with wall/slab/deck section property assignments.
• Openings (Area): All area objects that are designated as

openings. Note that these are a subset of all null areas.
• All Null Areas: All null area objects, that is, all area
objects that do not have wall/slab/deck section property
assignments.
• Column (Line): All column-type line objects. By de-

fault column-type line objects are those with frame sec-
tion property assignments that are oriented vertically
(length is oriented parallel to the Z-axis).
• Beam (Line): All beam-type line objects. By default

beam-type line objects are those with frame section
property assignments that are oriented horizontally (fall
in the XY plane).
• Brace (Line): All brace-type line objects. By default

brace-type line objects are those with frame section
property assignments that are sloped (not oriented verti-
cally or horizontally).
• Link (Line): All line objects with link property assign-

ments. Note that it is possible for a line object to have
both a frame section property assignment and a link
property assignment simultaneously. In this case ETABS
creates a frame member and a link element in the same
location in the analysis model. The following two para-

graphs describe how the ETABS object visibility options

affect this type of line object.
If a line object has a link property assignment and no

frame section assignment then it is classified as a null-
type line object. This line object is visible if either the
Links (Line) box is checked or the All Null Lines box is
checked, or both boxes are checked.
If a line object simultaneously has a frame section prop-

erty assignment and a link property assignment then the
line object type is either column, beam or brace de-
pending on its orientation. Thus, for example, a vertical 10
line object with both a frame section property assign-
ment and a link property assignment (column-type) is
visible if either the Column (Line) box is checked or the
Links (Line) box is checked, or both boxes or checked.
However it is not visible if the Column (Line) box and
the Links (Line) box are unchecked even if the All Null
Lines box is checked.
Note that this box does not control the visibility of zero-
length links that are assigned to point objects.
• All Null Lines: All null line objects, that is, all line ob-
jects that do not have frame section property assign-
ments. See the discussion above for the Link (Line)
check box for additional information.
• Point Objects: This check box controls the visibility of

point objects. Note the following about this feature:
ü Point Objects are visible when the Point Objects

check box is checked. They are not visible when the
box is unchecked.
ü When point objects are visible you can select them

by clicking on them or by windowing them.
ü You only see a dot representing a point object when

the point objects are visible and the Object Shrink
feature is on. The Object Shrink feature is controlled
either in the Special Effects area of the Set Building

View Options dialog box or using the Object

Shrink Toggle button on the main (top) toolbar.
ü When point objects are not visible (the Point Objects

check box is unchecked) you can not select them and
you will never see dots representing them.
ü The Point Objects check box must be checked in or-

der for links assigned to point objects, supports and
grounded springs to be visible. In other words, if the
Links (Point) check box is checked, the links as-
10 signed to point objects are still not graphically visi-
ble unless the Point Objects check box is also
checked. Similarly, if the Supports check box is
checked, the supports are still not graphically visible
unless the Point Objects check box is also checked
and if the Springs check box is checked, the
grounded point springs are still not graphically visi-
ble unless the Point Objects check box is also
checked.
• Link (Point): All point objects with link property as-

signments. Note that this box does not control the visi-
bility of links that are assigned to line objects.
Object View Options

The Object View Options area of the Set Building View Options
dialog box allows you to toggle the display of object labels, sec-
tion properties and local axes on and off. Following is a list of
the specific items you control in this area of the dialog box:
• Area Labels: Labels (names) for all types of area ob-

jects (floor, wall, ramp and null).
• Line Labels: Labels (names) for all types of line objects

(column, beam, brace and null).
• Point Labels: Labels (names) for all point objects.

• Area Sections: Wall/slab/deck section property names

are displayed for all area objects with wall/slab/deck
section property assignments.
Tip:
One way to • Line Sections: Frame section property names are dis-
remember the played for all line objects with frame section property
colors associ- assignments.
ated with the
local axes is to • Link Sections: Link section property names are dis-
think of the played for all line objects with link section property as-
American flag signments.
10
which is red,
white and blue. • Area Local Axes: Arrows indicating local axes orienta-
Note that local
tion are displayed for all area objects. Note that the local
axis 1 is red,
local axis 2 is
1 axis is always shown with a red arrow, the local 2 axis
white and local is always shown with a white arrow and the local three
axis 3 is blue. axis is always shown with a blue arrow.
• Line Local Axes: Arrows indicating local axes orienta-

tion are displayed for all line objects. Note that the local
1 axis is always shown with a red arrow, the local 2 axis
is always shown with a white arrow and the local three
axis is always shown with a blue arrow.
Note that no control is provided for the point local axes. This is
done because in ETABS, by default, the point local axes always
correspond to the global local axes. That is, for point objects, lo-
cal axis 1 is the same as the global X-axis, local axis 2 is the
same as the global Y-axis and local axis 3 is the same as the
global Z-axis.
Piers and Spandrels

The Piers and Spandrels area of the Set Building View Options
dialog box allows you to toggle the display of pier and spandrel
labels and local axes on and off. Following is a list of the spe-
cific items you control in this area of the dialog box:
• Pier Labels: Labels (names) for all specified pier ele-

ments. Recall that you specify one or more area objects
as a pier by selecting them and then clicking the Assign
menu > Shell/Area > Pier Label command.

• Spandrel Labels: Labels (names) for all specified span-

drel elements. Recall that you specify one or more area
objects as a spandrel by selecting them and then clicking
the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Spandrel Label
command.
• Pier Axes: Arrows indicating local axes orientation are

displayed for all specified piers. Note that the local 1
axis is always shown with a red arrow, the local 2 axis is
always shown with a white arrow and the local three axis
is always shown with a blue arrow.
10 • Spandrel Axes: Arrows indicating local axes orientation
are displayed for all specified spandrels. Note that the
local 1 axis is always shown with a red arrow, the local 2
axis is always shown with a white arrow and the local
three axis is always shown with a blue arrow.
Other Visibility Options

The Other Visibility Options area of the Set Building View Op-
tions dialog box allows you to toggle the display of other mis-
cellaneous items on and off. Following is a list of the specific
items you control in this area of the dialog box:
• Story Labels: This item toggles the labels (names) for

story levels on and off in elevation views. Note that
ETABS does not display story level labels in three di-
mensional views to avoid cluttering the view. Story label
names can be edited using the Edit menu > Edit Story
Data > Edit command.
• Dimension Lines: This item toggles the display of di-

mension lines on and off. Note that dimension lines are
only displayed in plan and elevation views, not three-
dimensional views.
• Reference Lines: This item toggles the display of refer-

ence lines on and off. See the section titled "Reference
Planes and Reference Lines" in Chapter 9 for additional
information.

• Reference Planes: This item toggles the display of ref-

erence planes on and off. See the section titled "Refer-
ence Planes and Reference Lines" in Chapter 9 for addi-
tional information.
• Grid Lines: This item toggles the display of primary

grid lines on and off. It does not affect the display of
secondary grid lines. Use the Edit menu > Edit Grid
Data command to control whether a grid line is a pri-
mary or secondary grid line.
• Secondary Grids: This item toggles the display of sec-

ondary grid lines on and off. It does not affect the dis-
10
play of primary grid lines. Use the Edit menu > Edit
Grid Data command to control whether a grid line is a
primary or secondary grid line.
• Global Axes: This item toggles the display of global

axes on and off. Note that you can use the View menu >
Change Axes Location command to modify the loca-
tion of the global axes in a view.
• Supports: This item toggles the display of supports (re-

straints) on and off. Note that both this item and the
Point Objects box in the Object Visibility area of the
Set Building View Options dialog box must be checked
for the supports to be visible. Four basic graphic sym-
bols used for displaying supports in the ETABS graphi-
cal interface are:
Roller: Fixed:
Pinned: Other:
• Springs: This item toggles the graphical display of

grounded point springs (not links) on and off. Note that
these are the springs that are assigned using the Assign
menu > Joint/Point > Point Springs command.

Special Frame Items

The Special Frame Items area of the Set Building View Options
dialog box allows you to toggle the display of various assign-
ments made to line objects. These assignments are only mean-
ingful if the line object is also assigned a frame section property.
If the line object is not checked to be visible in the Object Visi-
bility area of the dialog box then the special frame assignments
are not visible even if their box is checked. Following is a list of
the specific items you control in this area of the dialog box:
•
10
End Releases: This item toggles the display of dots near
each end of any line object with frame section properties
that has an end release assignment (with or without par-
tial fixity). The color of the dots is based on the default
color specified for text in the Options menu > Colors >
Display command. The end releases are assigned using
the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Re-
leases/Partial Fixity command.
• Partial Fixity: This item toggles the display of text

saying "FIX*" without the quotes for any line object
with frame section properties that has an end release as-
signment with partial fixity specified at one or both ends.
The asterisk has no specific meaning but rather is a con-
venient method of minimizing any confusion between
this text and other labels that may be concurrently dis-
played. The partial fixity is assigned using the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Frame Releases/Partial Fixity
command.
• Moment Connections: This item toggles the display of

triangles at the ends of frame members that are fully
fixed. The moment connection symbols are only dis-
played for beams and braces. They are not displayed for
columns.
The moment connection symbol only appears on beams

and braces which have no end releases of any type as-
signed to them. If a beam or brace has any type of end
release assigned to it (e.g., axial, shear, moment or tor-
sion) then the moment connection symbol will not ap-
pear for that object.

• Property Modifiers: This item toggles the display of

text saying "PM*" without the quotes for any line object
with frame section properties that is assigned frame
property modifiers that are not all ones. The asterisk has
no specific meaning but rather is a convenient method of
minimizing any confusion between this text and other
labels that may be concurrently displayed. The frame
property modifiers are assigned using the Assign menu
> Frame/Line > Frame Property Modifiers command.
• Nonlinear Hinges: This item toggles the display of dots

together with a text label at the location of each frame
nonlinear hinge (pushover) assigned to a line object with
10
frame section properties. The color of the dots is based
on the default color specified for text in the Options
menu > Colors > Display command. The frame nonlin-
ear hinges are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Nonlinear Hinge command.
• End Offsets: This item toggles the display of thickened

lines at any end of a line object with frame section prop-
erties that has an end offset along the length of the beam
assigned to it. The length of the thickened line is scaled
to match the specified length of the end offset. The color
of the thickened lines is based on the default color speci-
fied for text in the Options menu > Colors > Display
command. The end offset is assigned using the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets command.
This command brings up the Assign Frame End Offsets
dialog box. In this dialog box you can specify both an
end offset along the length of the beam and frame joint
offsets. This item only controls the display of frames
with end offsets along the length of the beam assigned to
them. It does not control the display of frames with joint
offsets assigned to them. This is controlled by the Joint
Offsets item below.

• Joint Offsets: This item toggles the display of text say-

ing "OFF*" without the quotes for any line object with
frame section properties that has a frame joint offset as-
signed to it. The asterisk has no specific meaning but
rather is a convenient method of minimizing any confu-
sion between this text and other labels that may be con-
currently displayed. The joint offset is assigned using the
Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets
command. This command brings up the Assign Frame
End Offsets dialog box. In this dialog box you can spec-
ify both frame joint offsets and end offsets along the
10 length of the beam. This item only controls the display
of frames with frame joint offsets assigned to them. It
does not control the display of frames with end offsets
along the length of the beam assigned to them. This is
controlled by the End Offsets item above.
• Output Stations: This item toggles the display of text

values reporting either the maximum output station
spacing or the minimum number of output stations de-
pending on how the output stations are specified. If the
text value is reported in parenthesis then the value repre-
sents the minimum number of output stations. If it is not
reported in parenthesis then it is the maximum spacing
between output stations. The frame output stations are
assigned using the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Frame Output Stations command.
The graphics or text displayed as a result of checking boxes in

this area of the Set Building View Options dialog box alert you
that a particular type of assignment is made to a line object with
frame section properties but it does not tell you the particulars of
the assignment because of space limitations. You can always
right click on the line object to review its assignments in detail.

Other Special Items

The Other Special Items area of the Set Building View Options
dialog box allows you to toggle the display of other miscellane-
ous items. Following is a list of the specific items you control in
this area of the dialog box:
• Diaphragm Extent: This item toggles the graphical dis-

play of the extent of rigid diaphragms (if any). A large
dot is displayed at the center of mass associated with the
rigid diaphragm. Dashed lines are drawn from this center
of mass point to each point object that is a part of the 10
rigid diaphragm constraint. Also text is provided adja-
cent to the large dot identifying the name of the rigid
diaphragm.
Note that the rigid diaphragms are assigned using either

the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Rigid Diaphragm
command or the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Rigid
Diaphragm command.
• Auto Floor Mesh: This item toggles the graphical dis-

play of automatic meshing of area objects done by
ETABS. See Chapter 30 for information on automatic
meshing. This feature puts the model in a special display
mode where elements are shown rather than objects. In
other words the shell elements in the analysis model are
displayed. The model is displayed with the elements
shrunken so that you can clearly see the meshing.
Note that when you select this item all other items in the
Set Building View Options dialog box are grayed out
because they will not be displayed on the analysis
model.
• Additional Masses: This item toggles the display of text

values of additional area, line and point masses. The ad-
ditional area masses are assigned using the Assign menu
> Shell/Area > Additional Area Mass command. The
additional line masses are assigned using the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Additional Line Mass com-
mand. The additional point masses are assigned using

the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Additional Point

Mass command.
10

Chapter 11
11
The ETABS Define Menu
General
The main purpose of the ETABS Define menu is to provide a
means of defining section properties and load case definitions.
This chapter discusses the features available on the Define menu.
Items related to ETABS nonlinear analysis are mentioned in

passing but are not elaborated on; they are beyond the scope of
this manual. Separate documentation is provided for these items
in technical notes on our web site.
Material Properties
The material properties in ETABS are always linear elastic. Use
the Define menu > Material Properties command to define
material properties. This command brings up the Define Materi-
als dialog box where the names of all defined material properties
are listed. In this dialog box you can do the following:
11 - 1
• Click the Add New Material button to display the Ma-

terial Property Data dialog box where you can define
new material properties.
• Highlight a material property name and click the Mod-

ify/Show Material button to display the Material Prop-
erty Data dialog box where you can review and/or mod-
ify the material properties for the highlighted material
property.
• Click the Delete Material button to delete an existing

material property. Note that you can not delete two built-
11 in material properties that are named STEEL and
CONC. You also can not delete any material property
that is currently specified in the definition of a frame
section property or a wall/slab/deck section property. In
other words, you can not delete a material property if it
is currently in use.
The Material Property Data dialog box consists of six different

areas. They are:
• Material name: Here you can specify or modify the

name of a material property. Note that you can not
change the name of the built-in STEEL and CONC ma-
terial properties.
• Type of material: You specify the material to either be

isotropic or orthotropic. The option chosen here affects
what is shown in the Analysis Property Data area of the
dialog box.
Note: The behavior of an isotropic material is independent of

You can specify the direction of loading. In addition, the shearing be-
isotropic or havior is uncoupled from the extensional behavior and it
orthotropic is not affected by temperature change. Isotropic behavior
material prop- is usually assumed for steel and concrete, although that
erties in is not always the case.
ETABS.
The isotropic mechanical and thermal properties relate
strain to stress and temperature change as shown in Fig-
ure 11-1a. In the figure e1 is Young's modulus of elas-
11 - 2 Material Properties
Chapter 11 - The ETABS Define Menu
1 -u12 -u12 1 -u12 -u13

0 0 0 0 0 0
e1 e1 e1 e1 e2 e3
1 -u12 1 -u23
0 0 0 0 0 0
ε11 e1 e1 σ11 a1 ε11 e2 e3 σ11 a1
ε22 1 σ22 a1 ε22 1 σ22 a2
0 0 0 0 0 0
e1 e3
ε33 σ33 a1 ε33 σ33 a3
= + ∆T = + ∆T
γ12 1 0 0 σ12 0 γ12 1 0 0 σ12 0
γ13 g12 σ13 0 γ13 g12 σ13 0
γ23 1 σ23 0 γ23 1 σ23 0
Symmetrical 0 Symmetrical 0
g12 g13
1 1
g12 g23
a) Isotropic Material b) Orthotropic Material
(Above)
Figure 11-1: ticity, u12 is Poisson's ratio, g12 is the shear modulus
and a1 is the coefficient of thermal expansion.
11
Illustration of how
mechanical and The shear modulus is not directly specified for an iso-
thermal properties tropic material. Instead ETABS derives it from the
relate strain to stress specified Young's modulus and Poisson's ratio as shown
and temperature in Equation 11-1.
change for isotropic
and orthotropic ma- e1
g12 = Eqn. 11-1
2 (1 + u12 )
terials
Note that in ETABS Poisson's ratio must satisfy the con-

dition that 0 ≤ u12 < 0.5 and that Young's modulus must
be positive.
The behavior of an orthotropic material can be different

in the three local axis directions. However, like an iso-
tropic material, the shearing behavior is uncoupled from
the extensional behavior and it is not affected by tem-
perature change.
The orthotropic mechanical and thermal properties relate

strain to stress and temperature change as shown in Fig-
ure 11-1b. In the figure e1, e2 and e3 are the moduli of
elasticity, u12, u13 and u23 are the Poisson's ratios, g12,
g13 and g23 are the shear moduli and a1, a2 and a3 are
the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Material Properties 11 - 3
Note that in ETABS for orthotropic materials the elastic

moduli and the shear moduli must be positive. The Pois-
son's ratios may take on any values provided that the up-
per left 3x3 portion of the stress-strain matrix is positive
definite (i.e., has a positive determinant.) The check for
this is made at analysis runtime, not when the values are
entered.
• Analysis Property Data: In this area you specify the

mass per unit volume, weight per unit volume, modulus
of elasticity, Poisson's ratio, coefficient of thermal ex-
pansion and if you are specifying an orthotropic mate-
11 rial, the shear modulus.
The mass per unit volume is used in calculating the self-

mass of the structure if you have specified that mass is to
be determined from element and additional masses. The
weight per unit volume is used in calculating the self-
weight of the structure.
For isotropic materials you define one value for the

modulus of elasticity, Poisson's ratio and coefficient of
thermal expansion. The shear modulus is calculated as
previously described for Equation 11-1.
For orthotropic materials you define three values (one

for each local axis direction) for the modulus of elastic-
ity, Poisson's ratio, coefficient of thermal expansion and
shear modulus.
• Display Color: Here you assign a color to the material

property. If you use the View menu > Set Building
View Options command to display the Set Building
View Options dialog box, then you can then choose an
option to view the model based on the colors associated
with the material properties. In this case each object ap-
pears in a color associated with its assigned material
property. See the section titled "Building View Options"
in Chapter 10 for more information. You can change the
color associated with the material by clicking in the
color box.
11 - 4 Material Properties
• Type of Design: Here you can specify the type of design

as Steel, Concrete or None. The option you specify here
affects what is shown in the Design Property Data area
of the dialog box.
The Steel Frame Design and Composite Beam Design

postprocessors do not design members unless (among
other things) the type of design specified for their asso-
ciated material property is Steel.
The Concrete Frame Design and Shear Wall Design

postprocessors do not design members unless (among
other things) the type of design specified for their asso-
ciated material property is Concrete. 11
• Design Property Data: The data specified in this area
depends on the design type specified in the Type of De-
sign area of the dialog box. In general the design prop-
erty data specified in the material property is used only
by the design postprocessors. The one exception to this
is that for any degree of freedom in the frame nonlinear
hinge properties that is specified as default, ETABS cal-
culates the hinge force-deformation properties based on
these properties.
If the type of design is Steel then the following items are

specified:
ü Minimum yield stress, Fy
ü Minimum tensile stress, Fu
ü Cost per unit weight
The cost per unit weight item is used in the Composite

Beam Design postprocessor where the optimum beam
size may be determined based on the cost of the beam,
connectors and camber rather than just the area (weight)
of the beam.
Material Properties 11 - 5
If the type of design is Concrete then the following

items are specified:
Note:
ü Specified concrete compressive strength, f'c: This
The shear item is used in all calculations.
strength reduc-
tion factor ü Bending reinf. yield stress, fy: This is the rein-
multiplies the forcing steel yield stress used in the calculations for
calculated con-
bending and axial load calculations.
crete shear
strength. This ü Shear reinf. yield stress, fys: This is the reinforcing
reduction factor
steel yield stress used in the calculations for shear
is used for all
calculations.
11 shear calcula-
tions whenever
lightweight ü Lightweight concrete check box: Check this check
concrete is box if you have lightweight concrete. Checking this
specified. check box enables the shear strength reduction factor
edit box.
ü Shear strength reduction factor: If the lightweight

concrete check box is checked then for all shear cal-
culations the calculated concrete shear strength is
multiplied by this factor. Typically this reduction
factor is between 0.75 and 0.85.
If the type of design is None then nothing is specified in

the Design Property Data area.
Frame Section Properties

You can use the Define menu > Frame Sections command to
define frame section properties. This command brings up the De-
fine Frame Properties dialog box. The Properties area of this
dialog box lists the names of all the currently defined frame sec-
tion properties. The Click To area of the dialog box allows you
to define new frame sections, modify existing frame section
definitions and delete existing frame sections. Note that you can
only delete frame sections if they are not currently assigned to
any line objects in your model and if they are not used to define
other frame section properties such as nonprismatic sections and
auto select section lists.
11 - 6 Frame Section Properties

Importing Sections from a Database

The drop-down box that initially says Import I/Wide Flange in
the Click To area of the Frame Properties dialog box allows you
to import many different types of frame section properties from
one of several section databases that are included with ETABS.
The types of section properties you can import are:
• I-shaped members including wide flange sections
• Channels
• Double channels
• Structural tees
11
• Single angles
• Double angles
• Structural tubes
• Pipe sections
• Rectangular sections
• Circular sections
• General sections
Note: Note that the last three items in the above list are not available in
the section databases provided with ETABS but could be in sec-
Several steel
tion databases that you create yourself. General sections have
section data-
bases are in-
section properties (area, moment of inertia, etc.) associated with
cluded with them but no dimensions specified for them. All other types of
ETABS. You sections in the above list have dimensions specified.
can also create
your own sec- The section databases that are included with ETABS are:
tion databases.
• Aisc.pro: American Institute of Steel Construction
shapes.
• Cisc.pro: Canadian Institute of Steel Construction

shapes.
Frame Section Properties 11 - 7

• Euro.pro: European steel shapes.
• Sections.pro: American Institute of Steel Construction

shapes.
In addition you can create your own section database files using
the utility program called Proper.
The default section database that ETABS will open is called

Sections.pro. When ETABS is shipped Sections.pro is the same
as Aisc.pro. You can overwrite this version of Sections.pro with
any other section database if desired.
11 To import a section from a database you click the Define menu

> Frame Sections command, click on one of the section types in
the Import drop-down box and specify a database file to choose
the section from, if necessary.
ETABS then displays a list of all of the sections of the type

specified in the database. You can select one or more sections
from the list by clicking on them. Following are some possible
methods of multiple selection:
• Select one section by left clicking on it and then con-

tinue to hold down the left mouse button while dragging
your mouse up or down to select additional adjacent
sections.
• Select one section by left clicking on it. Then hold down

the Shift key on your keyboard and select another sec-
tion. The second section is added to the selection as well
as all sections between the first and second section.
• Select one section by left clicking on it. Then hold down

the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select another adja-
cent or non-adjacent section. That section is added to the
selection. You can continue holding down the Ctrl key
and clicking on other sections to add them to the selec-
tion.

Adding User-Defined Frame Section Properties

The drop-down box that initially says Add I/Wide Flange in the
Shortcut: Click To area of the Frame Properties dialog box allows you to
You can use the easily define section properties for many different types of frame
Assign menu > sections. The types of section properties you can define are:
Frame/Line >
Frame Section • I-shaped members
command to
simultaneously • Channels
define frame
sections and • Double channels
assign them to
selected line • Structural tees
11
objects.
• Single angles
• Double angles
• Structural tubes
• Pipe sections
• Rectangular sections
• Circular sections
• General sections
• Auto select section list
• Sections defined in the Section Designer utility
• Nonprismatic sections
For all but the last four items in the above list you simply specify
dimensions for the section and ETABS automatically calculates
the section properties. For general sections you simply specify
the section properties (area, moment of inertia, shear area, etc.).
No dimensions are input for general sections. Figure 11-2 is pro-
vided to help you determine the shear area for general sections of
various shapes.
Frame Section Properties 11 - 9

Effective
Section Description Shear Area
Rectangular section: 5
d Shear forces parallel to the b or d directions 6 bd
b
bf
tf
Wide flange section: 5 tb
Shear forces parallel to flange 3 f f
tf
bf
11 d
Wide flange section:
Shear forces parallel to web tw d
tw
r Thin walled circular tube section:

πrt
t Shear forces from any direction
r Solid circular section:

Shear forces from any direction 0.9 π r2
d
Thin walled rectangular tube section:
2td
Shear forces parallel to d-direction
t
Y
General section:
dn IX2
Shear forces parallel to Y-direction
yt IX = Moment of inertia of section about X-X yt Q2(y)
y b(y) n dy
yt b(y)
X Q(y) = n b(n) dn yb
yb
neutral y
axis
(Above)
Figure 11-2:
Shear areas for
various sections

Auto select section lists are simply lists of previously defined

steel sections. These are useful for Steel Frame Design and
Tip: Composite Beam Design where ETABS can pick the optimal
section for a steel frame element from an Auto Select Section
You can use the
List. There must be at least two steel frame sections defined be-
Section De-
signer utility to
fore you are allowed to define an auto select section list.
graphically
define frame
You can use the Section Designer utility to graphically define
sections. Select unusual sections. ETABS then calculates the section properties
the Add SD for that section. See the section titled "Adding Frame Section
Section option Properties using Section Designer" later in this chapter for more
in the Define information.
Frame Proper-
ties dialog box. You can use the Add Nonprismatic feature to define nonpris- 11
matic frame sections where the section properties vary along the
length of the frame element. See the section titled "Nonprismatic
Sections" later in this chapter for more information.
When you specify concrete frame sections you can also specify
some of the reinforcing information. See the section titled "Rein-
forcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties" later in this
chapter for more information.
Adding Frame Section Properties using Section

Designer
Select the Add SD Section option in the Define Frame Properties
dialog box to define a frame section property using the Section
Designer feature. This brings up the SD Section Data dialog box.
The following areas are in this dialog box:
• Section name: Here you can specify or modify the name

of the frame section.
• Material: Here you can specify or modify a defined

material property. Depending on the design type of the
material property selected various options in the Section
Type area may or may not be available.
ü If the design type of the specified material property

is Steel, then the General Steel Section and Other
(not designed) options are available.
Adding Frame Section Properties using Section Designer 11 - 11


is Concrete, then the Concrete Column and Other
(not designed) options are available.

is None, then only the Other (not designed) option is
available.
• Design Type: Here you can specify the section type. If

the section type is General Steel Section then any frame
section assigned this property is designed by the Steel
Frame Design postprocessor as a general section. If the
11 section type is Concrete Column then any frame section
assigned this property is designed by the Concrete Frame
Design postprocessor. If the section type is No
Check/Design (not designed) then any frame section as-
signed this property is not designed by any postproces-
sor.
• Concrete Column Check/Design: This area is only ac-

tive if the Concrete Column option is selected in the De-
sign Type area. Here you specify whether the concrete
column is to have its specified reinforcing checked or
new longitudinal reinforcing designed when it is run
through the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor.
• Define/Edit/Show Section: Once you have appropri-

ately specified items in the rest of the dialog box, click
the Section Designer button in this area to go to the
Section Designer utility and draw the section. When you
exit the Section Designer utility you return to the SD
Section Data dialog box. You can then click the OK
button to complete the definition of the frame section
property.
11 - 12 Adding Frame Section Properties using Section Designer

Figure 11-3: 2
Nonprismatic frame
section examples 1
End I End J
Seg. 1 Segment 2 Seg. 3 Section A Section B

24" 30"
a) Steel Beam with Cover Plates at Ends
End J
Seg. 2
50"
Section A Section B
11
Segment 1
1
2
End I
b) Concrete Column with Flare at Top
Nonprismatic Sections
Nonprismatic frame sections may be defined for which the prop-
Note:
erties vary along the element length. You may specify that the
ETABS ana- element length be divided into any number of segments; these do
lyzes nonpris- not need to be of equal length. Most common situations can be
matic sections. modeled using from one to five segments.
The Steel
Frame Design The variation of the bending stiffnesses may be linear, parabolic,
postprocessor or cubic over each segment of length. The axial, shear, torsional,
can design
mass, and weight properties all vary linearly over each segment.
nonprismatic
sections. The Section properties may change discontinuously from one seg-
Concrete ment to the next.
Frame Design
and Composite See Figure 11-3 for examples of nonprismatic frame sections.
Beam Design Figure 11-3a shows a steel beam with cover plates at the ends.
postprocessors Section A is the section without cover plates and section B is the
do not currently section with cover plates. You might define section B by click-
design non- ing the Define menu > Frame Sections command, selecting
prismatic sec- "Add SD Section" from the Add drop-down box and drawing the
tions. section in the Section Designer utility.
Nonprismatic Sections 11 - 13
Once both section A and section B are defined you can define
the nonprismatic section using the Define menu > Frame Sec-
tions command and selecting "Add Nonprismatic" from the Add
drop-down box to display the Nonprismatic Section Definition
(Below) dialog box. Table 11-1 shows the assignments that would be en-
Table 11-1: tered in the dialog box. Note that the variation items grayed out
Input for nonpris- in the table are not used by ETABS because the start section and
matic frame section the end section are the same.
example in Figure
In Table 11-1 note that segment 2 has a length type of variable
11-3a
and a segment length of 1. See the subsection below titled "Seg-
ment Lengths" for an explanation of this.
11
Segment Start End Length Length EI33 EI22
Section Section Type Variation Variation
1 B B 24 Absolute
2 A A 1 Variable
3 B B 30 Absolute
Figure 11-3b shows a concrete column with a flare at the top.

Section A is the section at the lower portion of the column and
section B is the section at the top of the column. You might de-
fine both section A and B by clicking the Define menu > Frame
Sections command, selecting "Add Rectangular" from the Add
drop-down box.
Once both section A and section B are defined you can define
(Below) the nonprismatic section using the Define menu > Frame Sec-
Table 11-2: tions command and selecting "Add Nonprismatic" from the Add
Input for nonpris- drop-down box to display the Nonprismatic Section Definition
matic frame section dialog box. Table 11-2 shows the assignments that would be en-
example in Figure tered in the dialog box. Note that the variation items grayed out
11-3b in the table are not used by ETABS because the start section and
the end section are the same.
Segment Start End Length Length EI33 EI22

Section Section Type Variation Variation
1 A A 1 Variable
2 A B 50 Absolute Cubic Linear
11 - 14 Nonprismatic Sections
Segment Lengths
The length of a nonprismatic segment may be specified as either
a variable length or an absolute length.
When a nonprismatic frame section is assigned to an element,

the actual lengths of each segment for that element are deter-
mined as follows:
• The clear length of the element, Lc, is first calculated as

the total length minus the end offsets: Lc = L - (ioff +
joff). In this equation L is the full length of the frame
element and ioff and joff are the lengths of the end off-
sets along the length of the frame element at the i and j
ends of the element respectively.
11
• If the sum of the absolute lengths of the segments ex-
ceeds the clear length, then they are scaled down pro-
portionately so that the sum equals the clear length. Oth-
erwise the absolute lengths are used as specified.
1st Segment: • The remaining length (the clear length minus the sum of
vl1 1 1 the absolute lengths) is divided among the segments
= =
vl1 + vl2 1 + 2 3 having variable lengths in the same proportion as their
specified lengths. For example, for two segments with
2nd Segment: variable lengths specified as vl1 = 1 and vl2 =2, one
vl2 2 2 third of the remaining length goes to the first segment,
= =
vl1 + vl2 1 + 2 3 and two thirds to the second segment. See the calcula-
tions to the left.
Starting and Ending Sections

The properties for a segment of a nonprismatic section are de-
fined by specifying:
• The section name of a previously defined prismatic sec-

tion that defines the properties at the start of the seg-
ment, i.e., at the end closest to joint i.
• The section name of a previously defined prismatic sec-

tion that defines the properties at the end of the segment,
i.e., at the end closest to joint j. The starting and ending
Nonprismatic Sections 11 - 15
sections may be the same if the properties are constant

over the length of the segment.
The material would normally be the same for both the starting
and ending sections and only the geometric properties would dif-
fer, but this is not required.
Variation of Properties
Nonprismatic column/beam/brace section properties are inter-
polated along the length of each segment from the values at the
two ends. The variation of the bending stiffnesses, EI33 and EI22,
11 along the length of the segment is specified as linear, parabolic,
or cubic.
Specifically, the linear, parabolic or cubic variation for EI33 is

calculated by ETABS as follows:
• Linear: The value EI33 varies linearly along the length

of the segment.
• Parabolic: The value 2 EI 33 varies linearly along the

length of the segment.
• Cubic: The value 3 EI 33 varies linearly along the length

of the segment.
This usually corresponds to a linear variation in one of the sec-

tion dimensions. For example a linear variation in the width of a
rectangular shape yields a linear variation for EI33. A linear
variation in the depth of a rectangular shape yields a cubic varia-
tion for EI33. Finally, a linear variation in the depth of an I-shape
yields a parabolic variation for EI33.
The interpolation of the bending stiffness in the 1-2 plane, EI22,

is defined in the same manner to that for the 1-3 plane.
The remaining stiffness properties, other than EI33 and EI22 are
always assumed to vary linearly between the ends of each seg-
ment. Similarly the mass and weight densities are always as-
sumed to vary linearly between the ends of each segment.
11 - 16 Nonprismatic Sections
If a shear area is zero at either end, it is taken to be zero along

the full segment, thus eliminating all shear deformation in the
corresponding bending plane for that segment.
Effect upon End Offsets Along the Length of Frame

Elements
Frame section properties vary only along the clear length of the
element. Section properties within the longitudinal end offset at
the i-end of the element are constant using the starting section of
the first segment. Section properties within the end offset at the
11
j-end of the element are constant using the ending section of the
last segment. Note that if a longitudinal end offset rigidity factor
is specified, then the specified part of the end offset is rigid and
the rest has the section property described above.
Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties

When you specify frame section properties for rectangular or
circular concrete members you can also specify some of the rein-
forcing information for that member. When you use the Add
Rectangle or Add Circle option in the Click To area of the De-
fine Frame Properties dialog box and you specify the material
Note: property as one with a Design Type of Concrete, a Reinforce-
You can specify ment button appears in the Frame Properties dialog box. Click-
reinforcing ing the Reinforcement button brings up the Reinforcement Data
information for dialog box.
rectangular, T-
shaped and L- There are two tabs in the Reinforcement Data dialog box. They
shaped con- are labeled column and beam. Pick the tab that corresponds to
crete beam the frame section you are defining.
sections and for
circular and
rectangular
concrete col-
Reinforcing Information for Beams
umn sections. For concrete beams there are two types of reinforcing informa-
Reinforcing for tion that you specify. They are rebar cover and reinforcement
other column overrides. Rebar cover is specified at the top and bottom of the
sections can be beam. The top cover is measured from the top of the beam to the
specified using centroid of the top longitudinal reinforcing. The bottom cover is
the Section De- measured from the bottom of the beam to the centroid of the
signer utility.
bottom longitudinal reinforcing.
Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties 11 - 17

The reinforcement overrides are specified areas of longitudinal

Note: reinforcing steel that occur at the top and bottom of the left and
The reinforcing right ends of the beam. These overrides are used by ETABS as
data specified follows:
for concrete
frame sections • In the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor when the
is used by the design shear in a concrete beam is to be based on pro-
Concrete vided longitudinal reinforcement (that is, the shear de-
Frame Design sign is based on the moment capacity of the beam)
postprocessor. ETABS compares the calculated required reinforcement
It is also used with that specified in the reinforcement overrides and
to determine
default nonlin-
uses the larger value to determine the moment capacity
11 ear hinge
(pushover)
on which the shear design is based.
properties for • In the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor when the

concrete mem- minimum reinforcing in the middle of a beam is to be
bers. It is not based on some percentage of the reinforcing at the ends
used to modify of the beam ETABS compares the calculated required
the analysis reinforcement at the ends of the beam with that specified
properties of in the reinforcement overrides and uses the larger value
the section. to determine the minimum reinforcing in the middle of
They are based the beam.
on the gross
section proper- • In the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor when the
ties.
shear design of columns is to be based on the maximum
moment that the beams can deliver to the columns
ETABS compares the calculated required reinforcement
with that specified in the reinforcement overrides and
uses the larger value to determine the moment capacity
of the beam.
• For any degree of freedom in the frame nonlinear hinge

properties assigned to a concrete member that is speci-
fied as default ETABS calculates the hinge force-
deformation properties based on the larger of the calcu-
lated required reinforcement at the ends of the beam (as-
suming you have run the design through the Concrete
Frame Design postprocessor) and the specified rein-
forcement overrides.
11 - 18 Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties

Reinforcing Information for Columns

For columns the following areas are provided in the Reinforce-
ment Data dialog box:
• Configuration of Reinforcement: Here you can specify

rectangular or circular reinforcement. You can if desired
put circular reinforcement in a rectangular beam or put
rectangular reinforcement in a circular beam.
• Lateral Reinforcement: If you have specified a rectan-

gular configuration of reinforcement then the only
choice available to you here is ties. If you have specified
a circular configuration of reinforcement then you have 11
Note: an option of either ties or spiral for the lateral (trans-
verse) reinforcement.
Cover is typi-
cally measured • Rectangular Reinforcement: This area is visible if you
from the near- have chosen a rectangular configuration of reinforce-
est edge of the
ment. The following options are available in this area.
concrete sec-
tion to the cen-
ü Cover to Rebar Center: This is the distance from
troid of the
reinforcing
the edge of the column to the center of a longitudinal
steel. bar.
In the special case of rectangular reinforcement in a

circular column the cover is taken to be the mini-
mum distance from the edge of the column to the
center of a corner bar of the rectangular reinforce-
ment pattern.
ü Number of bars in 3-dir: This is the number of

longitudinal reinforcing bars (including corner rebar)
on the two faces of the column that are parallel to
the local 3-axis of the section.
ü Number of bars in 2-dir: This is the number of

longitudinal reinforcing bars (including corner rebar)
on the two faces of the column that are parallel to
the local 2-axis of the section.
ü Bar size: This is the specified size of reinforcing

steel for the section. You can only specify one bar
size for a given concrete frame section property.
Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties 11 - 19

• Circular Reinforcement: This area is visible if you

have chosen a circular configuration of reinforcement.
The following options are available in this area.
ü Cover to Rebar Center: This is the distance from

the edge of the column to the center of a longitudinal
bar.
In the special case of circular reinforcement in a

rectangular column the cover is taken to be the
minimum distance from the edge of the column to a
circle drawn through the center of all the rebar in the
11 circular reinforcement pattern.
ü Number of bars: This is the number of longitudinal

reinforcing bars in the section.
ü Bar size: This is the specified size of reinforcing

steel for the section. You can only specify one bar
size for a given concrete frame section property.
• Check/Design: In this area you specify that when a

member with this frame section property is run through
the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor the reinforce-
ment is either to be checked or to be designed. If the re-
inforcement is to be checked then all information in the
Reinforcement Data dialog box is used. If the reinforce-
ment is to be designed then all information in the Rein-
forcement Data dialog box is used except the bar size is
ignored and the total required steel area is calculated.
For design the configuration of reinforcement, lateral
reinforcement and cover is used.
If you specify reinforcing in a concrete column frame section

property that is specified using the section designer utility, then
the Concrete Frame Design postprocessor either checks the col-
umn for the specified reinforcing or designs new reinforcing de-
pending on the option you selected when you specified the sec-
tion.
11 - 20 Reinforcing for Concrete Frame Section Properties

Wall/Slab/Deck Section Properties

You use the Define menu > Wall/Slab/Deck Sections command
Shortcut: to define wall, slab or deck section properties. This command
You can use the brings up the Define Wall/Slab/Deck Sections dialog box. The
Assign menu > Sections area of this dialog box lists the names of all the cur-
Shell/Area > rently defined wall, slab and deck section properties. The Click
Wall/Slab/Deck To area of the dialog box allows you to define new wall, slab and
Section com- deck sections, modify existing wall, slab and deck section defi-
mand to simul- nitions and delete existing wall, slab and deck sections. Note that
taneously de-
you can only delete wall, slab and deck sections if they are not
fine wall, slab
currently assigned to any area objects in your model.
11
and deck sec-
tions and as-
sign them to
The drop-down box that initially says Add New Wall in the
selected area Click To area of the Define Wall/Slab/Deck Sections dialog box
objects. allows you to define new wall, slab and deck sections.
Defining Wall and Slab Sections

When you define a new wall or slab section, or modify an exist-
ing one, the Wall/Slab Section dialog box appears. Following is
a discussion of each of the areas in this dialog box.

of a wall or slab section.
• Material: Here you can choose the material property for

the slab or wall from a list of all defined material prop-
erties.
• Thickness: Two thicknesses are specified: membrane

and bending. Typically these thicknesses are the same
but they can be different. For instance they may be dif-
ferent if you are trying to model full shell behavior for a
corrugated metal deck.
The membrane thickness is used for calculating:
ü The membrane stiffness for full shell and pure mem-

brane sections.
ü The element volume for element self-mass and self-

weight calculations.
Wall/Slab/Deck Section Properties 11 - 21

The bending thickness is used for calculating:
ü The plate-bending and transverse-shearing stiff-

nesses for full shell and pure plate sections.
• Type: A wall or slab section can either have shell,

membrane or plate-type behavior. Membrane-type be-
havior means that only in-plane membrane stiffness is
provided for the section. Plate-type behavior means that
only out-of-plane plate bending stiffness is provided for
the section. Shell-type behavior means that both in-plane
membrane stiffness and out-of-plane plate bending stiff-
11 ness are provided for the section.
When a section has plate-type or shell-type behavior you

have the option of including or not including thick plate
behavior. When thick plate behavior is included out-of-
plane shearing deformations are considered in the analy-
sis. When thick plate behavior is not included these
shearing deformations are not considered in the analysis.
We recommend that in ETABS you typically do not use

the thick plate option except maybe if you are modeling
thick footings or mat foundations.
• Display Color: Here you assign a color to the wall or

slab section. If you use the View menu > Set Building
View Options command to display the Set Building
View Options dialog box you can then choose an option
to view the model based on the colors associated with
the section properties. In this case each object appears in
a color associated with its assigned section property. See
the section titled "Building View Options" in Chapter 10
for more information. You can change the color associ-
ated with the material by clicking in the color box.
11 - 22 Wall/Slab/Deck Section Properties

Defining Deck Sections

Tip: When you define a new deck section, or modify an existing one,
the Deck Section dialog box appears. Following is a discussion
If you want to
of each of the areas in this dialog box.
use the Com-
posite Beam
Design post-
processor then of a deck section.
you must define
the slab using • Type: There are three options for the deck type. They
Deck proper- are: filled deck, unfilled deck and solid slab. The type of
ties, not slab deck section controls which features are active in the rest
properties, even of the dialog box. Following is a discussion of the three 11
if you are using deck type options.
a solid slab
over the com- ü Filled deck: If you select the filled deck option then
posite beams. all items in the Geometry and Composite Deck
Studs areas are active and the Slab Material item in
the Material area is active.
ü Unfilled deck: If you select the unfilled deck option

then the slab cover item in the Geometry area is set
to zero and grayed out (inactive), the entire Com-
posite Deck Studs area is grayed out and the Deck
Note: material and Deck Shear Thickness items in the
The deck al- Material area are active.
ways spans in
the same direc- ü Solid slab: If you select the solid slab option then
tion as the local the deck depth, rib width and rib spacing items in the
1-axis of the Geometry area are set to zero and grayed out (inac-
area object that tive), the entire Composite Deck Studs area is active
it is assigned and the Slab Material item in the Material area is ac-
to. You can use tive.
the Assign
menu > • Geometry: You specify the geometry of the slab and
Shell/Area >
Local Axes
deck in this area. The following items are specified:
command to
change the di-
ü Slab depth: Depth of the slab not including the
rection of the height of the metal deck.
area object
local 1-axis.
ü Deck depth: Depth (height) of the metal deck.
ü Rib Width: Average width of the metal deck ribs.

ü Rib Spacing: Distance from the center of one down

flute of the metal deck to the center of an adjacent
down flute.
• Composite Deck Studs: You specify the design infor-

Note:
mation for the composite beam shear studs in this area.
Deck section The following items are specified:
properties have
membrane be- ü Diameter: Diameter of the shear studs.
havior only. No
plate bending ü Height: Height of the shear studs after welding.
behavior is
modeled for ü Tensile Strength, Fu: Fu value for the shear studs.
11 deck sections.
• Material: You specify the material property used for
determining the deck shear stiffness (membrane stiff-
ness) in this area. If the deck is filled or there is a solid
slab you specify a slab material property. If the deck is
unfilled you specify a deck material property and a deck
shear thickness. The following items are specified in this
area:
ü Slab material: Name of the concrete material prop-

erty associated with the slab.
Note: ü Deck material: Name of the steel material property
When you as- associated with the deck. The mass and weight per
sign deck sec- unit volume specified for the steel material property
tion properties (using the Define menu > Material Properties
ETABS assumes command) are not used for the deck (unless the
that the deck specified mass per unit volume is zero and the deck
spans in the
same direction
is unfilled). See the upcoming Metal Deck Unit
as the local 1- Weight bullet item for more information.
axis of the area
object to which ü Deck shear thick: Thickness of the deck used for
the deck is as- calculating shear (membrane) stiffness when the
signed deck type is unfilled deck.
• Metal Deck Unit Weight: This is the unit weight of the

deck in force/length2 units. This unit weight is included
when determining the total self-weight of the floor sys-
tem.
11 - 24 Wall/Slab/Deck Section Properties

When determining the self-mass of the floor system the

metal deck unit weight is converted to a unit mass. This
unit mass is added to the unit mass specified for the ma-
terial property designated by you as the Deck Material or
Slab Material (depending on the deck type) in the Mate-
rial area of the dialog box.
A special case does exist for this mass, as follows. If the

deck is a filled deck and the mass per unit volume of the
designated Slab Material is zero then ETABS assumes
the mass of the metal deck is also zero. Similarly, if the
deck is an unfilled deck and the mass per unit volume of
the designated Deck Material is zero then ETABS as-
sumes the mass of the metal deck is also zero. 11
• Display Color: Here you assign a color to the deck sec-
tion. If you use the View menu > Set Building View
Options command to display the Set Building View
Options dialog box you can then choose an option to
view the model based on the colors associated with the
section properties. In this case each object appears in a
color associated with its assigned section property. See
the section titled "Building View Options" in Chapter 10
for more information. You can change the color associ-
ated with the material by clicking in the color box.
ETABS has three built-in default area object properties. They are
DECK1, SLAB1 and WALL1. These are, as the names indicate
metal deck, slab and wall properties. You can add additional
properties as desired. You can also delete properties, including
the built-in ones if they are not currently assigned to objects.
However, a restriction on deleting area object properties is that
ETABS does not let you delete the last deck, slab or wall prop-
erty. In other words, you must always have at least one deck
property, one slab property and one wall property defined even if
they are never assigned to anything.

Link Properties
The different types of link properties available in ETABS are:
• Linear
• Damper
• Gap
• Hook
11 • Plastic1
• Isolator1
• Isolator2
Note:
Typically link elements can have three different sets of proper-
In a linear ties assigned to them. They are linear properties, nonlinear dy-
analysis ETABS namic properties that are used for nonlinear dynamic (time his-
converts the tory) analysis and nonlinear static properties that are used for
specified effec- nonlinear static (pushover) analysis. Linear link elements can
tive damping
only have linear properties assigned to them. Note that you must
for link ele-
ments into have the nonlinear version of ETABS to utilize the nonlinear
equivalent mo- static and dynamic link properties. Discussion of the nonlinear
dal damping dynamic and nonlinear static properties is beyond the scope of
and adds it to this manual.
the specified
modal damp- The linear property that you specify for each of the six degrees
ing. of freedom of a linear link element is an effective stiffness. This
is simply a spring stiffness.
The linear properties that you specify for each of the six degrees
of freedom of all other types of link elements are an effective
stiffness and effective damping. Again the effective stiffness is
simply a spring stiffness. The effective damping specifies dash-
pot-type damping; it is not a specification of percent critical
damping.
11 - 26 Link Properties
In a linear analysis ETABS converts the specified effective

damping for a link element to modal damping. It then adds the
modal damping calculated for all link elements in the model that
have effective damping specified to any modal damping already
specified for the structure as a whole to get the final modal
damping. ETABS reports this final modal damping in the printed
analysis output for building modes. To get this output click the
File menu > Print Tables > Analysis Output command and
check the Building Modal Info check box.
See Chapter 37 for further discussion of link elements.
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties 11

Nonlinear hinge properties are assigned to line objects with
frame section property assignments for use in nonlinear static
(pushover) analysis. The nonlinear hinge properties are defined
using the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties
command. Note that you must have the nonlinear version of
ETABS to utilize the frame nonlinear hinge properties. Discus-
sion of the frame nonlinear hinge properties is beyond the scope
of this manual.
Section Cuts
Section cuts allow you to get resultant forces acting at section
Note: cuts through your structure. They are discussed in detail in the
You can get section titled "Section Cuts" in Chapter 26. Please refer to that
resultant forces discussion for a detailed explanation of section cuts in ETABS.
reported at any
location for You can define section cuts before or after you run an analysis.
section cuts Typically you should not define section cuts, and more impor-
that you define tantly the groups used in the section cut definition, until you
through all or a have completed all manual meshing of your model. (See Chapter
portion of your 31 for discussion of manual meshing). If you define these groups
structure. before manual meshing then some of the point objects that
should be in the group may not yet be created. It is safest to wait
until after you have run the analysis to define the section cuts.
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties 11 - 27

Use the Define menu > Section Cuts command to define section
cuts in ETABS. However, before you use this command you first
should define the group that is used to specify the extent of the
section cut. Groups are defined by selecting the objects that are
to be part of the group and using the Assign menu > Group
Names command.
When you execute the Define menu > Section Cuts command
the Section Cuts dialog box appears. The Section Cuts area of
this dialog box lists the names of all the currently defined section
cuts. The Click To area of the dialog box allows you to define
new section cuts, modify existing section cut definitions and de-
11 lete existing section cuts.
Defining Section Cuts

When you click the Add Section Cut button in the Section Cuts
dialog box or when you highlight an existing section cut name
and click the Modify/Show Section Cut button the Section Cut
Data dialog box appears. This dialog box is broken into four ar-
eas that are described below.
• Section cut name: Here you can specify or modify the

name of a section cut.
• Group: Here you specify or modify the name of the

group that defines the section cut. See the section titled
"Section Cuts" in Chapter 26 for more information.
• Summation about this location: Here you define the

location (point) about which section cut forces are
summed. There are two options for specifying this point.
ü Default: By default the section cut forces are re-

ported at a location (point) that has coordinates equal
to the average of the coordinates of all of the point
objects included in the group that defines the section
cut.
11 - 28 Section Cuts
ü User-Defined: You can specify any arbitrary point

that section cut forces are to be summed about by
entering the global X, Y and Z coordinates of that
point.
Note that there does not need to be a point object defined

at the point that you are summing the section cut forces
about.
• Local 1-Axis Orientation: By default the positive local

1, 2 and 3 axes of the section cut correspond to the
global X, Y and Z axis respectively. You can rotate the
local 1 and 2 axes about the 3-axis (Z-axis).
11
The direction of the positive local 1-axes is specified by
1
Global Y
an angle measured in degrees from the positive global

cal
Lo
Positive X-axis. A positive angle appears counterclockwise as

angle you look down on it from above. An angle of 0 degrees
means the positive local 1-axis is in the same direction
as the positive global X-axis. An angle of 90 degrees
Global X means the positive local 1-axis is in the same direction
as the positive global Y-axis.
The angle described in the paragraph above is entered in

the Local 1-Axis Orientation area of the Section Cut
Data dialog box. Any value between -360 degrees and
+360 degrees, inclusive can be input.
Response Spectrum Functions

A response spectrum function is simply a list of period versus
spectral acceleration values. In ETABS the acceleration values in
the function are assumed to be normalized, that is, the functions
themselves are not assumed to have units. Instead the units are
associated with a scale factor that multiplies the function and is
specified when you define the response spectrum case. See the
subsection titled "Input Response Spectra" under the section ti-
tled "Response Spectrum Cases" later in this chapter for more in-
formation.
Response Spectrum Functions 11 - 29

Note:
Click the Define menu > Response Spectrum Functions com-
In ETABS the mand to define response spectrum functions. When you execute
acceleration
this command the Define Response Spectrum Functions dialog
values in a re-
sponse spec- box appears. The Response Spectra area of this dialog box lists
trum function the names of all the currently defined response spectrum func-
are assumed to tions. The Click To area of the dialog box allows you to add a
be normalized, new spectrum from a text file, add a new user-defined response
that is, the spectrum function, add a new response spectrum function based
functions them- on one of several ETABS built-in code response spectra, modify
selves are not an existing response spectrum function definitions and delete
assumed to existing response spectrum function definitions.
have units.
11 Response Spectrum Functions from a File

You can add a response spectrum definition to ETABS from a
text file. The text file should have period and spectral accelera-
tion values. One set of values (period and spectral acceleration)
should be provided on each line. Any line that has a $ symbol in
the first character space is treated as a comment line and ignored.
You can specify any number of header lines at the beginning of
the file that ETABS should ignore. These header lines do not
need $ symbols at the beginning of them. ETABS quits reading
the file either when it reaches the end of the file or when it
reaches a blank line. Note that ETABS considers a line with the
first character space blank, the second character space a $ sym-
bol and anything beyond the $ symbol as a blank line.
Click the Add Spectrum from File button in the Click To area
Tip: of the Define Response Spectrum Functions dialog box to add a
There are many new response spectrum function definition from an existing text
code-specific file. This brings up the Response Spectrum Function Definition
response spec- dialog box. The following areas exist in this dialog box:
trum templates
built into • Function name: Here you can specify or modify the
ETABS. name of the response spectrum function.
• Function file: Click on the Specify File button in this

area to bring up a dialog box where you indicate the
name of the text file that includes your response spec-
trum data.
11 - 30 Response Spectrum Functions

Typically ETABS does not import the file into its data-
base. It simply maintains a link to the file location. Thus
if you move the response spectrum file, or if you move
your .edb file to another location ETABS may suddenly
be unable to locate the response spectrum file. If you
click the Convert to User-Defined button then ETABS
imports the response spectrum into its database file and
the data will always be available to your model. Do not
click the Convert to User-Defined button until you
have specified the file name and indicated the number of
header lines to skip.
Note that when reading the function file ETABS skips

the number of lines at the top of the file indicated in the
11
Header Lines to Skip item.
• Define Function: This area displays the period and

spectral acceleration values for the function. You can
only view the values in this area. You can not edit these
values unless you convert the function to a user-defined
function. No values appear in this area until you actually
display the graph of the function.
• Function graph: This area displays a graph of the func-

tion. First specify the text file name and the number of
header lines to skip in the Function File area of the dia-
log box. Then click the Display Graph button in the
Function Graph area of the dialog box to display the
graph of the function. This also fills in the values in the
Define Function area of the graph.
You can run your mouse pointer over the function graph
and a dot appears along the line representing the re-
sponse spectrum. The coordinates of the dot are reported
in the box just below the graph.
ETABS reads the response spectrum function file in the follow-

ing way:
• First it skips the specified number of header lines.
• Next it checks to see if a line has a $ symbol as the first

character. If it does then it skips to the next line.

• If there is not a $ symbol as the first character on the line

then ETABS reads the information on the line.
• If the line is blank or if the end of the file is reached then

ETABS stops reading and closes the file.
User-Defined Response Spectrum Functions

Click the drop down box just below the Add Spectrum from
File button in the Click To area of the Define Response Spec-
trum Functions dialog box and click on Add User Spectrum to
add a new user-defined response spectrum. This brings up the
11 Response Spectrum Function Definition dialog box. The fol-
lowing areas exist in this dialog box:
• Function name: Here you can specify or modify the

name of the response spectrum function.
• Define Function: You input the period and spectral ac-

celeration values for the function in this area. Type the
first set of period and spectral acceleration values into
the edit boxes at the top of this area. Then click the Add
Note:
button. Type in the next set of period and spectral accel-
Response spec- eration values and again click the Add button. Continue
tra in ETABS this process until all sets of values are entered.
are always de-
fined as period If you want to modify an existing set of values first
versus spectral highlight the appropriate values in the list box. Note that
acceleration.
when you highlight them they appear in the edit boxes at
the top of the area. Modify the values in the edit boxes
and then click the Modify button.
If you want to delete an existing set of values first high-

light the appropriate values in the list box. Note that
the top of the area. Then click the Delete button.

tion. It updates automatically as additional points are de-
fined for the function. If your computer has any problem
with the automatic update then simply click the Refresh
Graph button located just below the graph.

Code Specific Response Spectrum Functions

ETABS allows you to easily define code specific response spec-
trum functions for a variety of building codes.
Click the drop down box just below the Add Spectrum from
File button in the Click To area of the Define Response Spec-
trum Functions dialog box and click on one of the code-specific
items. For example, click on Add UBC97 Spectrum to add a new
11
response spectrum based on the 1997 UBC.
Clicking on one of these code-specific items brings up a code-

specific Response Spectrum Function Definition dialog box. The
following areas exist in this dialog box:

name of the response spectrum function.
• Parameters: You specify the parameters that define the

code-specific response spectrum in this area. These pa-
rameters vary from code to code. The parameters speci-
fied for each of the codes ETABS includes are discussed
in separate subsections below.
• Define Function: This area displays the period and

spectral acceleration values for the function. You can
only view the values in this area. You can not edit these
values unless you convert the function to a user-defined
function. The values shown here update every time you
redefine the spectrum parameters.
Note that you can click the Convert to User-Defined

button at any time to convert the function to a user-
defined function. Then you are able to edit values in the
Define Function area.


tion. It updates automatically as you redefine the spec-
trum parameters. If your computer has any problem with
the automatic update then simply click the Refresh
1994 UBC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

11 The 1994 UBC response spectrum function is based on Figure
16-3 in Chapter 16 of the 1994 UBC. The digitization of these
response spectra are based on Section C106.2.1 in the 1996
SEAOC Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Com-
mentary (more commonly called the SEAOC Blue Book).
The parameters you enter are a seismic zone factor, Z and a soil
type. Any positive, nonzero value can be specified for the seis-
mic zone factor; see Table 16-I in the 1994 UBC for typical val-
ues. The soil type can be input as 1, 2 or 3; see Table 16-J in the
1994 UBC for typical values.
1997 UBC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

The 1997 UBC response spectrum function is constructed as
shown in Figure 16-3 in Chapter 16 of the 1997 UBC. The pa-
rameters you enter are seismic coefficients Ca and Cv. Any posi-
tive, nonzero value can be specified for the seismic coefficients.
See Tables 16-Q and 16-R in the 1997 UBC for typical values of
these coefficients.

1996 BOCA Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

The following parameters are input for the 1996 BOCA response
spectrum function. Any positive, nonzero value can be input for
these parameters.
Aa = Seismic coefficient representing the effective peak

acceleration as determined in 1996 BOCA Section
1610.1.3.
Av = Seismic coefficient representing the effective peak

velocity-related acceleration as determined in 1996
BOCA Section 1610.1.3.
11
R = The response modification factor determined from
1996 BOCA Table 1610.3.3.
S = The coefficient for the soil profile characteristics of

the site as determined by 1996 BOCA Table
1610.3.1.
The 1996 BOCA response spectrum function is based on 1996

BOCA Section 1610.5.5. The response spectrum is constructed
by plotting the modal seismic design coefficient, Csm, versus the
modal period of vibration, Tm. For a given period, Tm, the value
of Csm is determined using Equation 11-3.
1.2A v S 2.5A a
C sm = ≤ Eqn. 11-3
RTm2 3 R
1995 NBCC Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

The following parameters are input for the 1995 NBCC (Cana-
dian) response spectrum function.
v = Zonal velocity ratio.
Za = Acceleration-related seismic zone.
Za = Velocity-related seismic zone.

Values for these parameters can be found in Appendix C of the

1995 NBCC. Any positive, nonzero value can be input for the
zonal velocity ratio, v. Any positive integer, or zero, can be input
for the acceleration and velocity-related seismic zones.
The 1995 NBCC response spectrum function is based on item

44(a) in Commentary J of the 1995 NBCC.
IBC2000 Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

The following parameters are input for the IBC2000 response
spectrum function. Any positive, nonzero value can be input for
11 these parameters.
SDS = The 5% damped design spectral response acceleration

at short periods as specified in IBC2000 Section
1613.2.1.3.
SD1 = The 5% damped design spectral response acceleration

at a one second period as specified in IBC2000 Sec-
tion 1613.2.1.3.
The IBC2000 response spectrum function is based on the proce-

dure described in IBC2000 Section 1613.2.1.4.
1997 NEHRP Parameters for a Response Spectrum Function

The following parameters are input for the 1997 NEHRP re-
sponse spectrum function. Any positive, nonzero value can be
input for these parameters.
SDS = The design earthquake spectral response acceleration

at short periods as specified in 1997 NEHRP Equa-
tion 4.1.2.5-1.
SD1 = The design earthquake spectral response acceleration

at a one second period as specified in 1997 NEHRP
Equation 4.1.2.5-2.
The 1997 NEHRP response spectrum function is based on the

procedure described in 1997 NEHRP Section 4.1.2.6.

1998 Eurocode 8 Parameters for a Response Spectrum

Function
The 1998 Eurocode 8 response spectrum function is constructed
as described in 1998 Eurocode ENV 1998-1-1:1994 Section
4.2.2. The parameters you enter are the design ground accelera-
tion, ag, the subsoil class and the damping correction factor, η.
Any positive, nonzero value can be specified for the design
ground acceleration. The damping correction factor must satisfy
η ≥ 0.7. The subsoil class can be input as A, B or C.
The ordinates of the response spectrum are calculated using

Equations 4.1 through 4.4 in 1998 Eurocode ENV 1998-1-
1:1994 Section 4.2.2. The values of β o, TB, TC, TD, k1, k2 and S 11
are taken from Table 4.1 in 1998 Eurocode ENV 1998-1-1:1994
Section 4.2.2. Note that the value of these items depends on the
specified subsoil class.
1992 NZS 4203 Parameters for a Response Spectrum

Function
For the 1992 NZS4203 (New Zealand) response spectrum func-
tion you input a scaling factor and a site subsoil category. Any
positive, nonzero value can be specified for the scaling factor.
The site subsoil category can be input as A, B or C.
The 1992 NZS4203 (New Zealand) response spectrum function

is constructed as specified in 1992 NZS4203 Section 4.6.
The ordinates of the response spectrum are calculated using 1992

NZS4203 Equations 4.6.3 and 4.6.4. If you are using Equation
4.6.3 then you input the scaling factor as Sp * R * Z * Ls. If you
are using Equation 4.6.4 then you input the scaling factor as
Sm * Sp * R * Z * Lu.
ETABS calculates the Ch(T, 1) term in Equations 4.6.3 and 4.6.4

based on the input site subsoil category and the values for µ=1.0
in Figures 4.6.1a, b and c and in Tables 4.6.1a, b and c. In Table
4.6.1a the coefficient values for periods of 0, 0.09 and 0.20 sec-
onds are taken as 0.40, 0.68 and 0.68, respectively. In Table
4.6.1b the coefficient values for periods of 0, 0.13 and 0.20 sec-
onds are taken as 0.42, 0.80 and 0.80, respectively. In Table

4.6.1c the coefficient values for periods of 0 and 0.10 seconds

are taken as 0.42 and 0.72, respectively.
Modifying and Deleting Response Spectrum Functions

In the Define Response Spectrum Functions dialog box highlight
an existing response spectrum name and then click on the Mod-
ify/Show Spectrum button to modify the spectrum. The same
dialog box that appeared when you defined the function appears
and you can make any changes or modifications that you desire.
To delete an existing response spectrum function highlight its

11 name in the Define Response Spectrum Functions dialog box
and click the Delete Spectrum button.
Time History Functions

A time history function may be either a list of time and function
values or just a list of function values that are assumed to occur
at equally spaced intervals. The function values in a time history
Tip: function may be ground acceleration values or they may be mul-
tipliers for specified (force or displacement) load cases.
You can define
time history Click the Define menu > Time Functions command to define
functions using time history functions. When you execute this command the De-
one of several fine Time History Functions dialog box appears. The Functions
built-in time
area of this dialog box lists the names of all the currently defined
history function
templates.
time history functions. The Click To area of the dialog box al-
lows you to add a new function from a text file, add a new user-
defined time history function, add a new time history function
based on one of several ETABS built-in function templates,
modify an existing time history function definitions and delete
existing time history function definitions.
Time History Functions from a File

You can add a time history definition to ETABS from a text file.
Any line that has a $ symbol in the first character space is treated
as a comment line and ignored. You can specify any number of
header lines at the beginning of the file that ETABS should ig-
nore. These header lines do not need $ symbols at the beginning
11 - 38 Time History Functions

of them. ETABS quits reading the file either when it reaches the
end of the file or when it reaches a blank line. Note that ETABS
considers a line with the first character space blank, the second
character space a $ symbol and anything beyond the $ symbol as
a blank line.
Click the Add Function from File button in the Click To area of
the Define Time History Functions dialog box to add a new time
history function definition from an existing text file. This brings
up the Time History Function Definition dialog box. The fol-
lowing areas exist in this dialog box:

name of the time history function. 11
• Function file: Click on the Specify File button in this
area to bring up a dialog box where you indicate the
name of the text file that includes your time history
function data.
Typically ETABS does not import the file into its data-
base. It simply maintains a link to the file location. Thus
if you move the time history function file, or if you
move your .edb file to another location ETABS may
suddenly be unable to locate the function file. If you
click the Convert to User-Defined button then ETABS
imports the time history into its database file and the
data will always be available to your model. Do not click
the Convert to User-Defined button until you have
specified all information in the Function file, Values are
and Format type areas.
Note that when reading the function file ETABS skips

the number of lines at the top of the file indicated in the
Header Lines to Skip item. It also skips the number of
characters specified in the Prefix Characters per Line
item at the beginning of each line.
The Number of Points per Line item tells ETABS how

many function values or sets of time and function values
are specified on each line.
Time History Functions 11 - 39

• Values are: Here you specify whether the text file con-
tains time and function values or function values that are
spaced at equal time intervals. If the file contains func-
tion values that are spaced at equal time intervals then
you also specify the time interval.
• Format type: The format type can be specified as either

free format or fixed format. In free format items on the
lines can be separated by spaces or tabs. If you specify a
fixed format type then you also specify the number of
characters per item. Each item on a line is assigned the
same number of character spaces. ETABS begins
11 counting the spaces after it skips the number of prefix
characters specified in the Function File area.

tion. First specify all of the data in the Function file,
Values are and Format type areas. Then click the Dis-
play Graph button in the Function Graph area of the
dialog box to display the graph of the function.
and a dot appears along the line representing the time
history function. The coordinates of the dot are reported
ETABS reads the function file in the following way:
• First it skips the specified number of header lines.
• Next it checks to see if a line has a $ symbol as the first

character. If it does then it skips to the next line.
• If there is not a $ symbol as the first character on the line

then ETABS reads the information on the line skipping
the specified number of characters at the beginning of
the line.
• If the line is blank or if the end of the file is reached then

ETABS stops reading and closes the file.

User-Defined Time History Functions

Click the drop down box just below the Add Function from
File button in the Click To area of the Define Time History
Functions dialog box and click on Add User Function to add a
new user-defined time history function. This brings up the Time
History Function Definition dialog box. The following areas ex-
ist in this dialog box:

name of the time history function.
• Define Function: You input the time and associated

function value for the function in this area. Type the first 11
set of time and function values in the edit boxes at the
top of this area. Then click the Add button. Type in the
next set of time and function values and again click the
Add button. Continue this process until all sets of values
are entered.
If you want to modify an existing set of values first

highlight the appropriate values in the list box. Note that
the top of the area. Modify the values in the edit boxes
and then click the Modify button.
If you want to delete an existing set of values first high-

light the appropriate values in the list box. Note that
the top of the area. Then click the Delete button.

tion. It updates automatically as additional points are de-
fined for the function. If your computer has any problem
with the automatic update then simply click the Refresh
Note that you can also define a user-defined periodic function by

clicking the drop down box just below the Add Function from


Functions dialog box and then clicking on Add User Periodic
Function. This brings up the Time History User Periodic Func-
tion Definition dialog box. This dialog box is the same as that
just described for the User Function except that it has one addi-
tional item that you can specify. That item is the number of cy-
cles.
For a user periodic function you specify the time and function
values for one cycle of the function and you specify the number
of cycles. When ETABS uses the function it assumes it contin-
ues for the specified number of cycles even though you only
11 specified values for the first cycle.
If you convert a user periodic function to a user function then

values are shown for all of the specified cycles.
ETABS Template Time History Functions

ETABS allows you to easily define sine, cosine, ramp, sawtooth
and triangular time history functions using built-in ETABS time
history function templates.
Click the drop down box just below the Add Function from
Functions dialog box and click on one of the sine, cosine, ramp,
sawtooth and triangular items. For example, click on Add Sine
Function to add a new time history function based on a sine
function.
Clicking on one of these time history function items brings up a

specialized Time History Function Definition dialog box. The
following areas exist in this dialog box:

name of the time history function.
• Parameters: You specify the parameters that define the

template time history function in this area. These pa-
rameters vary for the different templates. The parameters
specified for each of the templates included are dis-
cussed in separate subsections below.

• Define Function: This area displays the time and func-

tion values for the time history function. You can only
view the values in this area. You can not edit these val-
ues unless you convert the function to a user-defined
function. The values shown here update every time you
redefine the template parameters.
Note that you can click the Convert to User-Defined

button at any time to convert the function to a user-
defined function. Then you are able to edit values in the
Define Function area.

tion. It updates automatically as you redefine the tem- 11
plate parameters. If your computer has any problem with
the automatic update then simply click the Refresh
Sine Time History Function Template Parameters

The sine time history function is a periodic function. A sine
function cycle starts at a function value of 0, proceeds to its
positive maximum value (positive value of amplitude), continues
to a value of 0, progresses to its negative minimum value (nega-
tive value of amplitude), and returns to a value of 0 again. The
following parameters are specified in the sine time history func-
tion template.
• Period: This is the period of the sine function. It is the

time in seconds that it takes for the function to complete
one cycle.
• Number of Steps per Cycle: This is the number of

steps, that is, function value points, provided for each
cycle of the function.

• Number of Cycles: This is the number of cycles in the

function.
• Amplitude: This is the maximum function value of the

sine function.
Cosine Time History Function Template Parameters

The cosine time history function is a periodic function. A cosine
function cycle starts at its positive maximum value (positive
value of amplitude), proceeds to a value of 0, continues to its
negative minimum value (negative value of amplitude), and re-
11 turns to a value of 0 again and finally returns to it positive
maximum value again. The following parameters are specified
for the cosine time history function template.
• Period: This is the period of the cosine function. It is the

time in seconds that it takes for the function to complete
one cycle.
• Number of Steps per Cycle: This is the number of

steps, that is, function value points, provided for each
cycle of the function.

function.

cosine function.
Ramp Time History Function Template Parameters

A ramp function is defined by three (time, function value) points.
Those three points, in order, are (0, 0), (Ramp time, Amplitude)
and (Maximum time, Amplitude). The ramp time, amplitude and
maximum time parameters are described below.
• Ramp Time: This is the time that it takes for the ramp
function to initially reach its maximum value. It is usu-
ally set to one second.

Figure 11-4: (Ramp time, amplitude) (Period / 2 – ramp time, amplitude)

Points that define a
cycle of a sawtooth
time history function (0, 0) (Period / 2, 0) (Period, 0)
(Period / 2 + ramp time, –amplitude) (Period – ramp time, –amplitude)
• Amplitude: This is the maximum value of the ramp

function. It is usually set to 1.
11
• Maximum Time: This is the time at the end of the ramp
function. It is usually between 10 and 20 seconds.
Sawtooth Time History Function Template Parameters

The sawtooth time history function is a periodic function. A sin-
gle cycle of a sawtooth function is defined by seven (time, func-
tion value) points. Those seven points, in order, are (0, 0), (Ramp
time, Amplitude), (0.5 * Period - Ramp time, Amplitude), (0.5 *
Period, 0), (0.5 * Period + Ramp time, -Amplitude), (Period -
Ramp time, -Amplitude) and (Period, 0). Figure 11-4 illustrates a
single cycle of a sawtooth time history function and the seven
above-described points.
The following parameters are specified in the sawtooth time

history function template.
• Period: This is the period of the sawtooth function. It is

the time in seconds that it takes for the function to com-
plete one cycle.
• Ramp Time: This is time that it takes for the sawtooth

function to ramp up from a function value of 0 to its
maximum amplitude.

function.

sawtooth function.

Triangular Time History Function Template Parameters

The triangular time history function is a periodic function. A
single cycle of a triangular function is defined by five (time,
function value) points. Those five points, in order, are (0, 0), ,
(0.25 * Period, Amplitude), (0.5 * Period, 0), (0.75 * Period, -
Amplitude) and (Period, 0). The following parameters are speci-
fied in the sawtooth time history function template.
• Period: This is the period of the triangular function. It is

the time in seconds that it takes for the function to com-
plete one cycle.
11 • Number of Cycles: This is the number of cycles in the

function.

triangular function.
Static Load Cases

Static load cases are discussed in Chapter 27. In ETABS you
first define static load cases and then you assign various types of
loads to the static load cases using commands available on the
Assign menu. As you will see in the ensuing discussion, you ac-
tually can assign three types of loads to static load cases as you
define them. These three types of loads are self-weight, auto-
matic static earthquake loads and automatic static wind loads.
Note:
Click the Define menu > Static Load Cases command to define
static load cases. This brings up the Define Static Load Case
See Chapter 27 Names dialog box. The static load case names are specified in
for additional the Loads area of the dialog box. There is no limit on the number
information on of static load cases that you can define.
static load
cases. Four separate items are specified in the Loads area of the dialog
box. They are:
• Load: This is the name of the static load case.
11 - 46 Static Load Cases

• Type: This is the type of the static load case. ETABS

uses these values when automatically creating design
load combinations for the design postprocessors. The
factors used in the design load combinations are differ-
ent for the various types of loads. The choices for load
types are:
ü Dead: Dead load.
ü Super Dead: Superimposed dead load. This is used

in the Composite Beam design postprocessor.
ü Live: Live load.

11
ü Reduce Live: Reducible live load. A live load that
is specified as reducible is reduced automatically by
ETABS for use in the design postprocessors. The
live load reduction parameters are specified using
the Options menu > Preferences > Live Load Re-
duction command. See the subsection titled "Live
Load Reduction" under the section titled "Prefer-
ences" in Chapter 18 for more information.
ü Quake: Earthquake load.
ü Wind: Wind load.
ü Snow: Snow load.
ü Other: Other load that either does not fall into one
of the above categories or you do not want it in-
cluded in the design load combinations that are
automatically created by ETABS.
• Self-weight multiplier: The self-weight of the structure

is determined by multiplying the weight per unit volume
of each object that has structural properties times the
volume of the object. The weight per unit volume is
specified in the material properties.
Static Load Cases 11 - 47

You can specify that a portion of the self-weight be ap-

plied to any static load case. The self-weight multiplier
controls what portion of the self-weight is included in a
load case. A self-weight multiplier of 1 means to include
the full self-weight of the structure in the load case. A
self-weight multiplier of 0.5 means to include half of the
self-weight of the structure in the load case.
Normally you should specify a self-weight multiplier

of 1 in one static load case only, usually your dead
load load case. All of your other static load cases then
have self-weight multipliers of zero. Note that if you in-
11 clude a self-weight multiplier of 1 in two different load
cases, and then combine those two load cases in a load
combination, then the results for the load combination
are based on an analysis where double the self-weight of
the building has been applied as a load.
• Auto Lateral Load: The Auto Lateral Load item is in-

active unless the load type specified is either Quake or
Wind. When you specify the load type as Quake or
Wind the Auto Lateral Load drop-down box becomes
active and you can either choose None from it or you can
choose one of several different code-specified loads
which is then automatically created for the specified load
case.
Note: If you do not want to use the automatic lateral loads and
instead plan to assign your own loads using the com-
See Chapters
mands available on the Assign menu then choose None
28 and 29 for
detailed discus-
from this drop-down box. Otherwise select the automatic
sion of auto- load that you want to create from the drop-down box.
matic seismic Initially default values are used for the automatic lateral
and wind loads. load. If you want to review and/or modify those values
then click the Show Lateral Load button. The parame-
ters for the automatic seismic and wind loads are dis-
cussed in detail in Chapters 28 and 29, respectively.
Use the following procedure to add a new static load case in the
Define Static Load Case Names dialog box:
• Type the name of the load case in the Load edit box.
11 - 48 Static Load Cases

• Select a load type from the Type drop-down box.
• Type a self-weight multiplier in the Self-Weight Multi-

plier edit box.
• If the load type specified is Quake or Wind then select

an option from the Auto Lateral Load drop-down box.
• Click the Add New Load button.
• If an automatic lateral load is selected in the Auto Lat-

eral Load drop-down box then click the Show Lateral
11
Loads button and review or modify the parameters for
the automatic lateral load in the resulting dialog box.
Then click the OK button to return to the Define Static
Load Case Names dialog box.
Use the following procedure to modify an existing static load

case in the Define Static Load Case Names dialog box:
• Highlight the the existing load case in the Loads area of

the dialog box. Note that the data associated with that
load case appears in the edit and drop-down boxes at the
top of the Loads area.
• Modify any of the data in the Loads area for the load
case.
• Click the Modify Load button. If necessary, click the

Show Lateral Loads button to modify the automatic
lateral load parameters.
Use the following procedure to delete an existing static load case

in the Define Static Load Case Names dialog box. Note that
when you delete a static load case here all of the loads that have
been assigned to the model as a part of that static load case are
also deleted.
• Highlight the existing load case in the Loads area of the

dialog box. Note that the data associated with that load
case appears in the edit and drop-down boxes at the top
of the Loads area.
• Click the Delete Load button.
Static Load Cases 11 - 49

Response Spectrum Cases

Click the Define menu > Response Spectrum Cases command
to define a response spectrum case. This command brings up the
Define Response Spectra dialog box. Note that you must have at
least one response spectrum function defined for this command
to be active.
The Spectra area of the Define Response Spectrum dialog box

lists the names of all the currently defined response spectrum
cases. The Click To area of the dialog box allows you to define
new response spectrum cases, modify existing response spectrum
11 cases and delete existing response spectrum cases.
Clicking on the Add New Spectrum button or highlighting an

existing spectrum and clicking the Modify/Show Spectrum
button brings up the Response Spectrum Case Data dialog box.
The following subsections describe each of the areas in this dia-
log box:
Spectrum Case Name

Here you can specify or modify the name of the response spec-
trum case.
Structural and Function Damping

It is important that you understand the structural and function
damping item. This item specifies modal damping that is present
for all modes in the response spectrum analysis. Also, ETABS
assumes that the response spectrum functions specified for the
response spectrum case are all specified for this particular
damping ratio.
For example if you specify 2% damping for this term then you
are specifying that there is two percent modal damping in all
modes for the response spectrum analysis and you are also
telling ETABS that the response spectrum functions specified
for this response spectrum case are for two percent damping.
11 - 50 Response Spectrum Cases

If you have link elements defined in your model and damping is

specified in the linear properties of the link element then the ac-
tual damping for a mode may be larger than that specified in the
structural and function damping term because ETABS converts
the damping for the links into modal damping and adds that mo-
dal damping to the specified modal damping to get the final total
modal damping. See the previous section in this chapter titled
"Link Properties" for additional information on this.
In the cases where the final modal damping is different from the
damping specified in the structural and function damping edit
box (larger than because of added damping from link elements)
ETABS modifies the input response spectrum to match this
larger damping. The damping modification is based on the 50%
11
median values for velocity in Table 2 of N. M. Newark and W. J.
Hall (1981).
For all response spectra ETABS reduces the entire spectrum

based on the velocity formula (2.31 - 0.41 lnβ) in Table 2 of N.
M. Newark and W. J. Hall (1981). A maximum reduction of
50% is made.
For example, suppose that a response spectrum is specified as a

4% damped response spectrum and the actual final damping for a
mode is 6.3% (because of added link elements). ETABS then
modifies the specified 4% damped spectrum by the factor deter-
mined in Equation 11-7.
2.31 − 0.41 ln 6.3 1.555

= = 0.89 Eqn. 11-7
2.31 − 0.41 ln 4 1.742
Thus the spectral ordinate at the modal period in the 4% damped

response spectrum is multiplied by a factor of 0.89 to obtain the
spectral ordinate for 6.3% damping which is the actual final
damping associated with the mode.
Note that unlike time history analysis, for response spectrum

analysis you can not override the modal damping specified for
all modes on a mode-by-mode basis.
Response Spectrum Cases 11 - 51

Modal Combination
In this area you specify the method ETABS uses to combine
modal responses in the response spectrum analysis and you also
define a damping value.
The following options are available for modal combinations:

Note:
ETABS defaults
• CQC: This is the Complete Quadratic Combination
to the CQC method described by E. L. Wilson, A. D. Kiureghian and
method of mo- E. Bayo (1981b). This modal combination technique
dal combina- takes into account the statistical coupling between
tion. closely spaced modes caused by modal damping. In-
11 creasing the modal damping increases the coupling be-
tween closely spaced modes. If the modal damping is 0
for all modes, then the CQC method degenerates to the
SRSS method.
• SRSS: This is the Square Root of the Sum of the

Squares method. This modal combination technique
does not take into account any coupling of modes as do
the CQC and GMC methods.
• ABS: This is the Absolute method. This modal combi-

nation technique simply combines the modal results by
taking the sum of their absolute values. This method is
usually over-conservative.
• GMC: This is the General Modal Combination method

that is also known as the Gupta method. This method is
the same as the complete modal combination procedure
described in Equation 3.31 in A. K. Gupta (1990). The
GMC method takes into account the statistical coupling
between closely spaced modes similar to the CQC
method, and it also includes the correlation between
modes with rigid-response content.
The GMC method requires that you specify two fre-

quencies, f1 and f2 that define the rigid-response content
of the ground motion. These must satisfy
0 < f1 < f2. The rigid-response parts of all modes are as-
sumed to be perfectly correlated.

The GMC method assumes no rigid response below fre-

quency f1, full rigid response above frequency f2 and an
interpolated amount of rigid response for frequencies
between f1 and f2.
Frequencies f1 and f2 are properties of the seismic input,

not of the structure. Gupta defines f1 as shown in Equa-
tion 11-4.
S Amax
f1 = Eqn. 11-4
2πS Vmax
where SAmax is the maximum spectral acceleration and

SVmax is the maximum spectral velocity for the ground
11
motion considered. The default value for f1 is unity.
Gupta defines f2 as shown in Equation 11-5.
1 2
f2 = f1 + f r Eqn. 11-5
3 3
where fr is the rigid frequency of the seismic input, that

is, that frequency above which the spectral acceleration
is essentially constant and equal to the value at zero pe-
riod (infinite frequency). Others have defined f2 as
shown in Equation 11-6.
f2 = fr Eqn. 11-6
The default value for fr is zero indicating infinite fre-

quency. For the default value of f2 the GMC method
gives results similar to the CQC method.
Directional Combination
For each displacement, force or stress quantity in the structure,
modal combination produces a single, positive result for each di-
rection of acceleration. These directional values for a given re-
sponse quantity are combined to produce a single positive result.
The two available choices for directional combination are:
• SRSS: Combine the directional results by taking the

square root of the sum of their squares. All other input

items remaining unchanged, the results obtained using

this method do not vary regardless of the excitation an-
gle that you specify. This is the recommended method
for directional combination and is the default.
• ABS: This is the scaled absolute sum method. Here the

directional results are combined by taking the maximum,
over all directions, of the sum of the absolute values of
the response in one direction plus a scale factor times the
response in the other directions.
For example, if the scale factor equals 0.3, the spectral

11 response, R, for a given displacement, force or stress
would be:
R = max (R 1 , R 2 , R 3 )
where
R 1 = R 1 + 0.3 (R 2 + R 3 )
R 2 = R 2 + 0.3 (R 1 + R 3 )
R 3 = R 3 + 0.3 (R 1 + R 2 )
and R1, R2 and R3 are the modal combination values for

each direction.
All other input items remaining unchanged, the results

obtained using this method will vary depending on the
excitation angle you choose. Results using a scale factor
of 0.3 are comparable to the SRSS method (for equal in-
put spectra in each direction) but may be as much as 8%
unconservative or 4% over-conservative depending on
the excitation angle chosen. Larger scale factors tend to
produce more conservative results.

Input Response Spectra

Here you can specify any defined response spectrum function for
each of the three local coordinate system directions of the re-
sponse spectrum case as defined by the excitation angle. See the
subsection below for discussion of the excitation angle. You can
also specify a scale factor along with each function.
Note that this scale factor has units of Length/seconds2 and that
its value will change as you change the units in your model. Es-
sentially ETABS assumes the response spectrum functions are
unitless (normalized) and that the scale factor converts them into
the appropriate units. 11
If you are scaling your response spectrum to match some static
analysis results (e.g., base shear) you may want to include that in
the scale factor specified for the response spectrum function in
the input response spectra area. In this case you would input a
scale factor equal to the product of the scale factor to covert the
spectrum to the appropriate units and the scale factor to scale the
response spectrum base shear to the appropriate level.
Excitation Angle
The response spectrum case positive local 3-axis is always in the
same direction as the positive global Z-axis. The response spec-
trum case local 1 and 2 axes lie in the horizontal global XY
plane.
The excitation angle is an angle measured from the positive

global X-axis to the response spectrum case positive local 1-axis.
A positive angle appears counterclockwise as you look down on
the model.
Thus the direction of the response spectrum local 1-axis is de-

termined by the excitation angle, the local 3-axis is in the same
direction as the Z-axis and the local 2-axis is determined from
the local 1 and 3 axes by using the right hand rule. See the sec-
tion titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for more infor-
mation.

Time History Cases

Click the Define menu > Time History Cases command to de-
fine a time history case. This command brings up the Define
Time History Cases dialog box. Note that you must have at least
one time history function defined for this command to be active.
The History area of the Define Time History Cases dialog box
lists the names of all the currently defined time history cases.
The Click To area of the dialog box allows you to define new
time history cases, modify existing time history cases and delete
existing time history cases.
11 Clicking on the Add New History button or highlighting an ex-
isting time history and clicking the Modify/Show History button
brings up the Time History Case Data dialog box. The following
subsections describe each of the areas in this dialog box:
History Case Name

Here you can specify or modify the name of the time history
case.
Options
You specify various options for the time history analysis in the
options area of the Time History Case Data dialog box.
• Analysis type: This option specifies the type of time

history analysis. The possible choices are linear, periodic
and nonlinear.
ü Linear: In a linear time history analysis all objects

behave linearly. Only the linear properties assigned
to link elements are considered in a linear time his-
tory analysis. Frame nonlinear (pushover) hinges as-
signed using the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear
Hinge Properties command have no effect on a lin-
ear time history analysis.
11 - 56 Time History Cases

ü Periodic: A periodic time history analysis is a linear

analysis. For this analysis you specify a single cycle
of the periodic function and then ETABS assumes
that the specified cycle continues indefinitely.
ETABS shows time history results for a single cycle

that occur after the output has stabilized such that
the conditions at the beginning of the cycle are equal
to those at the end of the cycle.
In a periodic time history analysis all objects behave

linearly. Only the linear properties assigned to link
elements are considered in a periodic time history
analysis. Frame nonlinear (pushover) hinges as- 11
signed using the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear
Hinge Properties command have no effect on a pe-
riodic time history analysis.
ü Nonlinear: In a nonlinear time history analysis the

nonlinear dynamic properties assigned to link ele-
ments are considered. The mode shapes obtained for
the analysis are based on linear properties only.
Frame nonlinear (pushover) hinges assigned using
the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge Prop-
erties command have no effect on a nonlinear time
history analysis.
• Modal damping: Click the Modify/Show button adja-

cent to the Modal Damping item to bring up the Modal
Damping dialog box where you can specify or modify
the modal damping. In this dialog box you can specify a
damping that applies to all modes and then, if desired,
overwrite the damping for any mode(s). Following are
three bullet items discussing the three areas in the Modal
Damping dialog box.
ü Damping for All Modes: Enter the damping for all

modes in this dialog box. This is a percent critical
damping. A damping that is 5% 0f critical damping
is entered as 0.05.
Time History Cases 11 - 57

Note: ü Damping Override Options: You can choose one

of two options in this area. If you choose the Specify
In ETABS enter
modal damping overrides option then the Modal
5% of critical
damping as
Damping Overrides area becomes active and you
0.05. can specify damping overrides for any mode(s). Use
the overrides when modal damping for some modes
is different from the damping that is specified for all
modes.
If you choose the No damping overrides/delete over-

rides option then the Modal Damping Overrides area
becomes inactive and any damping overrides that
11 were specified are deleted.
ü Modal Damping Overrides: This area is only ac-

tive if the Specify modal damping overrides option
is selected in the Damping Override Options area.
To override a modal damping value type select the
mode number in the Mode box and then type the
damping value in the damping box. (A damping that
is 5% of critical damping is entered as 0.05). Then
click the Add button.
To modify an existing modal damping value high-

light the existing damping value in the Modal
Damping Overrides area of the dialog box. Note that
the data associated with that load case appears in the
edit and drop-down boxes at the top of this area.
Modify the mode number or damping as desired.
Then click the Modify button.
To delete an existing modal damping value highlight

the existing damping value in the Modal Damping
Overrides area of the dialog box. Note that the data
associated with that load case appears in the edit and
drop-down boxes at the top of this area. Then click
the Delete button.
Important note: Do not forget to specify the number

of modes to be used for your analysis. To specify the
number of modes click the Analyze menu > Set
Analysis Options command, to bring up the Analy-
sis Options dialog box. Make sure that the Dynamic

Analysis check box is checked and click the Set Dy-

namic Parameters button to bring up the Dynamic
Analysis parameters dialog box where you can
specify the number of modes that is used in the
analysis.
You can specify a modal damping override for any

mode number. If you specify a damping override for
a mode that is larger than the number of modes
specified for the analysis then that damping override
is simply ignored when the analysis is run.
• Number of Output Time Steps: This is the number of

equally spaced steps at which the output results are re- 11
ported. Do not confuse this with the number of time
steps in your input time history function. The number of
output time steps can be different from the number of
time steps in your input time history function. The num-
ber of output time steps times the output time step size is
equal to the length of time over which output results are
reported.
• Output Time Step Size: This is the time in seconds

between each of the equally spaced output time steps.
Do not confuse this with the time step size in your input
time history function. The output time step size can be
different from the input time step size in your input time
history function. The number of output time steps time
Note: the output time step size is equal to the length of time
over which output results are reported.
If you start a
time history • Start from Previous History: This option allows you to
from the final set the initial conditions for the time history analysis to
conditions of a
the conditions that exist at the end of a previously run
previous history
then both histo- analysis (in the same analysis run). This option is not
ries must be of available for periodic time history analysis.
the same type.
That is, they Note that in many cases you can accomplish the same
must both be thing using the Arrival Time feature in the Load As-
linear or they signment area. The advantage of the Start from Previous
must both be History option is that when you want to start several dif-
nonlinear. ferent time histories from the final conditions of another
time history, such as a gravity load time history, you

only have to run the other (gravity) time history once

rather than multiple times.
Often times you will want to run gravity load as a time

history and then start one or more lateral time histories
from the final conditions of the gravity load time history
using the Start from Previous History option. To run a
gravity load time history define the Load in the Load
Assignments area as the load case that contains your
gravity load and create an input function from the built-
in Ramp time history function template. It is also helpful
to set your modal damping high (say 0.99) for this grav-
11 ity load time history.
Load Assignments
You can add as many different load assignments to a time his-
tory case as you desire. To define a load assignment fill in the
appropriate items in the Load, Function, Scale Factor, Arrival
Time and Angle boxes and then click the Add button.
To modify an existing load assignment highlight the existing

load assignment in the Load Assignment area of the dialog box.
Note that the data associated with that load assignment appears
in the edit and drop-down boxes at the top of this area. Modify
the load assignment data as desired. Then click the Modify but-
ton.
To delete an existing load assignment highlight the existing load

assignment in the Load Assignment area of the dialog box. Note
that the data associated with that load assignment appears in the
edit and drop-down boxes at the top of this area. Then click the
Note: Delete button.
You can per-
form multiple The following items are included in the Load Assignment area:
support excita-
tion time his- • Load: This may either be a defined static load case, acc
tory analysis in dir 1, acc dir 2 or acc dir 3. The three accelerations (acc
ETABS using dir 1, acc dir 2 and acc dir 3) are ground accelerations in
displacement the local axes directions of the time history. Positive acc
time histories. dir 3 corresponds to the positive global Z direction al-
ways. See the discussion of the Angle item in this area
for information about acc dir 1 and acc dir 2. When you

specify one of these three ground accelerations your in-

put function defines how the ground acceleration varies
with time.
The static load cases that you can specify in this area nay
be either force loads or displacement loads. In this case
your input function defines how this load or displace-
ment varies with time.
Note that you can perform multiple support excitation

time history analysis in ETABS using displacement time
histories. To do this define a static load case with a unit
displacement at one or more locations and also define a
time history function that defines how that unit dis- 11
placement varies with time. Repeat this as many times as
required. Then define a time history case with multiple
load assignments where each load assignment consists of
one of the unit displacement load cases and its associ-
ated time history function.
When you create functions for time history displacement

analysis the time step for the input function should typi-
cally be smaller than that for a comparable acceleration
time history. The reason for this is that when accelera-
tion varies linearly between two points displacement
varies as a cubic between those same two points. Thus
between these two points you can define the acceleration
just by defining the two points. However you will have
to define the two points and several more in between
them to reasonably define the displacement.
• Function: This may be any defined time history func-

tion.
• Scale Factor: This item is a scale factor that is used as a

multiplier on the input function values. The units for the
scale factor depend on the type of load specified in the
Load drop-down box. If the load is specified as a ground
acceleration (that is, acc dir 1, acc dir 2 or acc dir 3) then
this scale factor has units of Length/seconds2. If the load
is a static load case then this scale factor is unitless.

The scale factor can be any positive or negative number,

or zero.
• Arrival Time: The arrival time is the time that a par-

ticular load assignment starts. Suppose that you want to
apply the same ground acceleration that lasts 30 seconds
to your building in the global X and global Y directions.
Further suppose that you want the ground acceleration in
the global Y direction to start 10 seconds after the
ground acceleration in the global X direction begins. In
this case you could specify an arrival time of 0 for the
load assignment for the global X direction shaking and
11 an arrival time of 10 for the load assignment for the
global Y direction shaking.
The arrival time can be zero or any positive or negative

time. The time history analysis for a given time history
case always starts at time zero. Thus if you specify a
negative arrival time for a load assignment then any
portion of its associated input function that occurs before
time zero is ignored. For example suppose a particular
load assignment has an arrival time of -5 seconds. Then
the first five seconds of the input function associated
with that load assignment is ignored by the program.
• Angle: The local 1 and 2 axes of the time history case

coordinate system lie in the global XY plane. By default
the local 1-axis is in the same direction as the positive
global X-axis, the local 2-axis is in the same direction as
the positive global Y-axis and the local 3-axis is in the
same direction as the positive global Z-axis. You can
rotate the local 1 and 2 axes of the time history coordi-
nate system about the local 3 (global Z) axis. The Angle
item specifies the angle in degrees measured from the
positive global X-axis to the positive local 1-axis of the
time history case coordinate system. Positive angles ap-
pear counterclockwise as you look down on the model.

The Angle item is only considered if the Load item is

either acc dir 1 or acc dir 2. Otherwise the angle item has
no meaning. Note that the angle is always measured to
the local 1-axis, even when the Load item is specified as
acc dir 2. Thus, if the Load item is specified as acc dir 2,
and the angle is specified as 30 degrees, then acc dir 2
and local coordinate direction 2 are oriented at an angle
of 120 degrees (measured counterclockwise) from the
positive global X-axis.
Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases

Click the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases
11
command to define static nonlinear load cases. Discussion of the
parameters used to define these load cases is beyond the scope of
this manual.
Load Combinations
Load combinations are discussed in detail in Chapter 27. Click
the Define menu > Load Combinations command to define
load combinations. This command brings up the Define Load
Combinations dialog box. The Combinations area of this dialog
box lists the names of all the currently defined load combina-
tions. The Click To area of the dialog box allows you to define
new load combinations, modify existing load combinations and
delete existing load combinations.
Clicking on the Add New Combo button or highlighting an ex-

isting load combination and clicking the Modify/Show Combo
button brings up the Load Combination Data dialog box. The
following bullet items include brief discussions of each of the ar-
eas in this dialog box.
• Load combination name: Here you can specify or

modify the name of the load combination. Refer to
Chapter 27 for limitations on load combination names
(labels).
Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases 11 - 63

Note: • Load combination type: Here you specify the type of

load combination as ADD (Additive), ENVE (Enve-
See Chapter 27
for discussion
lope), ABS (Absolute) or SRSS. The meaning of each of
of load combi- these types of combinations is discussed in Chapter 27.
nations. The most common type of load combination is ADD.
• Define Combination: The actual load combination is

created by specifying one or more load cases, each with
an associated scale factor. To add a load case to the load
combination definition select the load case name from
the Case Name drop-down box, type in an appropriate
scale factor in the Scale Factor edit box and click the
11 Add button.
To modify the scale factor for a load case already speci-

fied as a part of the load combination definition high-
light the load case name. Note that the load case name
and associated scale factor appear in the drop-down box
and edit box at the top of the Define Combination area.
Type in the revised scale factor in the Scale Factor edit
box and click the Modify button.
To delete a load case from the load combination defini-

tion highlight the load case name. Note that the load case
name and associated scale factor appear in the drop-
down box and edit box at the top of the Define Combi-
nation area. Click the Delete button.
Mass Source
Refer to the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for discussion of
the mass source. Click the Define menu > Mass Source com-
mand to the mass source for ETABS. Following are bullet items
discussing each of the areas in this dialog box.
• Mass Definition: Here you specify whether ETABS

determines the building mass based on element/object
self masses and any additional masses that you specify
or based on a load combination that you specify. By de-
fault ETABS determines the mass from element/object
masses and additional masses. See Chapter 27 for more
information.
11 - 64 Mass Source
Note: • Define Mass Multiplier for Loads: This area is only

active if you select the From Loads option in the Mass
See Chapter 27
for discussion
Definition area. When this area is active you specify a
of the mass load combination from which ETABS determines the
source. building mass. The mass source load combination is cre-
ated by specifying one or more load cases each with an
associated scale factor. To add a load case to the mass
source load combination definition select the load case
name from the Case Name drop-down box, type in an
appropriate scale factor in the Scale Factor edit box and
To modify the scale factor for a load case already speci-

fied as a part of the mass source load combination defi-
11
nition highlight the load case name. Note that the load
case name and associated scale factor appear in the drop-
down box and edit box at the top of the Define Combi-
nation area. Type in the revised scale factor in the Scale
Factor edit box and click the Modify button.
To delete a load case from the mass source load combi-

nation definition highlight the load case name. Note that
the load case name and associated scale factor appear in
the drop-down box and edit box at the top of the Define
Combination area. Click the Delete button.
• Include only lateral mass: If this check box is checked

then only assigned translational mass in the global X and
Y axes directions and assigned rotational mass moments
of inertia about the global Z-axis are considered in the
analysis. All other assigned masses are ignored for the
analysis. Checking this box is useful if you do not want
to consider vertical dynamics in your model. If you do
want to consider vertical dynamics then leave this box
unchecked.
Mass Source 11 - 65
Chapter 12
12
The ETABS Draw Menu
General
This chapter discusses the drawing tools and controls that are
available on the ETABS Draw menu.
The Draw menu > Select Object command is simply used to

switch you from a drawing mode where mouse clicks draw ob-
jects into a selection mode where mouse clicks select objects.
Tip: Alternative methods of switching from a drawing mode to a se-
lection mode include pressing the Esc key on your keyboard,
Most of the
tools available clicking the Pointer button, , on the side toolbar and exe-
on the Draw cuting one of the Select menu commands.
menu are also
available on the The Draw menu > Reshape Object command activates the re-
side toolbar. shaper tool. This tool is discussed in the section titled "Reshaper
Tool" in Chapter 9.
12 - 1
Note that your model must be unlocked in order to draw objects

in it. Typically your model is locked after you run an analysis. If
you need to unlock your model you can use the Options menu >
Lock Model command or you can click the Lock/Unlock
Model button, , on the main (top) toolbar. Note that both the
menu command and the toolbar button act as toggle switches to
lock and unlock the model.
Typically when you enter a drawing mode you remain in that

drawing mode until you do something to exit it. For example if
you are in a mode to draw point objects you will draw a new
point object every time you click the left mouse button until you
do something to enter a different drawing mode (e.g., Draw
12 menu > Draw Line Objects > Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D)) or
until you do something to enter the select mode (e.g., press the
Esc key on your keyboard).
The ETABS Similar Stories Feature

Do not overlook the Similar Stories feature in ETABS when
Note: drawing objects in plan view in ETABS. Similar story assign-
The similar ments are made in the story level data (Edit menu > Edit Story
stories feature Data > Edit command). The similar stories feature drop-down
is only active in box located on the right hand side of the status bar (just to the
plan view. It left of the drop-down coordinate system box) at the bottom of
works for the ETABS window controls what happens when an object is
drawing, as- drawn in ETABS.
signing and
selecting. The similar stories drop down box can be set to One Story, All
Stories or Similar Stories. Each of these is discussed below. Note
that the similar stories feature is only active in plan view. It
works for drawing, assigning and selecting.
• One Story: This option means that the drawn object

only occurs at the story level that it is drawn on.
• All Stories: This option means that the drawn object oc-
curs at all story levels even though it is drawn at only
one story level.
12 - 2 The ETABS Similar Stories Feature

Chapter 12 - The ETABS Draw Menu
• Similar Stories: This option means that the drawn ob-

ject occurs at all story levels designated as similar in the
story level data to the story level at which the object is
drawn. Suppose that Level XX is designated similar to
Level YY. Then, when this option is active, an object
drawn on Level XX also occurs in Level YY and an ob-
ject drawn on Level YY also occurs in Level XX.
Drawing Point Objects

You can only draw point objects in plan view. You can not draw
them in an elevation or three-dimensional view. To draw point
objects click the Draw menu > Draw Point Objects command
or click the Draw Point Objects button, , on the side tool-
12
bar. (You can also click on the Create Points (plan, elev, 3D)
button, , after clicking on the Draw Point Objects button, but
this is not currently necessary since there is only one flyout but-
ton). Once you have activated the Draw Point Objects command
there are two ways you can draw the point objects. They are:
• Left click at any location in a plan view to draw a point

object.
• Working in plan view, depress and hold down the left

button on your mouse. While keeping the left button de-
pressed drag your mouse to " band" a window around
one or more grid line intersections. Then release the left
mouse button. Point objects will automatically be placed
at each grid line intersection of two grid lines in the
same coordinate/grid system included in the "rubber
band" window.
Drawing Line Objects

To draw line objects use the Draw menu > Draw Line Objects
command or click the Draw Line Objects button, , on the
side toolbar. If you use the menu option a submenu appears with
five line object drawing options. Similarly, if you use the toolbar
button option a new toolbar pops out with the same five line ob-
ject drawing options. Those line object drawing options and their
Drawing Point Objects 12 - 3

associated toolbar buttons are discussed in the bullet items be-

low. Note that the items in parenthesis, such as (plan, elev, 3D)
indicate the types of views for which the line object drawing op-
tion is active. (See the subsection below titled "Floating Proper-
ties of Object Window for Line Objects" for additional informa-
tion.)
• Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D), : To draw a line ob-

ject using this command left click once at the beginning
of the line and then drag the mouse to the end location of
the line and left click again. Note that as you drag the
mouse a dashed line is visible indicating the current ex-
tent of the line object.
12 If you left click once on the end point of the line object
then ETABS assumes that you want to draw another line
object starting from that point. Thus when you left click
on a third point a second line object is created spanning
from the second point clicked to the third point clicked.
This process continues indefinitely when you left click
(single click) on the end point of the line object. You can
always tell if ETABS is expecting you to draw the sec-
ond point of a line object because you will see the
dashed "rubber band" line indicating the current extent
of the line as you drag the mouse. You might also think
of the single left click as finishing the line but not pick-
Tip: ing up your pencil from the paper.
To finish
drawing a line If you double left click on the end point of the line then
object you ei- ETABS does not assume that you want to draw another
ther double left line starting at that point. You might think of the double
click on the end left click as finishing the line and picking your pencil up
point or you from the paper. When you double left click to finish
single left click drawing a line object you still remain in the same line
and then press drawing mode. In other words, you can move your
the Enter key
mouse pointer to a new location and start to draw a new
(or the Esc
key)on your
line.
keyboard.
If you single click to finish drawing a line object and
then decide that you did not want to draw another line
object starting from that point you can press the Enter
key on the keyboard. This will terminate the drawing of
the next line and you will notice that the dashed "rubber
12 - 4 Drawing Line Objects

band" line disappears. Single left clicking to finish

drawing a line object and then pressing the Enter key on
the keyboard is equivalent to double left clicking to fin-
ish drawing a line object.
You can single click to finish drawing a line object and

then press the Esc key on your keyboard. This terminates
the drawing of the next line and takes you out of Draw
mode and into Select mode. See the section titled "The
Two Modes of ETABS" in Chapter 4 for more informa-
tion.
When using this command in an elevation view or 3D

view if you draw a line object that crosses story levels
then ETABS immediately breaks the object up at the 12
story levels. For example if you draw a line object that
has its top at the 4th story level and it bottom at the 2nd
story level ETABS immediately breaks the object up
into two objects with the break point at the 3rd story
level.
• Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (plan, elev, 3D),

: This command works in two different ways. You
can click on any grid line (in plan view only) and a line
object is drawn on that grid line between the two adja-
cent intersecting grid lines from the same coordi-
nate/grid system.
Alternatively, in all views, you can depress and hold

down the left button on your mouse. While keeping the
left button depressed drag your mouse to "rubber band" a
window around one or more grid line segments. Then
release the left mouse button. Line objects are automati-
cally placed at each grid line segment included in the
"rubber band" window. The term grid line segment in
this paragraph means that portion of a grid line that is
between the two adjacent intersecting grid lines from the
same coordinate/grid system.
Drawing Line Objects 12 - 5

• Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (plan), :

Once you have activated the Create Columns in Region
or at Clicks (plan) command there are two ways you can
draw the columns. They are:
ü Left click at any location in a plan view to draw a

column (vertical line object below).
ü Working in plan view, depress and hold down the

left button on your mouse. While keeping the left
button depressed drag your mouse to "rubber band"
a window around one or more grid line intersections.
Then release the left mouse button. Columns (verti-
12 cal line objects below) are automatically placed at
each grid line intersection of two grid lines in the
same coordinate/grid system included in the "rubber
band" window.
The columns (vertical line objects) extend from the story

level that you draw them on to the story level below,
and, of course, also to other story levels if you have the
similar stories feature in the ETABS status bar activated.
See the section titled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter
22 for additional information on the similar stories fea-
ture.
• Create Secondary Beams in Region or at Clicks

Note: (plan), : This command allows you to draw typical
infill (secondary) beams for an entire grid line space
The spacing
(beam bay) in a single click. The grid line space is de-
and orientation
of secondary fined by four adjacent intersecting grid lines. If there are
beams are existing beams already in the grid line space then the
controlled in spacing and extent (length) of the secondary beams is
the floating based on the existing beams rather than the grid lines.
Properties of Figure 12-1 shows an example of a grid line space and
Object window. secondary beams. Note that secondary beams are not in-
cluded on the grid lines.
This command works in two different ways. You can

click inside the space created by adjacent intersecting
grid lines (from the same coordinate/grid system) and
secondary beams are drawn in that space.

Figure 12-1: A B C
Example of secon-
3
dary beams Existing beams
shown dashed
*
Secondary beams (entered
2 by clicking at *) trimmed by
already existing beams
$ Secondary beams (entered

by clicking at $) in a grid
line space (beam bay)
1
Grid line space 12

Alternatively, you can depress and hold down the left
pressed drag your mouse to "rubber band" a window
around one or more grid line spaces. Then release the
left mouse button. Secondary beams are automatically
placed in each grid line space within the region that is
fully included in the "rubber band" window. The term
grid line space in this paragraph means the space created
by adjacent intersecting grid lines (from the same coor-
dinate/grid system).
See the subsection titled "Floating Properties of Object

Window for Line Objects" for additional information
about secondary beams.
• Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (elev), : This

Note: command works in an elevation view. It allows you to
The type of
quickly draw brace elements in a space bounded by two
brace created adjacent grid lines (from the same coordinate/grid sys-
(X, V, chevron, tem) and two adjacent story levels.
eccentric, etc.)
is controlled in This command works in two different ways. You can
the floating click inside the space created by the intersection of two
Properties of adjacent grid lines (from the same coordinate/grid sys-
Object window. tem) and two adjacent story levels.
Drawing Line Objects 12 - 7


around one or more grid line/story level spaces. Then
release the left mouse button. Braces are automatically
placed in each grid line/story level space within the re-
gion that is fully included in the "rubber band" window.
The term grid line/story level space in this paragraph
means the space created by the intersection of two adja-
cent grid lines (from the same coordinate/grid system)
and two adjacent story levels.
See the subsection titled "Floating Properties of Object

12 Window for Line Objects" for additional information
about drawing braces beams.
Floating Properties of Object Window for Line Objects

There is a Show Floating Property Window toggle switch avail-
able on the Options menu. When this feature is activated a
floating Properties of Object window pops up as soon as you
click the menu item or toolbar button to draw a line object. This
floating window includes a drop-down box with an alphabetical
listing of all currently defined frame section properties. What-
ever frame section property is showing in the pop up window is
then assigned to the line object when you draw it. If you do not
want to make a frame section assignment to the line object then
you can choose None in the drop-down box.
Note that when you are drawing secondary beams you can also
specify the spacing, span direction of the beams and whether the
M3 moment at the beam ends is released (pinned) or not released
(continuous) in the Properties of Object window. There are two
spacing options available in the pop up box. They are:
• Specify a maximum spacing. In this case ETABS will

draw an appropriate number of secondary beams such
that they do not exceed the specified maximum spacing.
• Specify the number of equally spaced secondary beams.

When you are drawing braces in elevation you can specify in the
Properties of Object window whether the braces are X-braces, V-
braces, inverted V-braces (chevron), or single eccentric braces
sloped forward or backward. The V-braces can be specified ei-
ther eccentric or concentric in the window. Also you can specify
whether the M3 moment at the brace ends is released (pinned) or
not released (continuous).
Drawing Area Objects

To draw area objects use the Draw menu > Draw Area Objects
command or click the Draw Area Objects button, , on the
side toolbar. If you use the menu option a submenu appears with
five area object drawing options. Similarly, if you use the toolbar
12
button option a new toolbar pops out with the same five area
object drawing options. Those area drawing options and their as-
sociated toolbar buttons are discussed in the bullet items below.
Note that the items in parenthesis, such as (plan, elev, 3D) indi-
cate the types of views for which the area object drawing option
is active. (See the subsection below titled "Floating Properties of
Object Window for Area Objects" for additional information.)
• Draw Areas (plan, 3D), : To draw an area object

Tip:
using this command left click once at the first corner
To finish point of the area, drag the mouse to the next corner point
drawing an and left click, and so on to define each corner point of
area object you the area object. Note that as you drag the mouse a
either double dashed line is visible indicating the current extent of the
left click on the
area object.
last point or
you single left When you reach the last corner point of the area object
click and then
you can either double left click to finish the object or
press the Enter
key on your you can single left click and then press the Enter key on
keyboard. the keyboard.
An area object drawn using this command must have at

least three corner points. Typically area objects are lim-
ited to no more than four corner points, however, there is
no limit on the maximum number of corner points al-
lowed for horizontal area objects (in the global XY
plane).
Drawing Area Objects 12 - 9

When using this command in a 3D view ETABS does

not allow the area object drawn to cross a story level.
For example you can not draw a vertical area object in a
3D view that has its top at the 4th story level and its
bottom at the 2nd story level. The bottom can not be
below the 3rd story level because this would cause the
area object to cross a story level.
• Draw Rectangular Areas (plan, elev), : This

command requires two left clicks to draw the rectangular
area object. Left click once to define the position of one
corner point of the area. Then drag the mouse and left
click again to define the diagonally opposite corner
12 point. Note that as you drag the mouse a dashed line is
visible indicating the current extent of the area object.
When using this command in an elevation view if you

draw an area object that crosses story levels then
ETABS immediately breaks the object up at the story
levels. For example if you draw an area object that has
its top at the 4th story level and it bottom at the 2nd
story level ETABS immediately breaks the object up
into two objects with the break line at the 3rd story level.
• Create Areas at Click (plan, elev), : This com-

mand allows you to draw area objects in one or more
grid line spaces at a single click. The grid line space is
defined by four adjacent intersecting grid lines. Figure
12-1 shows an example of a grid line space. To draw the
area object simply left click in the grid line space.
• Draw Walls (plan), : Once you have activated the

Draw Walls (plan) command working in plan view you
left click once at the beginning of the wall below and
then drag the mouse to the end of the wall below and left
click again. Note that as you drag the mouse a dashed
line is visible indicating the current extent of the area
object (wall below).
12 - 10 Drawing Area Objects

If you left click once on the end of the wall below then
ETABS assumes that you want to draw another area ob-
ject (wall below) starting from that point. Thus when
you left click on a third point a second area object (wall
below) is created extending from the second point
clicked to the third point clicked. This process continues
indefinitely when you left click (single click) on the end
of the area object. You can always tell if ETABS is ex-
pecting you to draw the end point of an area object (wall
below) because you will see the dashed "rubber band"
line indicating the current extent of the wall as you drag
the mouse. You might also think of the single left click
as finishing the wall but not picking up your pencil from
the paper.
12
If you double left click on the end of the wall below
(area object) then ETABS does not assume that you
want to draw another wall starting at that point. You
might think of the double left click as finishing the wall
and picking your pencil up from the paper. When you
double left click to finish drawing an area object (wall
below) you still remain in same area object drawing
mode. In other words, you can move your mouse pointer
to a new location and start to draw a new wall.
If you single click to finish drawing a wall below and

then decide that you did not want to draw another wall
below starting from that point you can press the Enter
key on the keyboard. This will terminate the drawing of
the next wall and you will notice that the dashed "rubber
band" line disappears. Single left clicking to finish
drawing an area object (wall below) and then pressing
the Enter key on the keyboard is equivalent to double
left clicking to finish drawing an area object.
Note that area objects representing walls are broken at

story levels. They are also broken at turns in developed
elevations, that is, at locations where the plane displayed
by the developed elevation changes.
Drawing Area Objects 12 - 11

• Create Walls in Region or at Click (plan), : This

command works in two different ways. You can click on
any grid line (in plan view) and a wall below (area ob-
ject) is drawn on that grid line between the two adjacent
intersecting grid lines from the same coordinate/grid
system.

around one or more grid line segments. Then release the
left mouse button. Area objects (walls below) are auto-
matically placed at each grid line segment included in
12 the "rubber band" window. The term grid line segment
in this paragraph means that portion of a grid line that is
between the two adjacent intersecting grid lines from the
same coordinate/grid system.
Floating Properties of Object Window for Area Objects

There is a Show Floating Property Window toggle switch avail-
able on the Options menu. When this feature is activated a
floating Properties of Object window pops up as soon as you
click the menu item or toolbar button to draw an area object.
This floating window includes a drop-down box with an alpha-
betical listing of currently defined wall/slab/deck section proper-
ties. The properties available in this drop down box depend on
the type of view you are in. Whatever wall/slab/deck section
property is showing in the pop up window is then assigned to the
area object when you draw it. The Opening assignment in this
drop-down box assigns an unloaded opening. If you do not want
to make a wall/slab/deck section assignment to the area object
then you can choose None in the drop-down box.
Developed Elevations
Developed elevations are special user-defined elevations. These
elevations can simultaneously show multiple faces of the build-
ing in a single "unfolded" elevation view. Use the following
steps to define a developed elevation:
12 - 12 Developed Elevations
• Click the Draw menu > Draw Developed Elevation

Definition command.
• The Elevation Views dialog box appears. In this dialog

box you can define names for developed elevations that
you plan to draw, modify the names of existing devel-
oped elevations (or ones you plan to draw), and delete
names of existing developed elevations (or ones you
plan to draw). When finished defining or modifying de-
veloped elevation names highlight the name of the ele-
vation that you first want to work with and then click the
OK button.
• The ETABS windows then all switch to special plan

views used for creating and modifying developed eleva- 12
tion views. Note the following about these special plan
views:
ü In these special plan views you can only see and

Note: work with one developed elevation definition at a
A line defining time. You can use the drop down box in the status
a developed bar (at the bottom of the ETABS window) that ordi-
elevation can narily displays the similar stories option to switch to
not intersect plan views of different developed elevations.
(cross) itself
and it also can- ü When you click the OK button in the Elevation
not close. Views dialog box you enter the special plan views to
work on the developed elevation that was high-
lighted in the dialog box. This developed elevation
may or may not currently be defined. If it is not de-
fined you will see a blank plan view otherwise you
will see a plan view with the existing developed ele-
vation view shown in it.
When you initially enter the special plan view you

are in a mode where you can start drawing the de-
veloped elevation. You do not need to click on any
buttons or menu commands to draw the line defining
the developed elevation. Simply start left clicking to
draw the line. The line defining the developed ele-
vation may be multi-segmented. When you get to the
last point defining the developed elevation either
double left click or single left click and then press
Developed Elevations 12 - 13
the Enter key on your keyboard to complete the

definition.
Important Note: The line defining the developed

elevation can not intersect (cross) itself and it also
cannot close.
After you draw a developed elevation or if the developed eleva-

tion you highlighted in the Elevation Views dialog box already
exists such that when the special plan view appears a developed
elevation definition is showing you can modify the developed
elevation definition. To do this:
• Click on the Draw menu > Reshape Object command

12 or the Reshaper button, , on the side toolbar.
• Click on the line defining the developed elevation. Se-

lection handle squares that are the opposite color from
the background color appear along the line at the points
where you clicked to define the line.
• If you then left click on the line and while holding down
the mouse left button you can drag the entire line defin-
ing the developed elevation to a new location. Note that
the shape of the line does not change.
• Alternatively you can left click on one of the selection

handles and while holding down the mouse left button
you can drag the selection handle (point) to a new loca-
tion thus changing the shape of the line defining the de-
veloped elevation.
• When you are through reshaping a developed elevation

definition do one of the following:
ü Right click in the ETABS window (not on any ob-

jects) to bring up a selection menu. Click Restore
Views on this menu. You return to the views you
were in before you began to define/modify the de-
veloped elevations. Alternatively you could select
these views from the view menu or associated tool-
bar buttons but it is much easier to use the Restore
Views command.
ü If instead you want to work with another developed

elevation then select a developed elevation view
name from the drop down box in the status bar (at
the bottom of the ETABS window) that ordinarily
displays the similar stories option. When you click
on a developed elevation view in this drop down box
you enter a mode where you are ready to draw a new
elevation, not reshape it. If you want to re-
shape/modify this developed elevation then click on
the Draw menu > Reshape Object command or the
Reshaper button, , on the side toolbar again.
Note that when you finish drawing a line that defines a devel-
oped elevation you can then immediately either exit the devel-
oped elevation view (we recommend using the Restore Views
12
command as described above to do this), reshape the line (as de-
scribed above), or click in the drop-down menu on the status bar
to work on another developed elevation (as described above).
Figure 12-2 shows three example developed elevations together

with their associated plan views. The elevations associated with
a particular plan are shown next to the plan. The heavy line in
the plan views shows the extent of each developed elevation.
The open circles on the heavy lines show the locations where left
mouse clicks are required to define the developed elevation.
Note that each of the left click locations is numbered in the order
the clicks occur.
Note that in Figure 12-2c the final mouse click (point 5) can not
occur at grid intersection A-3 (the same location as point 1) be-
cause this would close the line and developed elevations are not
allowed to be closed in this manner.
Also note that the three examples shown in Figure 12-2 all have
the mouse clicks occurring on grid intersections. It is not neces-
sary to click on grid intersections to define developed elevations.
You can click anywhere in plan when defining a developed ele-
vation and the elevation is created for the point that you clicked
on.
Developed Elevations 12 - 15
A B C
3
1
3 2 1 1 1
A A A B C
2 3
1
a) Plan Developed Elevation

A B C
3
2 1
3 3 2 2 1 1 2
B A A B B C C
12 2
3 4
7
5 6
1
b) Plan Developed Elevation

A B C
3
1 5 4
3 2 1 1 1 2 3 3
A A A B C C C B
2 3
1
c) Plan Developed Elevation

(Above)
Figure 12-2:
Example definitions
of developed eleva-
tions
Dimension Lines
You can use the Draw menu > Draw Dimension Line com-
mand to draw dimension lines at any location in a plan or eleva-
tion view. You can not draw dimension lines in a three-
dimensional view. Once you have clicked the Draw menu >
Draw Dimension Line command use the following steps to
draw the dimension line:
• Left click on the point that you want to dimension from.
• Left click on the point that you want to dimension to.
• The dimension line appears between the two points you 12

clicked on but you are not quite done creating it. Now
you can drag the dimension line in a direction perpen-
dicular to its original location to the final location for the
line. When you have dragged the dimension line to its
final location left click the mouse again and the dimen-
sion line is completed.
Note that three left clicks are required to completely draw a di-
mension line. A completed dimension line has arrow heads at
each end, dimension text displaying the length of the dimension
line and leaders to the points being dimensioned if you dragged
the dimension line away from those points. You can specify the
units that the dimensions are to be displayed in by using the Op-
tions menu > Preferences > Output Decimals command. See
Dimension lines are similar to other line objects in that they only
appear on the story level you draw them on unless you are using
the similar stories feature that is in the ETABS status bar. The
ETABS similar stories feature works for dimension lines. See the
section titled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22 for additional
information on the similar stories feature.
You can use the View menu > Set Building View Options
command or the Set Building View Options button, , lo-
cated on the main (top) toolbar to toggle the visibility of the di-
mension lines on or off.
Dimension Lines 12 - 17
Once you have drawn a dimension line you can select it any time
you are in the select mode by clicking directly on it. You can not
select a dimension line by windowing it. The reason you might
want to select a grid line is to relocate it. There are two features
available for relocating grid lines. They are the nudge feature
and the reshaper tool.
The nudge feature is described in the section titled "The ETABS

Nudge Feature" in Chapter 9. This feature works as described
there for dimension lines.
The reshaper tool is described in Chapter 9. The section titled

"Reshaping Dimension Lines" in that chapter provides informa-
tion on using the tool to relocate dimension lines.
12
Special Drawing Controls
ETABS provides drawing controls that allow you to snap to
various items and drawing controls that allow you to constrain
the direction in which you can draw a line. These types of
drawing controls are discussed in the subsections below.
ETABS Snap Options

The ETABS snap features allow you to snap to various items
when you are drawing or editing. There are six separate snap
features available in ETABS. You can have these six features
toggled on or off in any combination. You can toggle the snap
features on and off using the Draw menu > Snap to command
or by clicking one or more of the six snap feature toolbar buttons
on the side toolbar. The six snap features and their associated
toolbar buttons are:
• Snap to Grid Intersections and Points, : This fea-

ture snaps to points and grid line intersections of two
grid lines in the same coordinate/grid system. This fea-
ture works in plan, elevation and three dimensional
views.
12 - 18 Special Drawing Controls

• Snap to Line Ends and Midpoints, : This feature

snaps to the midpoints and ends of line objects and to the
midpoints and ends of edges of area objects. Note that
the end of an edge of an area object is a corner point of
the area object. This feature works in plan, elevation and
three dimensional views.
• Snap to Intersections, : This feature snaps to the

intersections of line objects with other line objects and
with the edges of area objects. It does not snap to the
intersection of the edge of one area object with the edge
of another area object. This feature works in plan view
only. It does not work in elevation or three dimensional
views. 12
• Snap to Perpendicular Projections, : This feature
works as follows. First draw the first point for a line or
area object. Then, if this snap feature is active place the
mouse pointer over another line object or edge of an area
object and left click. A line object or edge of an area
object is drawn from the first point perpendicular to the
line object or edge of an area object that the mouse
pointer was over when the second point was clicked.
This feature works in plan view only. It does not work in
elevation or three dimensional views.
• Snap to Lines and Edges, : This feature snaps to

grid lines, line objects and edges of area objects. This
feature works in plan, elevation and three dimensional
views.
• Snap to Fine Grid, : This feature snaps to an in-

visible grid of points. The spacing of the points is con-
trolled by the Plan Fine Grid Spacing Item which is
available under the Options menu > Preferences > Di-
mensions/Tolerances command. This feature works in
plan view only. It does not work in elevation or three
dimensional views.
Special Drawing Controls 12 - 19

Use the following procedure when using the snap commands:
• If the appropriate snap tool is not already activated then

select it from the side toolbar or using the Draw menu >
Snap to command.
• Move the mouse pointer in the graphics window.
• When a snap location is found close to the mouse pointer

a dot appears at the snap location as well as a text field
describing the snap location.
Note the distance that the pointer must be from a snap

location before it snaps to that location is controlled by
12 the Screen Snap to Tolerance item which is available
under the Options menu > Preferences > Dimen-
sions/Tolerances command.
• When the desired snap location is found click the left

mouse button to accept it.
• Modify the snap options if necessary and continue

drawing or editing objects.
The snap options are evaluated in the order they are listed above.
This order is repeated below for easier reference. If more than
one snap option is active and the mouse pointer is located such
that it is within the screen snap to tolerance of two different snap
features then it will snap to the snap feature that is first in the list
below. This is true even if the item associated with the other
snap feature is closer to the mouse pointer as long as both items
are still within the screen snap to tolerance.
• Snap to Grid Intersections and Points, .
• Snap to Line Ends and Midpoints, .
• Snap to Intersections, .
• Snap to Perpendicular Projections, .

• Snap to Lines and Edges, .
• Snap to Fine Grid, .
As an example, suppose Snap to Intersections and Snap to Fine

Grid are both active. Assume that the mouse pointer is located
such that it is within the screen snap to tolerance of both an in-
tersection of two line objects and one of the invisible grid points.
The snap will be to the intersection of the two line objects be-
cause this snap feature occurs first in the above list.
When two items from the same snap feature are within the
screen snap to tolerance of the mouse pointer the snap occurs to
the first drawn item which may or may not be the closest item.
12
Drawing Constraints in ETABS
Drawing constraints provide the capability to constrain one of
the axes when you are drawing an object in plan view or re-
shaping an object in plan view using the reshaper tool. See the
section titled "Reshaper Tool" in Chapter 9 for information on
reshaping objects. Using the drawing constraints you can quickly
draw a line object parallel to one of the global axes or at any ar-
bitrary angle. The drawing constraint tools can be activated using
the Draw menu > Constrain Drawn Line to command or they
can be activated by pressing either the X, Y, Z or A key on your
keyboard.
The drawing constraints include:
• Constant X: Locks the X component of the next point

so that it is the same as the previous point.
• Constant Y: Locks the Y component of the next point

so that it is the same as the previous point.
• Constant Z: Locks the Z component of the next point so

that it is the same as the previous point.
Special Drawing Controls 12 - 21

• Constant Angle: Allows you to specify an angle in de-

grees in the status bar at the bottom of the ETABS win-
dow. Drawing is then constrained along this angle. The
angles are measured from the global X-axis. Positive an-
gles appear counterclockwise as you look down on the
plan.
Note that when you use the keyboard command to spec-

ify a constant angle constraint, every time you press the
A key on the keyboard the constant angle changes to be
equal to the angle of the line that is within the screen
selection tolerance (Options menu > Preferences >
Dimensions/Tolerances) distance from the mouse
12 pointer. You can, of course, always change this angle by
editing it in the ETABS status bar.
• None: Removes the current drawing constraint. Pressing

the space bar on your keyboard also removes the current
drawing constraint.
There are three steps to using the constraint tools:
• Locate the first point.
• Press one of the constraint keys on the keyboard (X, Y,

Z or A) or use the Draw menu > Constrain Drawn
Line to command.
• Locate the next point. ETABS only picks up the uncon-

strained component of the next point.
Drawing constraints are always removed as soon as you draw the

next point.
Note that snaps can be used in conjunction with constraints. In

this case only the unconstrained component of the selected snap
point is used when a constraint is selected.

Chapter 13
13
The ETABS Select Menu
General
The Select menu in ETABS provides basic options and tools for
selecting objects in your ETABS model. This chapter discusses
those options and tools. Do not overlook the important note con-
cerning window selections in plan view at the end of the bullet
item titled "Window."
The similar stories feature of ETABS discussed in the Section ti-

tled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22 works for selections.
Note that the similar stories feature is only active in plan view.
Basic Methods of Selecting Objects

There are three basic methods of selecting objects in ETABS.
They are:
• Left click: Here you simply left click on an object to

select it. If there are multiple objects one on top of the
13 - 1
other then you can hold down the Ctrl key on your key-
board as you left click on the objects. A dialog box will
appear that allows you to specify which object you want
to select.
Note: • Window: Here you draw a window around one or more

objects to select them. To draw a window around an ob-
When selecting
by window in a
ject first position your mouse pointer above and to the
plan view (not a left of the object(s) you want to window. Then depress
perspective and hold down the left button on your mouse. While
plan view) only keeping the left button depressed drag your mouse to a
the visible ob- position below and to the right of the object(s) you want
jects that lie to select. Finally release the left mouse button. Note the
fully in the following about window selection:
plane of the
13 plan view are ü As you drag your mouse a "rubber band window"
selected. appears. The rubber band window is a dashed rec-
tangle that changes shape as you drag the mouse.
One corner of the rubber band window is at the point
where you first depressed the left mouse button. The
diagonally opposite corner of the rubber band win-
dow is at the current mouse pointer position. Any
visible object that is completely inside the rubber
band window when you release the left mouse but-
ton is selected.
Note:
ü You do not necessarily have to start the window
An entire object above and to the left of the object(s) you are select-
must lie within ing. You could alternatively start the window above
the rubber band and to the right, below and to the left or below and
window for the to the right of the object(s) you want to select. In all
object to be
cases you would then drag your mouse diagonally
selected.
across the object(s) you want to select.
An entire object must lie within the rubber band window

for the object to be selected.
Note about Window Selections in Plan View: When

selecting by window in a plan view (not a perspective
plan view) only the visible objects that lie fully in the
plane of the plan view are selected. In other words, only
the visible point objects, horizontal area objects and
horizontal line objects are selected.
13 - 2 Basic Methods of Selecting Objects

Chapter 13 - The ETABS Select Menu
• Intersecting Line: Here you draw a line through one or

more objects to select them. To use this selection method
you first tell ETABS that you want to use intersecting
line selection either by clicking the Select menu > Se-
lect Using Intersecting Line command or by clicking
on the Set Intersecting Line Select Mode button, .
Tip: Once you have told ETABS to use the intersecting line
selection method you then draw the intersecting line as
Use the inter-
follows. First position your mouse pointer to one side of
secting line
selection
the object(s) you want to select. Then depress and hold
method in a down the left button on your mouse. While keeping the
perspective left button depressed drag your mouse across the ob-
view to select ject(s) you want to select. Finally release the left mouse
all columns at a
story level.
button. Note the following about the intersecting line
selection method:
13
ü As you drag your mouse a "rubber band line" ap-
pears. The rubber band line is a dashed line that
changes length and orientation as you drag the
mouse. It extends from the point where you first de-
pressed the left mouse button to the current mouse
pointer position. Any visible object that is inter-
sected (crossed) by the rubber band line when you
release the left mouse button is selected.
ü When you make a selection using the intersecting

line method you do not then remain in an intersect-
ing line mode such that you could immediately make
another intersecting line selection. Instead you de-
fault back to a window selection mode. You must
tell ETABS that you want to use the intersecting line
selection method (either by clicking the Select menu
> Select Using Intersecting Line command or by
clicking on the Set Intersecting Line Select Mode
button, ) every single time you use the selection
method even if you are doing several intersecting
line selections in a row.
Other methods of selecting objects are discussed in the next sec-

tion.
Basic Methods of Selecting Objects 13 - 3

Other Methods of Selecting Objects

You can click on the select menu to gain access to other methods
of selecting objects. These methods include:
• Select on XY plane: Using this command you simply

click on a single point and all objects (point, line and
area) that are in the same XY plane as the selected point
are also selected. The object must lie entirely in the as-
sociated plane to be selected.
• Select on XZ plane: Using this command you simply

area) that are in the same global XZ plane as the selected
13
point are also selected. The object must lie entirely in the
associated plane to be selected.
• Select on YZ plane: Using this command you simply

area) that are in the same global YZ plane as the selected
point are also selected. The object must lie entirely in the
associated plane to be selected.
• Select by groups: Using this command you can select

any collection of objects that has been defined as a
group. See Chapter 26 for discussion of groups.
Note: • Select by frame sections: Using this command you can

specify a frame section property name and all line ob-
These selection
jects that are assigned that frame section property are
methods also
work for dese- selected.
lection.
• Select by wall/slab/deck sections: Using this command
you can specify a wall/slab/deck section property name
and all area objects that are assigned that wall/slab/deck
section property are selected.
• Select by link properties: Using this command you can

specify a link property name and all line objects that are
assigned that link property are selected.
13 - 4 Other Methods of Selecting Objects

Chapter 13 - The ETABS Select Menu
• Select by line object type: Using this command you can

specify that certain types of line objects are to be se-
lected. The choices for the types of line objects are col-
umn, beam, brace, null or dimen lines (short for dimen-
sion lines). See the section titled "Line Object Labeling
and Frame Type" in Chapter 24 for more information.
• Select by area object type: Using this command you

can specify that certain types of area objects are to be
selected. The choices for the types of area objects are
floor, wall, ramp or null. See the section titled "Area
Object Labeling and Area Type" in Chapter 23 for more
information. Note that openings are a subset of null area
objects.
• Select by story level: Using this command you can 13

specify a story level and all objects (point, line and area)
associated with that story level are selected.
• Select all: This selection method selects all objects in

the model regardless of whether they are visible or not.
Be careful using this command. It does not just select
what is showing in a particular window, but rather it lit-
erally selects all objects in your model. You can also use
the Select All button, , on the side toolbar to execute
this command.
• Select invert: This command changes the selection such

that the currently selected objects are no longer selected
and all objects that are not currently selected are se-
lected.
• Get previous selection: This selection method selects

whatever objects were last previously selected. For ex-
ample suppose you select some line objects by clicking
on them and then assign them some frame section prop-
erties. You can then use this command to select the line
objects again and assign something else to them such as
member end releases. You can also use the Restore
Previous Selection button, , on the side toolbar to
execute this command.
Other Methods of Selecting Objects 13 - 5

• Clear selection: Using this command clears the selec-

tion of all currently selected objects. It is an all or noth-
ing command. You can not selectively clear a portion of
a selection using this command. If you want to selec-
tively clear a selection you can either left click on the
selected objects one at a time or you can use the deselect
tool documented below. You can also use the Clear Se-
lection button, , to clear the entire selection.
Deselecting Objects
You can deselect objects one at a time by left clicking on the se-
lected objects. A more powerful way to deselect items is to use
13 the Select menu > Deselect command. This gives you access to
most of the above described selection methods except that now
they are used to deselect rather than to select. Suppose that you
wanted to select all of the objects in your model except for those
in a particular XZ plane. You could do this by first using the Se-
lect menu > Select All command and then using the Select
menu > Deselect > XZ Plane command.
13 - 6 Deselecting Objects
Chapter 14
14
The ETABS Assign Menu
General
The Assign menu in ETABS provides basic options and tools for
assigning section properties, loads, and more to area, line and
point objects in your ETABS model. This chapter discusses
those options and tools. Note that before you make an assign-
ment to an object using the Assign menu you must first select the
object.
The similar stories feature of ETABS discussed in the Section ti-

tled "Similar Story Levels" in Chapter 22 works for assignments.
Note that the similar stories feature is only active in plan view.
Assignments to Point Objects

Use either the Assign menu > Joint/Point command or the As-
sign menu > Joint/Point Load command to make assignments
to point objects. The following subsections discuss the assign-
ments that you can make to point objects.
14 - 1
Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Point Objects

Tip: Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Rigid Diaphragm com-
mand to designate a rigid diaphragm. This command provides a
You can also
diaphragm constraint to all of the selected points. The selected
assign rigid
diaphragms to points should typically all lie in a plane that is parallel to the
area objects global X-Y plane. No points other than those actually selected
using the As- are included in the diaphragm constraint.
sign menu >
Shell/Area > When you select one or more point objects and click the Assign
Rigid Dia- menu > Joint/Point > Rigid Diaphragm command the Assign
phragm com- Diaphragms dialog box appears. The Diaphragms area of the As-
mand. sign Diaphragms dialog box lists the names of all the currently
defined rigid diaphragms. The Click To area of the dialog box
allows you to define new rigid diaphragms, change an existing
diaphragm name and delete an existing diaphragm.
14 Typically to assign a new diaphragm you select the point objects,
enter the Assign Diaphragm dialog box, type a new diaphragm
name in the edit box in the Diaphragms area, click the Add New
Diaphragm button and then click the OK button.
Note:
Rigid dia- If you want to add additional point objects to an existing dia-
phragms can phragm definition you select all of the point objects that you
only be hori- want to add to the diaphragm, enter the Assign Diaphragm dia-
zontal. Thus log box, highlight the name of the diaphragm that you are adding
when assigning the point objects to in the edit box in the Diaphragms area and
a rigid dia- click the OK button. Note that this adds to the existing dia-
phragm con- phragm definition, it does not replace it.
straint to point
objects all of You can click the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Rigid Dia-
the selected phragm command and enter the Assign Diaphragms dialog box
points should without first making a selection if you wish (as long as the model
lie in a plane
is unlocked). This is useful if you want to change a diaphragm
that is parallel
to the global X- name or delete a diaphragm. In this case you enter the Assign
Y plane. Diaphragms dialog box without first making a selection, make
the desired name changes or deletions and then click the OK
button. Since you entered the dialog box without a selection
ETABS knows not to make any assignment to the highlighted
diaphragm when you click the OK button. In this special case
where you enter the dialog box without a selection, whatever
diaphragm is highlighted when you click the OK button retains
exactly the same definition it had before you entered the dialog
box.
14 - 2 Assignments to Point Objects

Chapter 14 - The ETABS Assign Menu
Tip: If you want to delete some point objects from a diaphragm defi-
nition, then select all of the point objects that you want to delete
To delete spe-
from the diaphragm, enter the Assign Diaphragm dialog box,
cific point ob-
jects from a
highlight None in the Diaphragms area and click the OK button.
diaphragm
definition, se-
In ETABS a rigid diaphragm translates within its own plane
lect those point (global X-Y plane) and rotates about an axis perpendicular to its
objects, enter own plane (global Z-axis) as a rigid body. Including point ob-
the Assign Dia- jects in a rigid diaphragm definition has no affect on the out-of-
phragm dialog plane behavior of the point objects.
box, highlight
None in the Note that you can also apply a rigid diaphragm to an area object.
Diaphragms See the subsection titled "Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Area
area and click Objects" in the section titled "Assignments to Area Objects" later
the OK button. in this chapter for more information. In most instances it is better
to assign the rigid diaphragm to an area object.
14
Panel Zone Assignments to Point Objects
A panel zone assignment to a point object allows differential ro-
tation and in some cases differential translation at beam-column,
beam-brace and column-brace connections. You specify a panel
zone assignment by selecting the point object and clicking the
Assign menu > Joint/Point > Panel Zone command. This pops
up the Assign Panel Zone dialog box.
When specifying a panel zone assignment to a point object you

indicate the properties of the panel zone, the connectivity at the
panel zone, the local axes orientation for the panel zone and an
assignment option for the panel zone. Each of these items is dis-
cussed in the subsections below. The headings used for the sub-
sections correspond to the areas in the Assign Panel Zone dialog
box.
You can not assign multiple panel zones to the same point ob-
ject.
Assignments to Point Objects 14 - 3

Properties
When you specify panel zone properties you are actually speci-
fying the stiffness of the springs used to model the panel zone.
See the subsection below titled "Connectivity" for more infor-
mation. The following options are available for specifying panel
zone properties:
• Elastic properties from column: In this case only rota-

tional properties for bending about the major axis (local
3-axis) and minor axis (local 2-axis) are taken from the
column. These rotational properties are assigned to the
panel zone spring that connects the two ETABS-created
internal joints at the panel zone. For all other degrees of
freedom the internal joints at the panel zone are assumed
14 to be rigidly connected.
When you select this properties option the only active

option for connectivity is beam-column and the only ac-
tive option for the local 2-axis is from column.
If you specify this option and there is no column con-

nected to the point object with the panel zone assign-
ment then the panel zone assignment is ignored by
ETABS. When you run the analysis a warning message
reports panel zone assignments that are ignored because
of this (if any).
• Elastic properties from column and doubler plate:

When using this option you specify a doubler plate
thickness. ETABS then changes the web thickness (local
2-axis direction) of the column to be equal to the original
web thickness plus the specified doubler plate thickness
and calculates the properties of this modified section.
The rotational properties for bending about the major
axis (local 3-axis) and minor axis (local 2-axis) are taken
from the modified column section. These rotational
properties are assigned to the panel zone spring that
connects the two ETABS-created internal joints at the
panel zone. For all other degrees of freedom the internal
joints at the panel zone are assumed to be rigidly con-
nected.

When you select this properties option the only active

option for connectivity is beam-column and the only ac-
tive option for the local 2-axis is from column.
If you specify this option and there is no column con-

nected to the point object with the panel zone assign-
ment then the panel zone assignment is ignored by
ETABS. When you run the analysis a warning message
reports panel zone assignments that are ignored because
of this (if any).
Tip:
Assigning link • Specified spring properties: When using this option
element prop- you specify rotational spring stiffnesses for major axis
erties to a panel bending (about the local 3-axis of the column and panel
zone is a little zone) and minor axis bending (about the local 2-axis of
more compli- the column and panel zone). These two rotational spring
cated, but it
provides the
properties are assigned to the panel zone spring that 14
most versatility. connects the two ETABS-created internal joints at the
If you want the panel zone. For all other degrees of freedom the internal
panel zone to joints at the panel zone are assumed to be rigidly con-
behave non- nected.
linearly in a
nonlinear static When you select this properties option the only active
or dynamic option for connectivity is beam-column and the only ac-
analysis then tive option for the local 2-axis is from column.
you must spec-
ify the panel • Specified link property: When using this option you
zone properties specify a link element property for the panel zone. The
as a link prop- link element properties are assigned to the spring that
erty. connects the two ETABS-created internal joints at the
panel zone. In this case this spring may have properties
for all six degrees of freedom if nonzero link properties
are defined for all six degrees of freedom. If the link
element property has zero properties for a particular de-
gree of freedom then ETABS assumes that degree of
freedom is rigidly connected. Therefore, because of this,
if for some reason you want one of the degrees of free-
dom of the panel zone to have essentially zero stiffness
you should specify a small stiffness for that degree of
freedom in the link properties.

If you have nonlinear static properties defined for the

Note: link property then those properties are considered when
you run a static nonlinear (pushover) analysis. Similarly,
A panel zone If you have nonlinear dynamic properties defined for the
assignment
link property then those properties are considered when
allows relative
movement,
you run a nonlinear time history analysis. Thus when
typically rota- you indicate that the panel zone properties are based on a
tion, between specified link property you can model nonlinear behav-
beam and col- ior in the panel zone.
umn, beam and
brace, or brace When you select this properties option all three options
and column are available and active in the Connectivity area and
members. both options are available and active in the Local 2-Axis
area.
14 Connectivity
The choices for panel zone connectivity are beam-column,
beam-brace and brace-column. Unless you choose the Specified
Link Property option in the Properties area, the only active panel
zone connectivity option is beam-column.
If you specify a type of panel zone connectivity for a point object

and the element type specified does not connect to the point ob-
ject then the panel zone assignment is ignored by ETABS. For
example, if you specify brace-column connectivity at a point
object and there are no braces at the point object, then the panel
zone assignment is ignored. When you run the analysis a warn-
ing message reports panel zone assignments that are ignored be-
cause of this (if any).
Following are descriptions of the three types of panel zone con-

nectivity:
• Beam-column: For beam-column connectivity two

separate joints are internally created by ETABS to model
the panel zone. All beam members are connected to one
of the joints and all column members are connected to
the other joint. The two joints are connected by a spring
that has the properties specified for the panel zone.

Figure 14-1:
am am
Panel zone connec- Be Be
tivity 1
Beam Beam
2
Column
Column
a) Beam-Column Connection b) Panel Zone Representation
Consider Figure 14-1a which shows a beam-column

joint. Figure 14-1b shows the effect of assigning a panel
zone with beam-column connectivity to this joint. Joints
1 and 2 are created internally by ETABS. They both ac-
tually occur at the same location as the point object that
is at the beam-column intersection. They are only shown
in different locations in the figure for graphical explana-
14
tion purposes. The column members are connected to
joint 1. The beam members are connected to joint 2.
Joints 1 and 2 are connected by zero-length springs

whose properties are based on the panel zone assign-
ment. Note that the relative movement in the panel zone
is between the column elements and the beam elements.
There is no relative movement between individual col-
umn elements or individual beam elements.
• Beam-brace: For beam-brace connectivity two separate

joints are internally created by ETABS to model the
panel zone. All beam members are connected to one of
the joints and all brace members are connected to the
other joint. The two joints are connected by a spring that
has the properties specified for the panel zone. See the
discussion of beam-column connectivity for additional
information.
• Brace-column: For brace-column connectivity two

separate joints are internally created by ETABS to model
the panel zone. All brace members are connected to one
of the joints and all column members are connected to
the other joint. The two joints are connected by a spring
that has the properties specified for the panel zone. See

the discussion of beam-column connectivity for addi-

tional information.
Local 2-Axis
The local axes of the panel zone element are determined as fol-
lows:
• Local 1-axis: The positive local 1-axis is in the same di-

rection as the positive global Z-axis (upward), always.
• Local 2-axis: You specify the positive direction of the

local 2-axis as one of the following:
ü Column: The positive local 2-axis of the panel zone

is in the same direction as the positive local 2-axis of
14 the column connected to the panel zone. If columns
are connected to the panel zone from both above and
below, and they have different local axes orienta-
tions, then the positive local 2-axis of the panel zone
is in the same direction as the positive local 2-axis of
the column below (and connected to) the panel zone.
If you specify that the local 2 axis is based on a col-

umn and no column exists at the panel zone location,
then the positive local 2-axis is oriented in the same
direction as the positive global X-axis.
ü Angle: The direction of the positive local 2-axis of

2
Global Y
the panel zone is specified by an angle measured in

cal
Lo
Positive degrees from the positive global X-axis. A positive

angle angle appears counterclockwise as you look down
on it from above. An angle of 0 degrees means the
positive local 2-axis is in the same direction as the
Global X positive global X-axis. An angle of 90 degrees
means the positive local 2-axis is in the same direc-
tion as the positive global Y-axis.
• Local 3-axis: The direction of the positive local 3-axis is

determined from the directions of the local 1 and 2 axes
described above using the right hand rule. See the sec-
tion titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for
more information.

Unless you choose the Specified Link Property option in the

Properties area, the only active local axis option is from column.
Options
Two assignment options are possible:
• Replace existing panel zones: Replaces the currently

specified panel zone (spring stiffness), if any, with the
new panel zone assignment. If there is not an existing
assignment then the new assignment is still made. This is
the default option.
• Delete existing panel zones: Deletes the panel zone as-

signment made to the selected point object(s). When this
option is selected, the items in the Properties, Connec-
tivity and Local Axis areas of the dialog box are ignored 14
when you click the OK button.
Note that the default option is Replace and that the pro-
gram defaults to this every time the dialog box is
opened.
Restraint (Support) Assignments to Point Objects

You use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Restraints (Sup-
ports) command to bring up the Assign Restraints dialog box
where you can assign restraints (supports) to selected point ob-
jects. Note that restraints are always specified in the global coor-
dinate system.
The six possible degrees of freedom available for a point object

are listed in the Restraints in Global Directions area of the dialog
box. Place a check in the check box associated with any degree
of freedom that you want to be restrained. Any degree of free-
dom whose associated box is not checked is assumed to be unre-
strained assuming, of course, that the degree of freedom has been
designated as active for the model. See the Section titled "Analy-
sis Options" in Chapter 15 for additional information.

The Fast Supports area of the Assign Restraints dialog box pro-
vides four buttons that quickly set the restraint conditions for you
by checking and unchecking various check boxes in the Re-
straints in Global Directions area. The four fast restraint buttons
are:
Tip: • : This is the fast fixed base restraint button. All six
The fast re- degrees of freedom are restrained (boxes checked) when
straint buttons you click on this button.
provide a quick
and easy way of
assigning typi- • : This is the fast pinned base button. All three
cal restraint translation degrees of freedom are restrained (boxes
conditions. For checked) and all three rotation degrees of freedom are
unusual condi- unrestrained (boxes not checked) when you click on this
tions the fast button.
14 restraint but-
tons may not be
• : This is the fast roller support button. Only the Z
appropriate.
translation is restrained (box checked) when you click on
this button. All other degrees of freedom are unre-
strained (boxes not checked).
• : This is the fast no support button. All degrees of

freedom are unrestrained (boxes not checked) when you
click on this button.
Assigning a support to a point object is only meaningful if

structural objects are connected to the point object. Otherwise
the point support will support air, so to speak; that is, it will not
support anything. Either the point object must be connected di-
rectly to a structural object or it must be on top of a floor-type
area object that ETABS can automatically mesh. See Chapter 30
for discussion of the automatic meshing capability of ETABS.
Point Spring Assignments to Point Objects

Use the Assign Menu > Joint/Point > Point Springs command
to open the Assign Springs dialog box and assign point springs
that are oriented in the global axes directions to point objects.
Both translational and rotational springs can be assigned to a
point object.

The following two areas appear in the Assign Springs dialog

box:
Tip: • Spring Stiffness in Global Directions: Here you spec-

ify the spring stiffness for anywhere from one to all six
Make sure that
the point ob-
of the degrees of freedom for the selected point objects.
jects with Note that point spring stiffnesses are always specified in
spring assign- the global coordinate system. There is no coupling of the
ments are con- six springs specified here.
nected, either
directly or indi- • Options: The following three assignment options are
rectly, to available:
structural ele-
ments such as ü Add to existing springs: Adds the specified spring
frames, shell stiffness to the point object. If one or more point
and links. spring assignments have already been made then this
option increases the existing spring stiffness assum-
ing, of course, you are specifying a positive spring
14
stiffness.
ü Replace existing springs: Replaces the currently

specified spring stiffness, if any, with the new spring
stiffness assignment. If there is not an existing as-
signment then the new assignment is still made. This
is the default option.
ü Delete existing springs: Deletes any and all point

spring assignments made to the selected point ob-
ject(s). When this option is selected the items in the
Spring Stiffness in Global Directions area of the
dialog box are ignored when you click the OK but-
ton.
opened.
Assigning a spring to a point object is only meaningful if struc-

tural objects are connected to the point object. Otherwise the
spring will support air, so to speak; that is, it will not support
anything. Either the point object must be connected directly to a
structural object or it must be on top of a floor-type area object
that ETABS can automatically mesh. See Chapter 30 for discus-

sion of the automatic meshing of floor-type area objects that is

done by ETABS.
Important Note: It is possible to assign negative spring stiffness

to a point object as long as the total stiffness at the point still re-
mains positive (or zero). If you decide to assign some negative
spring stiffness to a point object, you should do it with great care
because it can get you into trouble. Negative spring stiffness at a
point during the analysis causes your structure to be unstable and
thus ETABS terminates the analysis and provides an error mes-
sage that there is an instability. ETABS does not check for nega-
tive spring stiffness prior to running the analysis.
Coupled Springs
There is no coupling of the spring stiffnesses that are specified in
14 the Spring Stiffness in Global Directions area of the dialog box.
That is, for the spring stiffnesses specified in the Spring Stiffness
in Global Directions area the deformation in one degree of free-
dom does not affect the deformation in another degree of free-
dom. It is also possible to specify point springs that have coupled
behavior. The spring forces that act on a point object are related
to the displacements of that point object by a 6x6 symmetric
matrix of spring stiffness coefficients. You specify this 6x6 ma-
trix by clicking the Assign Menu > Joint/Point > Point Springs
command and then clicking the Advanced button to bring up the
Coupled 6x6 Spring dialog box. In this dialog box you define the
6x6 matrix for the coupled springs.
Figure 14-2 illustrates the 6x6 symmetric matrix of spring stiff-

ness coefficients. When coupling is present, all 21 terms in the
upper triangle of the matrix are specified. The other 15 terms are
known by symmetry. For springs that do not couple the degrees
of freedom only the 6 diagonal terms are needed since the off-
diagonal terms are all zero. The diagonal terms are what you are
specifying for the spring stiffnesses when you use the Assign
Menu > Joint/Point > Point Springs command and assign the
stiffnesses in the Spring Stiffness in Global Directions area of
the dialog box rather than clicking on the Advanced button.

Figure 14-2: Fx ux uxuy uxuz uxrx uxry uxrz ux

6x6 symmetric ma- Fy uy uyuz uyrx uyry uyrz uy
trix of spring stiff-
Fz uz uzrx uzry uzrz uz
ness coefficients = –
Mx rx rxry rxrz rx
My symmetric ry ryrz ry
Mz rz rz
Link Property Assignments to Point Objects

When link element properties are assigned to a point object that
link element is grounded. That is, one end is connected to the
point object and the other end is connected to the ground. The
element has zero length and no additional point is required to
connect it to the ground. The local axes for the grounded, zero-
length link element are as follows:
14
• The positive local 1-axis is up, in the same direction as
the positive global Z-axis.
• The positive local 2-axis is in the same direction as the

• The positive local 3-axis is in the same direction as the

positive global Y-axis.
You can not modify the local axes directions for grounded, zero-
length link elements.
Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Link Properties com-
Tip: mand to assign link properties to a point object. This command
Use the Assign brings up the Assign Link Properties dialog box. Simply high-
menu > light the name of a defined link property in the dialog box and
Joint/Point > then click the OK button to assign a link property to the selected
Panel Zone point object(s).
command to
assign panel If you want to remove a link property assignment from a point
zones with link object then select the point object, click the Assign menu >
properties to Joint/Point > Link Properties command, highlight "None" in
point objects.
the Link Properties area of the Assign Link Properties dialog box
and click the OK button.

Note you can not use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Link
Properties command to assign panel zones to point objects even
if the properties of the panel zone are based on a specified link
property. You must use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Panel
Zone command to assign panel zones to point objects. See the
previous subsection in this chapter titled "Panel Zone Assign-
ments to Point Objects" for more information.
Additional Point Mass Assignments to Point Objects

Note: Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Additional Point Mass
command to assign additional point mass to a point object. Note
You can assign
that the additional point mass is only considered by ETABS if
multiple link
properties
you have specified that the mass source is to be based on element
(elements) to masses and additional masses, not from a specified load combi-
14 the same point
object.
nation. See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11 and
the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more information.
Clicking the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Additional Point

Mass command brings up the Assign Masses dialog box. Fol-
lowing are descriptions of the three areas in this dialog box.
• Masses in Global Directions: Specify the translational

masses in the global coordinate system direction in this
area. The masses are entered in Force-Second2/Length
units.
• Mom. of Inertia in Global Directions: Specify the ro-

tational mass moments of inertia about the global axes in
this area. The rotational mass moments of inertia are
entered in Force-Length-Second2 units. Figure 14-3 is
provided to assist you in calculating rotational mass
moments of inertia for various shaped areas.
• Options: The following three assignment options are

available:
ü Add to existing masses: Adds the specified mass to

the point object. If one or more mass assignments
have already been made then this option increases
the existing mass assuming, of course, you are speci-
fying a positive mass.

Shape in Mass moment of inertia about vertical axis

Formula
plan (normal to paper) through center of mass
b
Rectangular diaphragm: M(b2 + d2)
Uniformly distributed mass per unit area MMICM =
d 12
Total mass of diaphragm = M (or W/g)
c.m.
c.m. Triangular diaphragm: Use general

Uniformly distributed mass per unit area diaphragm formula
X X Total mass of diaphragm = M (or W/g)
Circular diaphragm: Md2

14
d Uniformly distributed mass per unit area MMICM =
Total mass of diaphragm = M (or W/g) 8
c.m.
Y General diaphragm:
Uniformly distributed mass per unit area
c.m. Total mass of diaphragm = M (or W/g) M(IX + IY)
MMICM =
X X Area of diaphragm = A A
Moment of inertia of area about X-X = IX
Y Moment of inertia of area about Y-Y = IY
Line mass:
Md2
Uniformly distributed mass per unit length MMICM =
d 12
Total mass of line = M (or W/g)
c.m.
Axis transformation for a mass: MMICM = MMIO + MD2

D O If mass is a point mass, MMIO = 0
c.m.
(Above)
Figure 14-3:
Mass moment of in-
ertia for various ar-
eas

ü Replace existing masses: Replaces the currently

specified mass, if any, with the new spring stiffness
assignment. If there is not an existing assignment
then the new assignment is still made. This is the de-
fault option.
ü Delete existing masses: Deletes any and all mass

assignments made to the selected point object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Masses
in Global Directions and Mom. of Inertia in Global
Directions areas of the dialog box are ignored when
you click the OK button.
opened.
14 Note that if you select the Include only Lateral Mass option
when defining the mass source then only the Direction X mass,
Direction Y mass and the Rotation about Z moment of inertia are
considered in the analysis.
Important Note: It is possible to assign negative mass to a point

object as long as the total mass tributary to the point object still
remains positive (or zero). If you decide to assign some negative
mass to a point object, you should do it with great care because it
can get you into trouble. If ETABS detects negative mass at a
point during the analysis it will terminate the analysis and pro-
vide an error message about negative mass. ETABS does not
check for negative mass prior to running the analysis.
Force Loads to Point Objects

Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point Loads > Force command to
bring up the Point Forces dialog box and assign point loads to
selected point objects. Note that the point loads are specified in
global coordinate system directions.

Assigning a force or moment to a point object is only meaningful

if the point object is in one of the following locations:
• At the ends of structural line objects (beam, column,

brace, link).
• At the corner points of structural area objects (floor,

ramp, wall).
• Anywhere in the plane of a structural area object (floor,

ramp, and wall). Note that in some cases ramps may be
slightly warped (four corners not coplanar) and thus it is
difficult to impossible to tell if a point object actually
lies in the plane of a ramp. Thus you should take great
care in applying loads to point objects that are in the
plane of ramps. We do not in general recommend that
you apply point loads to ramps. 14
• Anywhere along the length of the line object with frame
section properties (beam, column, and brace) unless the
line object is tagged to not be automatically meshed.
Note that the point object must lie exactly on the line
object. We do not recommend that you attempt to apply
point loads to frame elements in this manner. Instead
you should use the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads
> Point command to apply the point loads.
The following bullet items discuss the three areas in the Point
Forces dialog box:
• Load case name: Select the name of a defined static

load case that the specified loads are to be assigned to.
Note that you use the Define menu > Static Load Cases
command to define load case names.
Z
Y • Loads: Input the point loads in the global coordinate
+MZZ system directions in this area. Positive directions of
+MYY moments (shown in the sketch to the left) are based on
the right hand rule. See the section titled “The Right
+MXX X Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for more information.


available:
ü Add to existing loads: Adds the specified point

loads to the point object. If one or more point load
assignments have already been made then this option
increases the total point load on the point object as-
suming, of course, you are specifying a positive
load.
ü Replace existing load: Replaces the currently speci-

fied point load, if any, with the new point load as-
signment. If there is not an existing assignment then
the new assignment is still made. This is the default
option. Note that only the loads in the load case that
is specified above are replaced.
14 ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all point load
assignments made to the selected point object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Loads
area of the dialog box are ignored when you click
the OK button. Note that only the loads in the load
case that is specified above are deleted.
opened.
Ground Displacement Assignments to Point Objects

Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point Loads > Ground Dis-
placement command to bring up the Ground Displacements
dialog box and assign ground displacement loads to selected
point objects. Note that the ground displacements are specified in
global coordinate system directions. Please read the important
information about ground displacement assignments provided in
the box below carefully.

Assigning a displacement to a point object is only meaningful if

structural objects are connected to the point object. Otherwise
the point object displacement will have no affect on the struc-
ture. Either the point object must be connected directly to a
structural object or it must be on top of a floor-type area object
that ETABS can automatically mesh. See Chapter 30 for discus-
sion of the automatic meshing of floor-type area objects that is
done by ETABS.
The following bullet items discuss the three areas in the Ground
Displacements dialog box:

load case that the specified displacements are to be as-
signed to. Note that you use the Define menu > Static
Load Cases command to define load case names.
14
Important Information about Ground Displacement Assignments
Point object ground displacements are only meaningful when they are applied to point
objects that are connected to the ground in the direction that the displacement is ap-
plied. Point objects are connected to the ground through one of the following:
• Restraints
• Springs
• Grounded link elements assigned to a single point object
When ground displacements are assigned to a point object that is restrained then the
displacement takes place at the point object.
When ground displacements are assigned to point objects that have springs or
grounded link elements assigned to them the displacement takes place at the grounded
end of the spring or link, not at the point object. This is a subtle but very important
distinction.
If you apply a ground displacement to a point object that is not connected to the
ground through a restraint, spring or grounded link element then that displacement is
ignored by ETABS when the analysis is run.

Z
Y • Displacements: Input the displacements in the global
+RZZ coordinate system directions in this area. Positive direc-
+RYY tions of rotations (shown in the sketch to the left) are
based on the right-hand rule. See the section titled “The
+RXX X Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for more information.

available:
ü Add to existing loads: Adds the specified displace-

ments to the point object. If one or more displace-
ment assignments have already been made then this
option increases the total displacement assigned to
the point object assuming, of course, you are speci-
fying a positive displacement.
14 ü Replace existing load: Replaces the currently speci-

fied displacement, if any, with the new displacement
fault option. Note that only the loads in the load case
that is specified above are replaced.
ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all displace-

ment assignments made to the selected point ob-
Loads area of the dialog box are ignored when you
click the OK button. Note that only the loads in the
load case that is specified above are deleted.
opened.
Temperature Loads Assignments to Point Objects

Use the Assign menu > Joint/Point Loads > Temperature
command to bring up the Point Temperatures dialog box and as-
sign a point temperature change to selected point objects. This
temperature change in itself is not a temperature load.

Note: Temperature loads actually act on area and line objects (shell and
frame elements). One of the options available when you specify
The purpose of
a temperature load on an area object (shell element) is that the
applying tem-
perature
value of the temperature load (change) is determined from previ-
changes to ously specified point temperature changes at the points at the
point objects is corners of the element. Similarly, one of the options available
to allow you to when you specify a temperature load on a line object (frame
specify that element) is that the value of the temperature load (change) is
temperature determined from previously specified point temperature changes
changes in area at the points at the ends of the element.
and/or line ob-
jects (shell Thus the purpose of applying temperature changes to point ob-
and/or frame jects is to allow you to specify that temperature changes in area
elements) are to and/or line objects (shell and/or frame elements) are to be deter-
be determined mined from the temperature changes specified at the corner or
from the tem-
end points of the elements. When you apply a temperature
perature
changes speci- change directly to a shell or frame element that temperature 14
fied at the cor- change is uniform throughout the element. Applying the tem-
ner or end perature change based on the points allows you to have tem-
points of the perature changes that vary linearly along the length of frame
elements. elements and vary linearly over the surface area of shell ele-
ments. A positive temperature change corresponds to an increase
in the temperature of an object.
The following bullet items discuss the three areas in the Point
Temperatures dialog box:

load case that the specified temperature changes are to
be assigned to. Note that you use the Define menu >
Static Load Cases command to define load case names.
• Temperature: Specify the temperature change in this

area. If you are working in English units the temperature
is specified in degrees Fahrenheit, °F. If you are working
in metric units the temperature is specified in degrees
centigrade, °C.

available:
ü Add to existing values: Adds the specified tem-

perature changes to the point object. If one or more

temperature change assignments have already been

made then this option increases the total temperature
change on the point object assuming, of course, you
are specifying a positive temperature change.

fied temperature change, if any, with the new tem-
perature change assignment. If there is not an exist-
ing assignment then the new assignment is still
made. This is the default option. Note that only the
Shortcut: loads in the load case that is specified above are re-
You can use the placed.
Assign menu >
Frame/Line > ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all tempera-
Frame Section ture change assignments made to the selected point
command to object(s). When this option is selected the items in
14 simultaneously
define frame
the Temperature area of the dialog box are ignored
when you click the OK button. Note that only the
sections and loads in the load case that is specified above are de-
assign them to leted.
selected line
objects. Note that the default option is Replace and that the pro-
opened.
Assignments to Line Objects

Use either the Assign menu > Frame/Line command or the As-
sign menu > Frame/Line Load command to make assignments
to line objects. The following subsections discuss the assign-
ments that you can make to line objects.
Frame Section Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section com-
mand to open the Assign Frame Properties dialog box and assign
frame section properties to line objects. To use this command
select some line objects, then click the menu command to open
the dialog box, highlight a frame section in the Properties area of
the dialog box and click the OK button to make the assignment.
14 - 22 Assignments to Line Objects

The frame section property that you highlight in the Properties

area can either be a previously defined property or you can de-
fine it on the fly while you are in the Assign Frame Properties
dialog box. For defining frame section properties, the Assign
Frame Properties dialog box has all of the functionality that the
Define Frame Properties dialog box has. See the section titled
"Frame Section Properties" in Chapter 11 for more information.
Frame Releases and Partial Fixity Assignments to Line

Objects
You can release any of the three translational and three rotational
degrees of freedom at either end of a line object. However, these
releases only are meaningful if a frame section property is as-
signed to the line object. It is possible to specify partial fixity at
the ends of the line object. This is done by specifying a spring
stiffness when you assign the member end release.
14
Note:
The releases are always specified in the line object (frame sec-
Variable end tion) local coordinate system. End releases are always assumed
releases that
can supply from
to occur at the support faces, that is, at the inside end of the end
0% to 100% offsets.
fixity can be
specified as Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Releases/Partial
spring stiff- fixity command to open the Assign Frame Releases dialog box
nesses to model and assign frame releases to line objects. To use this command
different fixity select some line objects, then click the menu command to open
conditions at the dialog box and do one of the following:
the ends of
frame elements. • Specify the desired end releases by checking the appro-
priate check boxes. Alternatively you can specify partial
fixity by entering a spring stiffness value for the frame
partial fixity springs. Then click the OK button.
• If you want to remove all of the currently specified end

releases, including partial fixity, from a member then
check the No Releases check box at the bottom of the
dialog box and click the OK button.
Assignments to Line Objects 14 - 23

Unstable End Releases

Any combination of end releases may be specified for a frame
element provided that the element remains stable. This assures
that all load applied to the element is transferred to the rest of the
structure. The following sets of releases are unstable, either
alone or in combination, and are not permitted. ETABS checks
for these conditions when you click the OK button in the Assign
Frame Releases dialog box and if unstable releases are specified
provides a message telling you this.
• Releasing U1 (axial) at both ends.
• Releasing U2 (shear force 2, major) at both ends.
• Releasing U3 (shear force 3, minor) at both ends.

14
• Releasing R1 (torsion) at both ends.
• Releasing R2 (moment 22, minor) at both ends and U3

(shear force 3, minor) at either end.
• Releasing R3 (moment 33, major) at both ends and U2

(shear force 3, major) at either end.
Frame Rigid Offset Assignments to Line Objects

In ETABS frame section properties are assigned to line objects.
Note: However, actual structural members have finite cross sectional
Do not confuse dimensions. When two members, such as a beam and column,
frame member are connected at a point there is some overlap of the cross sec-
end joint offsets tions. In many structures the dimensions of the members are
with end offsets large and the length of the overlap can be a significant fraction of
along the the total length of the frame element. ETABS provides the capa-
length of the bility of defining rigid end offsets along the length of frame
member. They
members to account for these finite dimensions of structural
are two entirely
elements. See the subsection below titled "Rigid End Offsets
separate things.
Along the Length of Frame Elements" for more information.

When a line object is used to model a frame section the line ob-
ject is assumed to be located at the centroid of the frame section.
Thus when line objects (frame sections) intersect in a model it
Note: means that the centroids of the associated frame objects intersect.
In a real structure this is not always the case. For example, it is
Rigid end off- not unusual for one or more floor beams in a building to frame
sets along the eccentrically into a column. ETABS provides the capability of
length of a
defining rigid frame end joint offsets to account for these eccen-
frame element
account for the tric connections. See the subsection below titled "Rigid Frame
finite size of End Joint Offsets" for more information.
beam and col-
umn intersec- Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets
tions. command to open the Assign Frame End Offsets dialog box
where you can define both rigid end offsets along the length of
frame elements and rigid frame end joint offsets. Be careful that
you do not get these two types of rigid offsets confused.
14
Any end offset assigned to a line object is ignored unless the line
object also has a frame section assigned to it.
Rigid End Offsets Along the Length of Frame Elements

Rigid end offsets along the length of frame members are defined
Note: in the End Offset Along Length area of the Assign Frame End
The rigid zone
Offsets dialog box. Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
factor for end Frame Rigid Offsets command to open this dialog box.
offsets along
the length of a In the End Offset Along Length area you have the choice of
frame element having ETABS determine the end offset lengths automatically or
only applies to specifying them yourself. You also can specify the rigid-zone
bending and factor. These items are described below.
shear deforma-
tions. It does
not apply to Automatically Calculated End Offset Lengths
axial and tor- ETABS automatically calculates offset lengths for beam and
sional defor-
column-type frame elements. It assumes the offset length for all
mations.
brace-type frame elements to be zero. (You can define your own
non-zero offset lengths for brace elements if necessary.) Also,
the dimensions of brace elements that frame into the ends of col-
umn and beam elements are not considered when calculating the
end offset dimension for a column or a beam.

When ETABS automatically calculates the end offsets along the

length of a beam it bases the end offset length at an end of the
beam on the maximum section dimensions of all columns that
connect to that end of the beam. Similarly, when ETABS auto-
matically calculates the end offsets along the length of a column
it bases the end offset length at an end of the column on the
maximum section dimensions of all beams that connect to that
end of the column.
Note: Note the following about ETABS automatically calculated end

offsets along the length of frame members:
ETABS outputs
forces at the • When more than one beam frames into a column
inside face of
ETABS bases the end offset in the column on the deeper
end offsets
along the
beam.
14
length of the
member.
• End offsets in beams are controlled by the size of the
column below. The column above is not considered.
End Offset Properties and the Rigid-Zone Factor

The rigid-zone factor specifies the fraction of each end offset as-
sumed to be rigid for bending and shear deformations. When a
fraction of the end offset is specified rigid the outside portion of
the end offset is assumed rigid, that is, the portion at the end of
the frame member. By default ETABS assumes the rigid end
factor to be zero, that is, the end offsets are fully flexible and
they have the same frame section properties as is assigned to the
rest of the member.
The rigid zones of the end offsets never affect axial and torsional
deformations. The full element length is always assumed to be
flexible for these deformations.
Output forces for the end of a frame member are provided at the
inside face of the end offset along the length of the member. No
output forces are produced within the end offset.

Figure 14-4:
Example rigid end
joint offsets
Column
X
14
Edge of slab Spandrel beam
Plan
Rigid Frame Joint Offsets

Note: Rigid frame joint offsets are defined in the Frame Joint Offset
area of the Assign Frame End Offsets dialog box. Use the Assign
When you
menu > Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets command to open
specify member
end joint offsets
this dialog box. In the Frame Joint Offset area you specify the
the local axes global X, Y and Z joint offsets at each end point of the frame
of the member element.
are always
based on the This feature is useful for modeling beams and columns when the
final position of beams do not frame into the center of the column. Frame mem-
the member ber joint offsets are always fully rigid.
after the end
joint offsets are The floor plan shown in Figure 14-4 illustrates a concrete beam
applied. and slab system with such a condition. Note that all of the span-
drel beams frame into the edge of the column, not the column
center line. This circumstance can be modeled in ETABS by
providing a joint offset to the top (j-end) and bottom (i-end) of
each column in either the global X direction, global Y direction,
or both directions depending on how the column is oriented.

j Important Note: When you specify member joint offsets the lo-
cal axes of the member are always based on the final position of
the member after the joint offsets are applied. Similarly, the lo-
i j
cation of loads assigned to the line object are based on the final
a) Beam with Joint Offset
length and location of the member after the joint offsets are ap-
i j
plied.
1 Consider the example sketch shown to the left. Sketch a shows a
3 plan view of a beam that has the j-end joint offset. The end joint
b) Original Position of Beam is offset such that the beam extends from i to j' rather than from i
to j.
j
Sketch b shows the local axes for the beam when it is in its
1 original position without the joint offset. Sketch c shows the lo-
i
3 cal axes for the beam when it is in its final position with the joint
c) Final Position of Beam offset. In both sketches b and c the local 2-axis points upward
14 and thus does not show in the plan view sketches. ETABS bases
the local axes of the beam on those shown in sketch c.
Frame Output Station Assignments to Line Objects

Note: Frame output stations are designated locations along a frame
element. They are used as locations to report output forces, per-
When frame
form design and plotting points used for graphic display of force
output stations
are assigned to
diagrams. When force diagrams are plotted, exact forces are
a line object a plotted at each output station and then these points are connected
text value is by straight lines.
displayed on
the line object. Important note: Output stations occur at user-specified locations
If the text value and at point load locations along a beam.
is reported in
parenthesis Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Output Stations
then it is the command to designate the output stations for a frame element.
minimum num- Two options are available for defining output stations for a
ber of output beam:
stations. If it is
not reported in • Specify the minimum number of output stations
parenthesis along the beam: In this case ETABS will first equally
then it is the space the specified number of stations within the clear
maximum length of the beam. Then a station is added for each
spacing be-
tween output
point load that does not fall at one of the previously de-
stations. fined output station locations.

The minimum allowed number of equally spaced sta-

tions is three. This provides a station at each end of the
beam and one at the center of the clear length. If there
Note: are end offsets specified for the beam, the stations at the
Use the View end of the beam occur at face of the end offset, not at the
menu > Set center of the support.
Building View
Options com- • Specify the maximum spacing between stations: In
mand to toggle this case ETABS will first provide an output station at
the display of each point load location. Then it will provide an equally
frame element spaced number of stations between each adjacent pair of
output stations point loads where the spacing does not exceed the speci-
on and off.
fied maximum spacing.
Note that the output station spacing between one set of

point loads may be different than that between another
set. 14
Note in the above that ETABS determines the location of output
stations in a different order depending on whether you specify a
minimum number of stations or a maximum spacing of stations.
By default, for beams output stations are provided at a maximum

spacing of 2 feet for English units and 0.5 meters for metric
units, and of course, at all point load locations. By default a
minimum of three output stations are specified (the two ends and
the middle) for columns and braces.
Local Axes Assignments to Line Objects

By default the local 1-axis of a line object extends from the i-end
of the element to the j-end. The default orientation of the local 2
and 3 axes depends on the frame-type (column, beam or brace)
and in some instances the orientation of the frame element itself.
See the section titled "Line Object Local Axes" in Chapter 24 for
more information.
You can redefine the orientation of the local 2 and 3 axes of a

line object by rotating them about the local 1-axis. To do this,
select the line object and use the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Local Axes command to bring up the Axis Orientation dialog
box. There are four options in this box:

• Angle: Rotate the local 2 axis by the specified angle (in

degrees) from its default position. When the 1-axis is
Positive direction pointing towards you a positive rotation is counter-
2 of rotation
clockwise, that is, the right hand rule applies.
1
3 • Rotate by Angle: Rotate the local 2 axis by the speci-
i-end j-end
fied angle (in degrees) from its current location (not
necessarily its default position). When the 1-axis is
pointing towards you a positive rotation is counter-
clockwise, that is, the right hand rule applies.
• Column Major Direction (local 2-axis) is X (or Ra-

dial): This option has no effect unless the selected ele-
ment is a column. It sets the column major direction (the
local 2-axis) as follows:
14 Global Y 3 ü If the column falls at the intersection of two global

coordinate system grid lines then the major direction
2
Global X (local 2-axis) is the same as the positive global X-
axis.
Y 3 ü If the column falls at the intersection of two grid

Alt 2
lines from an additional rectangular coordinate sys-
X
A lt tem then the major direction (local 2-axis) is the
same as the positive X-axis of that additional coor-
dinate system.
3 ü If the column falls at the intersection of two grid

2
lines from an additional cylindrical coordinate sys-
Radial
grid line
tem then the major direction (local 2-axis) is in the
outward radial direction of that additional coordinate
system.
Local 2-axis
Column Major Direction Minor axis
Major direction
The column major direction is the same as Local 3-axis

the local 2-axis direction (which is also the Major axis
Minor direction
same as the minor axis). Loads acting in the
major direction cause M3 bending and V2
shear. In a wide flange member this corre-
sponds to bending resisted by the flanges and
shear resisted by the web.

Global Y 3 ü If the column does not fall at the intersection of two

grid lines from the same coordinate system then the
2
Global X major direction (local 2-axis) is the same as the
• Column Major Direction (local 2-axis) is Y (or Tan-

gential): This option has no effect unless the selected
element is a column. It sets the column major direction
(the local 2-axis) as follows:
2 ü If the column falls at the intersection of two global

Global Y
coordinate system grid lines then the major direction
3
(local 2-axis) is the same as the positive global Y-
Global X axis.

Alt
Y
3
lines from an additional rectangular coordinate sys-
tem then the major direction (local 2-axis) is the
14
A lt X
same as the positive Y-axis of that additional coor-
dinate system.

lines from an additional cylindrical coordinate sys-
Radial tem then the major direction (local 2-axis) is in the
grid line 3
tangential direction of that additional coordinate
system pointing counterclockwise.
2 ü If the column does not fall at the intersection of two

Global Y
grid lines from the same coordinate system then the
3
major direction (local 2-axis) is the same as the
Global X positive global Y-axis.
Frame Property Modifier Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Property Modi-
fiers command to bring up the Analysis Property Modification
Factors dialog box. Here you can specify modification factors for
the following frame analysis section properties in your model.
• Cross sectional (axial) area

• Shear area in 2 direction
Note: • Shear area in 3 direction

The frame • Torsional constant
property modi-
fiers only affect • Moment of inertia about the 3-axis
the analysis
properties.
• Moment of inertia about the 2-axis
They do not
affect the de- The modification factors are multiplied times the section proper-
sign properties.
ties specified for a frame element (see the Define menu >
Frame Sections command) to obtain the final analysis section
properties used for the frame element. Note that these modifica-
tion factors only affect the analysis properties. They do not affect
the design properties.
14
Link Property Assignments to Line Objects
Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Link Properties com-
mand to assign link properties to a line object. This command
brings up the Assign Link Properties dialog box. Simply high-
light the name of a defined link property in the dialog box and
then click the OK button to assign a link property to the selected
Note:
line object(s).
You can assign
multiple link If you want to remove a link property assignment from a line
properties object then select the line object, click the Assign menu >
(elements) to Frame/Line > Link Properties command, highlight "None" in
the same line the Link Properties area of the Assign Link Properties dialog box
object. and click the OK button.
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Nonlinear
Hinges command to brings up the Assign Frame Hinges (Push-
over) dialog box where you can assign nonlinear frame hinges
(pushover) to line objects with frame section properties. Note
that these hinge assignments are only used for static nonlinear
analysis. They are not considered in a nonlinear time history
analysis.

If you have selected a single element before implementing this

command then the dialog box shows you the currently assigned
hinges, if any. If you have selected multiple elements before im-
plementing this command then:
Note: • If all elements have the same hinge assignments then the
dialog box shows you those assignments.
You can assign
multiple frame
• If the elements do not all have the same hinge assign-
nonlinear
hinges to the
ments then the dialog box is unfilled when it comes up.
same line ob-
ject. If desired,
A hinge assignment consists of a hinge property and a location
you can assign for that hinge along the frame element. The location is specified
multiple hinges as a relative distance along the clear length of the element meas-
at the same ured from the i-end. The relative distance is equal to the distance
location. This from the inside face of the end offset at the i-end of the element
however may
make it difficult
to the hinge location divided by the clear length of the frame
element. Relative distances of 0, 0.5 and 1 specify hinges at the
14
for you to in- inside face of the end offset at the i-end, center of the clear
terpret some of length and the inside face of the end offset at the j-end of a frame
the results. element, respectively.
To add a hinge assignment for the selected element(s) choose

one of the defined hinge properties in the Hinge Property drop-
down box, type in a distance in the relative distance box and
To modify an existing hinge assignment for the selected ele-

ment(s) highlight the assignment in the Frame Hinge Data area.
Note that the information for the highlighted assignment is filled
in the drop-down box and edit box at the top of the dialog box.
Modify the hinge property and relative distance as desired, and
when finished click the Modify button.
To delete an existing hinge assignment for the selected ele-

ment(s) highlight the assignment in the Frame Hinge Data area.
Note that the information for the highlighted assignment is filled
in the drop-down box and edit box at the top of the dialog box.
Click the Delete button.
When you have finished specifying the hinge property assign-

ments click the OK button to exit the dialog box.

Pier Label Assignments to Line Objects

A wall pier can be made up from a combination of both area ob-
jects (shell elements) and line objects (frame elements). If you
want to get output forces reported for wall piers, or if you want
to design wall piers you must first define them. You define a
wall pier by selecting all of the line and/or area objects that make
up the pier and assigning them the same pier label.
If a wall pier is made up of both line and area objects then you
must assign the pier label to the line and area objects separately.
For example, suppose a wall pier that is to be labeled P23 is
made up of both line and area objects. You would first select the
line objects and use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Pier La-
bel command to assign pier label P23 to the line objects. Then
you would select the area objects and use the Assign menu >
14 Shell/Area > Pier Label command to assign pier label P23 to
the area objects. See the Shear Wall Design Manual for more in-
formation on wall pier labeling.
Typically to assign a new pier label to a line object you select the
line object and click the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Pier
Label command to enter the Pier Names dialog box. There you
can either highlight an existing pier name and click the OK but-
ton or type a new pier name in the edit box in the Wall Piers
area, click the Add New Name button and then click the OK
button. When you highlight an existing pier name and click the
OK button the selected objects are added to the current objects
that define the pier. The selected objects do not replace the cur-
rent objects.
If you want to delete objects from a pier definition then select the
objects, enter the Pier Names dialog box, highlight None and
click the OK button.
You can click the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Pier Label
command and enter the Pier Names dialog box without first
making a selection if you wish (regardless of whether the model
is locked or unlocked). This is useful if you want to change a
pier name or delete a pier definition. In this case you enter the
Pier Names dialog box without first making a selection, make

pier when you click the OK button. In this special case where
you enter the dialog box without a selection, whatever pier is
highlighted when you click the OK button retains exactly the
same definition it had before you entered the dialog box.
Spandrel Label Assignments to Line Objects

A wall spandrel can be made up from a combination of both area
objects (shell elements) and line objects (frame elements). If you
want to get output forces reported for wall spandrels, or if you
want to design wall spandrels you must first define them. You
define a wall spandrel by selecting all of the line and/or area ob-
jects that make up the spandrel and assigning them the same
spandrel label.
If a wall spandrel is made up of both line and area objects then

you must assign the spandrel label to the line and area objects 14
separately. For example, suppose a wall spandrel that is to be la-
beled S23 is made up of both line and area objects. You would
first select the line objects and use the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Spandrel Label command to assign spandrel la-
bel S23 to the line objects. Then you would select the area ob-
jects and use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Spandrel Label
command to assign spandrel label S23 to the area objects. See
the Shear Wall Design Manual for more information on wall
spandrel labeling.
Typically to assign a new spandrel label to a line object you se-

lect the line object and click the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Spandrel Label command to enter the Spandrel Names dialog
box. There you can either highlight an existing spandrel name
and click the OK button or type a new spandrel name in the edit
box in the Wall Spandrels area, click the Add New Name button
and then click the OK button. When you highlight an existing
spandrel name and click the OK button the selected objects are
added to the current objects that define the spandrel . The se-
lected objects do not replace the current objects.
If you want to delete objects from a spandrel definition then se-

lect the objects, enter the Spandrel Names dialog box, highlight
None and click the OK button.

You can click the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Spandrel La-
bel command and enter the Spandrel Names dialog box without
first making a selection if you wish (regardless of whether the
model is locked or unlocked). This is useful if you want to
change a spandrel name or delete a spandrel definition. In this
case you enter the Spandrel Names dialog box without first
making a selection, make the desired name changes or deletions
and then click the OK button. Since you entered the dialog box
Tip:
without a selection ETABS knows not to make any assignment
to the highlighted spandrel when you click the OK button. In this
ETABS distrib- special case where you enter the dialog box without a selection
utes the springs whatever spandrel is highlighted when you click the OK button
associated with
retains exactly the same definition it had before you entered the
the line object
to all of the
dialog box.
nodes associ-
14 ated with the
internal-to- Line Spring Assignments to Line Objects
ETABS (analy- Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Line Springs command
sis model) rep- to brings up the Assign Spring dialog box where you can assign
resentation of line springs to line objects. Line springs can be assigned in any
the line object.
If you are mod-
of the local axes directions of the line object. Line springs are
eling a beam on linear, that is, they support both tension and compression. You
elastic founda- can not define tension-only or compression-only line springs.
tion with a line
spring you may ETABS distributes the springs associated with the line object to
want to mesh all of the nodes associated with the internal-to-ETABS (analysis
the line object model) representation of the line object. Note that internally
yourself to as- ETABS may mesh (break up) a line object into several elements
sure that inter- with associated points between each element. See the section ti-
nally in ETABS tled "Overlapping Line Objects" in Chapter 24 for more infor-
a sufficient mation.
number of
springs are If you are modeling a beam on elastic foundation with a line
used in the spring you may want to mesh the line object yourself to assure
analysis model.
that internally in ETABS a sufficient number of springs are used
in the analysis model. ETABS will automatically determine the
required stiffness for each spring. This saves you a considerable
amount of time when the points where the springs actually occur
are not uniformly spaced.

There are two areas in the Assign Spring dialog box. They are:
• Line spring: Here you specify the direction of the

springs as one of the three local axes of the line object
and you specify a stiffness for the spring. The units for
the stiffness are Force/Length2.
• Options: Three line spring assignment options are pos-

sible:
ü Add to existing springs: Adds the specified spring

stiffness to the line object. If one or more spring
stiffness assignments have already been made then
this option increases the existing spring stiffness as-
stiffness.

14
stiffness. If there is not an existing assignment then
option.
ü Delete existing springs: Deletes any and all spring

stiffness assignments made to the selected line ob-
Line Spring area of the dialog box are ignored when
opened.

to a line object as long as the total stiffness at any point still re-
mains positive (or zero). If you decide to assign some negative
spring stiffness to a line object, you should do it with great care
because it can get you into trouble. If negative spring stiffness
occurs at any point in your model during the analysis then
ETABS terminates the analysis and provides an error message
that there is an instability. ETABS does not check for negative
spring stiffness prior to running the analysis.

Additional Line Mass Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Additional Line Mass
command to assign additional line mass to a line object. Note
that the additional line mass is only considered by ETABS if you
Tip: have specified that the mass source is to be based on element
Additional line masses and additional masses, not from a specified load combi-
mass is only nation. See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11 and
considered by the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more information.
ETABS if the
mass is speci- The additional line mass is only applied in the three translational
fied to be de- degrees of freedom. If you have specified that only lateral mass
termined from is to be considered (see the section titled "Mass Source" in
material prop- Chapter 11) then the additional line mass is only active in the
erty masses. global X and Y directions.
Additional line
14
mass is ignored Clicking the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Additional Line
if the mass is Mass command brings up the Assign Mass dialog box. Follow-
determined ing are descriptions of the two areas in this dialog box.
from a load
combination. • Line mass: Specify the translational mass per unit
length in this area. The masses are entered in Force-
Second2/Length2 units.
• Options: Three line mass assignment options are possi-

ble:
ü Add to existing masses: Adds the specified line

mass to the line object. If one or more line mass as-
signments have already been made then this option
increases the existing line mass assuming, of course,
you are specifying a positive mass.

specified line mass, if any, with the new line mass. If
there is not an existing assignment then the new as-
signment is still made. This is the default option.
ü Delete existing masses: Deletes any and all line

mass assignments made to the selected line object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Line
Mass area of the dialog box are ignored when you

opened.
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to Line Ob-

jects
ETABS automatically meshes frame elements as necessary in the
analysis. See Chapter 30 for details of automatic meshing. In
some cases you may not want ETABS to automatically mesh a
frame element.
Note: For example, by default where you have intersecting X-braces

ETABS would connect these braces at their intersection and di-
See Chapter 30
vide each brace element into two pieces at the intersection point.
for more infor-
mation on the
You may want to model it such that there is no connection be-
tween the braces where they cross.
14
automatic
meshing per-
formed by In such a case you can select the braces and use the Assign
ETABS. menu > Frame/Line > Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh
command to tell ETABS not to automatically mesh them. You
can also use this command again if you later decide that you
want ETABS to automatically mesh the braces. When you exe-
cute this command you have three options:
• Mesh it: This tags the frame element to be automatically

meshed, as required, by ETABS. By default all line ob-
jects have this tag when they are drawn.
• Don't mesh it: This tags the frame element to not be

automatically meshed by ETABS.
• Cancel: This gives you a way to get out of the command

without having to assign a mesh it or a don't mesh it tag
to the frame element.

Point Load Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads > Point command
Note: to bring up the Frame Point Loads dialog box and assign point
The positive loads to selected line objects. The following bullet items discuss
directions for the four areas in the Frame Point Loads dialog box:
point moments
are determined • Load case name: Select the name of a defined static
using the right load case that the specified point loads are to be assigned
hand rule. See to. Note that you use the Define menu > Static Load
the section ti-
Cases command to define load case names.
tled "The Right
Hand Rule" in
• Load Type and Direction: Here you specify whether
Chapter 23 for
more informa- the loads are point loads or point moments. You also
tion. Note that specify the direction of the load. The following direc-
14 the positive
direction for
tions are possible:
the moment in ü Local-1

the gravity di-
rection is de- ü Local-2
termined by
pointing your ü Local-3
right thumb in
the Gravity ü Global-X
(negative
global Z) di- ü Global-Y
rection and
applying the ü Gravity
right hand rule.
Note that the Gravity direction is downward in the nega-
tive global Z direction. Defining the direction as Gravity
rather than Global-Z allows you to put in your gravity
loads with positive signs (or more likely, no sign) rather
than negative signs.
Data for point load 1 • Point Loads: Here you can specify up to four point
loads acting on the line object (frame element) by indi-
cating a location and a load for the point load. The data
for the first point load is input in the first set of Distance
and Load boxes (see sketch to the left), the data for the
second point load is entered in the second set of Distance
and Load boxes, and so on.

The distance to the point load is always measured from

the i-end of the line object. You have the option to spec-
ify either an absolute distance or a relative distance. An
absolute distance is the actual distance from the left end
of the line object to the point where the load intensity is
specified. The relative distance is equal to the distance
from the left end of the line object to the point where the
load intensity is specified divided by the length of the
line object. The relative distance is never larger than 1.0.
If you want to specify more than four point loads you

simply specify the first four point loads and click the OK
button to assign them, then reselect the line object and
click the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads > Point
command to again bring up the Frame Point Loads dia-
log box and specify additional point loads.
14
available:
ü Add to existing loads: Adds the specified point

loads to the line object. If one or more point load as-
signments have already been made at the same loca-
tion on the line object then this option increases the
total point load on the line object at that location as-
load.

ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all point load

assignments made to the selected line object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Load
Type and Direction and the Point Loads areas of the
ton. Note that only the loads in the load case that is
specified above are deleted.

opened.
Distributed Load Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads > Distributed
command to bring up the Frame Distributed Loads dialog box
and assign distributed loads to selected line objects. The distrib-
Note:
uted loads may be specified as uniform over the length of the
Distributed line object or they may be specified as trapezoidal loads over any
loads can be length of the line object. The following bullet items discuss the
uniform or non- four areas in the Frame Distributed Loads dialog box:
uniform (trape-
zoidal) and they • Load case name: Select the name of a defined static
can be full
14 length or par-
tial length.
load case that the specified distributed load is to be as-
signed to. Note that you use the Define menu > Static
• Load Type and Direction: Here you specify whether

Note:
the loads are forces (line loads) or moments (line mo-
ments). You also specify the direction of the load. The
The Gravity following directions are possible:
direction for
loads is down- ü Local-1
ward in the
negative global ü Local-2
Z direction
ü Local-3
ü Global-X
ü Global-Y
ü Gravity
Note: ü Global-X projection (only applicable to forces, not

moments)
Only forces can
be specified as ü Global-Y projection (only applicable to forces, not
projected loads, moments)
not moments.
ü Gravity projection (only applicable to forces, not
moments)

Note: Note that the Gravity direction is downward in the nega-

The positive
directions for
distributed
moments are than negative signs.
determined
using the right Also note that only forces can be specified as projected
hand rule. See loads, not moments. Figure 14-5 shows an example of
the section ti- how ETABS considers projected loads on line objects.
tled "The Right Figure 14-5a illustrates a projected uniform distributed
Hand Rule" in load of intensity w. The direction of the load is the
Chapter 23 for ETABS gravity projection direction. Note that this is
more informa- equivalent to a force of w(cosθ) acting along the entire
tion. Note that length of the line object in the gravity direction as shown
the positive
in Figure 14-5b.
direction for
the moment in
the gravity di-
• Trapezoidal Loads: Here you specify non-uniform dis- 14
rection is de- tributed loads acting on a line object. The distributed
termined by loads can be specified either over the full length of the
pointing your line object or just over part of the length. Distributed
right thumb in load that you specify in this area, if any, is additive with
the Gravity that specified in the Uniform Load area.
(negative
global Z) di- The loaded length for a trapezoidal load may be speci-
rection and fied using either relative or absolute distances. An ab-
applying the solute distance is the actual distance from the left end of
right hand rule. the line object to the point where the load intensity is
specified. A relative distance is equal to the distance
from the left end of the line object to the point where the
load intensity is specified divided by the length of the
line object. The relative distance is never larger than 1.0.
Trapezoidal loads are defined by specifying up to four

Note: sets of distances and loads. The distance and load sets
Input partial are specified at locations where the rate of change of the
length uniform load intensity changes, that is at the corners of the load-
loads as trape- ing intensity diagram. Figure 14-6 shows some exam-
zoidal loads. ples. All of the distances shown in Figure 14-6 are rela-
tive distances.

Figure 14-5: w
1 1
Uniform load ,w,
sθ )
acting on a line ob- w ( co
ject in the Gravity 2 2
θ θ
projection direction
Z
a) Line load, w, applied to line object b) How projected line load is

in Gravity projection direction treated in ETABS
You should always specify the distance and load set

closest to the i-end of the line object in box 1, the next
set in box 2 and so on. For any sets of boxes that you do
14 not use set the distance to 0. ETABS ignores any boxes
where the distance is smaller than the distance in the
previous box.
Note: • Uniform Load: In this area you can enter a uniform

load value that applies over the entire length of the
In the Frame
Distributed
beam. Any load that is entered in this area is additive to
Loads dialog any load specified in the Trapezoidal Loads area.
box trapezoidal
and uniform • Options: The following three assignment options are
load assign- available:
ments are ad-
ditive. ü Add to existing loads: Adds the specified point
loads to the line object. If one or more point load as-
signments have already been made at the same loca-
tion on the line object then this option increases the
total point load on the point object at that location
assuming, of course, you are specifying a positive
load.


Figure 14-6:
1 Set # 1 2 3 4
Examples of trape- Distance 0.25 0.5 0 0
zoidal loads Load 1 1 0 0
1 Set # 1 2 3 4
Distance 0 1 0 0
Load 0 1 0 0
1 Set # 1 2 3 4
Distance 0 0.5 1 0
Load 0 1 1 0
1.25 Set # 1 2 3 4
1 Distance 0 0.33 0.67 1
Load 0 1 1.25 0 14
2 Set # 1 2 3 4
1 Distance 0 0.5 0.5 1
Load 1 1 2 2
ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all point load

assignments made to the selected line object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Load
Type and Direction and the Point Loads areas of the
ton. Note that only the loads in the load case that is
opened.

Temperature Load Assignments to Line Objects

Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads > Temperature
command to bring up the Line Object Temperatures dialog box
and assign temperature loads to selected line objects. Note that
temperature loads may be based on a uniform temperature
change you specify for the object, or they may be based on pre-
viously specified point object temperature changes at the point
objects at the ends of the line object, or they may be based on a
combination of both. The following bullet items discuss the four
areas in the Line Object Temperatures dialog box:

load case that the specified line object temperature
loading is to be assigned to. Note that you use the Define
14 menu > Static Load Cases command to define load
case names.
Note: • Object Temperature: Here you specify the uniform

temperature change, if any, for the object. If you are
Temperature
loads may be
basing the temperature load for the line object on the
based on a point temperatures at the end of the object only then en-
uniform tem- ter 0 for the uniform temperature change. A positive
perature temperature change corresponds to an increase in the
change you temperature of an object.
specify for the
object, or they • Object Temperature Options: It is very important to
may be based note that these options only apply to the uniform tem-
on previously perature change in the Object Temperature area of the
specified point dialog box. The following three assignment options are
object tem- available:
perature
changes at the ü Add to existing object temperatures: Adds the
point objects at specified uniform temperature change to the line
the ends of the
line object, or
object. If one or more uniform temperature change
they may be assignments have already been made then this option
based on a increases the total uniform temperature change on
combination of the line object assuming, of course, you are specify-
both. ing a positive uniform temperature change.
This option has no affect on the end point tempera-

ture option. See the End Point Temperature Option
bullet item below for more information.

ü Replace existing object temperature: Replaces the

currently specified uniform temperature change, if
any, with the new uniform temperature change as-
option. Note that only the temperature changes in the
load case that is specified above are replaced.
This option has no affect on the end point tempera-

ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all uniform

temperature change assignments made to the se-
lected line object(s). When this option is selected
any value input in the Object Temperature area of
the dialog box for a uniform temperature change is 14
ignored when you click the OK button. Note that
Note: only the temperature changes in the load case that is
When end point
temperatures This option has no affect on the end point tempera-
are specified to
be included in
the line object
temperature
load ETABS
assumes that gram defaults to this every time the dialog box is
the temperature opened.
change varies
linearly along • End Point Temperature Option: If you check the In-
the length of the clude Effect of Point Temperatures check box in this
line object area then ETABS considers the temperature change in
based on the the line object based on previously specified point object
specified temperature changes at the point objects at the ends of
changes at the the line object. ETABS assumes that the temperature
end points. change varies linearly along the length of the line object
based on the specified changes at the end points.

Checking this box has no affect on the uniform tem-

perature change specified in the Object Temperature
area. You can simultaneously specify a uniform tem-
perature change and a temperature change based on
specified end point temperatures if desired. Alterna-
tively, and probably more commonly, you can specify
one type of temperature change or the other. If you don't
want to include the effect of point temperatures then
simply leave the box unchecked.
Note that the effect of the end point temperatures is not

additive to itself. You either consider the end point tem-
peratures or you do not. You control this by either
checking or unchecking the box. Thus the options in the
Object Temperature Options area have no meaning and
consequently no affect on the option of including the ef-
14 fect of the point temperatures.
Assignments to Area Objects

Use either the Assign menu > Frame/Line command or the As-
sign menu > Frame/Line Load command to make assignments
to line objects. The following subsections discuss the assign-
ments that you can make to line objects.
Wall, Slab and Deck Section Assignments to Area Objects

Shortcut: Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Wall/Slab/Deck Section
command to open the Assign Wall/Slab/Deck Sections dialog
You can use the box and assign section properties to area objects. To use this
Assign menu >
command select some area objects, then click the menu com-
Shell/Area >
Wall/Slab/Deck
mand to open the dialog box, highlight a wall, slab or deck sec-
Section com- tion in the Sections area of the dialog box and click the OK but-
mand to simul- ton to make the assignment.
taneously de-
fine wall, slab The wall, slab or deck section property that you highlight in the
and deck sec- Sections area can either be a previously defined property or you
tions and as- can define it on the fly while you are in the Assign
sign them to Wall/Slab/Deck Sections dialog box. For defining wall, slab and
selected area deck section properties, the Wall/Slab/Deck Sections dialog box
objects. has all of the functionality that the Define Wall/Slab/Deck Sec-
14 - 48 Assignments to Area Objects

tions dialog box has. See the section titled "Wall/Slab/Deck Sec-
tion Properties" in Chapter 11 for more information.
Important note concerning decks: When you assign deck sec-

tion properties ETABS assumes that the deck spans in the same
direction as the local 1-axis of the area object to which the deck
is assigned. See the section titled “Default Area Object Local
Axes” in Chapter 23 for definition of the local axes for area ob-
jects.
Opening Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Openings command to
bring up the Assign Openings dialog box and designate a se-
Tip: lected area object as an opening. In the Assign openings dialog
You can assign
unloaded
box you can indicate that the area object is one of the following:
14
openings to • Not an opening: Use this to remove the designation of
area objects as “opening” from an area object.
you draw them
by selecting the • Unloaded opening: Any loads applied to (or on) an un-
Openings op- loaded-type opening are ignored by ETABS.
tion in the
floating Prop- • Loaded opening: ETABS considers all loads that are
erties of Object assigned to loaded-type openings.
dialog box.
The main purpose of designating area objects as openings is re-
lated to meshing. Both the automatic meshing of floors done by
ETABS (see Chapter 30) and some of the manual meshing that
you can do (see Chapter 31) are based on openings.
A second purpose of designating area objects as openings is to

allow area loads that are not directly supported by the structure
to still be considered in an analysis. For example, if you are
modeling a stair opening in a floor you may want to consider the
opening area as supporting some uniform dead and live load.
Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Rigid Diaphragm com-
mand to designate a rigid diaphragm. Rigid diaphragms can only
be horizontal. Thus rigid diaphragm assignments are not appli-
cable to wall-type and ramp-type area objects. They are only ap-
Assignments to Area Objects 14 - 49

Tip: plicable to floor type area objects and to null-type area objects
that happen to be in a horizontal plane.
You can also
assign rigid
In ETABS a rigid diaphragm translates within its own plane
diaphragms to
point objects (global X-Y plane) and rotates about an axis perpendicular to its
using the As- own plane (global Z-axis) as a rigid body. Designating an area
sign menu > object as a rigid diaphragm has no affect on the out-of-plane be-
Joint/Area > havior of the area object. For example, if you specify a concrete
Rigid Point floor slab to have plate-bending properties (i.e., out-of-plane
command. bending capability), applying a rigid diaphragm constraint has no
affect on the out-of-plane bending of the floor. It only effects in
plane behavior of the floor.
Internally in ETABS assigning a rigid diaphragm to an area ob-

ject provides a diaphragm constraint to all of the corner points of
the area object and to any additional point objects that are en-
14 closed within the boundaries of the area object. This includes
any points (joints) that are created as a result of ETABS auto-
Note: matically meshing the area object.
You can model
When you select one or more area objects and click the Assign
the "actual" in-
plane stiffness
menu > Shell/Area > Rigid Diaphragm command the Assign
of a diaphragm Diaphragms dialog box appears. Refer to the subsection titled
by assigning "Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to Point Objects" in the section
slab properties titled "Assignments to Point Objects" earlier in this chapter for a
to the floor and full description of this dialog box.
not specifying it
as a rigid dia- Note that you can also apply a rigid diaphragm constraint di-
phragm. This is rectly to point objects. See the subsection titled "Rigid Dia-
sometimes (and phragm Assignments to Point Objects" in the section titled "As-
perhaps some- signments to Point Objects" earlier in this chapter for more in-
what inappro- formation. In most instances it is better to assign the rigid dia-
priately called phragm to an area object.
a “flexible”
diaphragm
analysis.
Local Axes Assignments to Area Objects
By default the local 3-axis of an area object is perpendicular to
the plane of the area object. The local 1 and 2 axes lie in the
plane of the object. The orientation of the 1 and 2-axes and the
positive direction of the 3-axis depend on the type (orientation)
of the area object. See the section titled "Default Area Object
Local Axes" in Chapter 23 for more information on the local
axes orientation of area objects.

You can rotate the area object local 1 and 2 axes about the local
2 (Original)
Positive
angle 3-axis. To do this Select an area object and use the Assign menu
2(
w)
Ne > Shell/Area > Local Axes command to bring up the Assign
Ne
w)
1(
Local Axis dialog box. Here you specify an angle in degrees.
The angle specified is the angle from the default location of the
local 2 axis (not necessarily the current location) to the new lo-
1 (Original)
cation of the local 2 axis. The angle is positive if it is counter-
clockwise when viewed from the positive local 3-axis side of the
object.
Important Note: Do not confuse the local axes of area objects

with those of pier and spandrel elements. They are different. You
can not rotate the local axes of pier and spandrel elements. See
Chapter 38 for discussion of pier and spandrel local axes.
Shell Stiffness Modifiers Assignments to Area Objects 14

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Shell Stiffness Modifiers
command to bring up the Analysis Stiffness Modification Fac-
tors dialog box. Here you can specify modification factors for
the following shell analysis section stiffnesses in your model.
Note: • Membrane f11 modifier

The shell stiff- • Membrane f22 modifier
ness modifiers
only affect the • Membrane f12 modifier
analysis prop-
erties. They do
• Bending m11 modifier
not affect any
design proper-
ties.
The stiffnesses for each of the items calculated based on the sec-
tion properties specified for a shell element (see the Define
menu > Wall/Slab/Deck Sections command) are multiplied
times the specified modifiers to obtain the final stiffness used for
the shell element in the analysis. Note that these modification
factors only affect the analysis properties. They do not affect any
design properties.

The f11, f22 and f12 modifiers are essentially equivalent to

modification factors on the thickness of the shell element. The
m11, m22 and m12 modifiers are essentially equivalent to modi-
fication factors on the thickness3 of the shell element.
See the section titled "Shell Element Internal Forces and

Stresses" in Chapter 36 for additional information.
Pier Label Assignments to Area Objects

A wall pier can be made up from a combination of both area ob-
jects (shell elements) and line objects (frame elements). If you
want to get output forces reported for wall piers, or if you want
to design wall piers you must first define them. You define a
wall pier by selecting all of the line and/or area objects that make
14 up the pier and assigning them the same pier label.
If a wall pier is made up of both line and area objects then you
must assign the pier label to the line and area objects separately.
For example, suppose a wall pier that is to be labeled P23 is
made up of both line and area objects. You would first select the
line objects and use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Pier La-
bel command to assign pier label P23 to the line objects. Then
you would select the area objects and use the Assign menu >
Shell/Area > Pier Label command to assign pier label P23 to
the area objects. See the Shear Wall Design Manual for more in-
formation on wall pier labeling.
Typically to assign a new pier label to an area object you select

the area object and click the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Pier
Label command to enter the Pier Names dialog box. There you
can either highlight an existing pier name and click the OK but-
ton or type a new pier name in the edit box in the Wall Piers
area, click the Add New Name button and then click the OK
button. When you highlight an existing pier name and click the
OK button the selected objects are added to the current objects
that define the pier. The selected objects do not replace the cur-
rent objects.
If you want to delete objects from a pier definition then select the
objects, enter the Pier Names dialog box, highlight None and

You can click the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Pier Label
command and enter the Pier Names dialog box without first
pier name or delete a pier definition. In this case you enter the
Pier Names dialog box without first making a selection, make
pier when you click the OK button. In this special case where
you enter the dialog box without a selection whatever pier is
highlighted when you click the OK button retains exactly the
same definition it had before you entered the dialog box.
Spandrel Label Assignments to Area Objects

A wall spandrel can be made up from a combination of both area
14
objects (shell elements) and line objects (frame elements). If you
want to get output forces reported for wall spandrels, or if you
want to design wall spandrels you must first define them. You
define a wall spandrel by selecting all of the line and/or area ob-
jects that make up the spandrel and assigning them the same
spandrel label.
If a wall spandrel is made up of both line and area objects then

you must assign the spandrel label to the line and area objects
separately. For example, suppose a wall spandrel that is to be la-
beled S23 is made up of both line and area objects. You would
first select the line objects and use the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Spandrel Label command to assign spandrel la-
bel S23 to the line objects. Then you would select the area ob-
jects and use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Spandrel Label
command to assign spandrel label S23 to the area objects. See
the Shear Wall Design Manual for more information on wall
spandrel labeling.

Typically to assign a new spandrel label to an area object you

select the area object and click the Assign menu > Shell/Area >
Spandrel Label command to enter the Spandrel Names dialog
box. There you can either highlight an existing spandrel name
and click the OK button or type a new spandrel name in the edit
box in the Wall Spandrels area, click the Add New Name button
and then click the OK button. When you highlight an existing
spandrel name and click the OK button the selected objects are
added to the current objects that define the spandrel. The se-
lected objects do not replace the current objects.
If you want to delete objects from a spandrel definition then se-

lect the objects, enter the Spandrel Names dialog box, highlight
None and click the OK button.
You can click the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Spandrel Label
14 command and enter the Spandrel Names dialog box without first
spandrel name or delete a spandrel definition. In this case you
enter the Spandrel Names dialog box without first making a se-
lection, make the desired name changes or deletions and then
click the OK button. Since you entered the dialog box without a
selection ETABS knows not to make any assignment to the
highlighted spandrel when you click the OK button. In this spe-
cial case where you enter the dialog box without a selection,
whatever spandrel is highlighted when you click the OK button
retains exactly the same definition it had before you entered the
dialog box.
Area Spring Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Area Springs command
to brings up the Assign Spring dialog box where you can assign
area springs to area objects. Area springs can be assigned in any
of the local axes directions of the area object. Area springs are
linear, that is, they support both tension and compression. You
can not define tension-only or compression-only area springs.

ETABS distributes the springs associated with the area object to

all of the nodes associated with the internal-to-ETABS (analysis
model) representation of the area object. Note that in some cases
internally ETABS may mesh (break up) an area object into sev-
eral elements with associated points between each element. See
Chapter 30 for more information on automatic meshing. In other
Tip: cases you must manually mesh the area object. See Chapter 31
ETABS distrib- for more information on manual meshing.
utes the springs
associated with If you are modeling a slab or mat on an elastic foundation with
the area object area springs you probably will want to mesh the area object
to all of the yourself to assure that internally in ETABS a sufficient number
nodes associ- of springs are used in the analysis model. ETABS will automati-
ated with the cally determine the required stiffness for each spring. This saves
internal-to-
you a considerable amount of time when the points where the
ETABS (analy-
springs actually occur are not uniformly spaced.
sis model) rep-
resentation of 14
the area object.
There are two areas in the Assign Spring dialog box. They are:
If you are mod-
eling a slab or • Area spring: Here you specify the direction of the
mat on an elas- springs as one of the three local axes of the area object
tic foundation and you specify a stiffness for the spring. The units for
with area the stiffness are Force/Length3.
springs you
may want to • Options: Three area spring assignment options are pos-
mesh the area sible:
object yourself
to assure that ü Add to existing springs: Adds the specified spring
internally in stiffness to the area object. If one or more spring
ETABS a suffi- stiffness assignments have already been made then
cient number of this option increases the existing spring stiffness as-
springs are suming, of course, you are specifying a positive
used in the
stiffness.
analysis model.
stiffness. If there is not an existing assignment then
option.

ü Delete existing springs: Deletes any and all spring

stiffness assignments made to the selected area ob-
Area Spring area of the dialog box are ignored when
opened.

to an area object as long as the total stiffness at any point still
remains positive (or zero). If you decide to assign some negative
spring stiffness to an area object, you should do it with great care
because it can get you into trouble. If negative spring stiffness
occurs at any point in your model during the analysis then
14 ETABS terminates the analysis and provides an error message
that there is an instability. ETABS does not check for negative
spring stiffness prior to running the analysis.
Additional Area Mass Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Additional Area Mass
command to assign additional area mass to an area object. Note
that the additional area mass is only considered by ETABS if
you have specified that the mass source is to be based on element
Tip:
masses and additional masses, not from a specified load combi-
Additional area nation. See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11 and
mass is only the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more information.
considered by
ETABS if the The additional area mass is only applied in the three translational
mass is speci- degrees of freedom. If you have specified that only lateral mass
fied to be de- is to be considered (see the section titled "Mass Source" in
termined from
Chapter 11) then the additional area mass is only active in the
material prop-
erty masses.
global X and Y directions.
Additional area
Clicking the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Additional Area
mass is ignored
if the mass is Mass command brings up the Assign Mass dialog box. Follow-
determined ing are descriptions of the two areas in this dialog box.
from a load
combination. • Area mass: Specify the translational mass per unit area
in this region. The masses are entered in Force-
Second2/Length3 units.

• Options: Three area mass assignment options are possi-

ble:
ü Add to existing masses: Adds the specified area

mass to the area object. If one or more area mass as-
signments have already been made then this option
increases the existing area mass assuming, of course,
you are specifying a positive mass.

specified area mass, if any, with the new area mass.
If there is not an existing assignment then the new
assignment is still made. This is the default option.
ü Delete existing masses: Deletes any and all area

mass assignments made to the selected area ob-
Area Mass area of the dialog box are ignored when
14
opened.
Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to

Area Objects
ETABS automatically meshes area objects that are assigned deck
properties or slab properties with membrane behavior only into
the analysis model as necessary. See Chapter 30 for details of
Note: automatic meshing. In some cases you may not want ETABS to
See Chapter 30
automatically mesh an area object into the analysis model.
for more infor-
For example, by default when you have a composite beam floor
mation on the
automatic system ETABS automatically meshes the deck at every beam
meshing per- and girder. This allows ETABS to automatically distribute the
formed by loading on the deck to each beam or girder in an appropriate
ETABS. manner. Suppose you have already assigned loads to the beams
as frame loads and have not assigned any load (including self-
weight) to the deck. In this case you might decide that you want
to mesh the deck yourself, using a coarser mesh than the ETABS
automatic mesh. In this case you would tag the deck not to be

meshed. We do not see this example as a very likely scenario,

but is does illustrate when you might use this feature.
To tag the deck not to be meshed you select it and click the As-
sign menu > Shell/Area > Automatic Membrane Floor
Mesh/No mesh command. You can also use this command again
if you later decide that you want ETABS to automatically mesh
the area objects. When you execute this command you have
three options:
• Mesh it: This tags the area object to be automatically

meshed, as required, by ETABS into the analysis model.
By default all membrane floor area objects have this tag
when they are created.
• Don't mesh it: This tags the area object not to be auto-
14 matically meshed by ETABS into the analysis model.
• Cancel: This gives you a way to get out of the command

without having to assign a mesh it or a don't mesh it tag
to the area object.
Uniform Surface Load Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area Loads > Uniform command
to bring up the Uniform Surface Loads dialog box and assign
uniform loads to selected area objects. The following bullet
items discuss the four areas in the Frame Distributed Loads dia-
log box:

load case that the specified uniform surface load is to be
assigned to. Note that you use the Define menu > Static
• Uniform Load: Here you specify the uniform load value

and the direction of the load. The following directions
are possible:
ü Local-1

Figure 14-7:
Uniform surface w
load ,w, acting on an
area object in the 1 o sθ) 1
w(c
Gravity projection
direction
Z 3 θ 3 θ
a) Area load, w, applied to area object b) How projected area load

in Gravity projection direction is treated in ETABS
ü Local-2
ü Local-3
14
ü Global-X
ü Global-Y
Note: ü Gravity
The Gravity ü Global-X projection
direction for
loads is down- ü Global-Y projection
ward in the
negative global ü Gravity projection
Z direction
Note that the Gravity direction is downward in the nega-
than negative signs.
Figure 14-7 shows an example of how ETABS considers

projected loads on area objects. Figure 14-7a illustrates a
projected uniform surface load of intensity w. The direc-
tion of the load is the ETABS gravity projection direc-
tion. Note that this is equivalent to a force of w(cosθ)
acting over the entire surface of the area object in the
gravity direction as shown in Figure 14-7b.


available:
ü Add to existing loads: Adds the specified uniform

load to the area object. If one or more uniform load
assignments have already been made to the area ob-
ject then this option increases the total uniform load
on the area object assuming, of course, you are
specifying a positive load.

fied uniform load, if any, with the new uniform load
fault option. Note that only the loads in the load case
that is specified above are replaced.
14 ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all uniform
load assignments made to the selected area object(s).
When this option is selected the items in the Uni-
form Load area of the dialog box are ignored when
you click the OK button. Note that only the loads in
the load case that is specified above are deleted.
opened.
Temperature Load Assignments to Area Objects

Use the Assign menu > Shell/Area Loads > Temperature
command to bring up the Area Object Temperatures dialog box
and assign temperature loads to selected area objects. Note that
temperature loads may be based on a uniform temperature
change you specify for the object, or they may be based on pre-
viously specified point object temperature changes at the point
objects at the corners of the area object, or they may be based on
a combination of both. The following bullet items discuss the
four areas in the Area Object Temperatures dialog box:

load case that the specified area object temperature
loading is to be assigned to. Note that you use the Define

Note:
menu > Static Load Cases command to define load
When end point case names.
temperatures
are specified to • Object Temperature: Here you specify the uniform
be included in temperature change, if any, for the object. If you are
the area object
temperature
basing the temperature load for the area object on the
load ETABS point temperatures at the corner points of the object
assumes that only, then enter 0 (zero) for the uniform temperature
the temperature change. A positive temperature change corresponds to an
change varies increase in the temperature of an object.
linearly over
the surface of • Object Temperature Options: It is very important to
the area object note that these options only apply to the uniform tem-
based on the perature change in the Object Temperature area of the
specified dialog box. The following three assignment options are
changes at the available:
corner points.
ü Add to existing object temperatures: Adds the
14
specified uniform temperature change to the area
object. If one or more uniform temperature change
assignments have already been made then this option
increases the total uniform temperature change on
the area object assuming, of course, you are speci-
Note: fying a positive uniform temperature change.
The three Ob- This option has no affect on the corner point tem-
ject Tempera-
perature option. See the corner Point Temperature
ture Options
have no affect Option bullet item below for more information.
on the corner
point tempera- ü Replace existing object temperature: Replaces the
ture option. The currently specified uniform temperature change, if
effect of the any, with the new uniform temperature change as-
corner point signment. If there is not an existing assignment then
temperatures is the new assignment is still made. This is the default
not additive to option. Note that only the temperature changes in the
itself. You ei- load case that is specified above are replaced.
ther consider
the corner point This option has no affect on the corner point tem-
temperatures or perature option. See the Corner Point Temperature
you do not. Option bullet item below for more information.
ü Delete existing loads: Deletes any and all uniform

temperature change assignments made to the se-
lected area object(s). When this option is selected

any value input in the Object Temperature area of

the dialog box for a uniform temperature change is
ignored when you click the OK button. Note that
only the temperature changes in the load case that is
This option has no affect on the corner point tem-

perature option. See the corner Point Temperature
Option bullet item below for more information.
opened.
• Corner Point Temperature Option: If you check the

Include Effect of Point Temperatures check box in this
14 area then ETABS considers the temperature change in
the area object based on previously specified point ob-
ject temperature changes at the point objects at the cor-
ners of the area object. ETABS assumes that the tem-
perature change varies linearly over the surface of the
area object based on the specified changes at the corner
points.
Checking this box has no affect on the uniform tem-

perature change specified in the Object Temperature
area. You can simultaneously specify a uniform tem-
perature change and a temperature change based on
specified corner point temperatures if desired. Alterna-
tively, and probably more commonly, you can specify
one type of temperature change or the other. If you don't
want to include the effect of point temperatures then
simply leave the box unchecked.
Note that the effect of the corner point temperatures is

not additive to itself. You either consider the corner
point temperatures or you do not. You control this by
either checking or unchecking the box. Thus the options
in the Object Temperature Options area have no mean-
ing and consequently no affect on the option of includ-
ing the effect of the point temperatures.

Group Name Assignments

Groups are discussed in detail in Chapter 26. To define a group
first select the objects that you want to be part of the group. Then
click the Assign menu > Group Name command. The Assign
Group dialog box appears. Either highlight an existing group
name in the dialog box and click the OK button or create a new
group name, click the Add New Group button and then click the
OK button. The selected objects are assigned to whatever group
name is highlighted when the OK button is clicked. Any object
can be assigned to an unlimited number of groups.
Important note: If you highlight an existing group name then the

Note:
selected objects replace rather than add to any objects that
If the name of might have previously been defined for that group.
the group ap-
pearing in the
edit box in the
The Groups area of the Assign Group dialog box lists the names 14
of all the currently defined groups. The Click To area of the
Groups area of dialog box allows you to define new group names, change an
the Assign existing group name, change the display color for a group and
Groups dialog
delete an existing group.
box does not
match any of
To add a new group name, type in the name of the group in the
the group
names listed in edit box in the Groups area and then click the Add New Group
that area then button.
the OK button
is not active To change a group name, highlight the group name in the Groups
until you click area. Note that the group name then appears in the edit box at the
the Add New top of the Groups area. Edit the group name as desired and then
Group button click the Change Group Name button.
to add that
group name to To change the display color associated with a group, highlight
the list of the group name in the Groups area and then click the Change
groups. Group Color button. A color box appears from which you can
select any color for the group. Note that the display color associ-
ated with a group is used as the background color in the edit box
in the Groups area of the Assign Groups dialog box when that
group name is highlighted in the dialog box. See the subsection
titled "View by Colors" in Chapter 10 for additional information.
Group Name Assignments 14 - 63

To delete a group highlight the group name in the Groups area.

Tip:
Note that the group name then appears in the edit box at the top
Assignments of the Groups area. Click the Delete Group button to delete the
made to exist- group. Note that the objects associated with the group are not
ing groups re- deleted, the group definition is the only thing that is deleted.
place what is in
the group. They You can click the Assign menu > Group Names command and
do not add to it. enter the Assign Group dialog box without first making a selec-
If you want to
tion if you wish (regardless of whether the model is locked or
add to an ex-
isting group
unlocked). This is useful if you want to change a group name,
then first select change a group color or delete a group. In these cases you enter
the group, next the Assign Groups dialog box without first making a selection,
select the ob- make the desired name changes, color changes or deletions and
jects you want then click the OK button. Since you entered the dialog box with-
to assign to the out a selection ETABS knows not to make any group assignment
group and then to the highlighted group when you click the OK button. In this
14 make the as-
signment.
special case where you enter the dialog box without a selection
whatever group name is highlighted when you click the OK
button retains exactly the same definition it had before you en-
tered the dialog box.
Clear Display of Assigns

When you make assignments to objects those assignments are
then displayed on the model. For example if you assign a frame
section property to a line object then the frame section assign-
ments are displayed for all line objects in the model. Sometimes
you will want to get rid of these assignment displays. You can
use the Assign menu > Clear Display of Assigns command to
do this.
Note that you can also remove the display of assignments by

clicking the Show Undeformed Shape button, , on the main
(top) toolbar or by clicking the Display menu > Show Unde-
formed Shape command.
14 - 64 Clear Display of Assigns

Chapter 15
15
The ETABS Analyze Menu
The Analyze menu in ETABS provides basic features for starting
and controlling your building analysis. This chapter discusses the
commands available on the Analyze menu.
Analysis Options
Click the Analyze menu > Set Analysis Options command to
bring up the Analysis Options dialog box where you can set
various parameters for your analysis. In this dialog box you can
specify parameters for building active degrees of freedom, dy-
namic analysis and P-Delta analysis. Each of these items is dis-
cussed in subsections below.
Building Active Degrees of Freedom

The possible degrees of freedom for your building are UX, UY,
UZ, RX, RY and RZ. In the Building Active Degrees of Free-
dom area of the Analysis Options dialog box (shown below) you
specify which of these degrees of freedom are active for your
model. A check in the box associated with a degree of freedom
15 - 1
means that degree of freedom is active. You can check or un-

check the degree of freedom boxes as desired.
Four special buttons are provided in this area to allow you to

quickly set the degrees of freedom for all of the typical cases that
might arise. They are:
15 • Full 3D: This button sets all six degrees of freedom active.
The vast majority of your building models should be run
using this option.
Tip: • XZ Plane: This button sets the UX, UZ and RY degrees of
The degree of freedom active. It is intended for two-dimensional frames
freedom buttons that are modeled in the global XZ plane.
provide a fast
and easy way to • YZ Plane: This button sets the UY, UZ and RX degrees of
set the building freedom active. It is intended for two-dimensional frames
active degrees that are modeled in the global YZ plane.
of freedom for
your analysis. • No Z Rotation: This button sets all degrees of freedom ac-
tive except for RZ. Oftentimes, to satisfy building code re-
quirements, engineers run lateral force analyses of their
structure with various positive and negative eccentricities of
mass (lateral load) from the calculated center of mass of the
building and with all six degrees of freedom active. In addi-
tion to this they run analyses with the mass (lateral load) lo-
cated at the calculated center of mass of the building and the
Z-rotations locked. The design is then based on the worst
case of all these analyses. This No Z Rotation feature sets
the degrees of freedom of your model appropriately to run an
analysis with Z-rotations locked.
15 - 2 Analysis Options
Chapter 15 - The ETABS Analyze Menu
Dynamic Analysis Parameters

To set the dynamic analysis parameters click the Analyze menu
> Set Analysis Options command to bring up the Analysis Op-
tions dialog box. Then check the Dynamic Analysis check box, if
it is not already checked and click the Set Dynamic Parameters
button. This opens the Dynamic Analysis Parameters dialog box.
The following bullet items discuss the various areas in this dia-
log box:
• Number of Modes: In this box specify the number of

Eigen or Ritz modes that you want ETABS to capture.
For more information see the subsections titled "Number
of Modes" in Chapter 33. Note that there are two sub-
sections with this title in Chapter 33. One is under the
section titled "Eigenvector Analysis" and the other under
the section titled "Ritz-Vector Analysis."
Tip: • Type of Analysis: Choose either eigenvector or ritz- 15

If you are run-
vector analysis in this area. See the sections titled "Ei-
ning response genvector Analysis" and "Ritz-Vector Analysis" in
spectrum or Chapter 33 for discussion of these types of analyses.
time history
analysis then If you are running response spectrum or time history
we strongly analysis then we strongly recommend that you use ritz-
recommend vectors. It is especially important that you use ritz-
that you use vectors when performing nonlinear time history analysis.
ritz-vectors. It
is especially • Eigenvalue Parameters: This area of the dialog box is
important that only active if you select "Eigenvector" in the Type of
you use ritz- Analysis area. The following parameters are specified in
vectors when this area:
performing
nonlinear time ü Frequency Shift (Center): This is the center of the
history analy-
cyclic frequency range, ƒ0. See the subsection titled
sis.
"Frequency Range" in Chapter 33 for more informa-
tion.
ü Cutoff Frequency (Radius): This is the radius of

the cyclic frequency range, also known as the cutoff
frequency, ƒmax. See the subsection titled "Frequency
Range" in Chapter 33 for more information.
Analysis Options 15 - 3
ü Relative Tolerance: This is the relative conver-

gence tolerance, ε. See the subsection titled "Con-
vergence Tolerance" in Chapter 33 for more infor-
mation.
ü Include Residual Mass Modes: If you check this

box then ETABS computes residual-mass (missing-
mass modes. The purpose of these modes is to ap-
proximate high-frequency behavior when the mass
participation ratio for a given direction of accelera-
tion load is less than 100%. See the subsection titled
"Residual Mass Modes" in Chapter 33 for more in-
formation.
When this option is chosen the number of eigenvec-

tor modes recovered is 3 less than the number speci-
fied and up to 3 non-zero residual-mass modes are
15 reported. Thus when you check the Include Residual
mass Modes check box at least four modes need to
be requested because the last 3 modes are automati-
cally reserved for the residual-mass modes.
The default values for the Eigenvalue Parameters will be

sufficient for most analyses.
• Starting Ritz Vectors: This area of the dialog box is

only active if you select "Ritz Vectors" in the Type of
Analysis area. In this area you specify the starting ritz
vectors. Refer to the section titled "Ritz-Vector Analy-
sis" and particularly to the subsection titled "Starting
Load Vectors" in Chapter 33 for more information. Also
refer to the section titled "Acceleration Loads" in Chap-
ter 33.
The possible ritz load vectors are the acceleration loads

in the global X, Y and Z directions and all of your de-
fined static load cases. The acceleration loads are desig-
nated as mux, muy, and muz in the section titled "Accel-
eration Loads" in Chapter 33. You can use any of these
loads as starting ritz-vectors.
A load is used as a starting ritz-vector if it is in the Ritz

Load Vectors list box in the Starting Ritz Vectors area of
the Dynamic Analysis Parameters dialog box. If the load
is in the List of Loads list box then it is not used as a
starting ritz-vector. You can use the Add and Remove
buttons to shift loads into and out of the Ritz Load Vec-
tors list box, respectively.
The Include Nonlinear Link Vectors check box is visible

if you have assigned link properties in your model. The
check box is active if both link properties are assigned
and the Ritz Vector analysis type is specified.
If you check the Include Nonlinear Link Vectors box

then ETABS automatically provides a starting load vec-
tor for each nonlinear degree of freedom in each link
element. When you use this option be sure to specify a
sufficient number of modes to allow ETABS to capture
the modes associated with these special starting vectors.
15
ETABS does not add additional modes to the number
you requested when you check the Include Nonlinear
Link Vectors check box.
P-Delta Analysis Parameters

To set the P-Delta analysis parameters click the Analyze menu >
Set Analysis Options command to bring up the Analysis Op-
tions dialog box. Then check the Include P-Delta check box, if it
is not already checked and click the Set P-Delta Parameters
button. This opens the P-Delta Parameters dialog box. For more
information on P-Delta analysis, including information relevant
to this dialog box, see the section titled "Initial P-Delta Analysis"
in Chapter 33.
The following bullet items discuss the various areas in this dia-
log box:
• Method: Initial P-Delta analysis in ETABS considers

the P-Delta effect of a single loaded state upon the
structure. There are two ways to specify this load:
ü Non-iterative Based on Mass: The load is com-

puted automatically from the mass at each level as a
story-by-story load upon the structure. This ap-

proach is approximate, but does not require an itera-
tive solution.
This method essentially treats the building as a sim-

plified stick model to consider the P-Delta effect. It
is much faster than the iterative method. It does not
capture local buckling as well as the iterative
method. This method works best if you have a single
rigid diaphragm at each floor level though it also
Tip: works for other cases as well.
We recommend
that you use the The reason we provide this method is to allow you
Iterative Based to consider P-Delta in cases where you have not
on Load Cases specified gravity loads in your model. If you have
method for P- specified gravity loads in your model, then in gen-
Delta analysis eral, we recommend that you use the Iterative Based
15 unless there are
no gravity
on Load Cases option.
loads specified ü Iterative Based on Load Cases: The load is com-

in your model. puted from a specified combination of static load
cases. This is called the P-Delta load combination.
For example, the load may be the sum of a dead load
case plus a fraction of a live load case. This ap-
proach requires an iterative solution to determine the
P-Delta effect upon the structure.
This method considers the P-Delta effect on an ele-

ment-by-element basis. It captures local buckling ef-
fects better than the non-iterative method. We rec-
ommend that you use this iterative method in all
cases except those where no gravity load is specified
in your model.
• Iteration Controls: This area is active if you select the

Iterative Based on Load Cases option in the Method area
of the dialog box. The Maximum Iterations item and the
Relative Tolerance -Displacements item are discussed in
the subsection titled "Iterative Solution" in Chapter 33.
Note that the maximum number of iterations specified is
the maximum number of additional analyses after the
first analysis is run.
• P-Delta Load Combination: This area is active if you

select the Iterative Based on Load Cases option in the
Method area of the dialog box. Here you specify the sin-
gle load combination to be used for the initial P-Delta
analysis of the structure.
As an example, suppose that the building code requires

the following load combinations to be considered for de-
sign:
(1) 1.4 dead load
(2) 1.2 dead load + 1.6 live load
(3) 1.2 dead load + 0.5 live load + 1.3 wind load
(4) 1.2 dead load + 0.5 live load - 1.3 wind load
(5) 0.9 dead load + 1.3 wind load 15

(6) 0.9 dead load - 1.3 wind load
For this case, the P-Delta effect due to the overall sway
of the structure can usually be accounted for, conserva-
tively, by specifying the P-Delta load combination to be
1.2 times dead load plus 0.5 times live load. This will
accurately account for this effect in load combinations 3
and 4 above, and will conservatively account for this ef-
fect in load combinations 5 and 6. This P-Delta effect is
not generally important in load combinations 1 and 2
since there is no lateral load.
It is also possible to accurately account for the P-Delta

effect due to the deformation of the members between
their ends in the ETABS analysis, but we do not rec-
ommend that you do this. Instead we recommend that
you account for this effect using factors in your design.
The ETABS design postprocessors assume this is what
you have done and includes these factors, where appro-
priate, in the design.
If you did want to try and account for the P-Delta effect
due to the deformation of the members between their
ends in the ETABS analysis then you should first break
up all of your columns into at least two objects between
story levels. Then you should run each of the six load
cases above separately with a different P-Delta load
combination for each. Again, it is recommended that this
effect be accounted for instead by using factors in your
design as is done in the ETABS design postprocessors.
Run Analysis
You can run an analysis of your building either by clicking the
Analyze menu > Run Analysis command, or by clicking the
Run Analysis button, , on the main (top) toolbar, or by
15 pressing the F5 function key on you keyboard. When you exe-

cute this command using one of the above methods the Run Op-
tions dialog box appears with three choices. Those choices are:
• Run: This option opens the Analysis Window on top of

the main ETABS window and runs the analysis. Infor-
mation concerning the analysis scrolls by in the Analysis
Window as the run progresses. See the subsection below
titled "Analysis Window" for more information.
This option runs your analysis in such a way that if you

Tip: switch away from ETABS to another program while the
analysis is running you may not be able to switch back
The Run Mini-
to ETABS until the analysis completes. Also, there is no
mized option
has the advan- way to cancel an analysis run once you have started it
tage of provid- using this option.
ing a Cancel
button while the In general you should only use this option for smaller
analysis is run- models that run quickly.
ning that allows
you to easily • Run Minimized: This option closes the main ETABS
abort the window and runs with just the Analysis Window open.
analysis at any Information concerning the analysis run scrolls by in the
time. Analysis Window as the run progresses. See the subsec-
tion below titled "Analysis Window" for more informa-
tion.
15 - 8 Run Analysis
This option runs your analysis in such a way that if you

switch away from ETABS to another program while the
analysis is running you are able to switch back to
ETABS and observe the information in the Analysis
Window. Also, this option provides you with a Cancel
button that allows you to cancel (stop) the analysis at
any time.
• Cancel: This cancels the Run Analysis command. The

analysis is not run if you click this button.
Note: Analyze Window

Use the scroll As your ETABS analysis runs information about the analysis
bar in the scrolls by in the Analysis Window. When the analysis is com-
Analysis Win- plete, and before you have clicked the OK button in the Analysis
dow to scroll
15
Window you should use the scroll bar in the Analysis Window to
through all of scroll through all of the information and check for any warnings
the information
or errors that might invalidate your analysis.
and check for
any warnings
After you click the OK button in the Analysis Window this in-
or errors that
might invali-
formation disappears. However, it is saved, in text form, in the
date your .log file. See the section titled "The ETABS Log File" in Chapter
analysis. 43 for information on this file.
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis

The Analyze menu > Run Static Nonlinear Analysis command
runs a static nonlinear analysis. For this command to be available
you must have previously done the following:
• Run a regular static analysis (linear) of the building.
• Use the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover

Cases command to define one or more static nonlinear
load cases.
Note that you can run a static nonlinear analysis and then make
changes to your hinge definitions or your static nonlinear load
case definitions without having to unlock your model. This al-
lows you to run several different static nonlinear analyses with-
out having to rerun the regular static analysis (linear) each time.
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis 15 - 9

Chapter 16
The ETABS Display Menu 16
General
The Display menu in ETABS provides options for displaying in-
put and output information both on the model and onscreen in a
tabular form. This chapter discusses those options.
Undeformed Shape
Clicking the Display menu > Show Undeformed Shape com-
mand or the Show Undeformed Shape button, , on the main
(top) toolbar does the following:
• If you are creating your model it clears the display of

any assignments that are still showing on the model. It
essentially functions the same as the Assign menu >
Clear Display of Assigns command in this case.
16 - 1
• If you are currently looking at onscreen output results of

any type that are plotted on the model it clears the dis-
play of the results and returns the view to an undeformed
shape view.
Note that this command only affects the active window.
Loads
Click the Display menu > Show Loads command to display
loads that you have input for the model using the Assign menu >
Joint/Point Loads, Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads and As-
sign menu > Shell/Area Loads, commands. Clicking the Dis-
play menu > Show Loads command brings up a submenu where
you can choose to display joint/point loads, frame/line loads or
shell/area loads. Each of these options is discussed in a separate
subsection below. The loads that you specify are only displayed
16 in the currently active window.
Note that alternatively you can right click on any object and then
select the Loads tab to see what loads are assigned to that object.
Joint/Point Loads
Click the Display menu > Show Loads > Joint/Point command
to bring up the Show Joint/Point Loads dialog box. The follow-
ing bullet items discuss the various areas in this dialog box.
Tip:
You can right • Load case: Choose the static load case whose joint/point
click on any loads you want to display from the drop-down box. Note
object and se- that static load cases are defined using the Define menu
lect the Loads > Static Load Cases command.
tab as an alter-
nate way of • Load type: Choose the type of load that you want to
viewing the
display from this area. The choices are forces, displace-
loads on an
object.
ments or temperature values. You can display one of
these types of loads at a time.
16 - 2 Loads
Chapter 16 - The ETABS Display Menu
• Show loading values: When the Show Loading Values

check box is unchecked then forces and displacements
are indicated by arrows in the appropriate direction only.
When the Show Loading Values check box is checked
then forces and displacements are indicated by arrows in
the appropriate direction together with loading values
(text).
Loading values are always shown when you choose the

Temperature Values option in the Load Type area re-
gardless of whether the Show Loading Values check box
is checked or unchecked.
Frame/Line Loads
Click the Display menu > Show Loads > Frame/Line com-
mand to bring up the Show Frame/Line Loads dialog box. The
following bullet items discuss the various areas in this dialog
box. 16
• Load case: Choose the static load case whose frame/line
loads you want to display from the drop-down box. Note
Note: that static load cases are defined using the Define menu
> Static Load Cases command.
The values dis-
played for line • Load type: Choose the type of load that you want to
object tem- display from this area. Note that you can only display
perature loads
one of these types of loads at a time. The choices are:
include the ef-
fect of point
ü Span loading (forces): This includes all of the
temperatures at
the end points
point, uniform and trapezoidal force loads (not mo-
of the line ob- ment loads) applied to the line object.
ject if you
specified this ü Span loading (moments): This includes all of the
when you as- point, uniform and trapezoidal moment loads applied
signed the tem- to the line object.
perature load.
ü Temperature values: This includes all of the tem-
perature loads applied to the line object.
Loads 16 - 3
Important Note: When temperature loads are dis-

played two numbers are shown for each line object.
These two numbers correspond to the temperatures
at the ends of the object. If upon assigning the tem-
perature load you indicated that the effects of point
temperature were not to be included then the two
displayed temperatures for the line object are the
same and are equal to the temperature you assigned
to the object. This is true regardless of any point
object temperatures that may be assigned to the point
objects at the end of the line object.
If upon assigning the temperature load you indicated

that the effects of point temperature were to be in-
cluded then the two displayed temperatures for the
line object are equal to the temperature you assigned
to the object plus the temperature assigned to the
point object at the considered end of the line object.
16 In this case the two displayed temperatures for a line
object may be different.
• Include Point Object Loads: This check box toggles on

and off whether point object loads are shown together
with the line object loads. When this box is checked both
force and moment point object loads are displayed along
with the selected type of line object loads.
• Show Loading Values: When the Show Loading Values

check box is unchecked then forces and moments are in-
dicated by arrows in the appropriate direction only.
When the Show Loading Values check box is checked
then forces and moments are indicated by arrows in the
appropriate direction together with loading values (text).
Loading values are always shown when you choose the

Temperature Values option in the Load Type area re-
gardless of whether the Show Loading Values check box
is checked or unchecked.
16 - 4 Loads
Shell/Area Loads
Click the Display menu > Show Loads > Shell/Area command
to bring up the Show Shell/Area Loads dialog box. The follow-
ing bullet items discuss the various areas in this dialog box.
• Load case: Choose the static load case whose shell/area

loads you want to display from the drop-down box. Note
that static load cases are defined using the Define menu
> Static Load Cases command.
• Load type: Choose the type of load that you want to

display from this area. Note that you can only display
one of these types of loads at a time. The choices are:
ü Uniform load values: This is a uniform surface load

on an area object. If you choose this option you then
also specify the loading direction for which you
want the loads displayed by choosing a direction
Note: from the associated drop-down box named Direc- 16
The values dis- tion.
played for area
object tem-
ü Temperature values: This includes all of the tem-
perature loads perature loads applied to the area object.
include the ef-
fect of point Important Note: When temperature loads are dis-
temperatures at played numbers are shown at each corner of the area
the corner object. These numbers correspond to the tempera-
points of the tures at the corners of the object. If upon assigning
area object if the temperature load you indicated that the effects of
you specified point temperature were not to be included, then the
this when you displayed temperatures for the area object are the
assigned the same and are equal to the temperature you assigned
temperature to the object. This is true regardless of any point
load.
object temperatures that may be assigned to the point
objects at the corners of the area object.
Loads 16 - 5
If upon assigning the temperature load you indicated

that the effects of point temperature were to be in-
cluded then the displayed temperatures for the area
object are equal to the temperature you assigned to
the object plus the temperature assigned to the point
object at the considered corner of the area object. In
this case the displayed temperatures for an area ob-
ject may be different at each corner.
Input Table Mode

Click the Display menu > Set Input Table Mode command to
bring up the Print Input Tables dialog box. Here you can specify
the types of input data that you want to display in a tabular, data-
base form on the screen. See Chapter 40 for documentation of
the items that can be tabulated from this dialog box.
16 The items you specify in the Print Input Tables dialog box are
displayed in a tabular database format. Select the type of input
data that you want to view from the drop-down box. A table for
that data appears. When the table is longer than the dialog box is
deep two methods exist for scrolling through the table. You can
use the scrollbar that appears at the right side of the table or you
can use the arrow buttons that are in the dialog box.
The arrow buttons are shown in the sketch to the left where they
1 2 3 4 are labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4 for reference. Arrow button 1 jumps you
up to the top of the table. Arrow button 2 takes you up one line
in the table. Note that there is an arrow to the left of the table in-
dicating the current line. Arrow button 3 takes you down one line
in the table. Arrow button 4 jumps you down to the bottom of the
table.
When you are finished viewing a table either click the drop-
down box to view another table or click the OK button to close
the database.
You can not directly copy or print any of the information in the
database tables. However, note that the items that can be tabu-
lated on the screen using the Display menu > Set Input Table
Mode command are exactly the same as the items that can be
16 - 6 Input Table Mode

printed to a printer or to a file using the File menu > Print Ta-
bles > Input command.
Deformed Shape
Click the Display menu > Show Deformed Shape command or
the Display Static Deformed Shape button, , on the main
(top) toolbar to bring up the Deformed Shape dialog box. Here
you can specify the load case whose deformed shape you would
like to plot. The following bullet items describe the various areas
in the Deformed Shape dialog box.
• Load: Choose the load case whose deformed shape you

would like to plot from the drop-down box. Note that
you can plot a deformed shape for any static load case,
response spectrum case, time history case, static nonlin-
ear case, or load combination. Following is a description
of what is plotted for each of these items. 16
ü Static load case (linear): The deformed shape mul-
tiplied by a scale factor is plotted. When a deformed
shape is displayed for a static load case you can use
the left and right arrow keys on the status bar,
, to quickly display deformed shapes for other
static load cases.
ü Response spectrum case: A deformed shape multi-

plied by a scale factor is plotted. In this case the de-
formed shape has little meaning because the re-
sponse spectrum analysis causes all results (defor-
mations) to be positive, and the displacements at
each point are the maximum displacement at that
point which may not occur at the same time in an
earthquake as the maximum displacement at another
point.
It can be useful to compare the deformed shape plot

for a response spectrum with the undeformed shape
to see which parts of the structure are experiencing
the most displacement.
Deformed Shape 16 - 7
When a deformed shape is displayed for a response

spectrum case you can use the left and right arrow
keys on the status bar, , to quickly display
deformed shapes for other response spectrum cases.
ü Time history case: When you choose a time history

case a box appears where you specify the time step
in the time history analysis for which you want to
display the deformed shape. Choose a time before
clicking the OK button to plot the deformed shape.
If you specify a time that is before the time history

starts then the first step of the time history is dis-
played. If you specify a time that is after the time
history finishes then the last step of the time history
is displayed. If you specify a time during the time
history that is not exactly the same as one of the out-
put time step times then the nearest time step is dis-
16 played.
A deformed shape multiplied by a scale factor is

plotted for the chosen time of the time analysis.
When a deformed shape is displayed you can use the
left arrow key on the status bar, , to display the
previous time step in the analysis and the right arrow
key on the status bar, , to display the next time
step in the analysis.
ü Static nonlinear case: When you choose a static

nonlinear case a box appears where you specify the
step in the static nonlinear analysis for which you
want to display the deformed shape. Choose a step
number before clicking the OK button to plot the de-
formed shape. To get an idea of the force and de-
formation associated with any step in the pushover
click the Display menu > Show Static Pushover
Curve command, click the File menu at the top of
the resulting dialog box and click the Display Ta-
bles command. This displays a table that among
other things includes the force and deformation for
each step of the nonlinear static analysis.
16 - 8 Deformed Shape
A deformed shape multiplied by a scale factor is

plotted for the chosen step of the static nonlinear
analysis. When a deformed shape is displayed you
can use the left arrow key on the status bar, , to
display the previous step in the analysis and the right
arrow key on the status bar, , to display the next
step in the analysis. In this manner you can easily
step through deformed shape views of the entire
pushover analysis if desired.
See the discussion of contours in the subsection ti-

tled "Output Colors" in Chapter 18 for additional in-
formation on deformed shapes for static nonlinear
analyses.
ü Load combination: A deformed shape multiplied

by a scale factor is plotted. In this case the deformed
shape may or may not have much meaning depend-
ing on what is in the load combination. See the sec- 16
tion titled "Load Combinations" in Chapter 27 for
discussion of load combinations.
If the load combination is a single-valued load com-

bination then the displayed results are meaningful. If
the load combination is multi-valued then the dis-
played results have little meaning. In this case the
value with the largest absolute value is displayed.
For example if the minimum value at point 1 is -3
and the maximum value is +2 then the -3 value is
displayed. If an adjacent point has a minimum value
of -1 and a maximum value of +2 then +2 is dis-
played at that point. This process continues on for
every point. It can lead to some funny looking de-
formed shape plots.
When a deformed shape is displayed for a load com-

bination you can use the left and right arrow keys on
the status bar, , to quickly display deformed
shapes for other load combinations.
• Scaling: Here you can specify the scaling that is used to

scale the plotted deformations. If you specify a scaling
factor of 100 then all deformations are plotted to scale at
100 times their actual value. For example, a deformation
of 1 inch is plotted to scale as if it is a 100-inch defor-
mation.
By default ETABS automatically determines a scaling

factor for the deformed shape plot. If you want ETABS
to automatically determine a scaling factor then leave the
Auto option selected. Otherwise select the Scale Factor
option and specify your own scale factor.
ETABS calculates the scale factor as a multiple of the

default font size which itself is determined as a multiple
of the average story height. The advantage to determin-
ing the scale factor as a multiple of the default font size
is that the default font size is limited by a specified
16 minimum and maximum size that is specified in the
preferences. This helps keep the automatically deter-
mined scale factor within a reasonable range most, but
not all, of the time. If the automatic scale factor seems to
cause a display problem then specify your own factor.
• Options: Here you can specify if the cubic curve func-

tion should be used when plotting the deformed shape.
Cubic curves affect how the line objects with frame sec-
tion properties appear in the deformed shape plot.
Note: ETABS only saves point/joint displacements from an

analysis. Thus when it prepares to plot a deformed shape
The cubic curve
the only deformations it has available are the point/joint
feature only
affects line ob-
deformations. No deformations internal to the line ob-
jects with frame jects are available.
section proper-
ties. When the deformed shape is plotted the point/joints are
put in their correct locations. If you specify that the cu-
bic curves are not to be considered then the frame ele-
ments are simply drawn as straight lines connecting the
appropriate points/joints.
16 - 10 Deformed Shape
If you specify that cubic curves are to be considered then

ETABS does the following:
ü Calculate an approximate deflection (translation and

rotation at the center of the beam.
ü Draw a cubic curve from the left end of the beam to

the center of the beam based on the actual translation
and rotation at the left end and the approximate
translation and rotation at the center.
ü Draw a cubic curve from the center of the beam to

the right end of the beam based on the approximate
translation and rotation at the center and the actual
translation and rotation at the left end.
Note that drawing a single cubic curve from the left end
to the right end of the beam does not give a very good
representation of a loaded beam, but using two curves,
as is done in ETABS, gives a pretty good plot. Never- 16
theless, when plotting a deformed shape keep in mind
that the displacements at the joints are exact whereas de-
formation shown for the frame members is approximate
even when the cubic curve option is activated.
When you are viewing a deformed shape you can right click on
any point object to bring up the Joint Displacements dialog box
that displays the displacements (translation and rotations) for that
point object in the global coordinate system and in the current
units. In this dialog box you can click on the Lateral Drifts
button to display displacements at all story levels where a point
object exists in the same plan location as the selected point ob-
ject. Also drifts are displayed for all story levels where a point
object exists at the top and bottom of the story level in the same
plan location as the selected point object. The drifts are calcu-
lated as the displacement at the top of the story level minus the
displacement at the bottom of the story level divided by the story
level height.
Important Note: When an analysis is run ETABS automatically

creates a point object at the center of mass of all rigid dia-
phragms. This point object is restrained against translation in the
Z-direction and against rotation about the global X and Y-axes in
order to be compatible with the rigid diaphragm. You can right
click on this point to see displacements at the center of mass of
the diaphragm.
Note: Note that the Z translation and X and Y rotations for these center
of mass points are zero since the points are restrained. Also note
You can ani-
that you can use the Point Objects item in the Object Visibility
mate deformed
shapes in
area of the Set Building View Options dialog box to toggle these
ETABS. center of mass joints on and off. You can use the Set Building
View Options button on the main (top) toolbar to access the
dialog box.
Finally, when a deformed shape is displayed you can click on the

Start Animation button on the status bar to animate the de-
16 formed shape. Sometimes this makes it easier to recognize the
deformed shape. Click the Stop Animation button on the status
bar to stop the animation. Note ETABS includes sound with the
animation. You can use the Options menu > Sound command
to toggle this sound on and off.
Mode Shape
Click the Display menu > Show Mode Shape command or the
Show Mode Shape button, , on the main (top) toolbar to
bring up the Mode Shape dialog box. Here you can specify the
mode whose deformed shape you would like to plot. The fol-
lowing bullet items describe the various areas in the Mode Shape
dialog box.
• Mode number: Here you can specify the mode number

whose deformed shape you would like to plot. Use the
scroll buttons to scroll to the desired mode shape or sim-
ply type in the mode number you would like to display.
If you type in a mode number larger than the number of
modes used in the analysis then ETABS defaults to the
highest mode number in the analysis.
16 - 12 Mode Shape
• Scaling: Here you can specify the scaling that is used to

scale the plotted mode shapes. By default ETABS auto-
matically determines the scaling factor for the mode
shape plot. If you want ETABS to automatically deter-
mine a scaling factor then leave the Auto option se-
lected. Otherwise select the Scale Factor option and
specify your own scale factor. When you select your
own scaling factor a factor of 1 gives the same plot as
the automatic scaling. A factor of 2 gives twice the ap-
parent deformation and so on.
ETABS calculates the default deformation (scale factor

of 1 deformation) as a multiple of the default font size
which itself is determined as a multiple of the average
story height. The advantage to determining the scale
factor as a multiple of the default font size is that the de-
fault font size is limited by a specified minimum and
maximum size that is specified in the preferences. This
helps keep the automatically determined deformations 16
for the mode shapes within a reasonable range most, but
not necessarily all, of the time. If the automatic scale
factor seems to cause a display problem then specify
your own factor.
Note: • Options : Refer to the bullet item titled "Options" in the

previous section titled "Deformed Shape" for discussion
You can ani-
of the cubic curve item.
mate mode
shapes in
When a mode shape is displayed you can click on the Start
ETABS.
Animation button on the status bar to animate the mode shape.
Sometimes this makes it easier to recognize the deformed shape.
Click the Stop Animation button on the status bar to stop the
animation. Note ETABS includes sound with the animation. You
can use the Options menu > Sound command to toggle this
sound on and off.
Also, when a mode shape is displayed you can use the left arrow
key on the status bar, , to display the previous mode shape
and the right arrow key on the status bar, , to display the next
mode shape.
Mode Shape 16 - 13
Member Force and Stress Diagrams

Click the Display menu > Show Member Forces/Stress Dia-
gram command or click the Display Member Force Diagram
button, , on the main (top) toolbar to display support and
spring reactions; frame element, pier and spandrel forces, shell
forces and stresses and link element forces. These items are dis-
cussed in detail in the subsections below.
Support and Spring Reactions

You can display support and spring reactions directly on your
ETABS model. To do this click the Display menu > Show
Member Forces/Stress Diagram > Support/Spring Reactions
command to bring up the Point Object Reaction Forces dialog
box. The following bullet items discuss the areas in this dialog
box:
16 • Load: Choose the load case whose support or spring re-
actions you would like to display from the drop-down
box. Note that you can plot support or spring reactions
for any static load case, response spectrum case, time
history case, static nonlinear case, or load combination.
For time history cases you also specify a time for which
you want to see the reactions. For static nonlinear cases
you also specify a step at which you want to see the re-
actions.
Following is a description of what is plotted for each of

these items.
ü Static load case (linear): The force values are dis-

played along with arrows showing the direction of
the force. The arrows indicate the direction of the
force acting from the support (spring) onto the ele-
ments connected to the support (spring). When reac-
tions are displayed for a static load case you can use
the left and right arrow keys on the status bar,
, to quickly display reactions for other static
load cases.
16 - 14 Member Force and Stress Diagrams

ü Response spectrum case: The reaction values are

displayed along with arrows showing the direction
of the force. The arrows indicate the direction of the
force acting from the support (spring) onto the ele-
ments connected to the support (spring). Note that
the response spectrum reactions show the maximum
value obtained for each component of each reaction
and also note that the values may not occur at the
same time in an earthquake.
When reactions are displayed for a response spec-

trum case you can use the left and right arrow keys
on the status bar, , to quickly display reac-
tions for other response spectrum cases.
ü Time history case: When you choose a time history

case a box appears where you specify the time step
in the time history analysis for which you want to
display the reactions. Choose a time before clicking
the OK button to plot the reactions.
16
If you specify a time that is before the time history
starts then the first step of the time history is dis-
played. If you specify a time that is after the time
history finishes then the last step of the time history
is displayed. If you specify a time during the time
history that is not exactly the same as one of the out-
put time step times then the nearest time step is dis-
played.
The reaction values are displayed along with arrows

showing the direction of the force. The arrows indi-
cate the direction of the force acting from the sup-
port (spring) onto the elements connected to the sup-
port (spring).
When reactions are displayed you can use the left ar-
row key on the status bar, , to display the reac-
tions for the previous time step in the analysis and
the right arrow key on the status bar, , to display
the reactions for the next time step in the analysis.
Member Force and Stress Diagrams 16 - 15

ü Static nonlinear case: When you choose a static

nonlinear case a box appears where you specify the
step in the static nonlinear analysis for which you
want to display the reactions. Choose a step number
before clicking the OK button to plot the deformed
shape. To get an idea of the force and deformation
associated with any step in the pushover click the
Display menu > Show Static Pushover Curve
command, click the File menu at the top of the re-
sulting dialog box and click the Display Tables
command. This displays a table that among other
things includes the force and deformation for each
step of the nonlinear static analysis.
The reaction values are displayed along with arrows

showing the direction of the force. The arrows indi-
cate the direction of the force acting from the sup-
port (spring) onto the elements connected to the sup-
16 port (spring).
When reactions are displayed you can use the left ar-
row key on the status bar, , to display the previ-
ous step in the analysis and the right arrow key on
the status bar, , to display the next step in the
analysis. In this manner you can easily step through
the support or spring reactions for the entire push-
over analysis if desired.
ü Load combination: The reaction values are dis-

played along with arrows showing the direction of
the force. The arrows indicate the direction of the
force acting from the support (spring) on to the ele-
ments connected to the support (spring).
See the section titled "Load Combinations" in

Chapter 27 for discussion of single-valued and
multi-valued load combinations. If a load combina-
tion is a single-valued load combination then its re-
action values are displayed. If a load combination is
multi-valued then the displayed results are those
with the largest absolute value. For example if the
minimum value at point 1 is -3 and the maximum
value is +2 then the -3 value is displayed. If an adja-

cent point has a minimum value of -1 and a maxi-

mum value of +2 then +2 is displayed at that point.
This process continues for every component at every
reaction point.
When reactions are displayed for a load combination

you can use the left and right arrow keys on the
status bar, , to quickly display reactions for
other load combinations.
• Type: Here you indicate whether to display support re-

actions or spring forces.
When support or spring reactions are displayed you can right

click on any point object to see its support or spring forces in a
tabular form. Sometimes it is easier to read the values using this
method.
Frame Element, Pier and Spandrel Forces

16
You can display column, beam, brace, pier and spandrel forces
directly on your ETABS model. To do this click the Display
menu > Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram > Frame/Pier/
Spandrel Forces command to bring up the Member Force Dia-
gram dialog box. The following bullet items discuss the areas in
this dialog box:
• Load: Choose the load case whose member forces you

would like to display from the drop-down box. Note that
you can plot member forces for any static load case, re-
sponse spectrum case, time history case, static nonlinear
case, or load combination. For time history cases you
also specify a time for which you want to see the forces.
For static nonlinear cases you also specify a step at
which you want to see the forces.
• Component: Here you specify which component of

force you want to see. You can choose any one (at a
time) of the following:
ü Axial force

ü Shear 2-2
ü Shear 3-3
ü In-plane shear
ü Torsion
ü Moment 2-2
ü Moment 3-3
ü In-plane moment
Note: The in-plane moment and shear items are only available
if the currently active window (the one where the forces
The column,
are going to be displayed) is a 2-D view. This view is
beam, brace,
pier and span-
useful for looking at two-dimensional frames when the
drel forces are local 2-axis of the columns is in the plane of the frame.
16 all displayed at
the same time. If the local axes of a member are rotated such that nei-
If you want to ther the local 2 nor 3 axis is in the 2-D plane, the force
see forces for displayed when the in-plane option is chosen is made up
just one of these of appropriate components from the local 2 and 3 axes.
types of objects
then you can • Scaling: By default ETABS automatically determines a
make the other scaling factor for the plotted forces. If you want ETABS
objects invisible to automatically determine a scaling factor then leave the
using the View Auto option selected. Otherwise select the Scale Factor
menu > Set option and specify your own scale factor.
Building View
Options com- ETABS calculates the scale factor as a multiple of the
mand. default font size which itself is determined as a multiple
of the average story height. The advantage to determin-
ing the scale factor as a multiple of the default font size
is that the default font size is limited by a specified
minimum and maximum size that is specified in the
preferences. This helps keep the automatically deter-
mined scale factor within a reasonable range most, but
not all, of the time. If the automatic scale factor seems to
cause a display problem then specify your own factor.

• Fill diagram and Show Values on Diagram Check

Boxes: You can display the force diagrams filled with
no text values, unfilled with no text values or unfilled
with text values.
Tip: ü To display force diagrams filled with no text val-

ues: Check the Fill Diagram check box. Note that if
When forces
the Show Values on Diagram check box is currently
are displayed
on the model
checked you must uncheck it first before you can
you can right check the Fill Diagram check box.
click on any
column, beam, ü To display force diagrams unfilled with no text
brace, pier or values: Leave both diagrams unchecked.
spandrel to pop
up a window ü To display force diagrams unfilled with text val-
where you can ues: Check the Show Values on Diagram check box.
run your mouse Note that if the Fill Diagram check box is currently
pointer over the checked you must uncheck it first before you can
element and see
the force value
check the Show Values on Diagram check box.
16
at any location. When forces are displayed on the model note the following:
• You can right click on a frame element, wall pier or wall

spandrel to pop up a window where you can run your
mouse pointer over the element and see the force value
at any location.
• When forces are displayed you can use the left and right
arrow keys on the status bar, , to quickly dis-
play forces for other load cases.
ü If you are currently viewing a static load case (lin-

ear) then the arrow keys step you through all of the
other static load cases (linear).
ü If you are currently viewing a response spectrum

case then the arrow keys step you through all of the
other response spectrum cases.
ü If you are currently viewing a time step in a time

history case then the arrow keys step you through all
of the other time steps in the time history case.

ü If you are currently viewing a step in a static nonlin-

ear case then the arrow keys take you through all of
the other steps in the static nonlinear case.
ü If you are currently viewing a load combination then

the arrow keys step you through all of the other load
combinations.
• Multi-valued load combinations plot a range of values.

See the subsection titled "Output Colors" in Chapter 18
for more information.
• For frame elements exact force values are plotted at all

output station locations. These exact force values are
then connected by straight-line segments to complete the
force diagram. See the section titled "Frame Output Sta-
tion Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for
more information.
16 • For wall pier and spandrel elements exact force values
are plotted at the ends of the element. These exact force
values are then connected by a straight-line segment to
complete the force diagram.
Note that because of the above described method of re-

porting pier and spandrel forces, the forces reported for
spandrel elements may not be refined enough if your de-
sign is governed by gravity load. In cases where your
design is governed by gravity load we recommend that
you model the spandrels with frame elements.
See Chapter 35 for discussion of frame element output conven-

tions. See Chapter 38 for discussion of wall pier and spandrel
output conventions.
Shell Forces and Stresses

You can display internal shell element forces and stresses di-
rectly on your ETABS model. To do this click the Display menu
> Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram > Shell Stresses/
Forces command to bring up the Element Force/Stress Contours
for Shells dialog box.

Important note: The internal shell element forces are forces per
unit length acting along the midsurface of the shell element (area
object). The internal shell element stresses are stresses acting on
the edges (not positive 3-axis face and negative 3-axis face) of
the shell element (area object). See Chapter 36 for additional in-
formation.
Note: The following subsections discuss the areas in the Element

Force/Stress Contours for Shells dialog box:
Shell element
internal forces
are reported at
Load
the element
midsurface in Choose the load case whose shell element forces or stresses you
force per unit would like to display from the drop-down box. Note that you can
length. Shell plot shell element forces or stresses for any static load case, re-
element inter- sponse spectrum case, time history case, static nonlinear case, or
nal stresses are load combination. For time history cases you also specify a time
reported at for which you want to see the forces or stresses. For static non-
both the top
and bottom of
linear cases you also specify a step at which you want to see the 16
the element in
forces or stresses.
force per unit
area. See
Chapter 36 for Component Type
more informa- Here you specify whether you want to see the shell element in-
tion. ternal forces or the internal stresses. See Chapter 36 for more in-
formation.
Component
Here you specify which component of force or stress you would
like to see. See Chapter 36 for a complete description of these
components. For shell element internal forces the possible com-
ponents are:
Positive 2 Face • F11: Direct force per unit length acting at the midsurface
Axis 2
of the element on the positive and negative 1 faces in the
Negative 1 Face
1-axis direction.
Positive 1 Face
Axis 1
Axis 3
Negative 3 Face is
on back of element
• F22: Direct force per unit length acting at the midsurface
Positive 3 Face is
on front of element
of the element on the positive and negative 2 faces in the
Negative 2 Face 2-axis direction.

• F12: Shearing force per unit length acting at the midsur-

face of the element on the positive and negative 1 faces
in the 2-axis direction, and acting on the positive and
negative 2 faces in the 1-axis direction.
• FMAX: Maximum principal force per unit length acting

at the midsurface of the element. Note that by definition
principal forces are oriented such that the associated
shearing force per unit length is zero.
• FMIN: Minimum principal force per unit length acting

principal forces are oriented such that the associated
shearing force per unit length is zero.
• M11: Direct moment per unit length acting at the mid-

surface of the element on the positive and negative 1
faces about the 2-axis.
16 • M22: Direct moment per unit length acting at the mid-
surface of the element on the positive and negative 2
faces about the 1-axis.
• M12: Twisting moment per unit length acting at the

midsurface of the element on the positive and negative 1
faces about the 1-axis, and acting on the positive and
negative 2 faces about the 2-axis.
• MMAX: Maximum principal moment per unit length

acting at the midsurface of the element. Note that by
definition principal moments are oriented such that the
associated twisting moment per unit length is zero.
• MMIN: Minimum principal moment per unit length

acting at the midsurface of the element. Note that by
definition principal moments are oriented such that the
associated twisting moment per unit length is zero.
• V13: Out-of-plane shear per unit length acting at the

faces in the 3-axis direction.

• V23: Out-of-plane shear per unit length acting at the

faces in the 3-axis direction.
• VMAX: Maximum principal shear per unit length acting

principal shears are oriented on faces of the element such
that the associated shears per unit length on perpendicu-
lar faces are zero.
For shell element internal stresses the possible components are:
Positive 2 Face • S11: Direct stress (force per unit area) acting on the
Axis 2
positive and negative 1 faces in the 1-axis direction.
Negative 1 Face
Positive 1 Face
Axis 3
Axis 1
• S22: Direct stress (force per unit area) acting on the
Negative 3 Face is
on back of element
positive and negative 2 faces in the 2-axis direction.
Positive 3 Face is
on front of element
•
16
Negative 2 Face S12: Shearing stress (force per unit area) acting on the
positive and negative 1 faces in the 2-axis direction and
acting on the positive and negative 2 faces in the 1-axis
direction.
• SMAX: Maximum principal stress (force per unit area).

Note that by definition principal stresses are oriented
such that the associated shearing stress is zero.
• SMIN: Minimum principal stress (force per unit area).

Note that by definition principal stresses are oriented
such that the associated shearing stress is zero.
• S13: Out-of-plane shearing stress (force per unit area)

direction.
• S23: Out-of-plane shearing stress (force per unit area)

direction.
• SMAXV: Maximum principal shearing stress (force per

unit area). Note that by definition principal shearing
stresses are oriented on faces of the element such that the
associated shears per unit length on perpendicular faces
are zero.

Contour Range
The shell element internal forces and stresses are displayed on
your screen as colored contours. Ten different contour colors are
used. You can specify the actual colors used by clicking the Op-
tions menu > Colors > Output command and editing the colors
in the Contours area of the Assign Output Colors dialog box.
In the Contour Range area of the Element Force/Stress Contours

for Shells dialog box you can specify two values. They are:
• Min: Any element with a force or stress less than the

value shown here is displayed in the color associated
with Min in the Contours area of the Assign Output Col-
ors dialog box. Note that the color associated with Min
is the top color in the dialog box.
• Max: Any element with a force or stress greater than or

equal to the value shown here is displayed in the color
16 associated with Max in the Contours area of the Assign
Output Colors dialog box. Note that the color associated
with Max is the bottom color in the dialog box.
When you specify the Min and the Max values ETABS equal
spaces the intermediate range values between the specified Min
and Max values.
If you set both the Min and the Max values to zero then this tells
ETABS to create its own range. In this case ETABS creates a
stress range with rounded off (even) values that the actual maxi-
mum an minimum stresses just fit within. Note that setting Min
and max to zero is the default.
Stress Averaging
Stress Averaging: Here you specify if stress averaging is to be
A B used when displaying the shell element forces or stresses. Con-
1 sider the four shell elements labeled A, B, C and D shown in the
sketch to the left. These four shell elements all have a common
C D
point, labeled 1, in the sketch.

Each of the shell elements has an associated internal force or

stress at joint 1. Typically the forces or stresses at common
points in different shell elements are different. The finer your
mesh the closer these values become.
If the force or stress contours are plotted with no stress averaging

at the common points then you will typically see abrupt changes
in force or stress from element to element. Stress averaging tends
to get rid of these abrupt changes in the plot and smoothes the
contours out.
ETABS averages the stresses at a point by averaging the stresses

from all shell elements that both connect to the point and are
visible in the active window. Then when ETABS plots the stress
for a particular shell element it plots that average stress at the
point considered instead of the actual stress calculated for that
shell element at the point.
Do not overlook the implications of the underlined portion of the

previous paragraph. Suppose you are looking at stresses in a lo- 16
cation where a wall intersects a floor. Further suppose that you
are looking at averaged stresses in the floor. If you are viewing
the averaged stresses in the floor in a 2D plan view of the floor,
then only the shell elements that are in the floor, and thus visible
in the window are included in the stress averaging.
If you view the same averaged stresses in a 3D view, where both

the wall and the floor are visible, then the shell elements from
both the floor and the wall are included in the stress averaging.
Thus the averaged stresses in the floor at the intersection of the
floor and the wall will appear differently depending on whether
you are looking at them in a 2D plan view or in a 3D view.
In ETABS you have the option of having no stress averaging,

stress averaging at all joints or stress averaging at specific points
you have selected just prior to plotting the shell forces or
stresses.

Miscellaneous Notes about Shell Element Forces and

Stresses
Note that shell element stresses (not forces) actually have differ-
ent values at the top and bottom of the shell elements (area ob-
jects). Thus, depending on which side of the object you are
looking at you may see different stresses. Two-dimensional
views always look at area objects from the same side. If you
want to see stresses on the other side of the area object then you
will have to view them in a 3D view.
Finally, when shell element forces and stresses are plotted for
multi-valued load combinations, ETABS displays whichever of
the maximum and minimum values has the largest absolute
value.
Link Element Forces

16 You can display link forces directly on your ETABS model. To
do this click the Display menu > Show Member Forces/Stress
Diagram > Link Forces command to bring up the Member
Force Diagram dialog box. This dialog box works as described
in the previous subsection titled "Frame Element, Pier and Span-
drel Forces."
See Chapter 37 for discussion of link element output conven-

tions. Note the following about displayed link element forces:
• When multiple link elements are defined at the same lo-

cation the force value displayed on the model is the sum
of the forces in all the link elements that exist at that lo-
cation.
• When link forces are displayed on the model you can

right click on a link element to bring up a tabular display
of the forces on that element. When multiple elements
are defined in the same location the tabular display
shows the forces for each element separately.
• When forces are plotted on link elements for multi-

valued load combinations, ETABS displays whichever

Figure 16-1: ∆ δroof

Example of the the- P1 Roof P1 Roof P1 Roof
ory used for energy
diagrams
P2 Second P2 Second P1 Second
P1 + P2
δsecond
P1 + P2
a) b) c)
of the maximum and minimum values has the largest ab-

solute value.
Energy Diagram
Click the Display menu > Show Energy Diagram command to
display energy diagrams which can be used as an aid to deter-
16
mine which elements should be stiffened to most efficiently
Note: control the lateral displacements of your structure. Following is a
little background information.
The energy
diagram is an Consider the two story structure shown in Figure 16-1a that has
aid to help you
lateral loads P1 and P2 at the Roof and Second story levels, re-
determine
which elements spectively. Also note the displaced shape, ∆, associated with this
should be stiff- structure and loading which is shown dashed.
ened to most
efficiently con- Now consider the same structure, shown in Figure 16-1b, with a
trol the lateral single load P (typically a unit load) applied to it and a resulting
displacements displaced shape, δ, shown dashed. Maxwell's Reciprocal Theo-
of your struc- rem states that:
ture.
P∆ = P1δroof + P2δsecond Eqn. 16-1
See a structural analysis textbook for details on Maxwell's Re-

ciprocal Theorem.
In this very simple example, Equation 16-1 could be reduced to

an element level where the elements are illustrated in Figure 16-
1c as shown in Equation 16-2.
Energy Diagram 16 - 27
P∆ = [P1δroof - P1δsecond] +
[(P1 + P2)δsecond - (P1 + P2)δbase] Eqn. 16-2
Noting that δbase is equal to zero, Equation 16-2 reduces to that

P∆ = [P1δroof - P1δsecond] + [(P1 + P2)δsecond] Eqn. 16-3
In Equation 16-3 the first term in brackets is the energy in the

top element and the second term is the energy in the bottom ele-
ment. The energy in both of these elements sums to the total P∆
energy.
When you request that ETABS show the energy diagram it re-
ports the equivalent of the values shown in brackets in Equation
16-3 for each element in the structure. Note the following about
the energy values that ETABS reports:
16 • The energy values that ETABS reports are based on all

six degrees of freedom of the element, not just the one
degree of freedom discussed in Figure 16-1 and Equa-
tions 16-1 through 16-3.
• The energy values that ETABS reports are determined as

follows:
ü ETABS determines the energy per unit volume asso-

ciated with each element in the structure.
ü ETABS normalizes all of the calculated energy val-

ues such that the largest one has a value of 100.
Note: As previously stated the energy diagrams are helpful as an aid to

determine which elements should be stiffened to control lateral
Energy dia-
displacements in your structure. When you request that ETABS
grams are nor-
malized.
show an energy diagram, the Energy Diagram dialog box ap-
pears. In this dialog box you input a load case associated with
forces and one associated with displacements.
16 - 28 Energy Diagram
Figure 16-2: 1 Roof 1 Roof

Example displace-
ment load cases for
energy diagram
Second 1 Second
a) b)
The load case associated with forces is the load case for which
you want to control displacements. In the discussion above it is
the load case shown in Figure 16-1a. The load case associated
with displacements is the one associated with Figure 16-1b in the
example above. Typically this load case consists of one or more
unit loads.
Figure 16-2 shows a couple of load cases you might use for your
16
displacement load cases. Figure 16-2a shows a load case that is
appropriate if you are interested in controlling the roof displace-
ment. Figure 16-2b shows a load case that is appropriate if you
are interested in controlling the interstory displacement between
the roof and the second story level.
Response Spectrum Curves

After running a time history analysis select one or more point
objects and click the Display menu > Show Response Spec-
trum Curves command to bring up the Response Spectrum
Generation dialog box. Here you can specify the appropriate data
to plot various response spectra.
Important Note: The response spectrum curve that you plot us-
ing this command is based on a time history that you have previ-
ously run. It has nothing to do with any response spectrum
analysis that you may have run.
The Response Spectrum Generation dialog box has five separate

tabs in it. The following subsections discuss each of those tabs.
Response Spectrum Curves 16 - 29

Define Tab
The following bullet items discuss the three areas on the Define
tab of the Response Spectrum Generation dialog box.
• Time History Case: This is the name of a previously

run time history case for which you want to create the
response spectrum.
• Choose a Point: This area displays the labels of the

point objects you had selected when you clicked the
Display menu > Show Response Spectrum Curves
command. Highlight a point in this area. The response
spectrum is generated based on the time history absolute
acceleration response at this highlighted point.
• Vector Direction: This is the direction associated with

the response spectrum. The choices are X, Y or Z, which
are the global axes directions. The response spectrum is
16 based on time history absolute acceleration response in
the specified vector direction at the point that is high-
lighted in the Choose a Point area of the Define tab.
Axes Tab
The following bullet items discuss the three areas on the Axes
tab of the Response Spectrum Generation dialog box.
• Abscissa: This is the horizontal axis of the response

spectrum. It can either be frequency, f, or period, T,
where f = 1/ T.
• Ordinate: This is the vertical axis of the response spec-

trum. It can be SD (spectral displacement), SV (spectral
velocity), PSV (pseudo-spectral velocity), SA (spectral
acceleration) or PSA (pseudo-spectral acceleration).
SD, SV and SA for a given period (frequency) are cal-

culated as the displacement, velocity and acceleration,
respectively, of a single degree of freedom system sub-
jected to the output time history acceleration at the high-
lighted joint (on the Define tab) in the specified vector
direction (on the Define tab).
16 - 30 Response Spectrum Curves

PSV and PSA are defined by Equations 16-4a and 16-4b,

respectively.
2π
PSV = SD Eqn. 16-4a
T
æ 2π ö
2
PSA = ç ÷ SD Eqn. 16-4b
è T ø
Options Tab
The following bullet items discuss the two areas and the check
box on the Options tab of the Response Spectrum Generation
dialog box.
• Abscissa: This is the horizontal axis of the response

spectrum. It can be plotted with either an arithmetic
scale or a log scale. 16
The spectrum widening item widens the plotted peaks of
the spectrum. When you specify a percentage value for
spectrum widening, each peak in the response spectrum
is widened by the specified percentage of the frequency
at the peak on both sides of the peak value.
Important note: The spectrum widening is based on a

percentage of the frequency at the peak regardless of
whether your abscissa is frequency or period.
As an example consider the response spectrum plot

shown in Figure 16-3a. Note that this is a plot of period
versus spectral acceleration. Note that a peak occurs at 2
seconds in the plot. Now suppose that you create the
same response spectrum but this time specify 10% spec-
trum widening. In this case ETABS artificially widens
the peak such that there is a constant peak value from
1.82 seconds to 2.22 seconds. The response spectrum
with spectrum widening is shown in Figure 16-3b. The
calculations are shown in the figure.

Figure 16-3:
Example of spectrum
widening
PSA
PSA
1.82
2.22
1.50 2.00 2.50 1.50 2.00 2.50
Period (sec) Period (sec)
a) b)
Calculation for widened spectrum range shown in (b)

T = 2.00 sec, therefore f = 1 / T = 1 / 2.00 = 0.5 Hz
Calculate 10% spectrum widening frequency: 0.10 f = 0.10 * 0.5 = 0.05 Hz
Calculate frequency range: fmax = 0.5 + 0.05 = 0.55 Hz, fmin = 0.5 - 0.05 = 0.45 Hz
Calculate period range: Tmin = 1/ fmax = 1/ 0.55 = 1.82 sec, Tmax = 1/ fmin = 1/ 0.45 = 2.22 sec
• Ordinate: This is the vertical axis of the response spec-

trum. It can be plotted with either an arithmetic scale or
a log scale.
16 The scale factor item linearly scales the ordinates of the
response spectrum. This scale factor can be useful if, for
example, you have run your analysis in kip and inch
units and you want to see a PSA response spectrum with
the acceleration in g (acceleration of gravity) instead of
inches/second2. If this were the case you would specify
the scale factor as 1 / 386.4 = 0.002588.
• Grid Overlay: This check box toggles on and off the

display of gridlines on the response spectrum plot.
Frequency/Period Tab
The name of this tab is either Frequency or Period depending on
which option is chosen in the Abscissa area of the Axes tab. The
following bullet items discuss the two areas on this tab.
• Include Frequencies/Periods: There are three choices

for included frequencies/periods. You can choose any
combination of these three choices. The choices are:
ü Default: The default frequencies in Hz are: 0.2, 0.3,

0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, 1, 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5,
1.6, 1.8, 2, 2.2, 2.4, 2.6, 2.8, 3, 3.3, 3.6, 4, 4.4, 4.7, 5,
16 - 32 Response Spectrum Curves

5.5, 6, 6.5, 7, 7.5, 8, 8.5, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
16.5, 18, 20, 22, 25, 28 and 33. The default periods
are equal to one divided by the default frequencies.
The default frequencies range from 0.2 Hz to 33 Hz.

The default periods range from 0.0303 seconds to 5
seconds.
ü Structural: The structural periods and frequencies

are those calculated by ETABS for your building.
ü User: The user periods and frequencies are those

specified by you in the User Frequencies area of the
tab.
• User Frequencies/Periods: You specify user frequen-

cies or periods in this area. To add a user fre-
quency/period type it in the edit box and click the Add
16
Value button.
To change the value of an existing user frequency/period

highlight it in the list box. Note that it appears in the edit
box when you highlight it. Change its value in the edit
box and click the Change Value button.
To delete an existing user frequency/period highlight it

in the list box. Note that it appears in the edit box when
you highlight it. Click the Delete Value button.
Damping Tab
In the damping area you can specify as many different levels of
damping as you want. One response spectrum curve is then cre-
ated for each value of damping. To add a damping level type it in
the edit box and click the Add Value button.
To change the value of an existing damping level highlight it in

the list box. Note that it appears in the edit box when you high-
light it. Change its value in the edit box and click the Change
Value button.
To delete an existing damping level highlight it in the list box.

Note that it appears in the edit box when you highlight it. Click
the Delete Value button.

Time History Traces

After running a time history analysis you can click the Display
menu > Show Time History Traces command to bring up the
Time History Display Definition dialog box. Here you can spec-
Tip: ify the appropriate data to plot various time history curves.
You can use the A time history trace is simply a plot of a vertical time history
File menu > function versus a horizontal time history function. The vertical
Create Video time history function can be any defined time history function.
command to
Although the horizontal time history function defaults to Time, it
create videos
(movies) of
can be any defined time history function.
your building's
You can define the following types of time history functions: in-
real-time de-
formations in put functions, various types of energy functions, base reaction
an earthquake. functions, point displacement functions, frame element force
The video is functions, link element force or deformation functions and sec-
saved as a tion cut force functions. The time history curves can be plotted
16 Windows .avi
file.
as a function versus time (e.g., displacement versus time) or as a
function versus another function (e.g., force versus displace-
ment).
Important note: Do not confuse the terminology of time history

function implied in the Time History Display Definition dialog
box and used in this discussion with the time history function
that is defined using the Define menu > Time History Function
command. The Define menu command defines a time history in-
put function that is simply one of the types of functions (see pre-
vious paragraph) referred to here as a time history function.
When you click the Display menu > Show Time History
Traces command, ETABS automatically creates time history
display functions for all selected objects. Once inside the Time
History Display Definition dialog box you can define additional
time history display functions as desired. Often if you want to
see a time history trace for, say a particular point, it is easiest to
select that joint before clicking the command. ETABS creates
the time history display function automatically for the point. You
can easily modify the component of displacement displayed if
ETABS did not default to the one you want.
16 - 34 Time History Traces

The following bullet items discuss various items in the Time

History Display Definition dialog box:
• Time history case: This is the name of the time history

case for which you want to display a time history trace.
• Choose functions: In this area you specify the vertical

and horizontal time history functions that make up your
time history trace. A time history trace is simply a plot
of a vertical function versus a horizontal function. You
can specify multiple vertical functions for a trace but
only one horizontal function.
The list box titled List of Functions lists all of the cur-
rently defined time history functions. You can highlight
a function in this list box and click the Add button to
move the function into the Vertical Functions list box.
The Vertical Functions list box lists all of the time his-
tory functions that will be plotted versus the single 16
specified horizontal function in the current time history
trace. To remove a function from the Vertical Functions
list box highlight the function and click the Remove
button.
The horizontal time history function is selected from the

Horizontal Function drop-down box. This box includes
all defined time history functions and Time. The default
is Time.
You can highlight a function in either the List of Func-

tions list box or the Vertical Functions list box and click
the Modify/Show button to adjust the components that
are plotted for that function. For example you may want
to plot displacements in the Y direction instead of the X
direction. The Modify/Show button allows you to make
this adjustment.
Time History Traces 16 - 35

• Modify List of Functions button: This button allows

you to add functions to the list of functions or delete
them. It also gives you an alternate path, and slightly
longer path, for modifying the components that are
plotted for a function.
Most of the definitions and component information you

encounter here is self-explanatory. Standard energy for-
mulas are used for the ETABS energy measures. All en-
ergies are integrated over the full structure. Following
are equations describing each type of energy available in
ETABS that can be plotted as a time history function:
ò
IE = F(t) v(t) dt Eqn. 16-5a
ò
KE = m a(t) v(t) dt Eqn. 16-5b
16 ò
PE = k u(t) v(t) dt Eqn. 16-5c
ò
MDE = c v 2 (t) dt Eqn. 16-5d
ò
NDE = [D force v avg (t) − D stiff u(t) v(t)] dt Eqn. 16-5e
ò
LE = [L force v avg (t) − L stiff u(t) v(t)] dt Eqn. 16-5f
EE = IE - KE - PE - MDE - NDE - LE Eqn. 16-5g
where,
IE = Input energy
KE = Kinetic energy
PE = Potential energy
MDE = Modal damping energy
NDE = Nonlinear damping energy from link elements

that are dampers. Note that this excludes the

potential energy already accounted for in PE

(the subtracted term).
LE = Link element energy (not including dampers).

Note that this excludes the potential energy al-
ready accounted for in PE (the subtracted
term).
EE = Energy error
a = Acceleration
c = Modal damping
Dforce = Force in link elements that are dampers
Dstiff = Stiffness of link elements that are dampers
F = External force
k = Stiffness 16
Lforce = Force in link elements (not including dampers)
Lstiff = Stiffness of link elements (not including

dampers)
m = mass
t = time
u = displacement
v = Velocity
vavg = Average velocity over a time step
Note that for ground-acceleration input, all displace-

ments, velocities and accelerations above are relative to
the ground motion. The external force is the ground ac-
celeration times the mass of the structure.
• Axes labels: The axes labels that you type here appear
on the screen plots and on printed plots.
Time History Traces 16 - 37

• Time range: You can specify any time range to be

plotted. This can be useful if you only want to plot a
portion of a full time history. This item applies whether
you are plotting a function versus time or a function ver-
sus another function.
• Axes range override: This area allows you to change

the range plotted for both axes. If you are plotting func-
tion versus time then the horizontal axis range override
overrides the specified Time Range.
For example, suppose you have 10 seconds of earth-

quake output. Further suppose that you have adjusted the
time range to be from 0 to 5 seconds. Now if you over-
ride the horizontal axis to be from 0 to 3 only three sec-
onds of the time history output plots. If you instead over-
ride the horizontal axis to be from 0 to 10 then the time
history plots from 0 to 5, as specified from in the Time
16 Range area, but the horizontal axis plots from 0 to 10
seconds. Thus the earthquake plot fills half of the hori-
zontal axis length.
Note: • Individual line options: The individual line functions

apply separately to each vertical function that is defined.
The individual
line options can
To specify individual line options for a function first
be different for highlight the function in the Choose Functions area and
each vertical then specify the line options.
function
The vertical scale factor is a scale factor for the vertical
function only. It does not scale the horizontal function in
any way.
There is a File menu at the top of the window that displays the
traces. This File menu allows you to print graphics of the plot or
to print tables either to a file or to a printer. Printing time history
functions to a file is useful if you then want to take the data in
the file and plot it in another program, for example, a spread-
sheet.

Static Pushover Curve

Click the Display menu > Show Static Pushover Curve com-
mand to display the force-displacement (pushover) curve ob-
tained from a static nonlinear analysis. You can also view the
pushover curve in the Acceleration-Displacement Response
Spectrum (ADRS) format and overlay it with various response
spectra thus allowing you to perform capacity-spectrum analysis
in ETABS.
There is a File menu at the top of the window that displays the
pushover curve. This File menu allows you to print graphics of
the plot or to print tables either to a file or to a printer.
Documentation of ETABS static nonlinear analysis is beyond the

scope of this manual.
16
Section Cut Forces
Click the Display menu > Show Section Cut Forces command
to display section cut forces. This command brings up the Select
Section Cuts dialog box where you can select one or more sec-
tions cuts whose forces you would like to see.
Note that section cuts are defined by first using the Assign menu
> Group Names command to define a group that is used for de-
fining the section cut and then using the Define menu > Section
Cuts command to define the section cut itself. See the section ti-
tled "Section Cuts" in Chapter 26 and the section titled "Section
Cuts" in Chapter 11 for more information.
When you click the OK button the section cut forces are dis-
played in a tabular form on the screen. The output sign conven-
tion used for section cut forces is described in Chapter 39. Note
that the section cut forces are reported in the local coordinate
system for the section cut. Also note that the location where the
section cut forces are reported is output along with the force in-
formation.
Static Pushover Curve 16 - 39

Output Table Mode

Click the Display menu > Set Output Table Mode command or
click the Display Output Tables button, , on the main (top)
toolbar to bring up the Print Output Tables dialog box. Here you
can specify the types of output data that you want to display in a
tabular, database form on the screen. See Chapter 41 for docu-
mentation of the items that can be tabulated from this dialog box.
The items you specify in the Print Output Tables dialog box are
displayed in a tabular database format. Select the type of output
data that you want to view from the drop-down box. A table for
that data appears. When the table is longer than the dialog box is
deep two methods exist for scrolling through the table. You can
use the scrollbar that appears at the right side of the table or you
can use the arrow buttons that are in the dialog box.
16 1 2 3 4
The arrow buttons are shown in the sketch to the left where they
are labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4 for reference. Arrow button 1 jumps you
up to the top of the table. Arrow button 2 takes you up one line
in the table. Note that there is an arrow to the left of the table in-
dicating the current line. Arrow button 3 takes you down one line
in the table. Arrow button 4 jumps you down to the bottom of the
table.
When you are finished viewing a table either click the drop-
down box to view another table or click the OK button to close
the database.
You can not directly copy or print any of the information in the
database tables. However, note that the items that can be tabu-
lated on the screen using the Display menu > Set Output Table
Mode command are exactly the same as the items that can be
printed to a printer or to a file using the File menu > Print Ta-
bles > Output command.
16 - 40 Output Table Mode

Chapter 17
The ETABS Design Menu 17
Overview
The Design menu serves as your gateway to the integrated de-
sign postprocessors that are a part of your ETABS package. The
design postprocessors available are:
Steel Frame Design - See Chapter 45
Concrete Frame Design - See Chapter 46
Composite Beam Design - See Chapter 47
Shear Wall Design - See Chapter 48
For each of the design postprocessors you can access the fol-
lowing types of commands from the Design menu.
• Review and/or select design load combinations.
17 - 1
• Review and/or select overwrites.
• Start the design or check of the structure.
• Perform interactive design.
• Display input and output design information on the

model.
• Perform various other tasks specific to the various de-

sign postprocessors.
The menu commands for each of the design postprocessors are

discussed in Chapters 45 through 48 as referenced above.
Note that you use the File menu > Print Tables command to
print design output from the various design postprocessors in a
tabular form.
17 Overwrite Frame Design Procedure

Background
The frame design procedure identifies the design post processor
that will design a particular element. The design procedure is re-
ported in the Line Information dialog box which appears when
you right click on a line object. See the section titled "Right
Click Information for Line Objects" in Chapter 24 for more in-
formation on this.
The design procedure is always one of the following four items:
• Steel Frame Design
• Concrete Frame Design
• Composite Beam Design
• Null (no design)
The design procedure for a line object is automatically deter-

mined when the analysis is run. It is not necessarily determined
when the line object is drawn or when you modify your model.
17 - 2 Overwrite Frame Design Procedure

Chapter 17 - The ETABS Design Menu
See the following section titled "The Overwrite Frame Design

Procedure Command" for more information.
ETABS Default Design Procedure Assignments

The default design procedure assignments are determined by
ETABS as follows:
• Null: If the line object is not assigned a frame section

property then its default design procedure is Null.
Tip:
If you have • Concrete Frame Design: If the line object is assigned a
modeled a floor frame section property that has a concrete material prop-
or roof with erty then its default design procedure is Concrete Frame
slightly sloping Design.
beams and you
want to design • Composite Beam Design: If the line object is assigned a
the beams using frame section property that has a steel material property
the Composite
and it meets all of the criteria listed below then its de-
17
Beam Design
postprocessor fault design procedure is Composite Beam Design.
then you will
have to make
ü The line type is Beam, that is, the line object is hori-
all of the beams zontal.
horizontal. You
can easily do ü The frame element is oriented with its positive local
this using the 2-axis in the same direction as the positive global Z-
Edit menu > axis (vertical upward).
Align Points/
Lines/Edges ü The frame element has I-section or channel section
command and properties.
selecting the
"Align to Z Co- ü The M3 (major) moment is released at each end of
ordinate of" the frame element, that is, it is pinned.
option.
ü A deck property (not slab property) is assigned to an
area object located on top of the beam. The beam
and the area object must be in the same plane.
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure 17 - 3

• Steel Frame Design: If the line object is assigned a

frame section property that has a steel material property
and it does not qualify to have its design procedure set to
Composite Beam Design then its default design proce-
dure is Steel Frame Design.
The Overwrite Frame Design Procedure Command

The Design menu > Overwrite Frame Design Procedure
command allows you to change the design postprocessor for a
frame element as follows:
• A concrete frame element can be switched between the

Concrete Frame Design and the Null design procedures.
Tip:
Assign a concrete frame element the Null (no design)
If you don't design procedure if you do not want it designed by the
want a frame Concrete Frame Design postprocessor.
element to be
designed then • A steel frame element can be switched between the Steel
17 use the Design
menu > Over-
Frame Design, Composite Beam Design (if it qualifies)
write Frame
and the Null design procedures. In this dialog box a steel
Design Proce- frame element qualifies for the Composite Beam Design
dure command procedure if it meets all of the following criteria.
to assign it a
Null (no de- ü The line type is Beam, that is, the line object is hori-
sign) design zontal.
procedure.
ü The frame element is oriented with its positive local
2-axis in the same direction as the positive global Z-
axis (vertical upward).
ü The frame element has I-section or channel section

properties.
Note that these are the same as the criteria used by

ETABS to determine the default design procedure except
that the last two criteria checked when determining the
default design procedure are not checked here.

Chapter 17 - The ETABS Design Menu
Assign a steel frame element the Null (no design) design

procedure if you do not want it designed by either the
Steel Frame Design or the Composite Beam Design
postprocessor.
When you click the Design menu > Overwrite Frame Design
Procedure command the Overwrite Frame Design Procedure
dialog box appears. Five options are available in this box. De-
pending on the frame section assignment made to the line object
several of the options may not be available. Following is a de-
scription of each of the five options:
• Steel Frame Design: This option is available for all line

objects that have steel frame section properties. It means
that the frame section is designed using the Steel Frame
Design postprocessor.
Tip: • Concrete Frame Design: This option is available for all

line objects that have concrete frame section properties.
You can force
the design pro-
cedure to be
It means that the frame section is designed using the
Concrete Frame Design postprocessor. 17
updated for a
line object • Composite Beam Design: This option is available for
while you are all line objects that have steel frame section properties
creating your and that meet the three requirements listed earlier in this
model simply subsection for composite beams (horizontal, 2-axis up, I-
by clicking on section or channel section). It means that the frame sec-
the Design tion is designed using the Composite Beam Design post-
menu. This processor.
automatically
updates the • No Design: This option is available for all line objects.
design proce- It means that the line object is not designed by any de-
dure for all
sign postprocessor. These line objects are given the Null
objects.
design procedure.
• Default: This option is available for all line objects. It

means that the line object is to be given the default de-
sign procedure (postprocessor) as described in the sec-
tion titled "ETABS Default Design Procedure Assign-
ments" earlier in this chapter.
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure 17 - 5

The design procedure for a line object is determined when the

analysis is run. It is not necessarily determined when the line
object is drawn. The design procedure is not automatically up-
dated as you modify your model. It is automatically updated
when you click on the Design menu and when you run the analy-
sis. Thus if you draw a line object and then later right click on it
the Design Procedure item in the Line Information dialog box
may be Null or outdated. You can always update the design pro-
cedure by clicking on the design menu.
If at any time while you are creating your model you want to
know what the current default design procedure is for a line ob-
ject click on the Design menu then click somewhere else to close
the design menu. This automatically updates the design proce-
dures. Now you can see the design procedure assigned to the line
object at the current instant in time by right clicking on the line
object.
17

Chapter 18
The ETABS Options Menu

18
General
The Options menu in ETABS provides you with control over
some of the basic features of ETABS. It also allows you to spec-
ify values for various items that to some degree control the look
and feel of the graphic interface as well as the behavior of the
program. This chapter discusses all of the items on the Options
menu except for the Preference items related to the design post-
processors. The design postprocessors are documented in sepa-
rate manuals.
Preferences
The ETABS preferences control a variety of items that affect the
look and feel of the program, the default behavior of the design
postprocessors and how ETABS considers live load reduction.
18 - 1
Dimensions and Tolerances

The Options menu > Preferences > Dimensions/Tolerances
command brings up the Preferences dialog box where you can
specify preferences for various dimension and tolerance items.
The following items can be specified:
Note: • Auto merge tolerance: This item is used as a basic tol-

erance check in the model. It is entered in length units.
The auto merge
tolerance is
The ETABS default for this item is 0.1 inches in English
used internally units and 1 mm in metric units. Following are some
by ETABS to typical uses of the tolerance.
determine such
things as when ü When a point object is drawn, or generated, that is
two point ob- within this distance of another point object the
jects are in the drawn point object is merged into the original point
same location object.
or when a point
object falls on a ü If a point object is within this distance of a line ob-
line object. ject then the point object is assumed to be supported
18 by the line object. When the analysis is run the line
object is broken up at the point object and connected
to the point object. Note that this might put a small
kink in the line object if the point object is not ex-
actly on the line object.
ü If a point object is within this distance of being in a

plane, then it is assumed to be in the plane.
• Plan fine grid spacing: This is the spacing of invisible

grid points that are used by the Draw menu > Snap to >
Fine Grid command and the associated Snap to Invisi-
ble Grid button on the side toolbar. This item is entered
in length units. The ETABS default for this item is 48
inches in English units or 1 meter in metric units. See the
subsection titled "ETABS Snap Options" in Chapter 12
18 - 2 Preferences
Chapter 18 - The ETABS Options Menu
• Plan nudge value: This is the distance that a nudged

object moves after you have pressed the appropriate key
on the keyboard. This item is entered in length units. The
ETABS default for this item is 48 inches in English units
or 1 meter in metric units. See the section titled "The
ETABS Nudge Feature" in Chapter 9 for more informa-
tion.
• Screen selection tolerance: When clicking on an object

to select it your mouse pointer must be within this dis-
tance of the object to select it. This item is entered in
pixels. The screen selection tolerance has no affect on
selection by windowing. The ETABS default for this
item is 3 pixels.
Note: • Screen snap to tolerance: When using the snap features

in ETABS your mouse pointer must be within this dis-
A pixel is the
smallest
tance of a snap location to snap to it. This item is entered
graphic unit in pixels. The ETABS default for this item is 12 pixels.
(dot) that can
•
be displayed on
the screen. A
Screen line thickness: This parameter controls the
thickness of lines on the screen. All lines are affected 18
typical screen except for the bounding plane line. The thickness is en-
resolution is tered in pixels. This item has no affect on text fonts. It
1024 pixels by also does not affect the aerial view. The ETABS default
768 pixels. for this item is 1 pixel.
• Printer line thickness: This parameter controls the

thickness of lines and fonts that are output to the printer.
All lines are affected. The thickness is entered in pixels.
The ETABS default for this item is 4 pixels.
Note: • Maximum graphic font size: The default text font size
used in ETABS is determined based on the average story
In printing a
point is a unit
height of your model. As you zoom into your model the
of type equal to font size becomes proportionately larger. However the
0.01384 inch or font size is never made larger than the specified maxi-
approximately mum graphic font size. The maximum graphic font size
1
72 inch.
is entered in points. The ETABS default for this item is
12 points.
Preferences 18 - 3
Figure 18-1: x1 x2
y2
Example of pan
Edge of
margin window
y1
Edge of pan
margin
a) Illustration showing a 100% pan b) Illustration showing that a 100%

margin pan margin covers nine times the
area of the window
This font size does not apply to the grid line identifica-
tion labels whose size is determined by the specified size
of the bubble.
• Minimum graphic font size: The default text font size

used in ETABS is determined based on the average story
height of your model. As you zoom out of your model
18 the font size becomes proportionately smaller. However
the font size is never made smaller than the specified
minimum graphic font size. The minimum graphic font
size is entered in points. The ETABS default for this
item is 3 points. In some cases you may need to increase
this minimum font size to be able to read what is on your
screen.
This font size does not apply to the grid line identifica-
tion labels whose size is determined by the specified size
of the bubble.
Tip: • Pan margin: This is the distance beyond the edge of a
Do not make view that you can pan. It is entered as a percent of the
your pan mar- window size. The ETABS default for this item is 50%.
gin too large. It This is a recommended value.
will eat up all
of your com- See Figure 18-1 an example of the pan margin. In the
puter's memory. figure the window is shown shaded. Figure 18-1a shows
The default an example of 100% pan margin. Note that the dimen-
value of 50% is sion x2 is equal to 100% of x1 and similarly y2 is equal
normally ade- to 100% of y1. Figure 18-1b illustrates that setting the
quate.
pan margin to 100% allows you to potentially cover nine
18 - 4 Preferences
times more screen area than when the pan margin is set
to 0%. If the pan margin is set to 0% you can not pan.
Note that setting the pan margin to 100% also requires

nine times more memory than when the pan margin is
set to 0% because nine times more screen area must be
saved in memory! Thus you need to be very careful with
this control or you may use up all of your available
memory and have a difficult time getting your ETABS
model to run.
See the subsection titled "Pan Feature" under the section

titled "Viewing Tools Available in ETABS" in Chapter
10 for additional information on panning.
• Auto zoom step: This is the size of the step used for the
View menu > Zoom In One Step command and the
View menu > Zoom Out One Step command as well as
their associated toolbar buttons on the main (top) tool-
bar. This parameter is entered in percent. The magnifi-
cation of all objects in a view are increased or decreased
by this percent. The ETABS default for this item is 10%. 18
See the subsection titled "Zoom Features" under the sec-
tion titled "Viewing Tools Available in ETABS" in
Chapter 10 for additional information on the auto zoom
step.
Note: • Shrink factor: When you shrink the objects in a view

The shrink
using the Shrink Object Toggle button, , located on
factor typically the main (top) toolbar all line objects are shrunk by this
only applies to specified percentage. The ETABS default for this item is
line objects, not 70%. Note that you can also shrink objects by selecting
area objects. the View menu > Set Building View Options com-
mand, or its associated button on the main toolbar, and
checking the Object Shrink check box in the Special Ef-
fects area of the Set Building View Options dialog box.
Typically area objects are not shrunk by this percentage.

Instead they are shrunk by a set number of pixels that is
built into the program. In the unusual case where
shrinking the area object by the set number of pixels
causes it to become an illegal object (because an edge
Preferences 18 - 5
has zero length) the area object reverts to using the per-
centage specified here.
The Reset Defaults button resets all of the dimension and toler-
ance values to their ETABS default values.
Output Decimals
Click the Options menu > Preferences > Output Decimals
command to bring up the Preferences dialog box where you can
specify preferences for the number of decimal places desired in
the numeric output for various items. You can control the num-
ber of decimal places for the following types of items:
• Displacements: These are translational displacements

which are reported in the current length units (e.g.,
inches). The ETABS default for displacements is four
decimal places.
• Rotations: These are output rotations which are always

18 reported in radians. The ETABS default for rotations is
five decimal places.
• Forces: These are reported in the current force units

(e.g., kips). The ETABS default for forces is two deci-
mal places.
• Moments: These are reported in the current force-length

units (e.g., kip-inch). The ETABS default for moments is
three decimal places.
• Forces per length: These are reported in the current

force/length units (e.g., kip/inch). The ETABS default
for forces per length is three decimal places.
• Moments per length: These are reported in the current

force-length/length units (e.g., kip-inch/inch). The
ETABS default for moments per length is three decimal
places.
• Stresses: These are reported in the current force/length2

units (e.g., kip/inch2 also known as ksi). The ETABS de-
fault for stresses is three decimal places.
18 - 6 Preferences
• Lengths: These are reported in the current length units

(e.g., inches). The ETABS default for lengths is three
decimal places.
• Rebar areas: These are reported in the current length2

units (e.g., inches2). The ETABS default for rebar areas
is three decimal places.
• Dimension line text: Here you have the option to report

the dimensions decimal form in the current length units
(e.g., inches) or in feet and inches. If you elect to report
the dimensions in feet and inches then you have the fur-
ther option of reporting to either the nearest 1/8 inch or
1/16 inch. The ETABS default for dimension line text is
feet and inches if your database units are English or in
decimal form in the current units to two decimal places
if your database units are Metric. See Chapter 20 for dis-
cussion of the database units.
To modify any of the output decimal preferences simply enter

the number of decimal places desired in the edit box next to each
of these items in the Preferences dialog box. 18
The Reset Defaults button resets all of the output decimal values
to their ETABS default values. It also sets the dimension line
text to decimal form, not feet and inches.
If the ETABS defaults do not work well for the units that you
typically use then you can set your own output decimal prefer-
ences in a .edb file that you use for model initialization. Note
that if you do this the Reset Defaults button resets the values to
the built-in ETABS defaults, not the values that were in your
initialization file. See the section titled "Starting a New Model"
in Chapter 8 for more information on the initialization file.
Reinforcement Bar Sizes
Overview
You can define the reinforcing bar (rebar) name, diameter and
area in the Reinforcing Bar Sizes dialog box. To access this dia-
log box click the Options menu > Preferences > Reinforce-
ment Bar Sizes command.
Preferences 18 - 7
The ETABS default reinforcing bars include the following:
• ASTM standard bar sizes: #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8,
#9, #10, #11, #14, and #18.
• ASTM metric bar sizes: 10M, 15M, 20M, 25M, 30M,

35M, 45M and 55M.
• European (metric) bar sizes: 6φ, 8φ, 10φ, 12φ, 14φ,

16φ, 20φ, 25φ, 26φ and 28φ.
You can change the bar ID, area or diameter for any of these re-
inforcing bars, you can add additional reinforcing bar definitions.
You can also delete reinforcing bar definitions, including the de-
fault ones as long as they are not being used somewhere by the
program.
The reinforcing bar data is used in the following locations of the

program:
• The reinforcing bar data is used to define reinforcing

18 steel in concrete column frame sections in the Rein-
forcement Data dialog box. To access this dialog box
click the Define menu > Frame Sections command,
highlight a concrete beam section (e.g., CSEC1), click
the Modify/Show Property button, click the Rein-
forcement button and select the Column tab in the Rein-
forcement Data dialog box. In this instance ETABS uses
the specified area of the bar.
• The reinforcing bar data is used to define reinforcing

steel in the Section Designer utility. Section Designer is
used to define wall pier sections and unusual frame sec-
tions. In this instance ETABS uses both the specified
area of the bar and the diameter of the bar. The diameter
is used to determine the location of the center of the bar
when the face of the bar is aligned at a certain cover.
To access Section Designer for defining wall pier sec-

tions select a defined wall pier, click the Design menu >
Shear Wall Design > Assign Pier Sections for
Checking command, click the Add Pier Section button,
fill in the Pier Section Data dialog box and click the Sec-
18 - 8 Preferences
tion Designer button. See the Shear Wall Design Man-

ual for more information.
To access Section Designer for frame sections click the

Define menu > Frame Sections command, click Add
SD Section in the Add drop-down box, fill in the SD
Section Data dialog box and click the OK button. See
the section titled "Adding Frame Section Properties us-
ing Section Designer" in Chapter 11 for more informa-
tion.
Reinforcing Bar Sizes Dialog Box

The following bullet items describe how to modify the bar sizes
shown in the Reinforcing Bar Sizes dialog box.
Note: • To add a new bar: Type the bar ID, area and diameter
in the Bar ID, Bar Area and Bar Diameter edit boxes lo-
You can define
cated at the top of the Rebar area. Be sure to enter the
your own rebar
sizes if desired. area and the diameter in the current units. Click the Add
New Bar Size button. If desired make other additions,
changes or deletions in the dialog box. Click the OK 18
button.
• To change a bar ID, area or diameter: Click on the

bar ID that you want to change in the Rebar area of the
dialog box. Note that the data for the bar is highlighted
and that it appears in the edit boxes at the top of the Re-
bar area. Modify the bar ID, area and diameter as desired
in the Bar ID, Bar Area and Bar Diameter edit boxes. Be
sure to enter the area and the diameter in the current
units. Click the Change Bar Size button. If desired
make other additions, changes or deletions in the dialog
box. Click the OK button.
• To delete a bar: Click on the bar ID that you want to

delete in the Rebar area of the dialog box. Note that the
data for the bar is highlighted and that it appears in the
edit boxes at the top of the Rebar area. Click the Delete
Bar button. If desired make other additions, changes or
deletions in the dialog box. Click the OK button.
Preferences 18 - 9
The Reset Defaults button resets all of the area and diameter
values for the ETABS default rebar to their default values. It also
adds back in any default rebar sizes that you deleted. This button
has no affect on other user-defined rebar you may have added.
Live Load Reduction
General
Note: Click the Options menu > Preferences > Live Load Reduction
command to bring up the Live Load Reduction Factor dialog box
Live load re-
where you can specify your live load reduction preferences. Note
duction does
not apply to
that for live load to be reduced it must be defined as a reducible
floor and ramp- type live load. See the section titled "Static Load Cases" in
type area ob- Chapter 11 for more information. The following subsections de-
jects. scribe the four areas in this dialog box. Do not overlook the up-
coming subsection titled "Application Area in the Live Load Re-
duction Factor Dialog Box" that contains crucial information
about the application of live load reduction in ETABS.
18 Important Note: ETABS applies live load reduction to line ob-

jects (frames and links) and wall-type area objects only. It does
not apply live load reduction to floor-type and ramp-type area
objects; that is, the RLLF factor described in the subsection be-
low titled "Live Load Reduction Formulas" is always 1 for floor-
type and ramp-type area objects.
Method Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog Box

In the Method area of the Live Load Reduction Factor dialog
box you can choose the formula or method, if any, to be used for
live load reduction. The available options for this are described
in the following four subsections.
No Live Load Reduction

In this case no live load reduction is done even if you have de-
fined static load cases as reducible live load type load cases.
18 - 10 Preferences
Tributary Area Live Load Reduction

The tributary area live load reduction method is based on Section
1607.5 of the 1997 UBC. The basic formula used is shown in
Equation 18-1.
RLLF = 1 - 0.8(A - 150) Eqn. 18-1
where,
Tip: RLLF = The reduced live load factor for an element,

unitless. The RLLF is multiplied times the unre-
You can over-
duced live load to get the reduced live load.
write the RLLF
factor on an A = Tributary area for the element, ft2. If A does not
element by ele-
ment basis in
exceed 150 ft2 then no live load reduction is used.
the design See the subsection below titled "Tributary Area"
overwrites. for more information.
The RLLF factor can not be less than the minimum factor de-
scribed in the section below titled "Minimum Factor Area in the
Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog Box." 18
Note that no check is done to limit the RLLF based on Equation
7-2 in Section 1607.5 of the 1997 UBC.
Influence Area Live Load Reduction

The influence area live load reduction method is based on Sec-
tion 4.8.1 of the ASCE 7-95 Standard. The basic formula used is
æ 15 ö÷
RLLF = ç 0.25 + Eqn. 18-2
ç A I ÷ø
è
where,
RLLF = The reduced live load factor for an element,

duced live load to get the reduced live load.
AI = Influence area for the element, ft2. The influence

area for a column is taken as four times the tribu-
Preferences 18 - 11
tary area. The influence area for a beam, brace or

wall is taken as two times the tributary area. See
the subsection below titled "Tributary Area" for
more information.
The RLLF factor is limited to a minimum value as described in

the section below titled "Minimum Factor Area in the Live Load
Reduction Factor Dialog Box."
User-Defined Live Load Reduction

The user-defined live load reduction method is similar to that de-
scribed in Section 1607.5 of the 1997 UBC. The basic formula
used is shown in Equation 18-3.
RLLF = 1 - r (A - Amin) Eqn. 18-3
where,
RLLF = The reduced live load factor for an element,

18 duced live load to get the reduced live load.
r = Rate of live load reduction, 1/length2. The default

value is 0.08 in 1/ft2 units.
A = Tributary area for the element or reaction, length2.

If A does not exceed Amin then no live load reduc-
tion is used. See the subsection below titled
"Tributary Area" for more information.
Amin = User specified minimum tributary area for the

element or reaction, length2. The default for this
item is 150 ft2.
The RLLF factor is limited to a minimum value as described in

the section below titled "Minimum Factor Area in the Live Load
Reduction Factor Dialog Box."
18 - 12 Preferences
Minimum Factor Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor

Dialog Box
Two minimum reduced live load factors (RLLF in the subsec-
tions above) are specified. One applies to elements receiving
load from one story level only and the other applies to elements
receiving load from more than one story level. Default values are
provided for these minimum reduced live load factors or you can
specify your own values.
The default values for the minimum reduced live load factors for
the three different live load reduction methods are:
• Tributary area method: 0.6 for element with load from

only one story level and 0.4 for elements with load from
more than one story level.
• Influence area method: 0.5 for element with load from

only one story level and 0.4 for elements with load from
Note: more than one story level.
Live loads are • User-defined method: 0.6 for element with load from 18
not reduced for only one story level and 0.4 for elements with load from
basic analysis
more than one story level.
output. Re-
duced live
loads are only
used for deter-
Application Area in the Live Load Reduction Factor Dialog
mining design Box
forces in the Important Note: In ETABS the live load is currently only re-
design postpro- duced for design forces that are used in the ETABS design post-
cessors. processors. Live loads are not reduced in the basic analysis out-
put even if the live load is specified as a reducible-type live load
when the static load case is defined and live load reduction is en-
abled in the preferences. Thus when live load reduction is en-
abled it is possible that you will see different live load forces for
the exact same item in the basic analysis output and the design
output because the live load is only reduced in the design output.
Again, in the analysis output it is unreduced.
Preferences 18 - 13
The Application area of the Live Load Reduction Factor dialog

box reinforces the above important note. The only application
available in the area is Design Forces. You can not make any
changes in this area. If you do not want live load reduction to
apply to your design forces in the design postprocessors then se-
lect the No Live load Reduction option in the Method area of the
dialog box.
Note:
For columns,
the live load Application to Columns Area in the Live Load Reduction Fac-
reduction can tor Dialog Box
be specified to
apply to the For columns, the live load reduction can be specified to apply to
axial load only the axial load only or to all force components. By default
or to all force ETABS assumes only the axial load component of columns re-
components. ceives the specified live load reduction. This is useful when you
want to reduce the axial live load but not the moment due to live
load in the column.
Tributary Area
18 ETABS calculates the tributary area for a frame, shell or link
element from the floor-type and/or ramp-type area objects that
load the element. If no floor-type and/or ramp-type area object
loads a particular element then the tributary area for that element
is calculated as zero by ETABS.
Note that live load reduction can be overwritten on an element

by element basis in each of the design postprocessors.
Colors
You can control the colors used for display of various items and
for color-coding of output stress ratio ranges by using the Op-
tions menu > Colors command. You can separately specify col-
ors to be used for screen display, color printer graphical output
and non-color printer graphical output. The following two sub-
sections discuss display colors and output colors.
18 - 14 Colors
Display Colors
Click the Options menu > Colors > Display command to bring
up the Assign Display Colors dialog box where you can set the
Note: display colors for various items in your model. The following
bullet items discuss the areas in this dialog box.
The color of
Null-type area • Click to Change Color: In this area you can left click
and line objects on any of the color boxes to change the display color for
is controlled by
the Background
the associated item. Following is a list of items for
item. which you can change the display color.
ü Columns: These are column-type line objects.
ü Beams: These are beam-type line objects.
ü Braces: These are brace-type line objects.
ü Links: These are the color of the link element sym-

bol. When a link property is assigned to a line object
18
Note: the entire line object is not shown in this color. Only
the link element symbol attached to the line object is
The color of the in this color.
bounding plane
line (cyan) is ü Walls: These are wall-type area objects. The color
built into the
applies to the object edges and fill color.
program. You
can not change
ü Floor: These are floor-type area objects. The color
this. You can
however use the
applies to the object edges and fill color.
View menu >
ü Ramp: These are wall-type area objects. The color
Set Building
View Options applies to the object edges and fill color.
command, or
the Set Build- ü Openings: These are area objects that are designated
ing View Op- as openings. The color applies to the object edges
tions button on and crossing lines. Note that openings are never
the main (top) filled, even when the Object Fill box is checked in
toolbar, to turn the Set Building View Options dialog box.
off the bound-
ing plane line. ü Springs: This is the color of the spring symbol. This
item also controls the color of restraints (supports).
Colors 18 - 15
ü Text: This is the color of all of the text including

grid line ID's. It also controls the color of dimension
lines and the global axes. In addition it controls the
color of dots used to show point objects when in a
"Shrink Object" mode, end releases and nonlinear
hinges. It also controls the color of the thickened line
showing end offsets along the length of a frame
member.
ü Grid Lines: This is the default color of grid lines

and grid line bubbles. It can be overwritten on a grid
line by grid line basis using the Edit menu > Edit
Grid command. See the section titled "Editing Co-
ordinate System Grid Line Data" in Chapter 9 for
more information.
This item also controls the color of reference planes

and reference lines.
ü Background: This is the background color. This

item indirectly controls the color of null-type line
18 objects, null-type area objects, and diaphragm extent
lines because they are displayed in the opposite color
from the background color.
• Device Type: Here you indicate whether the colors you

are specifying are for screen display, output to a non-
color printer or output to a color printer. Note that you
can specify different display colors for each of these
three device types.
• Darkness: This item controls the variation of color (in-

tensity of shading) when extruded shapes are displayed.
The darkness value can range from 0 to 1. A darkness
value of 0 means there is no variation of color and the
extruded shape will not really be distinguishable. A
darkness value of 1 gives the maximum variation of
color. The default value is 0.3. This value works well in
most instances.
18 - 16 Colors
Note that you can click the View menu > Set Building
View Options command, or the Set Building View Op-
tions button on the main (top) toolbar, to access the Set
Building View Options dialog box and toggle the display
of extruded shapes on or off.
• Reset Defaults button: This button resets the colors to

the built-in ETABS default colors. The Reset Defaults
button not only resets the colors for the currently chosen
device type, it resets the colors for all three device types,
regardless of which one is currently chosen.
Output Colors
Click the Options menu > Colors > Output command to bring
up the Assign Output Colors dialog box where you can set the
display colors for various output items. The following bullet
items discuss the areas in this dialog box.
• Contours: In this area you can specify ten different col-

ors which are used to display shell stress contours. 18
In addition, some of the colors in the Contours area are
used to show the hinge state (B, IO, LS, CP, C, D or E)
when displaying the deformed shape of a static nonlinear
B
analysis. The color boxes used for this are shown in the
IO sketch to the left. Documentation of nonlinear static
LS analysis is beyond the scope of this manual.
CP
C • Steel Ratios: In this area you can specify the colors that
D frame elements are displayed in when you display results
E from either the Steel Frame Design or the Composite
Beam Design postprocessor on the model. You also
specify the range of values to which the colors apply.
Note the following about the steel ratios:
ü The five values used to define the stress ranges must

always be input in increasing numerical order. The
largest value defining the range does not necessarily
have to be 1.0. It can be larger or smaller.
Colors 18 - 17
ü Any frame element that does not have its Design

Procedure the same as the design postprocessor that
is currently displaying the results is shown in a color
that is opposite of the background color. See the
section titled "Right Click information for Line Ob-
jects" in Chapter 24 for discussion of the Design
Procedure.
ü Any frame element with the correct Design Proce-

dure which has not yet been designed is displayed in
the "Not Yet Designed" color.
ü In some cases a frame element with the correct De-

sign Procedure may not have a stress ratio calculated
when it is run through the design postprocessor. One
example where this will happen is in the Steel Frame
Design postprocessor when the axial stress for the
element exceeds the Euler buckling stress. In such
cases the element is displayed in the color associated
with the highest range of stress values (i.e., the color
18 of the fifth box down counting from the top).
• Diagram Fill: In this area you specify the colors used

for filling force diagrams for frame elements. Three col-
ors are specified here. They are colors for positive val-
ues, colors for negative values and colors for ranges of
values.
The positive and negative color are simply based on the

sign of the output force value (axial force, shear, torsion
or moment). The range color is used when plotting the
results of multi-valued load combinations. Consider the
filled moment diagrams for a beam element in a rigid
frame that are shown in Figure 18-2. (Note that these
diagrams are plotted with positive values on the tension
side of the element.)
Figure 18-2a shows the moment diagram for a load case

designated 1 which is gravity load. Figure 18-2b shows
the moment diagram for a load case designated 2 which
is a lateral load. Figure 18-2c shows the moment dia-
gram for a load combination designated 1. This load
combination is created as an add-type load combination
18 - 18 Colors
Figure 18-2:
Example of diagram
Neg.
fill colors where the Neg.
diagrams are plotted
with positive values a) Moment Diagram
on the tension side of for Load Case 1
the element
Pos.
Neg.
b) Moment Diagram
for Load Case 2
Pos.
Neg.
Neg. c) Moment Diagram for

Load Combination 1
(Add-type load combination that
includes load cases 1 and 2)
Pos.
Range 18
Range
d) Moment Diagram for
Load Combination 2
Pos. (Envelope-type load combination
Neg. Neg. that includes load cases 1 and load
combination 1)
and it adds the results of load case 1 and load case 2. See
the subsection titled "Types of Load Combinations" in
Chapter 27 for more information. Note how the fill col-
ors are different for positive and negative moment in
these moment diagrams.
Figure 18-2d shows the moment diagram for a load

combination designated 2. This load combination is cre-
ated as an envelope-type load combination. The combi-
nation shows the envelope of load case 1 and load com-
bination 1, that is, it shows the range of values, from
maximum to minimum, of all load cases and load com-
binations that are included in the envelope-type load
Colors 18 - 19
combination. As shown in Figure 18-2d this range is

displayed in a different color that you can specify.
• Device Type: Here you indicate whether the colors you

are specifying are for screen display, output to a non-
color printer or output to a color printer. Note that you
can specify different display colors for each of these
three device types.
• Reset Defaults button: This button resets the colors to

the built-in ETABS default colors. The Reset Defaults
button not only resets the colors for the currently chosen
device type, it resets the colors for all three device types,
regardless of which one is currently chosen.
Other Option Items

This section describes each of the other option items that are
available on the Options menu.
18
Windows
Tip: You can display your model in from one to four windows. A dif-
ferent view can be displayed in each window. Use the Options
You can display
menu > Windows command at any time to specify the number
your model in
from one to
of windows that you want to use.
four windows.
Each window
As a shortcut if you want to close a window you can click on the
can display a X in the upper right hand corner of the window. The remaining
completely dif- windows will automatically resize. You can not use this method
ferent view. to close the last window.
Startup Tips
When you first open ETABS the Startup Tips may appear. You
can toggle whether these tips appear on and off using the Op-
tions menu > Show Tips at Startup command.
Note that the option you choose for this is saved in the
ETABS.ini file in your Windows Or WinNT directory. If this file
is deleted or moved your Tips option is lost and the program de-
faults back to showing the tips.
18 - 20 Other Option Items

Important Note: When you first start the ETABS graphical in-
terface the Startup Tips appear. You do not have to click the OK
button associated with the tip or click the "X" button in the upper
right hand corner of the tip window to continue. Simply left
clicking anywhere in the entire ETABS window closes the Tip of
the Day window. For example, as soon as you start the ETABS
graphical interface you can immediately click on the file menu
and the Startup Tips window closes and the File menu appears.
Bounding Plane
You can toggle the bounding plane feature on and off using the
Options menu > Show Bounding Plane command. When this
feature is active a cyan line appears in some views showing you
the location of a currently active plan or elevation view. For ex-
ample, if a plan view is currently active and a three-dimensional
view is also showing, then a cyan bounding plane appears in the
three-dimensional view around the story level associated with
the plan view. As a second example, if an elevation (or devel-
oped elevation) view is currently active and a plan view is also
showing then a cyan line appears in the plan view showing the 18
location of the elevation.
Table 18-1 lists the circumstances where the bounding plane

(line) appears.
Table 18-1: Window You Are

Circumstances Working In (i.e., Another Visible Bounding Plane
where bounding Active Window) Window or Line Visible?
plane (line) appears Plan No
Plan Elevation No
3D Yes
Plan Yes
Elevation Elevation No
3D Yes
Plan No
3D Elevation No
3D No
Other Option Items 18 - 21

Moment Diagrams on Tension Side

You have the option of plotting moment diagrams for frame
elements with positive values on the tension side of the member
or on the compression side of the member. Click the Options
menu > Moment Diagrams on Tension Side command to tog-
gle this option one way or the other. See Figure 18-2 earlier in
this chapter for an example of moment diagrams plotted on the
tension side of a member.
Sound
Click the Options menu > Sound command to toggle the sound
produced by ETABS when it is displaying animation of de-
formed shapes and mode shapes on or off.
Lock Model
Click the Options menu > Lock Model command or the
18 Lock/Unlock Model button, , to toggle the model between
locked and unlocked. When the model is locked you can not
make any changes to it that will affect the analysis results except
as noted below.
Exception: While the model is locked you can run one

or more nonlinear static analyses.
Note: When you run an analysis ETABS automatically locks the

model. This is done to keep you from changing the model such
ETABS auto-
that your analysis results are invalidated. After you have run an
matically locks
your model
analysis, if you want to make changes to your model, then you
when you run must first unlock it. Unlocking the model deletes all of your
an analysis. analysis results. The results are deleted because once you make
changes to the model they are no longer valid.
If you want to save analysis results and make changes to your

model, then after you have run the analysis use the File menu >
Save As command to save the file with a new name. You can
then make changes to the file with the new name. The original
file remains with its results.
18 - 22 Other Option Items

Aerial View Window

Click the Options menu > Show Aerial View Window com-
mand to toggle the aerial view window on or off. You may find
the aerial view to be a convenient tool for quickly zooming into
various areas of your model. See the section titled "The ETABS
Aerial View" in Chapter 4 for more information.
Floating Property Window

Click the Options menu > Show Floating Property Window
command to toggle the floating property window on or off. The
floating property window appears when you are drawing area
and/or line objects. See the sections titled "Floating Properties of
Object Window for Line Objects" and "Floating Properties of
Object Window for Area Objects" in Chapter 12 for more infor-
mation.
Crosshairs
This toggle switch option controls whether crosshairs are visible
when you are drawing objects in plan and elevation views. In
18
plan view the crosshairs are always oriented in the global X and
Y directions. In elevation view the crosshairs are always oriented
in the horizontal and vertical directions.
Other Option Items 18 - 23

Chapter 19
The ETABS Help Menu

19
The ETABS Help File
You can click on the Help menu > Search for Help on com-
mand at any time to open the ETABS help file and get detailed,
searchable information about ETABS. One of the best ways to
enter the help file is to press the F1 key on your keyboard.
If you are in a dialog box at the time you press the F1 key then
you will jump immediately to context sensitive help for that
dialog box. If you are not in a dialog box when the F1 key is
pressed then the ETABS help file is opened just as it is when you
click the Help menu > Search for Help on command.
About ETABS
Clicking on the Help menu > About ETABS command brings
up the About ETABS dialog box that provides some useful and
important information about ETABS and about your computer.
19 - 1
When you are calling, faxing or e-mailing us for technical sup-

port or for information on product upgrades you should always
tell us the version of the program that you are using. You find
this version number by Clicking on the Help menu > About
ETABS command and reading the first (top) line on the left-
hand side of the dialog box. It will say something like "ETABS
Nonlinear Version x.xx" or "ETABS Plus Version x.xx." An ex-
ample is shown below.
In addition, when you have technical support questions that may

be related to the physical memory in your computer, or to your
computer's operating system, you should always tell us about
your computer's memory and operating system. You can find this
information in the bottom of the left-hand side of the About
ETABS dialog box. An example of this information is shown
below.
19
See Chapter 3 for more information on technical support.
19 - 2 About ETABS
References
References
ASCE, 1995
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures -

R
ASCE 7-95, American Society of Civil Engineers, New
York, New York, 1995.
BOCA, 1996
The BOCA National Building Code/1996, Building Officials

and Code Administrators International, Inc., Country Club
Hills, Illinois, 1996.
CEN, 1994
ENV 1998-1-1:1994, Eurocode 8: Design Provisions for

Earthquake Resistance of Structures - Part 1-1: General
Rules- Seismic Actions and General Requirements for
Structures, European Committee for Standardization, Brus-
sels, Belgium, 1994.
References - 1
R. W. Clough, I. P. King and E. L. Wilson, 1963
“Structural Analysis of Multistory Buildings,” Journal of the

Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 89, No. 8, 1963.
R. D. Cook, D. S. Malkus and M. E. Plesha, 1989
Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, 3rd

Edition, John Wiley & Sons,New Tork, New York, 1989.
A. K. Gupta, 1990
“Response Spectrum Method,” Blackwell Scientific Publica-

tions, Ltd., 1990.
IBC, 1997
International Building Code 2000, International Code Coun-

cil, Birmingham, Alabama, November, 1997.
NBCC, 1995
National Building Code of Canada, National Research

Council of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, 1995.
R NEHRP, 1997
NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations

for New Buildings and Other Structures (FEMA 302),
Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, D.C., 1997.
N. M. Newark and W. J. Hall, 1981
Earthquake Spectra and Design, Earthquake Engineering

Research Institute, Berkeley, California, 1982.
NZS, 1992
Code of Practice for General Structural Design and Design

Loadings for Buildings, Known as the Loadings Standard,
Standards New Zealand, Wellington, New Zealand, 1992.
References - 2
References
SEAOC, 1996
Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commen-

tary, Structural Engineers Association of California, Sacra-
mento, California, 1996.
UBC, 1994
Uniform Building Code, International Conference of Build-

ing Officials, Whittier, California, 1994.
UBC, 1997

D. W. White and J. F. Hajjar, 1991
“Application of Second-Order Elastic Analysis in LRFD:

Research to Practice,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 28,
No. 4, pp. 133–148.
E. L. Wilson, 1993
“An Efficient Method for the Base Isolation and Energy Dis-
sipation Analysis of Structural Systems,” ATC 17-1, Pro-
R
ceedings of Seminar on Seismic Isolation, Passive Energy
Dissipation, and Active Control, Applied Technology Coun-
cil, Redwood City, California, 1993.
E. L. Wilson, 1997
Three Dimensional Dynamic Analysis of Structures with

Emphasis on Earthquake Engineering, Computers and
Structures, Berkeley, California, 1997.
E. L. Wilson and M. R. Button, 1982
“Three Dimensional Dynamic Analysis for Multicomponent

Earthquake Spectra,” Earthquake Engineering and Struc-
tural Dynamics, Vol. 10.
References - 3
E. L. Wilson, H. H. Dovey and A. Habibullah, 1981a
“Theoretical Basis for CTABS80: A Computer Program for

Three-Dimensional Analysis of Building Systems,” Techni-
cal Report K-81-2, Computers/Structures International,
Oakland, California, 1981.
E. L. Wilson and A. Ibrahimbegovic 1989
“Simple Numerical Algorithms for the Mode Superposition

Analysis of Linear Structural Systems with Nonproportional
Damping,” Computers and Structures, Vol. 33, No. 2, 1989.
E. L. Wilson, A. D. Kiureghian and E. Bayo, 1981b
“A Replacement for the SRSS Method in Seismic Analysis,”

Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Vol. 9,
1981.
E. L. Wilson and I. J. Tetsuji, 1983
“An Eigensolution Strategy for Large Systems,” Computers

and Structures, Vol. 16.
R E. L. Wilson, M. W. Yuan, and J. M. Dickens, 1982
“Dynamic Analysis by Direct Superposition of Ritz Vec-

tors,” Earthquake En-gineering and Structural Dynamics,
Vol. 10, pp. 813–823.
References - 4
Index
Note: Page numbers are reported as X-n where X is the Chapter number and n is the page number in the chapter.
Chapters 1 through 19 are in Volume 1 and Chapters 20 through 48 are in Volume 2.
$et file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-20, 8-29, 20-4 modal, 33-2

2D view, 10-5, 10-6 nonlinear time history, 33-14, 33-17
3D view, 10-2, 10-8 nonlinear static, 33-22
p-delta, 33-18 I
A periodic time history (linear), 33-14
response spectrum (linear), 33-12
acceleration loads, 33-11 ritz-vector, 33-8
active degrees of freedom, 15-1 analysis log file, 43-1
add to model from template, 9-7 analysis sections, 45-1, 45-13, 46-2, 46-10, 47-1,
additional mass 47-12, 47-13
area, 14-56 angle drawing constraint, 12-22
line, 14-38 area object, 23-1
point, 14-14 assignments to, 14-48, 23-5
aerial view window, 4-8, 18-23 drawing, 12-9
align points, lines and edges, 9-20, 9-29 right click information, 23-6
Analyze menu commands type, 23-2
Set Analysis Options, 15-1 Assign menu commands
Run Analysis, 15-8 Joint/Point
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis, 15-9 Rigid Diaphragm, 14-2
analysis, types Panel Zone, 14-3
eigenvector, 33-3 Restraints (Supports), 14-9
linear elastic static, 33-2 Point Springs, 14-10
linear time history, 33-14 Link Properties, 14-13
Additional Point Mass, 14-14
Index-1
ETABS User’s Manual – Volume 1
Frame/Line automatic seismic loads

Frame Section, 14-22 1994 UBC, 28-6
Frame Releases/Partial Fixity, 14-23 1995 NBCC (Canadian), 28-21
Frame Rigid Offsets, 14-24 1996 BOCA, 28-17
Frame Output Stations, 14-28 1997 NEHRP, 28-30
Local Axes, 14-29 1997 UBC, 28-10
Frame Property Modifiers, 14-31 1997 UBC isolated, 28-14
Link Properties, 14-32 IBC2000, 28-25
Frame Nonlinear Hinges, 14-32 user defined, 28-36
Pier Label, 14-34 automatic wind loads
Spandrel Label, 14-35 1994 UBC, 29-6
Line Springs, 14-36 1995 NBCC (Canadian), 29-14
Additional Line Mass, 14-38 1996 BOCA, 29-11
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh, 14-39 1997 UBC, 29-8
Shell/Area ASCE 7-95, 29-16
Wall/Slab/Deck Section, 14-48 user defined, 29-19
Opening, 14-49 avi file, 8-26
Rigid Diaphragm, 14-49 axes, 10-15, 21-2
Local Axes, 14-50
Shell Stiffness Modifiers, 14-51 B
Pier Label, 14-52
Spandrel Label, 14-53 beams, secondary, 8-10, 12-6
Area Springs, 14-54 black objects on white background, 10-18, 44-2
I Additional Area Mass, 14-56
Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh,
bounding plane, 18-3, 18-21
breaking (dividing, meshing) line objects, 9-35
14-57 buckling, 33-20, 33-21
Joint/Point Loads
Force, 14-16 C
Ground Displacement, 14-18
Temperature, 14-20 Cancel button, 4-14
Frame/Line Loads center of rigidity, 41-12
Point, 14-40 charts
Distributed, 14-42 response spectrum function, 11-29
Temperature, 14-46 response spectrum curve from time history re-
Shell/Area Loads sults, 16-29
Temperature, 14-60 time history function, 11-38
Uniform Surface, 14-58 time history trace, 16-34
Group Names, 14-63 clear display of assignments, 14-64
Clear Display of Assigns, 14-64 codes, building
auto merge tolerance (preference), 18-2 1992 NZS 4203 (New Zealand), 11-37
auto relabel all, 23-5 1994 UBC, 11-34, 28-6, 29-6
auto select list, 11-11, 24-1 1995 NBCC (Canada), 11-35, 28-21, 29-14
auto zoom step (preference), 18-5 1996 BOCA, 11-35, 28-17, 29-11
1997 NEHRP, 11-36, 28-30
Index-2
Index
1997 UBC, 11-34, 28-10, 28-14, 29-8 Section Cuts, 11-27

1998 Eurocode 8, 11-37 Response Spectrum Functions, 11-29
ASCE 7-95, 29-16 Time History Functions, 11-38
IBC2000, 11-36, 28-25 Static Load Cases, 11-46
colors Response Spectrum Cases, 11-50
display colors, 18-15 Time History Cases, 11-56
frame element steel stress ratio colors, 18-17 Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases, 11-63
object fill colors, 10-18, 18-15 Load Combinations, 11-63
output colors, 18-17 Mass Source, 11-64
shell element stress contour colors, 18-17 deformed shape, display, 16-7
view model by element or group colors, 10-17 deleting objects, 9-7
comments, user, 8-29 deleting a story level, 9-18
composite beam design process, 47-3 deselect, 13-6
concrete frame design process, 46-4 Design menu commands
constraints Steel Frame Design
drawing, 12-21 Select Design Group, 45-7
rigid diaphragm, 14-2, 14-49, 23-9, 23-16, 25-5 Select Design Combo, 45-8
control key (Ctrl), 4-9, 4-10 View/Revise Overwrites, 45-8
cookie cut meshing tools, 31-3 Set Lateral Displacement Targets, 45-9
coordinate systems, 21-1 Start Design/Check of Structure, 45-10
copying geometry, 9-2 Interactive Steel Frame Design, 45-11
create a new model, 4-11, 6-1, 8-1 Display Design Info, 45-11
crosshairs, 18-23 Make Auto Select Section Null, 45-11
coupled springs, 14-12
cumulative center of mass, 41-12
Change Design Section, 45-12
Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 45-13 I
current units, 20-3 Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 45-13
Reset All Steel Overwrites, 45-14
D Delete Steel Design Results, 45-14
Concrete Frame Design
damping Select Design Combo, 46-7
in link elements, 11-27 View/Revise Overwrites, 46-7
modal, 11-27, 11-50, 33-15 Start Design/Check of Structure, 46-8
database, Microsoft Access, 8-26, 42-1 Interactive Concrete Frame Design, 46-8
database, section properties, 11-7 Display Design Info, 46-9
database units, 20-4 Change Design Section, 46-9
decimal places (preference), 18-6 Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 46-10
deck span direction, 14-49, 32-14 Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 46-10
default.edb file, 6-5, 8-2 Reset All Concrete Overwrites, 46-11
Define menu commands Delete Concrete Design Results, 46-11
Material Properties, 11-1 Composite Beam Design
Frame Sections, 11-6 Select Design Group, 47-7
Wall/Slab/Deck Sections, 11-21 Select Design Combo, 47-8
Link Properties, 11-26 View/Revise Overwrites, 47-9
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties, 11-27 Start Design/Check of Structure, 47-10
Index-3
Interactive Composite Beam Design, 47-10 Show Loads

Display Design Info, 47-11 Joint/Point, 16-2
Make Auto Select Section Null, 47-11 Frame/Line, 16-3
Change Design Section, 47-11 Shell/Area, 16-5
Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 47-12 Set Input Table Mode, 16-6
Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 47-13 Show Deformed Shape, 16-7
Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites, 47-13 Show Mode Shape, 16-12
Delete Composite Beam Design Results, Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram
47-13 Support/Spring Reactions, 16-14
Shear Wall Design Frame/Pier/Spandrel Forces, 16-17
Select Design Combo, 48-11 Shell Stresses/Forces, 16-20
View/Revise Pier Overwrites, 48-12 Link Forces, 16-26
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites, 48-15 Show Energy Diagram, 16-27
Define Pier Sections for Checking, 48-17 Show Response Spectrum Curves, 16-29
Assign Pier Sections for Checking, 48-17 Show Time History Traces, 16-34
Start Design/Check of Structure, 48-17 Show Static Pushover Curve, 16-39
Interactive Wall Design, 48-17 Show Section Cut Forces, 16-39
Display Design Info, 48-18 Set Output Table Mode, 16-40
Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites, 48-19 divide lines, 9-35
Delete Wall Design Results, 48-19 Draw menu commands
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure, 17-2 Select Object, 12-1
design postprocessors, 6-5, 6-6, 6-9, 17-1, 24-2 Reshape Object, 9-37
design procedure, 17-2, 24-7 Draw Point Objects, 12-3
I design process
composite beam design, 47-3
Draw Line Objects
Draw Lines (Plan, Elev, 3D), 12-4
concrete frame design, 46-4 Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (Plan,
shear wall design, 48-8 Elev, 3D), 12-5
steel frame design, 45-3 Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (Plan),
design sections, 45-1, 45-13, 46-2, 46-10, 47-1, 12-6
47-12, 47-13 Create Secondary Beams in Region or at
developed elevation, 6-6, 10-7, 10-9, 12-11, 12-12 Clicks (Plan), 12-6
diaphragm, rigid Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (Elev),
assign to area object, 14-49 12-7
assign to point objects, 14-2 Draw Area Objects
display diaphragm extent, 10-29 Draw Areas (Plan, 3D), 12-9
dimension lines, 9-40, 12-17 Draw Rectangular Areas (Plan, Elev), 12-10
dimensions, measurements, 10-15 Create Areas at Click (Plan, Elev), 12-10
dimensions, preferences, 18-2 Draw Walls (Plan), 12-10
displacement Create Walls in Region or at Click (Plan),
ground (input static load), 14-18 12-12
deformed shape (static load), 16-7 Draw Developed Elevation Definition, 12-12
Display menu commands Draw Dimension Line, 12-17
Show Undeformed Shape, 16-1 Snap to
Grid Intersections and Points, 12-18
Index-4
Index
Line Ends and Midpoints, 12-19 Move Points/Lines/Areas, 9-29

Intersections, 12-19 Expand/Shrink Areas, 9-30
Perpendicular Projections, 12-19 Merge Areas, 9-32
Lines and Edges, 12-19 Mesh Areas, 31-2
Fine Grid, 12-19 Join Lines, 9-33
Constrain Drawn Line to Divide Lines, 9-35
None, 12-22 Auto Relabel All, 23-5
Constant X, 12-21 eigenvalue, 33-3
Constant Y, 12-21 eigenvector analysis, 33-3
Constant Z, 12-21 elevation, developed, 10-7, 12-11, 12-12
Constant Angle, 12-22 elevation, story level, 8-6, 9-17
draw mode, 4-12 elevation view, 10-6
dynamic load participation ratio, 41-8 energy diagram, 16-27
dxf export, 8-24, 8-25 export options
Save Model as ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-22
E Save Model as SAP2000 .s2k Text File, 8-23
Save Story as SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-23
e2k file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-21, 8-22, 8-29, 20-3 Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File, 8-24
ebk file, 20-4 Save Story Plan as .DXF, 8-24
edb file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-2, 8-7, 8-19, 8-20, 8-22, 8-24, Save as 3D .DXF, 8-25
20-4 Save Input/Output as Access Database File,
emf file, 8-26, 44-2 8-26
earthquake load See automatic seismic loads Save Graphics as Enhanced MetaFile, 8-26
edge select mode, 9-31
Edit menu commands
expand area objects, 9-30
extend line objects, 9-25 I
Undo, 4-14
Redo, 4-14 F
Cut, 9-2
Copy, 9-2 fast restraints, 14-10
Paste, 9-2 fax number, 3-4
Delete, 9-7 File menu commands
Add to Model from Template New Model, 8-1
Add 2D Frame, 9-8 Open, 8-19
Add 3D Frame, 9-8 Save, 8-20
Replicate, 9-9 Save As, 8-20
Edit Grid Data, 9-14 Import
Edit Story Data Open ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-21
Edit, 9-17 Open ETABS6 Text File, 8-21
Insert Story, 9-17 Overwrite Story from SAFE .f2k Text File,
Delete Story, 9-18 8-22
Edit Reference Planes, 9-18 Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb File, 8-22
Edit Reference Lines, 9-18 Export
Merge Points, 9-19 Save Model as ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-22
Align Points/Lines/Edges, 9-20 Save Model as SAP2000 .s2k Text File, 8-23
Index-5
Save Story as SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-23 triangular, 11-46

Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File, 8-24 user-defined, 11-41
Save Story Plan as .DXF, 8-24 user-defined periodic, 11-41
Save as 3D .DXF, 8-25
Save Input/Output as Access Database File, G
8-26
Save Graphics as Enhanced MetaFile, 8-26 getting started
Create Video creating a model, 6-1, 8-1
Time History Animation, 8-26 installing ETABS, 2-1
Cyclic Animation, 8-27 global force balance, 43-3
Print Preview for Graphics, 8-27 graphical user interface, 4-1
Print Graphics, 8-27 grid line systems, 9-14, 21-1
Print Tables ground displacement, 14-18
Input, 8-28 groups, 14-63, 26-1
Analysis Output, 8-29 groups, designing by, 26-3
Steel Frame Design, 8-28 groups, section cuts, 26-4
Concrete Frame Design, 8-28 groups, selecting by, 13-4, 26-3
Composite Beam Design, 8-28
Shear Wall Design, 8-28 H
User Comments and Session Log, 8-29
Display Input/Output Text Files, 8-29 Help menu commands
Exit, 8-30 Search for Help on, 19-1
floating property window, 12-8, 12-12 About ETABS, 19-1
I font size, 18-3, 18-4
frame element internal forces, 35-2
height, story level, 8-6, 9-17
frame section properties, 11-6, 14-22
frequency, 33-4, 41-3
I
functions, response spectrum import options
1992 NZS 4203 (New Zealand), 11-37 Open ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-21
1994 UBC, 11-34 Open ETABS6 Text File, 8-21
1995 NBCC (Canada), 11-35 Overwrite Story from SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-22
1996 BOCA, 11-35 Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb File, 8-22
1997 NEHRP, 11-36 incremental analysis, 33-22
1997 UBC, 11-34 initial p-delta analysis, 33-18
1998 Eurocode 8, 11-37 initialization of model, 8-2
from text file, 11-30 inserting a story level, 9-17
IBC2000, 11-36 installation
user-defined, 11-32 hardware key device, 2-11
functions, time history network server, 2-5
cosine, 11-44 network workstation, 2-6
from a file, 11-38
sentinel driver, 2-9
ramp, 11-44 single user, 2-4
sawtooth, 11-45 troubleshooting, 2-14
sine, 11-43 interactive composite beam design, 47-14
Index-6
Index
interactive steel frame design, 45-14 point load, 14-40

interactive concrete frame design, 46-11 temperature load, 14-46
interactive shear wall design, 48-17 point object
intersecting line select mode, 13-3 force load, 14-16
invert selection, 13-5 ground displacement, 14-18
invisible grid for snapping, 12-19 temperature load, 14-20
loads, displaying on model
J joint/point, 16-2
frame/line, 16-3
join lines, 9-33 shell/area, 16-5
joint See point object load cases
response spectrum, 11-50, 27-4
K static, 11-46, 27-2
static nonlinear (pushover), 11-63, 27-6
keyboard commands See inside front cover time history, 11-56, 27-5
load combinations, 27-6
load transformation, 32-1
L local axes
limits, viewing, 10-10 area object, 14-50, 23-17
line objects coordinate system, 9-15, 21-4
assignments to, 14-22, 24-5 frame element, 35-1
drawing, 12-3 line object, 14-29, 24-29
right click information, 24-7 link element, 14-13, 37-2
type, 24-3
line, reference, 9-18
panel zone, 14-8
point object, 25-12 I
line thickness (preference) shell element, 36-1
printer, 18-3 section cut, 11-29, 26-6
screen, 18-3 wall pier, 38-2
linear static analysis, 33-2 wall spandrel, 38-5
link element locking model, 4-13, 18-22
assigned to line objects, 14-32 log file, 43-1
assigned to panel zones, 14-5
assigned to point objects (grounded), 14-13 M
internal deformations, 37-4
internal forces, 37-6 magnifying the view See zoom
internal nonlinear springs, 37-2 major axis, 14-30
properties, 11-26 major direction, 14-30
live load reduction, 11-47, 18-10 mass, additional
loads, assignment area, 14-56
area object line, 14-38
temperature load, 14-60 point, 14-14
uniform surface load, 14-58 mass per unit volume, 11-4
line object mass source, 11-64, 27-11
distributed load, 14-42 material property, 11-1
Index-7
maximum graphic font size (preference), 18-3 O

measurements
angle between two lines, 10-16 OK button, 4-14
perimeter and area of an area, 10-15 openings, 14-49
line length, 10-15 Options menu commands
membrane property, 11-21, 11-22, 30-1 Preferences
merge Dimensions/Tolerances, 18-2
areas, 9-32 Output Decimals, 18-6
points, 9-19 Reinforcement Bar Sizes, 18-7
tolerance, 9-19, 18-2 Live Load Reduction, 18-10
mesh areas Colors
automatic, 30-1 Display, 18-15
manual, 31-1 Output, 18-17
mesh line objects See divide lines Windows, 18-20
Microsoft Access See database, Microsoft Access Show Tips at Startup, 18-20
Microsoft Excel See spreadsheet, copying ge- Show Bounding Plane, 18-21
ometry to and from Moment Diagrams on Tension Side, 18-22
minimum graphic font size (preference), 18-4 Sound, 18-22
minor axis, 14-30 Lock Model, 18-22
minor direction, 14-30 Show Aerial View Window, 18-23
modal analysis, 33-2 Show Floating Property Window, 18-23
modal direction factors, 41-5 Show Crosshairs, 18-23
modal effective mass factors, 41-5 output
I modal participation factors, 41-4
modal periods and frequencies, 41-3
conventions, 34-1, 35-1, 36-1, 37-1, 38-1, 39-1,
41-13
mode shapes, 16-12, 41-3 decimals (preferences), 18-6
modifiers display colors, 18-15
frame property, 14-31 displayed on screen, 16-1
shell stiffness, 14-51 onscreen output tables, 16-6, 16-40
modulus printed to printer or file, 8-27
shear, 11-3 stations, 14-28
Young's, 11-2 out file, 43-3
mouse, using, 4-9 overlapping area objects, 23-15
moving objects, 9-29 overturning moments, 41-13
overwrite frame design procedure, 17-2
N
P
nonlinear
frame hinge properties (pushover), 11-27 pan, 10-13
link properties, 11-26, 37-2 pan margin (preference), 18-4
static analysis (pushover), 33-22 panel zone
time history analysis, 33-17 assignments, 14-3
nsrvgx.exe, 2-13 displacements, 34-3
nudging objects, 9-42 internal deformations, 34-4
Index-8
Index
internal forces, 34-5 refresh window, 10-14

p-delta analysis, 33-18 reinforcing
period, 41-3 bar sizes (preference), 18-7
perspective view, 10-8 beam, 11-17
phone number, 3-4 column, 11-19
piers relabeling objects, 23-5
labels, 14-34, 14-52, 48-1 replicating objects, 9-9
output forces, 16-17, 38-4 reshaper tool, 9-37
plan fine grid spacing (preference), 18-2 residual mass modes, 33-7
plan nudge value (preference), 18-3 response spectrum analysis, 33-12
plane response spectrum analysis output
bounding, 18-21 damping and accelerations, 41-10
reference, 9-18 modal amplitudes, 41-11
plate bending, 11-22 base reactions, 41-11
point object response spectrum curve
assignments to, 14-1, 25-3 from time history analysis results, 16-29
drawing, 12-3 input function, 11-29
on top of another point object, 25-12 restore previous selection, 13-5
output conventions, 34-1 restraints, 14-9
right click information, 25-3 right click
polyline, 24-31 on area object, 23-6
preferences, 18-1 on line object, 24-7
print on point object, 25-3
graphics, 8-27
preview, 8-27
right hand rule, 23-18
rigid diaphragm assignment I
tables, 8-28 to area object, 14-49
to point objects, 14-2
Q ritz-vector analysis, 33-8
rotate 3D view, 10-5
quadrilaterals, drawing See Draw menu com- rubber band line, 12-4, 12-11, 13-3
mands rubber band window, 12-3, 12-5, 12-6, 12-7, 12-12,
quick keys See inside front cover 13-2
quitting ETABS, 8-30
S
R
saving model, 8-20
reactions, 16-14, 34-2 screen selection tolerance (preference), 18-3
readme.txt, 2-5 screen snap to tolerance (preference), 18-3
rectangles, drawing See Draw menu commands screen line thickness (preference), 18-3
redo, 4-14 secondary beams, 12-6
reduction, live load, 18-10 section cuts
reference lines, 9-18 defining, 11-27, 26-4
reference planes, 9-18 output forces, 26-7, 39-1
refresh view, 10-14 section designer, 11-11, 48-20
Index-9
seismic load See automatic seismic loads spandrels

select all, 13-5 labels, 14-35, 14-53, 48-5
select edge of area object, 9-31 output forces, 16-17, 38-5
Select menu commands spreadsheet, copying geometry to and from, 9-3
Select at Pointer/in Window, 13-2 spring
Select using Intersecting Line, 13-3 forces, 16-14
Select on XY Plane, 13-4 properties
Select on XZ Plane, 13-4 area, 14-54
Select on YZ Plane, 13-4 line, 14-36
Select by Groups, 13-4 point, 14-10
Select by Frame Sections, 13-4 starting a new model, 4-11, 6-1, 8-1
Select by Wall/Slab/Deck Sections, 13-4 starting load vectors, 33-10
Select by Link Properties, 13-4 static analysis, 33-2
Select by Line Object Type, 13-5 static load participation ratio, 41-7
Select by Area Object Type, 13-5 static pushover curve, 16-39
Select by Story Level, 13-5 status bar, 4-5
Select All, 13-5 steel frame design process, 45-3
Select Invert, 13-5 story levels, 8-6, 9-17, 22-1
Deselect, 13-6 story shears, 41-13
Get Previous Selection, 13-5 support, technical
Clear Selection, 13-6 e-mail support, 3-5
self-mass, 11-4, 11-64 fax support, 3-4
self-weight, 11-4, 11-24, 11-47 phone support, 3-4
I select mode, 4-12

sequential analysis See incremental analysis
training, at CSI in Berkeley, 3-6
supports
shear wall design process, 48-8 area spring, 14-54
shell element faces, 36-2 line spring, 14-36
shell element section properties, 11-21 point spring, 14-10
shell element internal forces, 36-3 reactions, 16-14
shell element internal stresses, 36-8 restraints, 14-9
shift key, 4-9, 4-10
show all, 10-11 T
show selection only, 10-11
shrink area objects, 9-30 tables displayed onscreen
shrink factor (preference), 18-5 input tables, 16-6
similar stories feature, 12-2, 22-3 output tables, 16-40
snap to options static nonlinear analysis tables, 16-39
intersections, 12-19 time history trace tables, 16-38
invisible grid, 12-19 telephone numbers
lines and edges, 12-19 fax, 3-4
middle and ends, 12-19 voice, 3-4
perpendicular, 12-19 templates, 8-6, 9-7, 11-42
points, 12-18 thick plate, 11-22
sound, 18-22
Index-10
Index
time history Draw Point Objects (displays flyout button),

analysis, 33-14 12-3
case, 11-56 Create Points (plan, elev, 3D), 12-3
function, 11-38 Draw Line Objects (displays flyout buttons),
trace, 16-34 12-3
time history types Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D), 12-4
linear, 33-14 Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (all
nonlinear, 33-14 views), 12-5
periodic, 33-14 Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (plan),
tips, showing at startup, 18-20 12-6
tolerances, preferences, 18-2 Create 2ndary Beams in Region or at Clicks
toolbar buttons (plan), 12-6
main (top) toolbar buttons Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (elev),
New Model, 8-1 12-7
Open .EDB File, 8-19 Draw Area Objects (displays flyout buttons),
Save Model, 8-20 12-9
Undo, 4-14 Draw Areas (plan, 3D), 12-9
Redo, 4-14 Draw Rectangular Areas (plan, elev), 12-10
Refresh Window, 10-14 Create Areas at Click (plan, elev), 12-10
Lock/Unlock Model, 18-22 Draw Walls (plan), 12-10
Run Analysis, 15-8 Create Walls in Region or at Click (plan),
Rubber Band Zoom, 10-11 12-12
Restore Full View, 10-12 Select All, 13-5
Restore Previous Zoom, 10-12
Zoom In One Step, 10-13
Restore Previous Selection, 13-5
Clear Selection, 13-6 I
Zoom Out One Step, 10-13 Set Intersecting Line Select Mode, 13-3
Pan, 10-14 Snap to Points, 12-18
3D View, 10-2, 10-5 Snap to Middle and Ends, 12-19
Plan View, 10-5 Snap to Intersections, 12-19
Elevation View, 10-6 Snap to Perpendicular, 12-19
Rotate 3D View, 10-5 Snap to Lines and Edges, 12-19
Perspective Toggle, 10-8 Snap to Invisible Grid, 12-19
Move Up in List, 10-5 training, at CSI in Berkeley, 3-6
Move Down in List, 10-5 trim line objects, 9-25
Object Shrink Toggle, 10-18
Set Building View Options, 10-16 U
Show Undeformed Shape, 16-1
Display Static Deformed Shape, 16-7 undeformed shape, display, 16-1
Display Mode Shape, 16-12 undo, 4-14
Display Member Force Diagram, 16-14 units, 20-1
Display Output Tables, 16-40 unlocking model, 4-13, 18-22
side toolbar buttons unstable end releases, 14-24
Pointer, 12-1
Reshaper, 9-37
Index-11
V Y
video, create and playback, 8-26 Young's modulus, 11-2
View menu commands
Set 3D View, 10-2 Z
Set Plan View, 10-5
Set Elevation View, 10-6 zoom
Set Building View Limits, 10-10 in one step, 10-13
Set Building View Options, 10-16 out one step, 10-13
Rubber Band Zoom, 10-11 previous zoom, 10-12
Restore Full View, 10-12 restore full view, 10-12
Previous Zoom, 10-12 rubber band zoom, 10-11
Zoom Out One Step, 10-13
Pan, 10-13
Measure
Line, 10-15
Area, 10-15
Angle, 10-16
Change Axes Location, 10-15
Show Selection Only, 10-11
Show All, 10-11
Save Custom View, 10-9
I Show Custom View, 10-9
Refresh Window, 10-14
Refresh View, 10-14
W
walls
drawing See Draw menu commands, Draw
Area Objects
assigning pier labels to area objects, 14-52
assigning pier labels to line objects, 14-34
assigning spandrel labels to area objects, 14-53
assigning spandrel labels to line objects, 14-35
wind load See automatic wind loads
windows, Options menu command, 18-20
windowing, 13-2
world wide web address, 3-3
Index-12
ETABS®
Three Dimensional Analysis and Design
of Building Systems
ETABS USER’S MANUAL

Volume 2
Computers and Structures, Inc. First Edition

Berkeley, California, USA December 1999
Copyright
The computer program ETABS and all associated documentation are proprietary and
copyrighted products. Worldwide rights of ownership rest with Computers and
Structures, Inc. Unlicensed use of the program or reproduction of the documentation in
any form, without prior written authorization from Computers and Structures, Inc., is
explicitly prohibited.
Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:
Computers and Structures, Inc.

1995 University Avenue
Berkeley, California 94704 USA
Phone: (510) 845-2177

FAX: (510) 845-4096
e-mail: [email protected] (for general questions)
e-mail: [email protected] (for technical support questions)
web: www.csiberkeley.com
ã Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-1999.

The CSI Logo is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
DISCLAIMER
CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

DEVELOPMENT AND DOCUMENTATION OF ETABS. THE PROGRAM HAS
BEEN THOROUGHLY TESTED AND USED. IN USING THE PROGRAM,
HOWEVER, THE USER ACCEPTS AND UNDERSTANDS THAT NO WARRANTY
IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED BY THE DEVELOPERS OR THE DISTRIBUTORS
ON THE ACCURACY OR THE RELIABILITY OF THE PROGRAM.
THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

PROGRAM AND MUST INDEPENDENTLY VERIFY THE RESULTS.
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
Thanks are due to all of the numerous structural engineers, who over the years have given
valuable feedback that has contributed toward the enhancement of this product to its
current state.
Special recognition is due Dr. Edward L. Wilson, Professor Emeritus, University of

California at Berkeley, who was responsible for the conception and development of the
original ETABS and whose continued originality has produced many unique concepts
that have been implemented in this version.
C
Volume 2 Contents
Tip:
The Table of Contents for Volume 2 of this manual consists of a
chapter list that covers both Volumes 1 and 2 followed by an ex-
If you are just panded table of contents for Volume 2 only. The chapter list de-
getting started votes one line to each chapter. It shows you the chapter number
with ETABS (if applicable), chapter title and the pages that the chapter covers.
Version 7 we
suggest that
Subheadings are provided in the chapter list section to help give
you read you a sense of how this manual is divided into several different
Chapters 1 parts.
through 6 in
Volume 1 and Following the chapter list is the expanded table of contents for
then use the Volume 2. Here all section headers and subsection headers are
rest of the man- listed along with their associated page numbers for each chapter
ual (Volumes 1 in Volume 2.
and 2) as a
reference guide When searching through the manual for a particular chapter, the
on an as- highlighted tabs at the edge of each page may help you locate the
needed basis. If chapter more quickly.
you are not
responsible for If you are new to ETABS we suggest that you read Chapters 1
installing through 6 in Volume 1 and then use the rest of the manual (Vol-
ETABS then umes 1 and 2) as a reference guide on an as-needed basis. If you
you can skip
are not responsible for installing ETABS then you can skip
Chapter 2.
Chapter 2.
i
C ETABS User’s Manual Chapter List

Volume 1
Volume 1 Contents
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Expanded Table of Contents...................................... vi to xx
Note:
Chapter 4 pro-
vides a com- Introduction and Getting Started Information
prehensive de- Chapter Title Pages
scription of the
various parts of 1 Introduction .......................................................... 1-1 to 1-10
the ETABS
graphic inter- 2 Installation ............................................................ 2-1 to 2-14
face.
3 Getting Help ........................................................... 3-1 to 3-7
General Overview of ETABS

Note:
Chapter Title Pages
Chapter 6 pro- 4 The ETABS Graphical User Interface .................. 4-1 to 4-16
vides informa-
tion on how to 5 Overview of an ETABS Model................................ 5-1 to 5-5
create an
ETABS model. 6 ETABS Modeling Tips .......................................... 6-1 to 6-10
ii
Volume 2 Contents
C
The ETABS Menus
Chapter Title Pages
7 Overview of the ETABS Menus ............................. 7-1 to 7-2
Note: 8 The ETABS File Menu ......................................... 8-1 to 8-30

Chapters 8 9 The ETABS Edit Menu......................................... 9-1 to 9-43
through 19
document most 10 The ETABS View Menu ....................................10-1 to 10-30
of the menu
commands and 11 The ETABS Define Menu..................................11-1 to 11-65
toolbar button
shortcuts avail- 12 The ETABS Draw Menu....................................12-1 to 12-22
able in ETABS.
13 The ETABS Select Menu ....................................13-1 to 13-6
14 The ETABS Assign Menu .................................14-1 to 14-64
15 The ETABS Analyze Menu .................................15-1 to 15-9
16 The ETABS Display Menu ................................16-1 to 16-40
17 The ETABS Design Menu...................................17-1 to 17-6
18 The ETABS Options Menu................................18-1 to 18-23
19 The ETABS Help Menu.......................................19-1 to 19-2
Other Information
Chapter Title Pages
iii
C Volume 2
Volume 2 Contents
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Expanded Table of Contents......................................vi to xxi
Detailed Information on Selected ETABS Topics

Chapter Title Pages
20 Units ................................................................... 20-1 to 20-5
21 Coordinate Systems........................................... 21-1 to 21-7
22 Story Level Data................................................. 22-1 to 22-5
23 Area Objects .................................................... 23-1 to 23-21

Note:
24 Line Objects ..................................................... 24-1 to 24-31
Volume 2 pro-
vides detailed 25 Point Objects.................................................... 25-1 to 25-12
information on
a variety of 26 Groups and Section Cuts ................................. 26-1 to 26-12
ETABS sub-
jects. 27 Load Cases, Load Combinations and Mass..... 27-1 to 27-13
28 Automatic Seismic Loads ................................. 28-1 to 28-37
29 Automatic Wind Loads ..................................... 29-1 to 29-19
30 Automatic Meshing of Area and Line Objects .. 30-1 to 30-12
31 Manual Meshing of Area Objects ..................... 31-1 to 31-16
32 Transformation of Loads into the ETABS

Analysis Model ............................................ 32-1 to 32-32
33 Overview of ETABS Analysis Techniques........ 33-1 to 33-24
iv
Volume 2 Contents
ETABS Analysis Output C

Chapter Title Pages
34 Point Object Output Conventions........................34-1 to 34-5

Note:
Chapters 34 35 Frame Element Output Conventions...................35-1 to 35-5
through 43
document the 36 Shell Element Output Conventions ...................36-1 to 36-14
ETABS analysis
output. 37 Link Element Output Conventions.......................37-1 to 37-7
38 Wall Pier and Spandrel Output Conventions.......38-1 to 38-6
39 Section Cut Output Conventions.........................39-1 to 39-4
40 Printed Input Tables............................................40-1 to 40-3
41 Printed Output Tables .......................................41-1 to 41-14
42 Database Input/Output Tables ............................42-1 to 42-2
43 The ETABS Log and Out Files............................43-1 to 43-6
44 Inserting ETABS Output into Written Reports .....44-1 to 44-3
Introduction to the ETABS Design Postprocessors

Chapter Title Pages
Note:
Chapters 45 45 Steel Frame Design ..........................................45-1 to 45-17
through 48
provide infor- 46 Concrete Frame Design....................................46-1 to 46-15
mation on how
to use the 47 Composite Beam Design ..................................47-1 to 47-19
ETABS design
postprocessors
48 Shear Wall Design ............................................48-1 to 48-28
v
C
Other Information
Chapter Title Pages
N. A. Appendix 1 - The ETABS Menu Structure....... A1-1 to A1-13
ETABS User’s Manual - Volume 2 - Expanded Contents
CHAPTER 20: UNITS

General 20-1
Different Sets of Units Available in ETABS 20-2
Current Units versus Database Units 20-3
Current Units 20-3
Database Units 20-4
Changing the Database Units 20-4
CHAPTER 21: COORDINATE SYSTEMS

Overview 21-1
Upward and Horizontal Directions 21-1
The Global Coordinate System 21-2
Additional Coordinate Systems 21-3
Local Coordinate Systems 21-5
Grid Lines 21-5
vi
Volume 2 Contents
CHAPTER 22: STORY LEVEL DATA C

Definition of a Story Level 22-1
Editing Story Level Data 22-2
Similar Story Levels 22-3
The Story Data Dialog Box 22-3
The Similar Stories Drop-Down Box 22-4
Effect of Story Levels on Drawn Objects 22-5
CHAPTER 23: AREA OBJECTS

General 23-1
Area Object Labeling and Area Type 23-2
Area Type 23-3
Automatic Area Object Labeling 23-4
Relabeling Objects 23-5
Assignments Made to Area Objects 23-5
Right Click Information for Area Objects 23-6
Location Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box 23-7
Assignments Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box 23-9
Loads Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box 23-13
Overlapping Area Objects 23-15
Plan Views of Walls 23-16
Default Area Object Local Axes 23-17
Default Orientation for Horizontal Area Objects 23-17
Default Orientation for Vertical Area Objects 23-17
Default Orientation for Other Area Objects 23-18
The Right Hand Rule 23-18
Positive Direction of Coordinate System Axes 23-19
Global Coordinate System 23-19
Local Coordinate System 23-19
vii
C Positive Direction of Moments in a Coordinate System 23-20
CHAPTER 24: LINE OBJECTS

General 24-1
Frame Section Properties 24-1
Line Object Labeling and Line Type 24-3
Line Type 24-3
Automatic Line Object Labeling 24-4
Assignments Made to Line Objects 24-5
Right Click Information for Line Objects 24-7
Location Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box 24-8
Assignments Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box 24-9
Loads Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box 24-17
Overlapping Line Objects 24-26
Plan Views of Vertical Line Objects 24-28
Default Line Object Local Axes 24-29
Vertical Line Objects 24-29
Horizontal Line Objects 24-29
Other Line Objects 24-30
Polylines 24-31
CHAPTER 25: POINT OBJECTS

General 25-1
Automatic Point Object Labeling 25-2
Assignments Made through the Assign Menu 25-3
Right Click Information for Point Objects 25-3
Location Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box 25-4
Assignments Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box 25-5
Loads Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box 25-10
viii
Volume 2 Contents
Point Objects Overlapping Other Objects 25-12 C

Point Object Local Axes 25-12
CHAPTER 26: GROUPS AND SECTION CUTS

General 26-1
Defining Groups 26-2
Selecting Groups 26-3
Designing by Groups 26-3
Section Cuts 26-4
Defining a Section Cut with a Group 26-4
Location that Section Cut Forces are Summed About 26-6
Local Axes for Section Cuts 26-6
How ETABS Calculates Section Cut Forces 26-7
CHAPTER 27: LOAD CASES, LOAD COMBINATIONS AND MASS

Load Cases 27-1
Static Load Case 27-2
Design Type 27-3
Self-Weight Multiplier 27-4
Response Spectrum Load Case 27-4
Time History Load Case 27-5
Static Nonlinear Load Case 27-6
Live Load Reduction 27-6
General 27-6
Load Combinations 27-6
General 27-6
Output Values Produced by Load Combinations 27-7
Types of Load Combinations 27-8
Examples 27-9
ix
C Design Load Combinations 27-10

Restrictions for Load Case and Load Combination Labels 27-11
Mass 27-11
CHAPTER 28: AUTOMATIC SEISMIC LOADS

General 28-1
Defining Automatic Seismic Load Cases 28-2
Automatic Seismic Load Cases 28-3
Distribution of Automatic Seismic Loads at a Story Level 28-3
Direction and Eccentricity Data 28-3
Story Range Data 28-5
1994 UBC Seismic Loads 28-6
Options for 1994 UBC Building Period 28-6
Other Input Factors and Coefficients 28-7
Algorithm for 1994 UBC Seismic Loads 28-7
1997 UBC Seismic Loads 28-10
Options for 1997 UBC Building Period 28-10
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Seismic Loads 28-11
1997 UBC Isolated Building Seismic Loads 28-14
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Isolated Building Seismic Loads 28-15
1996 BOCA Seismic Loads 28-17
Options for 1996 BOCA Building Period 28-17
Algorithm for 1996 BOCA Seismic Loads 28-19
1995 NBCC Seismic Loads 28-21
Options for 1995 NBCC Building Period 28-21
x
Volume 2 Contents
Algorithm for 1995 NBCC Seismic Loads 28-23 C

IBC 2000 Seismic Loads 28-25
Options for IBC 2000 Building Period 28-25
Algorithm for IBC 2000Seismic Loads 28-27
1997 NEHRP Seismic Loads 28-30
Options for 1997 NEHRP Building Period 28-30
Algorithm for 1997 NEHRP Seismic Loads 28-33
User-Defined Seismic Loads 28-36
Input Factors and Coefficients 28-36
Algorithm for User-Defined Seismic Loads 28-36
CHAPTER 29: AUTOMATIC WIND LOADS

General 29-1
Defining Automatic Wind Load Cases 29-2
Automatic Wind Load Cases 29-3
Wind Direction 29-3
Wind Exposure Height 29-4
Wind Exposure Width and Wind Load Application Point 29-5
1994 UBC Wind Loads 29-6
Input Wind Coefficients 29-6
Algorithm for 1994 UBC Wind Loads 29-7
1997 UBC Wind Loads 29-8
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Wind Loads 29-9
1996 BOCA Wind Loads 29-11
Input Wind Coefficients for 1996 BOCA 29-11
Algorithm for 1996 BOCA Wind Loads 29-12
xi
C 1995 NBCC Wind Loads 29-14

Algorithm for 1995 NBCC Wind Loads 29-14
ASCE 7-95 Wind Loads 29-16
Input Wind Coefficients for ASCE 7-95 29-16
Algorithm for ASCE 7-95 Wind Loads 29-16
User-Defined Wind Loads 29-19
CHAPTER 30: AUTOMATIC MESHING OF AREA AND LINE OBJECTS

General 30-1
Automatic Meshing of Line Objects 30-3
Automatic Meshing of Area Objects 30-6
General 30-6
How ETABS Automatically Meshes Floors 30-7
Viewing the Automatic Floor Mesh 30-7
Examples of Automatic Floor Meshing 30-8
CHAPTER 31: MANUAL MESHING OF AREA OBJECTS

General 31-1
Cookie Cut Meshing Tools 31-3
Cookie Cut at Selected Line Objects 31-3
Cookie Cut at Selected Points at X Degrees 31-4
Meshing Tools for Quadrilaterals and Triangles 31-7
Background Information 31-7
Four-sided Area Objects 31-7
Three-sided Area Objects 31-8
Mesh Quadrilaterals and Triangles into N by M Areas 31-8
Mesh Quadrilaterals and Triangles at Intersections and Selected Points on
Edges 31-11
xii
Volume 2 Contents
Mesh at Intersection with Visible Gridlines 31-12 C

Mesh at Selected Point Objects on Edges 31-14
Mesh at Intersections with Selected Line Objects 31-15
Example with Combined the Mesh Sub-options 31-16
CHAPTER 32: TRANSFORMATION OF LOADS INTO THE ETABS ANALYSIS MODEL

Background 32-1
Valid Loading 32-2
Point Objects 32-2
Line Objects 32-3
Area Objects 32-3
Introduction to Load Transformation 32-4
Load Transformation for Area Objects 32-6
Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Deck Properties 32-11
Rectangular Interior Meshed Element 32-12
General Interior Meshed Element 32-15
Exterior Meshed Element 32-18
The Effect of Deck Openings on Load Transformation 32-24
Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Membrane Slab Properties 32-26
CHAPTER 33: OVERVIEW OF ETABS ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES

General 33-1
Linear Static Analysis 33-2
Modal Analysis 33-2
Eigenvector Analysis 33-3
Number of Modes 33-4
Frequency Range 33-4
Convergence Tolerance 33-6
Residual Mass Modes 33-7
xiii
C Ritz-Vector Analysis 33-8

Number of Modes 33-9
Starting Load Vectors 33-10
Acceleration Loads 33-11
Response Spectrum Analysis 33-12
Time History Analysis 33-14
Mode Superposition 33-15
Modal Damping 33-15
Time Steps 33-16
Nonlinear Time-History Analysis 33-17
Initial P-Delta Analysis 33-18
Iterative Solution 33-20
Buckling 33-21
Practical Application 33-21
Nonlinear Static Analysis 33-22
CHAPTER 34: POINT OBJECT OUTPUT CONVENTIONS

Overview 34-1
Displacements 34-1
Support Reactions 34-2
Spring Forces 34-3
Grounded Link Element Forces 34-3
Panel Zone Output 34-3
Panel Zone Displacements 34-3
Panel Zone Internal Deformations 34-4
Panel Zone Internal Forces 34-5
CHAPTER 35: FRAME ELEMENT OUTPUT CONVENTIONS

General 35-1
xiv
Volume 2 Contents
Frame Element Internal Forces 35-2 C

CHAPTER 36: SHELL ELEMENT OUTPUT CONVENTIONS
General 36-1
Faces of Shell Elements 36-2
Shell Element Internal Forces 36-3
Shell Element Internal Stresses 36-8
Other Formulas Relating Shell Element Internal Forces to Internal
Stresses 36-12
CHAPTER 37: LINK ELEMENT OUTPUT CONVENTIONS

General 37-1
Link Element Assignments to Point and Line Objects 37-1
Internal Nonlinear Springs 37-2
Link Element Force-Deformation Relationships 37-3
Link Element Internal Deformations 37-4
Link Element Internal Forces 37-6
CHAPTER 38: WALL PIER AND SPANDREL OUTPUT CONVENTIONS

General 38-1
Wall Pier Output Locations and Sign Convention 38-2
Wall Pier Local Axes 38-2
Two-Dimensional Pier 38-2
Three-Dimensional Pier 38-3
Pier Element Internal Forces 38-4
Wall Spandrel Output Locations and Sign Convention 38-4
Wall Spandrel Local Axes 38-5
Spandrel Element Internal Forces 38-5
xv
C CHAPTER 39: SECTION CUT OUTPUT CONVENTIONS

Overview 39-1
Section Cut Forces 39-1
CHAPTER 40: PRINTED INPUT TABLES

Features of Dialog Box 40-1
Input Data Categories 40-2
Building Data 40-2
Object Data 40-2
Static Loads 40-3
CHAPTER 41: PRINTED OUTPUT TABLES

General 41-1
Building Modes 41-3
Building Modal Info 41-3
Modal Periods and Frequencies 41-3
Modal Participation Factors 41-4
Modal Direction Factors 41-5
Modal Effective Mass Factors 41-5
Static and Dynamic Load Participation Ratios 41-7
Static Load Participation Ratio 41-7
Dynamic Load Participation Ratio 41-8
Final Comments on Static and Dynamic Load Participation
Ratios 41-10
Damping and Accelerations 41-10
Modal Amplitudes 41-11
Base Reactions 41-11
Building Output 41-12
Cumulative Center of Mass 41-12
xvi
Volume 2 Contents
Center of Rigidity 41-12 C

Story Shears and Overturning Moments 41-13
CHAPTER 42: DATABASE INPUT/OUTPUT TABLES

General 42-1
CHAPTER 43: THE ETABS LOG AND OUT FILES

General 43-1
The ETABS Log File 43-1
The ETABS Out File 43-3
Global Force Balance 43-3
CHAPTER 44: INSERTING ETABS OUTPUT INTO WRITTEN REPORTS

General 44-1
Tabular Output 44-1
Graphical Output 44-2
CHAPTER 45: STEEL FRAME DESIGN

Analysis Sections and Design Sections 45-1
Steel Frame Design Procedure 45-3
Steel Frame Design Menu Commands 45-7
Select Design Group 45-7
Select Design Combo 45-8
View/Revise Overwrites 45-8
Set Lateral Displacement Targets 45-9
Start Design/Check of Structure 45-10
Interactive Steel Frame Design 45-11
Display Design Info 45-11
Make Auto Select Section Null 45-11
xvii
C Change Design Section 45-12

Reset Design Section to Last Analysis 45-13
Verify Analysis vs Design Section 45-13
Reset All Steel Overwrites 45-14
Delete Steel Design Results 45-14
ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design 45-14
CHAPTER 46: CONCRETE FRAME DESIGN

Concrete Frame Design Procedure 46-4
Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands 46-7
View/Revise Overwrites 46-7
Interactive Concrete Frame Design 46-8
Change Design Section 46-9
Reset All Concrete Overwrites 46-11
Delete Concrete Design Results 46-11
ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame Design 46-11
CHAPTER 47: COMPOSITE BEAM DESIGN

Composite Beam Design Procedure 47-3
Composite Beam Design Menu Commands 47-7
Select Design Group 47-7
xviii
Volume 2 Contents
View/Revise Overwrites 47-9 C

Interactive Composite Beam Design 47-10
Make Auto Select Section Null 47-11
Change Design Section 47-11
Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites 47-13
Delete Composite Beam Design Results 47-13
Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review 47-14
Member Identification Area of Dialog Box 47-14
Story ID 47-14
Beam Label 47-14
Design Group 47-14
Section Information Area of Dialog Box 47-15
Auto Select List 47-15
Optimal 47-15
Last Analysis 47-15
Current Design/Next Analysis 47-16
Acceptable Sections List Area of Dialog Box 47-16
Redefine Area of Dialog Box 47-17
Sections Button 47-17
Overwrites Button 47-18
Temporary Area of Dialog Box 47-18
Combos Button 47-18
Show Details Area of Dialog Box 47-19
Diagrams Button 47-19
Details Button 47-19
xix
C CHAPTER 48: SHEAR WALL DESIGN

Overview 48-1
Wall Pier Labeling 48-1
General 48-1
Assigning Wall Pier Labels 48-2
Wall Spandrel Labeling 48-5
General 48-5
Assigning Wall Spandrel Labels 48-5
Shear Wall Design Procedure 48-8
Menu Commands for Shear Wall Design 48-11
View/Revise Pier Overwrites 48-12
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites 48-15
Define Pier Sections for Checking 48-17
Assign Pier Sections for Checking 48-17
Interactive Wall Design 48-17
Combos Button 48-18
Overwrites Button 48-18
Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites 48-19
Delete Wall Design Results 48-19
Using Section Designer to Define Pier Reinforcing 48-20
Local Axes Definition and Orientation 48-20
Initial Definition of a Wall Pier Section 48-21
Starting Section Designer 48-21
Creating a Pier Section from Scratch 48-22
Creating a Pier from the Geometry of an Existing Analysis Pier
Section 48-23
xx
Volume 2 Contents
Modifying the Geometry of the Concrete Section 48-23 C

Revising Rebar Size, Cover and Spacing 48-24
General 48-24
Methodology 48-25
Modifying Material Properties 48-26
Tips and Tricks 48-26
Distort Feature 48-26
Interaction Diagrams and Moment-Curvature Plots 48-27
Pier Orientation 48-27
Assigning Pier Sections 48-28
REFERENCES
APPENDIX 1 - THE ETABS MENU STRUCTURE
INDEX
xxi
20
Chapter 20
Units
General
Except for the instances mentioned in the following paragraph
ETABS uses consistent units throughout the model. You can
temporarily change the current units used in the ETABS graphi-
cal interface at any time whether you are creating a model, modi-
fying a model, or viewing output results. The current units for
the model are always shown in the drop-down box located on the
right-hand side of the status bar at the bottom of the ETABS
window. You can change the current units on the fly by simply
selecting another set of units from the drop-down box. Several
different sets of both English and metric units are available. You
can also change the current units using drop-down boxes located
Tip: in some of the ETABS dialog boxes.
Typically the
current units The instances where ETABS may not use consistent units
are of concern throughout the model are when considering areas of reinforcing
to you, not the steel for concrete frame design and shear wall design. In these
database units. cases the units for the rebar are specified in the design prefer-
ences. The units can either be specified the same as the current
20 - 1
units (i.e., consistent units), or they can be specified as one of

20 several predefined, unchanging units, such as, in2/ft for distrib-
uted reinforcing steel in shear walls. See, for example, the Op-
tions menu > Preferences > Shear Wall Design command.
Typically in ETABS you only need concern yourself with the

current units that are shown in the drop-down box on the status
bar. However, to fully understand the units in ETABS it is nec-
essary to recognize the difference between the current units and
the database units. The database units are discussed later in this
chapter.
Different Sets of Units Available in ETABS

Several different sets of both English units and Metric units are
available in ETABS. A set of units consists of force, length,
temperature and time units.
Tip: Seconds are always used as the time unit for all sets of units in
ETABS. Degrees Fahrenheit is used as the temperature unit for
You can change
all sets of English units and degrees centigrade is used as the
the current
units at any
temperature unit for all sets of metric units. The different sets of
time by clicking units that are available in ETABS are tabulated below:
in the drop-
down box lo- English Units Metric Units
cated on the lb, in, °F, sec KN, m, °C, sec
right-hand side lb, ft, °F, sec KN, cm, °C, sec
of the status bar kip, in, °F, sec KN, mm, °C, sec
at the bottom of kip, ft, °F, sec
the ETABS
Kgf, m, °C, sec
window and
selecting a new Kgf, cm, °C, sec
set of units. Kgf, mm, °C, sec
N, m, °C, sec
N, cm, °C, sec
N, mm, °C, sec
Ton, m, °C, sec

Ton, cm, °C, sec
Ton, mm, °C, sec
20 - 2 Different Sets of Units Available in ETABS

Chapter 20 - Units
Two types of angular units are also used in ETABS.

20
• Degrees are always used for specifying geometry, in-
cluding local axes definitions, for both English and Met-
ric sets of units.
• Radians are always used for specifying rotational dis-

placements in the input data for both English and Metric
sets of units.
• Output rotations are always reported in radians for both

English and Metric sets of units.
Current Units versus Database Units

To fully understand the units in ETABS it is helpful to recognize
the difference between the current units and the database units.
Each of these is described below.
Current Units
The current units are the units that are displayed in the drop-
down box located on the right hand side of the status bar at the
bottom of the ETABS window. Your model is always displayed
in the current units. The location of the mouse cursor, which is
displayed in the status bar, is shown in the current units. All
model dimensions and properties displayed in any dialog boxes
are in the current units except for possibly areas of reinforcing
steel as discussed previously in this chapter. Any output data that
is printed or displayed onscreen is in the current units (except
possibly reinforcing steel areas). In short, all aspects of your en-
tire model are always displayed in the current units (except pos-
sibly reinforcing steel areas).
When you use the File menu > Export > Save Model as
ETABS.e2k Text File command the *.e2k file is saved in the
current units.
Current Units versus Database Units 20 - 3

20 Database Units
When you create a new model by clicking File menu > New
Model whatever set of units is the current units becomes what is
called the database units for the newly created model. The data-
base units are set as soon as you click the File menu > New
Model command.
ETABS always saves the binary database input file (the one with
the .edb extension) for your model and the associated backup
text input file (the one with the .$et extension) in the database
units regardless of what the current units may be at the time you
save.
There is also a *.ebk file that is created automatically by ETABS

after you successfully open an existing *.edb file. The *.ebk file
is intended to be a backup of your *.edb file as it was when you
last successfully opened it. The *.ebk file is a binary file, not a
text file. The *.ebk file is always saved in the database units for
the model.
Whenever you open an existing model the current units dis-

played in the drop-down box on the status bar are changed to
display the database units for that model when the open process
is successfully completed.
Once the database units are created for a model they cannot be
changed unless you export your model to a text file and then im-
port it again as described later in this chapter in the section titled
“Changing the Database Units.”
Changing the Database Units

Typically you will not have to worry about the database units for
your model, however, occasionally you may wish to change
Note: them. There are not very many reasons why you might want to
Typically you change the database units, but two possible ones are:
will not need to
change data- • You want your model to initially appear in a different set
base units for a of units when you open it.
model.
• You want your backup text file with the .$et extension to
be saved in a different set of units.
20 - 4 Current Units versus Database Units

Chapter 20 - Units
In the unlikely event that you want to change the database units
for a model, you can use the following four-step procedure: 20
• Open the model for which you want to change the data-
base units in the ETABS graphical interface.
• Set the current units to be what you want the new data-
base units for the model to be.
• Use the File menu > Export > Save Model as

ETABS7.e2k Text File command to export a text input
file of your model. Note that the model is exported to
this file in the current units.
• Use the File menu > Import > Open ETABS7.e2k

Text File command to import this text file. The database
units for the imported model become the same as the
units associated with the *.e2k text input file. The im-
ported model is displayed in whatever the current units
are at the time it is imported.
Current Units versus Database Units 20 - 5

21
Chapter 21
Coordinate Systems
Overview
There are three types of coordinate systems in ETABS. They are
Tip: the global coordinate/grid system, additional coordinate/grid
In ETABS the systems and local coordinate systems. The global coordinate/grid
Z-axis is always system applies to the overall model. Additional coordinate sys-
vertical, with tems may apply to the overall model or to a portion of the model.
+Z being up- Each object in the model has its own local coordinate system.
ward.
Upward and Horizontal Directions

ETABS always assumes that Z is the vertical axis, with +Z be-
Tip: ing upward. Local coordinate systems for elements, and ground-
Loading speci- acceleration loading are defined with respect to this upward di-
fied as “Grav- rection. Self-weight loading always acts downward, in the –Z di-
ity” acts in the rection. Also loading specified as “Gravity” loading always acts
global -Z di- downward, in the global -Z direction.
rection.
21 - 1
Figure 21-1: Note: The +Z axis is always

oriented vertically upward
21
The global coordi-
nate system
Z
X
The X-Y plane is horizontal. The primary horizontal direction is
Global Y
Positive
+X. Angles in the horizontal plane are measured from the posi-
angle tive half of the X axis, with positive angles appearing counter-
clockwise when you are looking down at the X-Y plane as
Global X shown in the sketch to the left.
The Global Coordinate System

The global coordinate system is a three-dimensional, right-
handed, rectangular coordinate system. The three axes denoted
X, Y and Z, are mutually perpendicular and satisfy the right-
hand rule. The location and orientation of the global system are
Note: arbitrary. The +Z direction is by default always upward; you can
The right hand not change this. Locations in the global coordinate system can be
rule applies to specified using x, y, and z coordinates. See Figure 21-1 for an
all coordinate illustration of the global coordinate system. See the section titled
systems in "The Right Hand Rule" in Chapter 23 for additional information.
ETABS. This
includes the All other coordinate systems in the model, both additional and
global, addi- local, are ultimately defined with respect to the global coordinate
tional and local system, either directly or indirectly. The coordinates of all points
coordinate in the model are ultimately converted to global x, y, and z coor-
systems. dinates for storage in the input file, regardless of which coordi-
nate system they may have originally been specified in.
21 - 2 The Global Coordinate System

Chapter 21 - Coordinate Systems
Note: Vertical grid lines occur at all intersections

Figure 21-2: A B C D
of grid lines from the same coordinate system
21
Plan view of grid
4
lines from rectan- 5
4
6
gular and cylindrical
D
coordinate systems
3
C
2
2
B
1
1
Plan View of Grid Lines from a Plan View of Grid Lines from a
Rectangular Coordinate System Cylindrical Coordinate System
Additional Coordinate Systems

When you create a model the default coordinate system is the
Note:
global system. Often, for simple models, this one coordinate
Additional co- system is all you will need to create your model. However, for
ordinate sys- more complex models, additional coordinate systems can be de-
tems can be fined to supplement the global coordinate system and thus sim-
either rectan-
plify locating objects in the model. Understanding these different
gular or cylin-
drical. coordinate systems is crucial to properly defining your model.
You can specify additional coordinate systems using the Edit
menu > Edit Grid Data command.
Tip: Additional coordinate systems may be rectangular or cylindrical

as shown in Figure 21-2. Just like the global coordinate system,
All additional the +Z direction axis is always upward by default in all addi-
coordinate
systems and
tional coordinate systems and you can not change this.
element local
All additional coordinate systems are always defined with re-
coordinate
systems are spect to the global coordinate system. There are three things to
defined with do when you define an additional coordinate system. They are:
respect to the
global coordi- • Specify the additional coordinate system as either rec-
nate system. tangular or cylindrical.
Additional Coordinate Systems 21 - 3

• Locate the origin of the additional coordinate system

with respect to the origin of the global system by speci-
21 fying a translation. The translation is specified from the
global origin to the additional system origin in global X
and Y coordinates. The sign is important when specify-
ing the translation.
• Specify the direction of the additional grid line system

em
w s or
with respect to that of the global system by indicating a

ne axis f
yst
rotation about the Z-axis. The rotation is measured from

Global Y
X-
the positive global X-axis to the positive X-axis for a

Positive
angle
rectangular additional coordinate system, or to the theta
equals zero degrees axis for a cylindrical additional co-
Global X
ordinate system. Positive rotations appear counter
clockwise when the positive Z-axis is pointing toward
you.
Note that additional coordinate systems can not be translated

along the Z-axis with respect to the global coordinate system,
nor can they be rotated about a horizontal axis.
As an example, following is a sequence of steps you might use to

create a new cylindrical coordinate system in an existing model:
• Click the Edit menu > Edit Grid Data command to

bring up the Coordinate Systems dialog box.
• Click the Add New System button to bring up the Coor-

dinate System Definition dialog box.
• Select the Cylindrical option and specify the number and

spacing (uniform) of grid lines.
• Click the Edit Grid button to bring up a dialog box

where you can modify the grid data.
• If necessary modify the grid line spacing.
• Click the Locate System Origin button to bring up the

Locate System Origin dialog box.
21 - 4 Additional Coordinate Systems

• Specify the global X and Y translation and the rotation

about the global Z-axis of the origin of the new coordi-
nate system relative to the origin of the global coordinate 21
system.
• Click the OK button three times to exit all dialog boxes.
Local Coordinate Systems

Local coordinate systems are provided for each type of object in
ETABS. Object local coordinate systems are typically defined
with some reference to the global coordinate system. Refer to the
following chapters for additional discussion of local coordinate
systems:
• Chapter 23: Area Objects.
• Chapter 24: Line Objects.
• Chapter 25: Point Objects.
Grid Lines
Grid lines can be defined in ETABS to assist you in graphically
locating objects in your model. Your mouse pointer can snap to
grid lines as you are drawing objects.
The global coordinate system and all specified additional coordi-

Note:
nate systems each have a system of grid lines associated with
Vertical grid them. The grid lines associated with each coordinate system are
lines are pro- oriented parallel to the axes of that system. Thus for the global
vided at inter- and each additional coordinate system there are vertical grid
sections of lines and there are horizontal grid lines in two directions.
horizontal grid
lines that are You have complete control over the location and label of the grid
part of the same
lines that fall in a horizontal plane. The vertical grid lines are
coordinate
provided automatically at each intersection point of the horizon-
system.
tal grid lines. The vertical grid lines (grid lines that are parallel to
the global Z-axis) extend over the full height of the model, they
have no label, and you cannot edit their location.
Local Coordinate Systems 21 - 5

Figure 21-3: Grid lines from

additional r, θ
21
Grid lines associated coordinate system
(cylindrical)
with the global co-
ordinate system and
additional coordi-
nate systems com-
bined to help define θcylindrical Yglobal
a complex building rcylindrical
Xglobal
Grid lines from
global X, Y
coordinate system.
Note this system is
always rectangular
X'additional Grid lines from

additional X', Y'
coordinate system
(rectangular)
Y'additional
For the global coordinate system and rectangular additional co-

Shortcut:
ordinate systems the grid lines are oriented in three mutually or-
Double click on thogonal directions. Two of those directions lie in a horizontal
any grid line to plane; the third direction is vertical. For cylindrical additional
bring up a dia- coordinate systems the grid lines in the horizontal plane consist
log box for ed-
of a set of concentric circles about the coordinate system origin
iting grid lines.
point and a set of radial lines branching out from the coordinate
system origin point. Examples of rectangular and cylindrical co-
ordinate systems with grid lines are shown in Figure 21-2. Figure
21-3 shows a plan view demonstrating how a grid line system
associated with the global coordinate system might be combined
Note: with two additional grid line systems, one rectangular and one
cylindrical, to help define a complex building.
Grid lines as-
sociated with In Figure 21-3 the origin of the cylindrical coordinate system is
all coordinate at the same location as the global coordinate system origin. The
systems are
visible simulta-
cylindrical coordinate system origin is rotated 90° with respect to
neously. the global coordinate system origin. The origin of the additional
rectangular system is also rotated 90° with respect to the origin
of the global coordinate system as well as translated away from
the origin of the global system.
21 - 6 Grid Lines
21
Plan View Three Dimensional View

(Above)
Figure 21-4: When you define an additional coordinate system in ETABS and
Example three di- specify grid lines for it, the grid lines are displayed along with
mensional grid line those of the global system and along with those of any other ad-
system ditional coordinate system that may have been defined. In other
words, all specified grid lines are always displayed at the same
time, regardless of the coordinate system they are associated
with.
So far the example grid line systems have all been illustrated in
plan. The grid line systems are actually three-dimensional. A
Shortcut: vertical grid line exists at each intersection of horizontal grid
Click the lines from the same grid (coordinate) system. In addition, in a
three-dimensional view, the horizontal grid lines exist at each
Set Building
View Options
story level as illustrated in Figure 21-4. As shown in Figure 21-
button on the 4, the three-dimensional view only shows the bubbles identifying
main toolbar to the grid lines at the base of the building so that the drawing does
access the Set not become too cluttered. You can toggle the grid lines on and
Building Dis- off as needed using the View menu > Set Building View Op-
play Options tions command to display the Set Building View Options dialog
dialog box. box and checking or unchecking the Grid lines check box in the
Other Visibility Options area.
Grid Lines 21 - 7
22
Chapter 22
Story Level Data

Since ETABS is written specifically for buildings, the concept of
story levels is logical, convenient and useful. When working
with a model in the graphical user interface, you can work in a
plan view of any story level. Thus story levels assist you in
identifying, locating and viewing specific areas of your model.
Story levels are also used to help identify specific objects in the
model. For example a story level and a column label identify a
specific column object. In a tall building a specific column may
be identified as column label C23 at the 14th story level. This
type of identification is particularly useful for output that is dis-
played or printed in a tabular form.
Definition of a Story Level

In ETABS a story level is a horizontal plane cut through a
building at a specified elevation. With the exception of shear
wall spandrel beams, the objects in ETABS that are associated
with a particular story level always are located at or below the
story level elevation and above the story level below. Refer to
22 - 1
the Shear Wall Design manual for a discussion of association of

spandrel beams with story levels.
22 Typically it is most convenient to locate story levels at the top of

steel elevation in a steel framed building, at the bottom of slab
elevation (not bottom of ribs) in a concrete building with a
ribbed slab and at the center of the slab in a concrete building
with flat slabs.
Editing Story Level Data

Tip: The story level data can be viewed and edited in the Story Data
dialog box. There are two ways to access this dialog box:
To edit the
story level data • If you have clicked File menu > New Model and are
click Edit menu
currently in the process of defining a template model in
> Edit Story
Data > Edit to the Building Plan Grid System and Story Definition
access the Story dialog box then in the Story Dimensions area of the dia-
Data dialog log box select the Custom Story Data option and then
box. click the Edit Story Data button.
• If you are working on an existing model you can click

Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Edit to access the Story
Data dialog box.
Following is a list of data that is included for each story level in

the building in the Story Data dialog box:
• Label: This is a label identifying the story level. Default

values for this label are STORY1, STORY2, etc. You
can change the label for any story level, for example,
you may want to label your story levels 1st, 2nd, etc.
Note that the bottom of the building is identified as story
level BASE; you can not change this.
• Height: This is the interstory height of the story level. It

is the distance from the considered story level to the
story level below. Note that by default the story height
of the BASE level is zero; you can not change this.
22 - 2 Editing Story Level Data

Chapter 22 - Story Level Data
• Elevation: This is the elevation of the story level rela-

tive to the base elevation. Note that you can specify the
BASE level elevation (the default is 0). The program
automatically calculates all other elevations and you can 22
not change them. These story level elevations are pro-
vided for informational purposes.
• Similar To: This is a tag that indicates the story level is

similar to another story level for drawing, assignment
and selection purposes when working in plan view. See
the section titled "Similar Story Levels" later in this
Note that the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Insert Story and
the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Delete Story commands are
also available to insert and delete story levels, respectively.
Similar Story Levels

The ETABS similar story feature is active in plan view only. It is
not active when you are working in an elevation view or a three-
dimensional view. The options you set for the similar stories
feature affect objects drawn, assignments made and selections
made in plan view. You set the options for the similar stories
feature in the Story Data dialog box and in the similar stories
drop-down box located on the ETABS status bar.
Note:
The Story Data Dialog Box
The similar In the Story Data dialog box (Edit menu > Edit Story Data >
stories feature
Edit) one of the items that you specify at each story level is la-
is only active
when you are beled “Similar To.” You either specify another story level name
working in a or None for this item.
plan view. It is
not active in When you specify Story X as similar to Story Y then ETABS as-
elevation views sumes that the similarity is two-way. That is, Story X is assumed
or in three- to be similar to Story Y and Story Y is assumed to be similar to
dimensional Story X.
views.
Similar Story Levels 22 - 3

You can change the “Similar To” assignment for a story level at
any time by editing it in the Story Data dialog box. Changing the
“Similar To” assignment for a story level has no affect on previ-
22 ously drawn objects or on previous assignments to objects. Only
objects drawn or assignments made after the change are affected
by the change.
The Similar Stories Drop-Down Box

The similar stories drop-down box is located on the right-hand
side of the status bar at the bottom of the ETABS window. When
you are working in a plan view the options available in this win-
dow are One Story, Similar Stories or All Stories. These options
have the following meaning:
• One Story: An object drawn in plan only occurs at the

level that it is drawn at. An assignment made in a plan
view only applies to the object(s) actually selected. A
selection made in a plan view only applies to the ob-
ject(s) actually selected.
Tip: • Similar Stories: An object drawn in plan occurs at all

story levels designated as similar to the level where the
The similar
stories feature
object is drawn. An assignment made to an object in a
can signifi- plan view also occurs at all levels designated as similar
cantly speed the to the story where the assignment is actually made where
modeling proc- there is an object of the same type in the same plan loca-
ess. tion as the selected object. When an object is selected in
plan view, objects of the same type in the same location
at different story levels that are designated as similar to
the story where the selection is actually made are also
selected.
• All Stories: An object drawn in plan occurs at all story

levels. An assignment made to an object in a plan view
also occurs at all story levels where there is an object of
the same type in the same plan location as the selected
object. When an object is selected in plan view, objects
of the same type in the same location at all other story
levels are also selected.
You can change the similarity option in the drop-down box in

the status bar any time you are in a plan view. When you are in
22 - 4 Similar Story Levels

Chapter 22 - Story Level Data
an elevation view or a three-dimensional view the similar stories

drop-down box displays the word "Inactive" to remind you that
the feature is inactive in these views. When you switch from plan
view to an elevation or three-dimensional view and then back to
a plan view ETABS will retain the similarity option that it last
22
had in the drop-down box in the status bar for the previous plan
view.
Effect of Story Levels on Drawn Objects

When you draw an area or line object in an elevation view that
crosses a story level elevation, ETABS automatically breaks the
object up into multiple objects. The area and line objects are
broken at the story levels.
Effect of Story Levels on Drawn Objects 22 - 5

23
Chapter 23
Area Objects
General
Area objects are defined by three or more corner points (nodes)
connected by straight-line segments. Typically area objects are 3
or 4-noded although if they are horizontal (parallel to the global
XY plane) they can have an unlimited number of corners.
Typically all of the nodes of an area object must be in one plane,

however, ETABS does allow 4-noded elements to have a slight
twist, that is, for one of the corner points to be slightly out of the
plane defined by the other three points. Area objects with more
than 4 corner points must be horizontal and have all corner
points in the same plane.
Examples of valid area objects are shown in Figure 23-1. The

area objects shown in Figure 23-1a and b can occur in any arbi-
trary plane. The area objects shown in Figure 23-1c, d, e and f
can only occur in a horizontal plane because they have more than
four corner points.
23 - 1
Figure 23-1:
Examples of valid
area objects
23 a) Can occur in any

arbitrary plane
b) Can occur in any
arbitrary plane
c) Can only occur in
horizontal XY plane
d) Can only occur in e) Can only occur in f) Can only occur in

horizontal XY plane horizontal XY plane horizontal XY plane
Area Object Labeling and Area Type

When you first draw an area object ETABS assigns an area type
and a label to the area object. ETABS also assigns a section
property to the object as it is drawn. You can control the section
property assigned when the object is drawn through the floating
Properties of Object box. See the section titled "Drawing Area
Objects" in Chapter 12 for more information on this method of
area object property assignment. Property assignments can be
modified later by selecting the area object and clicking the As-
sign menu > Shell/Area > Wall/Slab/Deck Section command.
See the subsection titled "Wall, Slab and Deck Section Assign-
ments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for more information on
this method of assigning and modifying area object properties.
The following two subsections discuss the area type and label as-
signments.
23 - 2 Area Object Labeling and Area Type

Chapter 23 - Area Objects
Area Type
If a wall, slab or deck section property is not assigned to the area
object as it is drawn then the section is assigned an area type of
"Null." If a wall, slab or deck section property is assigned to the 23
area object as it is drawn then the section is assigned an area-
type of either "Floor", "Wall" or "Ramp." The following logic is
used to determine which of these frame types to assign:
Note: • Floor: If the area object is horizontal (parallel to the

global XY plane) then it is given an area type of "Floor."
Area objects
are always
• Wall: If the area object is vertical (parallel to the global
given an area
type by ETABS
Z-axis) then it is given an area type of "Wall."
based on their
orientation and • Ramp: If the area object is not vertical and not horizon-
property as- tal then it is given an area type of "Ramp."
signment. The
possible area The area type is used to determine the prefix used in the auto-
types are Floor, matic labeling of the area object, as described in the following
Ramp, Wall and subsection. The area type also determines how objects may be
Null. treated for design.
You can not directly change the area type associated with an area
object. However, if you change the orientation of the object then
ETABS automatically changes the area type. For example, sup-
pose you have a rectangular area object defined in a horizontal
plane. This is given an area type of Floor by ETABS. Now sup-
pose you drop two of the corner points associated with the area
object one story level to create a sloping area object. ETABS
immediately changes the area type for the object from Floor to
Ramp. As mentioned in the following subsection, the label is
also changed.
Area Object Labeling and Area Type 23 - 3

Automatic Area Object Labeling

ETABS automatically labels area objects based on their area
type as follows:
23
• Area objects with an area type of Floor are given a label
starting with the letter F followed by a number, such as
F21.
Note:
ETABS auto- • Area objects with an area type of Wall are given a label
matically labels starting with the letter W followed by a number, such as
area objects. W21.
• Area objects with an area type of Ramp are given a label

starting with the letter R followed by a number, such as
R21.
• Area objects with an area type of Null are given a label

starting with the letter A followed by a number, such as
A21.
If the area type of an area object changes then ETABS automati-

cally relabels the area object using the correct designation as de-
scribed above. There are no exceptions to this rule.
In general you can not assign your own labels to area objects.
Only the automatic ETABS labels are allowed. There is one ex-
ception to this. If you import a text file into ETABS then that
text file can have area object labels different from the automatic
labels described above. Be aware though that in this case, if you
cause the area type assigned to an area object to change then
ETABS will automatically relabel the object. Also if you move
the object it will be relabeled.
ETABS uses an intelligent labeling scheme. Typically it gives

the same label to area objects located at the same plan location
and at the same elevation relative to their respective story level,
but at different story levels. Note that area objects are always
identified by a story level and a label. This type of labeling
scheme makes it much easier for you to locate objects. For ex-
ample area object W2 at one level will be directly above area
object W2 at another story level.
23 - 4 Area Object Labeling and Area Type

Relabeling Objects
Note:
You can use the Edit menu > Auto Relabel All command to
automatically relabel all area, line and point objects. Note that
You can not
23
this is an all or nothing command. You can not selectively rela-
selectively re- bel objects. Unlike other commands on the Edit menu you do not
label objects.
have to select the objects before relabeling them.
You either re-
label all of ETABS relabels the objects in the following order. Working in
them or none of
the global coordinate system the objects are first sorted by their
them.
global delta Z from their story level then by their global Y loca-
tion and finally by their global X location. Using this relabeling
scheme you will typically know that if you find area object W2,
then area object W3 is probably somewhere close by. Note that
before relabeling the object labeling is in the order that the ob-
jects were defined.
Typically we recommend that after you finish creating your

model you should use the Edit menu > Auto Relabel All com-
mand to get optimum labeling for the model. Keep in mind that
once you do this if you later add or subtract objects from the
model and then relabel again, what was area object W3 may no
longer be area object W3.
Assignments Made to Area Objects

As previously mentioned you can assign specific section proper-
ties to area objects as you draw them. The properties assigned
are controlled through the floating Properties of Object box. See
Tip: the section titled "Drawing Area Objects" in Chapter 12 for more
information.
To make an
assignment to You can modify previous section property assignments and make
an area object many other types of assignments to area objects through the As-
first select the sign menu. The types of area object assignments you can make
object and then
include:
click the ap-
propriate com-
mand on the
• Assign wall, slab and deck section properties.
Assign menu.
• Designate an area object as an opening.
• Designate an area object as a rigid diaphragm.
Assignments Made to Area Objects 23 - 5

• Specify the local axes orientation.
• Specify shell stiffness modifiers.
•
23 Assign pier labels.
• Assign spandrel labels.
• Assign area spring supports (useful for soil supports).
• Assign additional area mass (if the mass source is speci-

fied as From Element and Additional Masses using the
Define menu > Mass Source command).
• Indicate if a membrane floor element is not to be auto-

matically meshed by ETABS.
• Assign uniform surface loads.
• Assign temperature loads.
Use either the Assign menu > Shell/Area or the Assign menu >
Shell/Area Loads command to make these assignments. See the
section titled "Assignments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for
more information.
Right Click Information for Area Objects

Tip: Right click on an area object to view useful information that
identifies the object, describes its location and reveals its as-
Right click on
signments. Right clicking on an area object means to position
an area object
to view useful your mouse pointer over the object and click the right (not left as
information you usually do) button on the mouse. When you do this the Area
that identifies Information dialog box appears.
the object, de-
scribes its lo- The units drop-down box in the Area Information dialog box al-
cation and re- lows you to change the current units without leaving the dialog
veals its as- box. Any change in units that you make while in this dialog box
signments. is permanent; that is, the change remains when you exit the dia-
log box.
23 - 6 Right Click Information for Area Objects

The area at the top of the Area Information dialog box that is
named Identification provides basic information that identifies
the area object. This information includes:
• Label: This is the area object label assigned by ETABS.

See the previous subsection in this chapter titled "Auto-
23
matic Area Object Labeling" for more information.
• Story: This is the story level associated with the area

object.
• Area Type: This is the area object type. It can be Floor,

Wall, Ramp or Null. See the previous subsection in this
chapter titled "Area Type" for more information.
The Area Information dialog box also has three different tabs lo-
Tip: cated just above the Identification area. Each of these tabs dis-
Click on a tab plays different types of information. The tabs are labeled Loca-
in the Area tion, Assignments and Loads. These labels are relatively self-
Information explanatory. The Location tab includes information that locates
dialog box to the area object. The Assignments tab includes information on all
see the data area object assignments except for loads. The Loads tab includes
associated with information on all load assignments to the area object. The items
the tab.
displayed in each of these tabs are detailed in the subsections
below.
Location Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box

The following geometric information about the area object is
displayed on the Location tab:
• Area: This is the total area of the area object in Length2

units.
• Perimeter: This is the total length of the perimeter of

the area object in Length units.
• Centroid X: This is the global X coordinate of the cen-

troid of the area object. This value is only provided for
Floor-type area objects and horizontal Null-type area
objects.
Right Click Information for Area Objects 23 - 7

• Centroid Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the cen-

troid of the area object. This value is only provided for
Floor-type area objects and horizontal Null-type area
objects.
23 • Polar Inertia (Ix + Iy): This is the Ix + Iy value for the
area object calculated about the centroid of the area ob-
ject and reported in Length4 units. This value is only
provided for Floor-type area objects and horizontal Null-
type area objects.
This is essentially the mass moment of inertia (MMI) of

the area object assuming that the mass per unit area of
the object is 1. Note that you multiply the Ix + Iy item by
the mass per unit area of the area object to get the MMI
for the area object. Refer to the general diaphragm
shown in Figure 14-3 in Chapter 14 for more informa-
tion.
• No. of Points: This is the total number of corner points

in the area object.
In addition, for each corner point of the area object the following
information is displayed on the Location tab:
• Point n: Here n in the label varies from 1 to the total

number of corner points. The data entered in this box is
the label of the corner point object.
• Story: This is the story level associated with the corner

point object.
• X: This is the global X coordinate of the corner point

object.
• Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the corner point

object.
• Delta Z: This is the vertical distance from the story level

that the point object is associated with to the point ob-
ject. The value of Delta Z is always between zero and
the value of the story height associated with the point
object, inclusive. Delta Z is always positive even though
it is measured from the story level downward.

Assignments Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box

Following are the items that appear (or in some cases may ap-
pear) on the Assignments tab:
• Shell section prop.: If a wall, slab or deck section prop- 23

erty is not assigned to the object then this item displays
"None." Otherwise it displays the name of the wall, slab
or deck section property. The shell section property is
assigned using the Assign menu > Shell/Area >
Wall/Slab/Deck Section command. See the subsection
titled "Wall, Slab and Deck Section Assignments to Area
Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to Area
• Opening: This item only appears if the area object is

designated as an opening using the Assign menu >
Shell/Area > Openings command. In this case it either
displays "Loaded opening" or "Unloaded opening" de-
pending on the type of opening. See the subsection titled
"Opening Assignments to Area Objects" under the sec-
tion titled "Assignments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14
When an opening is assigned to an area object the only

two assignments shown on the Assignments tab are
Opening and Group. No other assignments are shown on
the tab in this case because no other assignments to the
object are meaningful when it is designated as an open-
ing.
• Rigid diaphragm: If a rigid diaphragm constraint is not

assigned to the object then this item displays No. Other-
wise it displays the name of the rigid diaphragm con-
straint. The rigid diaphragm is assigned using the Assign
menu > Shell/Area > Rigid Diaphragm command. See
the subsection titled "Rigid Diaphragm Assignments to
Area Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to
Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for more information.

• Local axis 2 angle: Refer to the section titled "Default

Area Object Local Axes" later in this chapter for a de-
scription of the default area object local axes. Note that
you can use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Local
23 Axes command to rotate the local 1 and 2 axes from
their default orientation (rotation about the local 3 axis).
If the local 1 and 2 axes have not been rotated from their
default orientation then this item says "Default." Other-
wise it displays "X° from Default" where X is the num-
ber of degrees the axes have been rotated from their de-
fault position. See the subsection titled "Local Axes As-
signments to Area Objects" under the section titled "As-
signments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for more in-
formation.
• Stiffness Modifiers: The default value for the shell

stiffness modifiers is 1 which indicates that no modifi-
cation are made. If all of the shell stiffness modifiers are
1 then this item displays "None." Otherwise this item is
replaced with one or more of the six items listed below.
Any of the six stiffness modifiers that are not 1 are
listed.
ü Stiff. Modifier, f11. If this item is not 1 then the

item and the modifier value are listed.


ü Stiff. Modifier, m11. If this item is not 1 then the



The stiffness modifiers are assigned using the Assign

menu > Shell/Area > Shell Stiffness Modifiers com-
mand. See the subsection titled "Shell Stiffness Modifi-

ers Assignments to Area Objects" under the section titled

"Assignments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for more
information.
• Pier: If a pier label is not assigned to the area object

then this item displays "No." Otherwise it displays the
23
name of the pier label. The pier label is assigned using
the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Pier Label command.
See the subsection titled "Pier Label Assignments to
Area Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to
Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for more information. Note
that pier labels can only be assigned to wall-type area
objects.
• Spandrel: If a spandrel label is not assigned to the area

object then this item displays "No." Otherwise it displays
the name of the spandrel label. The spandrel label is as-
signed using the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Spandrel
Label command. See the subsection titled "Spandrel La-
bel Assignments to Area Objects" under the section ti-
tled "Assignments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14 for
more information. Note that spandrel labels can only be
assigned to wall-type area objects.
• Area Springs: If no area springs are assigned to the ob-

ject then this item displays "None." Otherwise this item
is replaced with one or more of the three items listed
below. Any of the three local directions of the area
springs that has an assignment is listed.
ü Area Spring Local-1. If there is an area spring stiff-

ness assigned in the local 1 direction then this item
and the spring stiffness are listed.



The area springs are assigned using the Assign menu >
Shell/Area > Area Springs command. See the subsec-
tion titled "Area Spring Assignments to Area Objects"
under the section titled "Assignments to Area Objects"
23 in Chapter 14 for more information.
• Area Mass: If an additional area mass is not assigned to

the object then this item displays "None." Otherwise it
displays the value of the additional area mass. The area
mass is assigned using the Assign menu > Shell/Area >
Additional Area Mass command. See the subsection ti-
tled "Additional Area Mass Assignments to Area Ob-
jects" under the section titled "Assignments to Area Ob-
jects" in Chapter 14 for more information.
Note that the area mass value is displayed here regard-

less of the mass source you have specified using the De-
fine menu > Mass Source command. If you designate
that the mass source is from a specified load combina-
tion then the value shown here is not used by the pro-
gram. See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11
and the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more in-
formation.
• Automatic Mesh: This item indicates whether or not the

area object is automatically meshed into the analysis
model by ETABS. It displays either Yes or No. See
Chapter 30 and the subsection titled "Automatic Mem-
brane Floor Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to Area Ob-
jects" under the section titled "Assignments to Area Ob-
Note that ETABS can only automatically mesh floor-

type area objects with membrane properties only into the
analysis model.
• Group: This item displays the groups that the object

belongs to. By default in ETABS all objects belong to
the default group called ALL. You can not delete the
group named ALL and you can not remove an object
from the group. Thus even if you have not assigned the
area object to any groups you will see ALL for this item
indicating that it belongs to the ALL group. If you have

assigned the object to one or more groups then addi-

tional Group lines are provided, one for each group to
which you have assigned the object.
Loads Tab in the Area Information Dialog Box

23
Following are the items that may appear on the Loads tab:
• Load: If no loads are assigned to the area object then

this displays "None." Otherwise this item is not dis-
played.
• Static Load Case: This line indicates the name of the

static load case to which the load(s) listed on the imme-
diately following line(s) of the Loads tab is (are) applied.
For area objects either uniform or temperature loads may
be listed. The bulleted items below list the area object
loads you may see immediately following the Static
Load Case line. One or more of these load lines may be
listed for each static load case depending on the assign-
ments you have made.
Note that the area object loads are assigned using the
Assign menu > Shell/Area Loads command.
ü Uniform F1: This line indicates the value of a uni-

form surface load in the local 1-axis direction of the
area object that is assigned to the object.


ü Uniform FX: This line indicates the value of a uni-

form surface load in the global X direction that is as-
signed to the area object.

ü Uniform FY: This line indicates the value of a uni-

form surface load in the global Y direction that is as-
signed to the area object.
23 ü Uniform FGrav: This line indicates the value of a

uniform surface load in the gravity (negative global
Z) direction that is assigned to the area object.
ü Uniform FX Proj: This line indicates the value of a

uniform projected surface load in the global X di-
rection that is assigned to the area object.
ü Uniform FY Proj: This line indicates the value of a

uniform projected surface load in the global Y di-
rection that is assigned to the area object.
ü Uniform FGrav Proj: This line indicates the value

of a uniform projected surface load in the Gravity
(negative global Z) direction that is assigned to the
area object.
ü Temperature: This line indicates the value of a

temperature change that is assigned to the area ob-
ject.
ü Add Point Temp: This line indicates whether or not

you have indicated that ETABS is to consider previ-
ously specified point object temperature changes at
the corners of the area object. This line either dis-
plays "Yes" or "No."
Static load case names are defined using the Define

menu > Static Load Cases command. See the section
titled "Static Load Cases" in Chapter 11 for more infor-
mation on static load cases.
Uniform surface loads are assigned to area objects using

the Assign menu > Shell/Area Loads > Uniform com-
mand. See the subsection titled "Uniform Surface Load
Assignments to Area Objects" under the section titled
information.

Temperature loads are assigned to area objects using the

Assign menu > Shell/Area Loads > Temperature
command. See the subsection titled "Temperature Load
Assignments to Area Objects" under the section titled
information.
23
Overlapping Area Objects

When drawing area objects to create your model you can overlap
(intersect) them and you can draw one area object inside another.
However, when your model is complete and ready for analysis
the following restrictions must be met. If these restrictions are
not met, then an error will occur when you run the analysis.
• No two area objects of any kind can intersect. Intersect-

ing area objects occur when the line representing an edge
of one area object intersects the line representing an edge
of another area object. The sketch to the left shows an
example of two intersecting area objects.
• An area object with structural properties (wall, slab or

deck properties assigned) can not be enclosed by another
area object with structural properties. The sketch to the
left shows an example of on area object that is enclosed
by another. It is acceptable for a null-type area object to
be completely enclosed by another area object (of any
type).
• Area objects designated as openings must be completely

enclosed by an area object that ETABS is going to
automatically mesh into the analysis model. Note that
ETABS only automatically meshes area objects with
deck section properties and area objects with slab section
properties that have membrane behavior only into the
analysis model. Further note that ETABS only automati-
cally meshes these types of area objects as long as you
have not specified that they are not to be meshed.
Overlapping Area Objects 23 - 15

• Two area objects with different rigid diaphragm assign-

ments can not intersect, be one inside the other or have a
common edge. The sketch to the left shows an example
of two area objects with a common edge.
23 Important note: To reiterate, the above restrictions only apply
when the analysis is ready to be run. They do not apply while
you are in the process of creating the model.
Following is some other useful information about overlapping

area objects:
• When one null-type area object is completely enclosed

by another area object of any type, any loads on the two
objects are additive.

by another area object of any type, additional area mass
on the two objects is additive.

by another area object of any type, any area spring stiff-
nesses on the two objects are additive.
Plan Views of Walls

Tip: In a plan view of a story level, vertical area objects below that
are assigned wall properties appear as lines that represent a plan
You can draw
section (to scale) through the wall. While in a plan view you can
and/or select a
wall in plan
use either the Draw menu > Draw Area Objects > Draw Walls
view. (plan) command or the Draw menu > Draw Area Objects >
Create Walls in Region or at Click (plan) command, or one of
the associated toolbar buttons on the side toolbar to draw walls.
This is a very convenient method for drawing walls. See the sec-
tion titled "Drawing Area Objects" in Chapter 12 for more in-
formation.
23 - 16 Plan Views of Walls

Default Area Object Local Axes

The following subsections describe the default local axes orien-
tation for vertical, horizontal and other (neither vertical nor hori-
zontal) area objects. Note that you can use the Assign menu >
23
Shell/Area > Local Axes command to rotate the local 1 and 2
axes about the local 3 axes from their default orientation.
Default Orientation for Horizontal Area Objects

Tip: For horizontal area objects the local axes have the following de-
When local fault orientation:
axes are dis-
played on the • Local axis 1: This axis is in the plane of the area object.
screen local The positive local 1 axis is in the same direction as the
axis 1 is red, positive global X-axis.
local axis 2 is
white and local • Local axis 2: This axis is in the plane of the area object.
axis 3 is blue, The positive local 2 axis is in the same direction as the
always. This is positive global Y-axis.
the same order
as the colors of • Local axis 3: This axis is perpendicular to the plane of
the American the area object. The positive local 3 axis points upward.
flag: red, white It is in the same direction as the positive global Z-axis.
and blue.
Default Orientation for Vertical Area Objects

For vertical area objects the local axes have the following default
Tip: orientation:
You can toggle
on a view of the • Local axis 1: This axis is in the plane of the area object.
area object The positive local 1 axis is in the same direction as the
local axes using positive global Z-axis, upward.
the View menu
> Set Building • Local axis 2: This axis is in the plane of the area object.
View Options The projection of the positive local 2 axis onto the global
command or X-axis is in the same direction as the positive global X-
using the axis. If the area object is in the global YZ plane such that
Set Building there is no projection onto the global X-axis then the
View Options positive direction of the local 2 axis is parallel to the
button. positive global Y-axis.
Default Area Object Local Axes 23 - 17

• Local axis 3: This axis is perpendicular to the plane of

the area object. Its direction is determined from applying
the right-hand rule using the directions of the 1 and 2
axes described above. See the section titled “The Right
23 Hand Rule” later in this chapter for more information.
Default Orientation for Other Area Objects

For area objects that are not vertical and are not horizontal (for
example, ramp-type are objects) the local axes have the follow-
ing default orientation:
• Local axis 1: This axis is in the plane of the area object.

The positive local 1 axis is in the same direction as the
• Local axis 2: This axis is in the plane of the area object.

Its direction is determined from applying the right-hand
rule using the directions of the 1 and 3 axes. See the
section titled “The Right Hand Rule” later in this chapter
• Local axis 3: This axis is perpendicular to the plane of

the area object. The positive local 3 axis has an upward
sense. The projection of the positive local 3 axis onto the
global Z-axis is in the same direction as the positive
global Z-axis, upward.
The Right Hand Rule

The right hand rule is used for two main purposes. One is to de-
termine the positive directions of coordinate system axes. The
other is to determine the positive direction of moments and rota-
tions in a coordinate system.
Important note: Do not confuse the positive direction of mo-

ments in a coordinate system with the positive directions for
analysis output forces. The positive directions for analysis output
forces are described for various elements in Chapters 34 through
39.
23 - 18 The Right Hand Rule

Positive Direction of Coordinate System Axes

The global (X-Y-Z) and local (1-2-3) coordinate systems used in
ETABS are right handed coordinate systems. The right hand rule
23
applies in these coordinate systems. Following is an explanation
of the right hand rule as it applies to coordinate system axes in
ETABS.
Global Coordinate System

Tip: • Take your right hand and point your thumb in the direc-
tion of the positive global Z-axis. Your fingers then wrap
As silly as it
may sound,
in such a way that they push the positive global X-axis
make sure you into the positive global Y-axis. This is illustrated in Fig-
are using your ure 23-2a.
right hand and
not your left • Take your right hand and point your thumb in the direc-
hand when ap- tion of the positive global Y-axis. Your fingers then
plying the right wrap in such a way that they push the positive global Z-
hand rule. A axis into the positive global X-axis.
common mis-
take when you • Take your right hand and point your thumb in the direc-
are in a hurry tion of the positive global X-axis. Your fingers then
is to use the wrap in such a way that they push the positive global Y-
wrong hand. axis into the positive global Z-axis.
Local Coordinate System

• Take your right hand and point your thumb in the direc-
tion of the positive global 3-axis. Your fingers then wrap
in such a way that they push the positive global 1-axis
into the positive global 2-axis. This is illustrated in Fig-
ure 23-2b.
into the positive global 1-axis.
into the positive global 3-axis.
The Right Hand Rule 23 - 19

Figure 23-2: Z 3
Illustrations of the Y 2
right hand rule
23
X 1
a) Thumb points in +Z-direction b) Thumb points in +3-direction

and fingers wrap +X axis and fingers wrap +1 axis into
into +Y axis +2 axis
Z Arrow shows direction

of positive moment
about the Z-axis
X
c) Thumb points in +Z-direction
and fingers wrap in direction of
positive moment abot the Z-axis
Positive Direction of Moments in a Coordinate System

The positive direction of forces in a coordinate system is the
same as the positive direction of the coordinate system axes. The
positive direction of moments is determined by applying the
right hand rule as described below.
tion of the positive global Z-axis. Your fingers then wrap
around the positive global Z-axis in the direction of a
23 - 20 The Right Hand Rule

positive moment about the global Z-axis. This is illus-

trated in Figure 23-2c.
• The same concept applies to the global X, global Y, lo-

cal 1, local 2 and local 3 axes.
23
The Right Hand Rule 23 - 21

24
Chapter 24
Line Objects
General
Line objects are defined by two end points connected by a
straight-line segment. You can right click on a line object to
bring up the Line Information dialog box where you can view in-
formation about the line including its length, exact location and
assignments. See the section titled “Right Click Information for
Line Objects” later in this chapter for more information.
Frame Section Properties

ETABS has a built-in frame section property called CSEC1
which is a 12 inch by 24 inch solid concrete element. It also has
five default auto select section property lists named LatCol,
LatBm, GravCol, GravBm, and SecBm. The CSEC1 property
and the five auto select section property lists can not be deleted.
They can however be modified, except you can't change the ma-
terial property (concrete) associated with CSEC1. You can also
define other section properties and auto select section lists. For
24 - 1
additional information on auto select section lists see the subsec-

tion titled “Adding User-Defined Frame Section Properties” in
the section titled “Frame Section Properties” in Chapter 11 of
this manual.
24 Auto select section lists are used in the Steel Frame Design and
Composite Beam Design postprocessors. Thus the five auto se-
lect section lists are filled with steel section properties. You can
delete steel sections from the five default auto selection lists as
long as you leave at least one steel section in each of them. In
other words you can not delete the last steel section from any of
the five default auto select section lists.
You can also add as many sections as you want to these lists. We
recommend that for optimum performance of the design postpro-
cessors (speed) you try to limit the number of sections you in-
clude in an auto select section list. Putting between 10 and 40
sections is quite reasonable for an auto select section list. Putting
all of the sections in the AISC database is not a great idea,
though it is possible.
The five default auto select section lists are used as default sec-
tions in the steel structure template that is available when you
click the File menu > New Model command or the Edit menu >
Add to Model from Template > Add 3D Frame command.
The CSEC1 concrete section is used as the default section in the

concrete structure templates that are available when you click the
File menu > New Model command or the Edit menu > Add to
Model from Template > Add 3D Frame command.
We recommend that you modify these five default auto select

section lists and the CSEC1 section to best suit your own pur-
poses and save them in the Default.edb file. Use the Define
menu > Frame Sections command to modify the section prop-
erties. See the subsection titled "Initialization of a New Model"
in the section titled “Starting a New Model” in Chapter 8 for
more information on the important topic of the Default.edb file
and other initialization files.

Chapter 24 - Line Objects
Line Object Labeling and Line Type

When you first draw a line object ETABS assigns a line type and
a label to the line object. ETABS also assigns a section property
to the line object as it is drawn. You can control the section
property assigned when the object is drawn through the floating
Properties of Object box. See the section titled "Drawing Line
24
Objects" in Chapter 12 for more information on this method of
line object property assignment. Property assignments can be
modified later by selecting the line object and clicking the As-
sign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section command. See the
subsection titled "Frame Section Assignments to Line Objects"
in Chapter 14 for more information on this method of assigning
and modifying line object properties.
The following two subsections discuss the line type and label as-
signments.
Line Type
If a frame section property is not assigned to the line object as it
is drawn then the section is assigned a line type of "Null." If a
frame section property is assigned to the line object as it is drawn
Note: then the section is assigned a line type of either "Column",
Line objects are
"Beam" or "Brace." The following logic is used to determine
always given a which of these frame types to assign:
line type by
ETABS based • Column: If the line object is vertical (parallel to the
on their orien- global Z-axis) then it is given a line type of "Column."
tation and
property as- • Beam: If the line object is horizontal (parallel to the
signment. The global X-Y plane) then it is given a line type of "Beam."
possible line
types are Col- • Brace: If the line object is not vertical and not horizontal
umn, Beam, then it is given a line type of "Brace."
Brace and Null.
The line type is used to determine the prefix used in the auto-
matic labeling of the line object, as described in the following
subsection. The line type also determines how objects may be
treated for design.
Line Object Labeling and Line Type 24 - 3

You can not directly change the line type associated with a line
object. However, if you change the orientation of the object then
ETABS automatically changes the line type. For example, sup-
pose you have a line object defined in a horizontal plane. This is
given an line type of Beam by ETABS. Now suppose you drop
24 one of the end points of the line object one story level to create a
sloping line object. ETABS immediately changes the line type
for the object from Beam to Brace. As mentioned in the follow-
ing subsection, the label is also changed.
Automatic Line Object Labeling

ETABS automatically labels line objects based on their line type
as follows:
• Line objects with a line type of Column are given a label

starting with the letter C followed by a number, such as
C21.
Note: • Line objects with a line type of Beam are given a label
starting with the letter B followed by a number, such as
ETABS auto-
B21.
matically labels
line objects.
• Line objects with a line type of Brace are given a label
starting with the letter D followed by a number, such as
D21. The letter D stands for diagonal. The letter B for
brace is not used because B is already used for beams.
• Line objects with a line type of Null are given a label

starting with the letter L followed by a number, such as
L21. The letter L stands for line.
If the line type of a line object changes then ETABS automati-

cally relabels the line object using the correct designation as de-
scribed above. There are no exceptions to this rule.
In general you can not assign your own labels to line objects.
text file can have line object labels different from the automatic
cause the line type assigned to a line object to change, or move
the line object, ETABS will automatically relabel the object.
24 - 4 Line Object Labeling and Line Type


the same label to line objects located at the same plan location
but at different story levels. Note that line objects are always
ample line object B2 at one level will be directly above line ob-
24
ject B2 at another story level.
automatically relabel all area, line and point objects. See the sub-
section titled "Relabeling Objects" in Chapter 23 for additional
information on this.
Assignments Made to Line Objects

As previously mentioned you can assign specific section proper-
ties to line objects as you draw them. The properties assigned are
controlled through the floating Properties of Object box. See the
section titled "Drawing Line Objects" in Chapter 12 for more in-
formation.
You can modify previous section property assignments and make

many other types of assignments to line objects through the As-
sign menu. The types of line object assignments you can make
include:
Tip: • Assign frame section properties.

To make an • Assign frame member end releases or partial end fixity.
assignment to a
line object first • Assign end offsets (rigid or flexible) along the length of
select the object
frame members to model the finite size of beam-column
and then click
the appropriate joints.
command on
the Assign • Assign frame member end joint offsets to model such
menu. conditions as a beam framing into a column eccentrically
(off center).
Assignments Made to Line Objects 24 - 5

• Designate frame output stations. These are locations

along a frame element where output forces are calculated
and design is performed.
• Specify the line object local axes orientation.

24 • Specify frame property modifiers.
• Assign link element properties.
• Assign frame nonlinear hinges (pushover).
• Assign pier labels.
• Assign spandrel labels.
• Assign line spring supports.
• Assign additional line mass (if the mass source is speci-

fied as From Element and Additional Masses using the
Define menu > Mass Source command).
• Indicate if a frame element is not to be automatically

meshed by ETABS.
• Assign point loads along line objects.
• Assign distributed (uniform and trapezoidal) loads along

line objects.
• Assign temperature loads.
Use either the Assign menu > Frame/Line or the Assign menu
> Frame/Line Loads command to make these assignments. See
the section titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14
24 - 6 Assignments Made to Line Objects

Right Click Information for Line Objects

Right click on a line object to view useful information that iden-
tifies the object, describes its location and reveals its assign-
ments. Right clicking on a line object means to position your
mouse pointer over the object and click the right (not left as you
24
usually do) button on the mouse. When you do this the Line In-
formation dialog box appears.
Tip: The units drop-down box in the Line Information dialog box al-
lows you to change the current units without leaving the dialog
Right click on a
box. Any change in units that you make while in this dialog box
line object to
view useful
is permanent; that is, the change remains when you exit the dia-
information log box.
that identifies
the object, de- The area at the top of the Line Information dialog box that is
scribes its lo- named Identification provides basic information that identifies
cation and re- the line object. This information includes:
veals its as-
signments. • Label: This is the line object label assigned by ETABS.
See the previous subsection in this chapter titled "Auto-
matic Line Object Labeling" for more information.
• Story: This is the story level associated with the line

object.
• Line Type: This is the line object type. It can be Col-

umn, Beam, Brace or Null. See the previous subsection
in this chapter titled "Line Type" for more information.
• Design Procedure: This item shows which design post-

processor the line object is tagged to be designed by. For
line objects the choices for this item are either Steel
Frame Design, Concrete Frame Design, Composite
Beam Design or Null. If desired, use the Design menu >
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure command to
change the Design Procedure for frame elements. See the
section titled "Overwrite Frame Design Procedure" in
The Line Information dialog box also has three different tabs lo-
cated just above the Identification area. Each of these tabs dis-
Right Click Information for Line Objects 24 - 7

plays different types of information. The tabs are labeled Loca-

tion, Assignments and Loads. These labels are relatively self-
explanatory. The Location tab includes information that locates
the line object. The Assignments tab includes information on all
line object assignments except for loads. The Loads tab includes
24 information on all load assignments to the line object. The items
displayed in each of these tabs are detailed in the subsections
below.
Location Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box

Tip: The following geometric information about the line object is dis-
played on the Location tab:
Click on a tab
in the Line In- • Length: This is the total end point to end point length of
formation dia-
the line object.
log box to see
the data asso-
ciated with the
• Start point (I): The data entered in this box is the label
tab. of the end point object at the start end (i-end) of the line.
• End point (J): The data entered in this box is the label
of the end point object at the ending end (j-end) of the
line.
In addition, for the start and end points of the line object the fol-
lowing information is displayed on the Location tab:
• Story: This is the story level associated with the point

object at the designated end of the line object.
• X: This is the global X coordinate of the point object at

the designated end of the line object.
• Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the point object at

the designated end of the line object.

that the designated point object is associated with to the
point object. The value of Delta Z is always between
zero and the value of the story height associated with the
point object, inclusive. Delta Z is always positive even
though it is measured from the story level downward.
24 - 8 Right Click Information for Line Objects

Assignments Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box

• Section property: If a frame section property is not as-

signed to the object then this item displays "None." Oth- 24
erwise it displays the name of the frame section prop-
erty. If the frame section property assigned is an auto
select list then the name of the current analysis section
property is displayed along with the name of the auto
select list in parenthesis. The frame section property is
assigned using the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Frame Section command. See the subsection titled
"Frame Section Assignments to Line Objects" under the
section titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter
14 for more information.
• Releases: If there are no frame element end releases as-

signed to the line object then this line says "None." If
any releases are assigned to the object then the Releases
line is replaced with one or both of the lines listed be-
low. The frame element end releases are assigned using
leases/Partial Fixity command. See the subsection titled
"Frame Releases and Partial Fixity Assignments to Line
Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to Line
ü Releases End-I: This line lists whatever releases are

assigned to the i-end of the frame element. If no re-
leases exist at the i-end then this line is not dis-
played. The possible releases are P (axial), V2 (shear
in the local 2 direction, also known as major shear),
V3 (shear in the local 3 direction, also known as mi-
nor shear), T (torsion), M2 (moment about the local
2-axis, also known as minor moment), and M3
(moment about the local 3-axis, also known as major
moment).

ü Releases End-j: This line lists whatever releases are

assigned to the j-end of the frame element. If no re-
leases exist at the j-end then this line is not dis-
played. The possible releases are the same as those
listed in the bullet item above for the i-end.
24 • Partial fixity springs: If there are no frame element
partial fixity springs assigned to the line object then this
line says "None." If any partial fixity springs are as-
signed to the object then the Partial fixity springs line is
replaced with one or more of the lines listed below. The
frame element partial fixity springs are assigned using
leases/Partial Fixity command. See the subsection titled
"Frame Releases and Partial Fixity Assignments to Line
ü End-I spring P: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the P (axial) partial fixity spring at the i-end of
the line object.
ü End-I spring V2: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the V2 (shear in the local 2 direction, also known
as major shear) partial fixity spring at the i-end of
the line object.
ü End-I spring V3: This line lists the spring stiffness

as minor shear) partial fixity spring at the i-end of
the line object.
ü End-I spring T: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the T (torsion) partial fixity spring at the i-end of
the line object.
ü End-I spring M2: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the M2 (moment about the local 2-axis, also
known as minor moment) partial fixity spring at the
i-end of the line object.

ü End-I spring M3: This line lists the spring stiffness

known as major moment) partial fixity spring at the
i-end of the line object.
ü End-J spring P: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the P (axial) partial fixity spring at the j-end of 24
the line object.
ü End-J spring V2: This line lists the spring stiffness

as major shear) partial fixity spring at the j-end of
the line object.
ü End-J spring V3: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the V3 (shear in the local 3direction, also known
as minor shear) partial fixity spring at the j-end of
the line object.
ü End-J spring T: This line lists the spring stiffness

for the T (torsion) partial fixity spring at the j-end of
the line object.
ü End-J spring M2: This line lists the spring stiffness

known as minor moment) partial fixity spring at the
j-end of the line object.
ü End-J spring M3: This line lists the spring stiffness

known as major moment) partial fixity spring at the
j-end of the line object.
• End length offsets: If there are no frame element end

length offsets (both set to zero) then this line says
"None." If they are specified to be automatically deter-
mined by ETABS then this line says "Automatic." If any
non-zero end length offsets are assigned to the object
then this line says "Defined" and the three additional
lines listed below also appear. The frame element end
length offsets are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets command. See the
subsection titled "Rigid End Offsets Along the Length of
Frame Elements" under the subsection titled "Frame

Rigid Offset Assignments to Line Objects" under the

ü End-I length offset: This is the length of the end

24 offset along the length of the frame element at the i-
end of the element.
ü End-J length offset: This is the length of the end

offset along the length of the frame element at the j-
end of the element.
ü Rigid zone factor: This is the rigid zone factor, that

is, the proportion of the end offset length that is
treated as rigid.
• Joint offsets: If there are no frame joint offsets assigned

to the line object then this line says "None." If any joint
offset is assigned to the object then the Joint offsets line
is replaced with one or more of the lines listed below.
The frame element joint offsets are assigned using the
Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Rigid Offsets
command. See the subsection titled "Rigid Frame Joint
Offsets" under the subsection titled "Frame Rigid Offset
Assignments to Line Objects" under the section titled
"Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for more
information.
ü End-I joint offset X: This is the joint offset of the i-

end of the frame element in the global X direction.
ü End-I joint offset Y: This is the joint offset of the i-

end of the frame element in the global Y direction.
ü End-I joint offset Z: This is the joint offset of the i-

end of the frame element in the global Z direction.
ü End-J joint offset X: This is the joint offset of the j-

end of the frame element in the global X direction.

ü End-J joint offset Y: This is the joint offset of the j-

end of the frame element in the global Y direction.
ü End-J joint offset Z: This is the joint offset of the j-

end of the frame element in the global Z direction.
• Min number stations: This item is displayed if the out- 24

put stations along the frame element are specified by a
minimum number of stations. It indicates the minimum
number of output stations to be used for the frame ele-
ment. If this item is not displayed then the Max. station
spacing item is displayed. The frame element output sta-
tion parameters are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Output Stations command. See
the subsection titled "Frame Output Station Assignments
to Line Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to
Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for more information.
• Max. station spacing: This item is displayed if the out-

put stations along the frame element are specified by a
maximum station spacing. It indicates the maximum
spacing of output stations to be used along the frame
element. If this item is not displayed then the Min. num-
ber stations item is displayed. The frame element output
station parameters are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Output Stations command. See
the subsection titled "Frame Output Station Assignments
• Local axis 2 angle: Refer to the section titled "Default

Line Object Local Axes" later in this chapter for a de-
scription of the default line object local axes. Note that
you can use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Local
Axes command to rotate the local 2 and 3 from their de-
fault orientation axes (rotation about the local 1-axis). If
the local 2 and 3 axes have not been rotated from their
default orientation then this item says "Default." Other-
wise it displays "X° from Default" where X is the num-
ber of degrees the axes have been rotated from their de-
fault position. See the subsection titled "Local Axes As-
signments to Line Objects" under the section titled "As-

signments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for more in-

formation.
• Property modifiers: If there are no frame property

modifiers assigned to the line object then this line says
24 "None." If any frame property modifier is assigned to the
object then the Property modifiers line is replaced with
one or more of the lines listed below. The frame prop-
erty modifiers are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Frame Property Modifiers command.
See the subsection titled "Frame Property Modifier As-
signments to Line Objects" under the section titled "As-
signments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for more in-
formation.
ü Prop. modifier, Area: This is the frame property

modifier for the axial area.
ü Prop. modifier, A2: This is the frame property

modifier for the shear area in the local 2-axis direc-
tion.
ü Prop. modifier, A3: This is the frame property

modifier for the shear area in the local 3-axis direc-
tion.
ü Prop. modifier, J: This is the frame property modi-

fier for the torsional constant.
ü Prop. modifier, I2: This is the frame property

modifier for the moment of inertia about the local 2-
axis.
ü Prop. modifier, I3: This is the frame property

modifier for the moment of inertia about the local 3-
axis.

• Link properties: If a link element property is not as-

signed to the object then this item displays "None." Oth-
erwise it displays the name of an assigned link element
property. Note that you can assign more than one link
element property to the same line object. The assign-
ments are additive; they do not replace one another.
When more than one link element is assigned to a line
24
object multiple Link properties lines are used, one for
each property. The link element property is assigned
using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Link Proper-
ties command. See the subsection titled "Link Property
information.
• Nonlinear hinges: If a nonlinear hinge (pushover) prop-

erty is not assigned to the object then this item displays
"None." Otherwise it displays the name of an assigned
nonlinear hinge and its location along the line object
measured from the i-end of the object. Note that you can
assign more than one nonlinear hinge to the same line
object. The assignments are additive; they do not replace
one another. When more than one nonlinear hinge is as-
signed to a line object multiple Nonlinear Hinge lines
are used, one for each hinge. The nonlinear hinge is as-
signed using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame
Nonlinear Hinges command. See the subsection titled
"Frame Nonlinear Hinge Assignments to Line Objects"
under the section titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in
• Pier: If a pier label is not assigned to the line object then

this item displays "No." Otherwise it displays the name
of the pier label. The pier label is assigned using the As-
sign menu > Frame/Line > Pier Label command. See
the subsection titled "Pier Label Assignments to Line

• Spandrel: If a spandrel label is not assigned to the line

object then this item displays "No." Otherwise it displays
the name of the spandrel label. The spandrel label is as-
signed using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Span-
drel Label command. See the subsection titled "Span-
24 drel Label Assignments to Line Objects" under the sec-
tion titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14
• Line Springs: If no line springs are assigned to the ob-

ject then this item displays "None." Otherwise this item
is replaced with one or more of the three items listed
below. Any of the three local directions of the line
springs that has an assignment is listed.
ü Line Spring Local-1. If there is a line spring stiff-

ü Area Spring Local-2. If there is a line spring stiff-

ü Area Spring Local-3. If there is a line spring stiff-

The line springs are assigned using the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Line Springs command. See the subsec-
tion titled "Line Spring Assignments to Line Objects"
under the section titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in
• Line Mass: If an additional line mass is not assigned to

the object then this item displays "None." Otherwise it
displays the value of the additional line mass. The line
mass is assigned using the Assign menu > Frame/Line
> Additional Line Mass command. See the subsection
titled "Additional Line Mass Assignments to Line Ob-
jects" under the section titled "Assignments to Line Ob-

Note that the line mass value is displayed here regardless

of the mass source you have specified using the Define
menu > Mass Source command. If you designate that
the mass source is from a specified load combination
then the value shown here is not used by the program.
See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11 and
the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more infor-
24
mation.
• Automatic Mesh: This item indicates whether or not the

line object is automatically meshed by ETABS. It dis-
plays either Yes or No. See Chapter 30 and the subsec-
tion titled "Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh Assign-
ments to Line Objects" under the section titled "Assign-
ments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for more informa-
tion.

line object to any groups you will see ALL for this item
indicating that it belongs to the ALL group. If you have
Loads Tab in the Line Information Dialog Box

• Load: If no loads are assigned to the line object then this

displays "None." Otherwise this item is not displayed.

For line objects either point, uniform, trapezoidal or
temperature loads may be listed. The bulleted items be-
low list the line object loads you may see immediately
following the Static Load Case line. One or more of

these load lines may be listed for each static load case
depending on the assignments you have made.
Note that the line object loads are assigned using the As-
sign menu > Frame/Line Loads command. Both uni-
24 form and trapezoidal loads are assigned using the Assign
menu > Frame/Line Loads > Distributed command.
See the subsection titled "Distributed Load Assignments
ü Point F1: This line indicates the value of the point

force load in the local 1-axis direction and its loca-
tion along the line object measured from the i-end of
the object.

the object.

the object.
ü Point FX: This line indicates the value of the point

force load in the global X-axis direction and its lo-
cation along the line object measured from the i-end
of the object.
ü Point FY: This line indicates the value of the point

force load in the global Y-axis direction and its lo-
cation along the line object measured from the i-end
of the object.
ü Point FGrav: This line indicates the value of the

point force load in the gravity (negative global Z-
axis) direction and its location along the line object
measured from the i-end of the object.

ü Point M1: This line indicates the value of the point

moment load about the local 1-axis and its location
along the line object measured from the i-end of the
object.

moment load about the local 2-axis and its location 24
object.

moment load about the local 3-axis and its location
object.
ü Point MX: This line indicates the value of the point

moment load about the global X-axis and its location
object.
ü Point MY: This line indicates the value of the point

moment load about the global Y-axis and its location
object.
ü Point MGrav: This line indicates the value of the

point moment load about the gravity (negative
global Z-axis) direction and its location along the
line object measured from the i-end of the object.
ü Uniform F1: This line indicates the value of the uni-

form force load applied to the line object in the local
1-axis direction along its entire length.



ü Uniform FX: This line indicates the value of the

uniform force load applied to the line object in the
global X-axis direction along its entire length.
ü Uniform FY: This line indicates the value of the

24 uniform force load applied to the line object in the
global Y-axis direction along its entire length.
ü Uniform FGrav: This line indicates the value of the

uniform force load applied to the line object in the
gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction along its
entire length.
ü Uniform FX Proj: This line indicates the value of

the projected uniform force load applied to the line
object in the global X-axis direction.
ü Uniform FY Proj: This line indicates the value of

the projected uniform force load applied to the line
object in the global Y-axis direction.
ü Uniform FGrav Proj: This line indicates the value

of the projected uniform force load applied to the
line object in the Gravity (negative global Z-axis) di-
rection.
ü Uniform M1: This line indicates the value of the

uniform moment load applied to the line object
about the local 1-axis along its entire length.


ü Uniform MX: This line indicates the value of the

about the global X-axis direction along its entire
length.

ü Uniform MY: This line indicates the value of the

about the global Y-axis direction along its entire
length.
ü Uniform MGrav: This line indicates the value of

the uniform moment load applied to the line object 24
about the gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction
along its entire length.
ü Start Trap F1: This line indicates the value at the

start point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal distrib-
uted force load applied to the line object in the local
1-axis direction. It also indicates the location of the
start point measured from the i-end of the line ob-
ject.

ject.

ject.
ü Start Trap FX: This line indicates the value at the

uted force load applied to the line object in the
global X-axis direction. It also indicates the location
of the start point measured from the i-end of the line
object.
ü Start Trap FY: This line indicates the value at the

global Y-axis direction. It also indicates the location

of the start point measured from the i-end of the line

object.
ü Start Trap FGrav: This line indicates the value at

the start point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal
24 distributed force load applied to the line object in the
Gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction. It also in-
dicates the location of the start point measured from
the i-end of the line object.
ü Start Trap FX Proj: This line indicates the value at

the start point of a linear portion of a projected
trapezoidal distributed force load applied to the line
object in the global X-axis direction. It also indicates
the location of the start point measured from the i-
end of the line object.
ü Start Trap FY Proj: This line indicates the value at

the start point of a linear portion of a projected
object in the global Y-axis direction. It also indicates
the location of the start point measured from the i-
ü Start Trap FGrav Proj: This line indicates the

value at the start point of a linear portion of a pro-
jected trapezoidal distributed force load applied to
the line object in the Gravity (negative global Z-
axis) direction. It also indicates the location of the
ject.
ü End Trap F1: This line indicates the value at the

end point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal distrib-
end point measured from the i-end of the line object.



ü End Trap FX: This line indicates the value at the 24

global X-axis direction. It also indicates the location
of the end point measured from the i-end of the line
object.
ü End Trap FY: This line indicates the value at the

global Y-axis direction. It also indicates the location
of the end point measured from the i-end of the line
object.
ü End Trap FGrav: This line indicates the value at

the end point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal dis-
tributed force load applied to the line object in the
Gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction. It also in-
dicates the location of the end point measured from
the i-end of the line object.
ü End Trap FX Proj: This line indicates the value at

the end point of a linear portion of a projected trape-
zoidal distributed force load applied to the line ob-
ject in the global X-axis direction. It also indicates
the location of the end point measured from the i-
ü End Trap FY Proj: This line indicates the value at

the end point of a linear portion of a projected trape-
zoidal distributed force load applied to the line ob-
ject in the global Y-axis direction. It also indicates
the location of the end point measured from the i-

ü End Trap FGrav Proj: This line indicates the value

at the end point of a linear portion of a projected
object in the Gravity (negative global Z-axis) direc-
tion. It also indicates the location of the end point
24 measured from the i-end of the line object.
ü Start Trap M1: This line indicates the value at the

uted moment load applied to the line object about
the local 1-axis. It also indicates the location of the
ject.

ject.

the local 3-axisn. It also indicates the location of the
ject.
ü Start Trap MX: This line indicates the value at the

the global X-axis. It also indicates the location of the
ject.
ü Start Trap MY: This line indicates the value at the

the global Y-axis. It also indicates the location of the
ject.

ü Start Trap MGrav: This line indicates the value at

the start point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal
distributed moment load applied to the line object
about the Gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction.
It also indicates the location of the start point meas-
ured from the i-end of the line object.
24
ü End Trap M1: This line indicates the value at the


the local 3-axisn. It also indicates the location of the
ü End Trap MX: This line indicates the value at the

the global X-axis. It also indicates the location of the
ü End Trap MY: This line indicates the value at the

the global Y-axis. It also indicates the location of the
ü End Trap MGrav: This line indicates the value at

the end point of a linear portion of a trapezoidal dis-
tributed moment load applied to the line object about
the Gravity (negative global Z-axis) direction. It also
indicates the location of the end point measured
from the i-end of the line object.

ü Temperature: This line indicates the value of a

temperature change that is assigned to the line ob-
ject.
ü Add Point Temp: This line indicates whether or not

24 you have indicated that ETABS is to consider previ-
ously specified point object temperature changes at
the ends of the line object. This line either displays
"Yes" or "No."

Point loads are assigned to line objects using the Assign

menu > Frame/Line Loads > Point command. See the
subsection titled "Point Load Assignments to Line Ob-
jects" under the section titled "Assignments to Line Ob-
Uniform and trapezoidal loads are assigned to line ob-

jects using the Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads >
Distributed command. See the subsection titled "Dis-
tributed Load Assignments to Line Objects" under the
Temperature loads are assigned to line objects using the

Assign menu > Frame/Line Loads > Temperature
information.
Overlapping Line Objects

Line objects can typically cross over each other but in general it
is preferred, and in some cases required, that line objects do not
lie one on top of the other. Figure 24-1 shows some examples.
24 - 26 Overlapping Line Objects

Figure 24-1:
Crossing (intersect-
ing) and overlapping
line objects
24
a) As Modeled b) Internal to ETABS
Crossing Line Objects
3 4
1 2
0"
Overlapping Line Objects
Figure 24-1a shows two crossing line objects as they might ap-
pear in your ETABS model. If these line objects are assigned
frame section properties then ETABS assumes that the frame
sections are connected where they intersect and internally pro-
vides a joint there as shown in Figure 24-1b. If the line object is
Note: assigned link properties then ETABS assumes that there is no
You can not connection. ETABS never breaks a link element up into multiple
overlap two pieces.
line objects that
are both as- If the line objects shown in Figure 24-1a were assigned both
signed a frame frame section properties and link properties at the same time then
section prop- ETABS assumes the frame sections to be broken and connected
erty. They can, where they cross but the link elements remain unbroken with no
however, cross connection where they cross.
(intersect).
The bottom portion of Figure 24-1 shows two overlapping line
objects. The ends of one of the line objects are labeled 1 and 2
and the ends of the other are labeled 3 and 4. The line objects
overlap between points 2 and 3. Following are rules that ETABS
applies to these overlapping line objects:
• You can not assign two overlapping objects frame sec-

tion properties. If both line objects are assigned frame
Overlapping Line Objects 24 - 27

section properties then when you try to run the analysis

ETABS will flag it as an illegal assignment and the
analysis stops. The reason it is illegal is because ETABS
can not determine what section property to use in the
area between points 2 and 3.
24 • Overlapping line loads and line masses are additive.
Suppose both line objects are assigned a uniform line
load of 1 kip per foot. Then between points 1 and 3 and
between point 2 and 4 the load intensity is 1 kip per foot
and between point 2 and 3 the load intensity is 2 kips per
foot.
• Link elements can overlap. In this example the link ele-

ment from point 1 to 2 would not be connected in any
way to point 3. Similarly, the link element from point 3
to 4 would not be connected in any way to point 2.
• Suppose the line object from point 1 to 2 is a frame sec-

tion and the line object from 3 to 4 is assigned link prop-
erties. In this case the frame element would be internally
broken up in ETABS connecting from point 1 to point 3
and then point 3 to point 2. The link element would not
be broken up and would simply span from point 3 to
point 4 with no connection to point 2.
Plan Views of Vertical Line Objects

In a plan view of a story level, line objects that are assigned
Tip: frame section properties (columns) appear as points that repre-
sent a plan section (to scale) through the column. While in a plan
You can draw
and/or select a view you can use the Draw menu > Draw Line Objects > Cre-
column in plan ate Columns in Region or at Click (plan) command, or the as-
view. sociated toolbar button on the side toolbar to draw columns. This
is a very convenient method for drawing columns. See the sec-
tion titled "Drawing Line Objects" in Chapter 12 for more in-
formation.
24 - 28 Plan Views of Vertical Line Objects

Default Line Object Local Axes

The following subsections describe the default local axes orien-
tation for vertical, horizontal and other (neither vertical nor hori-
zontal) line objects. Note that you can use the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > Local Axes command to rotate the local 2 and 3
24
axes about the local 1 axes from their default orientation.
Vertical Line Objects

For vertical line objects the local axes have the following default
orientation:
• Local axis 1: This axis is along the line object. The

Tip:
positive local 1 axis is in the same direction as the posi-
You can toggle tive global Z-axis, upward.
on a view of the
line object local • Local axis 2: This axis is perpendicular to the line ob-
axes using the ject. The projection of the positive local 2 axis onto the
View menu > global X-axis is in the same direction as the positive
Set Building global X-axis.
View Options
command or
• Local axis 3: This axis is perpendicular to the line ob-
using the ject. The direction of the positive local 3 axis is deter-
Set Building mined from applying the right-hand rule using the direc-
View Options tions of the 1 and 2 axes described above. See the sec-
button. tion titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for
more information.
Horizontal Line Objects

For horizontal line objects (parallel to the global X-Y plane) the
local axes have the following default orientation:
• Local axis 1: This axis is along the line object. The

projection of the positive local 1 axis onto the global X-
axis is in the same direction as the positive global X-
axis. If the line object is parallel to the global Y-axis
such that there is no projection onto the global X-axis
then the positive direction of the local 1 axis is the same
as the direction of the positive global Y-axis.
Default Line Object Local Axes 24 - 29

Note: • Local axis 2: The local 2 axis is perpendicular to the

The local axes line object. The positive local 2 axis points in the same
of line objects direction as the global Z-axis, upward.
and associated
frame or link • Local axis 3: The local 3 axis is perpendicular to the
24 elements are
one and the
line object and is horizontal. The direction of the posi-
tive local 3 axis is determined from applying the right-
same. hand rule using the directions of the 1 and 2 axes de-
scribed above. See the section titled “The Right Hand
Rule” in Chapter 23 for more information.
Other Line Objects

For line objects that are not vertical and are not horizontal the lo-
cal axes have the following default orientation:
Tip: • Local axis 1: This axis is along the line object. The
When local positive local 1 axis has an upward sense. The projection
axes are dis- of the positive local 1 axis onto the global Z-axis is in
played on the the same direction as the positive global Z-axis, upward.
screen local
axis 1 is red, • Local axis 2: The local 2 axis is perpendicular to the
local axis 2 is line object. The local 1-2 plane is vertical. The positive
white and local local 2 axis has an upward sense. The projection of the
axis 3 is blue, positive local 2 axis onto the global Z-axis is in the same
always. This is direction as the positive global Z-axis, upward.
the same order
as the colors of • Local axis 3: The local 3 axis is perpendicular to the
the American line object and is horizontal. The direction of the posi-
flag: red, white
tive local 3 axis is determined from applying the right-
and blue.
hand rule using the directions of the 1 and 2 axes de-
scribed above. See the section titled “The Right Hand
Rule” in Chapter 23 for more information.
24 - 30 Default Line Object Local Axes

Polylines
A polyline object is a multi-segmented line object. You can not
make any assignments to a polyline object. Polyline objects are
only used to define developed elevations. Developed elevations
are special user-defined elevation views of the model. Typically
24
they are unfolded views of elevations that would otherwise go
around one or more corners of the model. See Chapter 12 for in-
formation on defining developed elevations.
Polylines 24 - 31
25
Chapter 25
Point Objects
General
Point objects are, as the name indicates, points. Point objects are
automatically created by ETABS at the corners of all area ob-
jects and at the ends of all line objects. In addition, you can use
the Draw menu > Draw Point Objects command, or the associ-
ated toolbar button on the side toolbar to draw additional point
objects at any location in your model.
You do not make assignments to point objects as you draw them.

Instead you select the point objects after they are created and
make assignments to them using the Assign menu > Joint/Point
command or the Assign menu > Joint/Point Load command.
You can right click on a point object to bring up the Point Infor-
mation dialog box where you can view information about the
point including its exact location and assignments. See the sec-
tion titled “Right Click Information for Point Objects” later in
this chapter for more information.
25 - 1
Automatic Point Object Labeling

When you first draw a point object, or one is automatically cre-
ated at a corner of an area object or at an end of a line object
ETABS automatically assigns a label to it. If the point object
falls at a story level at the end of a column-type line object then
25 the point object is given the same label as the column, including
the C prefix. For example, the point object at the top of column
C23 at the 3rd floor level is also labeled C23.
If the point object does not fall at a story level at the end of a
column-type line object then this label is simply a number with
no prefix. For example, a point object located at the corner of a
floor diaphragm and not at the top of a column might be labeled
14 (with no prefix).
The advantage to this point labeling scheme is that when you

look at your model in plan view you can clearly see where the
columns fall just by looking at the point labels.
In general you can not assign your own labels to point objects.
text file can have point object labels different from the automatic
move the point object, ETABS will automatically relabel the
object.

the same label to point objects located at the same plan location
but at different story levels. Note that point objects are always
ample point object 2 at one level will be directly above point
object 2 at another story level.
automatically relabel all area, line and point objects. See the sub-
section titled "Relabeling Objects" in Chapter 23 for additional
information on this.
25 - 2 Automatic Point Object Labeling

Chapter 25 - Point Objects
Assignments Made through the Assign Menu

You can make many assignments to point objects using the As-
sign menu. The types of point object assignments you can make
include:
• Assign a rigid diaphragm constraint.

25
• Assign a panel zone element.
• Assign point restraints (supports).
• Assign grounded point springs.

Tip:
• Assign grounded link elements.
To make an
assignment to a
• Assign additional point mass.
point object
first select the
• Assign point object forces.
object and then
click the ap-
propriate com-
• Assign displacements to restrained degrees of freedom
mand on the of point objects.
Assign menu.
• Assign temperature changes to point objects.
Use either the Assign menu > Joint/Point or the Assign menu >
Joint/Point Loads command to make these assignments. See the
section titled "Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for
more information.
Right Click Information for Point Objects

Right click on a point object to view useful information that
identifies the object, describes its location and reveals its as-
signments. Right clicking on a point object means to position
your mouse pointer over the object and click the right (not left as
you usually do) button on the mouse. When you do this the Point
Information dialog box appears.
Assignments Made through the Assign Menu 25 - 3

The units drop-down box in the Point Information dialog box

Tip:
allows you to change the current units without leaving the dialog
Right click on a box. Any change in units that you make while in this dialog box
point object to is permanent; that is, the change remains when you exit the dia-
view useful log box.
information
that identifies
25
The area at the top of the Point Information dialog box that is
the object, de- named Identification provides basic information that identifies
scribes its lo-
the point object. This information includes:
cation and re-
veals its as-
signments.
• Label: This is the point object label assigned by
ETABS. See the previous subsection in this chapter ti-
tled "Automatic Point Object Labeling" for more infor-
mation.
• Story: This is the story level associated with the point

object.
The Point Information dialog box also has three different tabs lo-
Tip:
cated just above the Identification area. Each of these tabs dis-
plays different types of information. The tabs are labeled Loca-
Click on a tab tion, Assignments and Loads. These labels are relatively self-
in the Point explanatory. The Location tab includes information that locates
Information the point object. The Assignments tab includes information on
dialog box to
see the data
all point object assignments except for loads. The Loads tab in-
associated with cludes information on all load assignments to the point object.
the tab. The items displayed in each of these tabs are detailed in the sub-
sections below.
Location Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box

The following geometric information about the point object is
displayed on the Location tab:
• X: This is the global X coordinate of the point object.
• Y: This is the global Y coordinate of the point object.
25 - 4 Right Click Information for Point Objects


that the point object is associated with to the point ob-
ject. The value of Delta Z is always between zero and
the value of the story height associated with the point
object, inclusive. Delta Z is always positive even though
it is measured from the story level downward.
• Connectivity: If no line or area object connects to the 25

point object then this item says "None." Otherwise this
line is blank but it is followed by one or more of the
following lines.
ü Line: This item shows the label of a line object that

is connected to the selected point object.
ü Area: This item shows the label of an area object

that is connected to the selected point object.
Note that as many line and area items are displayed as

there are line and area objects connected to the selected
point object.
Assignments Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box

• Rigid diaphragm: If a rigid diaphragm is not assigned

to the point object then this item displays "None." Oth-
erwise it displays the name of the rigid diaphragm as-
signed to the object. The rigid diaphragm is assigned
using the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Rigid Dia-
phragm command. See the subsection titled "Rigid Dia-
phragm Assignments to Point Objects" under the section
titled "Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for
more information.
Right Click Information for Point Objects 25 - 5

• Panel Zones: If a panel zone element is not assigned to

the point object then this item displays "None." Other-
wise it is blank and some of the items listed below are
also displayed. A panel zone element is assigned using
the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Panel Zone com-
mand. See the subsection titled "Panel Zone Assign-
25 ments to Point Objects" under the section titled "As-
signments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for more in-
formation.
ü Connectivity: This item shows the connectivity

specified for the panel zone element. It is either
Beam-Column, Beam-Brace, or Brace-Column.
ü Local axis 2: This item indicates the orientation of

the local 2-axis of the panel zone. It is either From
Column or n° from X, where n is a number and X
means the global X-axis.
ü Spring property: If the properties of the panel zone

are determined from the column or the column plus
a specified doubler plate then this item is displayed
and it says "From Column." See also the doubler
plate item below.
ü Doubler Plate: If the properties of the panel zone

are determined from the column or the column plus
a specified doubler plate then this item is displayed.
If the properties come only from the column then
this item displays "None." Otherwise it displays the
specified thickness of the doubler plate. See also the
spring property item above.
ü Major moment spring: If the properties of the

panel zone are determined from specified spring
properties then this item is displayed and it shows
the specified spring stiffness for major moment. See
also the minor moment spring item below.

ü Minor moment spring: If the properties of the

panel zone are determined from specified spring
properties then this item is displayed and it shows
the specified spring stiffness for minor moment. See
also the major moment spring item above.
Note:
ü Link property: If the properties of the panel zone
The ux, uy and
uz restraints are determined from a specified link property then 25
are transla- this item is displayed and it shows the specified
tional restraints property.
in the global X,
Y and Z direc- • Restraint: If a restraint (support) is not assigned to the
tions respec- point object then this item displays "None." Otherwise it
tively. The rx, displays on one line all of the restraints that are assigned
ry and rz re- to the point object. The six possible restraints are ux, uy,
straints are uz, rx, ry and rz. A point object restraint is assigned us-
rotational re-
straints about
ing the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Restraints (Sup-
the global X, Y ports) command. See the subsection titled "Restraint
and Z axes re- (Support) Assignments to Point Objects" under the sec-
spectively. tion titled "Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14
• Springs: If a point spring is not assigned to the point

object then this item displays "None." Otherwise this
line is blank and is followed by one or more of the lines
listed below. A point spring is assigned using the Assign
menu > Joint/Point > Point Springs command. See the
subsection titled "Point Spring Assignments to Point
Objects" under the section titled "Assignments to Point
ü UX: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied in the global X direction then this line is dis-
played and it shows the specified spring stiffness.
ü UY: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied in the global Y direction then this line is dis-

ü UZ: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied in the global Z direction then this line is dis-
ü RX: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied for rotation about the global X-axis then this
25
line is displayed and it shows the specified spring
stiffness.
ü RY: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied for rotation about the global Y-axis then this
line is displayed and it shows the specified spring
stiffness.
ü RZ: If an uncoupled point spring stiffness is speci-

fied for rotation about the global Z-axis then this line
is displayed and it shows the specified spring stiff-
ness.
ü UX-UX, etc.: If you have specified a coupled 6x6

spring then the following twenty-one items from the
upper portion of the spring stiffness matrix are dis-
played each on its own line: UX-UX, UY-UX, UY-
UY, UZ-UX, UZ-UY, UZ-UZ, RX-UX, RX-UY,
RX-UZ, RX-RX, RY-UX, RY-UY, RY-UZ, RY-
RX, RY-RY, RZ-UX, RZ-UY, RZ-UZ, RZ-RX, RZ-
RY and RZ-RZ.
• Link Property: If a grounded link element property is

not assigned to the point object then this item displays
"None." Otherwise it displays the name of the assigned
link property. Note that you can assign more than one
link property to the same point object. The assignments
are additive; they do not replace one another. When
more than one grounded link element is assigned to a
point object multiple Link properties lines are used, one
for each property. A link element property is assigned
using the Assign menu > Joint/Point > Link Proper-
ties command. See the subsection titled "Link Property
Assignments to Point Objects" under the section titled
"Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for more
information.

• Mass: If an additional point mass is not assigned to the

object then this item displays "None." Otherwise this
line is blank and is followed by one or more of the lines
listed below.
ü UX: This is the additional translational point mass
25
specified in the global X direction.
ü UY: This is the additional translational point mass

specified in the global Y direction.
ü UZ: This is the additional translational point mass

specified in the global Z direction.
ü RX: This is the additional rotational mass moment

of inertia specified about the global X-axis.
ü RY: This is the additional rotational mass moment

of inertia specified about the global Y-axis.
ü RZ: This is the additional rotational mass moment

of inertia specified about the global Z-axis.
Note that the point mass value is displayed here regard-

less of the mass source you have specified using the De-
fine menu > Mass Source command. If you designate
that the mass source is from a specified load combina-
tion then the value shown here is not used by the pro-
gram. See the section titled "Mass Source" in Chapter 11
and the section titled "Mass" in Chapter 27 for more in-
formation.
The point mass is assigned using the Assign menu >

Joint/Point > Additional Point Mass command. See
the subsection titled "Additional Point Mass Assign-
ments to Point Objects" under the section titled "As-
signments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for more in-
formation.


point object to any groups you will see ALL for this item
25 indicating that it belongs to the ALL group. If you have
Loads Tab in the Point Information Dialog Box

• Load: If no loads are assigned to the point object then

this displays "None." Otherwise this item is not dis-
played.

For point objects either force, displacement or tempera-
ture loads may be listed. The bulleted items below list
the point object loads you may see immediately follow-
ing the Static Load Case line. One or more of these load
lines may be listed for each static load case depending
on the assignments you have made.
ü Force X: This line indicates the value of the point

force load applied to the point object in the global X-
axis direction.
ü Force Y: This line indicates the value of the point

force load applied to the point object in the global Y-
axis direction.
ü Force Z: This line indicates the value of the point

force load applied to the point object in the global Z-
axis direction.

ü Moment X: This line indicates the value of the point

moment load applied to the point object about the
global X-axis.
ü Moment Y: This line indicates the value of the point

25
global Y-axis.
ü Moment Z: This line indicates the value of the point

global Z-axis.
ü Ground Displacement X: This line indicates the

value of the ground displacement applied to the
point object in the global X-axis direction.
ü Ground Displacement Y: This line indicates the

point object in the global Y-axis direction.
ü Ground Displacement Z: This line indicates the

point object in the global Z-axis direction.
ü Ground Rotation X: This line indicates the value of

the ground rotation applied to the point object about
the global X-axis.
ü Ground Rotation Y: This line indicates the value of

the global Y-axis.
ü Ground Rotation Z: This line indicates the value of

the global Z-axis.
ü Temperature: This line indicates the value of the

temperature change assigned to the point object.


Point loads are assigned to point objects using the As-

sign menu > Joint/Point Loads> Force command. See
the subsection titled "Force Loads to Point Objects" un-
der the section titled "Assignments to Point Objects" in
25
Ground displacements are assigned to restrained point
objects using the Assign menu > Joint/Point Loads>
Ground Displacement command. See the subsection ti-
tled "Ground Displacement Assignments to Point Ob-
jects" under the section titled "Assignments to Point
Temperature loads are assigned to point objects using

the Assign menu > Joint/Point Loads > Temperature
Assignments to Point Objects" under the section titled
"Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for more
information.
Point Objects Overlapping Other Objects

Note: You can not have two point objects on top of each other.
Two point ob- Quite often a point object is located on top of another object. For
jects can not be example it may be on top of a vertical line object that represents
located one on a column. If you want to select only the point object you can
top of the other.
hold down the Ctrl key on your keyboard as you left or right
click on the objects. A dialog box appears where you can choose
the object you want to select. Highlight the point object in this
dialog box and click the OK button. If you left clicked the object
is selected and if you right clicked the object assignments are
displayed.
Point Object Local Axes

Point Object Local 3
The local axes for point objects are the same as the global axes.
2
cal
t Lo
Local axis 1 corresponds to the global X-axis. Local axis 2 cor-

jec
Po bal Y
Ob
Global Z
responds to the global Y-axis. Local axis 3 corresponds to the

Glo
int
global Z-axis. You can not change the local axes of a point ob-
Global X
Point Object Local 1 ject.
25 - 12 Point Objects Overlapping Other Objects

26
Chapter 26
Groups and Section Cuts
General
The concept of groups is the backbone of some powerful tools in
ETABS. In ETABS a group is a collection of objects that is
Tip: assigned a name. There are three useful purposes for groups:
Groups are a • You can select objects by group.
very valuable
concept. They • You can design steel frame elements, including
are useful for
composite beams, by group. In this case the optimum
both editing a
model and re- section that works for all frame elements in the group is
viewing output. selected by ETABS.
You should not
overlook the • You can use groups to help define section cuts in your
power of structure. You can then obtain the forces acting on those
groups in section cuts.
ETABS.
Each of these items is described in more detail later in this
chapter.
26 - 1
Defining Groups
Defining a group consists of indicating what objects are included
in the group and then specifying a name for the group. Use the
following steps to define a group.
1. Select the objects that make up the group.
26 2. Click the Assign menu > Group Names command to bring

up the Assign Group dialog box.
3. If the name of the group already appears in the list box then
simply highlight that name and click the OK button. (Note
that if you use an existing group name for your new group
the selected items replace rather than add to any objects that
might have previously been defined for that group.) If the
name of the group does not appear in the list box then
continue on to Step 4.
Tip: 4. Type a name for the group into the edit box and click the
Add New Group button to define the group name. Then
You can specify
click the OK button to define the group.
that the model
display should Groups are also assigned colors. You can use the View menu >
be by the colors
Set Display Options command, or the Set Display Options
assigned to the
groups. button, , on the main toolbar to indicate that the display
should be shown by the colors of the groups. This type of view
can be useful for determining what items are included in a par-
ticular group.
Note that when the program is set to display colors by group if

an object is part of more than one group it will be displayed us-
ing the color of the earliest defined group that it is assigned to.
This can sometimes make it difficult to tell which objects are as-
signed to a particular group. A way to clearly tell which objects
are assigned to a group is to view the entire model, click the Se-
lect menu > Select by Groups command to select the group and
then click the View menu > Show Selection Only command to
see only the objects that are part of the group.
26 - 2 Defining Groups
Chapter 26 - Groups and Section Cuts
Selecting Groups
Once a group is defined you can select it using the Select menu
> Select by Groups command. As an example, suppose you
have a structure that consists of just beam and column elements.
You could select the column elements and define a group called
COL using the procedure described in the previous section titled
"Defining Groups."
26
Note: Once the COL group is defined you can select all of the columns
at any time by clicking Select menu > Select by Groups com-
You can select
mand, highlighting the group name called COL and clicking the
and deselect by
group.
OK button. Note that when highlighting the groups to be se-
lected you can hold down the Shift and/or Ctrl keys on the key-
board as you highlight group names to select multiple groups at
the same time. See the section titled "Using the mouse" in
Suppose that you want to select all of the beams but the only
group you have defined is the COL group. First select the entire
structure by either clicking Select menu > Select All or by
clicking the Select All button, , located on the side toolbar.
Then click Select menu > Deselect > by Groups, highlight the
group called COL and click the OK button. The COL group is
deselected and you are left with just the beams selected.
Note that as an alternative method of selecting the beams you

could just put them in their own group, you might call it BEAM,
and then simply select them by group as described above for the
column group, COL.
Designing by Groups
In steel frame design and composite beam design using ETABS
you have the option of designing elements by group. When you
specify a group for design all elements in the group are given the
same section size, if possible.
Steel members must be assigned auto select section lists to be

designed as a part of a group. Typically you want each member
in the group to be assigned the same auto select section list,
although this is not absolutely necessary.
Selecting Groups 26 - 3
Section Cuts
In ETABS you can define section cuts in your building and then
get the resultant of the forces acting on the section cut for any
load case or load combination. You can define a section cut
using the Define menu > Section Cut command. To define a
section cut you give it a name, indicate a group that defines the
26 section cut, indicate the location that the forces are to be summed
about and indicate a local axes orientation. These items are
discussed below. Once you have defined one or more section
cuts you can display the section cut forces in a tabular form on
screen using the Display menu > Show Section Cut Forces
command.
Defining a Section Cut with a Group

You indicate the location of the section cut by specifying a group
that typically consists of one or more area (shell) and/or line
(frame and/or link) objects plus the points objects along one side
(or end for frame and link members) of the objects. A line
connecting the selected points objects describes the section cut
and the selected area and line objects indicate which side of the
section cut the forces are taken on.
Note: Figure 26-1 shows a simple example of a floor slab that consists
of four area objects labeled F1 through F4 and nine point objects
Section cut
labeled 1 through 9. Suppose that you want to get the forces
forces are re-
ported in the
acting along a section cut parallel to the Y-axis through the
local coordi- center of the slab.
nate system of
the section cut. To do this you define a group consisting of point objects 2, 5 and
8 and area objects F1 and F3. Point objects 2, 5 and 8 define the
section cut and area objects F1 and F3 define which side of the
section cut to consider the forces. Note that if you wanted to
consider forces on the other side of the section cut then you
should include area objects F2 and F4 in your group instead of
F1 and F3.
26 - 4 Section Cuts
Figure 26-1: 7 8 9
Example of defining
a section cut with a
group
F3 F4
4 5 6 26
Y F1 F2
X 1 2 3
You should not include area objects (or line objects) on both
sides of a section cut in the same group. If you do this the forces
contributed from the objects on the two sides of the section cut
will cancel each other out and you will essentially be left with
zero force at the section cut.
A section cut does not necessarily have to be a single straight

line. It can be made up of a series of straight line segments in
any orientation as long as the break points occur at a point
object. For example, refer to Figure 26-2 which shows a floor
slab that consists of eight area objects labeled F1 through F8 and
sixteen point objects labeled 1 through 16. There is an opening in
the center of the floor slab.
In this example the section cut is shown by the heavy line. If you
want forces on the negative global X-axis side of this section cut
then the group defining the section cut should include point
objects 2, 6, 10, 11 and 15 and area objects F1, F4, F6 and F7.
Section Cuts 26 - 5
Figure 26-2: 13 14 15 16
Example of defining
a section cut with a
group F6 F7 F8
8 10 11 12
26 F4 F5
5 6 7 8
Y F1 F2 F3
X 1 2 3 4
Location that Section Cut Forces are Summed About

By default the section cut forces are reported at a location (point)
that has coordinates equal to the average of the coordinates of all
of the point objects included in the group that defines the section
cut. The location that the section cut forces are summed about is
reported along with the section cut forces.
In some cases the default location that the section cut forces are
summed about may not be convenient for you. If you want to
have the section cut forces specified at a location different from
the default you can do so by specifying the new location in
global coordinates (X, Y and Z) in the section cut definition.
Local Axes for Section Cuts

Note:
The local axes of a section cut are determined as follows:
You can rotate
the local 1 and • Local 1-axis: By default the positive local 1-axis is in
2 (horizontal) the same direction as the positive global X-axis. You can
axes of a sec- rotate the local 1-axis in a plane parallel to the global X-
tion cut about
the local 3
Y plane by specifying an angle of rotation in degrees.
(vertical) axis. The angle is measured from the positive global X-axis to
the positive local 1-axis. When looking down on the
26 - 6 Section Cuts
structure in the negative global Z direction a positive an-

gle is counterclockwise.
• Local 2-axis: The direction of the positive local 2-axis is

determined by applying the right-hand rule to the direc-
tions of the local 1 and 3 axes as described here.
• Local 3-axis: This axis is always vertical. The positive

local 3-axis is in the same direction as the positive global 26
Z-axis.
Note that by default the positive local 1, 2 and 3 axes of the sec-
tion cut correspond to the global X, Y and Z axis respectively.
How ETABS Calculates Section Cut Forces

This section describes how ETABS calculates section cut forces.
Essentially ETABS sums joint forces from the frame, shell and
link members included in the group that defines the section cut.
The joints that are considered are those at the same location as
the point objects that are included in the group.
To sum the forces, each considered joint force and moment is

transformed to the location that the forces are summed about and
then they are transformed to the local coordinate system speci-
fied for the section cut forces. When all of the considered forces
have been transformed to the appropriate location and coordinate
system they are simply summed up and the total forces are re-
ported.
The above explanation is complete if there is no ETABS internal

meshing in the area objects that are included in the group defin-
ing the section cut. As an example, consider Figure 26-1, and as-
sume that the group defining the section cut includes area objects
F1 and F3 and point objects 2, 5 and 8. Further assume that all of
the point objects are equally spaced in each direction. Finally as-
sume that ETABS does not internally mesh area objects F1 and
F3.
To determine the default location that the section cut forces are
summed about ETABS averages the coordinates of point objects
2, 5 and 8. In this simple example those average coordinates fall
at the same location as point object 5.
Section Cuts 26 - 7
Figure 26-3: 7 8 9
First example of how
ETABS calculates
section cut forces D
when objects are 201
internally meshed by
the program C
26 4 5 6
B
Y 101
A
X 1 2 3
Next ETABS takes the joint forces from area object F1 at point 2
and transforms the forces to point 5 and also transforms them to
the local coordinate system of the section cut. Then ETABS
takes the joint forces from area object F1 at point 5 and performs
the same double transformation. Similarly, the joint forces from
area object F3 at points 5 and 8 are doubly transformed. Finally
ETABS adds up the four sets of transformed forces and reports
the totals.
Now lets suppose that area objects F1 and F3 are internally

meshed by ETABS. In this case, the model still appears to you as
shown in Figure 26-1. The group defining the section cut is still
the same as previously described, that is, area objects F1 and F3
and point objects 2, 5 and 8. Internally to ETABS the model ap-
pears as shown in Figure 26-3 which shows the internal meshing
of the area objects with dashed lines.
In Figure 26-3 for identification purposes some of the area ob-

jects created by the internal meshing are identified as A, B, C
and D. The points labeled 101 and 201 are internal points created
by the internal meshing of the area objects.
26 - 8 Section Cuts
In this case ETABS determines the section cut forces as follows:
• To determine the default location that the section cut

forces are summed about ETABS averages the coordi-
nates of point objects 2, 5 and 8. Again, in this simple
example those average coordinates fall at the same loca-
tion as point object 5. Note that the internal joint 101 and
201 are not considered in determining this location.
26
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object A at point
2 and transforms the forces to point 5 and also trans-
forms them to the local coordinate system of the section
cut.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object A at point

101 and transforms the forces to point 5 and also trans-
forms them to the local coordinate system of the section
cut.
Note: • Similarly, the joint forces from area object B at points

101 and 5 are doubly transformed.
The term "dou-
bly trans-
• Similarly, the joint forces from area object C at points 5
formed" refers
to transforming
and 201 are doubly transformed.
the forces to the
point that the • Similarly, the joint forces from area object D at points
forces are 201 and 8 are doubly transformed.
summed about
and then • Finally ETABS adds up the eight sets of transformed
transforming forces and reports the totals.
them to the
local axes of ETABS includes the forces from an internal joint in the section
the section cut. cut forces if the line defining the section cut passes through that
Thus two sepa- joint. Recall that the line defining the section cut is simply a line
rate transfor- that connects the point objects in the group defining the section
mations are cut.
taking place.
As a second example consider the section cut illustrated in Fig-
ure 26-2. The group defining the section cut includes area ob-
jects F1, F4, F6 and F7 and point objects 2, 6, 10, 11 and 15. The
coordinates of the default location that the forces are summed
about, call it point X (not shown in the figure), are equal to the
average of the coordinates of points 2, 6, 10, 11 and 15. Point X
falls within the opening in the center of the slab. Assuming that
Section Cuts 26 - 9
the floor is not further internally meshed by ETABS the section

cut force is determined as follows:
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object F1 at

points 2 and 6 and transforms the forces to point X and
also transforms them to the local coordinate system of
the section cut.
26 • ETABS takes the joint forces from area object F4 at

points 6 and 10 and doubly transforms the forces to point
X.

point 10 and doubly transforms the forces to point X.

points 10, 11 and 15 and doubly transforms the forces to
point X.
• Finally ETABS adds up the eight sets of transformed

forces and reports the totals.
Now suppose that the floor system shown in Figure 26-2 is in-
ternally meshed By ETABS. The group defining the section cut
is still the same as previously described, that is, area objects F1,
F4, F6 and F7 and point objects 2, 6, 10, 11 and 15. Internally to
ETABS the model appears as shown in Figure 26-4 which shows
the internal meshing of the area objects with dashed lines.
In Figure 26-4 for identification purposes some of the area ob-

jects created by the internal meshing are identified as A, B, C, D,
E, F, G and H. The points labeled 101, 201, 301, 401 and 403 are
internal points created by the internal meshing of the area ob-
jects.
In this case ETABS determines the section cut forces as follows:
• The coordinates of the default location that the forces are

summed about (point X in the figure), are equal to the
average of the coordinates of points 2, 6, 10, 11 and 15.
Figure 26-4: 13 14 15 16
Second example of H
how ETABS calcu-
401 403
lates section cut
forces when objects E F G
are internally 8 10 301 11 12
meshed by the pro- D
gram
201
X
26
C
5 6 7 8
B
Y 101
A
X 1 2 3 4
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object A at

points 2 and 101 and doubly transforms the forces to
point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object B at

point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object C at

point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object D at

point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object E at point

10 and doubly transforms the forces to point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object F at

point X.
Section Cuts 26 - 11
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object G at

points 301, 11 and 403 and doubly transforms the forces
to point X.
• ETABS takes the joint forces from area object H at

point X.
26 • Finally ETABS adds up the sixteen sets of transformed

forces and reports the totals.
Note that the joint forces at the point labeled 401 in Figure 26-4
are not included in the section cut forces because point 401 does
not fall on the heavy line that defines the section cut.
27
Chapter 27
Load Cases, Load Combinations and Mass

This chapter discusses ETABS load cases, load combinations
and mass.
Load Cases
There are four types of load cases available in ETABS. They are
listed here and discussed below.
• Static
• Response spectrum
• Time history
• Static nonlinear
You assign a unique label to each load case as part of its defini-
tion. These labels can be used to create load combinations and to
control displayed and printed output.
27 - 1
Static Load Case

There are many different types of loads that can be applied in a
static load case. They include:
Note: • Concentrated forces and moments acting on point ob-

jects.
Do not confuse
the load types
• Concentrated or distributed forces and moments acting
listed here with
27 the design types
that are speci-
on frame elements.
fied for each • Distributed forces acting on shell elements.

load case.
• Self-weight acting on all element types.
• Thermal loads acting on frame and shell elements.
• Displacements of the restrained (support or spring) de-

grees of freedom of point objects.
Each static load case may consist of an arbitrary combination of

the above load types. Usually it is convenient to restrict each
load case to a single type of loading and use load combinations
to create more complicated combinations. Any number of static
load cases may be defined in an ETABS analysis.
Some typical static load cases used for building structures might
include:
• Dead load
• Superimposed dead load
• Live load
• Reduced live load
• Snow Load
• Wind Load
• Earthquake load
27 - 2 Load Cases
Chapter 27 - Load Cases, Load Combinations and Mass
Use the Define menu > Static Load Cases command to specify
static load cases in ETABS. To specify a static load case you
give the load case a name, a design type and a self-weight multi-
plier.
Design Type
Note: In ETABS a design type is specified for each load case. The de-
27
sign type is used by the design post processors to create factored
Design types
load combinations for use in design. It is also used to determine
are specified
for each load
whether or not a live load is reducible. The design types avail-
case. They are able in ETABS are:
used by the
ETABS design • Dead
postprocessors
to create ap- • Super dead (superimposed dead load)
propriate de-
sign load com- • Live
binations.
• Reduce live (reducible live load). See the subsection
below titled " Live Load Reduction" for additional in-
formation.
• Quake (see Chapter 28 for additional information).
• Wind (see Chapter 29 for additional information).
• Snow
• Other
When you specify a static load case which has a design type of
Quake you can define an automatic code-specific static lateral
earthquake load that is associated with the load case. Similarly,
when you specify a static load case which has a design type of
Wind you can define an automatic code-specific static lateral
wind load that is associated with the load case. Automatic earth-
quake loads are discussed in Chapter 28. Automatic wind loads
are discussed in Chapter 29.
Load Cases 27 - 3
Self-Weight Multiplier
The self-weight of the structure is determined from the weight
per unit volume that is specified in the material properties for the
structural elements of the model. You can review and/or change
material properties using the Define menu > Material Proper-
ties command. The actual self-weight of an element is deter-
mined by multiplying the weight per unit volume of each ele-
27 ment times its actual volume.
Typically you assign a self-weight multiplier of 1 to one load

case only and a self-weight multiplier of 0 to all other load cases.
You may want to assign self-weight to its very own load case,
perhaps named SELF, or you may want to include the self-
weight in the same load case as your other dead load. Either is
acceptable.
Important: If you assign a self-weight multiplier to more than

one load case then you run the risk of double-counting (or
more) your self-weight when you combine load cases to cre-
ate load combinations.
The self-weight multiplier of 1 means that the self-weight of

each element times a factor of 1.0 is automatically included in
the load case. You could, if desired, use a self-weight multiplier
other than 1 to represent the self-weight but this is not typically
what you should do.
The self-weight acts in the gravity direction, that is the global -Z

direction, only.
Response Spectrum Load Case

Note: A response spectrum load case defines the response spectrum
analysis to be performed. When your analysis includes response
There is no
spectrum load cases you must be sure you have requested that
limit on the
number of load
ETABS calculate the vibration modes of the model by either ei-
cases or load genvector analysis or ritz-vector analysis. We recommend that
combinations you use ritz-vector analysis when analyzing response spectrum
you can create load cases. Click the Analyze menu > Set Analysis Options
in ETABS. command, check the Dynamic Analysis check box and click the
Set Dynamic Parameters button to specify the number of
27 - 4 Load Cases
modes and type of modal analysis. See Chapter 15 for more in-
formation.
Any number of response spectrum load cases may be used in an

ETABS analysis. For design ETABS assumes that all response
spectrum load cases are earthquake-type loads.
To define a response spectrum load case first use the Define

menu > Response Spectrum Functions command to define a
response spectrum. Next use the Define menu > Response
Spectrum Cases command to define the actual response spec-
27
trum load case. See the sections titled "Response Spectrum
Functions" and "Response Spectrum Cases" in Chapter 11 for
more information.
Time History Load Case

A time history load case defines the time history analysis to be
performed. When your analysis includes time history load cases
you must be sure you have requested that ETABS calculate the
vibration modes of the model by either eigenvector analysis or
ritz-vector analysis. We recommend that you use ritz-vector
analysis when analyzing response spectrum load cases.
Any number of time history load cases may be used in an

ETABS analysis. ETABS does not by default assume that a time
history load case is an earthquake-type load for design.
To define a time history load case first use the Define menu >
Time History Functions command to define an input time his-
tory. Next use the Define menu > Time History Cases com-
mand to define the actual time history load case. See the sections
titled "Time History Functions" and "Time History Cases" in
Load Cases 27 - 5
Static Nonlinear Load Case

A static nonlinear load case defines the static nonlinear analysis
to be performed. Any number of static nonlinear load cases may
be used in an ETABS analysis. ETABS does not by default as-
sume that a static nonlinear load case is an earthquake-type load
for design.
27 To define a static nonlinear load case use the Define menu >
Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases command.
Note that you must have the nonlinear version of ETABS to per-
form static nonlinear analysis. Full documentation of static non-
linear analysis is beyond the scope of this manual.
Live Load Reduction

General
You can specify some preferences for how ETABS handles live
load reduction using the Options menu > Preferences > Live
Load Reduction command. These preferences apply to the en-
tire model. See the subsection titled "Live Load reduction" under
the section titled "Preferences" in Chapter 18 for more informa-
tion.
Load Combinations
General
A load combination, called a Combo for short, can consist of any
of the following:
• A combination of the results from one or more load

cases.
• A combination of the results from one or more previ-

ously defined Combos.
27 - 6 Live Load Reduction

• A combination of results from one or more Modes.
Tip: • A combination of the results from load cases and/or pre-

viously defined Combos and/or Modes.
Forces and
displacements You define Combos using the Define menu > Load Combina-
associated with
tions command. You can define Combos before or after you run
a mode shape
can be obtained an analysis.
by including the
mode in a
Combo results include all displacements and forces at the points
(joints) and internal forces or stresses in the elements. You may
27
Combo.
specify any number of Combos. You assign a unique label to
each Combo.
Output Values Produced by Load Combinations

Each load case, mode or Combo that is included in a Combo
supplies either one or two values to the Combo for each response
quantity:
• Static load cases, static nonlinear load cases, modes and

additive Combos of Loads provide a single value. It is
sometimes easier to think of this single value as two val-
ues, a maximum and a minimum, where the two values
just happen to be the same. This thought process is used
in the Combo examples discussed below.
• All other load cases and Combos provide two values: a

maximum and minimum. For some types of Combos,
both values are used. For other types of Combos, only
the value with the larger absolute value is used.
For response-spectrum analyses, the maximum value is the result

of the analysis, and the minimum value is just the negative of the
maximum.
For time-history analyses, the values used are the maximum and
minimum values attained at any time during the analysis.
For nonlinear static analyses, the values used are the maximum
and minimum values attained at any time during the analysis.
Load Combinations 27 - 7
Each load case, mode or Combo that is included in a Combo is

multiplied by a specified scale factor before being included in
the Combo.
Types of Load Combinations

Four types of Combos are available. For each individual re-
sponse quantity (force, stress, or displacement component) the
27 maximum and minimum Combo values are calculated as fol-
lows:
• Additive type: The Combo maximum is an algebraic

linear combination of the maximum values for each of
the included analysis cases. Similarly, Combo minimum
is an algebraic linear combination of the minimum val-
ues for each of the included analysis cases.
Tip:
• Absolute type: The Combo maximum is the sum of the
When you de- larger absolute values for each of the included analysis
fine a Combo cases. The Combo minimum is the negative of the
that includes
Combo maximum.
other Combos,
make sure that
the combo is
• SRSS type: The Combo maximum is the square root of
not recursive. the sum of the squares of the larger absolute values for
For example, each of the included analysis cases. The Combo mini-
assume you mum is the negative of the Combo maximum.
define two
combos called • Envelope type: The Combo maximum is the maximum
C1 and C2. of all of the maximum values for each of the included
Make sure that analysis cases. Similarly, the Combo minimum is the
C1 does not minimum of all of the minimum values for each of the
contain C2 included analysis cases. See the bullet item titled "Dia-
while at the gram Fill" in the subsection titled "Output Colors" in
same time C2
Chapter 18 for additional information.
contains C1.
These would be
Only additive Combos of single-valued analysis cases produce a
recursive Com-
bos that ETABS
single-valued result, i.e., the maximum and minimum values are
can not handle. equal. Thus only Combos of static load cases, and other single-
valued Combos are single-valued. All other Combos will gener-
ally have different maximum and minimum values.
27 - 8 Load Combinations
Examples
For example, suppose that the values, after scaling, for the dis-
placement at a particular point are 3.5 for a static load case la-
beled LL and 2.0 for Response spectrum load case labeled
QUAKE. Suppose that these two load cases have been included
in an additive-type Combo called ADDCOMB and an envelope-
type Combo called ENVCOMB. The results for the displacement
at the point are computed as follows:
• ADDCOMB: The maximum is 3.5 + 2.0 = 5.5, and the 27

minimum is 3.5 – 2.0 = 1.5
• ENVCOMB: The maximum is max (3.5, 2.0) = 3.5, and

the minimum is min (3.5, –2.0) = –2.0
As another example, suppose that static load cases GRAV,

WINDX and WINDY are gravity load and two perpendicular,
transverse wind loads, respectively; and that EQ is a response-
spectrum load case. The following four Combos could be de-
fined:
• WIND: An SRSS-type Combo of the two wind load

cases, WINDX and WINDY. The maximum and mini-
mum results produced for each response quantity in this
Combo are equal and opposite.
Note:
• GRAVEQ: An additive-type Combo of the gravity load,
The examples GRAV, and the response-spectrum results, EQ. The
in the remain- Combo automatically accounts for the positive and
der of this sec- negative senses of the earthquake load.
tion illustrate
some of the • GRAVWIN: An additive-type Combo of the gravity
powerful fea-
load, GRAV, and the wind load given by Combo WIND,
tures available
for load combi-
which already accounts for the positive and negative
nations used in senses of the load.
ETABS.
• SEVERE: An envelope-type Combo that produces the
worst case of the two additive Combos, GRAVEQ and
GRAVWIN.
Load Combinations 27 - 9
Suppose that the values of axial force in a frame element, after

scaling, are 10, 5, 3, and 7 for load cases GRAV, WINDX,
WINDY, and EQ, respectively. The following results for axial
force are obtained for the Combos above:
• WIND: maximum 5 2 + 3 2 = 5.8 , minimum = –5.8
• GRAVEQ: maximum = 10 + 7 = 17, minimum = 10 – 7

27 =3
• GRAVWIN: maximum = 10 + 5.8 = 15.8, minimum =

10 – 5.8 = 4.2
• SEVERE: maximum = max(17, 15.8) = 17, minimum =

min(3, 4.2) = 3
As you can see, using Combos of Combos gives you consider-

able power and flexibility in how you can combine the results of
the various analysis cases.
Design Load Combinations

When Combos are used for design, they may be treated some-
what differently than has been described here for analysis output
purposes:
• For time history analysis you can either design based on

the maximum and minimum envelope values obtained
from the time history analysis or you can design at each
and every time step. Designing based on envelope values
can be conservative in some cases because you have lost
correspondence between the various force components,
however, it is relatively quick.
The advantage of designing at each and every time step

is that you get the correct correspondence between the
various force components, however, it can be very time
consuming. If you wish to design based on every time
step you may want to do preliminary designs based on
envelope values and then do a final design based on each
time step of the time history.
27 - 10 Load Combinations
• For nonlinear static analysis all design is based on con-

sidering every step separately. This maintains the corre-
spondence between forces. Typically there are not very
many steps in a static nonlinear analysis so the time pen-
alty that results from considering each step is small.
Restrictions for Load Case and Load Combination Labels

ETABS has some restrictions on the labeling of load cases and
load combinations. No load case or load combination can have 27
the same label. A load case must have a label that is unique from
all other load cases and all load combinations. Similarly, a load
combination must have a label that is unique from all other load
combinations and all load cases. Finally, the word Mode is a re-
served word that can not be used for either a load case label or a
load combination label.
Mass
In ETABS a modal (eigenvector or ritz-vector) analysis is based
in part on the mass of the building. The weight of the building
used for creating automatic static lateral seismic loads is based
on the building mass. Also in a static nonlinear pushover
analysis the conversion of a force-displacement plot to a spectral
acceleration versus spectral displacement plot is based in part on
Tip: the mass of the building. For these types of analyses you must
You can define have mass defined for the building.
the building
mass based on You specify the mass source that you want to use through the
a specified load Define menu > Mass Source command. There are two options
combination if available for defining the source of the mass of a building. You
you wish. can use either one option or the other but you can not use both
simultaneously. The two options are:
• Define the mass element masses and additional

masses: One of the items specified in the material
properties is a mass per unit volume. Each structural
element has a material property associated with it. Thus
the building mass associated with the element mass is
determined by multiplying the volume of each structural
element times its specified mass per unit volume.
Mass 27 - 11
Additional mass can be specified on the Assign menu for

area, line and point objects. Any additional mass
assigned to these objects is added to the element mass to
give the total mass of the building. The additional mass
might be used to account for partitions, cladding, etc.
The total mass is applied to each joint in the structure on

a tributary area basis in all three translational directions,
although, if you indicated that only lateral mass is to be
27 included (considered), then the mass is only active in the
two horizontal translational directions even though it is
assigned in all three translational directions.
ETABS defaults to defining the mass from element

masses plus additional masses.
• Define the mass from a specified load combination:

You can specify a load combination that essentially
defines the mass of the structure. The mass is equal to
the weight defined by the load combination divided by
the gravitational multiplier, g. Only the global Z-
direction loads are considered when calculating the
mass.
This mass is applied to each joint in the structure on a

tributary area basis in all three translational directions,
although, if you indicated that only lateral mass is to be
included (considered), then the mass is only active in the
two horizontal translational directions even though it is
assigned in all three translational directions.
Net downward loads acting on a joint are considered a

positive mass. If the net load acting up on a joint is
upward then the mass at that joint is set to zero. You can
not have a negative mass in ETABS.
Note that it is possible to assign additional mass to area, line

and point objects. This additional mass is only considered by
ETABS if the "Define the mass from specified material
masses" mass source option is used. The additional mass is
not considered by ETABS if you specify that the mass
source is a load combination.
27 - 12 Mass
Additional masses can be input as negative. The additional

masses are added to the masses determined from the material
property masses. If, as a result of including negative
additional mass the net mass at a joint is negative then
ETABS sets the mass at that joint to zero.
27
Mass 27 - 13
Chapter 28 28
Automatic Seismic Loads
General
This chapter documents the automatic seismic lateral static load
cases that can be generated by ETABS. Automatic seismic loads
can be generated in the global X or global Y direction for the
Note: following codes:
The automatic • 1994 UBC (American)
seismic loads
generated by • 1997 UBC (American)
ETABS are
static loads. • 1997 UBC Isolated Building (American)
• 1996 BOCA (American)
• 1995 NBCC (Canadian)
• IBC 2000 (American)
• 1997 NEHRP (American)
28 - 1
Each of these is discussed later in this chapter. In addition user-

defined seismic loads can be automatically generated in the
Defining Automatic Seismic Load Cases

The automatic seismic static load cases are defined using the De-
fine menu > Static Load Cases command. This command
brings up the Define Static Load Case Names dialog box. In this
28 dialog box you specify a name for a load case, a design type, a
self-weight multiplier and in some an Auto Lateral Load. See the
subsections titled "Design Type" and "Self-Weight Multiplier" in
Chapter 27 for additional information on those items.
When you specify the design type for a static load as Quake the
Auto Lateral Load box becomes active and you can choose from
any of the codes mentioned above. If you do not want the Quake
load to be an automatic lateral load then select None in the Auto
Lateral Load box.
If you select a code in the Auto Lateral Load box, then when you
click the Add New Load or Modify Load buttons a dialog box
pops up that allows you to specify the appropriate parameters for
that particular code. If you want to modify the parameters for an
existing automatic lateral load then highlight the load in the De-
fine Static Load Case Names dialog box and click the Modify
Load button.
Each automatic static lateral load that you define must be in a

separate load case. You can not have two automatic static lateral
loads in the same load case. You can, however, add additional
Tip: user-defined loads to a load case that includes an automatic static
lateral load.
Note that the
actual forces You must define a separate automatic static load case for each
associated with
direction and, in the case of seismic loading, each eccentricity
an automatic
static lateral that you want to consider. For example, if you want to define
load are not automatic seismic lateral loads based on the 1997 UBC for X-
calculated until direction load with no eccentricity, X-direction load with +5%
you run the eccentricity, X-direction load with -5% eccentricity, Y-direction
analysis. load with no eccentricity, Y-direction load with +5% eccentricity
28 - 2 Defining Automatic Seismic Load Cases

Chapter 28 - Automatic Seismic Loads
and Y-direction load with -5% eccentricity, then you need to de-
fine six separate load cases.
Note that the actual forces associated with an automatic static

lateral load are not calculated until you run the analysis. Thus
you can not view the resultant automatic lateral loads until after
you have run an analysis.
Automatic Seismic Load Cases

The dialog boxes defining the automatic seismic loads are bro-
28
ken into two halves. The left half of the dialog box defines items
that are dependent on the direction of the loading. The right half
of the dialog box defines factors and coefficients that are not, at
least in ETABS, dependent on the direction of loading.
Some of the direction-dependent data is common to all of the

codes. This includes the direction and eccentricity data and the
story range data. This data is described once below. Other
direction-dependent data including building period information
and other factors and coeffiecients and the non-direction-
dependent factors and coefficients are described separately for
each code later in this chapter.
The weight of the building used in the calculation of automatic

seismic loads is based on the specified mass of the building.
Distribution of Automatic Seismic Loads at a Story Level

The method that ETABS uses to calculate the seismic base shear
and the associated story lateral forces is documented separately
for each code later in this chapter. Once ETABS has calculated a
story level force for an automatic seismic load that force is
apportioned to each joint at the story level elevation in
proportion to its mass.
Direction and Eccentricity Data

In the direction and eccentricity data you can choose one of six
options for the direction of load and eccentricity associated with
the load case. The options are:
Automatic Seismic Load Cases 28 - 3

• X-direction load with no eccentricity
• X-direction load with + eccentricity
• X-direction load with - eccentricity
• Y-direction load with no eccentricity
• Y-direction load with + eccentricity
•
28 Y-direction load with - eccentricity
You can choose any one of these options, but not more than one,
for a particular load case.
If you choose one of the options with + or - eccentricity then you

Tip: specify a percent eccentricity that is applicable to all rigid dia-
In some cases phragms. The default percentage is 5%. The eccentricity options
you may want only have meaning if your model has rigid diaphragms. ETABS
to create spe- ignores eccentricities where rigid diaphragms are not present.
cial point ob-
jects at the Where rigid diaphragms are present ETABS calculates a maxi-
edges of your mum width of the diaphragm perpendicular to the direction of
rigid dia- the seismic loading. This width is calculated by finding the
phragm, even if maximum and minimum X or Y coordinates (depending on di-
there is no rection of load considered) of the points that are part of the rigid
structure in the diaphragm constraint and determining the distance between these
model at the maximum and minimum values. See the subsection titled "Rigid
diaphragm
Diaphragms" in Chapter 23 for more information about the
edges. These
point objects points that are part of the rigid diaphragm constraint when rigid
can then be diaphragms are defined using an assignment to an area object.
assigned to the See the subsection titled "Rigid Diaphragms" in Chapter 25 for
rigid dia- more information about rigid diaphragms defined as an assign-
phragm and ment to one or more point objects.
then ETABS
will correctly Once the appropriate diaphragm width is determined ETABS
calculate the then applies a moment that is equal to the specified percent ec-
diaphragm centricity times the maximum width of the diaphragm perpen-
width and the dicular to the direction of the seismic loading times the total lat-
eccentric mo- eral force applied to the diaphragm. This moment is applied
ment.
about the rigid diaphragm center of mass to account for the ec-
centricity.
28 - 4 Automatic Seismic Load Cases

When defining eccentricities you can click the Override button

to override the eccentricity for any rigid diaphragm at any level.
Thus you could conceivably have different percent eccentricities
specified at different story levels. Note that when you override
the eccentricities you input an actual distance from the cen-
ter of mass of the rigid diaphragm, not a percentage.
When you have overridden the eccentricities ETABS calculates

the eccentric moment as the specified eccentricity distance times
the total lateral force applied to the diaphragm. This moment is
again applied about the rigid diaphragm center of mass to ac-
count for the eccentricity.
28
Story Range Data

In the story range data you specify a top story and a bottom
story. This specifies the elevation range over which the auto-
matic static lateral loads are calculated.
In most instances you would specify the top story as the upper-
most level in the building, typically the roof. In some cases you
may want to specify a lower level as the top story for automatic
seismic loads. For example if you have included penthouses in
your building model you may want to have the automatic lateral
load calculation done based on the roof level (not penthouse roof
level) being the top story, and then add in additional user-defined
load to the load case to account for the penthouses.
The bottom level would typically be the base level, but this may
not always be the case. For example, if your building has several
below-grade levels, and you are assuming that the seismic loads
are transferred to the ground at ground level, then you may
specify the bottom story to be above the base of the building.
Note that no seismic loads are calculated for the bottom story.
They are calculated for the first story above the bottom story and
for all stories up to and including the top story.
By default the bottom story is the base of the building and the
top story is the uppermost level of the building.

1994 UBC Seismic Loads
Options for 1994 UBC Building Period

Three options are provided for the building period used in cal-
culating the 1994 UBC automatic seismic loads. They are:
Note:
Always input Ct
Method A: Calculate the period based on the Method A period
in English units discussed in Section 1628.2.2 of the 1994 UBC. The period is
regardless of calculated using Equation 28-1 (1994 UBC Equation 28-3). The
28 the current
units for your
value used for Ct is user input and hn is determined by ETABS
from the input story level heights.
model.
TA = C t (h n )
34
Eqn. 28-1
Note that the item Ct is always input in English units as specified

in the code. A typical range of values for Ct is 0.020 to 0.035.
The height hn is measured from the elevation of the (top of the)
specified bottom story level to the (top of the) specified top story
level.
Program Calculated: ETABS starts with the period of the mode

calculated to have the largest participation factor in the direction
that loads are being calculated (X or Y). Call this period TETABS.
ETABS also calculates a period based on the Method A period
discussed in Section 1628.2.2 of the 1994 UBC. The period is
calculated using Equation 28-1 (1994 UBC Equation 28-3). The
value used for Ct is user input and hn is determined by ETABS
from the input story level heights. Call this period TA. The
building period, T, that ETABS chooses depends on the seismic
zone factor, Z.
If Z ≥ 0.35 (Zone 4) then:
If TETABS ≤ 1.30TA then T = TETABS.
If TETABS > 1.30TA then T = TA.
If Z < 0.35 (Zone 1, 2 or 3) then:
If TETABS ≤ 1.40TA then T = TETABS.
If TETABS > 1.40TA then T = TA.

User Defined: In this case you input a building period. ETABS

uses this period in the calculations. It does not compare it against
the Method A period. It is assumed that you have already done
this comparison before specifying the period.
Other Input Factors and Coefficients

The Rw factor is direction dependent. It is specified in 1994 UBC
Table 16-N. A typical range of values for Rw is 4 to 12.
The seismic zone factor, Z, can be input per the code which re-
stricts it to one of the following values: 0.075, 0.15, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4
28
as specified in 1994 UBC Table 16-I. Alternatively the Z factor
can be user-defined which allows any value to be input.
The site coefficient for soil characteristics, S, can be 1, 1.2, 1.5

or 2. These correspond to soil types S1, S2, S3 and S4 in Table 16-
J of the 1994 UBC. No other values can be input.
The seismic importance factor, I can be input as any value. See

1994 UBC Table 16-K. A typical range of values for I is 1.00 to
1.25.
Algorithm for 1994 UBC Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1994 UBC seismic loads is based
on Chapter 16, Section 1628 of the 1994 UBC. ETABS calcu-
lates a period as described in the previous section titled "Options
for 1994 UBC Building Period."
A numerical coefficient, C, is calculated using Equation 28-2

(1994 UBC Equation 28-2).
1.25S
C= Eqn. 28-2
T2 3
where,
S = Site coefficient for soil characteristics.
T = Building period.

If the value of C exceeds 2.75 then C is set equal to 2.75 for use
in Equation 28-3. If the value of C/Rw is less than 0.075 then for
use in Equation 28-3 it is set equal to 0.075.
The base shear, V, is calculated from Equation 28-3 (1994 UBC

Equation 28-1).
ZIC
V= W Eqn. 28-3
Rw
28 where,
Z = Seismic zone factor.
I = Importance factor.
C = Numerical coefficient calculated in Equation 28-2.
Rw = Numerical factor specified in UBC Table 16-N.
W = Weight of the building (based on specified mass).
Note that the weight, W, that ETABS uses in Equation 28-3 is

derived from the building mass.
The total base shear, V, is broken into a concentrated force ap-

plied to the top of the building and forces applied at each story
level in accordance with Equation 28-4 (1994 UBC Equation 28-
6):
n
V = Ft + åF
story = 1
story Eqn. 28-4
where,
V = Building base shear.
Ft = Concentrated force at the top of the building.
Fstory = Portion of base shear applied to a story level.
n = Number of story levels in the building.

The concentrated force at the top of the building, Ft, is calculated

as shown in Equation 28-5 (1994 UBC Equation 28-7):
If T ≤ 0.7 sec, then Ft = 0

Eqn. 28-5
If T > 0.7 sec, then Ft = 0.07TV ≤ 0.25V
where,
V = Building base shear. 28

The remaining portion of the base shear, (V - Ft), is distributed
over the height of the building in accordance with Equation 28-6
(1994 UBC Equation 28-8):
(V − Ft ) w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-6
åw
story = 1
story h story
where,
wstory = Weight of story level (based on specified mass).
hstory = Story height, distance from base of building to story

level.

1997 UBC Seismic Loads
Options for 1997 UBC Building Period

culating the 1997 UBC automatic seismic loads. They are identi-
cal to the options previously described for the 1994 UBC in the
subsection titled "Options for 1994 UBC Building Period."
28 Other Input Factors and Coefficients

The overstrength factor, R, and the force factor, Ω, are direction
dependent. Both are specified in 1997 UBC Table 16-N. A typi-
cal range of values for R is 2.8 to 8.5. A typical range of values
for Ω is 2.2 to 2.8.
The seismic coefficients Ca and Cv can either be determined per

the code or they can be user-defined. If Ca and Cv are user-
defined then you simply specify values for them. A typical range
of values for Ca is 0.06 to 0.40 and larger if the near source fac-
tor Na exceeds 1.0. A typical range of values for Cv is 0.06 to
0.96 and larger if the near source factor Nv exceeds 1.0.
If Ca and Cv are determined per the code then you specify a soil
profile type and a seismic zone factor. Based on the input soil
profile type and a seismic zone factor ETABS determines Ca
from 1997 UBC Table 16-Q and Cv from 1997 UBC Table 16-R.
The soil profile type can be SA, SB, SC, SD or SE. These corre-
spond to soil types SA, SB, SC, SD and SE in Table 16-J of the
1997 UBC. No other values can be input. Note that soil profile
type SF is not allowed for the automatic 1997 UBC seismic
loads.
The seismic zone factor, Z, is restricted to one of the following

values: 0.075, 0.15, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 as specified in 1997 UBC Table
16-I.
Note that in 1997 UBC Table 16-Q the Ca value for Z=0.4 has an
additional factor, Na. Similarly, in 1997 UBC Table 16-R the Cv
value for Z=0.4 has an additional factor, Nv. The values for the
near source factors, Na and Nv, can either be determined per the

code or they can be user-defined. If Na and Nv are user-defined

then you simply specify values for them. If they are determined
per the code then you specify a seismic source type and a dis-
tance to the closest known seismic source. Based on the input
seismic source type and distance to the source ETABS deter-
mines Na from 1997 UBC Table 16-S and Nv from 1997 UBC
Table 16-T. ETABS uses linear interpolation for specified dis-
tances between those included in 1997 UBC Tables 16-S and 16-
T.
Note: The seismic source type can be A, B or C. These correspond to

seismic source types A, B and C in Table 16-U of the 1997
28
Always input
UBC. No other values can be input.
the distance to
the closest The distance to the closest known seismic source should be input
known seismic
in kilometers (km).
source in kilo-
meters (km)
The seismic importance factor, I can be input as any value. See
regardless of
the current 1997 UBC Table 16-K. Note that the value from Table 16-K to
units for your be input for automatic seismic loads is I, not Ip or Iw. A typical
model. range of values for I is 1.00 to 1.25.
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1997 UBC seismic loads is based
on Chapter 16, Section 1630.2 of the 1997 UBC. ETABS calcu-
for 1997 UBC Building Period."
Initially the total design base shear, V, is calculated using Equa-

tion 28-7 (1997 UBC Equation 30-4). This base shear value is
then checked against the limits specified in Equations 28-8, 28-9
and 28-10 and modified as necessary to obtain the final base
shear.
CvI
V= W Eqn. 28-7
RT
where,
Cv = 1997 UBC seismic coefficient, Cv.

R = Overstrength factor specified in UBC Table 16-N.
The total design base shear, V, need not exceed that specified in
Equation 28-8 (1997 UBC Equation 30-5). If the base shear cal-
culated per Equation 28-7 exceeds that calculated per Equation
28-8 then ETABS sets the base shear equal to that calculated per
28 Equation 28-8.
2.5C a I
V= W Eqn. 28-8
R
where,
Ca = 1997 UBC seismic coefficient, Ca.
and all other terms are as described for Equation 28-7.
The total design base shear, V, can not be less than that specified
in Equation 28-9 (1997 UBC Equation 30-6). If the base shear
calculated per Equation 28-9 exceeds that calculated per Equa-
tion 28-7 then ETABS sets the base shear equal to that calculated
per Equation 28-9.
V = 0.11Ca I W Eqn. 28-9
where all terms are as previously described for Equations 28-7

and 28-8.
Finally, if the building is in seismic zone 4, the total design base

shear, V, can not be less than that specified in Equation 28-10
(1997 UBC Equation 30-7). If the building is in seismic zone 4
and the base shear calculated per Equation 28-10 exceeds that
calculated per Equations 28-7 and 28-9 then ETABS sets the
base shear equal to that calculated per Equation 28-10.
0.8ZN v I
V= W Eqn. 28-10
R
where,
Z = Seismic zone factor (0.40).

Nv = Near source factor, Nv.
R = Overstrength factor specified in UBC Table 16-N.
Note that ETABS only checks Equation 28-10 if the seismic co-
efficients, Ca and Cv, are determined per the code and the seismic
zone factor Z is specified as 0.40. If the Ca and Cv coefficients
are user specified then ETABS never checks Equation 28-10. 28
Note that the weight, W, that ETABS uses in Equations 28-7
through 28-10 is derived from the building mass.

level in accordance with Equation 28-11 (1997 UBC Equation
30-13):
n
V = Ft + åF
story = 1
story Eqn. 28-11
where,

as shown in Equation 28-12 (1997 UBC Equation 30-14):

Eqn. 28-12
where,


over the height of the building in accordance with Equation 28-
13 (1997 UBC Equation 30-15):
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-13
åw
story = 1
story h story
28 where,

level.
1997 UBC Isolated Building Seismic Loads

For 1997 UBC isolated building seismic loads the bottom story
should be input as the story at the top of the isolators.
The overstrength factor, Ri, is direction dependent. It relates to

the structure above the isolation interface. It is specified in 1997
UBC Table A-16-E which is in Appendix Chapter 16, Division
IV. A typical range of values for Ri is 1.6 to 2.0.
The coefficient for damping, Bd, is direction dependent. It should

be specified based on an assumed effective damping using 1997
UBC Table A-16-C which is in Appendix Chapter 16, Division
IV. A typical range of values for Bd is 0.8 to 2.0.

The maximum effective stiffness and minimum effective stiff-

ness items refer to the maximum and minimum effective stiff-
ness of the isolation system (not individual isolators) at the de-
sign displacement level (not the maximum displacement level).
They correspond to the terms KDmax and KDmin, respectively, in
Appendix Chapter 16, Division IV.
The seismic coefficient Cvd can either be determined per the code
or it can be user-defined. If Cvd is user-defined then you simply
specify a value for it. A typical range of values for Cvd is 0.06 to
0.96 and larger if the near source factor Nv exceeds 1.0. 28
If Cvd is determined per the code then you specify a soil profile
type and a seismic zone factor. Based on the input soil profile
type and a seismic zone factor ETABS determines Cvd from 1997
UBC Table 16-R which is in Chapter 16, not Appendix Chapter
16, Division IV.
Note that in 1997 UBC Table 16-R the Cv value for Z=0.4 has an
additional factor, Nv. The value for this near source factor, Nv,
can either be determined per the code or it can be user-defined. If
Nv is user-defined then you simply specify a value for it. If it is
determined per the code then you specify a seismic source type
and a distance to the closest known seismic source. Based on the
input seismic source type and distance to the source ETABS de-
termines Nv from 1997 UBC Table 16-T. ETABS uses linear in-
terpolation for specified distances between those included in
1997 UBC Table 16-T.
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Isolated Building Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1997 UBC seismic loads for iso-
lated buildings is based on Appendix Chapter 16, Division IV,
Sections 1658.3 and 1658.4 of the 1997 UBC.
The effective period at the design displacement, TD, is deter-

mined from Equation 28-14 (1997 UBC Equation 58-2).
W
TD = 2π Eqn. 28-14
k Dmin g
where,

kDmin = Minimum effective stiffness of the isolation system

at the design displacement.
g = Gravity constant, (e.g., 386.4 in/sec2, 9.81 m/sec2,

etc.).
The design displacement at the center of rigidity of the isolation

system, DD, is determined from Equation 28-15 (1997 UBC
28 Equation 58-1).
æ g ö
ç 2 ÷ C vd TD
4π ø
DD = è Eqn. 28-15
Bd
where,
g = Gravity constant, (e.g., 386.4 in/sec2, 9.81 m/sec2,

etc.).
Cvd = Seismic coefficient, Cvd.
TD = Effective period at the design displacement.
Bd = Coefficient for damping.
Note: The base shear, Vs, is calculated from Equation 28-16 (1997
UBC Equation 58-8).
The limits on Vs
specified in k Dmax D D
1997 UBC sec- Vs = Eqn. 28-16
tion 1658.4.3 Ri
are not consid-
ered by ETABS. Note that Equation 28-16 gives a force level that is applicable for
the structure above the isolation system. If you want a force level
that is applicable to the isolation system per 1997 UBC Equation
58-7 then you should create a different load combination with a
scale factor of Ri for the seismic load.
Also note that the limits on Vs specified in 1997 UBC section

1658.4.3 are not considered by ETABS.

The total base shear, Vs, is distributed over the height of the
building in accordance with Equation 28-17 (1997 UBC Equa-
tion 58-9):
Vs w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-17
åw
story = 1
story h story
where,
Fstory = Portion of base shear applied to a story level. 28

Vs = Building base shear per Equation 28-16.

level.
1996 BOCA Seismic Loads
Options for 1996 BOCA Building Period

culating the 1996 BOCA automatic seismic loads. They are:
Note: Approximate: Calculate the approximate period, Ta, based on

the approximate formula discussed in Section 1610.4.1.2.1 of the
Always input CT
1996 BOCA. The period is calculated using Equation 28-18. The
in English units
regardless of
value used for CT is user input and hn is determined by ETABS
the current from the input story level heights.
units for your
Ta = C T (h n )
34
model. Eqn. 28-18
Note that the item CT is always input in English units as speci-

fied in the code. A typical range of values for CT is 0.020 to
0.035.The height hn is measured from the elevation of the (top of
the) specified bottom story level to the (top of the) specified top
story level.

Program Calculated: ETABS starts with the period of the

mode calculated to have the largest participation factor in the di-
rection that loads are being calculated (X or Y). Call this period
TETABS. ETABS also calculates a period based on the approxi-
mate formula discussed in Section 1610.4.1.2.1 of the 1996
BOCA. The period is calculated using Equation 28-1. The value
used for CT is user input and hn is determined by ETABS from
the input story level heights. Call this period Ta.
ETABS also determines a value for the coefficient for the upper
28 limit on the calculated period, Ca, using Table 1610.4.1.2 in the
1996 BOCA. Note that the value used for Ca depends on the
specified value for the effective peak velocity-related coefficient,
Av. ETABS determines Ca using linear interpolation if the speci-
fied value of Av is not in Table 1610.4.1.2. If Av exceeds 0.40
then Ca is taken as 1.2. If Av is less than 0.05 then Ca is taken as
1.7.
The building period, T, that ETABS chooses is determined as

follows:
If TETABS > CaTa then T = CaTa.
If TETABS ≤ CaTa then T = TETABS.

the coefficient for the upper limit on the calculated period times
the approximate period (CaTa). It is assumed that you have al-
ready done this comparison before specifying the period.

The response modification factor, R, is direction dependent. It is
specified in 1996 BOCA Table 1610.3.3. A typical range of val-
ues for R is 3 to 8.
Any value can be input for the effective peak acceleration coeffi-
cient, Aa. Refer to BOCA section 1610.1.3. A typical range of
values for Aa is 0.05 to 0.40.
Any value can be input for the effective peak velocity-related

coefficient, Av. Refer to BOCA section 1610.1.3. A typical range
of values for Av is 0.05 to 0.40.

The soil profile type can be S1, S2, S3 or S4. These correspond to
soil types S1, S2, S3 and S4 in Table 1610.3.1 of the 1996 BOCA.
No other values can be input.
Algorithm for 1996 BOCA Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1996 BOCA seismic loads is
based on Section 1610.4.1 of the 1996 BOCA. ETABS calcu-
for 1996 BOCA Building Period."
Initially the seismic coefficient, Cs, is calculated from Equation

28
28-19. The value of this coefficient is then checked against the
limit specified in Equation 28-20 and modified as necessary to
obtain the seismic coefficient.
1.2A v S
Cs = Eqn. 28-19
RT 2 3
where,
Av = The effective peak velocity-related coefficient.
S = The site coefficient based on the input soil profile

type.
R = Response modification factor.
The seismic coefficient, Cs, need not exceed that specified in

Equation 28-20. If the seismic coefficient calculated per Equa-
tion 28-19 exceeds that calculated per Equation 28-20 then
ETABS sets the seismic coefficient equal to that calculated per
Equation 28-20.
2.5A a
Cs = Eqn. 28-20
R
where,
Aa = The effective peak acceleration coefficient.
R = Response modification factor.

The base shear is calculated using Equation 28-21.
V = Cs W Eqn. 28-21
where,
Cs = Seismic coefficient calculated from Equation 28-19

or 28-20 as appropriate.
28 The base shear, V, is distributed over the height of the building

in accordance with Equation 28-22:
k
V w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-22
å k
w story h story
story = 1
where,

level.
k = Exponent applied to building height. The value of k

depends on the value of the building period, T, used
for determining the base shear. If T ≤ 0.5 seconds
then k = 1. If T > 2.5 seconds then k = 2. If 0.5 sec-
onds < T < 2.5 seconds then k is linearly interpo-
lated between 1 and 2.

1995 NBCC Seismic Loads
Options for 1995 NBCC Building Period

Five options are provided for the building period used in calcu-
lating the 1995 NBCC automatic seismic loads. They are:
Code - Moment Frame: Calculate the period as 0.1 * N, where

N is the number of stories in the building based on the specified
top and bottom story levels.
28
Code - Other: Calculate the period, T, using Equation 28-23:
0.09h n
T= Eqn. 28-23
Ds
where,
hn = Height of the building measured from the elevation

of the (top of the) specified bottom story level to
the (top of the) specified top story level measured
in meters.
Ds = Length of wall or braced frame which constitutes

the main lateral-force-resisting system measured in
meters.
Program Calculated - Moment Frame: ETABS uses the pe-

riod of the mode calculated to have the largest participation fac-
tor in the direction that loads are being calculated (X or Y). In
addition, ETABS runs a parallel calculation using a period equal
to 0.1 * N, where N is the number of stories in the building based
on the specified top and bottom story levels.
ETABS calculates the equivalent lateral force at the base of the

structure, Ve, using both periods. Call these values Ve-mode and
Ve-0.1*N. ETABS determines the value of Ve to use as follows:
If Ve-mode ≥ 0.8 Ve-0.1*N then Ve = Ve-mode.
If Ve-mode < 0.8 Ve-0.1*N then Ve = 0.8 Ve-0.1*N.

Program Calculated - Other: ETABS uses the period of the

rection that loads are being calculated (X or Y). In addition,
ETABS runs a parallel calculation using a period calculated us-
ing Equation 28-23.
ETABS calculates the equivalent lateral force at the base of the

structure, Ve, using both periods. Call these values Ve-mode and
Ve-Eqn. 28-23. ETABS determines the value of Ve to use as follows:
28 If Ve-mode ≥ 0.8 Ve-Eqn. 28-23 then Ve = Ve-mode.
If Ve-mode < 0.8 Ve-Eqn. 28-23 then Ve = 0.8 Ve-Eqn. 28-23.

uses this period in the calculations. It does not calculate other
values of Ve using this method for comparison against the Ve
calculated using your specified period. It is assumed that you
have already done this comparison before specifying the period.

The force modification factor, R, is direction dependent. It is
specified in 1995 NBCC Table 4.1.9.1.B. A typical range of val-
ues for R is 1.5 to 4.0.
The acceleration-related seismic zone, Za, can be input as 0, 1, 2,

3, 4, 5 or 6. No other input values are allowed.
The velocity-related seismic zone, Zv, can be input as 0, 1, 2, 3,

4, 5 or 6. No other input values are allowed.
The zonal velocity ratio, v, can either be based on Zv, or a user-

specified value can be input. If it is based on Zv then ETABS as-
sumes v is equal to 0.00, 0.05, 0.10, 0.15, 0.20, 0.30 or 0.40 for
Zv equal to 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, respectively.
The importance factor, I, can be input as any value. It is speci-

fied in 1995 NBCC Sentence 4.1.9.1(10). A typical range of val-
ues for I is 1.0 to 1.5.
The foundation factor, F, can be input as any value. It is speci-

fied in 1995 NBCC Table 4.1.9.1.C. A typical range of values
for F is 1.0 to 2.0.

Algorithm for 1995 NBCC Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1995 NBCC seismic loads is
based on Subsection 4.1.9 of the 1995 NBCC. ETABS calculates
a period as described in the previous section titled "Options for
1995 NBCC Building Period."
First ETABS checks if Zv = 0 and Za > 0. If so, then ETABS sets

Zv = 1 and v = 0.05 for the calculation of the base shear.
ETABS calculates the seismic response factor, S, based on 1995

NBCC Table 4.1.9.1.A. 28
ETABS determines the product of the foundation factor, F, and
the seismic response factor, S. Call this product FS. If necessary
this product is modified as follows:
If FS > 3 and Za ≤ Zv then FS = 3.
If FS > 4.2 and Za > Zv then FS = 4.2.
ETABS determines the equivalent lateral force representing

elastic response per Equation 28-24:
Ve = v * FS * I * W Eqn. 28-24
Note that in cases where the building period is program calcu-

lated the value of Ve is calculated twice and then one of the cal-
culated values is chosen. See the previous section titled "Options
for 1995 NBCC Building Period" for more information.
The minimum lateral seismic force, V, is calculated using Equa-

tion 28-25.
0.6Ve
V= Eqn. 28-25
R

level in accordance with Equation 28-26:
n
V = Ft + åF
story = 1
story Eqn. 28-26

where,

28 as shown in Equation 28-27:

Eqn. 28-27
where,

over the height of the building in accordance with Equation 28-
28:
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-28
åw
story = 1
story h story
where,

level.

Note that the torsional moment discussed in 1995 NBCC Sen-

tence 4.1.9.1(28) are not automatically included by ETABS.
However you can override the eccentricities at each diaphragm
to specify these torsional moments.
IBC 2000 Seismic Loads
Options for IBC 2000 Building Period

culating the IBC 2000 automatic seismic loads. They are: 28
Note: Approximate Period: Calculate the period based on Equation
28-29 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.2-1). The value used for CT
Always input CT
is user input and hn is determined by ETABS from the input
in English units
regardless of
story level heights.
the current
TA = C T (h n )
34
units for your Eqn. 28-29
model.
0.035. The height hn is measured from the elevation of the (top
of the) specified bottom story level to the (top of the) specified
top story level.

TETABS. ETABS also calculates a period based on the Equation
28-29 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.2-1). The value used for CT
story level heights. Call this period TA.
ETABS also calculates a coefficient for the upper limit on the

calculated period, Cu, based on IBC 2000 Table 1613.4.9.2. Note
that ETABS uses linear interpolation to calculate values of Cu
where the value of SD1 is not specifically specified in Table
1613.4.9.2.

follows:
If TETABS ≤ CuTA then T = TETABS.

If TETABS > CuTA then T = CuTA.

CuTA. It is assumed that you have already done this comparison
before specifying the period.

The response modification factor, R, and the system overstrength
28 factor, Ω, are direction dependent. Both are specified in IBC
2000 Table 1613.4.1. A typical range of values for R is 2 to 8. A
typical range of values for Ω is 2 to 3.
The seismic group can be input as I, II or III. No other values are

allowed. See IBC 2000 Table 1613.1.4 for information about the
seismic group. ETABS determines the occupancy importance
factor, I, from the input seismic group and IBC 2000 Table
1613.1.4.
The seismic coefficients can either be input per the code or they
can be user-defined. If the seismic coefficients are per code then
you specify a site class, Ss and S1. If seismic coefficients are user
defined then you specify Ss, S1, Fa and Fv.
The site class can be either A, B, C, D or E. Note that site class F

is not allowed for ETABS automatic IBC 2000 lateral seismic
loads. See IBC 2000 Table 1613.1.2.1.1 for site class definitions.
Note: Ss is the mapped spectral acceleration for short periods as deter-

mined in IBC 2000 Section 1613.2.1. A typical range of values
In ETABS input
for Ss is 0 to 3. Note that the seismic maps show Ss in %g with a
Ss and S1 in g
rather than
typical range of 0% to 300%. The input in ETABS is in g. Thus
percent g as it the map values should be divided by 100 when they are input
is shown on the into ETABS. For example, if the map value is 125%g it should
code maps. be input into ETABS as 1.25g.
S1 is the mapped spectral acceleration for a one-second period as

determined in IBC 2000 Section 1613.2.1. A typical range of
values for S1 is 0 to 2. Note that the seismic maps show S1 in %g
with a typical range of 0% to 200%. The input in ETABS is in g.
Thus the map values should be divided by 100 when they are in-

put into ETABS. For example, if the map value is 125%g it

should be input into ETABS as 1.25g.
Fa is a site coefficient. If the site coefficients are determined per

code then ETABS automatically determines Fa from the site
class and Ss based on IBC 2000 Table 1613.2.1.2-1. If site coef-
ficients are user-defined then the Fa is directly input by the user.
A typical range of values for Fa is 0.8 to 2.5.
Fv is a site coefficient. If the site coefficients are determined per

code then ETABS automatically determines Fv from the site
class and S1 based on IBC 2000 Table 1613.2.1.2-2. If site coef-
28
ficients are user-defined then the Fv is directly input by the user.
A typical range of values for Fv is 0.8 to 3.5.
Algorithm for IBC 2000Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining IBC 2000 seismic loads is based
on IBC 2000 Section 1613.4.9. ETABS calculates a period as
described in the previous section titled "Options for IBC 2000
Building Period."
ETABS begins by calculating the design spectral response accel-

eration at short periods, SDS, using Equation 28-30. Equation 28-
30 is derived by combining IBC 2000 Equations 1613.2.1.2-1
and 1613.2.1.3-1.
2
S DS = Fa Ss Eqn. 28-30
3
Next ETABS calculates the design spectral response acceleration

at a one-second period, SD1, using Equation 28-31. Equation 28-
31 is derived by combining IBC 2000 Equations 1613.2.1.2-2
and 1613.2.1.3-2.
2
S D1 = Fv S1 Eqn. 28-31
3
ETABS determines a seismic design category (A, B, C, D, E or F

with A being the least severe and F being the most severe) based
on IBC 2000 Section 1613.3.1. A seismic design category is de-
termined based on SDS using IBC 2000 Table 1613.3.1-1. A
seismic design category is also determined based on SD1 using

IBC 2000 Table 1613.3.1-2. The more severe of the two seismic
categories is chosen by ETABS as the seismic design category
for the building.
Initially a seismic response coefficient, Cs, is calculated using

Equation 28-32 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.1-2). This base
shear value is then checked against the limits specified in Equa-
tions 28-33, 28-34 and 28-35 and modified as necessary to ob-
tain the final base shear.
28 Cs =
S DS
R
Eqn. 28-32
I
where,
SDS = The design spectral response acceleration at short pe-

riods.
R = Response modification factor specified in IBC 2000

Table 1613.4.1.
I = The occupancy importance factor determined in ac-

cordance with IBC 2000 Table 1613.1.4.
The seismic response coefficient, Cs, need not exceed that speci-
fied in Equation 28-33 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.1-3). If the
seismic response coefficient calculated per Equation 28-32 ex-
ceeds that calculated per Equation 28-33 then ETABS sets the
seismic response coefficient, Cs, equal to that calculated per
Equation 28-33.
S D1
Cs = Eqn. 28-33
æRö
ç ÷T
è Iø
where,
SD1 = The design spectral response acceleration at a one

second period.
T = The building period used for calculating the base

shear.

The seismic response coefficient, Cs, can not be less than that
specified in Equation 28-34 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.1-4).
If the seismic response coefficient calculated per Equation 28-34
exceeds that calculated per Equation 28-32 then ETABS sets the
seismic response coefficient equal to that calculated per Equation
28-34.
Cs = 0.044 SDS I Eqn. 28-34
where all terms are as previously described for Equation 28-32. 28

Finally, if the building is in seismic design category E or F, the
seismic response coefficient, Cs, can not be less than that speci-
fied in Equation 28-35 (IBC 2000 Equation 1613.4.9.1-5). If the
building is in seismic design category E or F and the seismic re-
sponse coefficient calculated per Equation 28-35 exceeds that
28-35.
0.5S1
Cs = Eqn. 28-35
R
I
where,
S1 = The mapped spectral acceleration for a one second

period.
and all other terms are as previously described for Equation 28-
32.
The base shear, V, is calculated using Equation 28-36 (IBC 2000

Equation 1613.4.9.1-1):
V = Cs W Eqn. 28-36
Cs = Seismic response coefficient as determined from

one of Equations 28-32 through 28-35 as appropri-
ate.

The base shear, V, is distributed over the height of the building

in accordance with Equation 28-37. Equation 28-37 is derived by
combining IBC 2000 Equations 1613.4.9.3-1 and 1613.4.9.3-2.
k
V w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-37
å k
w story h story
story = 1
where,
28 Fstory = Portion of base shear applied to a story level.

level.

for determining the base shear. If T ≤ 0.5 seconds
1997 NEHRP Seismic Loads
Options for 1997 NEHRP Building Period

culating the 1997 NEHRP automatic seismic loads. They are:
Note:
Approximate Period: Calculate the period based on Equation
Always input CT 28-38 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.3.1-1). The value used for CT
in English units is user input and hn is determined by ETABS from the input
regardless of story level heights.
the current
TA = C T (h n )
units for your 34
model.
Eqn. 28-38


0.035. The height hn is measured from the elevation of the (top
of the) specified bottom story level to the (top of the) specified
top story level.

TETABS. ETABS also calculates a period based on the Equation
28-38 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.3.1-1). The value used for CT
28
story level heights. Call this period TA.
ETABS also calculates a coefficient for the upper limit on the

calculated period, Cu, based on 1997 NEHRP Table 5.3.3. Note
that ETABS uses linear interpolation to calculate values of Cu
where the value of SD1 is not specifically specified in Table
5.3.3.

follows:
If TETABS ≤ CuTA then T = TETABS.
If TETABS > CuTA then T = CuTA.

CuTA. It is assumed that you have already done this comparison
before specifying the period.

The response modification coefficient, R, and the system over-
strength factor, Ω, are direction dependent. Both are specified in
1997 NEHRP Table 5.2.2. A typical range of values for R is 2 to
8. A typical range of values for Ω is 2 to 3.
The seismic group can be input as I, II or III. No other values are

allowed. See 1997 NEHRP Table 1.4 for information about the
seismic group. ETABS determines the occupancy importance

factor, I, from the input seismic group and 1997 NEHRP Table
1.4.
The seismic coefficients can either be input per the code or they
can be user-defined. If the seismic coefficients are per code then
you specify a site class, Ss and S1. If seismic coefficients are user
defined then you specify Ss, S1, Fa and Fv.
Note:
The site class can be either A, B, C, D or E. Note that site class F
In ETABS input
is not allowed for ETABS automatic 1997 NEHRP lateral seis-
Ss and S1 in g
28 rather than
percent g as it
mic loads. See 1997 NEHRP Section 4.1.2.1 for site class defi-
nitions.
is shown on the
code maps. Ss is the mapped maximum considered spectral acceleration for
short periods as determined in 1997 NEHRP Section 4.1.2. A
typical range of values for Ss is 0 to 3. Note that the seismic
maps show Ss in %g with a typical range of 0% to 300%. The in-
put in ETABS is in g. Thus the map values should be divided by
100 when they are input into ETABS. For example, if the map
value is 125%g it should be input into ETABS as 1.25g.
S1 is the mapped maximum considered spectral acceleration for a

one second period as determined in 1997 NEHRP Section 4.1.2.
A typical range of values for S1 is 0 to 2. Note that the seismic
maps show S1 in %g with a typical range of 0% to 200%. The
input in ETABS is in g. Thus the map values should be divided
by 100 when they are input into ETABS. For example, if the
map value is 125%g it should be input into ETABS as 1.25g.
Fa is a site coefficient. If the site coefficients are determined per

code then ETABS automatically determines Fa from the site
class and Ss based on 1997 NEHRP Table 4.1.2.4a. If site coeffi-
cients are user-defined the Fa is directly input by the user. A
typical range of values for Fa is 0.8 to 2.5.
Fv is a site coefficient. If the site coefficients are determined per

code then ETABS automatically determines Fv from the site
class and S1 based on 1997 NEHRP Table 4.1.2.4b. If site coeffi-
cients are user-defined the Fv is directly input by the user. A
typical range of values for Fv is 0.8 to 3.5.

Algorithm for 1997 NEHRP Seismic Loads

The algorithm for determining 1997 NEHRP seismic loads is
based on 1997 NEHRP Section 5.3. ETABS calculates a period
as described in the previous section titled "Options for 1997
NEHRP Building Period."
ETABS begins by calculating the design spectral response accel-

eration at short periods, SDS, using Equation 28-39. Equation 28-
39 is derived by combining 1997 NEHRP Equations 4.1.2.4-1
and 4.1.2.5-1. 28
2
S DS = Fa Ss Eqn. 28-39
3
Next ETABS calculates the design spectral response acceleration

at a one-second period, SD1, using Equation 28-40. Equation 28-
40 is derived by combining 1997 NEHRP Equations 4.1.2.4-2
and 4.1.2.5-2.
2
S D1 = Fv S1 Eqn. 28-40
3
ETABS determines a seismic design category (A, B, C, D, E or F

with A being the least severe and F being the most severe) based
on 1997 NEHRP Section 4.2.1. A seismic design category is de-
termined based on SDS using 1997 NEHRP Table 4.2.1a. A seis-
mic design category is also determined based on SD1 using 1997
NEHRP Table 4.2.1b. The more severe of the two seismic cate-
gories is chosen by ETABS as the seismic design category for
the building.
Initially a seismic response coefficient, Cs, is calculated using

Equation 28-41 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.2.1-1). This base
shear value is then checked against the limits specified in Equa-
tions 28-42, 28-43 and 28-44 and modified as necessary to ob-
tain the final base shear.
S DS
Cs = Eqn. 28-41
R
I
where,

SDS = The design spectral response acceleration at short pe-

riods.
R = Response modification factor specified in 1997

NEHRP Table 5.2.2.
I = The occupancy importance factor determined in ac-

cordance with 1997 NEHRP Table 1.4.
The seismic response coefficient, Cs, need not exceed that speci-
28 fied in Equation 28-32 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.2.1-2). If the
seismic response coefficient calculated per Equation 28-41 ex-
ceeds that calculated per Equation 28-42 then ETABS sets the
seismic response coefficient, Cs, equal to that calculated per
Equation 28-42.
S D1
Cs = Eqn. 28-42
æRö
ç ÷T
è Iø
where,
SD1 = The design spectral response acceleration at a one

second period.
T = The building period used for calculating the base

shear.
The seismic response coefficient, Cs, can not be less than that
specified in Equation 28-43 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.2.1-3).
If the seismic response coefficient calculated per Equation 28-43
exceeds that calculated per Equation 28-41 then ETABS sets the
28-43.
Cs = 0.1 SD1 I Eqn. 28-43
where all terms are as previously described for Equations 28-41

and 28-42.

Finally, if the building is in seismic design category E or F, the

seismic response coefficient, Cs, can not be less than that speci-
fied in Equation 28-44 (1997 NEHRP Equation 5.3.2.1-4). If the
building is in seismic design category E or F and the seismic re-
sponse coefficient calculated per Equation 28-44 exceeds that
28-44.
0.5S1
Cs =
R
Eqn. 28-44
28
I
where,
S1 = The mapped spectral acceleration for a one second

period.
and all other terms are as previously described for Equation 28-
41.
The base shear, V, is calculated using Equation 28-45 (1997

NEHRP Equation 5.3.2):
V = Cs W Eqn. 28-45
Cs = Seismic response coefficient as determined from

one of Equations 28-41 through 28-44 as appropri-
ate.

in accordance with Equation 28-46. Equation 28-46 is derived by
combining 1997 NEHRP Equations 5.3.4-1 and 5.3.4-2.
k
V w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-46
å k
w story h story
story = 1
where,


level.

28 for determining the base shear. If T ≤ 0.5 seconds
User-Defined Seismic Loads
Input Factors and Coefficients

The base shear coefficient, C, is direction dependent. This coef-
ficient multiplied times the building weight gives the lateral
seismic base shear in the direction specified.
The building height exponent, k, is used as an exponent on the

building height when determining the distribution of the base
shear over the height of the building. See Equation 28-48.
Algorithm for User-Defined Seismic Loads

The base shear, V, is calculated using Equation 28-47:
V=CW Eqn. 28-47
where,
C = User-defined base shear coefficient.


in accordance with Equation 28-48:
k
V w story h story
Fstory = n
Eqn. 28-48
å k
w story h story
story = 1
where,

28

level.
k = A user-defined exponent.

Chapter 29
29
Automatic Wind Loads
General
This chapter documents the automatic wind lateral static load
cases that can be generated by ETABS. Automatic wind loads
can be generated in any arbitrary horizontal direction for the
Note: following codes:
The automatic • 1994 UBC (American)
wind loads
generated by • 1997 UBC (American)
ETABS are
static loads. • 1995 NBCC (Canadian)
• 1996 BOCA (American)
• ASCE 7-95 (American)
Each of these is discussed later in this chapter. In addition user-

defined wind loads can be automatically generated in any arbi-
trary horizontal direction.
29 - 1
Defining Automatic Wind Load Cases

The automatic wind static load cases are defined using the De-
fine menu > Static Load Cases command. This command
brings up the Define Static Load Case Names dialog box. In this
dialog box you specify a name for a load case, a design type, a
self-weight multiplier and in some an Auto Lateral Load. See the
subsections titled "Design Type" and "Self-Weight Multiplier" in
Chapter 27 for additional information on those items.
When you specify the design type for a static load as Wind the
29 Auto Lateral Load box becomes active and you can choose from
any of the codes mentioned above. If you do not want the Wind
load to be an automatic lateral load then select None in the Auto
Lateral Load box.
If you select a code in the Auto Lateral Load box then when you
click the Add New Load or Modify Load buttons a dialog box
pops up that allows you to specify the appropriate parameters for
that particular code. If you want to modify the parameters for an
existing automatic lateral load then highlight the load in the De-
fine Static Load Case Names dialog box and click the Modify
Load button.
Tip: Each automatic static lateral load that you define must be in a
separate load case. You can not have two automatic static lateral
Note that the
loads in the same load case. You can, however, add additional
actual forces
associated with
user-defined loads to a load case that includes an automatic static
an automatic lateral load. You must define a separate automatic static load
static lateral case for each direction of wind load.
load are not
calculated until Note that the actual forces associated with an automatic static
you run the lateral load are not calculated until you run the analysis. Thus
analysis. you can not view the resultant automatic lateral loads until after
you have run an analysis.
29 - 2 Defining Automatic Wind Load Cases

Chapter 29 - Automatic Wind Loads
Automatic Wind Load Cases

In ETABS automatically calculated wind loads are only applied
to rigid diaphragms. A separate load is created for each rigid
diaphragm present at a story level. The wind loads calculated at
any story level are based on the story level elevation, the story
height above and below that level, the assumed exposure width
for the rigid diaphragm(s) at that story level and various code-
dependent wind coefficients.
If you have a model where you are using floor elements to model
the actual in-plane stiffness of the diaphragm and you want to
29
create some automatic wind load cases then you will need to de-
fine one or more dummy rigid diaphragms at each story level.
You can assign a dummy rigid diaphragm to just one point ob-
ject at a story level. The point object that is assigned a dummy
rigid diaphragm becomes a location where the wind load is ap-
plied.
The dialog boxes defining the automatic wind loads are broken
into four areas. The first area allows you to define the wind di-
rection and the second area is for defining the exposure height.
The third area is for defining wind coefficients and the fourth
area is for specifying the exposure width and wind load applica-
tion point associated with a rigid diaphragm. The data in the di-
rection, exposure height and the exposure width s is common to
all of the codes and is described once below. The data in the
wind coefficients area is code-dependent and is described
separately for each code later in this chapter.
You can also input user-defined wind loads. The format for this
is described at the end of this chapter.
Wind Direction
When specifying the wind direction you indicate the direction of
the wind by an angle measured in degrees. An angle of 0 degrees
means the wind is blowing in the positive global X-direction,
that is is it blowing from the negative global X-direction to the
positive global X-direction. An angle of 90 degrees means the
wind is blowing in the positive global Y-direction. An angle of
180 degrees means the wind is blowing in the negative global X-
Automatic Wind Load Cases 29 - 3

direction. An angle of 270 degrees means the wind is blowing in

the negative global Y-direction.
You can input any angle for the wind direction. The angle is
always measured counterclockwise from the positive global X-
axis. A positive angle appears counterclockwise as you look
down on the model in the negative global Z-direction.
Wind Exposure Height

The exposure height is based on the story level heights specified
29 for the building. You can view and/or modify these heights using
the Edit menu > Edit Story Data > Edit command. Three
additional items that you input in the dialog box defining the
automatic wind loads to complete the definition of the exposure
height are a top story, bottom story level and, if desired, a para-
pet height.
The top story indicates the highest story level to be assumed ex-
posed to wind loading for the purposes of calculating the auto-
matic wind load. In most instances the top story should be the
uppermost story level in the building and this is the default
value.
In some instances, for example where penthouses are included in

the ETABS model and there is a parapet at the main roof level, it
may be more convenient to indicate that the top story level for
automatic wind loading is the main roof level. You can then add
user-defined loads to the load case to account for the wind loads
acting on the penthouse.
Note: The bottom story level indicates the lowest story level that is ex-
posed to wind loading. When the wind load is calculated the
You can specify
bottom story receives wind load from half of the story height
a parapet
height that is
above. It is assumed that all stories above the bottom story are
used in deter- loaded by the wind.
mining auto-
matic wind By default the bottom story is assumed to be the base level of the
loads. building. In some cases you may want to specify that a higher
level is the bottom story for wind loading. one example of this
might be if your building has several below-grade levels which
should not receive any wind loading.
29 - 4 Automatic Wind Load Cases

Exposure width for Exposure width for Exposure width for

2nd level diaphragm 2nd level diaphragm 2nd level diaphragm
Exposure Exposure Exposure

parapet height
parapet height
parapet height
width for width for width for
Roof level Roof level Roof level
Specified
Specified
Specified
diaphragm diaphragm diaphragm
Roof Roof Roof

h2/2
h2 h2 h2
2nd 2nd h2/2 2nd
h1/2
Z h1 Z h1 Z h1
X X X
29
Base Base Base
a) Building Elevation b) Wind Loading at Roof Level c) Wind Loading at 2nd Level
(Above) The parapet height item allows you to specify the height that a
Figure 29-1: parapet extends above a specified top story level. The wind load
Example extent of that acts on the parapet extension is assumed to act at the
wind loading specified top story level.
Consider the example shown in Figure 29-1a. The figure shows

an elevation of a two-story building with rigid diaphragms at
each story level. Assume wind load is to be automatically
calculated for the Y-direction. Thus the wind load is acting on
the face of the building shown in the elevation.
The shaded area in Figure 29-1b illustrates the extent of the wind
load that ETABS assumes is applied to the Roof level. The
shaded area in Figure 29-1c illustrates the extent of the wind
load that ETABS assumes is applied to the 2nd level.
Wind Exposure Width and Wind Load Application Point

By default, the wind exposure width for a rigid diaphragm is
equal to the ETABS calculated width of the diaphragm in a di-
rection perpendicular to the direction of the wind load. You can
modify the assumed exposure width if desired when defining the
code-specific automatic wind load parameters.

ETABS calculates the maximum width of the rigid diaphragm

perpendicular to the direction of the wind loading using the fol-
lowing three-step process.
• Transform the coordinates of all of the point objects that

are part of the rigid diaphragm constraint into a system
of coordinates that is parallel and perpendicular to the
specified direction of wind loading.
• Find the point objects that have the maximum and

minimum coordinates perpendicular to the direction of
29 the wind load. For example, if the wind load is in the
global X direction then you want to find the point ob-
jects with the maximum and minimum global Y coordi-
nates.
• Subtract the minimum perpendicular coordinate from the

maximum perpendicular coordinate to obtain the dia-
phragm width perpendicular to the wind load.
By default, the point where the wind load is applied to a rigid

diaphragm is the ETABS-calculated geometric center of the dia-
phragm. You can modify the assumed wind load application
point if desired when defining the code-specific automatic wind
load parameters.
1994 UBC Wind Loads
Input Wind Coefficients

Three wind coefficients are input for 1994 UBC wind loads.
They are the basic wind speed in miles per hour (mph), the expo-
sure type and the wind importance factor, Iw.
The basic wind speed is described in 1994 UBC Sections 1614

and 1616. A typical range of values for the basic wind speed is
70 to 130 mph.
The exposure types are described in 1994 UBC Sections 1614

and 1617. The exposure type can be B, C or D. No other values
are allowed.

The wind importance factor can be found in 1994 UBC Table

16-K. You should input the wind importance factor, Iw, not one
of the seismic importance factors, I or Ip. A typical range of val-
ues for Iw is 1.00 to 1.15.
Algorithm for 1994 UBC Wind Loads

ETABS automatic wind loads for the 1994 UBC are based on
Sections 1614 through 1619 of the 1994 UBC.
The wind loads applied in ETABS are a modified version of the

Method 2 (Projected Area Method) as described in Section
1619.3 of the 1994 UBC. ETABS applies horizontal wind loads
29
on the vertical projected area as described in Section 1619.3.
ETABS has two modifications to the requirements of Section
1619.3. The first modification is that ETABS does not automati-
cally apply vertical wind loads over the projected horizontal
area. If you want to include these vertical wind loads in the load
case then you must manually include them yourself.
The other modification is that ETABS applies the method to

structures of any height. It does not limit it to structures less than
200 feet high as discussed in 1994 UBC Section 1619.3.
The shape of the horizontal projected area is determined based

on the story heights and the input exposure widths for each rigid
diaphragm. ETABS uses Equation 29-1 (1994 UBC Equation
18-1) to determine the wind pressure, P, at any point on the sur-
face of the horizontal projected area.
P = Ce Cq qs Iw Eqn. 29-1
where,
Ce = Combined height, exposure and gust factor coeffi-

cient as given in 1994 UBC Table 16-G.
Cq = Pressure coefficient for the structure as given in 1994

UBC Table 16-H.
qs = Wind stagnation pressure at the standard height of 33

feet as given in 1994 UBC Table 16-F.
Iw = Importance factor as input by the user.

ETABS determines the Ce coefficient from 1994 UBC Table 16-

G using the input exposure type and the input bottom story. For
use in 1994 UBC Table 16-G the elevation of the input bottom
story is assumed to be zero (0). ETABS uses linear interpolation
to determine the value of the Ce coefficient at heights above 15
feet that are not listed in 1994 UBC Table 16-G.
ETABS determines the Cq coefficient from 1994 UBC Table 16-

H. ETABS uses the values for Primary Frames and Systems us-
ing Method 2 (the projected area method). Thus for buildings 40
feet or less in height ETABS uses Cq = 1.3 and for buildings
29 more than 40 feet in height ETABS uses Cq = 1.4.
ETABS determines qs from Equation 29-2.
qs = 0.00256 V2 ≥ 10 psf Eqn. 29-2
where,

feet, psf.
V = Basic wind speed as input by the user, mph.
Note the units that are specified for qs and V. Also note that
Equation 29-2 is consistent with 1994 UBC Table 16-F.
ETABS distributes the pressures, P, on the surface of the hori-

zontal projected area to each rigid diaphragm on a tributary area
basis as shown in Figure 29-1.
1997 UBC Wind Loads
Input Wind Coefficients

Three wind coefficients are input for 1997 UBC wind loads.
sure type and the wind importance factor, Iw.
The basic wind speed is described in 1997 UBC Sections 1616

and 1618. A typical range of values for the basic wind speed is
70 to 130 mph.

The exposure types are described in 1997 UBC Sections 1616

and 1619. The exposure type can be B, C or D. No other values
are allowed.
The wind importance factor can be found in 1997 UBC Table

16-K. You should input the wind importance factor, Iw, not one
of the seismic importance factors, I or Ip. A typical range of val-
ues for Iw is 1.00 to 1.15.
Algorithm for 1997 UBC Wind Loads

ETABS automatic wind loads for the 1997 UBC are based on
Sections 1616 through 1621 of the 1997 UBC.
29
The wind loads applied in ETABS are a modified version of the
Method 2 (Projected Area Method) as described in Section
1621.3 of the 1997 UBC. ETABS applies horizontal wind loads
on the vertical projected area as described in Section 1621.3.
ETABS has two modifications to the requirements of Section
1621.3. The first modification is that ETABS does not automati-
cally apply vertical wind loads over the projected horizontal
area. If you want to include these vertical wind loads in the load
case then you must manually include them yourself.
The other modification is that ETABS applies the method to

structures of any height. It does not limit it to structures less than
200 feet high as discussed in 1997 UBC Section 1621.3.
The shape of the horizontal projected area is determined based

on the story heights and the input exposure widths for each rigid
diaphragm. ETABS uses Equation 29-3 (1997 UBC Equation
20-1) to determine the wind pressure, P, at any point on the sur-
face of the horizontal projected area.
P = Ce Cq qs Iw Eqn. 29-3
where,
Ce = Combined height, exposure and gust factor coeffi-

cient as given in 1997 UBC Table 16-G.

Cq = Pressure coefficient for the structure as given in 1997

UBC Table 16-H.

feet as given in 1997 UBC Table 16-F.
Iw = Importance factor as input by the user.
ETABS determines the Ce coefficient from 1997 UBC Table 16-

G using the input exposure type and the input bottom story. For
use in 1997 UBC Table 16-G the elevation of the input bottom
story is assumed to be zero (0). ETABS uses linear interpolation
29 to determine the value of the Ce coefficient at heights above 15
feet that are not listed in 1997 UBC Table 16-G.
ETABS determines the Cq coefficient from 1997 UBC Table 16-

H. ETABS uses the values for Primary Frames and Systems us-
ing Method 2 (the projected area method). Thus for buildings 40
feet or less in height ETABS uses Cq = 1.3 and for buildings
more than 40 feet in height ETABS uses Cq = 1.4.
ETABS determines qs from Equation 29-4.
qs = 0.00256 V2 ≥ 10 psf Eqn. 29-4
where,

feet, psf.
Note the units specified for qs and V. Equation 29-4 is consistent

with 1997 UBC Table 16-F.


1996 BOCA Wind Loads
Input Wind Coefficients for 1996 BOCA

Five wind coefficients are input for 1996 BOCA wind loads.
sure category and the wind importance factor, I, the gust re-
sponse factor, Gh and the wall pressure coefficient for the lee-
ward wall, Cp-leeward.
The basic wind speed is described in 1996 BOCA Section

1609.3. A typical range of values for the basic wind speed is 70 29
to 130 mph.
The exposure categories are described in 1996 BOCA Section

1609.4. The exposure category can be A, B, C or D. No other
values are allowed.
The wind importance factor, I, is described in 1996 BOCA Sec-

tion 1609.5. A typical range of values for I is 0.90 to 1.23.
The gust response factor, Gh, is discussed in 1996 BOCA Section

1609.7 and in Table 1609.7(5). You can either specify that the
gust response factor is to be calculated based on the height (dis-
tance) of the specified top story above the specified bottom story
and the exposure category per the code using Table 1609.7(5) or
you can input your own value. Note that in 1996 BOCA Section
1609.7 the following statement is made about Gh.
The gust response factor for buildings which

have a height to least dimension ratio greater
than 5 or a fundamental frequency less than one
cycle per second (period greater than 1 second)
shall be calculated by an approved rational
analysis that incorporates the dynamic proper-
ties of the main wind force-resisting system.
When you select the Per Code option for the gust response factor
ETABS does not check the height to least dimension ratio or the
building period and it does not determine the gust factor using an
approved rational analysis incorporating the dynamic properties
of the main wind force-resisting system. It is assumed that you

will do this yourself, if necessary, and provide a user-defined

value for Gh. A typical range of values for Gh is 1.00 to 2.36.
Note: The wall pressure coefficient for the leeward wall, Cp-leeward, is
determined from 1996 BOCA Table 1609.7(1). Although Cp for
In ETABS input
leeward walls is shown as a negative value in 1996 BOCA
Cp-leeward as a
positive num- Table 1609.7(1) in ETABS it should be input as a positive
ber. value. The default value for this is 0.5. You may want to change
it from this default value depending on the horizontal dimensions
of your building parallel and perpendicular to the direction of the
wind. Typical values for Cp-leeward are 0.5, 0.3 and 0.2.
29
Algorithm for 1996 BOCA Wind Loads
ETABS automatic wind loads for the 1996 BOCA are based on
Section 1609 of the 1996 BOCA.
The wind loads applied in ETABS are a modified version of

those described in 1996 BOCA Section 1609.7. ETABS applies
windward and leeward horizontal wind loads on the vertical
projected area of the building as determined from the story
heights and the input rigid diaphragm exposure widths. ETABS
does not automatically apply vertical wind loads over the pro-
jected horizontal area of roof surfaces. If you want to include
these vertical wind loads in the load case then you must manu-
ally include them yourself.
ETABS uses Equation 29-5 to determine the wind pressure, P, at

any point on the surface of the horizontal projected area.
P = Pv I [0.8 Kz Gh + Kh Gh Cp-leeward] Eqn. 29-5
where,
Pv = Basic velocity pressure given in 1996 BOCA

Table 1609.7(3).
I = Importance factor as input by the user.
Kz = Velocity pressure exposure coefficient at the

height of interest as given in 1996 BOCA Table
1609.7(4).

Gh = Gust response factor either as given in 1996

BOCA Table 1609.7(5) or user specified.
Kh = Velocity pressure exposure coefficient, evalu-

ated at the specified top story level, as given in
1996 BOCA Table 1609.7(4).
Cp-leeward = Wall pressure coefficient on the leeward wall as

input by the user.
The 0.8 factor in Equation 29-5 represents the wall pressure co-
efficient for the windward wall.
29
ETABS determines Pv coefficient from Equation 29-6.
Pv = 0.00256 V2 ≥ 10 psf Eqn. 29-6
where,
Pv = Basic velocity pressure, psf.
Note the units specified for Pv and V. Equation 29-6 is consistent

with 1996 BOCA Table 1609.7(3).
ETABS determines the Kz coefficient from 1996 BOCA Table

1609.7(4) using the input exposure category and the input bot-
tom story. For use in 1996 BOCA Table 1609.7(4) the elevation
of the input bottom story is assumed to be zero (0). ETABS uses
linear interpolation to determine the value of the Kz coefficient at
heights above 15 feet that are not listed in 1996 BOCA Table
1609.7(4).
For discussion of the gust response factor, Gh, refer to the previ-
ous section titled "Input Wind Coefficients for 1996 BOCA."
ETABS determines the Kh coefficient from 1996 BOCA Table

1609.7(4) using the input exposure category and the height of the
input top story above the input bottom story. ETABS uses linear
interpolation to determine the value of the Kh coefficient at
heights above 15 feet that are not listed in 1996 BOCA Table
1609.7(4).

For discussion of the wall pressure coefficient on the leeward

wall, Cp-leeward, refer to the previous section titled "Input Wind
Coefficients for 1996 BOCA."

1995 NBCC Wind Loads
29 Input Wind Coefficients

Two wind coefficients are input for 1995 NBCC wind loads.
They are the velocity pressure, q, in kPa and the gust effect fac-
tor, Cg.
The velocity pressure, q, can be obtained from 1995 NBCC Ap-

pendix C. A typical range of values for the velocity pressure is
0.20 to 0.90 kPa. Any positive value or zero is allowed.
The gust effect factor, Cg, is discussed in 1995 NBCC Sentence

4.1.8.1(6). The default value is 2.0. Any positive value is al-
lowed.
Algorithm for 1995 NBCC Wind Loads

ETABS automatic wind loads for the 1995 NBCC are based on
Section 4.1.8.1 of the 1995 NBCC.
ETABS applies windward and leeward horizontal wind loads on

the vertical projected area of the building as determined from the
story heights and the input rigid diaphragm exposure widths.
ETABS does not automatically apply vertical wind loads over
the projected horizontal area of roof surfaces. If you want to in-
clude these vertical wind loads in the load case then you must
manually include them yourself.
ETABS uses Equation 29-7 to determine the wind pressure, p, at

any point on the surface of the horizontal projected area.
p = q Cg [0.8 Ce-windward + 0.5 Ce-leeward] Eqn. 29-7
where,

q = Velocity pressure as input by the user.
Cg = Gust effect factor as input by the user.
Ce-windward = Exposure factor for the windward wall.
Ce-leeward = Exposure factor for the leeward wall.
The 0.8 factor in Equation 29-7 represents the external pressure

coefficient for the windward wall. The 0.5 factor in Equation 29-
7 represents the external pressure coefficient for the leeward
wall.
ETABS determines Ce-windward from Equation 29-8.

29
15
æhö
C e− windward =ç ÷ ≥ 0.9 Eqn. 29-8
è 10 ø
where,
h = Distance from the input bottom story level to the ele-

vation considered, meters.
ETABS determines Ce-leeward from Equation 29-9.

15
æh ö
C e−leeward = ç middle ÷ ≥ 0.9 Eqn. 29-9
è 10 ø
where,
hmiddle = one-half of the distance from the input bottom

story level to the input top story level, meters.
ETABS distributes the pressures, p, on the surface of the hori-


ASCE 7-95 Wind Loads
Input Wind Coefficients for ASCE 7-95

Five wind coefficients are input for ASCE 7-95 wind loads.
sure category, the wind importance factor, I, the wall pressure
coefficient for the leeward wall, Cp-leeward and the topographic
factor, Kzt.
29 The basic wind speed is described in ASCE 7-95 Section 6.5.2.

A typical range of values for the basic wind speed is 85 to 150
mph.
The exposure categories are described in ASCE 7-95 Section

6.5.3. The exposure category can be A, B, C or D. No other val-
ues are allowed.
The wind importance factor, I, is described in ASCE 7-95 Table

6-2. Note that the building and structure classification categories
in are defined in ASCE 7-95 Table 1-1. A typical range of values
for I is 0.87 to 1.15.
Note: The wall pressure coefficient for the leeward wall, Cp-leeward, is
determined from ASCE 7-95 Figure 6-3. Although Cp for lee-
In ETABS input
ward walls is shown as a negative value in ASCE 7-95 Figure
Cp-leeward as a
positive num-
6-3 in ETABS it should be input as a positive value. The de-
ber. fault value for this is 0.5. You may want to change it from this
default value depending on the horizontal dimensions of your
building parallel and perpendicular to the direction of the wind.
Typical values for Cp-leeward are 0.5, 0.3 and 0.2.
The topographic factor Kzt is discussed in ASCE 7-95 Section

6.5.5. The default value for Kzt is 1.0. Kzt can not be less than
1.0.
Algorithm for ASCE 7-95 Wind Loads

ETABS automatic wind loads for the ASCE 7-95 are based on
Sections 6.4 through 6.6 of ASCE 7-95.
The wind loads applied in ETABS are a modified version of

those described in ASCE 7-95 Sections 6.4 through 6.6. ETABS

applies windward and leeward horizontal wind loads on the ver-

tical projected area of the building as determined from the story
heights and the input rigid diaphragm exposure widths. ETABS
does not automatically apply vertical wind loads over the pro-
jected horizontal area of roof surfaces. If you want to include
these vertical wind loads in the load case then you must manu-
ally include them yourself.
ETABS uses Equation 29-10 (ASCE 7-95 Equation 6-1) to de-

termine the velocity pressure, qz, at any height z on the surface of
the horizontal projected area in pounds per square foot (psf).
qz = 0.00256 Kz Kzt V2 I Eqn. 29-10 29

where,
Kz = The velocity pressure exposure coefficient. See

Equations 29-11a and 29-11b.
Kzt = Topographic factor as input by the user.
V = Basic wind speed in miles per hour (mph) as input

by the user.
I = Importance factor as input by the user.
The velocity pressure exposure coefficient, Kz, is obtained using

Equations 29-11a and 29-11b (Equations C3a and C3b in ASCE
7-95 Commentary Section 6.5.1).
2α
æ z ö
K z = 2.01 ç ÷ for 15 feet ≤ z ≤ zg Eqn. 29-11a
ç zg ÷
è ø
2α
æ 15 ö
K z = 2.01 ç ÷ for z < 15 feet Eqn. 29-11b
ç zg ÷
è ø
where,
z = Distance (height) from input bottom story to point

considered.

zg = As specified in Table 29-1 (ASCE 7-95 Table C6.2

in ASCE 7-95 Commentary Section 6.5.1).
α = As specified in Table 29-1 (ASCE 7-95 Table C6.2

in ASCE 7-95 Commentary Section 6.5.1).
Table 29-1: Exposure Category α zg (feet)

α and zg factors for A 5.0 1500
use in Equations 29-
B 7.0 1200
11a and 29-11b
C 9.5 900
29 D 11.5 700
ETABS uses Equation 29-12 to determine the wind pressure, p,

at any point on the surface of the horizontal projected area.
Equation 29-12 is based on ASCE 7-95 Table 6-1. In particular it
is based on the row titled "Main wind force-resisting systems"
under the heading titled "Buildings of all heights."
p = 0.8 q G + qh G Cp-leeward Eqn. 29-12
where,
q = velocity pressure, qz, at any height z on the sur-

face of the horizontal projected area calculated
using Equation 29-10.
G = Gust effect factor. As described in ASCE 7-95

Section 6.6.1, this is taken by ETABS as 0.80
for exposure categories A and B and 0.85 for
exposure categories C and D.
qh = Velocity pressure at the top story height on the

surface of the horizontal projected area calcu-
lated using Equation 29-10.
Cp-leeward = Wall pressure coefficient on the leeward wall as

input by the user.
The 0.8 factor in Equation 29-12 represents the wall pressure co-
efficient for the windward wall as specified in ASCE 7-95 Figure
6-3.

For discussion of the wall pressure coefficient on the leeward

wall, Cp-leeward, refer to the previous section titled "Input Wind
Coefficients for ASCE 7-95."

User-Defined Wind Loads

For user defined loads you define the direction of the wind
loading, the wind load force applied to each rigid diaphragm at 29
each story level and the location of the wind load force.
Based on this information ETABS automatically creates a point

object at the location of the applied load and applies the wind
load to the point. Note that the point object loads are always
specified in global coordinates. Thus, if the wind load direction
is not parallel to one of the global axes then ETABS automati-
cally breaks the wind load up into its proper components in the

Chapter 30
30
Automatic Meshing of Area and Line Objects
General
This chapter discusses how ETABS automatically meshes (di-
vides) floor-type (horizontal) area objects and line objects.
ETABS performs two separate types of automatic meshing. One
Note: type that is fully automatic meshes objects into the analysis
See the section
model only (not the object-based model) on an as-needed basis
titled “The with no input from you. The other type, that is automatic but
ETABS Analy- must be manually activated by you, meshes objects into your
sis Model” in object-based model.
Chapter 5 for
more informa- When objects are fully automatically meshed directly into the
tion on the analysis model the meshing takes place when you start the analy-
analysis model. sis. In this case the meshing all takes place inside the program
and is essentially invisible to the user. The only objects that
ETABS can fully automatically mesh into the analysis model are
line objects with frame section properties and floor-type area
objects with membrane properties only (not plate bending or
shell behavior).
30 - 1
Important Notes about Automatic Meshing of Area and Line Objects
When an analysis is started ETABS automatically meshes (divides) all line objects
with frame section properties into the analysis model. ETABS also meshes all floor-
type (horizontal) area objects that either have deck section properties or have slab
section properties with membrane behavior only into the analysis model. You do not
have to do anything to make this happen. It simply occurs when you run the analysis.
Any other type of area object must be manually meshed by you in your object-based
ETABS model, prior to running the analysis, using the methods described in Chapter
31.
The automatic meshing of area and line objects by ETABS into the analysis model
30 has no affect on your object-based ETABS model. In this case, the automatic meshing
only affects the analysis model, which is internal to ETABS. After running the analy-
sis your object-based model still has the same number of objects in it as it did before
the analysis was run.
It is possible to automatically mesh the objects in your object-based model exactly as

they would be meshed into the analysis model. To mesh line objects in this way, se-
lect all of the line objects with frame section properties, click the Edit menu > Divide
Lines command, and select the Break at Intersections with Selected Lines and Points
option. To mesh area objects in this way select all floor-type area objects, click the
Edit menu > Mesh Areas command, and select the Auto Mesh Floor Areas option.
Note that while the automatic meshing of floor-type area objects into the analysis
model is limited to those with membrane behavior only, you can automatically mesh
any floor-type area object in your object-based ETABS model using the Auto Mesh
Floor Areas option of the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command.
In some cases (probably unusual cases) you may not want ETABS to automatically
mesh some line and/or area objects into the analysis model. In these cases you can
select the line objects that you do not want automatically meshed and use the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh to tell ETABS not to
automatically mesh them. Similarly, you can select the area objects you don’t want
automatically meshed and use the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Automatic Mem-
brane Floor Mesh/No Mesh to tell ETABS not to automatically mesh them.
Even if your object-based ETABS model is not automatically meshed you can still at
any time view the automatic mesh for the area objects that will be used in the analysis
model. To do this click the View menu > Set Building View Options command (or
click the Set Building View Options button, , on the main (top) toolbar), check
the Auto Floor Mesh item in the Other Special Items area of the Set Building View
Options dialog box and click the OK button.
30 - 2 General
Chapter 30 - Automatic Meshing of Area and Line Objects
For example, suppose you model a slab over metal deck with just
one area object in your object-based ETABS model. Then when
ETABS internally creates the analysis model it automatically
Tip: meshes that one object in the object-based model into many ele-
ments in the analysis model. This all happens internal to the pro-
The Auto Mesh gram. After the analysis is run your object-based model still has
Floor Areas only one area object representing the slab over deck, not the
option of the
many objects that ETABS used internally to run the analysis.
Edit menu >
Mesh Areas
ETABS can automatically mesh any line object and any floor-
command al-
lows you to type area object into your object-based ETABS model. If you se-
mesh any floor- lect all objects in your object-based model and use the Break at
type area object
in your object-
Intersections with Selected Lines and Points option of the Edit
menu > Divide Lines command, then ETABS automatically di-
30
based model vides all line objects in your object-based model. If you select all
(not the analy- floor-type area objects and use the Auto Mesh Floor Areas op-
sis model) as tion of the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command, then ETABS
described in automatically meshes all of the floor-type area objects in your
this chapter. object-based model as described in this chapter. The meshing
takes place immediately and the selected area objects in your
object-based model are broken into smaller objects. You can use
the Edit menu > Undo command or the associated Undo toolbar
button to reverse the meshing if necessary.
Automatic Meshing of Line Objects

This section discusses how ETABS fully automatically meshes
(divides) line objects into the analysis model. Only line objects
with frame section assignments are automatically meshed into
the analysis model by ETABS.
Note: ETABS divides the frame elements at locations where they inter-
Frame elements sect (cross) other frame elements and at locations where point
are meshed at objects lie on them. These point objects may be at the ends of
locations where other frame members, ends of link members, corners of area ob-
other frame jects with structural (wall, slab or deck) properties, or they may
elements attach simply be free-floating point objects.
to or cross them
and at locations Line objects assigned link properties are never automatically
where point
meshed into the analysis model by ETABS. If a line object is as-
objects lie on
them.
signed both a frame section property and a link property then in
the analysis model ETABS treats it as two elements and meshes
Automatic Meshing of Line Objects 30 - 3

Figure 30-1: In the ETABS analysis model the

Example of auto- braces are connected where they
matic meshing of cross unless you indicate that they are
frame elements not connected by selecting the braces
and clicking the Assign menu >
Frame/Line > No Automatic
Meshing command
Elevation
30
(divides) the element with the frame section assignment. ETABS
does not mesh the element with the link property.
Consider the braced frame shown in Figure 30-1. When the

analysis is run ETABS automatically meshes (divides) the braces
at the point where they cross in the analysis model. Thus in your
object-based ETABS model each set of braces at a story level is
modeled with two objects, but in the analysis model that is inter-
Tip: nally created by ETABS each set of braces at a story level is
If you do not modeled with four elements since the braces are broken at their
want a frame intersection point.
element to be
automatically When ETABS divides frame sections in this way it assumes full
meshed in the continuity between the divided pieces. No end releases are intro-
analysis model duced. If you want end releases you should manually divide the
then select it objects yourself and assign the releases. Use the Edit menu >
and click the Divide Lines command to manually mesh the braces. See the
Assign menu > section titled "Dividing Lines" in Chapter 9 for more informa-
Frame/Line > tion.
Automatic
Frame If you do not want the braces modeled as divided and attached to
Mesh/No Mesh each other at their intersection point in the analysis model, then
command.
select the braces and click the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh command. See the subsec-
tion titled "Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh Assignments to
30 - 4 Automatic Meshing of Line Objects

Figure 30-2: Girder A Beam 1 Beam 2

Example showing
how beams are Piece 1 Piece 2 Piece 3
automatically di- b) Girders A and B As Modeled in
vided (meshed) the ETABS Analysis Model
Beam 1
Beam 2
where they support
other beams for the
ETABS analysis
model
Girder B
30
a) Floor Plan
As a second example consider the floor system shown in Figure

30-2a. The beams labeled Beam 1 and Beam 2 are both cantile-
ver beams with full continuity through Girder B. You can model
these beams in your object-based ETABS model either with two
line objects as shown for Beam 1 or with one line object as
shown for Beam 2. ETABS treats both of these beams exactly
the same way in the analysis model. In the analysis model Beam
2 is broken where it intersects Girder B so that there is a connec-
tion to Girder B. In general, we recommend that you model can-
tilevers as shown for Beam 1.
Note that if you use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Auto-
matic Frame Mesh/No Mesh command to specify that Beam 2
in Figure 30-2a is not to be automatically meshed then there will
be no connection between Girder B and Beam 2.
Figure 30-2b shows that in the analysis model both Girders A

and B are broken into three pieces (elements) even though they
remain a single object in your object-based ETABS model. They
are broken at the locations where Beams 1 and 2 attach to (or
intersect) them.
Automatic Meshing of Line Objects 30 - 5

Automatic Meshing of Area Objects

General
All floor-type (horizontal) area objects that have either deck sec-
tion properties or slab section properties with membrane behav-
ior only are fully automatically meshed into the analysis model
by ETABS. This automatic meshing only affects the analysis
model. It does not change your object-based ETABS model in
any way.
30 No other types of area objects are fully automatically meshed

into the analysis model by ETABS. You must manually mesh all
other types of area objects in your object-based model by se-
lecting them and using the manual meshing options available
from the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command. See Chapter 31
for documentation of these options.
You can use the Auto Mesh Floor Areas option of the Edit
menu > Mesh Areas command to automatically mesh any floor-
type area object into your object-based model as described in this
chapter. Note that this command is not limited to area objects
that have either deck section properties or slab section properties
with membrane behavior only. It applies to any floor-type area
object.
For floors that ETABS automatically meshes either into the

analysis model or into the object-based model we strongly rec-
ommend that at a minimum you include all the beams that con-
nect to columns in your object-based ETABS model. If you do
not actually have beams connecting to the columns then we
strongly recommend that you include Null-type line objects con-
necting the columns. These line objects do not necessarily need
to have any assignments. Having the columns connected by line
objects in this manner makes the automatic meshing of the floor
much easier for ETABS and more predictable for you.
30 - 6 Automatic Meshing of Area Objects

How ETABS Automatically Meshes Floors

When ETABS automatically meshes a floor-type area object it
breaks the object up into four-sided (quadrilateral) elements.
Typically, each side of each element of the mesh has a beam or
Note: wall running along it. This beam may be real or it may be an
imaginary beam internal to ETABS. These imaginary internal
For the pur-
poses of auto-
beams are used by ETABS for the purposes of meshing the floor
matically and distributing any load on the floor. See Chapter 32 for discus-
meshing a floor sion of transfer (distribution) of loads in ETABS.
ETABS treats a
When meshing a floor, ETABS treats walls as if they were two
30
wall like two
columns and a columns (one located at each end of the wall) connected by a
beam where the beam.
columns are
located at the The automatic floor mesh is created by ETABS using the fol-
ends of the wall lowing sequence of steps:
and the beam
connects the 1. Each column is assumed to have four beams connecting to it.
columns. If four beams do not connect to a column then ETABS
considers other line objects (without frame section
properties) that connect to the columns as imaginary beams.
If this still does not provide enough beams connecting to the
columns then ETABS internally creates its own imaginary
beams to satisfy the requirement. Note that if necessary
imaginary beams are extended from columns near the edge
of the floor to the edge of the floor. An example presented
later in Figure 30-3 discusses this.
2. The floor is broken up at all walls and all real and imaginary
beams to create a mesh of four-sided elements.
Viewing the Automatic Floor Mesh

If you use the Auto Mesh Floor Areas option of the Edit menu >
Mesh Areas command to mesh the floor in your object-based
model then the floor mesh is there for you to see any time your
floor-type area objects are visible.
Automatic Meshing of Area Objects 30 - 7

Girder A Girder A
Beam 2
Beam 2
Beam 1
Beam 3
Beam 1
Beam 3
Girder B Girder B
a) Floor Plan b) ETABS Imaginary Beams Shown Dashed c) ETABS Automatic Floor Meshing
(Above)
If you instead have a membrane floor and decided to allow
30
Figure 30-3:
Example of ETABS ETABS to fully automatically mesh it into the analysis model,
automatically gen- then you will not typically see the floor mesh that ETABS uses.
erated mesh for In this case, if you want to see the floor mesh, then click the
floor-type area ob- View menu > Set Building View Options command (or click
jects the Set Building View Options button, , on the main (top)
toolbar) to open the Set Building View Options dialog box. In
this dialog box check the Auto Floor Mesh item in the Other
Special Items area and then click the OK button.
In some cases you may not want ETABS to automatically mesh

a membrane floor object into the analysis model. In such cases
you can click the Assign menu > Shell/Area > Automatic
Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh command and specify that
ETABS is not to automatically mesh the area object when it cre-
ates the analysis model.
Examples of Automatic Floor Meshing

Consider the example floor plan shown in Figure 30-3a. The fig-
ure shows a single area object that models a floor. Horizontal
line objects model the beams and vertical line objects model the
columns. Figure 30-3b shows how ETABS extends imaginary
beams from the columns to the edge of the floor. Notice that the
imaginary beams are extended parallel to the beams (or line ob-
jects) already framing into the columns.

Figure 30-4:
Second example of
ETABS automati-
cally generated mesh
for floor-type area
objects
a) Floor Plan (No Beams) b) ETABS Imaginary Beams Connecting

Columns Shown Dashed
30
c) ETABS Imaginary Beams Extended to d) ETABS Automatic Floor Meshing

Edge of Floor Shown Dashed
Figure 30-3c shows the floor mesh used in the analysis model
that results from meshing the floor at all real and imaginary
beams. Also note that the girders labeled Girder A and Girder B
are divided (internally to ETABS) into two elements at the point
where Beam 2 attaches to them. Note that if Beam 3 in Figure
30-3 is replaced with a wall the process described is exactly the
same because for the purposes of automatically meshing a floor
ETABS treats a wall like two columns located at the ends of the
wall and a beam connecting the columns.
As a second example consider the floor plan shown in Figure 30-

4a. In this case there is a single area object modeling a floor and
four vertical line objects modeling the columns. No beams (or
other null-type line objects connecting the columns) are included
in the model. Figure 30-4b shows how ETABS might create
imaginary beams connecting the columns. (The next example
will discuss how this is done). Figure 30-4c shows how addi-

tional imaginary beams are extended from the columns parallel

to the imaginary beams already defined in Figure 30-4b to the
edge of the floor. Finally, Figure 30-4d shows the floor mesh
that results from meshing the floor at all real and imaginary
beams. The resulting mesh is similar to that obtained in Figure
30-3c.
Tip: Important Recommendation: In general, for floors that are

automatically meshed by ETABS we recommend that you model
There are two
beams (or at least null-type line objects) connecting columns as
ways that you
can have some
shown in Figure 30-3a rather than no beams (or line objects)
control over connecting the columns as shown in Figure 30-4a. If you are
30 automatic
meshing. The
modeling a flat slab we recommend that you include null-type
line objects connecting the columns in your model. Including the
first is to define lines connecting the columns in your model makes the automatic
beams (or null- meshing for the analysis model cleaner, faster, and perhaps most
type line ob- important, more predictable for you.
jects connecting
the columns) Let's examine how ETABS might create the distribution of
since the floor imaginary beams shown in Figure 30-4b. Refer to Figures 30-5a
mesh breaks at through 30-5i. They show the sequence of events taking place
these lines. A internally in ETABS that leads up to Figure 30-4b. Figure 30-5a
second way you
can control
shows the four columns and labels them C1, C2, C3 and C4 for
automatic reference. Figure 30-5b shows how imaginary beams are con-
meshing is to nected from column C1 to all other columns. The imaginary
indicate that beams are shown dashed. Figure 30-5c shows an imaginary
certain objects beam connecting columns C2 and C3. Figure 30-5d shows an
are not to be imaginary beam connecting columns C2 and C4.
automatically
meshed using Note that in Figure 30-5d the imaginary beams from C1 to C3
commands and C2 to C4 cross. When beams cross like this one of them is
available on the eliminated. Typically the longer beam is eliminated and the
Assign menu. shorter one is kept. In a situation like this example where both
beams are the same length the one created last is eliminated.
Thus the beam from C2 to C4 is eliminated and the beam from
C1 to C3 is kept. This is illustrated in Figure 30-5e.
Figure 30-5f shows an imaginary beam added from column C3

to C4. Thus column C3 is connected to all columns. Moving on
to column C4, Figure 30-5g shows that column C4 is connected
to C2 with an imaginary beam. Again this imaginary beam
crosses the one from column C1 to C3. Since both of the cross-

C4 C3 C4 C3 C4 C3
C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
a) b) c)
C4 C3 C4 C3 C4 C3
30
C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
d) e) f)
C4 C3 C4 C3 C4 C3
C1 C2 C1 C2 C1 C2
g) h) i)
ing beams are the same length we eliminate that last created one,
(Above) that is the one from C4 to C2. This is shown in Figure 30-5h.
Figure 30-5:
Illustration of how At this point we have gone through all of the columns and now
ETABS creates the have a series of triangles. ETABS now combines the triangles to
distribution of make quadrilaterals that are as close to squares and rectangles as
imaginary beams possible. This is shown in Figure 30-5i which is the same as Fig-
shown in Figure 30- ure 30-4b.
4b

C4 B5 C5 B5 C6 C4 B5 C5 B5 C6 C4 B5 C5 B5 C6
B3 B4 B3 B4 B3 B4
C1 B1 C2 B2 C3 C1 B1 C2 B2 C3 C1 B1 C2 B2 C3
a) Two-way floor slab b) Mesh with Automatic Meshing c) Mesh without Automatic Meshing
(Above) If you try extending this process to a slightly more complicated

Figure 30-6: problem, for example, add another bay or two, or, offset one of
Example of no the columns, you will see that the problem quickly becomes
automatic meshing quite complex and that it is difficult to predict exactly how
30 ETABS will end up developing the membrane floor mesh. Also
you may not even be sure at which column ETABS started the
process. These are the reasons that we generally recommend that
you model beams and/or null-type line objects between your
columns when ETABS is going to automatically mesh a mem-
brane floor. The beams (or line objects) make your automatic
membrane floor mesh much more predictable.
As a final example consider the floor shown in Figure 30-6a

which is a two-way slab supported by 6 columns. Assume that
beams are specified around the perimeter of the floor but that no
beam is specified between columns C2 and C5.
Figure 30-6b shows how the slab is meshed when ETABS auto-
matically meshes it. Note that an imaginary beam (shown
Tip: dashed) is created between column C2 and C5 and that the area
object is divided along this imaginary beam.
Including
beams and/or Now suppose that you select the area object and click the Assign
null-type line menu > Shell/Area > Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No
objects between
Mesh command to indicate that you do not want the floor to be
all columns in
your model
automatically meshed by ETABS. Figure 30-6c shows how the
makes auto- slab is meshed (or perhaps more accurately, not meshed) in this
matic floor case. Note that an imaginary beam is not created between col-
meshing more umn C2 and C5 and thus the area object is not divided.
predictable.
As a last comment about the example in Figure 30-6 suppose
you select the area object, click the Edit menu > Mesh Areas
command, select the Auto Mesh Floor Areas option and click the
OK button. In this case the area object is meshed in your object-
based ETABS model as shown in Figure 30-6b.

Chapter 31
31
Manual Meshing of Area Objects
General
This chapter discusses the manual meshing methods available in
Tip: ETABS for area objects.
You should wait In general you must manually mesh the area objects in your ob-
until just before
you run your
ject-based ETABS model into a finite element mesh before you
first analysis to run an analysis. There are two exceptions to this. They are floor-
manually mesh type (horizontal) area objects with deck section properties and
your area ob- floor-type (horizontal) area objects with slab section properties
jects. This way that have membrane behavior only (not plate bending or shell
you can take behavior). ETABS automatically meshes the area objects into the
advantage of analysis model for these two exceptions. The objects remain un-
having to work meshed in your object-based ETABS model, See Chapter 30 for
with fewer area discussion of this automatic meshing.
objects as you
make assign- We recommend that you work with larger area objects as you
ments to your create your model and wait until just before you run the analysis
model.
to mesh the area objects (assuming they are not membrane floors
that ETABS automatically meshes into the analysis model). As-
31 - 1
suming that you do not initially draw your area objects in a finite
element mesh (we do not recommend that you do this) there are
an assortment of tools available in ETABS to assist you with
manual meshing of area objects. These tools are available
through the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command. There are
three basic types of manual meshing tools. They are:
• Automatic floor meshing: This special manual meshing

tool applies only to floor-type (horizontal) area objects.
For selected floor-type area objects the Auto Mesh Floor
Areas option meshes the object in your object-based
ETABS model as described in Chapter 30. This meshing
command is applicable to any floor-type area object, not
31 just those with membrane-behavior-only properties.
• Cookie cut meshing tools: These meshing tools are

typically used to mesh single area objects, with any
number of sides, that may encompass a large portion of
your model into a series of smaller objects. The idea is to
use these options to reduce the larger objects down to
three and four-sided area objects (preferably four-sided).
These tools are discussed in the section titled "Cookie
Cut Meshing Tools" later in this chapter.
• Meshing tools for quadrilaterals (quads) and trian-

gles: These meshing tools are used to mesh three and
four-sided area objects into smaller elements. These
tools are discussed in the section titled "Meshing Tools
for Quadrilaterals and Triangles" later in this chapter.
Tip: Typically we envision that you will use the automatic floor
meshing options or one of the cookie cutter options to mesh
Typically to get
larger area objects into smaller three and four-sided objects.
good plate
bending be-
Then we envision you using the meshing tools for quads and tri-
havior you angles on an as-needed basis to further refine your mesh.
want to have
four or more Important Tip: If you are meshing area objects that have out-of-
elements be- plane bending properties and you want to adequately capture the
tween each out-of-plane bending behavior, then you should have four or
support point. more meshed objects between each support point. This means
that you would like to have at least sixteen elements in a single
square or rectangular bay.
31 - 2 General
Chapter 31 - Manual Meshing of Area Objects
Cookie Cut Meshing Tools

There are two cookie cut meshing options available. The term
cookie cut is used because these tools allow you to define what is
effectively a cookie cutter that meshes your area object.
Both of the cookie cut meshing options mesh a large area object
that encloses other objects (either line objects or point objects,
depending on the option chosen). Typically, but not necessarily,
you mesh one area object at a time using these options.
The following two subsections describe the cookie cut meshing
31
options.
Cookie Cut at Selected Line Objects

This subsection discusses the Cookie Cut at Selected Line Ob-
jects option for the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command. This
option works for area objects with any number of edges, not just
quadrilaterals and triangles.
The idea with this option is to mesh a large area object into
smaller objects by selecting the large object along with other line
objects that define how the selected area object is to be meshed.
The selected line objects essentially define a cookie cutter that
Note:
ETABS uses to mesh the selected area object.
When cookie Consider the floor slab shown in Figure 31-1a. To mesh this slab
cutter meshing using the Cookie Cut at Selected Line Objects option you should
based on se- draw line objects to help define the desired mesh. These line ob-
lected line objects are illustrated in Figure 31-1b. Note the following about
jects you can these line objects.
select any type
of line object as • You can use any line object to aid in the meshing. The
a meshing line.
This includes
line objects shown in this example are Null-type line
column, beam, objects with no assignments of any type. Such line ob-
brace and null- jects are useful as construction lines for meshing. (Inci-
type line ob- dentally, construction lines like these can also be used
jects. for snapping to while drawing or editing objects, and for
guides while extending or trimming lines).
Cookie Cut Meshing Tools 31 - 3

a) Floor slab b) Mesh lines
31
Figure 31-1:
Example of meshing
using the Cookie Cut
at Selected Line
Objects option
c) Completed mesh
• It works best if you extend your line objects used for

meshing a little beyond the edges of the area object you
are meshing. This is illustrated by the mesh lines shown
dashed in Figure 31-1b.
In this example you should select the large area object that de-
fines the slab and all of the mesh lines (shown dashed in Figure
31-1b) before executing the mesh command. The final result of
the meshing is shown in Figure 31-1c.
Cookie Cut at Selected Points at X Degrees

This subsection discusses the Cookie Cut at Selected Points at X
Degrees option for the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command.
This command works for area objects with any number of edges.
31 - 4 Cookie Cut Meshing Tools

The idea with this option is to mesh a large area object into
smaller objects by selecting the large object along with other
point objects. You then specify an angle. ETABS internally con-
structs two perpendicular lines through each selected point. One
line is at the specified angle and the other line is at the specified
angle plus 90 degrees. These internally constructed lines essen-
tially define a cookie cutter that ETABS uses to mesh the se-
lected area object.
The specified angle is defined as follows for the various types of

area objects:
Y
Positive • Floor-type (horizontal) area objects: The angle is
angle
31
measured from the positive global X-axis. Positive an-
X gles appear counterclockwise when you are looking
Floor-type down on them from above. See the sketch to the left.
Z • Wall-type (vertical) area objects: The angle is meas-

ured from the horizontal projection of the positive global
Positive
angle
X-axis onto the plane of the wall. If the wall is parallel
to the global Y-axis then the angle is measured from the
X-Proj
Wall-type positive global Y-axis. Positive angles appear counter-
clockwise when you are looking straight at the wall and
the positive projection of the X-axis (or the positive Y-
axis if the wall is parallel to the global Y-axis) points to
your right. See the sketch to the left.
• Ramp-type (not horizontal and not vertical) area ob-

Y or
Positive jects: The angle is measured from the vertical projection
Y-Proj angle of the positive global X-axis onto the plane of the ramp.
X or Positive angles appear counterclockwise when you are
Ramp-type X-Proj
looking down on them from above. See the sketch to the
left. See the sketch to the left.
Consider the floor-type (horizontal) area object shown in Figure

31-2a. Also shown in the figure are three selected point objects
used to mesh the slab employing the Cookie Cut at Selected
Points at X Degrees option.
Cookie Cut Meshing Tools 31 - 5

Figure 31-2:
Example of meshing
using the Cookie Cut
at Selected Points at
X Degrees option Y
a) Area object and selected b) Orientation of the global

points axes
31
c) Resulting mesh if specified d) Resulting mesh if specified

angle is 0 degrees angle is 30 degrees
Figure 31-2c shows the resulting mesh when the specified angle
is 0 degrees. Note that the meshing lines are parallel to the X-
axis and 90 degrees from the X-axis.
Figure 31-2d shows the resulting mesh when the specified angle
is 30 degrees. Note that the meshing lines are 30 degrees from
the X-axis and 120 degrees from the X-axis.
31 - 6 Cookie Cut Meshing Tools

Meshing Tools for Quadrilaterals and Triangles

Background Information
The following two subsections provide useful background in-
formation about three and four-sided area objects that can help
you when meshing them.
Four-sided Area Objects

Four-sided area objects (quadrilaterals, or quads for short) have
their corner points labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4. You can right click on
31
any four-sided area object and look in the Area Information dia-
log box to see this. To use the meshing tools for individual four-
sided area objects most effectively it is useful to understand how
ETABS decides which corner points of an area object are points
1, 2, 3 and 4.
The following rules are used to define the corner points of the
four-sided area objects:
4 2 3 • The corner points labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4 always appear in

a counterclockwise order when you look at a four-sided
1
area object with its local 3 axis pointing toward you. See
the sketch to the left, which per the right hand rule has
1 2 the local 3 axis pointing toward you.
3 • For floor-type (horizontal) area objects the 3 and 4
Y points are the ones with the largest global Y coordinates.
4 2 The sketch to the left shows how ETABS handles the
X
special case where points 2 and 4 have the same global
1 Y coordinate.
3 • For wall-type (vertical) and ramp-type (not vertical or
Z horizontal) area objects the 3 and 4 points are the ones
4 2 with the largest global Z coordinates. The sketch to the
X
left shows how ETABS handles the special case where
1 points 2 and 4 have the same global Z coordinate.
If at any time you are unsure which corner point is which in a

four-sided area object you can always right click on the area ob-
ject to find out.
Meshing Tools for Quadrilaterals and Triangles 31 - 7

Three-sided Area Objects

Three-sided area objects have their corner points labeled 1, 2,
and 3. You can right click on any three-sided area object and
look in the Area Information dialog box to see this. To use the
meshing tools for individual three-sided area objects most effec-
tively it is useful to understand how ETABS decides which cor-
ner points of an area object are points 1, 2 and 3.
The following rules are used to define the corner points of the
three-sided area objects:
3 • The corner points labeled 1, 2, and 3 always appear in a
2
counterclockwise order when you look at a three-sided
31 1 area object with its local 3 axis pointing toward you. See
the sketch to the left, which per the right hand rule has
1 2 the local 3 axis pointing toward you.
3 2 • For floor-type (horizontal) area objects the 3 point is the
Y one with the largest global Y coordinate. The sketch to
the left shows how ETABS handles the special case
X where points 2 and 3 have the same global Y coordinate.
1
3 2 • For wall-type (vertical) and ramp-type (not vertical or

Z horizontal) area objects the 3 point is the one with the
largest global Z coordinate. The sketch to the left shows
X how ETABS handles the special case where points 2 and
1
3 have the same global Z coordinate.
Note the corner points for three-sided area object are defined in a
manner consistent with those of four-sided area objects. If at any
time you are unsure which corner point is which in a three-sided
area object you can always right click on the area object to find
out.
Mesh Quadrilaterals and Triangles into N by M Areas

This subsection discusses the Mesh Quads/Triangles into N by
M Areas option for the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command.
This command works for three and four-sided area objects. It
does not work for area objects with more than four sides.
31 - 8 Meshing Tools for Quadrilaterals and Triangles

Figure 31-3: 3 3
Example of meshing
a four-sided area 4 4
object into n by m (3
by 2 in this case)
area objects
1 1
2 2
a) Quadrilateral Element b) Divide edges 1-2 and 3-4
into n equal pieces
3 3 31
4 4
1 1
2 2
c) Divide edges 2-3 and 4-1 d) Complete meshing
into m equal pieces
Tip:
Sometimes it Consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-3a. The
may be quicker corner point numbers in this area object are determined as de-
and easier to
use a trial and
scribed in the previous subsection titled "Background Informa-
error process to tion."
determine
which sides Assume for this example that you specify the object is to be bro-
correspond to n ken into 3 by 2 objects, that is, n = 3 and m = 2. Then ETABS
and m when does the following:
meshing an
area object into • Break the 1-2 and the 3-4 edges up into n equal pieces.
n by m area (Note that the 1-2 edge extends from corner point 1 to
objects. corner point 2, and so on). In this example, n is equal to
3. The 1-2 and 3-4 edges are shown divided in Figure
31-3b.

Figure 31-4: 3 3
Example of meshing
a three-sided area
object into n by m
(2 by 3 in this case)
area objects
1 1
2 2
a) Triangular Element b) Divide edge 1-2 into n
equal pieces
31 3 3
1 1
2 2
c) Divide edges 2-3 and 3-1 d) Complete meshing
into m equal pieces
• Break the 2-3 and the 4-1 edges up into m equal pieces .
In this example, m is equal to 2. The 2-3 and 4-1 edges
are shown divided in Figure 31-3c.
• Mesh the area object by connecting the resulting mesh

points on opposite sides of the object. That is, connect
the mesh points on edge 1-2 to those on edge 3-4. Simi-
larly, connect the mesh points on edge 2-3 to those on
edge 4-1. This is illustrated in Figure 31-3d.
Now consider the three-sided area object shown in Figure 31-4a.

The corner point numbers in this area object are determined as
described in the previous subsection titled "Background Infor-
mation."

Assume for this example that you specify the object is to be bro-
ken into 2 by 3 objects, that is, n = 2 and m = 3. (Note that this is
different from the four-sided example that was broken into 3 by
2 objects). Then ETABS does the following:
• Break the 1-2 edge up into n equal pieces . In this exam-

Note: ple n is equal to 2. The 1-2 edge is shown divided in
The 1-2 edge of Figure 31-4b.
an area object
extends from • Break the 2-3 and the 3-1 edges up into m equal pieces.
corner point 1 In this example m is equal to 3. The 2-3 and 3-1 edges
to corner point are shown divided in Figure 31-4c.
2, the 2-3 edge
extends from • Mesh the area object by connecting the resulting mesh
corner point 2
to corner point
points on the 1-2 edge to point 3 and by connecting the 31
resulting mesh points on sides 2-3 and 3-1 together.
3, and so on. This is illustrated in Figure 31-4d.
Sometimes you may find it easier to guess which sides of the

area object correspond to n and which correspond to m. If you
guess wrong then simply undo the mesh using the Edit menu >
Undo command or using the Undo button, , located on the
main (top) toolbar. Then mesh again with the values for n and m
reversed. In some cases you may find this trial and error process
faster than trying to figure out beforehand exactly what ETABS
will do.
Mesh Quadrilaterals and Triangles at Intersections and

Selected Points on Edges
This subsection discusses the Mesh Quads/Triangles At option
for the Edit menu > Mesh Areas command. This command
Note: works for three and four-sided area objects. It does not work for
You can mesh area objects with more than four sides.
based on any
one or any Three Mesh Quads/Triangles At sub-options are available. They
combination of can be used either separately or in combination. The three sub-
the three sub- options are:
options of the
Mesh Quads/ • Mesh quadrilaterals and triangles at intersections with
Triangles At visible grid lines.
option.

Tip: • Mesh quadrilaterals and triangles at selected point ob-

jects on edges.
It is not neces-
sary that oppo-
• Mesh quadrilaterals and triangles at intersections with
site sides of
four-sided area
selected line objects.
objects end up
with the same
The basic concept is that each of the three sub-options either
number of alone, or together with other sub-options, defines meshing points
meshing points along the edges of the selected area object. It is not necessary
defined. Simi- that opposite sides of four-sided area objects end up with the
larly, it is not same number of meshing points defined. Similarly, it is not nec-
necessary that essary that sides 2-3 and 3-1 of three-sided area objects end up
sides 2-3 and 3- with the same number of meshing points defined. See the sub-
1 of three-sided
31 area objects
section titled "Background Information" earlier in this section for
more information on the corner point labeling of area objects.
end up with the
same number of If opposite sides of four-sided area objects (or sides 2-3 and 3-1
meshing points of three-sided area objects) do not end up with the same number
defined. ETABS
of meshing points defined then ETABS adds additional meshing
internally adds
additional points to the side with fewer points defined until the sides do
meshing points have an equal number of meshing points. ETABS attempts to lo-
as necessary cate the added meshing points to provide as uniform a mesh as
such that oppo- possible.
site sides have
equal numbers The following three sub-subsections discuss each of these
of meshing meshing sub-options separately. The fourth sub-subsection con-
points. siders an example where all of the "mesh based on" sub-options
are used simultaneously.
Tip: Mesh at Intersection with Visible Gridlines

When meshing This section discusses the Intersections with Visible Grids sub-
at gridline in- option of the Mesh Quads/Triangles At option for the Edit menu
tersections the > Mesh Areas command. This command works for three and
gridlines must four-sided area objects; it does not work for area objects with
be visible. You more than four sides.
can gain some
control over Consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-5a.
meshing with
When you mesh this object at intersections with visible gridlines
this option by
setting certain it appears as twelve objects as shown in Figure 31-5b. Note that
grid lines in- the opposite sides of the area object are intersected by the same
visible if neces- number of gridlines and thus it is not necessary for ETABS to
sary. add additional mesh points. The mesh is created by connecting

A B C D E A B C D E A B C D E
4 3 4 3
1 1 1
3
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
1 2 1 2 1 2
a) Four-sided area object c) Four-sided area object e) Three-sided area object

with unequal mesh points
A B C D E A B C D E A B C D E
1
4 3
1
4
1
3 31
3
2 2 Added 2
mesh
3 3 point 3
4 4 4
5 5 5
1 2 1 2 1 2
b) Area object in (a) meshed at b) Area object in (c) meshed at f) Area object in (e) meshed at
intersections with gridlines intersections with gridlines intersections with gridlines
(Above)
the intersection points on opposite sides of the area object on a
Figure 31-5:
one-for-one basis.
Example of meshing
area objects at inter- Now consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-5c.
sections with Note that sides 1-2 and 3-4 both have three intersections with
gridlines grid lines so no additional mesh points need to be added by
ETABS on these sides. Side 2-3 has three intersections and side
4-1 has four intersections. Therefore ETABS adds one mesh
point to side 2-3 so that sides 2-3 and 3-4 have the same number
of mesh points (intersections, etc.). This added mesh point is
shown in Figure 31-5d. The mesh is created by connecting the
intersection points on opposite sides of the area object on a one-
for-one basis.
Finally, consider the three-sided area object shown in Figure 31-

5e. Note that sides 2-3 and 3-1 both have three intersections with
grid lines so no additional mesh points need to be added to the
area object by ETABS. To create the completed mesh ETABS

3 3 3
4 4 4
1 1 1
2 2 2
a) Four-sided area object with b) Added mesh points on c) Completed mesh
selected points on edges edges
31 (Above)
Figure 31-6: connects the mesh points (intersections) on sides 2-3 and 3-1 on
Example of meshing a one-for-one basis. The gridline intersections on side 1-2 are all
area objects at se- connected to point 3. This is illustrated in Figure 31-5f.
lected point objects
on edges of area
Mesh at Selected Point Objects on Edges
object
This section discusses the Selected Point Objects on Edges sub-
option of the Mesh Quads/Triangles At option for the Edit menu
> Mesh Areas command. This command works for three and
Tip: four-sided area objects; it does not work for area objects with
When meshing more than four sides.
based on se-
lected point Important note: This sub-option meshes area objects based on
objects on the selected points that lie along the edge of the area object. It is im-
edges of an portant to note that the points must lie exactly on the edge of the
area object be area object, otherwise they may not be considered in the meshing
very careful to process.
make certain
that the point Consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-6a. Note
objects lie ex- that selected points are denoted on the sides by X's. Side 1-2 has
actly on the one selected point and side 3-4 has two selected points. Thus
edge of the area ETABS adds a mesh point to side 1-2. Side 2-3 has 3 selected
object. Other- points and side 4-1 has no selected points. Thus ETABS adds
wise the point
three mesh points to side 4-1. The added meshed points are
objects may not
be considered shown as open circles in Figure 31-6b.
in the meshing
process.
Figure 31-6c shows how ETABS completes the mesh by con-
necting the mesh points (selected points, etc.) on opposite sides
of the area object.

3 3 3
4 4 4
1 1 1
2 2 2
a) Four-sided area object with b) Added mesh points on c) Completed mesh
intersecting line objects edges
(Above)
Figure 31-7: See the subsection titled "Mesh at Intersection with Visible 31
Example of meshing Gridlines" for discussion of meshing triangular area objects.
area objects at inter-
sections with se-
Mesh at Intersections with Selected Line Objects
lected line objects
This section discusses the Intersections with Selected Line Ob-
jects sub-option of the Mesh Quads/Triangles At option for the
Edit menu > Mesh Areas command. This command works for
three and four-sided area objects; it does not work for area ob-
jects with more than four sides.
Consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-7a. The

intersecting line objects are also shown in Figure 31-7a. Side 1-2
has one intersecting line object and side 3-4 has two intersecting
line objects. Thus ETABS adds a mesh point to side 1-2. Side 2-
3 has 3 intersecting line objects and side 4-1 has no intersecting
line objects. Thus ETABS adds three mesh points to side 4-1.
The added meshed points are shown as open circles in Figure 31-
7b.

necting the mesh points (intersecting line objects, etc.) on oppo-
site sides of the area object.
See the subsection titled "Mesh at Intersection with Visible

Gridlines" for discussion of meshing triangular area objects.

3 3 3
4 4 4
1 1 1
2 2 2
a) Four-sided area object b) Added mesh points on edges
31 (Above)
Figure 31-8: Example with Combined the Mesh Sub-options
Example of meshing
area objects Consider the four-sided area object shown in Figure 31-8a. Also
shown are an intersecting line object, an intersecting gridline and
two selected points on the edges of the area object. The selected
points are designated by X's.
Side 1-2 has no intersections and no selected points along it. Side
3-4 has one intersecting line object and one selected point object
along it. Thus ETABS adds two mesh points to side 1-2.
Side 2-3 has one intersecting gridline, one intersecting line ob-
ject and one selected point object along it. Side 4-1 has one in-
tersecting gridline. Thus ETABS adds two mesh points to side 4-
1. The added meshed points are shown as open circles in Figure
31-8b.

necting the mesh points (intersections, selected point objects,
etc.) on opposite sides of the area object.
See the subsection titled "Mesh at Intersection with Visible

Gridlines" for discussion of meshing triangular area objects.

Chapter 32
32
Transformation of Loads into the ETABS

Analysis Model
This chapter discusses how loads are transformed from your ob-
ject-based ETABS model into the element-based analysis model.
See Chapter 5 for discussion of the analysis model.
Background
In the ETABS analysis model the frame element is used to
model beams, columns and braces. Loads can be applied any-
Note: where along the frame element.
In the analysis In the ETABS analysis model the shell element is used to model
model a shell
walls, floors and ramps. The shell element can only have loads
element can
only have loads applied at its corner points.
applied at its
corner points.
In the ETABS analysis model the link element is used to model
links. The link element can only have loads applied at its end
points.
32 - 1
Valid Loading
This section discusses valid loading for point, line and area ob-
jects. In this context valid means that the load will be transferred
through the model ultimately to a support or a grounded spring.
Point Objects
Note: Force and moment loads can be applied to point objects in any
global axis direction. The load is valid if one of the following is
Point objects
true:
have structural
properties if
• The point object is an end point of a line object with
they are as-
signed a sup- structural properties (frame section property or link
32 port or a
spring. Line
property) and the point object has a complete load path
to the ground.
objects have
structural • The point object is a corner point of an area object with
properties if structural properties (wall, slab or deck properties) and
they are as- the point object has a complete load path to the ground.
signed a frame
section or a link • The point object itself is connected to the ground, that is,
property. Area it is restrained.
objects have
structural • The point object lies on a line object with frame section
properties if properties (not link properties). The line object must
they are as- have a complete load path to the ground.
signed a wall,
slab or deck In this case ETABS automatically and internally meshes
section.
(divides) the line object at the point object location in the
analysis model. Thus, in the analysis model the point
object is directly connected to frame elements that have
a complete load path to the ground.
• The point object lies on an area object that has structural

properties (wall, slab or deck properties). The area object
must have a complete load path to the ground. In this
case, in the analysis model, ETABS transforms the load
either to beams along the edges of the shell element
(area object) or to the corner points of the shell element
area object.
32 - 2 Valid Loading
Chapter 32 - Transformation of Loads into the ETABS Analysis Model
A load on a point object is not valid, and thus not properly in-
cluded in the analysis model if there is no load path provided to
the ground using one of the methods described above. Upon run-
ning the analysis the result will either be that the load is lost (ig-
nored by ETABS) or that it causes an instability.
For additional information on loads applied to point objects see

the section titled "Assignments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14.
Line Objects
Tip: Forces and moments can be applied to line objects in any local or
global axis direction. The load is valid if one of the following is
In general, we
true:
recommend that
you assign line
loads to line
• The line object has frame section properties assigned to 32
objects that it and has a complete load path to the ground.
also have frame
section proper- • The line object lies on an area object that has structural
ties and are properties (wall, slab or deck properties). The area object
directly con- must have a complete load path to the ground. In this
nected to other case, in the analysis model, ETABS transforms the load
objects with either to beams along the edges of the shell element
structural (area object) or to the corner points of the shell element.
properties that
provide a com- A load on a line object is not valid, and thus not ultimately in-
plete load path cluded in the analysis if there is no load path provided to the
to the ground. ground using one of the methods described above. When the
analysis is run the result will either be that the load is lost (ig-

the section titled "Assignments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14.
Area Objects
Force loads can be applied to area objects in any local or global
axis direction. The load is valid if one of the following is true:
• The area object has structural properties (wall, slab or

deck properties) assigned to it and has a complete load
path to the ground.
Valid Loading 32 - 3
• The area object, call it F1, lies directly on another area

object, call it F2, that has structural properties (wall, slab
or deck properties). Area object F2 must have a com-
plete load path to the ground. In this case, in the analysis
model, ETABS transfers the load on area object F1 ei-
ther to beams along the edges of the shell element (area
object F2) or to the corner points of the shell element.
A load on an area object is not valid, and thus not ultimately in-
cluded in the analysis if there is no load path provided to the
ground using one of the methods described above. When the
analysis is run the result will either be that the load is lost (ig-

32 the section titled "Assignments to Area Objects" in Chapter 14.
Introduction to Load Transformation

The main issue for load transformation in ETABS is how point
loads, line loads and area loads that lie on an area object in
your object-based ETABS model are represented in the analy-
sis model. The point, line and area loads that are present in your
object-based model in any of the locations discussed in the pre-
vious section are transformed to act on either frame elements
along the edges of shell elements or the corner points of shell
elements in the analysis model. The remainder of this chapter
describes how this load transformation is done.
There are four distinct types of load transformation in ETABS.

Each has its own set of rules. These types of load transformation
are:
• Out-of-plane load transformation for floor-type area

objects with deck section properties: In this case, in
the analysis model, loads are transformed either to
beams along the edges of shell elements or to the corner
points of the shell elements. The load transformation
takes into account that the deck only spans in one direc-
tion.
32 - 4 Introduction to Load Transformation

• Out-of-plane load transformation for floor-type area

objects with slab section properties that have mem-
brane behavior only (not plate bending or shell be-
havior): In this case, in the analysis model, loads are
transformed either to beams along the edges of shell
elements or to the corner points of the shell elements.
The load transformation takes into account that the slab
spans in two directions.
Note: • Out-of-plane load transformation for all other types

of area objects not listed in the two above bullet
For all cases
except vertical
items: In this case, in the analysis model, loads are
loads on mem- transformed directly to the corner points of shell ele-
brane floor ments using a bilinear interpolation function.
slabs and
decks, ETABS • In-plane load transformation for all types of area ob- 32
uses a bilinear jects: In this case, in the analysis model, loads are trans-
interpolation formed directly to the corner points of shell elements
function to using a bilinear interpolation function.
transform the
loads applied to These cases can be stated in another way as follows. ETABS
or on area ob- uses a bilinear interpolation function to transform the loads ap-
jects in your plied to or on area objects in your object based ETABS model to
object based the corner points of shell elements in the analysis model for all
ETABS model area objects with two special case exceptions. Those two excep-
to the corner
points of shell
tions are:
elements in the
analysis model.
• Transformation of out-of-plane (vertical) loads for floor-
type area objects with deck section properties. Recall
that by definition area objects with deck section proper-
ties have membrane behavior only.
• Transformation of out-of-plane (vertical) loads for floor-

type area objects with slab section properties that have
membrane behavior only.
Note that both of these exceptions are associated with vertical

loads for floors that have membrane properties only, and thus
floors that ETABS can automatically mesh into the analysis
model.
Introduction to Load Transformation 32 - 5

Load Transformation for Area Objects

ETABS uses a bilinear interpolation method to transform all in-
plane loads (area, line and point) applied to area objects in your
object-based ETABS model to the corner points of the associated
shell elements in the analysis model. Note that the load trans-
formation occurs after any automatic meshing into the analysis
model done by ETABS. See Chapter 30 for discussion of the
ETABS automatic meshing of membrane floors into the analysis
model.
This same method of load transformation is also used to trans-

form out-of-plane loads on all area objects except for floor-type
(horizontal) area objects with membrane properties only. This
32 exception includes horizontal area objects with deck section
properties and horizontal area objects with slab properties that
have membrane behavior only (not plate bending behavior or full
shell behavior). See the sections titled “Vertical Load Transfor-
mation for Floors with Deck Properties” and “Vertical Load
Transformation for Floors with Membrane Slab Properties” later
in this chapter for discussion of these exceptions.
This section explains how the load transformation is done for

point objects. Line and area objects are internally discretized by
ETABS into a series of point loads and handled in exactly the
same way. In other words, area and line loads are numerically
integrated using the method described for point loads.
Note: Consider the arbitrary quadrilateral element shown in Figure 32-

1a with its corner points and edges labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4 for ref-
The r and s
erence in this discussion. ETABS begins by defining two axes
axes may or
may not be per-
labeled r and s as shown in Figure 32-1b. Axis r goes through the
pendicular to midpoints of edges 2 and 4. Axes s goes through the midpoints
each other. of edges 1 and 3. Note that the r and s axes need not be perpen-
dicular and that in this example they are not perpendicular.
Next ETABS normalizes the coordinates in the r-s coordinate

system such that the coordinates of the four corner points of the
area object are :
• Point 1: (r1, s1) = (1, 1)
• Point 2: (r2, s2) = (-1, 1)
32 - 6 Load Transformation for Area Objects

Figure 32-1: s
1 1
Example of transfer 2 2
4
Edge 1 Edge 1
e
r
Edg
Edg
of out-of-plane loads
for other area ob-
e2
e2
jects
Edge 3 Edge 3
Edg
Edg
4 4
3 3
a) Quadrilateral Element b) The r and s Axes
s (1, 1) s (1, 1)
(-1, 1) 1 (-1, 1) (r, s) 1
2 r 2 r
P
3
4
(1, -1) 3
4
(1, -1)
32
(-1, -1) (-1, -1)
c) Corner Point r-s Coordinates d) Point Load, P
• Point 3: (r3, s3) = (-1, -1)
• Point 4: (r4, s4) = (1, -1)
These coordinates are shown in Figure 32-1c. Note that this

normalization is the key assumption in this method. It is a per-
fectly valid assumption if the quadrilateral is a square, rectangu-
lar or a parallelogram. However, if the area object is not one of
these shapes then the interpolation method is not exactly what
you might expect. We will discuss this more later in this section.
Note that in most cases the area objects in your object-based
ETABS model and their associated shell elements in the analysis
model are squares, rectangles or parallelograms.
Consider a point load P that is located on the area object at arbi-

trary coordinates (r, s) in the r-s coordinate system as shown in
Figure 32-1d. The distribution of this point load to the four cor-
ner points is determined using Equations 32-1a through 32-1d:
N1 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 + s ) Eqn. 32-1a
4
Load Transformation for Area Objects 32 - 7

N2 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 + s ) Eqn. 32-1b
4
N3 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 − s ) Eqn. 32-1c
4
N4 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 − s ) Eqn. 32-1d
4
where,
Nn = Portion of load P distributed to corner point n (n = 1,

2, 3 or 4).
32
P = Point load acting on area object at location (r, s) in
the r-s coordinate system.
r = Coordinate of point load, P, along the r-axis.
s = Coordinate of point load, P, along the s-axis.
Note that Equations 32-1a through 32-1d are based on the as-
sumption that the corner points of the area object fall at coordi-
nates (1, 1), (-1, 1), (-1, -1) and (1, -1).
As an example suppose the coordinates of point P shown in Fig-

ure 32-1d are (r, s) = (0.5, 0.5) and that P is a load of 1 (units are
not important for example purposes). Then the four corner point
reactions are computed as:
N1 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 + s ) = 1 (1 + 0.5) (1 + 0.5) = 0.5625 = 9
4 4 16
N2 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 + s ) = 1 (1 − 0.5) (1 + 0.5) = 0.1875 = 3
4 4 16
N3 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 − s ) = 1 (1 − 0.5) (1 − 0.5) = 0.0625 = 1
4 4 16
N4 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 − s ) = 1 (1 + 0.5) (1 − 0.5) = 0.1875 = 3
4 4 16

Figure 32-2: 1 s 1
Example of transfer
2 2
Edge 4
Edge 4
of out-of-plane loads 1 1
Edge Edge
for other area ob-
r
jects that are not
Edge 2
Edge 2
square, rectangular
or a parallelogram
3 Edge 3 Ed g e
3 3
4 4
a) Quadrilateral Element b) The r and s Axes
s (1, 1) s (1, 1)
(-1, 1) (-1, 1)
1 1
(-1, 0.6)
2
(-1, 0.6)
2
32
r P=1 r
3 3
(-0.7, -0.6) 4 (-0.7, -0.6) 4
(-1, -1) (1, -1) (-1, -1) (1, -1)
(0.7, -1) (0.7, -1)
c) Corner Point r-s Coordinates d) Point Load, P
Note that:
9 3 1 3 16
N1 + N 2 + N 3 + N 4 = + + + = = 1.00 = P
16 16 16 16 16
as it should.
Now let's consider an area object that is not a square, rectangle

or parallelogram. As previously mentioned, in this case the bi-
linear interpolation will not be exactly what you might expect.
This happens because even though the corner points of the area
object do not fall at the coordinates (1, 1), (-1, 1), (-1, -1) and (1,
-1), ETABS uses Equations 32-1a through 32-1d for the bilinear
interpolation which assumes that the corner points do fall at
these coordinates.
Load Transformation for Area Objects 32 - 9

Consider the example shown in Figure 32-2a. This is a quadrilat-

eral area object that is not a square, rectangle or parallelogram.
As before, the corner points and edges are labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Figure 32-2b shows the r-axis going through the midpoints of
edges 2 and 4 and the s-axis going through the midpoints of
edges 1 and 3.
Figure 32-2c shows a dashed rectangle enclosing the area object.

The r-s coordinate system is normalized such that the coordi-
nates of the corner points of this dashed rectangle are (1, 1), (-1,
1), (-1, -1) and (1, -1). The actual coordinates of the corner
points of the area object are (1, 1), (-1, 0.6), (-0.7, -0.6) and (0.7,
-1) as shown in Figure 32-2c.
Figure 32-2d shows a point load, P, applied at the origin of the r-

32 s coordinate system. Let's again assume that P is a load of 1
(units are not important for example purposes) and calculate the
distribution of the load using Equations 32-1a through 32-1d just
as ETABS does.
Before making the calculation it is very important to make sure

you are not confused by Figures 32-2 c and d. The coordinates
shown for the area object in these figures, (1, 1), (-1, 0.6), (-0.7, -
0.6) and (0.7, -1), are not the ones ETABS uses when calculating
corner point loads. Instead, for calculating the corner point loads
ETABS assumes that the corner points coordinates of the area
object are (1, 1), (-1, 1), (-1, -1) and (1, -1). Thus we proceed
with our calculation using these coordinates.
N1 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 + s ) = 1 (1 + 0) (1 + 0) = 0.25 = 1
4 4 4
N2 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 + s ) = 1 (1 − 0) (1 + 0) = 0.25 = 1
4 4 4
N3 =
P
(1 − r ) (1 − s ) = 1 (1 − 0) (1 − 0) = 0.25 = 1
4 4 4
N4 =
P
(1 + r ) (1 − s ) = 1 (1 + 0) (1 − 0) = 0.25 = 1
4 4 4

Note that:
1 1 1 1 4
N1 + N 2 + N 3 + N 4 = + + + = = 1.00 = P
4 4 4 4 4
as it should.
Note: Note that in the example of Figure 32-2 the sum of the loads
distributed to the four corners is equal to the applied load. Thus
In ETABS static
static equilibrium is maintained. However, the amount of load
equilibrium is
always main-
distributed to each of the four corners of the area object is really
tained when more suited to an area object shaped like the dashed quadrilateral
transforming in Figures 32-2c and d than to the actual area object considered
loads from the shown in Figure 32-2a.
32
object-based
model to the Figure 32-2 and its accompanying discussion illustrates what is
analysis model. meant earlier in this section by the statement that when the area
object is not a square, rectangle or parallelogram the bilinear in-
terpolation may not yield results that are exactly what you might
expect. In most models your area objects and associated shell
elements will be squares, rectangles or parallelograms and this
won’t be an issue. Even when it is an issue the total applied load
is correct, it just may be transformed to the corner points in a
slightly different distribution than you might expect.
Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Deck

Properties
The discussion in this section only applies to floor-type (hori-
zontal) area objects with deck section properties. Note that by
definition in ETABS deck section properties only have mem-
brane behavior. This discussion further only applies to out-of-
plane (vertical) loads acting on these deck sections.
This section describes the transformation of point, line and uni-

form loads acting on floors with deck sections from your object-
based ETABS model to the element-based analysis model. Note
that the load transformation occurs after any automatic meshing
done by ETABS into the analysis model. See Chapter 30 for dis-
cussion of the ETABS automatic meshing for membrane floors.
Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Deck Properties 32 - 11

In ETABS the load distribution for deck sections is one way, that
is, the deck is assumed to span in one direction only (the local 1-
axis direction of the area object to which the deck is assigned).
This is in contrast to slab sections which are assumed to span in
two directions. The transformation of loads from the object-
based model to the analysis model considers this span direction
for floors modeled with deck properties.
Before the load transformation is done for decks ETABS first

automatically meshes the deck into quadrilateral elements as de-
scribed in Chapter 30 (unless you have already completely
meshed it yourself either by drawing it that way or by using the
manual meshing methods described in Chapter 31). Once the
meshing is complete ETABS knows which sides of the meshed
32
shell elements have real beams along them and which have
imaginary beams. It also knows which edges of the meshed shell
elements are also edges of the deck. Armed with this information
ETABS can begin to transform the load into the analysis model.
Note: If you are unfamiliar with the concept of imaginary beams

then you should read Chapter 30 before proceeding further in
this section.
The remainder of this section is divided into four subsections.

The first subsection describes how loads are transformed for in-
terior meshed deck elements that are rectangular. The second
subsection describes how loads are transformed for interior
meshed deck elements of any general quadrilateral shape. The
third subsection describes how loads are transformed for exterior
meshed deck elements that have one or more of their edges along
the edge of the deck. The final subsection discusses the effect of
openings on the transformation of loads on deck sections.
Rectangular Interior Meshed Element

Figure 32-3a shows a rectangular interior element of a meshed
floor with deck section properties. The term interior in this case
means that no edge of the element is also an edge of the deck.
The edges of the element are labeled 1, 2, 3 and 4 for reference.
The direction of the deck span (local 1-axis) is oriented parallel
to edges 1 and 3 as indicated by the arrow.
32 - 12 Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Deck Properties

x x/2 x/2
wx / 2
Edge 3 Edge 3
Direction of deck span

Edge 4
Edge 2
Edge 4
Edge 2
c) Loading on Edges 2 and 4
Uniform load = w
Edge 1 Edge 1
a) Rectangular Interior Element b) Distribution of Uniform Load
of Meshed Floor
(Above)
Figure 32-3: Figure 32-3b illustrates how a uniform load, w (force/length2,
e.g., psf), on this element is transformed into the analysis model.
Example of rectan-
gular interior A line is drawn through the center point of the element perpen- 32
meshed element with dicular to the span of the deck. In this case that line goes from
a uniform load the center of edge 1 to the center of edge 3. This line is shown
dashed. All of the load on the edge 2 side of the line is tributary
as a uniform load to the beam (real or imaginary) along edge 2 of
the element. Similarly, all of the load on the edge 4 side of the
line is tributary as a uniform load to the beam (real or imaginary)
along edge 4 of the element. Thus the beams along edges 2 and 4
are loaded as shown in Figure 32-3c.
Note: If the beams along edges 2 and 4 are real beams then ETABS is
If the support- done with the uniform load transformation, that is, it has trans-
ing member at formed the load onto adjacent beams. If the beams along edges 2
the end point of and 4 are imaginary beams then ETABS distributes the uniform
an imaginary load on the imaginary beams to the end points of the imaginary
beam is itself beams as point loads. This distribution assumes that the imagi-
imaginary, then nary beams are simply supported at their end points. The sup-
the load from
the imaginary
porting members at the end points of the imaginary beams must
beam tributary be real members such as columns, walls or other beams. If the
to that end supporting member at an end point of an imaginary beam is itself
point is lost, imaginary, then the load from the imaginary beam tributary to
that is, it is that end point is lost, that is, it is ignored by ETABS (except in
ignored by the special case of an exterior meshed element which is dis-
ETABS. cussed later).

x1 x2 P P * x1
x1 + x2
Edge 3
Direction of deck span Edge 4 Edge 2

c) Loading on Edge 2
x1 x2
Edge 4
Edge 2
Point load, P P * x2
P * x2 P * x1 x1 + x2
x1 + x2 x1 + x2
Edge 1
a) Rectangular Interior Element b) Distribution of Point Load d) Loading on Edge 4
of Meshed Floor
(Above)
Now consider the case of a point load, P, at an arbitrary location
32 Figure 32-4:
Example of rectan- on this rectangular element as shown in Figure 32-4a. ETABS
gular interior distributes this point load to the appropriate edge beams (based
meshed element with on the direction of the deck span) assuming that the meshed deck
a point load element spans simply in the direction of the deck span from one
edge to another. In this example the deck spans simply from
edge 4 to edge 2 as shown by the dashed line in Figure 32-4a and
as shown in Figure 32-4b.
Figure 32-4b shows how ETABS calculates the reactions to be

applied as point loads on edge beams 2 and 4 due to the point
load. Finally, Figures 32-4c and 32-4d show the loads applied to
edges 2 and 4 respectively.
As with the uniform load, if the beams along edges 2 and 4 are
real beams then ETABS is done with the point load transforma-
tion, that is, it has transformed it to adjacent beams. If the beams
along edges 2 and 4 are imaginary beams then ETABS distrib-
utes the point load on the imaginary beam to the end points of
the imaginary beams as point loads. This distribution assumes
that the imaginary beams are simply supported at their end
points. The supporting members at the end points of the imagi-
nary beams must be real members such as columns, walls or
other beams. If the supporting member at an end point of an
imaginary beam is itself imaginary, then the load from the
imaginary beam tributary to that end point is lost, that is, it is ig-
nored by ETABS (except in the special case of an exterior
meshed element which is discussed later).

A line load is transformed in a similar fashion to that for a point

load using a numerical integration technique. The line load is
discretized as a series of point loads which are transformed to
surrounding beams as previously described for point loads. The
series of point loads is then converted back to a line load on the
surrounding beams. An area load that does not cover the entire
element is also transformed in a similar fashion to that for a point
load using a numerical integration technique.
General Interior Meshed Element

Now consider the more general interior element of a meshed
floor with deck section properties shown in Figure 32-5a. When
transforming loads from the object-based ETABS model to the
analysis model, the first thing ETABS does is construct two lines
drawn from two corners of the element, parallel to the direction
32
of the deck span until they intersect the edges of the element.
These two lines are shown dashed in Figure 32-5b.
Note: Next ETABS constructs two more lines drawn from the other
two corners to the midpoint of the two previously constructed
Line and area
lines. These lines are added in Figure 32-5c. Then ETABS con-
loads are
transformed in
structs one more line by connecting the midpoints of the two ini-
a similar fash- tially constructed lines. This line is added in Figure 32-5d. Now
ion to that for the load can be transformed from the object-based ETABS
point loads. model to the analysis model.
ETABS uses a
numerical inte- Figure 32-5e shows how uniform load on this element is trans-
gration tech- formed (distributed) to its edges. Figures 32-5f, g, h and i show
nique where the how the load would appear on edges 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively.
lines and areas
are discretized As discussed for the rectangular element, if the beams along the
as a series of edges are real beams then ETABS is done with the uniform load
points. transformation, that is, it has transformed it to adjacent beams. If
the beams along the edges are imaginary beams then ETABS
distributes the uniform load on the imaginary beam to the end
points of the imaginary beams as point loads. This distribution
assumes that the imaginary beams are simply supported at their
end points. The supporting members at the end points of the
imaginary beams must be real members such as columns, walls
or other beams. If the supporting member at an end point of an
imaginary beam is itself imaginary, then the load from the
imaginary beam tributary to that end point is lost, that is, it is ig-

3 3 3
Edge Edge Edge
Uniform load
2
Midpoint
4
4
Edge
Edge
Edge
Edge
Edge
Edge
Direction of deck span Midpoint
Edge 1 Edge 1 Edge 1
a) General Interior Element of b) c)

Meshed Floor Deck
3 3
Edge Edge
2
2
4
4
Edge
Edge
Edge
Edge
32
Edge 1 Edge 1
d) e) Transformation of Uniform Load f) Loading on Edge 1
g) Loading on Edge 2 h) Loading on Edge 3 i) Loading on Edge 4
(Above) nored by ETABS (except in the special case of an exterior

Figure 32-5: meshed element which is discussed later).
Example of general
Figure 32-6a shows the same general element with three point
interior meshed ele-
loads on it labeled P1, P2 and P3. Similar to the previously dis-
ment with a uniform
cussed point load on the rectangular element, ETABS transforms
load
these point loads to the appropriate edge beams (based on the di-
rection of the deck span) assuming that the meshed shell element
spans simply from one edge to another.
Thus the point load P1 is transformed from the object-based

ETABS model to the analysis model as if it were a point load on
Line 1 in Figure 32-6b. Note that Line 1 spans simply from edge
1 to edge 2. Similarly, point load P2 is transformed as if it were a

3 3
Edge Edge
Figure 32-6:
Example of general Line 3
interior meshed ele- P3 P3
2
P2 P2 Line 2
4
ment with a point
Edge
Edge
Edge
Edge
load
P1 P1 Line 1
Edge 1 Edge 1
a) General Interior Element of b)

Meshed Floor Deck
point load on Line 2 where Line 2 spans simply from edge 4 to

edge 2. Finally, point load P3 is transformed as if it were a point
load on Line 3 where Line 3 spans simply from edge 3 to edge 2.
See the discussion of point loads in the previous subsection titled
32
"Rectangular Interior Meshed Element" (for example, see Figure
32-4) for additional information.
As usual if the beams along the edges are real beams then
ETABS is done with the point load transformation, that is, it has
transformed it to adjacent beams. If the beams along the edges
are imaginary beams then ETABS distributes the point load on
the imaginary beam to the end points of the imaginary beams as
point loads. This distribution assumes that the imaginary beams
are simply supported at their end points. The supporting mem-
bers at the end points of the imaginary beams must be real mem-
bers such as columns, walls or other beams. If the supporting
member at an end point of an imaginary beam is itself imaginary,
then the load from the imaginary beam tributary to that end point
is lost, that is, it is ignored by ETABS (except in the special case
of an exterior meshed element which is discussed later).
Similar to the rectangular element example, a line load or area

load covering part of an element is discretized as a series of point
loads which are transformed as described above for point loads
and then converted into line loads on the surrounding beams
(real or imaginary).

Beam 1b Beam 1a Beam 1b
Beam 2b
Beam 2b
D E F
Beam 2a
Beam 2a
Edge of deck is at A B C
center of spandrel
beam, typical in this
example
32 a) Floor Plan b) Deck Meshing
Exterior Meshed Element

(Above) This subsection uses three separate examples to illustrate how
Figure 32-7: ETABS transforms vertical load on exterior deck elements from
Example of exterior the object-based ETABS model into the analysis model. In this
meshed elements context an exterior deck element is one that has one or more
with real beams on sides along the edge of the deck.
all sides Consider the example shown in 32-7a. In this instance the deck
is fully framed by beams. ETABS meshes the deck as shown in
Figure 32-7b into areas A, B, C, D, E and F. Loads are trans-
ferred to beams as previously described in the subsection titled
"Rectangular Interior Meshed Element." Thus if you fully frame
exterior meshed elements, that is, if you put real beams on all
four sides of them then the vertical load distribution is the same
as previously discussed for an interior meshed element.
Note that for convenience and simplicity of this example the

edge of the deck in this example is aligned with the center of the
spandrel beams. We will return to discuss this, and show an ex-
ample where the edge of deck extends beyond the spandrel
beam, after discussing more examples in Figures 32-8, 32-9 and
32-10.

Beam 1b No beam at
Beam 2b
Beam 1b
Beam 2b
Imaginary
Beam 6
edge of deck E
D
Beam 3a Beam 3b Beam 3a
Beam 3b
Imaginary Beam 5
Beam 1a
Beam 2a
Beam 1a
A B C
No beam at
edge of deck
Beam 4a Beam 4b
a) Floor Plan b) Deck Meshing
(Above) Now consider the example shown in Figure 32-8a. In this case
32
Figure 32-8: cantilever beams are included in the model extending out into the
Example of exterior deck overhang area but no edge beams are included.
meshed elements
with cantilever Figure 32-8b shows the imaginary beams added by ETABS as
beams extending to dashed lines and illustrates that ETABS meshes the deck into
edge of deck five areas labeled A, B, C, D and E. The load transformation
from the object-based ETABS model to the analysis model in ar-
eas A and B is as previously described in the subsection titled
"Rectangular Interior Meshed Element."
The load transformation in area C is also as previously described

in the subsection titled "Rectangular Interior Meshed Element."
Note that in this case since Imaginary Beam 5 is an imaginary
Note: beam, the load tributary to Imaginary Beam 5 is distributed to its
ETABS recog- end points and applied as point loads to the real cantilever beams
nizes several (Beam 3b and Beam 4b) that support it.
special case
conditions for The load transformation in area D is also as previously described
transforming in the subsection titled "Rectangular Interior Meshed Element."
load on exterior Note that all of the load in this area is transformed to Beam 1b
deck sections. and Beam 2b as uniform load because of the direction of the
deck span.

Area E represents one of the special case areas that ETABS rec-
ognizes. If this area were treated as a typical area (which it is
not!) then the load would be transformed to Beam 2b and Imagi-
nary Beam 6 (note direction of deck span) as uniform load. Half
of the load on Imaginary Beam 6 would be transferred to the end
of Beam 3b and the other half of the load on Imaginary Beam 6
would be lost because it is tributary to another imaginary beam.
This, however, is not how ETABS treats area E.
Note: In this special case exterior corner condition, ETABS recognizes

that some of the load will be lost if it distributed in the usual
When distrib-
fashion. Thus, in this case, ETABS transforms all of the load in
uting vertical
load on auto-
Area E to the real cantilever beam, Beam 2b as a distributed
matically load. Again this is a special case that is different from how
32 meshed floors ETABS transforms the load for typical deck sections. Note that
ETABS pro- if Beam 2b were also an imaginary beam then ETABS would
vides special transform all of the load directly to the column as a point load.
treatment to This will be addressed later in the example shown in Figure 32-
area objects at 10.
the edge of the
deck or slab. Figure 32-9a shows the same example as in Figure 32-8a except
that the top edge of the deck is now skewed. Figure 32-9b shows
the imaginary beams created by ETABS and labels the areas of
the deck mesh as A, B, C, D and E. The vertical load transfor-
mation from the object-based ETABS model to the analysis
model in areas A, B and C of Figure 32-9b is identical to that
previously described for areas A, B and C of Figure 32-8b.
The transformation of vertical load in area D of Figure 32-9 is

illustrated in Figure 32-9c. The transformation of load in this
area is as described in the previous subsection titled "General
Interior Meshed Element." In the rectangular portion of area D
half of the load goes to Beam 1b and half goes to Beam 2b as
distributed loads. In the triangular portion of area D the load is
transformed to Imaginary Beam 7 and Beam 2b as distributed
loads. The load tributary to Imaginary Beam 7 is distributed to
its end points and applied to Beam 1b and Beam 2b as point
loads.

a m8
ary Be
Imagin
ImaginaryBeam 6
7
ary Beam
Imagin
Beam 2b
No beam at
E
Beam 2b
Beam 1b
Beam 1b
edge of deck D
Beam 3a Beam 3b Beam 3a Beam 3b
Imaginary Beam 5
Beam 1a
Beam 2a
Beam 1a
Beam 2a
A B C
No beam at
edge of deck
32
D
am 8 E2
ary Be
Imagin
ImaginaryBeam 6
am 7
ary Be
Imagin
Beam 2b
Beam 1b
E1
D
Beam 3a Beam 3b
c) Condition at Skewed Deck

Edge (Areas D and E)
(Above) Area E in Figure 32-9b again represents one of the special case
Figure 32-9: areas that ETABS recognizes when transforming loads into the
Example of exterior analysis model. In this special case exterior corner condition,
meshed elements ETABS recognizes that some of the load will be lost if it is trans-
with cantilever formed in the usual fashion. Thus ETABS transforms all of the
beams extending to load in the rectangular portion of Area E, labeled E1 in Figure
edge of a skewed 32-9c, as a uniform load on the real cantilever beam, Beam 2b
deck The load goes onto Beam 2b, not Beam 3b, because of the direc-
tion of the deck span. (As an aside, if the deck span direction
were skewed, say at a 45-degree angle, then the load in area E1
is transformed to both Beam 2b and Beam 3b). The load in the
triangular portion of area E, labeled E2, is transformed to the

Edge of deck
D E
Beam 1 Beam 1
Column 1 Column 1
Beam 2
Beam 2
A B C

32 (Above)
Figure 32-10: free end of Beam 2b as a point load. Note that if Beam 2b were
Example of exterior also an imaginary beam then ETABS transforms all of the load
meshed elements in areas E1 and E2 directly to the column as a point load.
with overhanging
Figure 32-10a shows the condition where an overhanging deck is
slab
modeled but overhanging beams (cantilevers) are not included in
the model. Figure 32-10b shows how ETABS defines imaginary
beams (shown dashed) and how the deck is meshed into five ar-
eas labeled A, B, C, D and E. Note that the imaginary cantilever
beams are defined parallel to their back spans. See Chapter 30
which includes information on how these imaginary beams are
defined.
The vertical load transformation from the object-based ETABS

model to the analysis model in areas A and B of Figure 32-10b is
identical to that previously described for areas A and B of Figure
32-8b. Areas C, D and E in Figure 32-10b are treated as special
cases by ETABS.
All of the load in area C is transformed to Beam 2 as a uniform

load. All of the load in area D is transformed to Beam 1 as a uni-
form load. Note that ETABS makes this assumption even though
the orientation of the deck suggests that the load is transformed
in the other direction. You might say that for area D ETABS as-
sumes that the deck span direction has been turned 90 degrees.
Finally, all of the load in area E is transformed to Column 1 as a

G H I
Beam 1a Beam 1b Beam 1a Beam 1b
Beam 2b
Beam 2b
Beam 3b
D E F J
Beam 3a
Beam 2a
Beam 2a
K
A B C

32
(Above) point load. The transformation of load is similar if the edges of
Figure 32-11: the deck are skewed.
Example of exterior
meshed elements Now let's return to the example discussed in Figure 32-8. Recall
with overhanging that for convenience and simplicity the edge of the deck in that
slab example is aligned with the center of the spandrel beams. Now
suppose we wanted to repeat the example in Figure 32-8 except
this time assume that the deck overhangs the beams slightly.
Figure 32-11a shows the example with the slab overhanging the
spandrel beams on two sides. Figure 32-11b shows how the deck
is automatically meshed into areas A through K. (See Chapter 30
for discussion of ETABS automatic meshing of decks). Note that
the example in Figure 32-8 only had areas A through F. Thus ar-
eas G through K are added in this new example.
The vertical load transformation from the object-based ETABS

model to the analysis model for areas A through F is the same as
those described for the example in Figure 32-8. See that example
for more information on areas A through F. The vertical load
transformation in areas G through K is similar to that described
for the example in Figure 32-10:
• The load in area G is transformed to Beam 1a as a dis-

tributed load.

• The load in area H is transformed to Beam 1b as a dis-

tributed load.
• The load in area I is transformed to the end of Beam 1b

as a point load.
• The load in area J is transformed to Beam 3b as a dis-

tributed load.
• The load in area K is transformed to Beam 3a as a dis-

tributed load.
The Effect of Deck Openings on Load Transformation

32 An opening can be either loaded or unloaded. If openings in
floors with deck sections are unframed, then for the purposes of
transforming loads from the object-based ETABS model to the
analysis model, they are treated as if the deck extends right
through the opening, that is, in affect, as if the opening is not
there. If the opening is framed by beams then the transformation
of loads is treated in the usual manner.
Consider the example shown in Figure 32-12. Figure 32-12a il-

lustrates the unframed opening. Figure 32-12b illustrates the
framed opening with beams on all sides. The vertical load on the
floor is 100 psf. The direction of the deck span is shown. The
transformation of the load to the beam labeled Beam 1 in the
plan views of Figure 32-12 is illustrated in Figures 32-12c, d, e
and f for different conditions. The opening is considered both
loaded and unloaded (separately). The opening is also considered
to be framed and unframed (separately).
The loading shown on Beam 1 is only that load tributary to

Beam 1 from the side of the beam where the opening exists. In
Figure 32-12c, the 0.6 klf is from six feet of tributary deck width
times 100 psf (0.1 ksf). Noting that in this case the opening is
unloaded, the 0.2 klf is from two feet of tributary deck width
between Beam 1 and the edge of the opening.
In Figure 32-12d the 0.6 klf is from six feet of tributary deck
width. Thus in this example, all of the load on the loaded open-
ing is tributary to Beam 1. This happens because the opening
falls within the six-foot tributary width to Beam 1.

4' 6' 14'

Figure 32-12: Note: Assume floor loading is 100
Example of effect of psf. Opening is either loaded or
unloaded as noted in c, d, e and f
openings on distri- which are loading diagrams for
bution of load over Beam 1.
deck sections
6'
4' 6' 14'
4'
0.6 klf
0.2 klf
2' Beam 1
c) Unframed, unloaded opening

a) Floor Plan with Unframed Opening
4' 6' 14'

d) Unframed, loaded opening
0.6 klf
0.7k 0.7k
0.6 klf
32
0.1 klf
6'
e) Framed, unloaded opening

4'
1.5k 1.5k
2'
0.6 klf 0.6 klf

Beam 1 0.1 klf
b) Floor Plan with Framed Opening

(Beams on all Sides) f) Framed, loaded opening
In Figures 32-12e and 32-12f the 0.1 klf is from one foot of
tributary deck width between Beam 1 and the edge of the open-
ing. The other half of this two-foot width is tributary to the beam
framing the opening. Note that in Figure 32-12e the lower beam
framing the opening has a one-foot tributary width whereas in
Figure 32-12f, where the opening is loaded it has a three-foot
tributary width, two feet of which are from the loaded opening.
Thus the point loads on Beam 1 from the framing around the
opening are larger in Figure 32-12f.

Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Mem-

brane Slab Properties
The discussion in this section only applies to floor-type (hori-
zontal) area objects with slab section properties that have
membrane behavior only (not plate bending or shell behavior).
This discussion further only applies to out-of-plane (vertical)
loads acting on these slab sections.
This section describes the transformation of point, line and uni-

form loads acting on floors with membrane slab sections from
your object-based ETABS model to the element-based analysis
model. Note that the load transformation occurs after any auto-
32 matic meshing done by ETABS into the analysis model. See
Chapter 30 for discussion of the ETABS automatic meshing for
membrane floors.
In ETABS the load distribution for membrane slab sections is

two way, that is, the slab is assumed to span in two perpendicular
directions. This is in contrast to deck sections that are assumed to
span in one direction only. The transformation of loads from the
object-based model to the analysis model considers these two
span directions for floors modeled with membrane slab proper-
ties.
Before the load transformation is done for membrane slabs

ETABS first automatically meshes the slab into quadrilateral
elements as described in Chapter 30 (unless you have already
completely meshed it yourself either by drawing it that way or
by using the manual meshing methods described in Chapter 31).
Once the meshing is complete ETABS knows which sides of the
meshed shell elements have real beams along them and which
corner points of the shell element have vertical support. Armed
with this information ETABS can begin to transform the load
into the analysis model.
The actual distribution of loads on these elements is quite com-

plex. ETABS uses the concept of tributary loads as a simplifying
assumption for transforming the loads.
32 - 26 Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Membrane Slab Properties

The shell element (area object) is divided into areas supported by

the edges that have real beams along them and by the corner
points that have actual vertical support (e.g., column, wall, etc.).
All out-of-plane loads (applied as point, line or area loads) that
fall within these tributary areas are then transferred to the re-
spective edges (beams) or corner points (vertical support mem-
ber).
The shell element is typically divided into tributary areas based

on the following rules applied in the order that the rules are
listed:
• Lines are drawn that bisect the corner angle of every

corner point of the shell where both adjacent edges are
supported by real beams.
32
• Lines are drawn from the midpoint of the edges of the
shell element that do not have real beams along them but
do have both of their ends supported. These lines are ei-
ther drawn in a direction such that they would connect to
the midpoint of the opposite edge or they are drawn to
an appropriate intersection point with other tributary area
dividing lines.
• Special case tributary area dividing lines are drawn.
Figure 32-13 shows some of the possibilities for the tributary ar-
eas. Each of the items in this figure shows a four-sided shell
element. The numbers on the outside of each item correspond to
the supporting members for the shell element. These supporting
members are either real beams or vertical support elements. The
numbers on the inside of the shell element identify the tributary
area for the like-numbered supporting element.
The bullet list below discusses each of the items in Figure 32-13.
• Figure 32-13a has real beams on all four sides. The four
corner angles are bisected such that pairs of lines from
adjacent corners intersect. Then a special line is drawn
connecting the two intersection points.
Vertical Load Transformation for Floors with Membrane Slab Properties 32 - 27

3 2
Figure 32-13:
Tributary areas for 3 2
4 4 2 2 3 3
various conditions of 3 3 2 2
1 1 1
a membrane slab
1 1 1
a) Real beams on all sides b) Case 1 of real beams on c) Case 2 of real beams on
three sides three sides
2
2 2 1
1 1
1 1 1
d) Real beams on two e) Real beams on two f) Real beam on one side
adjacent sides opposite sides
2 2 3 2
32 1
midpoint
1
2
3 3
2 3 2
1 1 midpoints
1 1
g) Real beam on one side h) Real beams on two i) Real beam on one side
plus one vertical adjacent sides plus plus two vertical
support element at one vertical support support elements at
corner point element at corner point corner points
4 3 3
4 3 3
1 2
1
1 2 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
j) Vertical support k) Vertical support l) Vertical support
elements at all corner elements at three elements at two
points (no real beams) corner points (no real adjacent corner points
beams) (no real beams)
2
2
1
1
Real beam at shell edge
1 1 No beam at shell edge
m)Vertical support n) Vertical support
Tributary area dividing line
elements at two elements at one
opposite corner points corner point (no Vertical support element
(no real beams) real beams) Legend

• Figure 32-13b has real beams on three sides. In the case

shown here bisecting lines are drawn bisecting the an-
gles at the two corners where real beams meet. These bi-
secting lines meet the opposite edge of the shell element
before they intersect.
• Figure 32-13c has real beams on three sides. In the case

shown here bisecting lines are drawn bisecting the an-
gles at the two corners where real beams meet. These bi-
secting lines intersect before they meet the opposite edge
of the shell element. A line is drawn from the midpoint
of the edge with no real beam that has both ends sup-
ported (by beams) to the intersection point of the lines
that bisected the angles.
• Figure 32-13d has real beams on two adjacent sides. A 32

line is drawn bisecting the angle at the corner where the
two real beams meet. This line is extended to the oppo-
site edge of the shell element.
• Figure 32-13e has real beams on two opposite sides. A

line is drawn connecting the midpoints of the edges with
no real beams along them.
• Figure 32-13f has real beams on one side. No tributary

area dividing lines are needed. All loads go to the one
beam.
• Figure 32-13g has a real beam on one side and one verti-
cal support element. A line is drawn from the midpoint
of the edge with no beam along it, but with supports at
each end (beam at one end, vertical support element at
the other to the corner with no beam framing into it and
no vertical support. Note that in general, this line does
not bisect the angle at this corner.
• Figure 32-13h has real beam on two sides and one verti-
cal support element. A line is drawn bisecting the angle
at the corner point where the real beams meet. Lines are
drawn perpendicular from the midpoint of each of the
edges with no beam along it until they intersect the line
bisecting the angle. The perpendicular line that intersects
the line bisecting the angle closest to the corner point

where the real beams meet is kept. The other perpen-

dicular line is realigned such that it connects the mid-
point of the edge with no beam along it to the intersec-
tion point of the other two lines.
• Figure 32-13i has a real beam on one side and two verti-
cal support elements. A line is drawn connecting the
midpoints of the two sides that are adjacent to the side
with the real beam along it. A second line is drawn con-
necting the midpoint of the side opposite the side with
the real beam to the midpoint of the first line drawn.
• Figure 32-13j has vertical support at all four corner

points and no real beams along the edges. Lines are
drawn connecting the midpoints of opposite sides.
32
• Figure 32-13k has vertical support at three corner points
and no real beams along the edges. Lines are first drawn
connecting the midpoints of opposite sides. These two
lines are then scaled back such that they extend from
their intersection point to the side of the element that has
vertical support at each end. Finally a line is drawn from
the intersection point to the corner with no vertical sup-
port. Note that in general, this line does not bisect the
angle at this corner.
• Figure 32-13l has vertical support at two adjacent corner

points and no real beams along the edges. A line is
drawn connecting the midpoints of opposite sides of the
element.
• Figure 32-13m has vertical support at two opposite cor-

ner points and no real beams along the edges. A line is
drawn between the corner points that do not have verti-
cal support.
• Figure 32-13n has vertical support at one corner point

and no real beams along the edges. No tributary area di-
viding lines are needed. All loads go to the one corner
point.

Figure 32-14: 3 3
Example of load
distribution on a 3 3
membrane slab 4 4 2 2 4 4 2 2
1 1
1 1
a) Full uniform load b) Partial uniform load
transformation transformation
3 3
3 3
4 4 2 2 4 4 2 2
1 1
1 1
32
c) Line load transformation d) Point load transformation
Note that the load transformations shown in Figures 32-13 a, b,

c, f, l and m do a fairly good job of approximating reality. In
these cases a reasonable estimate of the "correct" amount of load
is distributed to each supporting element.
The other items in Figure 32-13 are convenient ways to trans-

form the load but may not always do a good job of approximat-
ing the real condition. They will always transform the correct
total amount of load but may not always distribute the "correct"
proportions to each supporting element. If you find you have a
lot of these conditions and a "correct" load distribution on each
supporting element is important in your model then you may be
better off considering plate bending in your floor and manually
meshing the slab appropriately. See Chapter 31 for discussion of
manual meshing.
Figure 32-14 shows some examples of load transformation for

membrane slab shell elements with real beams on all four sides.
In the figure the sides of the shell element are numbered 1
through 4 and the corresponding tributary area of the shell ele-
ment are also numbered 1 through 4.
Figure 32-14a shows how uniform load over the entire shell ele-
ment is transformed to the real beams along the shell edges. The

load in areas 1 through 4 is projected onto beams 1 through 4, re-

spectively, as full length distributed line loads.
Figure 32-14b shows how a partial uniform area load on the shell
element (shown shaded) is transformed to the real beams along
the shell edges. The load in areas 1, 3 and 4 is projected onto
beams 1, 3 and 4, respectively, as partial length line loads. Beam
2 receives no load.
Figure 32-14c shows how a line load on the shell element is

transformed to the real beams along the shell edges. The portion
of the line load in area 1 is projected onto beam 1 as a distributed
line load. Similarly, the portion of the line load in area 3 is pro-
jected onto beam 3 as a distributed line load. Beams 2 and 4 re-
ceive no load.
32 Figure 32-14d shows how a point load on the shell element is
transformed to the real beams along the shell edges. Since the
point load falls in area 3, the entire point load is projected onto
beam 3. Beams 1, 2 and 4 receive no load.
Note the following about projection of the shell element loads

onto the edge beams:
• The projection of load is always done in a direction that

is perpendicular to the considered edge beam.
• If the projection in the above-specified manner causes

some of the load to be projected beyond the end of the
edge beam then that load is concentrated at the end of
the edge beam.

Chapter 33
33
Overview of ETABS Analysis Techniques
General
This chapter provides a brief overview of ETABS analysis tech-
niques. The types of analysis discussed are linear static analysis,
modal (eigenvector and Ritz-vector) analysis, response-spectrum
analysis, time-history analysis, initial P-Delta analysis, and non-
linear static analysis (including incremental analysis.)
In a given analysis run, you may request an initial P-Delta analy-

sis, a modal analysis, and multiple cases of linear static, re-
sponse-spectrum, and time-history analysis. Multiple nonlinear
static analysis cases may also be defined; these are performed
separately from the other analysis types.
33 - 1
Linear Static Analysis

A linear static analysis is automatically performed for each static
load case that is defined. The results of different static load cases
can be combined with each other and with other linear analysis
cases, such as response-spectrum analyses.
Geometric and material nonlinearity are not considered in linear

static analysis, except that the effect of the initial P-Delta analy-
sis is included in every static load case. For example, if you de-
fine an initial P-Delta analysis for gravity load, then deflections
and moments will be increased for lateral static load cases.
Linear static load cases can still be combined when an initial P-

Delta analysis has been performed, since the initial P-Delta load
33 is the same for all static load and response-spectrum cases.
Modal Analysis
Modal analysis calculates vibration modes for the structure.
These can be used to investigate the behavior of a structure, and
are required as a basis for subsequent response-spectrum and/or
time-history analyses.
Note: Two types of modal analysis are available: eigenvector analysis

and Ritz-vector analysis. Only one of these can be used in a sin-
Two types of
gle analysis run.
modal analysis
are available: Eigenvector analysis determines the undamped free-vibration
eigenvector
mode shapes and frequencies of the system. These natural Modes
analysis and
Ritz-vector provide an excellent insight into the behavior of the structure.
analysis. They can also be used as the basis for response-spectrum or
time-history analyses, although Ritz vectors (discussed below)
are strongly recommended for this purpose.
ETABS modal analysis can also generate a special set of load-

dependent Ritz vectors that take into account the spatial distri-
bution of dynamic load. Although these Ritz vectors may not al-
ways correspond to the natural vibration modes of the structure,
it has been shown that they are a much better basis for response-
spectrum and time-history analysis.
33 - 2 Linear Static Analysis

Chapter 33 - Overview of ETABS Analysis Techniques
It is especially important that you use Ritz-vectors when per-

forming nonlinear time-history analysis.
An initial P-Delta analysis will affect all the modes found. For
example, if you define an initial P-Delta analysis using gravity
load, the periods of the lateral modes will usually be longer than
without the P-Delta effect.
Eigenvector Analysis
Eigenvector analysis involves the solution of the generalized ei-
genvalue problem shown in Equation 33-1:
[ K − Ω 2 M ]Φ = 0 Eqn. 33-1
where K is the stiffness matrix, M is the diagonal mass matrix,

Ω 2 is the diagonal matrix of eigenvalues, and Φ is the matrix
33
of corresponding eigenvectors (mode shapes).
Tip: Each eigenvalue-eigenvector pair is called a natural vibration

mode of the structure. The modes are identified by numbers from
It is especially
1 to n in the order in which the modes are found by the program.
important that
you use Ritz-
The eigenvalue is the square of the circular frequency, ω , for
vectors when
performing that mode (unless a frequency shift is used, see below). The cy-
nonlinear time- clic frequency, f, and the period, T, of the mode are related to ω
history analy- by Equation 33-2:
sis.
1 ω
T= and f = Eqn. 33-2
f 2π
You may specify the number of modes to be found, a conver-

gence tolerance, and the frequency range of interest. These pa-
rameters are described in the following subtopics.
Modal Analysis 33 - 3
Number of Modes
You may specify the number of modes, N, to be found. The pro-
gram will seek the N lowest-frequency (longest-period) modes.
If a non-zero frequency shift has been specified, the program
will seek the N modes with frequencies closest to the shift, f 0 .
This is discussed in the next subsection.
The number of modes actually found, n, is limited by:
• The number of modes requested, N.
• The number of modes present in the specified frequency

range. See the subsection titled "Frequency Range" later
in this chapter.
33 • The number of mass degrees of freedom in the model.
A mass degree of freedom is any active degree of freedom that

possesses translational mass or rotational mass moment of iner-
tia. The mass may have been assigned directly to the joint or
may come from connected objects/elements.
Only the modes that are actually found will be available for any
subsequent response-spectrum or time-history analysis process-
ing.
Frequency Range
You may specify a restricted frequency range in which to seek
the eigen-modes by using the parameters:
f 0 = the center of the cyclic frequency range, known as the shift

frequency.
f max = the radius of the cyclic frequency range, known as the

cutoff frequency.
The program will only seek modes with frequencies f that satisfy
Equation 33-3:
f − f 0 ≤ f max Eqn. 33-3
33 - 4 Modal Analysis
The default value of f max = 0 does not restrict the frequency

range of the modes.
Modes are found in order of increasing distance of frequency

from the shift. This continues until the cutoff is reached, the re-
quested number of modes is found, or the number of mass de-
grees of freedom is reached.
A stable structure will possess all positive natural frequencies.

When performing a seismic analysis and most other dynamic
analyses, the lower-frequency modes are usually of most interest.
It is then appropriate to use the default shift of zero, resulting in
the lowest-frequency modes of the structure being calculated. If
the shift is not zero, response-spectrum and time-history analyses
may be performed; however, linear static and initial P-Delta
analyses are not allowed.
33
If the dynamic loading is known to be of high frequency, such as
that caused by vibrating machinery, it may be most efficient to
use a positive shift near the center of the frequency range of the
loading.
A structure that is unstable when unloaded will have some

modes with zero frequency. These modes may correspond to
rigid-body motion of an inadequately supported structure, or to
mechanisms that may be present within the structure. It is not
possible to compute the static response of such a structure. How-
ever, by using a small negative shift, the lowest-frequency vi-
bration modes of the structure, including the zero-frequency in-
stability modes, can be found. This does require some mass to be
present that is activated by each instability mode. Thus the fre-
quency shift may occasionally be helpful in debugging an unsta-
ble structure.
A structure that has buckled under P-Delta load will have some
modes with zero or negative frequency. During equation solu-
tion, the number of frequencies less than the shift is determined
and printed in the log file. If you are using a zero or negative
shift and the program detects a negative-frequency mode, it will
stop the analysis since the results will be meaningless. If you use
a positive shift, the program will permit negative frequencies to
be found; however, subsequent static and dynamic results are
still meaningless.
When using a frequency shift, the stiffness matrix is modified by

subtracting from it the mass matrix multiplied by ω 0 , where
2
ω 0 = 2πf 0 . If the shift is very near a natural frequency of the

structure, the solution becomes unstable and will be halted dur-
ing equation solution. Run the analysis again using a slightly dif-
ferent shift frequency.
The circular frequency, ω , of a mode is determined from the

shifted eigenvalue, µ , as shown in Equation 33-4:
ω = µ + ω02 Eqn. 33-4
Convergence Tolerance
33 ETABS solves for the eigenvalue-eigenvectors pairs using an ac-
celerated subspace iteration algorithm. During the solution
phase, the program prints the approximate eigenvalues after each
iteration. As the eigenvectors converge they are removed from
the subspace and new approximate vectors are introduced. For
details of the algorithm, see Wilson and Tetsuji (1983).
You may specify the relative convergence tolerance, ε , to con-

trol the solution; the default value is ε = 10 −6 . The iteration for
a particular mode will continue until the relative change in the
eigenvalue between successive iterations is less than 2ε , i.e.,
until:
1 µ i +1 − µ i
≤ε Eqn. 33-5
2 µ i +1
where µ is the eigenvalue relative to the frequency shift, and i

and i+1 denote successive iteration numbers.
In the usual case where the frequency shift is zero, the test for
convergence becomes approximately the same as:
Ti +1 − Ti f i +1 − f i
≤ ε or ≤ε Eqn. 33-6
Ti +1 f i +1
provided that the difference between the two iterations is small.
Note that the error in the eigenvectors will generally be larger

than the error in the eigenvalues. The relative error in the global
force balance for a given mode gives a measure of the error in
the eigenvector. This error can usually be reduced by using a
smaller value of convergence tolerance, at the expense of more
computation time.
Residual Mass Modes 33

Note: Residual-mass (missing-mass) modes may be calculated as an
option for eigen-analysis. The purpose is to try to approximate
In most analy-
high-frequency behavior when the mass participation ratio for a
ses you would
probably not
given direction of acceleration load is less than 100%.
consider resid-
ual mass For a given acceleration load, say m ux (see the section titled Ac-
modes. How- celeration Loads later in this chapter), the missing mass load is
ever, an exam- that portion of the load which cannot be represented by the eigen
ple where you modes that have been found. The static displacement corre-
might consider sponding to this missing-mass load is the missing mass mode.
using residual
One missing mass mode can be calculated for each direction of
mass modes is
in a building translational acceleration. If the cumulative mass participation
with very stiff ratio for a given direction of acceleration is 100%, then there is
shear walls at no missing mass and the missing mass mode is not calculated.
the base where
you do not pick A period is assigned to each missing-mass mode that is calcu-
up 100% (or lated by the standard Rayleigh quotient method. Typically this
close to it) mass period will be some average of all the missing eigen-modes that
participation in are excited by the acceleration loads. A mass participation ratio
your modes. will be computed for the missing-mass modes. In general, the
cumulative mass participation ratios, including the missing-mass
modes, will still not be 100%, since the missing-mass modes are
only static approximations to the high-frequency response, not
the true dynamic modes.
When present, residual-mass modes are automatically included

in Response-spectrum and Time-history analyses. For Ritz
analysis, residual mass modes are always included automatically
for all starting load vectors.
Ritz-Vector Analysis
Research has indicated that the natural free-vibration mode
shapes are not the best basis for a mode-superposition analysis of
structures subjected to dynamic loads. It has been demonstrated
(Wilson, Yuan, and Dickens, 1982) that dynamic analyses based
on load-dependent Ritz vectors yield more accurate results than
the use of the same number of natural mode shapes.
The reason the Ritz vectors yield excellent results is that they are
33 generated by taking into account the spatial distribution of the
dynamic loading, whereas the direct use of the natural mode
shapes neglects this very important information.
Note: In addition, the Ritz-vector algorithm automatically includes the
It has been advantages of the proven numerical techniques of static conden-
demonstrated sation, Guyan reduction, and static correction due to higher-
that dynamic mode truncation.
analyses based
on load- The spatial distribution of the dynamic load vector serves as a
dependent ritz- starting load vector to initiate the procedure. The first Ritz
vectors yield vector is the static displacement vector corresponding to the
more accurate starting load vector. The remaining vectors are generated from a
results than the recurrence relationship in which the mass matrix is multiplied by
use of the same the previously obtained Ritz vector and used as the load vector
number of
for the next static solution. Each static solution is called a gen-
natural mode
shapes. eration cycle.
When the dynamic load is made up of several independent spa-

tial distributions, each of these may serve as a starting load vec-
tor to generate a set of Ritz vectors. Each generation cycle cre-
ates as many Ritz vectors as there are starting load vectors. If a
generated Ritz vector is redundant or does not excite any mass
degrees of freedom, it is discarded and the corresponding starting
load vector is removed from all subsequent generation cycles.
Standard eigen-solution techniques are used to orthogonalize the

set of generated Ritz vectors, resulting in a final set of Ritz-
vector modes. Each Ritz-vector mode consists of a mode shape
and frequency. The full set of Ritz-vector modes can be used as a
basis to represent the dynamic displacement of the structure.
When a sufficient number of Ritz-vector Modes have been

found, some of them may closely approximate natural mode
shapes and frequencies. In general, however, Ritz-vector Modes
do not represent the intrinsic characteristics of the structure in
the same way the natural Modes do. The Ritz-vector modes are
biased by the starting load vectors.
You may specify the number of modes to be found and the

starting load vectors to be used. These parameters are described
in the following subtopics.
33
Number of Modes
You may specify the total number of modes, N, to be found. The
total number of modes actually found, n, is limited by:
• The number of modes requested, N.
• The number of mass degrees of freedom present in the

model.
• The number of natural free-vibration modes that are ex-

cited by the starting load vectors (some additional natu-
ral modes may creep in due to numerical noise).
A mass degree of freedom is any active degree of freedom that

possesses translational mass or rotational mass moment of iner-
tia. The mass may have been assigned directly to the joint or
may come from connected elements.
Only the modes that are actually found will be available for any
subsequent response-spectrum or time-history analysis process-
ing.
Starting Load Vectors

You may specify any number of starting load vectors. Each
starting load vector may be one of the following:
• An Acceleration Load in the global X, Y, or Z direction.
• A static load case.
• A built-in nonlinear deformation load, as described be-

low.
For response-spectrum analysis, only the acceleration loads are

needed. For time-history analysis, one starting load vector is
needed for each load case or acceleration load that is used in any
time-history case.
33 If nonlinear time-history analysis is to be performed, an addi-
tional starting load vector is needed for each independent non-
linear deformation, i.e., each nonlinear degree of freedom in the
link elements. You may specify that the program use the built-in
nonlinear deformation loads, or you may define your own load
cases for this purpose.
If you define your own starting load vectors, do the following for
each nonlinear deformation:
• Explicitly define a static load case that consists of a set

of self-equilibrating forces that activates the desired
nonlinear deformation
• Specify that load case as a starting load vector
The number of such load cases required is equal to the number of

independent nonlinear deformations in the model.
If several link elements act together, you may be able to use

fewer starting load vectors. For example, suppose the horizontal
motion of several base isolators are coupled with a diaphragm.
Only three starting load vectors acting on the diaphragm are re-
quired: two perpendicular horizontal loads and one moment
about the vertical axis. Independent load cases may still be re-
quired to represent any vertical motions or rotations about the
horizontal axes for these isolators.
It is strongly recommended that mass (or mass moment of iner-

tia) be present at every degree of freedom that is loaded by a
starting load vector. This is automatic for acceleration loads,
since the load is caused by mass. If a static load case or nonlinear
deformation load acts on a non-mass degree of freedom, the pro-
gram issues a warning. Such starting load vectors may generate
inaccurate Ritz vectors, or even no Ritz vectors at all.
Generally, the more starting load vectors used, the more Ritz
vectors must be requested to cover the same frequency range.
Thus including unnecessary starting load vectors is not recom-
mended.
In each generation cycle, Ritz vectors are found in the order in

which the starting load vectors are specified. In the last genera-
tion cycle, only as many Ritz vectors will be found as required to
reach the total number of modes, N. For this reason, the most 33
important starting load vectors should be specified first, espe-
cially if the number of starting load vectors is not much smaller
than the total number of modes.
Acceleration Loads
The program automatically computes six acceleration loads that
act on the structure, three due to unit translational accelerations
in each of the three global directions, and three due to unit rota-
tional accelerations about the global axes at the global origin.
The loads are determined by d’Alembert’s principal, and are de-
noted m ux , m uy , m uz , m rx , m ry , and m rz , respectively.
The translational loads are used for applying ground accelera-

tions in response-spectrum and time-history analyses, and can be
used as starting load vectors for Ritz-vector analysis. The trans-
lational and rotational loads are used for calculating modal par-
ticipation measures. See the section titled "Building Modal Info"
in Chapter 41 for more information.
Acceleration Loads 33 - 11
The applied ground acceleration is assumed to be uniform, hence

it is the same at the base of each restraint, spring, or grounded
link element. The response-spectrum and time-history displace-
ments resulting from acceleration loads are always relative to the
ground motion.
Note: The acceleration loads are computed for each joint and element
and summed over the whole structure. The translational accel-
The transla-
eration loads for the joints are simply equal to the negative of the
tional Accel-
eration loads
joint translational masses in the joint local coordinate system.
mux, muy and muz These loads are transformed to the global coordinate system. The
are used for acceleration loads for the elements are the same in each direction
applying and are equal to the negative of the element masses.
ground accel-
erations in re- Rotational accelerations cause rotational loads at each joint equal
sponse- to the negative of the rotational inertia at that joint. Translational
33 spectrum and
time-history
loads are also created at the joints and are equal to the negative
of the translational mass times the translational acceleration at
analyses, and the joint caused by rotation about the origin.
can be used as
starting load The acceleration loads can be transformed into any coordinate
vectors for Ritz- system. In the global system, the acceleration loads along the
vector analysis. positive X, Y, and Z axes are denoted UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY,
and RZ, respectively. In a local coordinate system defined for a
response-spectrum or time-history analysis, the acceleration
loads along the positive local 1, 2, and 3 axes are denoted U1,
U2, U3, R1, R2, and R3, respectively.
Response Spectrum Analysis

The dynamic equilibrium equations associated with the response
of a structure to ground motion are given by Equation 33-7:
Ku(t ) + Cu (t ) + Mu (t ) =

m x ugx (t ) + m y ugy (t ) + m z ugz (t ) Eqn. 33-7
where K is the stiffness matrix; C is the damping matrix; M is

the diagonal mass matrix; u , u , and u are the relative dis-
placements, velocities, and accelerations of the structure with re-
spect to the ground; m x , m y , and m z are the unit acceleration
33 - 12 Response Spectrum Analysis

loads in the three directions; and ugx , ugy , and ugz are the com-
ponents of uniform ground acceleration as functions of time.
Response-spectrum analysis seeks the likely maximum response

to these equations rather than the full time history. The earth-
quake ground acceleration in each direction is given as a digit-
ized response-spectrum curve of pseudo-spectral acceleration re-
sponse versus period of the structure.
Even though accelerations may be specified in three directions,

only a single, positive result is produced for each response quan-
tity. The response quantities may be displacements, forces, or
stresses. Each computed result represents a statistical measure of
the likely maximum magnitude for that response quantity. The
actual response can be expected to vary within a range from this
positive value to its negative.
33
No correspondence between two different response quantities is
available. No information is available as to when this extreme
value occurs during the seismic loading, or as to what the values
of other response quantities are at that time.
Response-spectrum analysis is performed using mode superposi-

tion (Wilson and Button, 1982). Modes may have been com-
puted using eigenvector analysis or Ritz-vector analysis. Ritz
vectors are recommended since they give more accurate results
for the same number of modes.
The effect of an initial P-Delta analysis is automatically included

in each response-spectrum case since it is included in all of the
modes.
See the section titled "Response Spectrum Cases" in Chapter 11

Response Spectrum Analysis 33 - 13

Time History Analysis

Time-history analysis is used to determine the dynamic response
of a structure to arbitrary loading. The dynamic equilibrium
equations to be solved are given by Equation 33-8:
Ku(t ) + Cu (t ) + Mu
(t ) = r (t ) Eqn. 33-8
where K is the stiffness matrix; C is the damping matrix; M is

the diagonal mass matrix; u , u , and u are the displacements,
velocities, and accelerations of the structure; and r is the applied
load. If the load includes ground acceleration, the displacements,
velocities, and accelerations are relative to this ground motion.
Any number of time-history cases can be performed in a single

33 execution of the program. Each case can differ in the load ap-
plied and in the type of analysis to be performed.
Three types of time-history analysis are available:
• Linear transient: The structure starts with zero initial

conditions or with the conditions at the end of a previous
linear transient time-history case that you specify. All
elements are assumed to behave linearly for the duration
of the analysis.
• Periodic: The initial conditions are adjusted to be equal

to those at the end of the period of analysis. All elements
are assumed to behave linearly for the duration of the
analysis.
• Nonlinear transient: The structure starts with zero ini-

tial conditions or with the conditions at the end of a pre-
vious nonlinear transient time-history case that you
specify. The link elements may exhibit nonlinear be-
havior during the analysis. All other elements behave
linearly.
The effect of an initial P-Delta analysis is automatically included

in each time-history case since it is included in all of the modes
used to solve the time-history case.
33 - 14 Time History Analysis

Mode Superposition
The standard mode-superposition method of response analysis is
used by the program to solve the dynamic equilibrium equations
of motion for the complete structure. The modes used can be the
eigenvector or the load-dependent Ritz-vector modes.
If all of the time-history spatial load vectors are used as starting

load vectors for Ritz-vector analysis, then the Ritz vectors will
always produce more accurate results than if the same number of
eigenvectors is used.
It is especially important to use Ritz vectors when perform-

ing nonlinear time-history analysis. In this case, be sure to in-
clude the nonlinear link deformation loads as starting load vec-
tors and substantially increase the number of modes requested.
It is up to you to determine if you are using enough modes to 33

adequately represent the time-history response to the applied
load. You should check the load participation ratios for the ap-
plied loads and the global force balance for each mode.
Ultimately, the best check is to examine the displacements,

forces, and stresses obtained with increasing numbers of modes
until convergence is obtained. Global quantities, such as roof
displacement and base shear will usually converge with a few
modes. Local, “stiff” quantities, such as forces near vibrating
machinery, or the forces near a nonlinear gap or damper element,
may require many more modes to converge.
Modal Damping
The damping in the structure is modeled using modal damping,
also known as proportional or classical damping. The damping in
mode i may be specified using the parameter ξ i , which is meas-
ured as a fraction of critical damping. The damping value for
each mode must satisfy Equation 33-9:
0 ≤ ξi < 1 Eqn. 33-9
Time History Analysis 33 - 15

For a nonlinear transient analysis, this is the only source of mo-

dal damping. See the subsection titled “Nonlinear Time-History
Analysis” below for important considerations about using modal
damping with nonlinear transient analysis.
For linear transient and periodic analyses, additional modal

damping may come from effective-damping coefficients that
have been specified for link elements in the model. These effec-
tive damping values are converted to modal damping ratios as-
suming proportional damping, i.e., by ignoring any modal cross-
coupling terms. These effective modal-damping values will gen-
erally be different for each mode, depending upon how much de-
formation each mode causes in the link elements.
Only effective damping, not the actual damping in the link ele-
ments, affects the linear time-history results. The total damping
33 ratio for each mode is the sum of these two sources. The pro-
gram automatically makes sure that the total is less than one.
Time Steps
For linear transient and periodic analysis, closed-form integra-
tion of the modal equations is used to compute the response, as-
suming linear variation of the time functions between the input
data time points. Therefore, numerical instability problems are
never encountered, and the time increment may be any sampling
value that is deemed fine enough to capture the maximum re-
sponse values. One-tenth of the time period of the highest mode
is usually recommended; however, a larger value may give an
equally accurate sampling if the contribution of the higher modes
is small.
For nonlinear transient analysis, closed-form integration is again

used to compute the response, with the forces from the nonlinear
link elements applied to the right-hand side of the dynamic mo-
dal equilibrium equations. Since these forces depend upon the
dynamic response, the solution is iterated at each time step until
the nonlinear forces converge. The accuracy of the results may
depend upon the size of the time step, improving with decreasing
time step. See subtopic “Nonlinear Time-History Analysis” be-
low for more information.
33 - 16 Time History Analysis

Nonlinear Time-History Analysis

The method of nonlinear time-history analysis used in ETABS is
an extension of the Fast Nonlinear Analysis (FNA) method de-
veloped by Wilson (Ibrahimbegovic and Wilson, 1989; Wilson,
1993). The method is extremely efficient and is designed to be
used for structural systems which are primarily linear elastic, but
which have a limited number of predefined nonlinear elements.
In ETABS, all nonlinearity is restricted to the nonlinear link
elements.
The FNA method uses modal analysis with iteration to correct

for the coupling between modes due to the nonlinear elements.
This method is highly accurate when used with appropriate Ritz-
vector modes, and has advantages over traditional time-stepping
methods in terms of speed and better control over damping and
higher-mode effects. 33
In order to get the best results, the following points should be
kept in mind:
• It is strongly recommended that you use Ritz vectors

rather than eigenvectors for the modal analysis.
• The Ritz starting load vectors should include all the

static loads and/or acceleration loads used to define the
time-history cases, plus the nonlinear deformation loads
from the link elements.
• The total number of modes requested should be at least

one or two modes per nonlinear degree of freedom, plus
the number of modes that you would normally use for a
similar linear time-history analysis. Check that you have
enough modes by looking at your results using increas-
ing numbers of modes.
• The effective stiffness properties for the nonlinear link

elements should not affect the analysis results, except as
described below for modal damping. Effective stiffness
values may affect the efficiency of nonlinear time-
history analysis. As a guide, choose the effective stiff-
ness to be equal to the actual stiffness, except use zero or
Time History Analysis 33 - 17

small effective stiffness for dampers, and for gaps or

hooks that are normally open.
• Modal damping is computed with respect to the stiffness

matrix used for the modal analysis, which includes the
effective stiffness from the nonlinear elements. If non-
zero modal damping is to be used, then the effective
stiffness specified for these elements is important. Large
values of effective stiffness may result in unrealistically
large values of energy dissipation. For more realistic
modeling, use small values of modal damping and use
explicit nonlinear dampers or plasticity elements to
model energy dissipation.
• The effective damping properties for the nonlinear link

elements are not used for nonlinear time-history analy-
33 sis.
• Mass and/or mass moments of inertia should be present

at all nonlinear degrees of freedom.
The program uses an automatic sub-stepping algorithm to choose

the best time steps for integrating the nonlinear modal equations
of motion. In general, the results you obtain should be insensitive
to the size of the output time step that you choose. However, us-
ing large time steps may make it difficult to see short-duration
behavior, such as the closing of gaps, even though the solution
does adequately account for such behavior.
Initial P-Delta Analysis

The initial P-Delta analysis option accounts for the effect of a
large compressive or tensile load upon the transverse stiffness of
members in the structure. Compression reduces lateral stiffness,
and tension stiffens it. This is a type of geometric nonlinearity
known as the P-Delta effect. Initial P-Delta analysis does not in-
clude large-strain or large-rotation effects.
33 - 18 Initial P-Delta Analysis

This option is particularly useful for considering the effect of

Note:
gravity loads upon the lateral stiffness of building structures, as
The P-Delta required by certain design codes (ACI 1999; AISC 1994). Other
option is useful applications are possible.
for considering
the effect of Initial P-Delta analysis in ETABS considers the P-Delta effect of
gravity loads a single loaded state upon the structure. There are two ways to
upon the lateral specify this load:
stiffness of
building struc-
• As a specified combination of static load cases; this is
tures, as re-
quired by cer-
called the P-Delta load combination. For example, this
tain design may be the sum of a dead load case plus a fraction of a
codes live load case. This approach requires an iterative solu-
tion to determine the P-Delta effect upon the structure.
• As a story-by-story load upon the structure computed

automatically from the mass at each level. This approach
is approximate, but does not require an iterative solution.
33
When you request initial P-Delta analysis, it is performed before
all linear-static, modal, response-spectrum, and time-history
analyses in the same analysis run. The initial P-Delta analysis es-
sentially modifies the characteristics of the structure, affecting
the results of all subsequent analyses performed.
As an important exception, initial P-Delta analysis does NOT

affect nonlinear-static analysis. Nonlinear static analyses con-
sider the P-Delta effect separately, if requested.
Because the load causing the P-Delta effect is the same for all
linear analysis cases, their results may be superposed in load
combinations.
Initial P-Delta analysis under a P-delta load combination is it-

erative in nature, and may considerably increase computation
time. Including initial P-Delta analysis may make interpretation
of the results more difficult. It is strongly recommended that you
perform a preliminary linear analysis to check your model for
correctness before using initial P-Delta analysis.
Initial P-Delta Analysis 33 - 19

Iterative Solution
When you specify a P-Delta load combination, the following pa-
rameters may also be specified to control the iterative solution:
Note: • Maximum Number of Iterations: This is used to pre-

vent excessive computational time, since each iteration
P-Delta analy-
sis based on
requires about as much computational effort as a linear
specified load static analysis. The default is one.
cases is an it-
erative analy- • Relative Displacement Convergence Tolerance: This
sis. It may take item measures convergence. The default value is 0.001.
several itera- If the relative change in displacement from one iteration
tions to achieve to the next is less than the tolerance, then no further it-
convergence. erations are performed. The relative change in displace-
ment is defined as the ratio of the maximum change in
33 displacement to the largest displacement in either itera-
tion. Note that rotations and translations are treated
equally.
If convergence has not been obtained after the maximum number

of iterations has been performed, then the results of the analysis
may be meaningless, and they should be viewed with great
skepticism. Failure to converge may be due to several causes:
• Too few iterations were permitted. A reasonable number

is usually 2 to 5, although more may be required, de-
pending on the particular problem at hand.
• A convergence tolerance that is too small is used. A rea-

sonable value depends on the particular problem. Be-
ware, however, that using a value that is too large may
result in convergence to meaningless results.
• The structure is near buckling. The structure should be

stiffened against buckling, or the magnitude of the P-
Delta load combination reduced.
33 - 20 Initial P-Delta Analysis

Buckling
If compressive P-Delta axial forces are present and are large
enough, the structure may buckle. Local buckling of individual
members or global buckling of the whole structure are both pos-
sible. The program makes no distinction between local and
global buckling.
If the program detects that buckling has occurred, the analysis is

terminated and no results are produced. This is because the
analysis of a structure that has buckled requires consideration of
large-displacement effects that are only considered during non-
linear static analysis.
Initial P-Delta analysis may be used to estimate buckling loads

by performing a series of analyses, each time increasing the
magnitude of the P-Delta load combination, until buckling is 33
detected. The relative contributions from each static load case to
the P-delta load combination must be kept the same, increasing
all load case scale factors by the same amount between runs.
It is important to understand that there is no single buckling load

for a structure. Rather, there is a different buckling load corre-
sponding to each spatial distribution of loads. If buckling of the
structure is a concern under various loading situations, the buck-
ling load should be estimated separately for each situation, as de-
scribed above, by starting with different P-Delta load combina-
tions.
Practical Application
For most building structures, especially tall buildings, the P-
Delta effect of most concern occurs in the columns due to grav-
ity load, including dead and live load. The column axial forces
are compressive, making the structure more flexible against lat-
eral loads.
Building codes (ACI 1999; AISC 1994) normally recognize two

types of P-Delta effects: the first due to the overall sway of the
structure and the second due to the deformation of the member
between its ends. The former effect is often significant; it can be
accounted for fairly accurately by considering the total vertical
load at a story level, which is due to gravity loads and is unaf-
Initial P-Delta Analysis 33 - 21

fected by any lateral loads. The latter effect is significant only in

very slender columns or columns bent in single curvature (not
the usual case); this requires consideration of axial forces in the
members due to both gravity and lateral loads.
ETABS can analyze both of these P-Delta effects. However, it is

recommended that the former effect be accounted for in the
analysis, and the latter effect be accounted for in design by using
the applicable building-code moment-magnification factors
(White and Hajjar 1991). This is how the design checks in
ETABS work.
Nonlinear Static Analysis

Nonlinear static analysis in ETABS offers a wide variety of ca-
33 pabilities, including:
• Material nonlinearity in beams and columns.
• Nonlinear gap, hook, and plasticity behavior in links.
• Geometric nonlinearity, including large deflections and

P-Delta effects.
• Incremental construction analysis.
• Static pushover analysis.
Multiple static analysis cases can be defined. For each case, the
structure may start with zero initial conditions or with the condi-
tions at the end of a previous nonlinear static case that you spec-
ify.
Each analysis case considers a single pattern of loading, speci-

fied as a linear combination of static load cases, acceleration
loads, and/or vibration mode shapes. Changing patterns of load
are modeled by using a sequence of nonlinear static cases.
33 - 22 Nonlinear Static Analysis

Tip: Loads are applied incrementally within an analysis case. The in-
cremental step size is adjusted automatically to account for sig-
You can per-
nificant changes in geometry, or for yielding, gapping, and other
form incre-
mental con-
material nonlinearities. An event-to-event type strategy is used
struction analy- with iteration to correct for equilibrium errors; the stiffness ma-
sis using the trix is re-assembled and solved as necessary.
nonlinear static
analysis capa- The load pattern may be applied under load or displacement
bility in the control. Load control is used to apply a known magnitude of
nonlinear ver- load, such as would be required for gravity load. Displacement
sion of ETABS. control applies the load with a variable magnitude to achieve a
specified displacement at a control point in the structure. This
could be used to push a structure laterally to the point of yielding
or collapse. The magnitude of the load required to do this is un-
known, and may increase at first and then later decrease.
Each nonlinear static case may apply to the whole structure or to 33

any part of it. You may specify changes to the structure within a
case or between subsequent cases. Each portion of a nonlinear
case that applies to a fixed part of the structure is called a stage.
When elements are added from one stage to the next, their con-
tribution to the stiffness, mass, and the specified load pattern are
added to the structure. When elements are removed, the stiffness
and mass are removed, and all loads that were carried by the re-
moved part of the structure are applied to the remaining struc-
ture. These features allow you to perform incremental analysis.
Nonlinear static analysis is independent of all other analysis

cases, except that previously calculated mode shapes may be
used to define the load pattern.
Initial P-Delta analysis has no affect on nonlinear static cases. P-

Delta effects are considered separately within each nonlinear
static case, if requested. Unlike initial P-Delta analysis where the
P-Delta effect is evaluated under a constant load, the P-Delta ef-
fect in nonlinear static analysis may vary with each incremental
change in the load acting on the structure.
The results of nonlinear static cases should not normally be

added together with each other or with other types of analysis
cases. The exception to this would be cases that only include in-
cremental construction, but not geometric or material nonlinear-
ity. If the nonlinear effects of additive loads are required, you
Nonlinear Static Analysis 33 - 23

should define nonlinear static cases that combine the loads in the
expected sequence. In all situations, you can use nonlinear static
cases for design, and they can be included in load combinations
of envelope type.
33
33 - 24 Nonlinear Static Analysis

Chapter 34
34
Point Object Output Conventions
Overview
This chapter introduces the types of output for point objects and
the sign conventions used to report the output. Recall that the
point object local 1, 2 and 3 axes are in the same direction as the
global X, Y and Z axes, respectively, always.
The following subsections discuss the sign conventions for vari-

ous types of point object output.
Displacements
Except for point objects with panel zone assignments, point ob-
ject displacements are reported with respect to the global coordi-
nate system. Positive translational displacements are in the same
direction as the positive global axes. The sense of positive rota-
tions can be determined using the right hand rule. See the section
titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for information on
the right-hand rule.
34 - 1
Figure 34-1:
Positive support re- MZ
action forces MY
FZ FY
MX FX FX MX
Z FY
Y
FZ
MY
MZ
X
a) Column Supported b) Positive Reaction Forces b) Positive Reaction Forces
at Base Acting on Bottom of Column Acting on Support (Ground)
See the subsection below titled panel zone displacements for

point objects that have panel zone assignments.
34
Support Reactions
Support reactions are reported as forces acting on the elements
Note:
connected to the support. The reaction forces are reported with
With the excep- respect to the global coordinate system. Positive support reac-
tion of point tions forces act in the same direction as the positive global axes.
object dis- The sense of positive moments can be determined using the right
placements hand rule. See the section titled “The Right Hand Rule” in
when panel
Chapter 23 for information on the right-hand rule.
zones are as-
signed to a
As an example consider a building column that is supporting
point object, all
point object
gravity load. This gravity load acts in a downward direction.
output is re- Thus the force imposed on the bottom of the column acts in an
ported with upward direction. This is the reaction force reported by ETABS.
respect to the Since the upward force is in the same direction as the positive
global coordi- global Z-axis the reaction is reported as a positive value acting in
nate system. the Z direction.
Figure 34-1 illustrates positive support reaction forces.
34 - 2 Support Reactions
Chapter 34 - Point Object Output Conventions
Spring Forces
Spring forces are reported as forces acting on the elements con-
nected to the support. They are reported with respect to the
global coordinate system. Positive spring forces act in the same
direction as the positive global axes. The sense of positive mo-
ments can be determined using the right hand rule. See the sec-
tion titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for information
on the right-hand rule.
See the example discussed in the subsection above titled “Sup-

port Reactions” for additional information.
Grounded Link Element Forces

Note:
Grounded link element forces (forces in link elements that are
See Chapter 37
for output con-
assigned to point objects, not including panel zones) are de- 34
scribed in Chapter 37. Chapter 37 also discusses output conven-
ventions related tions for link elements that are assigned to line objects.
to link ele-
ments.
Panel Zone Output

Internally in the analysis model ETABS creates two joints at lo-
cations where panel zones are assigned to point objects. If the
panel zone is between columns and a beams then one of the
joints is connected to the columns and one is connected to the
beams. Column-brace and brace-beam panel zones are similar.
ETABS reports panel zone displacements, panel zone internal

deformations and panel zone internal forces. Each of these is de-
scribed in the three subsections below. Do not confuse panel
zone displacements and internal deformations. They are different
as described below.
Panel Zone Displacements

ETABS reports displacements for a point object with a panel
zone assignment as follows:
• Beam-Column Connectivity: Displacements are re-

ported for the joint connected to the column.
Spring Forces 34 - 3
• Beam-Brace Connectivity: Displacements are reported

for the joint connected to the beam.
• Brace-Column Connectivity: Displacements are re-

ported for the joint connected to the column.
Panel zone displacements are reported in the global coordinate

system. Positive translational displacements are in the same di-
rection as the positive global axes. The sense of positive rota-
tions can be determined using the right hand rule. See the section
titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for information on
the right-hand rule.
Panel Zone Internal Deformations

Panel zone internal deformations are calculated as described for
link element internal deformations in the section titled "Link
34 Element Internal Deformations" in Chapter 37. They are reported
in the panel zone local coordinate system. See the subsection ti-
tled "Local 2-Axis" under the section titled "Panel Zone As-
Note:
signments to Point Objects" in Chapter 14 for discussion of the
Panel zone in- panel zone local coordinate system. The following conventions
ternal forces are used by ETABS:
and deforma-
tions are re- • Beam-Column Connectivity: The i-end of the panel
ported in the zone is the joint that is connected to the columns. The j-
panel zone lo-
end of the panel zone is the joint that is connected to the
cal coordinate
system. All beams.
other point ob-
ject output is • Beam-Brace Connectivity: The i-end of the panel zone
reported in the is the joint that is connected to the beams. The j-end of
global coordi- the panel zone is the joint that is connected to the braces.
nate system.
• Brace-Column Connectivity: The i-end of the panel
zone is the joint that is connected to the columns. The j-
end of the panel zone is the joint that is connected to the
braces.
34 - 4 Panel Zone Output

Chapter 34 - Point Object Output Conventions
Panel Zone Internal Forces

The panel zone internal forces give you a sense of how much
unbalanced load is transferred through the panel zone. For ex-
ample, in a panel zone with beam-column connectivity the inter-
nal forces tell you how much unbalanced moment is transferred
from the beams to the columns.
Panel zone internal forces are calculated as described for link

element internal forces in the section titled "Link Element Inter-
nal Forces" in Chapter 37. Since panel zone elements are zero
length elements M2 = M2b and M3 = M3b. The panel zone inter-
nal forces are reported in the panel zone local coordinate system.
34
Panel Zone Output 34 - 5

Chapter 35
Frame Element Output Conventions 35
General
This chapter describes the types of output for frame elements and
the sign conventions used to report the output. To fully compre-
Note: hend these output conventions it is important that you have a
Refer to the clear understanding of the local coordinate system for frame
section titled elements. Refer to the section titled "Default Line Object Local
"Default Line Axes" in Chapter 24 for a discussion of the frame element local
Object Local axes. Note that the line object and frame element local axes are
Axes" in Chap- the same.
ter 24 for a
discussion of Output for frame elements is reported as frame element internal
the frame ele- forces. Tabulated and printed output data is available for frame
ment local axes. elements from the following sources:
• Frame element output data tabulated onscreen can be

viewed using the Display menu > Set Output Table
Mode command. See the section titled “Output Table
Mode” in Chapter 16 for additional information.
35 - 1
• Frame element output data tabulated in a Microsoft Ac-

cess database file can be obtained using the File menu >
Export > Save Input/Output as Access Database File
command. See the bullet item labeled “Save In-
put/Output as an Access database file” in the section
titled “Exporting Files” in Chapter 8 for additional in-
formation.
• Frame element output data can be printed to a printer or

to a text file using the File menu > Print Tables >
Analysis Output command. See the subsection titled
“Printing Text Input and Output Tables” under the sec-
tion titled “Printing from ETABS” in Chapter 8 for ad-
ditional information.
The tabulated and printed data for frame elements provides out-
put at every output station along the beam. See the section titled
“Frame Output Station Assignments to Line Objects” in Chapter
35 14 for additional information on output stations.
In addition to the tabulated and printed data, frame element out-

put can be displayed on your ETABS model using the Display
menu > Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram > Frame/Pier/
Spandrel Forces command. See the subsection titled “Frame
Element, Pier and Spandrel Forces” under the section titled
“Member Force and Stress Diagrams” in Chapter 16 for addi-
tional information.
The remaining section in this chapter discusses frame element

internal force output.
Frame Element Internal Forces

The frame element internal forces are:
• P, the axial force
• V2, the shear force in the 1-2 plane
• T, the axial torque (about the 1-axis)
35 - 2 Frame Element Internal Forces

Chapter 35 - Frame Element Output Conventions
• M2, the bending moment in the 1-3 plane (about the 2-

axis)

axis)
These internal forces and moments are present at every cross

section along the length of the frame element.
For each load case and load combination the frame element in-
ternal forces and moments are computed and reported at each
frame element output station. See the subsection titled “Frame
Output Station Assignments to Line Objects” in Chapter 14 for a
description of and additional information on output stations.
In frame element output displayed in a tabular form, either on the

computer screen, printed to a printer or printed to a file, the lo-
cations of the output stations are identified by the absolute dis-
Note:
Frame element
tance to the station measured from the i-end of the element.
35
internal forces The sign convention for frame element internal forces is illus-
are reported at trated in Figure 35-1. This sign convention can be described by
each output defining the concept of positive and negative faces of an ele-
station along ment. Consider a section cut through the element in the 2-3
the frame ele- plane. At this section the positive 1 face is the face whose out-
ment. See the ward normal (arrow that is perpendicular to the section and
subsection ti- pointing away from the section) is in the positive local 1 direc-
tled “Frame
tion. At this same section the negative one face is one whose
Output Station
Assignments to outward normal is in the negative local 1 direction. The positive
Line Objects” 2 and 3 faces are those faces with outward normals in the posi-
in Chapter 14 tive local 2 and 3 directions, respectively, from the neutral axis.
for discussion Note the following about the frame element internal forces:
of output sta-
tions • Positive internal forces (P, V2 and V3) and positive axial
torque (T) acting on a positive 1 face are oriented in the
positive direction of the corresponding element local co-
ordinate axis. For example, when V2 acting on a positive
1 face is positive it is oriented in the direction of the
positive local 2-axis.
Frame Element Internal Forces 35 - 3

Axis 1
P
Axis 2 T
End j
Axis 3
P End i
T
a. Positive Axial Force and Torque
V2
Compression face Axis 1
Axis 2 Axis 1
Axis 2
M3
M2 V3
End j
Tension face
End j
M3 Axis 3
Compression face
35 End i
V3
M2
Axis 3
V2 Tension face
End i
b. Positive Moment and Shear in the 1-2 Plane c. Positive Moment and Shear in the 1-3 Plane
(Above)
• Positive internal forces (P, V2 and V3) and positive axial
Figure 35-1:
Sign convention for torque (T) acting on a negative 1 face are oriented in the
frame element inter- negative direction of the corresponding element local
nal forces coordinate axis. For example, when V2 acting on a
negative 1 face is positive it is oriented in the direction
of the negative local 2-axis.
• Positive M2 bending moments cause compression on the

positive 3 face and tension on the negative 3 face.
• Positive M3 bending moments cause compression on the

positive 2 face and tension on the negative 2 face.
• When end offsets along the length of the frame element

are present, the internal forces and moments are output
at the faces of the supports rather than the ends of the
element. No output is produced within the end offset
length.
35 - 4 Frame Element Internal Forces

Chapter 35 - Frame Element Output Conventions
• The right hand rule applies in Figure 35-1 for determin-

ing the sense of the moments shown by the double ar-
rows. See the section titled “The Right Hand Rule” in
Chapter 23 for information on the right-hand rule.
35
Frame Element Internal Forces 35 - 5

Chapter 36
Shell Element Output Conventions 36
General
This chapter describes the types of output for shell elements and
the sign conventions used to report the output. To fully compre-
Note: hend these output conventions it is important that you have a
Refer to the clear understanding of the local coordinate system for shell ele-
section titled ments. Refer to the section titled "Default Area Object Local
"Default Area Axes" in Chapter 23 for a discussion of the shell element local
Object Local axes. Note that the area object and shell element local axes are
Axes" in Chap- the same.
ter 23 for a
discussion of Output for shell elements is reported as shell element internal
the shell ele- forces and stresses. Tabulated and printed output data is avail-
ment local axes. able for shell elements from the following sources:
• Shell element output data tabulated onscreen can be

viewed using the Display menu > Set Output Table
Mode command. See the section titled “Output Table
Mode” in Chapter 16 for additional information.
36 - 1
• Shell element output data tabulated in a Microsoft Ac-

cess database file can be obtained using the File menu >
Export > Save Input/Output as Access Database File
command. See the bullet item labeled “Save In-
put/Output as an Access database file” in the section
titled “Exporting Files” in Chapter 8 for additional in-
formation.
• Shell element output data can be printed to a printer or to

a text file using the File menu > Print Tables > Analy-
sis Output command. See the subsection titled “Printing
Text Input and Output Tables” under the section titled
“Printing from ETABS” in Chapter 8 for additional in-
formation.
In addition to the tabulated and printed data, shell element output

can be displayed on your ETABS model using the Display menu
> Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram > Shell Stresses/
Forces command. See the subsection titled “Shell Forces and
36 Stresses” under the section titled “Member Force and Stress
Diagrams” in Chapter 16 for additional information.
The remaining section in this chapter discusses shell element in-

ternal forces and stresses output.
Faces of Shell Elements

The six faces of a shell element are defined as the positive 1
face, negative 1 face, positive 2 face, negative 2 face, positive 3
face and negative 3 face as shown in Figure 36-1. In this defini-
tion the numbers 1, 2 and 3 correspond to the local axes of the
shell element. The positive 1 face of the element is the face that
is perpendicular to the 1-axis of the element whose outward
normal (pointing away from the element) is in the positive 1-axis
direction. The negative 1 face of the element is a face that is per-
pendicular to the 1-axis of the element whose outward normal
(pointing away from the element) is in the negative 1-axis direc-
tion. The other faces have similar definitions.
36 - 2 Faces of Shell Elements

Chapter 36 - Shell Element Output Conventions
Figure 36-1:
The six faces of a Positive 2 Face
shell element
Axis 2
Negative 1 Face
Positive 1 Face
Axis 1
Axis 3
Negative 3 Face is
on back of element
Positive 3 Face is
on front of element
Negative 2 Face
Note that the positive 3 face is sometimes called the top of the
shell element in ETABS, particularly in the output, and the
36
negative 3 face is called the bottom of the shell element.
Shell Element Internal Forces

The shell element internal forces, like stresses, act throughout
the element. They are present at every point on the midsurface of
the shell element. ETABS reports values for the shell internal
forces at the element nodes. It is important to note that the inter-
nal forces are reported as forces and moments per unit of in-
plane length.
The basic shell element forces and moments are identified as F11,
F22, F12, M11, M22, M12, V13 and V23. You might expect that there
would also be an F21 and M21, but F21 is always equal to F12 and
M21 is always equal to M12, so it is not actually necessary to re-
port F21 and M21.
Shell Element Internal Forces 36 - 3

Element midsurface
Figure 36-2: shown dashed
F11 forces acting on
shell midsurface Possible actual distribution of
Axis 2 F11 internal forces acting on
midsurface of shell element
Axis 1
(a) (b) (c)
Axis 3
ETABS only calculates F11
internal force values at the
shell element joints as shown
in stress distribution (b)
ETABS assumes the distribution of

36 F11 internal forces along the shell
element midsurface for graphical
plotting purposes only.
Figure 36-2 shows internal F11 forces acting on the midsurface of

a shell element. In the figure, the force distribution labeled (a)
represents an actual F11 force distribution. The force distribution
labeled (b) shows how ETABS only calculates the internal forces
at the corner points of the shell element. Note that we could cal-
culate these stresses at any location on the shell element. We
simply choose to calculate them only at the corner points be-
cause that is a convenient location and it keeps the amount of
output to a reasonable volume.
The force distribution labeled (c) in Figure 36-2 shows how

ETABS assumes that the F11 forces vary linearly along the length
of the shell element between the calculated F11 force values at
the element nodes for graphical plotting purposes only.
Shell element internal forces F11, F22, F12, M11, M22 and M12 are
calculated from the shell element nodal displacements using a
displacement function that is assumed to occur throughout the
element. The internal forces are evaluated at the standard 2-by-2
Gauss integration points of the shell element and then extrapo-
36 - 4 Shell Element Internal Forces

Figure 36-3:
F22
Positive directions
for shell element
internal forces F11, F21 = F12
F22, F12, V13 and V23
V23
F12 V13
F11 Axis 2
Axis 1
Axis 3
V13 F12 F11
Note: All forces are
forces per unit length
acting on the mid-
V23 surface of the shell
F21 = F12
element. ETABS only
reports the value of 36
these forces at the
shell element corner
F22 points.
lated to the joints. See Cook, Malkus, and Plesha (1989) for
more information.
Shell element internal transverse shear forces V13 and V23 are
calculated as shown in equations 36-1a and 36-1b where x1 and
x2 are in-plane coordinates parallel to the local 1 and 2 axes and
the distribution of the moments along the 1 and 2 axes is based
on the previously mentioned assumed displacement function.
dM 11 dM 12
V13 = − Eqn. 36-1a
dx 1 dx 2
dM 12 dM 22
V23 = − Eqn. 36-1b
dx 1 dx 2
Figure 36-3 illustrates the positive directions for shell element

internal forces F11, F22, F12, V13 and V23. Note that these shell

Figure 36-4:
Fmax
Positive directions
for shell element Fmin
principal forces and
maximum transverse Axis 2
shear force
Axis 1
Axis 3
Fmin
Fmax
Axis 2 Vmax
Principal Forces Axis 1

Axis 3
Angle from 1-axis to
direction of Fmax
Axis 2
Vmax
36 Maximum Transverse Shear Force
Axis 1
Axis 3
Angle from 1-axis to line
perpendicular to Vmax
element internal forces are forces per unit length acting on the
midsurface of the shell element. ETABS only reports the value
of these forces at the shell element corner points.
Figure 36-4 illustrates the positive direction for shell element

principal forces, Fmax and Fmin. The angle reported for the
principal forces is measured in the local 1-2 plane of the shell
element from the local 1 axis of the element to the direction of
the maximum principal forces. Positive angles appear counter-
clockwise when viewed looking down on the top (positive 3
face) of the shell element.
Figure 36-4 also illustrates the positive direction for the shell
element maximum transverse shear force, Vmax. The angle re-
ported for the maximum transverse shear force is measured in
the local 1-2 plane of the shell element from the local 1 axis of
the element to a line that is perpendicular to the maximum shear
36 - 6 Shell Element Internal Forces

Figure 36-5: Note: All moments are moments

Positive directions per unit length acting on the mid-
for shell element surface of the shell element.
internal moments ETABS only reports the value of
M21 = M12
M11, M22 and M12 these moments at the shell
element corner points.
M22
M12 M11
Axis 2
Axis 1
Axis 3
M11 M12
M22
M21 = M12
36
force. Positive angles appear counterclockwise when viewed
looking down on the top (positive 3 face) of the shell element.
Note that there is no relationship between the angle for the prin-
cipal forces and the angle for the maximum transverse shear
force. For values of V13 and V23 at any angle, the maximum
transverse shear stress, V-Max, can be calculated from equation
36-2.
V − Max = V132 + V23

2
Eqn. 36-2

internal moments M11, M22 and M12. Note that these shell ele-
ment internal moments are moments per unit length acting on
the midsurface of the shell element. ETABS only reports the
value of these moments per unit length at the shell element
corner points.

Figure 36-6: Mmax

Positive directions Mmin
for shell element Axis 2
principal moments
Mmax and Mmin
Axis 1
Axis 3
Mmin
Mmax
Principal Moments
Angle from 1-axis to a

line perpendicular to
the vector defining
Mmax
Axis 2
36 Axis 1
Axis 3
Use the right hand rule to determine the sense of the moments
shown in Figure 36-5 and Figure 36-6. See the section titled
"The Right hand Rule" in Chapter 23 for more information.
Figure 36-6 illustrates the positive direction for shell element

principal moments, Mmax and Mmin. The angle reported for the
principal moments is measured in the local 1-2 plane of the shell
element from the local 1 axis of the element to a line perpen-
dicular to the vector defining the maximum principal moment.
Positive angles appear counterclockwise when viewed looking
down on the top (positive 3 face) of the shell element.
Shell Element Internal Stresses

The basic shell element stresses are identified as S11, S22, S12, S13,
and S23. You might expect that there would also be an S21, but
S21 is always equal to S12, so it is not actually necessary to report
36 - 8 Shell Element Internal Stresses

S21. Sij stresses (where i can be equal to 1 or 2 and j can be equal

to 1, 2 or 3) are stresses that occur on face i of an element in di-
rection j. Direction j refers to the local axis direction of the shell
element. Thus S11 stresses occur on face 1 of the element (per-
pendicular to the local 1 axis) and are acting in the direction par-
allel to the local 1 axis (that is, the stresses act normal to face 1).
As another example, S12 stresses occur on face 1 of the element
(perpendicular to the local 1 axis) and are acting in the direction
parallel to the local 2 axis (that is, the stresses act parallel to face
1, like shearing stresses). Figure 36-7 shows examples of each of
these basic types of shell stresses. ETABS reports internal
stresses for shell elements at the four corner points of the appro-
priate face of the element. For example, refer to Figure 36-7a.
On the positive 1 face internal stresses are reported by ETABS at
points A, B, C and D.
Shell internal stresses are reported for both the top and the bot-
tom of the shell element. As previously mentioned in the section
titled "Faces of Shell Elements", the top and bottom of the ele-
ment are defined relative to the local 3-axis of the element. The
positive 3-axis side of the element is considered to be the top of
36
the element. Thus in Figure 36-7a, internal stresses at the top of
the element include stresses at the joints labeled A and C and
internal stresses at the bottom of the element include stresses at
the joints labeled B and D. Figure 36-8 clearly illustrates the
points where ETABS reports the shell element internal stress
values.
As mentioned in the previous section, shell element internal

forces (not stresses) are calculated from the shell element nodal
displacements. The shell element internal stresses are then cal-
culated from the shell element internal forces using Equations
36-3a through 36-3f. In these equations tm is the membrane
thickness of the shell, tb is the bending thickness of the shell and
x3 is the thickness coordinate measured from the midsurface of
the element.
Shell Element Internal Stresses 36 - 9

Axis 2
D
B
Axis 1
A
Axis 3 Axis 2 Axis 2
a. Examples of membrane direct stresses, S11
Axis 2
Axis 1
Axis 3
b. Examples of membrane shear Stresses, S12 (S21 stresses similar)
Axis 2
Axis 1 Axis 1
36
Axis 1 Axis 3 Axis 3
Axis 3 d. Examples of membrane e. Examples of plate trans-
c. Examples of plate transverse shear stresses, S13 direct stresses, S22 verse shear stresses, S23
(Above)
F11 12M 11
Figure 36-7: S11 = − x3 Eqn. 36-3a
Examples of various tm t 3b
types of shell
stresses F22 12M 22
S 22 = − x3 Eqn. 36-3b
tm t 3b
F12 12M 12
S12 = − x3 Eqn. 36-3c
tm t 3b
V13
S13 = Eqn. 36-3d
tb
V23
S 23 = Eqn. 36-3e
tb
S33 = 0 Eqn. 36-3f
36 - 10 Shell Element Internal Stresses

Figure 36-8: Possible distribution of S11 internal

Locations where stresses acting on shell element
ETABS reports shell
element internal Axis 2
stresses D
j2
C
B Axis 1
j1
A
(a) (b)
Axis 3
ETABS reports S11 internal
stress values at top and
bottom corners of element
only, that is points A, B, C and
D. Do not confuse these points
with the joints j1 and j2 which
occur at the element
midsurface 36
The transverse shear stresses calculated from equations 36-3d
and 36-3e are average values. The actual transverse shear stress
distribution is approximately parabolic; it is zero at the top and
bottom surfaces and has its maximum or minimum value at the
midsurface of the element. ETABS reports the average trans-
verse shear value. An approximation to the maximum (or mini-
mum) transverse shear stress would be 1.5 times the average
shear stress.

internal stresses S11, S22, S12, S13 and S23. Also shown are the
positive directions for the principal stresses, S-Max and S-Min,
and the positive directions for the maximum transverse shear
stresses, S-Max-V. The angle reported for the principal stresses
is positive when measured counterclockwise (when viewed from
the top of the shell element) from the local 1-axis to the direction
of the maximum principal value.
The angle reported for the maximum transverse shear stresses is

also measured counterclockwise (when viewed from the top)
from the local 1-axis to the direction of the maximum principal
Shell Element Internal Stresses 36 - 11

S-Max
S-Min
S-Min
Axis 2 S-MaxV
S-Max
Principal Stresses j4
S-MaxV
S22 Angle for
j3 S23
S-Max and
S-Min Maximum Transverse Shear Stresses
S21 = S12 S13 Angle for
S-MaxV
S12
Axis 1
S11 S11
S12
S13 Note:
36 S21 = S12 Shell element stresses are reported
at the four corner points of the
S23
S22 appropriate face of the element
Axis 3
j1 j2
(Above)
value. Note that there is no relationship between the angle for the
Figure 36-9:
Positive directions principal stresses and the angle for the maximum transverse
for shell element shear stresses. For values of S13 and S23 at any angle, the maxi-
internal stresses S11, mum transverse shear stress, S-MaxV, can be calculated from
S22, S12, S13 and S23 equation 36-4.
S − MaxV = S13
2
+ S 223 Eqn. 36-4
Other Formulas Relating Shell Element Internal

Forces to Internal Stresses
The shell element internal forces and moments can be obtained
by integrating the shell element internal stresses over the element
thickness. The integration is performed about the midsurface of
the element. Note that this is not the process used by ETABS
36 - 12 Other Formulas Relating Shell Element Internal Forces to Internal Stresses

since, as described above, ETABS calculates the internal forces

first and then determines the internal stresses from the internal
forces.
The internal shell element forces, Fij and Vij (where i can be
equal to 1 or 2 and j can be equal to 1, 2 or 3), can be viewed as
the forces caused by the Sij stresses acting on face i. Similarly,
the internal shell element moments, Mij, can be viewed as the
moments caused by the Sij stresses acting on face i. For example,
F11 forces are caused by S11 stresses acting on face 1 and M12
moments result from S12 stresses acting on face 1. Note that this
explanation rationally explains why M11 moments act about the
local 2-axis and M22 moments act about the local 1-axis, a phe-
nomenon that causes confusion for many people.
The shell element internal forces can be calculated from the in-
ternal stresses as shown in equations 36-5a through 36-5h. In
these equations tm is the membrane thickness of the shell, tb is the
bending thickness of the shell and x3 is the thickness coordinate
measured from the midsurface of the element. Remember that
the shell element internal forces and moments are forces and 36
moments per unit of in-plane length of the shell element.
• Membrane direct forces:

+tm 2
F11 = ò−tm 2
S11 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5a
+t m 2
F22 = ò−tm 2
S 22 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5b
• Membrane shear force:

+tm 2
F12 = ò−tm 2
S12 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5c
• Plate bending moments:

+tb 2
M 11 = ò−tb 2
S11 x3 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5d
+t b 2
M 22 = ò−t b 2
S 22 x3 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5e
Other Formulas Relating Shell Element Internal Forces to Internal Stresses 36 - 13

• Plate twisting moment:

+tb 2
M12 = ò −t b 2
S12 x3 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5f
• Plate transverse shear forces:

+tb 2
V13 = ò
−t b 2
S13 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5g
+t b 2
V23 = ò
−tb 2
S 23 dx 3 Eqn. 36-5h
36
36 - 14 Other Formulas Relating Shell Element Internal Forces to Internal Stresses

Chapter 37
Link Element Output Conventions

37
General
Available output for link elements includes the deformation
across the element and the internal spring forces reported at the
joints (ends) of the element. Each of these is described below.
Link Element Assignments to Point and Line Objects

Note: Link elements can be assigned to point or line objects. The link
elements assigned to point objects are different from those as-
Link element
signed to line objects as described below:
properties can
be assigned to
• A link element assigned to a point object is connected to
point and line
objects. the point object and to the ground unless it is a special
panel zone element that has been assigned link proper-
ties. See the section titled “Link Property Assignments
to Point Objects” in Chapter 14 for discussion of link
property assignments made to point objects. Note that
37 - 1
the local axes for the grounded link element are de-
scribed here.
Output for point objects with panel zone assignments

where the panel zone property is based on a specified
link property is discussed in Chapter 34.
• A link element assigned to a line object connects (links)

the two point objects at the ends of the line object. One
of the point objects that the link element is connected to
may be restrained if desired. See the section titled “Link
Property Assignments to Line Objects” in Chapter 14 for
discussion of link property assignments made to line
objects. The local axes for the two-joint link elements
are the same as those for a line object described in the
section titled “Default Line Object Local Axes” in
Chapter 24.
Internal Nonlinear Springs

37 Each link element is assumed to be composed of six internal
“springs,” one for each of the six internal deformations. Each
spring may consist of several components including springs and
dashpots. The force-deformation relationships of these springs
may be coupled or independent of each other.
Figure 37-1 shows the springs for three of the deformations: ax-
ial, shear in the 1-2 plane, and pure bending in the 1-2 plane. It is
important to note that the shear spring is located at a distance dj2
from joint j. All shear deformation is assumed to occur at this
spring; the links connecting this spring to the joints (or ground)
are rigid in shear. Deformation of the shear spring can be caused
by rotations as well as translations at the joints.
The force in this shear spring produces a linearly varying mo-

ment along the length of the link. This moment is taken as zero
at the shear spring, which acts as a moment hinge. The moment
due to shear is independent of, and additive to, the constant mo-
ment in the element due to the pure-bending spring.
37 - 2 Internal Nonlinear Springs

Chapter 37 - Link Element Output Conventions
Figure 37-1: Joint J

Three of the six in-
dependent nonlinear
springs in a link dj2
element
Axial Shear Pure

1 Bending
Joint I
or ground
The other three springs that are not shown in Figure 37-1 are for
torsion, shear in the 1-3 plane and pure-bending in the 1-3 plane.
The spring for shear in the 1-3 plane is located at a distance dj3
from point j similar to the spring for shear in the 1-2 plane. The
values of dj2 and dj3 may be different, although normally they
are the same.
37
Link Element Force-Deformation Relationships
There are six force-deformation relationships that govern the be-
havior of the link element, one for each of the internal springs.
The force deformation relationships governing the behavior are:
• Axial: fu1 versus du1
• Shear in the 1-2 plane: fu2 versus du2
• Shear in the 1-3 plane: fu3 versus du3
• Torsion: fr1 versus dr1
• Pure bending in the 1-3 plane: fr2 versus dr2
• Pure bending in the 1-2 plane: fr3 versus dr3
where fu1, fu2 and fu3 are the internal spring forces in the link lo-
cal axes directions and fr1, fr2 and fr3 are the internal spring mo-
ments about the link local axes.
Link Element Force-Deformation Relationships 37 - 3

Note that each of these force deformation relationships may be

zero, linear only, or linear/nonlinear for any given link element.
These relationships may be coupled or uncoupled. The internal
forces and moments may be related to the deformation rates
(velocities) as well as the deformations.
Link Element Internal Deformations

Six independent internal deformations are defined for link ele-
ments. These are calculated from the relative displacements of
end- j with respect to:
Note: • End-i for a two-joint link element assigned to a line ob-

ject.
Six independent
internal defor-
• The ground for a single-joint link element assigned to a
mations are
defined for link
point object.
elements.
For two-joint link elements assigned to line objects the internal
deformations are defined as:
37
• Axial: du1 = u1j - u1i
• Shear in the 1-2 plane: du2 = u2j - u2i - dj2 r3j - (L - dj2) r3i
• Shear in the 1-3 plane: du3 = u3j - u3i + dj3 r2j + (L - dj3) r2i
• Torsion: dr1 = r1j - r1i
• Pure bending in the 1-3 plane: dr2 = r2i - r2j
• Pure bending in the 1-2 plane: dr3 = r3j - r3i
where:
• du1, du2, du3, dr1, dr2 and dr3, are the internal deformations
of the link element.
• u1i, u2i, u3i, r1i, r2i and r3i are the translations and rotations
at joint i.
• u1j, u2j, u3j, r1j, r2j and r3j are the translations and rotations
at joint j.
37 - 4 Link Element Internal Deformations

Figure 37-2: du1 u1j u2j

Internal deforma-
tions for a two-joint dr3
link element dj2
r3j
r3j
r3i
r3i
du2
1
u1i 2
u2j
Axial Deformation Shear Deformation Bending Deformation
in the 1-2 Plane in the 1-2 Plane
• dj2 is the distance you specify from joint j to the location

where the shear deformation du2 is measured (the default
is zero).
• dj3 is the distance you specify from joint j to the location 37

where the shear deformation du3 is measured (the default
is zero).
• L is the length of the element.
It is important to note the negatives of the rotations r2i and

r2j have been used for the definition of shear and bending de-
formations in the 1-3 plane. This provides consistent defini-
tions for shear and moment in both link and frame elements.
Note: Also note that all internal translations, rotations and deforma-
tions are expressed in terms of the link element local coordinate
The conven-
system. Finally note that shear deformations can be caused by
tions for dis-
playing shear
rotations as well as translations. These definitions ensure that all
and moment deformations will be zero under rigid-body motion of the ele-
are the same ment.
for frame and
link elements. Three of these internal deformations, axial, shear in the 1-2 plane
and bending in the 1-2 plane are illustrated in Figure 37-2. The
other internal deformations are similar.
Link Element Internal Deformations 37 - 5

For single-joint grounded link elements assigned to point objects

the internal deformations are the same as above for two-joint link
elements, except that the translations and rotations at end-i are
taken to be zero:
• Axial: du1 = u1j
• Shear in the 1-2 plane: du2 = u2j - dj2 r3j
• Shear in the 1-3 plane: du3 = u3j + dj3 r2j
• Torsion: dr1 = r1j
• Pure bending in the 1-3 plane: dr2 = - r2j
• Pure bending in the 1-2 plane: dr3 = r3j
where du1, du2, du3, dr1, dr2 and dr3, are the internal deformations
of the link element.
37 Link Element Internal Forces

ETABS converts the link element spring internal forces (fu1, fu2,
fu3, fr1, fr2 and fr3) introduced in the previous subsection to link
element internal forces ( P, V2 and V3) and link element internal
moments (T, M2 and M3) that are reported at the end points of
the link element. These internal forces and moments have ex-
Note: actly the same meaning (conventions) as frame elements.
Although the
link element Figure 37-3 illustrates the positive direction for link element in-
internal forces ternal forces reported at the link element end points. These link
are present at element internal forces and moments are defined in terms of the
every point link element internal spring forces and moments:
along the ele-
ment, they are • Axial: P = fu1
only reported at
the end points • Shear in the 1-2 plane: V2 = fu2, M3s = (d - dj2) fu2
of the element.
• Shear in the 1-3 plane: V3 = fu3, M2s = (d - dj3) fu3
• Torsion: T = fr1
37 - 6 Link Element Internal Forces

Figure 37-3: P T
Positive directions
for link element in-
ternal forces P, V2, V2 M2
V3, T, M2 and M3 j j
V3 M3
1 1
2 2
3 3
M3
V3 i i
V2 M2
P T
• Pure bending in the 1-3 plane: M2b = fr2
• Pure bending in the 1-2 plane: M3b = fr3

37
where d is the distance from joint j. The total bending moment
resultants M2 and M3 are composed of shear and bending parts
as follows:
• Total bending in the 1-3 plane: M2 = M2s + M2b
• Total bending in the 1-2 plane: M3 = M3s + M3b
These internal forces and moments are present at every cross

section along the length of the element. Again, they are only re-
ported at the end points of the link element.
Link Element Internal Forces 37 - 7

Chapter 38
Wall Pier and Spandrel Output Conventions

38
General
This section describes the local axes and output conventions for
wall pier and spandrel elements. Output for pier and spandrel
elements is reported as element internal forces. Tabulated and
printed output data is available for pier and spandrel elements
from the following sources:
Note: • Pier and spandrel element output data tabulated onscreen

can be viewed using the Display menu > Set Output
Pier and span-
drel output
Table Mode command. See the section titled “Output
forces are only Table Mode” in Chapter 16 for additional information.
reported at the
ends of the ele- • Pier and spandrel element output data tabulated in a Mi-
ments crosoft Access database file can be obtained using the
File menu > Export > Save Input/Output as Access
Database File command. See the bullet item labeled
“Save Input/Output as an Access database file” in the
section titled “Exporting Files” in Chapter 8 for addi-
tional information.
38 - 1
• Pier and spandrel element output data can be printed to a

printer or to a text file using the File menu > Print Ta-
bles > Analysis Output command. See the subsection
titled “Printing Text Input and Output Tables” under the
section titled “Printing from ETABS” in Chapter 8 for
additional information.
In addition to the tabulated and printed data, pier and spandrel

element output can be displayed on your ETABS model using
the Display menu > Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram >
Frame/Pier/ Spandrel Forces command. See the subsection ti-
tled “Frame Element, Pier and Spandrel Forces” under the sec-
tion titled “Member Force and Stress Diagrams” in Chapter 16
for additional information.
Important note concerning output locations: It is important to

understand that output forces are only reported at the ends of the
pier and spandrel elements. Similarly, when output forces for
these elements are graphically displayed on the model, actual
force values are plotted at the ends of the elements and then
those actual values are simply connected with a straight line.
38
Wall Pier Output Locations and Sign Convention
Wall Pier Local Axes
Two-Dimensional Pier
Typically a wall pier is made up of one or more wall-type area
objects or a combination of one or more wall-type area objects
and one or more column-type line objects. The local axes of
these two-dimensional wall piers are defined as follows:
• The local 1 axis extends from the bottom of the pier to

the top of the pier. The positive local 1 axis is in the
same direction as the positive global Z-axis.
The positive local 1-axis points from the i-end of the pier
to the j-end of the pier.
38 - 2 Wall Pier Output Locations and Sign Convention

Chapter 38 - Wall Pier and Spandrel Output Conventions
• The local 1-2 plane is in the plane of the two-

dimensional wall pier. The positive local axis 2 is hori-
zontal and it has a positive projection on the global X-
axis, or if the plane of the pier is oriented parallel to the
global Y-Z plane, axis 2 is in the same direction as the
Note: positive global Y-axis.
In the special
case where a
• The local 3 axis is horizontal and perpendicular to the
wall pier is plane of the pier. The direction of the positive local 3
made up of a axis is determined from the right-hand rule. See the sec-
single column- tion titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for
type frame ele- more information.
ment the local
axes of the pier In the special case where a wall pier is made up of a single col-
are the same as umn-type frame element the local axes of the pier are the same
those of the as those of the frame element. See the section titled “Default
frame element. Line Object Local Axes” in Chapter 24 for more information.
If a wall pier is made up of two or more column-type frame ele-

ments, but no area objects, then the local axes of the pier are the
same as those of the first defined frame element. Your best bet
for confirming the local axes orientation in this unusual case is to
view them graphically using the View menu > Set Building 38
View Options command.
Three-Dimensional Pier
In a three-dimensional wall pier the local axes are defined as
follows:
Note:
• The local 1 axis extends from the bottom of the pier to
For three- the top of the pier. The positive local 1 axis is in the
dimensional same direction as the positive global Z-axis.
piers the rela-
tionship be- • The positive local 2 axis is in the same direction as the
tween the local positive global X-axis.
and global axes
is 1 = Z, 2 = X • The positive local 3 axis is in the same direction as the
and 3 = Y.
positive global Y-axis.
Wall Pier Output Locations and Sign Convention 38 - 3

Pier Element Internal Forces

The wall pier element internal forces are similar to the frame
element internal forces. They are:
• P, the axial force
Note: • V2, the shear force in the 1-2 plane

See the section • V3, the shear force in the 1-3 plane
titled “Wall
Pier Labeling” • T, the axial torque
in Chapter 48
for important • M2, the bending moment in the 1-3 plane (about the 2-
information
about defining
axis)
wall piers
axis)
The positive directions of these forces are exactly the same as

those described for the frame element. See Figure 35-1 in Chap-
ter 35 for additional information.
38 These internal forces and moments are present at every cross

section along the height of the wall pier element. They are only
reported at the ends (top and bottom) of the pier element. The
Note: pier internal forces and moments are reported in the pier element
local coordinate system.
The positive
directions of Since the pier internal forces and moments are only reported at
output forces
the ends of the pier in some cases it may be advantageous to
for wall piers
are exactly the
model a wall pier with multiple ETABS pier elements. For ex-
same as those ample, if you want output forces at the midheight of a wall pier,
described for then you may want to model the pier with two ETABS pier ele-
the frame elements. See the subsection titled “Assigning Wall Pier Labels” in
ment in Chap- Chapter 48 for more information.
ter 35.
Wall Spandrel Output Locations and Sign Convention

Note that wall spandrels can only be two-dimensional. There are
no three-dimensional wall spandrels in ETABS.
38 - 4 Wall Spandrel Output Locations and Sign Convention

Chapter 38 - Wall Pier and Spandrel Output Conventions
Wall Spandrel Local Axes

• The local 1-2 plane is in the plane of the wall spandrel.
The positive local axis 1 is horizontal and has a positive
projection on the global X-axis, or if the plane of the
spandrel is oriented parallel to the global Y-Z plane, axis
1 is in the same direction as the positive global Y-axis.
The positive local 1-axis points from the i-end of the

spandrel to the j-end of the spandrel.
• The positive local 2 axis points upward in the same di-

rection as the positive global Z-axis.
• The local 3 axis is horizontal and perpendicular to the

plane of the spandrel. The direction of the positive local
3 axis is determined from the right-hand rule. See the
section titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for
more information.
In the case where a wall spandrel is made up of a one or more

beam-type frame elements the local axes of the spandrel are still
the same as those described above. The local axes orientation of
a spandrel are independent of the local axes orientation of its 38
component area and line objects.
Spandrel Element Internal Forces

The wall spandrel element internal forces are similar to the frame
element internal forces. They are:
Note: • P, the axial force

The positive
directions of
output forces
for wall span- • V3, the shear force in the 1-3 plane
drels are ex-
actly the same • T, the axial torque
as those de-
scribed for the • M2, the bending moment in the 1-3 plane (about the 2-
frame element axis)
in Chapter 35.
axis)
Wall Spandrel Output Locations and Sign Convention 38 - 5

The positive directions of these forces are exactly the same as

those described for the frame element. See Figure 35-1 in Chap-
ter 35 for additional information.
Note: These internal forces and moments are present at every cross
section along the length of the wall spandrel element. They are
See the section
only reported at the ends of the spandrel element. The spandrel
titled “Wall
Spandrel La-
internal forces and moments are reported in the spandrel element
beling” in local coordinate system.
Chapter 48 for
important in- Since the spandrel internal forces and moments are only reported
formation about at the ends of the spandrel in some cases it may be advantageous
defining wall to model a wall spandrel with multiple ETABS spandrel ele-
spandrels. ments. For example, if you want output forces at the middle of a
wall spandrel, then you may want to model the spandrel with two
ETABS spandrel elements, one for each half of the spandrel. If
you use the ETABS Shear Wall Design postprocessor to design
such a spandrel, then note that any reported diagonal steel is
based on the modeled spandrel element length (e.g., half the ac-
tual spandrel length), not the full spandrel length.
38
38 - 6 Wall Spandrel Output Locations and Sign Convention

Chapter 39
Section Cut Output Conventions
Overview 39
This chapter discusses the output conventions for section cuts.
To fully comprehend these output conventions it is important
that you have a clear understanding of the local coordinate sys-
tem for section cuts. It is also important that you have a clear un-
derstanding of the location where the section cut forces are re-
ported. Refer to the subsection titled "Defining Section Cuts"
under the section titled "Section Cuts" in Chapter 11 for a dis-
cussion of both of these items.
Section Cut Forces

Section cut forces are reported at a single point in the local coor-
dinate system defined for the section cut. Six different force
components are reported at that single point. They are:
• F1: A force in the section cut local 1-axis direction.
39 - 1

Note:
Section cut • M1: A moment about the section cut local 1-axis.
forces are re-
ported with • M2: A moment about the section cut local 2-axis.
respect to the
section cut lo- • M3: A moment about the section cut local 3-axis.
cal coordinate
system. Section cut forces are reported as forces acting on the objects
that make up the group that defines the section cut. An example
of this is discussed below. Positive section forces act in the same
direction as the positive section cut local axes. The sense of
positive moments can be determined using the right hand rule.
See the section titled “The Right Hand Rule” in Chapter 23 for
information on the right-hand rule.
Consider the example shown in Figure 39-1. The global coordi-

nate system axes and the section cut local coordinate system axes
are shown in Figure 39-1a. This illustrates that the local coordi-
nate system axes may be different from the global system.
39 Figure 39-1b shows a floor system that consists of 9 area objects

labeled F1 through F9 and 16 associated point objects labeled 1
through 16. Suppose that we want to determine the section cut
forces through the floor system at the location identified by the
heavy line in Figure 39-1c. This section cut passes through the
point objects labeled 3, 7, 11 and 15.
There are two possible groups you could define to use in the
section cut definition. Figure 39-1d shows the first possible
group which includes area objects F2, F5 and F8 and point ob-
jects 3, 7, 11 and 15. Figure 39-1e shows free body diagrams that
define the positive direction of section cut forces when the sec-
tion cut is defined using the group definition shown in Figure 39-
1d. Note that the positive section cut forces acting on the left free
body diagram are in the same direction as the positive section cut
local axes shown in Figure 39-1a. The left free body diagram is
the one that includes the objects that were used to define the
group that defined the section cut.
39 - 2 Section Cut Forces

Chapter 39 - Section Cut Output Conventions
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
F7 F8 F9 F7 F8 F9
9 10 11 12 9 10 11 12
Z 3
2 F4 F5 F6 F4 F5 F6
Y 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
X F1 F2 F3 F1 F2 F3
1 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
a) Global and Local Axes b) Floor System c) Section Cut in Floor System
13 14 15 16
F7 F8 F9 F3 F2
9 10 11 12 F1
F4 F5 F6 F1
5 6 7 8 F2
F1 F2 F3 F3
1 2 3 4
d) One Possible Group e) Positive Forces for Section Cut Based on (d)
13 14 15 16
F7 F8 F9 F3 F2
9 10 11 12 F1
F4 F5 F6
5
F1
6
F2
7
F3
8 F2
F3
F1
39
1 2 3 4
f) Another Possible Group g) Positive Forces for Section Cut Based on (f)
(Above) Figure 39-1f shows the second possible group that could define
Figure 39-1: the section cut. This group includes area objects F3, F6 and F9
Positive section cut and point objects 3, 7, 11 and 15. Figure 39-1g shows free body
forces diagrams that define the positive direction of section cut forces
when the section cut is defined using the group definition shown
in Figure 39-1f. Note that the positive section cut forces acting
on the right free body diagram are in the same direction as the
positive section cut local axes shown in Figure 39-1a. The right
free body diagram is the one that includes the objects that were
used to define the group that defined the section cut.
Section Cut Forces 39 - 3

Important note: In the above example, if the diaphragm has a

rigid diaphragm assignment then you will not get any forces in
the section cut if it is defined as shown in the example. With the
rigid diaphragm assignment ETABS is unable to capture section
cut forces in the floor.
Tip: If you want to know the forces in a rigid diaphragm you can
use the following technique. Define a group that contains all of
the point objects at the diaphragm level that have columns,
braces, ramps or walls connected to them and also contains all of
the columns, braces, ramps and walls that are connected to the
diaphragm both from above or from below. Define a section cut
based on this group. The force in the section cut is the force in
the diaphragm.
Note that in a free body diagram of the diaphragm the forces

above and below the diaphragm are in opposite directions. If you
add these forces above and below the diaphragm, taking signs
into account you are left with the force in the diaphragm. This is
what ETABS does in the case described for this tip.
39
39 - 4 Section Cut Forces

Chapter 40
Printed Input Tables
Features of Dialog Box

This chapter applies to the input tables that are printed using the
40
File menu > Print Tables > Input command and to input tables
displayed on the screen using the Display menu > Set Input
Table Mode command. Note the following about the Print Input
Tables dialog box:
Note: • Select Loads button: When you print static load infor-
mation you can click on the Select Loads button to indi-
You can print
input data for
cate for which load cases you want to display or print the
selected objects input data. You can select one or more load cases in the
only if you resulting list.
wish.
• Selection only: When you print or display input data, if
you make a selection prior to clicking the print or dis-
play command, then input data is only provided for the
selected objects. Otherwise it is provided for all objects.
40 - 1
Note: • Print to File: Checking the Print to File check box sends
your input data to a text file rather than to the printer.
You can print
input data to a
When you check this box you can specify a name for the
printer or to a text file.
text file.
• Append: The Append check box is only active if the
Print to File check box is checked. Checking the Append
check box appends your input data to the specified file,
if the file exists, rather than overwriting it.
Input Data Categories

The input data is broken into three main categories. They are:
• Building data
• Object data
• Static Loads
Most of the input data provided is relatively self-explanatory and

thus is not mentioned here. Following are some comments on
items in each of the categories that may need a little explanation.
40
Building Data
The building info item in the Building Data area of the dialog
box provides story level data information, point object coordi-
nate information and area and line object connectivity informa-
tion. The connectivity information tells which point objects the
corners of area objects connect to and the ends of line objects
connect to.
Object Data
The object data provides information on the assignments made to
the various types of area, line and point objects in your model.
40 - 2 Input Data Categories

Chapter 40 - Printed Input Tables
3.0
2.0
1.0 1.0
First Second Third

line line line
STORY LINE LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD LOAD

ID ID TYPE DIRECTION DISTANCE-A VALUE-A DISTANCE-B VALUE-B
STORY2 B1 FORCE GRAVITY 0.0000 1.0000 5.0000 2.0000

(Above) Static Loads

Figure 40-1: The distributed line loads are reported in a slightly unusual way
Printed input data so that the output fits on the page. On each line for a given story
for a distributed line ID and line ID a single, linearly varying segment of the distrib- 40
load uted load is reported.
Figure 40-1 shows a distributed load with three linearly varying

segments and its associated printed output. (Note that your out-
put may appear slightly different). The distributed load intensity
is 1.0 at each end, 2.0 at the left quarter-point of the span and 3.0
at the right quarter point. The input data for this distributed load
is broken up into three lines. The first line applies to the load
between the left end and the left quarter point. The second line
applies to the load between the left and right quarter points. The
final line applies to the load between the right quarter point and
the end of the line object.
Input Data Categories 40 - 3

Chapter 41
Printed Output Tables
General
This chapter applies to the output tables that are printed using the
File menu > Print Tables > Analysis Output command and to
41
output tables displayed on the screen using the Display menu >
Set Output Table Mode command. Note the following about
output tables:
Note: • Select Loads button: When you print displacements,

reaction or object force output you can click on the Se-
You can print
output for se-
lect Loads button to indicate for which load cases or
lected objects combinations you want output. You can select one or
only if you more load cases or combinations in the resulting list.
wish.
• Selection only: When you print or display output, if you
make a selection prior to clicking the print or display
command, then output is only provided for the selected
objects. Otherwise it is provided for all objects.
41 - 1
• Envelopes only: When you print or display output of

displacements, reactions or forces, checking the Enve-
lopes Only check box provides envelope-type output.
For each output component of each object ETABS re-
ports the maximum value along with its associated load
case or combination and the minimum value along with
its associated load case or combination.
Note: • Print to File: Checking the Print to File check box sends
your output to a text file rather than to the printer. When
You can print
output to a
you check this box you can specify a name for the text
printer or to a file.
text file.
• Append: The Append check box is only active if the
Print to File check box is checked. Checking the Append
check box appends your output to the specified file, if
the file exists, rather than overwriting it.
Following is a list of some of the analysis output that is provided

and references to chapters where this output is discussed.
• Displacements, reactions and spring forces: See

chapter 34 for discussion of these items
• Column, beam and brace forces: See chapter 35 for

41 discussion of these items
• Pier and spandrel forces: See chapter 38 for discussion

of these items
• Link forces: See chapter 37 for discussion of these

items
• Section cut forces: See chapter 39 for discussion of

these items
The remainder of this chapter discusses the building modes,

building modal info and building output items.
41 - 2 General
Chapter 41 - Printed Output Tables
Building Modes
Checking the building modes check box provides output for all
of the building modes. This is an all or nothing feature. You ei-
ther get output for all of the modes or for none of the modes.
If you want output for a single mode then use the following pro-
cess:
• Use the Define menu > Load Combinations command

to define a new load combination. Click on the Add
New Combo button to open the Load Combination Data
dialog box.
• In the Define Combination area click the Case Name

drop down box and select Mode. Then click the Add
button. After you click the Add button ETABS prompts
you for a mode number.
• Now when you print displacement output for this com-

bination you are getting the mode shape associated with
the specified mode number.
Building Modal Info

The following subsections describe the output that is provided 41
when you check the Building Modal Info check box.
Modal Periods and Frequencies

The following time-properties are printed for each Mode:
• Period, T, in units of time.
• Cyclic frequency, f, in units of cycles per time; this is

the inverse of T.
• Circular frequency, ω, in units of radians per time; ω = 2

π f.
Building Modes 41 - 3
Modal Participation Factors

The modal participation factors fuxn, fuyn, fuzn, frxn, fryn and frzn are
the dot products of the six unit Acceleration Loads with the
mode shapes. The participation factors for Mode n correspond-
ing to Acceleration Loads in the global UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY
and RZ directions are given by:
f uxn = ϕ nT m ux Eqn. 41-1a
f uyn = ϕ nT m uy Eqn. 41-1b
f uzn = ϕ nT m uz Eqn. 41-1c
f rxn = ϕ nT m rx Eqn. 41-1d
f ryn = ϕ nT m ry Eqn. 41-1e
f rzn = ϕ nT m rz Eqn. 41-1f
where ϕn is the mode shape and mux, muy, muz, mrx, mry and mrz
are the unit Acceleration Loads that are discussed in the section
titled "Acceleration Loads" in Chapter 33. These factors are the
generalized loads acting on the mode due to each of the Accel-
41 eration Loads. They are referred to the global coordinate system.
These values are called “factors” because they are related to the
mode shape and to a unit acceleration. The modes shapes are
each normalized, or scaled, with respect to the mass matrix such
that:
ϕ nT Mϕ n = 1 Eqn. 41-2
The actual magnitudes and signs of the participation factors are

not important. What is important is the relative values of the six
factors for a given mode.
41 - 4 Building Modal Info

Modal Direction Factors

The modal direction factors provide a measure of how important
a Mode is for computing the response to Acceleration Loads in a
particular global direction. The modal direction factors duxn, duyn,
duzn, drxn, dryn and drzn are the dot products of the six modal par-
ticipation factors with the modes shapes. The modal direction
factors for Mode n corresponding to Acceleration Loads in the
global UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ directions are given by:
Note: d uxn = ϕ nT m uxϕ n Eqn. 41-2a

The modal di-
rection factors d uyn = ϕ nT m uyϕ n Eqn. 41-2b
provide a
measure of how
important a
d uzn = ϕ nT m uzϕ n Eqn. 41-2c
Mode is for
computing the d rxn = ϕ nT m rxϕ n Eqn. 41-2d
response to
Acceleration
d ryn = ϕ nT m ryϕ n Eqn. 41-2e
Loads in a par-
ticular global
direction. d rzn = ϕ nT m rzϕ n Eqn. 41-2f
The sum of the six modal direction factors for any mode is al-
ways 1. 41
Modal Effective Mass Factors
The modal effective mass factors for a Mode provide a measure
of how important the Mode is for computing the response to the
Acceleration Loads in each of the six global directions. Thus it is
useful for determining the accuracy of response-spectrum analy-
ses and seismic time-history analyses. The modal effective mass
factors provide no information about the accuracy of time-
history analyses subjected to other loads (other than the Accel-
eration Loads described in the section titled "Acceleration
Loads" in Chapter 33).
Building Modal Info 41 - 5

The modal effective mass factors for Mode n corresponding to

Acceleration Loads in the global UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ
directions are given by:
(f uxn )2
ruxn = Eqn. 41-3a
M ux
ruyn =
(f )
uyn
2
Eqn. 41-3b
M uy
(f uzn )2
ruzn = Eqn. 41-3c
M uz
rrxn =
(f rxn )2 Eqn. 41-3d
M rx
rryn =
(f )
ryn
2
Eqn. 41-3e
M ry
rrzn =
(f rzn )2 Eqn. 41-3f
M rz
41 where fuxn, fuyn, fuzn, frxn, fryn and frzn are the participation factors
defined in the subsection above titled "Modal Participation Fac-
tors"; and Mux, Muy, Muz, Mrx, Mry and Mrz are the total unre-
strained masses acting in the UX, UY, UZ, RX, RY and RZ di-
rections.
The cumulative sums of the modal effective mass factors for all
Modes up to Mode n are printed with the individual values for
Mode n. This provides a simple measure of how many Modes
are required to achieve a given level of accuracy for ground-
acceleration loading.
If all eigen Modes of the structure are present, the modal effec-
tive mass factors for each of the six Acceleration Loads should
generally be 100%.

Static and Dynamic Load Participation Ratios

The static and dynamic load participation ratios provide a meas-
ure of how adequate the calculated modes are for representing
the response to time-history analyses. These two measures are
printed for each of the following spatial load vectors:
• The three unit Acceleration Loads
• All static Load Cases
• All nonlinear deformation loads
The first two represent spatial loads that you can explicitly spec-
ify in a time-history analysis, whereas the last represents loads
that can act implicitly in a nonlinear time-history analysis.
The load participation ratios are expressed as percentages under

the heading:
MODAL LOAD PARTICIPATION RATIOS.
Static Load Participation Ratio

The static load participation ratio measures how well the calcu-
lated modes can represent the response to a given static load.
This measure was first presented by Wilson (1997). For a given
spatial load vector p, the participation factor for Mode n is given
41
by:
f n = ϕ nT p Eqn. 41-4
where ϕn is the mode shape (vector) of Mode n. This factor is the

generalized load acting on the Mode due to load p. Note that fn is
just the usual participation factor when p is one of the unit accel-
eration loads.
The static participation ratio for this mode is given by:

2
æ fn ö
çç ÷
S è ω n ÷ø
rn = T Eqn. 41-5
u p

where u is the static solution given by Ku = p. This ratio gives

the fraction of the total strain energy in the exact static solution
that is contained in Mode n. Note that the denominator can also
be represented as uTKu.
Finally, the cumulative sum of the static participation ratios for

all the calculated modes is also printed:
2
N æ ϕ nT p ö
N å ç
ç
n =1 è ω n ø
÷
÷
S
R = å
n =1
S
rn =
uT p
Eqn. 41-6
where N is the number of modes found. This value gives the

fraction of the total strain energy in the exact static solution that
is captured by the N modes.
When solving for static solutions using quasi-static time-history

analysis, the value of RS should be close to 100% for any applied
static Loads, and also for all nonlinear deformation loads if the
analysis is nonlinear.
Note that when Ritz-vectors are used, the value of RS will always
be 100% for all starting load vectors. This may not be true when
eigenvectors are used. In fact, even using all possible eigenvec-
41 tors will not give 100% static participation if load p acts on any
massless degrees-of-freedom.
Dynamic Load Participation Ratio

The dynamic load participation ratio measures how well the cal-
culated modes can represent the response to a given dynamic
load. This measure was developed for ETABS and SAP2000,
and it is an extension of the concept of participating mass ratios.
It is assumed that the load acts only on degrees of freedom with
mass. Any portion of load vector p that acts on massless degrees
of freedom cannot be represented by this measure and is ignored
in the following discussion.
For a given spatial load vector p, the participation factor for

Mode n is given by Equation 41-4.

The dynamic participation ratio for this mode is given by:
f n2
rnD = Eqn. 41-7
aT p
where a is the acceleration given by Ma = p. The acceleration a

is easy to calculate since M is diagonal. The values of a and p
are taken to be zero at all massless degrees of freedom. Note that
the denominator can also be represented as aTMa
Finally, the cumulative sum of the dynamic participation ratios

for all the calculated modes is also printed:
2
N æ ϕ nT p ö
N å ç
ç ω ÷
÷
è ø
å =
D 1 n
= rnD =
n
R T
Eqn. 41-8
n =1 a p
where N is the number of modes found. When p is one of the

unit acceleration loads, rD is the usual mass participation ratio,
and RD is the usual cumulative mass participation ratio.
When RD is 100%, the calculated modes should be capable of

exactly representing the solution to any time-varying application
of spatial load p. If RD is less than 100%, the accuracy of the so-
lution will depend upon the frequency content of the time- 41
function multiplying load p. Normally it is the high frequency
response that is not captured when RD is less than 100%.
The dynamic load participation ratio only measures how the

modes capture the spatial characteristics of p, not its temporal
characteristics. For this reason, RD serves only as a qualitative
guide as to whether enough modes have been computed. You
must still examine the response to each different dynamic load-
ing with varying number of modes to see if enough modes have
been used.

Final Comments on Static and Dynamic Load Participation

Ratios
Note: The static and dynamic load participation ratios apply to nonlin-
ear dynamic analysis. The static load participation ratios provide
In a nonlinear
you with a measure of how well the modes used have captured
dynamic analy-
sis you should
the forces and displacements in the link elements. When the
always have static load participation ratio is 100% for a link element then the
enough modes modes used have captured the force and deformation in that link
to at least get element. You should always be sure that you have a 100% static
100% static load participation ratio for all of your link elements.
load participa-
tion ratios for The dynamic load participation ratios provide you with a meas-
your link ele- ure of how well the modes used have captured the forces and in
ments. the elements directly around a link element. When the dynamic
load participation ratio is 100% for a link element then the
modes used have captured the forces in the elements adjacent to
the link element.
You should strive to be have the dynamic load participation ratio

as high as possible for your link elements. If the dynamic load
participation ratio is low then local equilibrium at the link ele-
ment may not be satisfied. In other words, the forces in the ele-
ments right around the link element may not balance with those
in the link element.
41
Damping and Accelerations
This information is printed for each response spectrum analysis.
The modal damping and the ground accelerations acting in each
direction are printed for every Mode under the heading:
RESPONSE SPECTRUM ACCELERATIONS
The damping value printed for each Mode is the sum of the
specified CQC or GMC damping ratio plus the modal damping
contributed by effective damping in the link elements, if any.
The accelerations printed for each Mode are the actual values as
interpolated at the modal period from the response-spectrum
curves after scaling by the input scale factors. The accelerations
are always referred to the local axes of the response-spectrum
analysis. They are identified in the output as U1, U2, and U3.

See the section titled "Link Properties" and the subsection titled
"Structural and Function Damping" both in Chapter 11 for in-
formation on the modal damping.
Modal Amplitudes
The response-spectrum modal amplitudes give the multipliers of
the mode shapes that contribute to the displaced shape of the
structure for each direction of Acceleration. For a given Mode
and a given direction of acceleration, this is the product of the
modal participation factor and the response-spectrum accelera-
tion, divided by the eigenvalue, ω2 , of the Mode. These values
are printed under the heading:
RESPONSE SPECTRUM MODAL AMPLITUDES
The acceleration directions are always referred to the local axes

of the response-spectrum analysis. They are identified in the out-
put as U1, U2, and U3.
Base Reactions
The base reactions are the total forces and moments about the
global origin required of the supports (Restraints and Springs) to 41
resist the inertia forces due to response-spectrum loading. These
are printed in the output file under the heading:
RESPONSE SPECTRUM BASE REACTIONS
These are printed separately for each individual Mode and each
direction of loading without any combination. The total re-
sponse-spectrum reactions are then printed after performing mo-
dal combination and directional combination.
The reaction forces and moments are always referred to the local
axes of the response-spectrum analysis. They are identified in the
output as F1, F2, F3, M1, M2, and M3.

Building Output
The following subsections describe the output that is provided
when you check the Building Output check box.
Cumulative Center of Mass

The cumulative center of mass data provides a value of mass and
center of mass at each story level. The mass value reported for a
story level is the sum of the mass at that story level plus all mass
above the story level. Similarly, the center of mass reported is
the center of mass of the mass at that story level plus all mass
above the story level.
Center of Rigidity
Note: The original concept of center of rigidity dates back to manual
rigidity analysis techniques associated with the lateral analysis of
When transla- single story shear wall buildings. The center of rigidity was de-
tional lateral fined as the location of the centroid of the stiffnesses of single
loads are ap-
story lateral resisting elements (typically planar) arbitrarily lo-
plied at the
center of rigid- cated in plan. For single story structures the definition worked
ity of a par- well because the stiffness for each wall frame was a 1 by 1 ma-
ticular floor trix with no interstory coupling or compatibility factors to com-
41 diaphragm as
specified in the
plicate the problem. The analysis technique was extrapolated for
multistory lateral analysis whereby multistory buildings were
ETABS output, analyzed as a series of single story buildings stacked over one
with no loads another with no interstory displacement compatibility. Needless
applied to any to say, for complex three dimensional structures this assumption
of the other was approximate at best.
floor dia-
phragms, the Modern computer techniques do not require the explicit evalua-
displacements
tion of the center of rigidity. However, the center of rigidity still
of that dia-
phragm will
needs to be evaluated because some building codes refer to it as
have only a reference point to define design eccentricity requirements in
translational multistory buildings.
components
with no rota- In the general three-dimensional analysis of a building, where
tions. the behavior is coupled in plan as well as through the height of
the structure, the center of rigidity requires a broader definition.
In this broader definition when translational lateral loads are ap-
plied at the center of rigidity of a particular floor diaphragm,
41 - 12 Building Output
Figure 41-1:
Three load cases
used to determine
the center of rigidity
Case 1: Fx = 1 Case 2: Fy = 1 Case 3: Mz = 1
with no loads applied to any of the other floor diaphragms, the

displacements of that diaphragm will have only translational
components with no rotations. It should be noted that the result-
ing displacements of the diaphragms at other levels in general
will contain translational as well as rotational components.
To evaluate the center of rigidity at a particular diaphragm the

structure is analyzed for three load cases. The loads are applied
at the center of mass (or any arbitrary point). Load case 1 has a
unit load applied in the global X direction and results in a dia-
phragm rotation of Rzx. Load case 2 has a unit load applied in
the global Y direction and results in a diaphragm rotation of Rzy.
Load case 3 has a unit moment applied about the global Z-axis
giving a diaphragm rotation of Rzz. Figure 41-1 illustrates the
three load cases.
The center of rigidity relative to the center of mass (or the arbi-
trary point) is then given by the coordinates (X, Y), where
X = -Rzy / Rzz and Y = Rzx / Rzz. This point is a function of the
structural properties and is independent of any loading.
41
As described above, the determination of the center of rigidity
can be numerically intensive as it involves a static analysis of the
whole structure for three independent load cases for each floor
diaphragm. This procedure is implemented in ETABS so that the
centers of rigidity for every diaphragm are automatically calcu-
lated as part of the solution process.
Story Shears and Overturning Moments

Story shears and overturning moments are reported in the global
coordinate system as P, VX, VY, T, MX and MY. The forces are
reported at the top of the story, just below the story level itself,
and at the bottom of the story, just above the story level below.
Building Output 41 - 13
The sign convention for story level forces is exactly the same as
that for frame elements, shown in Figure 35-1 in Chapter 35 with
the bottom of the story corresponding to the i-end of the frame
element and the top of the story corresponding to the j-end of the
frame element.
41
41 - 14 Building Output
Chapter 42
Database Input/Output Tables
General
You can use the File menu > Export > Save Input/Output as
Access Database File command to save input data and analysis
output data in a Microsoft Access 97 database (*.mdb) file. The
42
data is saved in tables in the database file.
If you have Microsoft Access, or some other database that can

read Microsoft Access 97 files then you can open this database
file and manipulate the input and output data any way you
please. You can also create your own customized output formats
in this way.
All input data that can be printed using the File menu > Print
Tables > Input command is saved in a tabular form in the data-
base file. Similarly, all analysis output data that can be printed
using the File menu > Print Tables > Analysis Output com-
mand is saved in a tabular form in the database file. The format
of the database tables is similar to those printed from the File
menu.
42 - 1
Refer to the documentation for Printed Output Tables in Chapter

41 for information on the analysis output data that is provided in
the database file.
Note that you must have saved your file (.edb) at least once prior
to creating the database file. If you have not saved your file and
you use the File menu > Export > Save Input/Output as Ac-
cess Database File command then ETABS will first bring up the
Save Model File As dialog box so that you can save your model.
Then it will bring up the Save Access Database File As dialog
box so that you can save the database.
42
42 - 2 General
Chapter 43
The ETABS Log and Out Files
General
This chapter discusses the contents of the ETABS .log and .out
files.
The ETABS Log File

43
The analysis log file, more simply called the log file, is created
during the analysis phase of the program. It contains analysis
statistics and results summaries, as well as the details of any
warnings or errors detected during this phase.
It is strongly recommended that you carefully review the con-

tents of the log file for errors, warnings, and the results summa-
ries, including the global force balance relative errors.
If errors are present, the analysis phase of the program will have
terminated before completion. If only warnings are present, the
analysis phase should have completed. In either case, you should
43 - 1
check these errors and warnings carefully before examining the

results of the analysis.
The analysis phase is divided into many sub-phases. The time

and date at the beginning and end of each of these sub-phases is
reported. The date is given in year/month/day format, and the
time is given in hour:minute:second format.
Note: The following additional information is provided in the analysis

log file:
The information
that scrolls by • The amount of memory allocated for data storage, in
in the Analysis
bytes.
Window as the
analysis runs is
saved in the
• The number of elements formed.
ETABS .log file.
• The number of diaphragm constraints formed.
• The number of equations formed, the size of the stiffness

matrix, and the number of loads solved.
• The number of natural frequencies of the model below

frequency shift if eigenvector analysis is performed with
a frequency shift. See the subsection title "Frequency
Range" in Chapter 33 for more information.
• For modal analysis, the control parameters and the num-

ber of Modes found.
43 • For eigenvector analysis, the number of iterations per-

formed.
• For Ritz-vector analysis, the number of generation cy-

cles performed and the reasons for discarding the start-
ing load vectors (if any).
• For response-spectrum analysis, the number of analyses

performed.
• For each time-history analysis, the control parameters

and the number of time steps completed.
43 - 2 The ETABS Log File

Chapter 43 - The ETABS Log and Out Files
• For each nonlinear time-history analysis, the number of

substeps and iterations completed and other statistics.
• The global force balance relative errors. See the section

titled "Global Force Balance" later in this chapter for
more information.
The ETABS Out File

The following information is provided in the ETABS .out file.
• Diaphragm constraint masses and center of mass loca-

tion.
• Displacement degrees of freedom are listed in a tabular

form
• Global force balance. See the section titled "Global

Force Balance" later in this chapter.
Global Force Balance

Tip: For each Analysis Case, the sum of all joint forces and moments
acting on the structure should be in equilibrium. The program
You should
computes and prints a global force balance for the following
always review
the global force
types of Analysis Cases: static loads, modes, Response spectrum
43
balance as a cases, and load combinations. No global force balance is com-
check on the puted for time histories, nonlinear static load cases, or load com-
validity of the binations. You should always review the global force balance
structural as a check on the validity of the structural model and the
model and the analysis.
analysis.
For each Analysis Case, the program computes the resultants at
the global origin for all joint forces and moments acting on the
structure. Separate resultants are computed for each type of joint
force:
• Applied loads
The ETABS Out File 43 - 3

• Inertial loads
• Spring forces
• Link forces
• Restraint Forces (Reactions)
• Diaphragm constraint forces
• P-Delta forces
Each force resultant is computed as the sum of the forces acting

on all joints in the structure. Each moment resultant is computed
as the sum of the moments acting on all joints in the structure,
plus the moments about the origin of the forces acting on all
joints in the structure. This results in three force and three mo-
ment components, all referred to the global coordinate system.
The resultants are also computed for the total of all these differ-
ent forces and moments acting on the structure. These total re-
sultants should be zero if the structure is in exact equilibrium.
Due to the approximate nature of computer arithmetic, the totals
may not be exactly zero. However, their values relative to the
magnitude of the contributing forces gives a measure of the ac-
curacy and stability of the solution.
The resultant forces and moments are always printed in the .out
file for all Analysis Cases under the heading:
43 GLOBAL FORCE BALANCE
In addition, relative equilibrium errors are printed in the log file

under the heading:
GLOBAL FORCE BALANCE RELATIVE ERRORS
Here the total force and moment components are expressed as a

percentage of the maximum possible equilibrium error. The
maximum possible error is computed as follows:
• For each component (FX, FY, FZ, MX, MY, and MZ),
the absolute values of the resultants for applied loads,
inertial loads, spring forces, link forces, reactions, con-
straint forces, and P-Delta forces are summed.
43 - 4 Global Force Balance

Chapter 43 - The ETABS Log and Out Files
• The maximum of the absolute sums for FX, FY, and FZ

is determined.
• The maximum of the absolute sums for MX, MY, and

MZ is determined.
• The maximum possible error for the force components is

the maximum of the absolute force sums, or the maxi-
mum of the absolute moment sums divided by the aver-
age moment arm for the structure, whichever is larger.
• The maximum possible error for the moment compo-

nents is the maximum of the absolute moment sums, or
the maximum of the absolute force sums multiplied by
the average moment arm for the structure, whichever is
larger.
This definition, while complicated, helps assure that only nu-

merically meaningful equilibrium errors are indicated as such.
It is strongly recommended that you always review the global

force balance in the output file and the relative equilibrium
errors in the log file. These results can alert you to potential
problems with the structural model or the analysis. In particular,
you should look for the following:
• The accuracy of the computer calculations is on the or-

der of 10-15, or 10-13 percent. If the relative force or mo-
ment error for the Load Cases is significantly larger than
this, it may indicate that the structure is unstable or that 43
the stiffness matrix is ill-conditioned.
• You can expect somewhat larger equilibrium errors for

Vibration Modes than for Load Cases. For Eigen Modes,
the errors generally reflect the convergence tolerance
and can be reduced by using a smaller tolerance. For
Ritz Modes, the errors indicate the fact that the Ritz
modes are not the true Eigen Modes of the structure.
These errors can generally be reduced by requesting
more modes. Some Modes with large errors may be or-
thogonal to the Ritz starting vectors and have no effect
upon response-spectrum and time-history analyses.
Global Force Balance 43 - 5

• The diaphragm constraint forces should be self-

equilibrating, i.e., the resultant constraint forces and
moments should be essentially zero. If the values are
significantly different from zero (compared to the other
resultants), the constraints may be poorly defined. An
example of this is a diaphragm constraint whose points
are not all in the same plane. In-plane forces in such a
diaphragm can cause moments that are not captured by
the structural model. Such errors in the constraints affect
the validity of the model even though the overall equilib-
rium of the structure may be satisfied.
Note: Important Note: The relative equilibrium errors are a good first
check for possible problems in your model. However, high rela-
A high relative
tive equilibrium errors are not always indicative of a problem
equilibrium
error is not
with your model. For example, suppose that a total force compo-
always indica- nent in your model is equal to 1E-10 and that the maximum pos-
tive of a prob- sible error for that component is also 1E-10. In this case ETABS
lem in your reports the relative equilibrium error as 100%. Even though the
model. It simply relative equilibrium error is 100%, the maximum possible error
indicates the of 1E-10 is in general not a problem.
possibility of a
problem that When you see a high relative equilibrium error you should take it
should be in- as a clue to investigate further by looking at the global force bal-
vestigated fur- ance to see if a problem really exists. Again a high relative equi-
ther. librium error in itself does not always mean there is a problem in
your model.
43
43 - 6 Global Force Balance

Chapter 44
Inserting ETABS Output into Written Reports
General
In some instances you may want to include some output from
ETABS in your written reports. This chapter provides a few
ideas for how you might do this. Both tabular and graphical
44
types of output are discussed.
Tabular Output
Note: The simplest and most straight forward way to include tabular
output from ETABS in your written reports is to print the desired
You can insert
output to a file and then cut the data from the file and paste it
tabular and
graphical out-
into your report. You can then reformat it if necessary. Use the
put from File menu > Print Tables command to initially print out the
ETABS into output. Be sure to check the Print to File check box when se-
your written lecting the data to be output.
reports.
A second more powerful way to bring data into your reports is to
use the File menu > Export > Save Input/Output as Access
44 - 1
Tip: Database File command to save the input and output for your
model in a series of tables in a Microsoft Access .mdb file (com-
You can create
patible with Microsoft Access 97). If you are familiar with Mi-
customized
tabular output
crosoft Access, and you have an available copy of the program,
for your reports then you can then create your own customized reports (output)
using Microsoft within Microsoft Access. These customized reports can then be
Access. incorporated into your written report.
Graphical Output
You can use the File menu > Export > Save Graphics as En-
hanced Metafile command to save the graphics displayed in the
currently active window to a Windows enhanced metafile (.emf)
file. You can then insert this picture directly into your report.
Alternatively, you may want to insert the picture into a graphics
program (e.g., Microsoft PowerPoint) and add some annotations
or make some other changes before pasting it into your report.
An alternative method of getting graphical output for your re-

ports is to use the built-in Windows screen capture features. If
you press the Print Screen key on your keyboard then Windows
copies the entire screen as a picture to the clipboard. You can
then paste this picture into a graphics program or even directly
into your report. If you press the Alt key and the Print Screen
key simultaneously on your keyboard, then Windows copies the
active window on the screen to the clipboard as a picture.
44
Some of the (black and white) figures in this manual that show
pictures of the ETABS interface or pictures of ETABS models
were created using the following technique:
1. Click the View menu > Set Building View Options

command and select the White Background, Black Ob-
jects option in the "View by Colors of" area of the dialog
box. (This option is useful if you want to capture black
and white pictures. If you want your pictures in color
then you may want to use the Options > Colors >Dis-
play command to change the background color, perhaps
to white).
2. Set the ETABS display up as you want it to appear in the

picture.
44 - 2 Graphical Output
Chapter 44 - Inserting ETABS Output into Written Reports
3. Press the Alt key and the Print Screen key simultane-
ously on your keyboard to copy the screen image to the
clipboard as a picture.
4. Paste the picture from the clipboard into a graphics pro-

gram. (We used Microsoft PowerPoint).
5. If necessary crop and/or resize the picture.
6. In some cases add annotations to the picture.
7. Cut and paste the completed figure from the graphics

program into your report as a picture.
44
Graphical Output 44 - 3
Chapter 45
Steel Frame Design

Any line object that ETABS has assigned a Steel Frame design
procedure can be designed in the Steel Frame Design postpro-
cessor. See the section titled "ETABS Default Design Procedure
Assignments" in Chapter 17 for more information.
This section describes the intended steel frame design procedure

and the menu commands available for steel frame design. Before
describing the design procedure or menu items it is important
that you understand the distinction between analysis sections and
design sections. This is discussed first.
45
Analysis Sections and Design Sections

Analysis sections are those section properties used to analyze the
model when you click the Analyze menu > Run Analysis com-
mand. The design section is whatever section has most currently
been designed and thus designated the current design section.
45 - 1
It is possible for the last used analysis section and the current de-
sign section to be different. For example you may have run your
analysis using a W18X35 beam and then found in the design that
a W16X31 beam worked. In this case the last used analysis sec-
tion is the W18X35 and the current design section is the
W16X31. Before you complete the design process you want to
make sure that the last used analysis section and the current de-
sign section is the same. The Design menu > Steel Frame De-
sign > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command, which is
useful for this task, is discussed more in later subsections.
ETABS keeps track of the analysis section and the design section
separately. Note the following about analysis and design sec-
tions:
• Anytime you assign a line object a frame section prop-

erty using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame
Section command ETABS assigns this section as both
the analysis section and the design section.
Note: • Whenever you run an analysis using the Analyze menu

> Run Analysis command (or its associated toolbar
Any time you
unlock your
button) ETABS always sets the analysis section to be the
model your same as the current design section.
design results
(and analysis • When you use the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
results) are Frame Section command to assign an auto select list to
deleted. a frame section ETABS initially sets the design section
to be the section with the median weight in the auto se-
lect list.
45 • Anytime you unlock your model ETABS deletes your
design results but it does not delete or change the design
section.
• Anytime you use the Design menu > Steel Frame De-
sign > Select Design Combo command to change a de-
sign load combination ETABS deletes your design re-
sults but it does not delete or change the design section.
45 - 2 Analysis Sections and Design Sections

Chapter 45 - Steel Frame Design
• Anytime you use the Define menu > Load Combina-

tions command to change a design load combination
ETABS deletes your design results but it does not delete
or change the design section.
• Anytime you use the Options menu > Preferences >

Steel Frame Design command to change any of the
steel frame design preferences ETABS deletes your de-
sign results but it does not delete or change the design
section.
• Anytime you do something that causes your static non-

linear analysis results to be deleted then the design re-
sults for any load combination that includes static non-
linear forces are also deleted. Typically your static non-
linear analysis and design results are deleted when you
do one of the following:
ü Use the Define menu > Frame Nonlinear Hinge

Properties command to redefine existing or define
new hinges.
ü Use the Define menu > Static Nonlinear/Pushover

Cases command to redefine existing or define new
static nonlinear load cases.
ü Use the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame

Nonlinear Hinges to add or delete hinges.
Again note that this only deletes results for load combi-
nations that include static nonlinear forces.
45
Steel Frame Design Procedure
Following is a typical steel frame design process that might oc-
cur for a new building. Note that the sequence of steps you may
take in any particular design may vary from this but the basic
process will probably be essentially the same.
1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Steel Frame De-
sign command to choose the steel frame design code and to
review other steel frame design preferences and revise them
if necessary. Note that there are default values provided for
Steel Frame Design Procedure 45 - 3

all steel frame design preferences so it is not actually neces-

sary for you to define any preferences unless you want to
change some of the default preference values.
2. Create the building model. See the section titled "Modeling

Process" in Chapter 6 for more information.
3. Run the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run
Analysis command.
4. Assign steel frame overwrites, if needed, using the Design

menu > Steel Frame Design > View/Revise Overwrites
command. Note that you must select frame elements first be-
fore using this command. Also note that there are default
values provided for all steel frame design overwrites so it is
not actually necessary for you to define any overwrites un-
less you want to change some of the default overwrite val-
ues.
Note: 5. Designate design groups, if desired, using the Design menu

> Steel Frame Design > Select Design Group command.
Steel frame
Note that you must have already created some groups by se-
design is an
iterative proc-
lecting objects and clicking the Assign menu > Group
ess. You must Names command.
run the analysis
and design 6. If you want to use any design load combinations other than
multiple times the default ones created by ETABS for your steel frame de-
to complete the sign then click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design >
design process. Select Design Combo command. Note that you must have
already created your own design combos by clicking the De-
45 fine menu > Load Combinations command.
7. Designate lateral displacement targets for various load cases

using the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Set Lat-
eral Displacement Targets command.
8. Click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Start De-
sign/Check of Structure command to run the steel frame
design.
45 - 4 Steel Frame Design Procedure

9. Review the steel frame design results. To do this you might

a. Click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Dis-
play Design Info command to display design input and
output information on the model.
b. Right click on a frame element while the design results

are displayed on it to enter the interactive design mode
and interactively design the frame element. Note that
while you are in this mode you can revise overwrites and
immediately see the results of the new design.
If you are not currently displaying design results you can

click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Inter-
active Steel Frame Design command and then right
click a frame element to enter the interactive design
mode for that element.
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Steel Frame De-
sign command to print steel frame design data. If you
select a few frame elements before using this command
then data is printed only for the selected elements.
10. Use the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Change De-
sign Section command to change the design section proper-
ties for selected frame elements.
sign/Check of Structure command to rerun the steel frame
design with the new section properties. Review the results
using the procedures described above. 45
12. Rerun the building analysis using the Analyze menu > Run
Analysis command. Note that the section properties used for
the analysis are the last specified design section properties.
13. Compare your lateral displacements with your lateral dis-

placement targets.
Steel Frame Design Procedure 45 - 5

design with the new analysis results and new section proper-
ties. Review the results using the procedures described
above.
15. Again use the Design menu > Steel Frame Design >
Change Design Section command to change the design sec-
tion properties for selected frame elements, if necessary.
16. Repeat the process in steps 12, 13, 14 and 15 as many times
as necessary.
17. Select all frame elements and click the Design menu > Steel
Frame Design > Make Auto Select Section Null command.
This removes any auto select section assignments from the
selected frame elements (if they have the Steel Frame design
procedure).
19. Verify that your lateral displacements are within acceptable

limits.
design with the new section properties. Review the results
using the procedures described above.
45 21. Click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Verify
Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that all of
the final design sections are the same as the last used analy-
sis sections.
22. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Steel Frame Design
command to print selected steel frame design results if de-
sired.
It is important to note that design is an iterative process. The

sections that you use to run your original analysis are not typi-
cally the same sections that you end up with at the end of the de-
sign process. You always want to be sure to run a building
45 - 6 Steel Frame Design Procedure

analysis using your final frame section sizes and then run a de-
sign check based on the forces obtained from that analysis. The
Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs De-
sign Section command is useful for making sure that the design
sections are the same as the analysis sections.
The following section describes the menu items available on the

Design menu > Steel Frame Design submenu.
Steel Frame Design Menu Commands

This section describes each of the steel frame design menu
commands that are available in ETABS. You can find these
commands by clicking Design menu > Steel Frame Design.
Select Design Group

In ETABS steel frame design you have the option of grouping
Note: elements for design. When you specify a group for design all
Frame elements elements in the group are given the same section. Note the fol-
designed as a lowing information related to using groups for steel frame de-
group are all sign.
given the same
section size • Define the groups in the usual way, that is, by selecting
the frame elements and clicking the Assign menu >
Group Names command.
Tip: • After the group is defined use the Design menu > Steel
45
Frame Design > Select Design Group command to
Frame elements
designed as a
designate that the group is to be used as a design group.
part of a group
must be as-
• Designing with groups only works if you have assigned
signed auto auto select sections to the frame elements. Typically you
select section would assign the same auto select section to each frame
lists. element in the group although this is not absolutely nec-
essary. Any frame elements in a design group not as-
signed an auto select section are ignored for group de-
sign and are designed individually.
Steel Frame Design Menu Commands 45 - 7

Select Design Combo

Click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Select Design
Combo command to open the Design Load Combinations Se-
lection dialog box. Here you can review the default steel frame
design load combinations defined by ETABS and/or you can
designate your own design load combinations.
In the dialog box all of the available design load combinations

are listed in the List of Combos list box. The design load combi-
nations actually used in the design are listed in the Design Com-
bos list box. You can use the Add button and the Remove button
to move load combinations into and out of the Design Combos
list box. Use the Show button to see the definition of a design
load combination. All three buttons act on the highlighted design
load combination. You can use the Ctrl and Shift keys to make
multiple selections in this dialog box for use with the Add and
Remove buttons, if desired.
The default steel frame design load combinations have names

like DSTL1, etc.
View/Revise Overwrites
Use the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > View/Revise
Tip:
Overwrites command to review and/or change the steel frame
The steel frame overwrites. You may not need to assign any steel frame over-
design overwrites; however the option is always available to you.
writes only ap-
ply to the frame The steel frame design overwrites are basic properties that apply
45 elements that
they are spe-
only to the frame elements that they are specifically assigned to.
Some of the default overwrite values are based on steel frame
cifically as-
preferences. Thus you should define the preferences before de-
signed to.
fining the overwrites (and, of course, before designing or
checking any steel frame members).
You can select one or more frame elements for which you want
to specify overwrites. To change an overwrite check the check
box to the left of the overwrite name and then click in the cell to
the right of the overwrite name to change the overwrite.
45 - 8 Steel Frame Design Menu Commands

You must check the box to the left of an overwrite item for that
item to be changed in the overwrites. If the check box for an item
is not checked when you click the OK button to exit the over-
writes form then no changes are made to the item. This is true
whether you have one frame element selected or multiple frame
elements selected.
Set Lateral Displacement Targets

Click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Set Lateral
Displacement Targets command to open the Displacement Op-
timization dialog box where you can specify displacement tar-
gets for various load cases. Our intent is that you pick a point,
typically at the roof level of your building, and specify a maxi-
mum displacement target (in any direction) for one or more load
cases.
In the Loads area of the dialog box you specify the Load Case
for which you want to optimize the displacement, the location
where you are specifying the displacement (by point ID and
story level) and the target displacement. When these are speci-
fied to your satisfaction in the Loads area then click the Add
button. You can specify as many load cases and displacements as
you want.
If you want to modify an existing displacement optimization

specification then click on it in the Loads area to highlight it.
Note that the data for the specification appears in the boxes at the
top of the Loads area. Modify the data in the boxes as desired.
Then click the Modify button.
45
Tip: If you want to delete an existing displacement optimization
specification then click on it in the Loads area to highlight it.
Frame elements
Note that the data for the specification appears in the boxes at the
must have auto
select list as-
top of the Loads area. Then click the Delete button.
signments to be
designed using
Note the following about the displacement optimization per-
displacement formed by ETABS:
optimization.
• ETABS predicts which members should be increased in
size to control the displacements based on the energy per
unit volume in the members. The members with more
energy per unit volume are increased in size a larger per-

centage than those with smaller energies per unit vol-

ume. Some members with small energy per unit volume
may be decreased in size if they are still acceptable for
strength considerations.
• You must have auto select lists assigned to the frame

elements for the displacement optimization to do any-
thing. When ETABS goes to increase or decrease a sec-
tion size it uses the available sizes in the auto select list.
• There is no guarantee that you will reach your displace-

ment target just because you specified this option. You
always need to rerun your analysis with the new section
sizes to see what your new displacements are. Displace-
ment optimization is an iterative process that typically
requires you to rerun the analysis and design multiple
times.
• If you do not have the appropriate sections in your auto

select lists then you may never reach your displacement
target no matter how many times you iterate by rerun-
ning the analysis and design.
Start Design/Check of Structure

To run a steel frame design simply click Design menu > Steel
Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure. This option
will not be available if you have not first run a building analysis.
It will also be unavailable if there are no frame elements with the
45 Steel Frame design procedure in the model.
If you have selected frame elements when you click this com-
mand then only the selected frame elements are designed. If no
frame elements are selected when you click this command then
all steel frame elements with the Steel Frame design procedure
are designed.

Interactive Steel Frame Design

Interactive steel frame design allows you to review the design re-
sults for any frame element and to interactively change the de-
sign overwrites and immediately view the results again.
Right click on a frame element while the design results are dis-
played on it to enter the interactive design mode and interac-
tively design the element. If you are not currently displaying de-
sign results you can click the Design menu > Steel Frame De-
sign > Interactive Steel Frame Design command and then right
click a frame element to enter the interactive design mode for
that element.
See the section titled "ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design"

later in this chapter for more information.
Display Design Info

You can review some of the results of the steel frame design di-
rectly on the ETABS model using the Design menu > Steel
Frame Design > Display Design Info command. The types of
things you can display include design sections, unbraced lengths,
effective length factors, allowable stresses, and stress ratio in-
formation.
Make Auto Select Section Null

The Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Make Auto Select
Tip:
Section Null command is used to remove auto select section lists 45
You normally from selected frame elements. Typically you should remove auto
use the Make select lists from all frame elements near the end of the iterative
Auto Select
design process so that your final design iteration is done with
Section Null
feature near the
actual frame sections assigned, not auto select sections.
end of the it-
Setting the auto select section to null does not change the current
erative design
process. design section for the frame element.

The Make Auto Select Section Null command only works on a

selection that you make. Thus you should select the elements
whose auto select sections are to be made null prior to executing
this command. If you do not select any elements this command
will not be available. Often you may want to select all elements
prior to executing this command.
The Make Auto Select Section Null command is not active until
the first design has been run. If you have not yet run a design and
you want to remove the auto select property then use the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section command to change the
section property.
Change Design Section

After you have run a steel frame design, you may want to change
the design section property assigned to one or more frame ele-
ments and then rerun the design without first rerunning the
analysis. You can use the Design menu > Steel Frame Design >
Change Design Section command to change the design section
property and then use the Design menu > Steel Frame Design >
Start Design/Check of Structure to rerun the design.
The Change Design Section command only works on a selec-

Note:
tion that you make. Thus you should select the elements whose
You can change design sections are to be changed prior to executing this com-
the element mand. If you do not select any elements this command will not
design sections be available.
and rerun the
design as many
45
The Change Design Section command only changes the design
times as you
section for the frame element. The forces used in the design are
want without
rerunning the not based on this new section size but are instead based on what-
analysis. ever section was used in the last analysis.
Recall, however, that the design section property is used for the
next analysis section property. Thus changing the design section
property also changes the next analysis section property. If an
auto select section is assigned to a frame element you can control
the section property used for that frame element in the next
analysis by setting the design section property to the desired sec-
tion using the Change Design Section command and then re-
running the analysis.

Reset Design Section to Last Analysis

In some instances you may change your design section several
times and then decide that you want to set the design section for
one or more frame elements back to the last used analysis sec-
tion. The Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Reset Design
Section to Last Analysis command gives you a quick and easy
way of doing this.
The Reset Design Section to Last Analysis command only

works on a selection that you make. Thus you should select the
elements whose design sections are to be reset prior to imple-
menting this command. If you do not select any elements this
command will not be available.
Verify Analysis vs Design Section

When the iterative design process is complete the last used
analysis section property for a frame element and the current de-
sign section property for that frame element should be the same.
If this is not the case then the frame element may not have been
designed for the correct forces. The Design menu > Steel
Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command
is useful for verifying that the last used analysis section and the
current design section are the same for all steel frame elements
in the model.
When you execute the Verify Analysis vs Design Section com-

mand ETABS tells you how many frame elements with the Steel
Frame design procedure have different analysis and design sec-
tions and then selects those frame elements, if you ask it to. 45
Typically you might use this command after you have run what
you believe is your last design iteration just to verify that the
analysis and design properties used are consistent.
It is not necessary to make a selection before using the Verify

Analysis vs Design Section command. This command automati-
cally checks all frame sections with the Steel Frame design pro-
cedure.

Reset All Steel Overwrites

The Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Reset All Steel
Overwrites command resets the overwrites for all frame sections
with the Steel Frame design procedure back to their default val-
ues. It is not necessary to make a selection before using the Re-
set All Steel Overwrites command. This command automati-
cally applies to all frame sections with the Steel Frame design
procedure.
Resetting your overwrites will reduce the size of your ETABS

database (*.edb) file.
Delete Steel Design Results

The Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Delete Steel Design
Results command deletes all of the steel frame design results. It
is not necessary to make a selection before using the Delete
Steel Design Results command. This command automatically
applies to all frame sections with the Steel Frame design proce-
dure.
Deleting your steel frame design results will reduce the size of
your ETABS database (*.edb) file. Note that deleting your steel
design results does not delete your current design section (next
analysis section).
ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design

45 Right click on a frame element while the design results are dis-
tively design the element in the Steel Stress Check Information
dialog box. If you are not currently displaying design results you
can click the Design menu > Steel Frame Design > Interactive
Steel Frame Design command and then right click a frame ele-
ment to enter the interactive design mode for that element.
The following bullet items describe the features that are included
in the Steel Stress Check Information dialog box.
45 - 14 ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design

• Story ID: This is the story level ID associated with the

frame element.
• Beam: This is the label associated with a frame element

that is a beam. If the frame element is a column then this
Tip: item is titled Column. If the frame element is a brace
then this item is titled Brace.
The section
property dis-
• Column: This is the label associated with a frame ele-
played for the
Current De-
ment that is a column. If the frame element is a beam
sign/Next then this item is titled Beam. If the frame element is a
Analysis item is brace then this item is titled Brace.
used by ETABS
as the section • Brace: This is the label associated with a frame element
property for the that is a brace. If the frame element is a beam then this
next analysis item is titled Beam. If the frame element is a column
run. then this item is titled Column.
• Analysis section: This is the section property that was

used for this frame element in the last analysis. Thus the
design forces are based on a frame element of this sec-
tion property. For your final design iteration the Current
Design/Next Analysis section property and the Last
Analysis section property should be the same.
• Design section: This is the current design section prop-

erty. If the frame element is assigned an auto select list
then the section displayed in this dialog box initially de-
faults to the optimal section.
If there is no auto select list assigned to the frame ele-

ment then the element design is done for the section
45
property specified in this edit box.
It is important to note that subsequent analyses use the

section property specified in this list box for the next
analysis section for the frame element. Thus the forces
and moments obtained in the next analysis will be based
on this section.
You can change the Current Design/Next Analysis sec-

tion property in the overwrites. Click the Overwrites
button to do this.
ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design 45 - 15

• Table showing stress details: This table shows the

stress ratios obtained for each design load combination
at each output station along the frame element. Initially
the worst stress ratio is highlighted.
Following are the headings in the table:
ü Combo ID: This is the name of the design load

combination considered.
ü Station location: This is the location of the station

considered, measured from the i-end of the frame
element.
ü Ratio: This is the total PMM stress ratio for the

element. When stress ratios are reported for this item
they are followed by either (T) or (C). The (T) item
indicates that the axial component of the stress ratio
is tension. The (C) item indicates that the axial com-
ponent of the stress ratio is compression. Note that
typically the interaction formulas are different de-
pending on whether the axial stress is tension or
compression.
ü Axl: This is the axial component of the PMM stress

ratio.
ü B-Maj: This is the bending component of the PMM

stress ratio for bending about the major axis. See the
subsection titled "Local Axes Assignments to Line
45 Objects" in Chapter 14 for a definition of the major
axis.
ü B-Min: This is the bending component of the PMM

stress ratio for bending about the minor axis. See the
subsection titled "Local Axes Assignments to Line
Objects" in Chapter 14 for a definition of the minor
axis.
45 - 16 ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design

ü Maj Shr Ratio: This is the shear stress ratio for

shear acting in the major direction of the frame ele-
ment. See the subsection titled "Local Axes Assign-
ments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for a definition
of the major direction.
ü Min Shr Ratio: This is the shear stress ratio for

shear acting in the minor direction of the frame ele-
ment. See the subsection titled "Local Axes Assign-
ments to Line Objects" in Chapter 14 for a definition
of the minor direction.
Note: • Details button: Clicking this button displays design de-

tails for the frame element. You can print this informa-
You can change
the steel frame
tion by selecting Print from the File menu that appears at
design over- the top of the window displaying the design details.
writes and in-
stantaneously • Overwrites button: You can click this button to access
see the new and make revisions to the steel frame overwrites and
design results. then immediately see the new design results. If you
modify some overwrites in this mode and you exit both
the Steel Frame Design Overwrites form and the Steel
Stress Check Information dialog box by clicking their
respective OK buttons then the changes you made to the
overwrites are permanently saved.
When you exit the Steel Frame Design Overwrites form

by clicking the OK button the changes are temporarily
saved. If you then exit the Steel Stress Check Informa-
tion dialog box by clicking the Cancel button the
changes you made to the steel frame overwrites are con- 45
sidered temporary only and are not permanently saved.
Permanent saving of the overwrites does not actually oc-
cur until you click the OK button in the Steel Stress
Check Information dialog box, not the Steel Frame De-
sign Overwrites dialog box.
ETABS Interactive Steel Frame Design 45 - 17

Chapter 46

Any line object that ETABS has assigned a Concrete Frame de-
sign procedure can be designed in the Concrete Frame Design
Note: postprocessor. See the section titled "ETABS Default Design
A concrete Procedure Assignments" in Chapter 17 for more information.
frame element
is designed as The concrete frame design postprocessor can design or check
either a beam concrete columns and can design concrete beams.
or a column
depending on Important Note: A concrete frame element is designed as either
how its frame
section prop-
a beam or a column depending on how its frame section property
was designated when it was defined using the Define menu > 46
erty was desig- Frame Sections command. Note that when using this command,
nated when it once you specify that a section has a concrete material property
was defined
using the De-
you can click on the Reinforcement button and specify whether
fine menu > it is a beam or a column. See the section titled "Reinforcing for
Frame Sections Concrete Frame Section Properties" in Chapter 11 for more in-
command. formation.
46 - 1
This section describes the intended concrete frame design proce-

dure and the menu commands available for concrete frame de-
sign. Before describing the design procedure or menu items it is
important that you understand the distinction between analysis
sections and design sections. This is discussed first.

analysis using a 12 inch by 24 inch beam and then found in the
design that a 12 inch by 18 inch beam worked. In this case the
last used analysis section is the 12 inch by 24 inch beam and the
current design section is the 12 inch by 18 inch beam. Before
you complete the design process you want to make sure that the
last used analysis section and the current design section is the
same. The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify
Analysis vs Design Section command, which is useful for this
task, is discussed more in later subsections.
Note: ETABS keeps track of the analysis section and the design section
Any time you
unlock your
tions:
model your
design results • Any time you assign a line object a frame section prop-
46 (and analysis erty using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame
Section command ETABS assigns this section as both
results) are
deleted. the analysis section and the design section.
• Whenever you run an analysis using the Analyze menu

button) ETABS always sets the analysis section to be the
same as the current design section.

Chapter 46 - Concrete Frame Design
• Anytime you unlock your model ETABS deletes your

section.
• Anytime you use the Design menu > Concrete Frame

Design > Select Design Combo command to change a
design load combination ETABS deletes your design re-


Concrete Frame Design command to change any of the
concrete frame design preferences ETABS deletes your
section.


new hinges.

46

Analysis Sections and Design Sections 46 - 3

Concrete Frame Design Procedure

Following is a typical concrete frame design process that might
occur for a new building. Note that the sequence of steps you
may take in any particular design may vary from this but the ba-
sic process will probably be essentially the same.
1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Concrete Frame

Design command to choose the concrete frame design code
and to review other concrete frame design preferences and
revise them if necessary. Note that there are default values
provided for all concrete frame design preferences so it is
not actually necessary for you to define any preferences un-
less you want to change some of the default preference val-
ues.

Analysis command.
4. Assign concrete frame overwrites, if needed, using the De-

sign menu > Concrete Frame Design > View/Revise
Overwrites command. Note that you must select frame ele-
Note: ments first before using this command. Also note that there
are default values provided for all concrete frame design
Concrete frame
overwrites so it is not actually necessary for you to define
design is an
iterative proc-
any overwrites unless you want to change some of the de-
ess. You must fault overwrite values.
run the analysis
46 and design
multiple times
5. If you want to use any design load combinations other than
the default ones created by ETABS for your concrete frame
to complete the design then click the Design menu > Concrete Frame De-
design process. sign > Select Design Combo command. Note that you must
have already created your own design combos by clicking
the Define menu > Load Combinations command.
6. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Start
Design/Check of Structure command to run the concrete
frame design.
46 - 4 Concrete Frame Design Procedure

7. Review the concrete frame design results. To do this you

might do one of the following:
a. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >

Display Design Info command to display design input
and output information on the model.
b. Right click on a frame element while the design results

are displayed on it to enter the interactive design mode
and interactively design the frame element. Note that
while you are in this mode you can revise overwrites and
immediately see the results of the new design.

click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > In-
teractive Concrete Frame Design command and then
right click a frame element to enter the interactive design
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame
Design command to print concrete frame design data. If
you select a few frame elements before using this com-
mand then data is printed only for the selected elements.
8. Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Change
Design Section command to change the design section prop-
erties for selected frame elements.
Design/Check of Structure command to rerun the concrete
frame design with the new section properties. Review the re-
46
sults using the procedures described above.
frame design with the new analysis results and new section
properties. Review the results using the procedures described
above.
Concrete Frame Design Procedure 46 - 5

12. Again use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >
Change Design Section command to change the design sec-
tion properties for selected frame elements, if necessary.
13. Repeat the process in steps 10, 11 and 12 as many times as

necessary.
frame design with the new section properties. Review the re-
sults using the procedures described above.
16. Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify
Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that all of
the final design sections are the same as the last used analy-
sis sections.
17. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Concrete Frame De-
sign command to print selected concrete frame design results
if desired.

analysis using your final frame section sizes and then run a de-
46
Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs
Design Section command is useful for making sure that the de-
sign sections are the same as the analysis sections.

Design menu > Concrete Frame Design submenu.
46 - 6 Concrete Frame Design Procedure

Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands

This section describes each of the concrete frame design menu
commands by clicking Design menu > Concrete Frame De-
sign.
Select Design Combo

Click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Select De-
sign Combo command to open the Design Load Combinations
Selection dialog box. Here you can review the default concrete
frame design load combinations defined by ETABS and/or you
can designate your own design load combinations.

The default concrete frame design load combinations have

names like DCON1, etc.
View/Revise Overwrites 46
Use the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design >
Tip:
View/Revise Overwrites command to review and/or change the
The concrete concrete frame overwrites. You may not need to assign any con-
frame design crete frame overwrites; however the option is always available to
overwrites only you.
apply to the
frame elements The concrete frame design overwrites are basic properties that
that they are
apply only to the frame elements that they are specifically as-
specifically
signed to. Some of the default overwrite values are based on
assigned to.
concrete frame preferences. Thus you should define the prefer-
Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands 46 - 7

ences before defining the overwrites (and, of course, before de-

signing or checking any concrete frame members).
You can select one or more frame elements for which you want
to specify overwrites. To change an overwrite check the check
box to the left of the overwrite name and then click in the cell to
the right of the overwrite name to change the overwrite.
whether you have one frame element selected or multiple frame
elements selected.

To run a concrete frame design simply click Design menu >
Concrete Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure.
This option will not be available if you have not first run a
building analysis. It will also be unavailable if there are no frame
elements with the Concrete Frame design procedure in the
model.
If you have selected frame elements when you click this com-
mand then only the selected frame elements are designed. If no
frame elements are selected when you click this command then
all concrete frame elements with the Concrete Frame design pro-
cedure are designed.
46 Interactive Concrete Frame Design

Interactive concrete frame design allows you to review the de-
sign results for any frame element and to interactively change the
design overwrites and immediately view the results again.
tively design the element. If you are not currently displaying de-
sign results you can click the Design menu > Concrete Frame
Design > Interactive Concrete Frame Design command and
then right click a frame element to enter the interactive design
46 - 8 Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands

See the subsection titled "ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame

Design" later in this chapter for more information.
Display Design Info

You can review some of the results of the concrete frame design
directly on the ETABS model using the Design menu > Con-
crete Frame Design > Display Design Info command. The
types of things you can display include design sections, unbraced
lengths and longitudinal reinforcing.

After you have run a concrete frame design, you may want to
change the design section property assigned to one or more
frame elements and then rerun the design without first rerunning
the analysis. You can use the Design menu > Concrete Frame
Design > Change Design Section command to change the de-
sign section property and then use the Design menu > Concrete
Frame Design > Start Design/Check of Structure to rerun the
design.

Note:
You can change design sections are to be changed prior to executing this com-
the element mand. If you do not select any elements this command will not
design sections be available.
and rerun the
design as many The Change Design Section command only changes the design
times as you
section for the frame element. The forces used in the design are
want without
rerunning the
analysis.
not based on this new section size but are instead based on what-
ever section was used in the last analysis.
46
Recall, however, that the design section property is used for the
next analysis section property. Thus changing the design section
auto select section is assigned to a frame element you can control
the section property used for that frame element in the next
analysis by setting the design section property to the desired sec-
tion using the Change Design Section command and then re-
running the analysis.
Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands 46 - 9


one or more frame elements back to the last used analysis sec-
tion. The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset De-
sign Section to Last Analysis command gives you a quick and
easy way of doing this.
The Reset Design Section to Last Analysis command only


analysis section property for a frame element and the current de-
sign section property for that frame element should be the same.
If this is not the case then the frame element may not have been
designed for the correct forces. The Design menu > Concrete
Frame Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command
is useful for verifying that the last used analysis section and the
current design section are the same for all concrete frame ele-
ments in the model.

mand ETABS tells you how many frame elements with the Con-
crete Frame design procedure have different analysis and design
sections and then selects those frame elements, if you ask it to.
46 Typically you might use this command after you have run what

cally checks all frame sections with the Concrete Frame design
procedure.
46 - 10 Concrete Frame Design Menu Commands

Reset All Concrete Overwrites

The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Reset All Con-
crete Overwrites command resets the overwrites for all frame
sections with the Concrete Frame design procedure back to their
default values. It is not necessary to make a selection before us-
ing the Reset All Concrete Overwrites command. This com-
mand automatically applies to all frame sections with the Con-
crete Frame design procedure.
Resetting your overwrites will reduce the size of your ETABS

database (*.edb) file.
Delete Concrete Design Results

The Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Delete Con-
crete Design Results command deletes all of the concrete frame
design results. It is not necessary to make a selection before us-
ing the Delete Concrete Design Results command. This com-
mand automatically applies to all frame sections with the Con-
crete Frame design procedure.
Deleting your concrete frame design results will reduce the size
of your ETABS database (*.edb) file. Note that deleting your
concrete design results does not delete your current design sec-
tion (next analysis section).
ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame Design

tively design the element in the Concrete Design Information
46
can click the Design menu > Concrete Frame Design > Inter-
active Concrete Frame Design command and then right click a
frame element to enter the interactive design mode for that ele-
ment.
The following bullet items describe the features that are included
in the Concrete Design Information dialog box.
ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame Design 46 - 11

• Story ID: This is the story level ID associated with the

frame element.
• Beam: This is the label associated with a frame element

that has been assigned a concrete frame section property
Tip: that is designated as a beam. See the important note on
the first page of this chapter for more information.
The section
property dis-
• Column: This is the label associated with a frame ele-
played for the
Current De-
ment that has been assigned a concrete frame section
sign/Next property that is designated as a column. See the impor-
Analysis item is tant note on the first page of this chapter for more infor-
used by ETABS mation.
as the section
property for the • Analysis section: This is the section property that was
next analysis used for this frame element in the last analysis. Thus the
run. design forces are based on a frame element of this sec-
tion property. For your final design iteration the Current
Design/Next Analysis section property and the Last
• Design section: This is the current design section prop-

erty. The current element design is done for the section
property specified in this edit box.
It is important to note that subsequent analyses use the

section property specified in this list box for the next
analysis section for the frame element. Thus the forces
and moments obtained in the next analysis are based on
this section.
46 You can change the Current Design/Next Analysis sec-

tion property in the overwrites. Click the Overwrites
button to do this.
• Table showing reinforcement information: This table

shows the output information obtained for each design
load combination at each output station along the frame
element. For columns that are designed by ETABS the
item with the largest required amount of longitudinal
reinforcing is initially highlighted. For columns that are
checked by ETABS the item with the largest capacity
ratio is initially highlighted. For beams the item with the
46 - 12 ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame Design

largest required amount of bottom steel is initially high-

lighted.
Following are the possible headings in the table:
ü Combo ID: This is the name of the design load

combination considered.
ü Station location: This is the location of the station

considered measured from the i-end of the frame
element.
ü Longitudinal reinforcement: This item applies to

columns only. It also only applies to columns for
which ETABS designs the longitudinal reinforcing.
It is the total required area of longitudinal reinforc-
ing steel.
ü Capacity ratio: This item applies to columns only.

It also only applies to columns for which you have
specified the location and size of reinforcing bars
and thus ETABS checks the design. This item is the
capacity ratio.
The capacity ratio is determined by first extending a

line from the origin of the PMM interaction surface
to the point representing the P, M2 and M3 values
for the designated load combination. Call the length
of this first line L1. Next a second line is extended
from the origin of the PMM interaction surface
through the point representing the P, M2 and M3
46
values for the designated load combination until it
intersects the interaction surface. Call the length of
this line from the origin to the interaction surface
L2. The capacity ratio is equal to L1/L2.
ü Major shear reinforcement: This item applies to

columns only. It is the total required area of shear
reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the
column major direction. See the subsection titled
"Local Axes Assignments to Line Objects" in
Chapter 14 for a definition of the major direction.

ü Minor shear reinforcement: This item applies to

columns only. It is the total required area of shear
reinforcing per unit length for shear acting in the
column minor direction. See the subsection titled
"Local Axes Assignments to Line Objects" in
Chapter 14 for a definition of the minor direction.
ü Top steel: This item applies to beams only. It is the

total required area of longitudinal top steel at the
specified station.
ü Bottom steel: This item applies to beams only. It is

the total required area of longitudinal bottom steel at
the specified station.
ü Shear steel: This item applies to beams only. It is

the total required area of shear reinforcing per unit
length at the specified station for loads acting in the
local 2-axis direction of the beam.
Note: • Details button: Clicking this button displays design de-

tails for the frame element. You can print this informa-
You can change
tion by selecting Print from the File menu that appears at
the concrete
frame design the top of the window displaying the design details.
overwrites and
instantaneously • Overwrites button: You can click this button to access
see the new and make revisions to the concrete frame overwrites and
design results. then immediately see the new design results. If you
modify some overwrites in this mode and you exit both
the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites form and the
Concrete Design Information dialog box by clicking
46 their respective OK buttons then the changes you made
to the overwrites are permanently saved.
When you exit the Concrete Frame Design Overwrites

form by clicking the OK button the changes are tempo-
rarily saved. If you then exit the Concrete Design Infor-
mation dialog box by clicking the Cancel button the
changes you made to the concrete frame overwrites are
considered temporary only and are not permanently
saved. Permanent saving of the overwrites does not ac-
tually occur until you click the OK button in the Con-
46 - 14 ETABS Interactive Concrete Frame Design

crete Design Information dialog box, not the Concrete

Frame Design Overwrites dialog box.
• Interaction button: Clicking this button displays the bi-

axial interaction curve for the concrete section at the lo-
cation in the element that is highlighted in the table.
46

Chapter 47
Composite Beam Design

Any line object that ETABS has assigned a Composite Beam de-
sign procedure can be designed in the Composite Beam Design
postprocessor. See the section titled "ETABS Default Design
Procedure Assignments" in Chapter 17 for more information.
This section describes the intended composite beam design pro-

cedure and the menu commands available for composite beam
design. Before describing the design procedure or menu items it
is important that you understand the distinction between analysis
sections and design sections. This is discussed first.
47
47 - 1
analysis using a W18X35 beam and then found in the design that
a W16X31 beam worked. In this case the last used analysis sec-
tion is the W18X35 and the current design section is the
W16X31. Before you complete the design process you want to
make sure that the last used analysis section and the current de-
sign section is the same. The Design menu > Composite Beam
Design > Verify Analysis vs Design Section command, which
is useful for this task, is discussed more in later subsections.
ETABS keeps track of the analysis section and the design section
tions:
• Anytime you assign a beam a frame section property

using the Assign menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section
command ETABS assigns this section as both the analy-
sis section and the design section.
• Whenever you run an analysis using the Analyze menu

Note: button) ETABS always sets the analysis section to be the
same as the current design section.
Any time you
unlock your
• When you use the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
model your
design results
Frame Section command to assign an auto select list to
(and analysis a frame section ETABS initially sets the design section
results) are to be the beam with the median weight in the auto select
deleted. list.

section.
47 • Anytime you use the Design menu > Composite Beam
Design > Select Design Combo command to change a
design load combination ETABS deletes your design re-


Chapter 47 - Composite Beam Design

Composite Beam Design command to change any of
the composite beam design preferences ETABS deletes
your design results but it does not delete or change the
design section.


new hinges.


Composite Beam Design Procedure

Following is a typical composite beam design process that might
occur for a new building. Note that the sequence of steps you
47
may take in any particular design may vary from this but the ba-
sic process will probably be essentially the same.
1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Composite Beam

Design command to choose the composite beam design code
and to review other composite beam design preferences and
revise them if necessary. Note that there are default values
provided for all composite beam design preferences so it is
not actually necessary for you to define any preferences un-
less you want to change some of the default preference val-
ues.
Composite Beam Design Procedure 47 - 3


Analysis command.
4. Assign composite beam overwrites, if needed, using the De-

sign menu > Composite Beam Design > View/Revise
Overwrites command. Note that you must select beams first
before using this command. Also note that there are default
values provided for all composite beam design overwrites so
it is not actually necessary for you to define any overwrites
unless you want to change some of the default overwrite
values.
5. Designate design groups, if desired, using the Design menu

> Composite Beam Design > Select Design Group com-
mand. Note that you must have already created some groups
by selecting objects and clicking the Assign menu > Group
Names command.

the default ones created by ETABS for your composite beam
design then click the Design menu > Composite Beam De-
sign > Select Design Combo command. Note that you must
have already created your own design combos by clicking
the Define menu > Load Combinations command.
Note that for composite beam design you specify separate

design load combinations for construction loading, final
loading considering strength, and final loading considering
deflection. Design load combinations for each of these three
47 conditions are specified using the Design menu > Compos-

ite Beam Design > Select Design Combo command.
7. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Start
Design/Check of Structure command to run the composite
beam design.
47 - 4 Composite Beam Design Procedure

8. Review the composite beam design results. To do this you

might do one of the following:
a. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >

Display Design Info command to display design input
and output information on the model.
b. Right click on a beam while the design results are dis-

played on it to enter the interactive design mode and in-
teractively design the beam. Note that while you are in
this mode you can also view diagrams (load, moment,
shear and deflection) and view design details on the
screen.

click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
Interactive Composite Beam Design command and
then right click a beam to enter the interactive design
mode for that beam.
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam
Design command to print composite beam design data.
If you select a few beams before using this command
then data is printed only for the selected beams.
9. Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >

Change Design Section command to change the beam de-
sign section properties for selected beams.
Design/Check of Structure command to rerun the compos-
ite beam design with the new section properties. Review the
results using the procedures described above.
47
Analysis command. Note that the beam section properties
used for the analysis are the last specified design section
properties.
Composite Beam Design Procedure 47 - 5

ite beam design with the new analysis results and new sec-
tion properties. Review the results using the procedures de-
scribed above.
13. Again use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
Change Design Section command to change the beam de-
sign section properties for selected beams, if necessary.
14. Repeat the process in steps 11, 12 and 13 as many times as

necessary.
15. Select all beams and click the Design menu > Composite
Beam Design > Make Auto Select Section Null command.
This removes any auto select section assignments from the
selected beams.
Analysis command. Note that the beam section properties
used for the analysis are the last specified design section
properties.
ite beam design with the new section properties. Review the
results using the procedures described above.
18. Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Ver-
ify Analysis vs Design Section command to verify that all
of the final design sections are the same as the last used
analysis sections.
47 19. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Composite Beam De-
sign command to print selected composite beam design re-
sults if desired.
47 - 6 Composite Beam Design Procedure


analysis using your final beam section sizes and then run a de-
Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify Analysis vs
Design Section command is useful for making sure that the de-
sign sections are the same as the analysis sections.

Design menu > Composite Beam Design submenu.
Composite Beam Design Menu Commands

This section describes each of the composite beam design menu
commands by clicking Design menu > Composite Beam De-
sign.
Select Design Group

In ETABS composite beam design you have the option of
Note: grouping elements for design. When you specify a group for de-
Beams designed sign all elements in the group are given the same beam size.
as a group are Note the following information related to using groups for de-
all given the sign of composite beams.
same beam
size; however, • Define the groups in the usual way, that is, by selecting
each beam in the beam elements and clicking the Assign menu >
the group may Group Names command.
have a different
number of
47
• After the group is defined use the Design menu > Com-
shear connec-
tors and differ-
posite Beam Design > Select Design Group command
ent camber. to designate that the group is to be used as a design
group.
Composite Beam Design Menu Commands 47 - 7

• Designing with groups only works if you have assigned

Tip:
auto select sections to the beams. Typically you would
Beams designed assign the same auto select section to each beam in the
as a part of a group although this is not absolutely necessary. Any
group must be beams in a design group not assigned an auto select sec-
assigned auto tion are ignored for group design and are designed indi-
select section
vidually.
lists.
Note that when beams are designed in a group they will all have
the same beam size, but the shear connectors and camber may be
different.
Select Design Combo

Click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Select
Design Combo command to open the Design Load Combina-
tions Selection dialog box. Here you can review the default
composite beam design load combinations defined by ETABS
and/or you can designate your own design load combinations.
Note that for composite beam design separate design load com-
binations are specified for construction loading, final loading
considering strength, and final loading considering deflection.
Each of these types of design load combinations is specified in a
separate tab in the dialog box.

47
The default composite beam design load combinations have

names like DCMPC1, etc. These are described below:
• DCMPCn: The D stands for Design. The CMP stands

for composite. The last C stands for construction. The n
item is a number. Design load combinations with this
47 - 8 Composite Beam Design Menu Commands

type of designation are the ETABS default for construc-

tion loading in composite design.
• DCMPSn: The D stands for Design. The CMP stands

for composite. The S stands for strength. The n item is a
number. Design load combinations with this type of
designation are the ETABS default for strength consid-
erations under final loading in composite design.
• DCMPDn: The D stands for Design. The CMP stands

for composite. The last D stands for deflection. The n
item is a number. Design load combinations with this
type of designation are the ETABS default for deflection
considerations under final loading in composite design.
View/Revise Overwrites
Use the Design menu > Composite Beam Design >
View/Revise Overwrites command to review and/or change the
composite beam overwrites. You may not need to assign any
composite beam overwrites; however the option is always avail-
able to you. If you are using cover plates or user-defined shear
connector patterns then you must assign them through the over-
writes. This is the only place available to assign these items.
Tip: The composite beam design overwrites are basic properties that
apply only to the beams that they are specifically assigned to.
The composite
Some of the default overwrite values are based on composite
beam design
overwrites only
beam preferences. Thus you should define the preferences before
apply to the defining the overwrites (and, of course, before designing or
beams that they checking any composite beam).
47
are specifically
assigned to. You can select one or more beams for which you want to specify
overwrites. To change an overwrite check the check box to the
left of the overwrite name and then click in the cell to the right of
the overwrite name. When you click in the cell you either acti-
vate a drop down box where you can select a choice or you are
able to type data into the cell. Note that information about each
item in the overwrites is provided at the bottom of the form when
you click on the item.

whether you have one beam selected or multiple beams selected.

To run a composite beam design simply click Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > Start Design/Check of Structure.
This option will not be available if you have not first run a
building analysis. It will also be unavailable if there are no com-
posite beams in the model.
If you have selected composite beams when you click this com-
mand then only the selected beams are designed. If no beams are
selected when you click this command then all composite beams
are designed.
Interactive Composite Beam Design

Interactive composite beam design is a powerful feature that al-
lows you to review the design results for any composite beam
and to interactively change the design assumptions and immedi-
ately view the results again.
Right click on a beam while the design results are displayed on it

to enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the
beam. If you are not currently displaying design results you can
click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Interac-
tive Composite Beam Design command and then right click a
47 beam to enter the interactive design mode for that beam.
See the subsection titled "Interactive Composite Beam Design

and Review" later in this chapter for more information.

Display Design Info

You can review some of the results of the composite beam de-
sign directly on the ETABS model using the Design menu >
Composite Beam Design > Display Design Info command. The
types of things you can display are beam labels and associated
design group names; design sections together with connector
layout, camber and end reactions; and stress ratio information.
Make Auto Select Section Null

The Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Make Auto
Select Section Null command is used to remove auto select sec-
tion lists from selected beams. Typically you should remove auto
select lists from all beams near the end of the iterative design
Tip: process so that your final design iteration is done with actual
beam sections assigned, not auto select sections.
You normally
use the Make Setting the auto select section to null does not change the current
Auto Select design section for the beam.
Section Null
feature near the The Make Auto Select Section Null command only works on a
end of the it- selection that you make. Thus you should select the elements
erative design
whose auto select sections are to be made null prior to executing
process.
this command. If you do not select any elements this command
will not be available. Often you may want to select all elements
prior to executing this command.
The Make Auto Select Section Null command is not active until
the first design has been run. If you have not yet run a design and
you want to remove the auto select property then use the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Frame Section command to change the
section property. 47

After you have run a composite beam design, you may want to
change the design section property assigned to one or more
beams and then rerun the design without first rerunning the
analysis. You can use the Design menu > Composite Beam De-
sign > Change Design Section command to change the design
section property and then use the Design menu > Composite

Beam Design > Start Design/Check of Structure to rerun the

design.

design sections are to be changed prior to executing this com-
mand. If you do not select any elements this command will not
be available.
The Change Design Section command only changes the design

Note:
section for the beam. The forces used in the design are not based
You can change on this new section size but are instead based on whatever sec-
the element tion was used in the last analysis.
design sections
and rerun the Recall, however, that the design section property is used for the
design as many next analysis section property. Thus changing the design section
times as you
want without
rerunning the
auto select section is assigned to a beam you can control the sec-
analysis. tion property used for that beam in the next analysis by setting
the design section property to the desired beam size using the
Change Design Section command and then rerunning the analy-
sis.

one or more beams back to the last used analysis section. The
Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Reset Design Sec-
tion to Last Analysis command gives you a quick and easy way
of doing this.
47 The Reset Design Section to Last Analysis command only



analysis section property for a beam and the current design sec-
tion property for a beam should be the same. If this is not the
case then the beam may not have been designed for the correct
forces. The Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Verify
Analysis vs Design Section command is useful for verifying that
the last used analysis section and the current design section are
the same for all composite beams in the model.

mand ETABS tells you how many beams have different analysis
and design sections and then selects those beams, if you ask it to.
Typically you might use this command after you have run what

cally checks all composite beam sections.
Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites

The Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Reset All
Composite Beam Overwrites command resets the composite
beam overwrites for all composite beam sections back to their
ing the Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites command. This
command automatically applies to all composite beam sections.
Resetting your composite beam overwrites will reduce the size

of your ETABS database (*.edb) file. 47
Delete Composite Beam Design Results

The Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Delete Com-
posite Beam Design Results command deletes all of the com-
posite beam results. It is not necessary to make a selection before
using the Delete Composite Beam Design Results command.
This command automatically applies to all composite beam sec-
tions.

Deleting your composite beam results will reduce the size of

your ETABS database (*.edb) file. Note that deleting your com-
posite beam design results does not delete your current design
section (next analysis section).
Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review

Right click on a beam while the design results are displayed on it
to enter the interactive design mode and interactively design the
beam in the Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review
can click the Design menu > Composite Beam Design > Inter-
active Composite Beam Design command and then right click a
beam to enter the interactive design mode for that beam.
The following subsections describe the features that are included

in the Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review dialog
box.
Member Identification Area of Dialog Box
Tip: Story ID
If a beam is This is the story level ID associated with the composite beam.
redesigned as a
result of a
change made in Beam Label
the Interactive This is the label associated with the composite beam.
Composite
Beam Design
and Review Design Group
47 dialog box then
the design This list box displays the name of the design group that the beam
group is ig- is assigned to if that design group was considered in the design
nored and only of the beam. If the beam is part of a design group but the design
the single beam group was not considered in the design then N/A is displayed. If
is considered. the beam is not assigned to any design group then "NONE" is
displayed.
47 - 14 Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review

If a beam is redesigned as a result of a change made in the Inter-

active Composite Beam Design and Review dialog box then the
design group is ignored and only the single beam is considered.
Thus as soon as you design a beam once in the Interactive Com-
posite Beam Design and Review dialog box the Design Group
box either displays N/A or None.
You can not directly edit the contents of this list box.
Section Information Area of Dialog Box
Auto Select List

This drop-down box displays the name of the auto select list as-
signed to the beam. If no auto select list is assigned to the beam
then NONE is displayed. You can change this item to another
auto select list or to NONE while in the dialog box and the de-
sign results are immediately updated. If you change this item to
NONE then the design is done for the Current Design/Next
Analysis section property.
Optimal
If an auto select list is assigned to the beam then this list box dis-
plays the optimal section as determined by either beam weight or
price depending on what is specified in the composite beam
Tip: preferences. If no auto select list is assigned to the beam then
The section N/A is displayed for this item.
property dis-
played for the You can not directly edit the contents of this list box.
Current De-
sign/Next
Analysis item is Last Analysis 47
used by ETABS This list box displays the name of the section that was used for
as the section
this beam in the last analysis. Thus the beam forces are based on
property for the
next analysis
a beam of this section property. For your final design iteration
run. the Current Design/Next Analysis section property and the Last
You can not directly edit the contents of this list box.
Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review 47 - 15

Current Design/Next Analysis

This list box displays the name of the current design section
property. If the beam is assigned an auto select list then the sec-
tion displayed in this dialog box initially defaults to the optimal
section.
If there is no auto select list assigned to the beam then the beam
design is done for the section property specified in this edit box.
It is important to note that subsequent analyses use the section

property specified in this list box for the next analysis section for
the beam. Thus the forces and moments obtained in the next
analysis are based on this beam size.
There are two ways that you can change the Current Design/Next
Analysis section property. The first is to double click on any
section displayed in the Acceptable Sections List. This updates
the Current Design/Next Analysis section property to the section
you double clicked in. The second way to change the property is
to click the Sections button that is documented later in this
chapter.
Important note: Changes made to the Current Design/Next

Analysis section property are permanently saved (until you re-
vise them again) if you click the OK button to exit the Interac-
tive Composite Beam Design and Review dialog box. If you exit
the dialog box by clicking the Cancel button then these changes
are considered temporary and are not permanently saved.
Acceptable Sections List Area of Dialog Box

The Acceptable Sections List includes the following information
47 for each beam section that is acceptable for all considered design
load combinations.
• Section name
• Steel yield stress, Fy
• Connector layout

• Camber
Tip: • Ratio
When you see a Typically the ratio displayed is the largest ratio obtained consid-
single beam ering the stress ratios for positive moment, negative moment and
displayed in the
shear for both construction loads and final loads, and also con-
Acceptable
Sections List in sidering the ratio obtained by dividing the actual maximum de-
a red font this flection by the allowable deflection. The one exception to this
means that occurs when none of the beam sections considered is acceptable.
none of the This is discussed below.
sections con-
sidered were If the beam is assigned an auto select list then there may be
acceptable. many beam sections in the Acceptable Sections List. If necessary
you can use the scroll bar to scroll through the acceptable sec-
tions. The optimal section is initially highlighted in the list.
If the beam is not assigned an auto select list then there is only
one beam section in the Acceptable Sections List. It is the same
section as specified in the Current Design/Next Analysis edit
box.
There will always be at least one beam shown in the Acceptable

Sections List, even if none of the beams considered are accept-
able. In the case where no beams are acceptable ETABS displays
the section with the lowest ratio in a red font. Thus when you see
a single beam displayed in the Acceptable Sections List in a red
font this means that none of the sections considered were accept-
able.
Redefine Area of Dialog Box
Sections Button
47
You can use the Sections button to change the Current Design
/Next Analysis section property. Using this button you can des-
ignate a new section property whether or not that section prop-
erty is displayed in the Acceptable Sections List.
When you click on the Sections button the Select Sections Prop-
erties dialog box appears which lets you assign any frame section
property to the beam. Note that if an auto select list is assigned to

the beam then using the Sections button sets the auto select list
assignment to NONE.
Overwrites Button
You can click this button to access and make revisions to the
composite beam overwrites and then immediately see the new
design results. If you modify some overwrites in this mode and
you exit both the Composite Beam Overwrites form and the In-
teractive Composite Beam Design and Review dialog box by
clicking their respective OK buttons then the changes you made
When you exit the Composite Beam Overwrites form by clicking

the OK button the changes are temporarily saved. If you then
exit the Interactive Composite Beam Design and Review dialog
box by clicking the Cancel button the changes you made to the
composite beam overwrites are considered temporary only and
are not permanently saved. Permanent saving of the overwrites
does not actually occur until you click the OK button in the In-
teractive Composite Beam Design and Review dialog box, not
the overwrites dialog box.
Temporary Area of Dialog Box
Combos Button
You can click this button to access and make temporary revi-
sions to the design load combinations considered for the beam.
This may be useful for example if you want to see the results for
one particular load combination. You can temporarily change the
47 considered design load combinations to be just the one you are
interested in and review the results.
The changes made here to the considered design load combina-

tions are temporary. They are not saved when you exit the Inter-
active Composite Beam Design and Review dialog box regard-
less of whether you click OK or Cancel to exit it.

Show Details Area of Dialog Box
Diagrams Button
Clicking the Diagrams button brings up a dialog box that allows
you to display the following four types of diagrams for the beam.
• Applied loads
• Shear diagram
• Moment diagram
• Deflection diagram
The diagrams are plotted for specific design load combinations

specified in the dialog box by you.
Details Button
Clicking this button displays design details for the beam. This
same information can be printed using the File menu > Print
Tables > Composite Beam Design command.
47

Chapter 48
Shear Wall Design
Overview
This chapter discusses some of the basics of shear wall design in
ETABS. Topics covered include labeling of pier and spandrel
sections, the intended design procedure for shear walls, ETABS
menu commands for shear wall design and using the Section De-
signer utility to define shear wall reinforcing.
Wall Pier Labeling

48
General
Note:
Wall pier forces are output at the top and bottom of wall pier
Piers are only elements. Also wall pier design is only performed at stations lo-
designed at cated at the top and bottom of wall pier elements.
stations located
at the top and Each area object that makes up a part of a wall may be assigned
the bottom of
one pier label (and one spandrel label). You can not assign a sin-
the pier.
gle area object multiple wall pier labels. Area objects at the same
48 - 1
Figure 48-1: Roof

Examples of wall P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
pier labeling P2 P3 P4 P2 P3 P4
P2 P5 P5 P5 P5 P6 P6 P6 2nd
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
P3 P4 P3 P4
P2 P2
P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 P5 Base
a b
P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
P2 P3 P4 P1 P1 P1
P2 P5 P5 P5 P1 P1 P1 P1
P6 P6 P6 P6 P6 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
P8 P9 P1 P1
P7 P1
P10 P10 P10 P1 P1 P1
c d
e (plan)
Note: story level with the same pier label are assumed by ETABS to be
Area objects at part of the same pier.
the same story
level with the Wall pier labels are used to identify wall piers. Once a wall pier
same pier label is assigned a label, and an analysis has been run, forces can be
are assumed by output for the wall pier and it can be designed.
ETABS to be
part of the same A single wall pier can not extend over multiple stories. It must
pier. be fully contained within one story level.
Assigning Wall Pier Labels

48 Figure 48-1 illustrates some possible wall pier labeling arrange-
ments for a two-story wall. Note that the layout of the wall is
similar at the two levels except that at the upper level the pier to
the left of the door opening is broken into two area objects.
Figure 48-1a shows what may be the most common way we

would expect the piers to be labeled. At the upper level, Pier P1
is defined to extend all the way across the wall above the open-
ings. Pier P2 makes up the wall pier to the left of the door open-
48 - 2 Wall Pier Labeling

Chapter 48 - Shear Wall Design
ing. Pier P3 occurs between the door and window openings. Pier
P4 occurs between the window opening and the edge of the wall.
Pier P5 occurs below the window opening between the door and
the edge of the wall. A similar labeling of piers occurs at the
lower level. Note the following about the wall pier labeling
scheme shown in Figure 48-1a:
Note: • Wall piers are always associated with the story level di-
Wall piers are rectly above them. Thus in Figure 48-1a the upper level
always associ- wall piers are associated with the Roof level and the
ated with the lower level wall piers are associated with the 2nd level.
story level di- Because the wall piers are associated with story levels
rectly above you are able to repeat wall pier labels at different levels
them. as shown in the figure.
• When we refer to wall pier P1 at the Roof level in Figure

48-1a we are referring to the pier across the entire width
of the wall that is made up of the five area objects given
the pier label P1. Similarly pier P2 at the Roof level is
made up of the two area objects to the left of the door
opening.
• Wall pier design is performed at the top and bottom of

each pier. Thus for wall pier P2 at the Roof level, design
is performed at the top and bottom of the door opening.
No design is performed near the midheight of the door
opening because the design is done at the top and bottom
Tip: of the wall pier, not the top and bottom of each area ob-
If you need to ject that makes up the wall pier.
mesh an exist-
ing area object • Wall pier forces are reported at the top and bottom of
to define a wall each pier. Thus for wall pier P2 at the Roof level wall
pier you can pier forces are reported (printed) for locations at the top
select the area
object(s) and
and bottom of the door opening. For graphic representa-
tion on the model the forces are plotted at the top and
48
use the Edit bottom of the pier and connected with a straight line.
menu > Mesh
Areas com- • If, for example, you are not interested in either design or
mand. output forces for wall piers P1 and P5 at the Roof level,
then you should simply not provide wall pier labels for
those area objects.
Wall Pier Labeling 48 - 3

Figure 48-2: Roof

Example of possibly
incomplete wall pier P1 P2 P3
labeling P1 2nd
P2 P3
P1
Base
Figure 48-1b shows what you might do if you want a design sec-
tion at near the midheight of the Roof level pier on the left side
of the door opening. Notice that the two area objects are given
different pier labels, P2 and P5.
Figure 48-1c illustrates that you do not have to repeat your pier
numbers at each level. You can give each wall pier a unique la-
bel if you want to. Even with unique names the piers are still as-
sociated with story levels. For example, in Figure 48-1c, pier P7
is associated with the 2nd level.
Figure 48-1d illustrates that you could give all of the area objects
the same label if you wanted to, P1 in this case. For this condi-
tion wall design would be performed across the entire wall at
each story level (i.e., the top and bottom of each pier), and wall
forces would be provided for the entire wall at each story level.
In Figure 48-1d, the design of the bottom of the lower level pier
is based on the section shown in Figure 48-1e. ETABS would as-
sume that the two areas that comprise these sections are rigidly
connected.
You could only specify pier labels for some of the area objects in
the wall. Figure 48-2 shows an example of this. In this case, for
design, you would not capture the overall effects at the top and
48 bottom of each story level like you would if you defined the
piers as shown in Figure 48-1. Thus in general, if you are going
to design the wall, we recommend that you define the piers as
shown in Figure 48-1. There is nothing wrong with defining the
piers only as shown in Figure 48-2 other than you may not get all
of the needed design information.
48 - 4 Wall Pier Labeling

Wall Spandrel Labeling

General
Note: Wall spandrel forces are output at the left and right ends of wall
spandrel elements. Also wall spandrel design is only performed
Spandrels are
at stations located at the left and right ends of wall spandrel ele-
only designed
at stations lo-
ments.
cated at the left
and right ends
Each area object that makes up a part of a wall may be assigned
of the spandrel. one spandrel label (and one pier label). You can not assign a sin-
gle area object multiple wall spandrel labels.
Wall spandrel labels are used to identify wall spandrels. Once a

wall spandrel is assigned a label, and an analysis has been run,
forces can be output for the wall spandrel and it can be designed.
Assigning Wall Spandrel Labels

Figure 48-3 illustrates some possible wall spandrel labeling ar-
rangements for a two-story wall. Note that this is the same two-
story wall illustrated in Figure 48-1 for the discussion of wall
pier labeling.
Figure 48-3a shows what may be the most common condition for
wall spandrel labeling. Note the following about the wall span-
drel labeling scheme shown in Figure 48-3a:
• Use the following method to determine which story level

Note: a pier spandrel is associated with.
Unlike wall
pier elements, a ü Start with the upper-most area object in the spandrel.
single wall Check if the top of the object is at a story level. If it
spandrel ele- is then that is the story associated with the spandrel. 48
ment can in- If it is not then check if the bottom of the area object
clude area ob- is at a story level. If it is then that is the story associ-
jects from two ated with the spandrel.
adjacent story
levels. ü If a story level has not been located continue down
to the next highest area object and check for story
levels at the top or bottom of the object.
Wall Spandrel Labeling 48 - 5

Figure 48-3: Roof

Examples of wall
spandrel labeling S1 S2
S2 2nd
S1 S2
S2 Base
a
S1 S2 S1 S2
S4 S2
S3 S4 S1 S3
S5 S4
b c
ü Continue the above process until a level is located.

Thus a spandrel is typically associated with the
Tip: highest story level that it touches or intersects.
If you need to ü If the spandrel does not actually touch or intersect a
mesh an exist- story level then it is associated with the story level
ing area object just above it. An example of this is discussed later.
to define a wall
spandrel you • In Figure 48-3a the upper wall spandrel label S1 is asso-
can select the
48
ciated with the Roof level and the lower S1 is associated
area object(s)
and use the with the 2nd level. The upper wall spandrel label S2 is
Edit menu > associated with the Roof level, the middle spandrel made
Mesh Areas up of two area objects labeled S2 is associated with the
command. 2nd level and the lowest S2 spandrel is associated with
the Base level.
• Because the wall spandrels are associated with story lev-

els you are able to repeat wall spandrel labels at different
levels as shown in the figure.
48 - 6 Wall Spandrel Labeling

• When we refer to wall spandrel S2 at the 2nd level in

Figure 48-3a we are referring to the spandrel that is
made up of the two area objects given the spandrel label
S2.
• Wall spandrel design is performed at the left and right

sides of each spandrel. Thus for wall spandrel S1 at the
Roof level design is performed at the left and right sides
of the door opening.
• Wall spandrel forces are reported at the left and right

sides of each spandrel. Thus for wall spandrel S1 at the
Roof level wall spandrel forces are reported (printed) for
locations at the left and right sides of the door opening.
For graphic representation on the model the forces are
plotted at the left and right sides of the spandrel and
connected with a straight line.
• If you are not interested in either design or output forces

for certain wall spandrels, then you should simply not
provide wall spandrel labels for those area objects.
Figure 48-3b illustrates that you do not have to repeat spandrel

numbers at each level. You can give each wall spandrel a unique
label if you want to. Even with unique names the spandrels are
still associated with story levels. For example, in Figure 48-3b,
spandrel S4 is associated with the 2nd level.
Figure 48-3c illustrates a condition that ETABS will not reject,

although it is doubtful that you would mean to label the span-
drels like this. Specifically refer to the spandrel at the 2nd level
between the windows. Notice that the upper area object for this
spandrel is labeled S2 and the lower area object is labeled S3.
ETABS will accept this and will design the two objects as sepa-
rate spandrels. 48
In the 3-story structure shown in Figure 48-4 the top spandrel la-
beled S1 is associated with the Roof level. The middle S1 span-
drel is associated with the 3rd level, which is the highest story
level that it intersects or touches. The lowest S1 spandrel is asso-
ciated with the Base level.
Wall Spandrel Labeling 48 - 7

Figure 48-4: Roof Roof

Additional examples S1 S1
of wall spandrel la-
beling S1 3rd
S1 S2
2nd
S1
S1 Base S1 Base
3-Story 1-Story
Structure Structure
In the 1-story structure shown in Figure 48-4 the top spandrel la-
beled S1 is associated with the Roof level. The middle spandrel
labeled S2 is also associated with the Roof level because the
spandrel does not intersect or touch any story levels and thus it is
associated with the story level directly above it. The lowest S1
spandrel is associated with the Base level.
Shear Wall Design Procedure

Following is a typical shear wall design process that might occur
Note: for a new building. Note that the sequence of steps you may take
Shear wall de- in any particular design may vary from this but the basic process
sign in ETABS will be essentially the same.
is an iterative
process. 1. Use the Options menu > Preferences > Shear Wall Design
command to review the shear wall design preferences and
48 revise them if necessary. Note that there are default values
provided for all shear wall design preferences so it is not
actually necessary for you to define any preferences unless
you want to change some of the default preference values.

48 - 8 Shear Wall Design Procedure

Analysis command.
4. Assign the wall pier and wall spandrel labels. Use the Assign
menu > Frame/Line > Pier Label, the Assign menu >
Shell/Area > Pier Label, the Assign menu > Frame/Line >
Spandrel Label, and the Assign menu > Shell/Area >
Spandrel Label commands to do this.
Note that the labels can be assigned before or after the analy-
sis is run.
5. Assign shear wall overwrites, if needed, using the Design

menu > Shear Wall Design > View/Revise Pier Over-
writes and the Design menu > Shear Wall Design >
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites commands. Note that
you must select piers or spandrels first before using these
commands. Also note that there are default values provided
for all pier and spandrel design overwrites so it is not actu-
ally necessary for you to define any overwrites unless you
want to change some of the default overwrite values.
Note that the overwrites can be assigned before or after the

analysis is run.
Important note about selecting piers and spandrels: You

can select a pier or spandrel simply by selecting any line or
area object that is part of the pier or spandrel.

the default ones created by ETABS for your shear wall de-
sign then click the Design menu > Shear Wall Design >
Select Design Combo command. Note that you must have
already created your own design combos by clicking the De-
fine menu > Load Combinations command. 48
7. Click the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Start De-
sign/Check of Structure command to run the shear wall de-
sign.
Shear Wall Design Procedure 48 - 9

8. Review the shear wall design results. To do this you might

a. Click the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Display
Design Info command to display design input and out-
put information on the model.
b. Right click on a pier or spandrel while the design results

are displayed on it to enter the interactive wall design
mode. Note that while you are in this mode you can re-
vise overwrites and immediately see the new design re-
sults.

click the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Interac-
tive Wall Design command and then right click a pier or
spandrel to enter the interactive design mode for that
element.
c. Use the File menu > Print Tables > Shear Wall De-
sign command to print shear wall design data. If you
select a few piers or spandrels before using this com-
mand then data is printed only for the selected elements.
9. If desired, revise the wall pier and/or spandrel overwrites, re-

run the shear wall design, and review the results again. Re-
peat this step as many times as needed.
10. If desired, create wall pier check sections with user-defined

(actual) reinforcing specified for the wall piers using the
Section Designer utility. Use the Design menu > Shear
Wall Design > Define Pier Sections for Checking com-
mand to define the sections in Section Designer. Be sure to
indicate that the reinforcing is to be checked. Use the Design
48 menu > Shear Wall Design > Assign Pier Sections for
Checking command to assign these sections to the piers. Re-
run the design and verify that the actual flexural reinforcing
provided is adequate.
48 - 10 Shear Wall Design Procedure

11. Assign these check sections to the piers, change the pier
mode from Design to Check, and rerun the design. Verify
that the actual flexural reinforcing provided is adequate.
12. If necessary, revise the geometry or reinforcing and rerun the

design.
13. Print or display selected shear wall design results if desired.
Note that shear wall design is performed as an iterative process.

You can change your wall design dimensions and reinforcing
during the design process without rerunning the analysis. How-
ever, you always want to be sure that your final design is based
on analysis properties (wall dimensions) that are consistent with
your design (actual) wall dimensions.

Design menu > Shear Wall Design submenu.
Menu Commands for Shear Wall Design

Select Design Combo
Click the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Select Design
Combo command to open the Design Load Combinations Se-
lection dialog box. Here you can review the default shear wall
design load combinations defined by ETABS and/or you can
designate your own design load combinations.

to move load combinations into and out of the Design Combos 48
The default shear wall design load combinations have names like
DWAL1, etc.
Menu Commands for Shear Wall Design 48 - 11

View/Revise Pier Overwrites

Use the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > View/Revise Pier
Overwrites command to review and/or change the wall pier
overwrites. You may not need to assign any wall pier overwrites;
however the option is always available to you.
The wall pier design overwrites are basic properties that apply
only to the piers that they are specifically assigned to. Note that
inputting 0 for most pier overwrite items means to use the
ETABS default value for that item.
You can select one or more piers for which you want to specify
overwrites. In the overwrites form there is a checkbox to the left
of each item. You must check this box for any item you want to
change in the overwrites. If the check box for an overwrite item
writes form, then no changes are made to the pier overwrite item.
This is true whether you have one pier selected or multiple piers
selected.
Following is a description of the pier overwrite items:
• Pmax Factor: This is a factor used to reduce the allow-

able maximum compressive design strength.
The 1997 UBC limits the maximum compressive design

strength, φcPn, to the value given by Pmax in the following
equation.
Pmax = 0.80φcPoc = 0.80φ[0.85f'c (Ag - As) + fyAs]
In this equation 0.80 is the Pmax Factor. In general you

will want to leave this factor at 0.80 which is the default
48 value.
• LL Factor: A reducible live load is multiplied by this

factor to obtain the reduced live load. If the LL reduction
factor is program calculated then it is based on the live
load reduction method chosen in the live load reduction
preferences which are set through Options menu > Pref-
erences > Live Load Reduction. If you specify your own
LL reduction factor then ETABS ignores any reduction
method specified in the live load reduction preferences
48 - 12 Menu Commands for Shear Wall Design

and simply calculates the reduced live load for a pier or

spandrel by multiplying the specified LL reduction fac-
tor times the reducible live load.
• EQ Factor: The horizontal earthquake factor is a multi-

plier that is applied to all horizontal earthquake loads.
ETABS assumes the following types of loads are hori-
zontal earthquake loads:
ü Any static load case specified as type "Quake" that

has a horizontal component of input load.
ü Any response spectrum case that has a horizontal

component of input load
ü Any time history case that has a horizontal compo-

nent of input ground acceleration.
The horizontal EQ factor allows you to specify member-

specific reliability/redundancy factors that are required
by some codes. The ρ factor specified in Section
1630.1.1 of the 1997 UBC is an example of this.
• Design is Seismic: Additional design checks are done

for seismic elements compared to nonseismic elements.
Also in some cases the strength reduction factors are dif-
ferent.
• Pier is 3D: This item tells you whether ETABS consid-

ers the pier to be two dimensional or three dimensional.
You can not overwrite this item; ETABS simply reports
it here for your reference.
• Overturning Design Type: The 2D Simplified method

designs the pier for overturning assuming that all of the
overturning force is resisted by a couple between tension
48
steel at one end of the pier and compression steel at the
other end. This is a simplified approximate method. De-
signs done using this method should always be checked
using the 2D or 3D Interaction method.

The 2D or 3D Interaction method designs or checks the

pier using P-M (or P-M-M) interaction curves. To use
this method you must also assign pier sections to the top
and bottom of the pier. In other words, the Section Bot-
tom and Section Top items in the pier overwrites must
be filled with something other than NONE.
• Section Bottom: This is the name of a pier section de-

fined using the Section Designer utility that is assigned
to the bottom of the pier.
• Section Top: This is the name of a pier section defined

using the Section Designer utility that is assigned to the
top of the pier.
• ThickBot: Wall pier thickness at bottom of pier.
• LengthBot: Wall pier length at bottom of pier.
• DB1LeftBot: Length of a user-defined edge member on

the left side of a wall pier at the bottom of the wall pier.
• DB1RightBot: Length of a user-defined edge member

on the right side of a wall pier at the bottom of the wall
pier.
• DB2LeftBot: Width of a user-defined edge member on

the left side of a wall pier at the bottom of the wall pier.
• DB2RightBot: Width of a user-defined edge member on

the right side of a wall pier at the bottom of the wall pier.
• ThickTop: Wall pier thickness at top of pier.
48 • LengthTop: Wall pier length at top of pier.
• DB1LeftTop: Length of a user-defined edge member on

the left side of a wall pier at the top of the wall pier.
• DB1RightTop: Length of a user-defined edge member

on the right side of a wall pier at the top of the wall pier.

• DB2LeftTop: Width of a user-defined edge member on

the left side of a wall pier at the top of the wall pier.
• DB2RightTop: Width of a user-defined edge member

on the right side of a wall pier at the top of the wall pier.
• Material: Concrete material property associated with

the pier.
• PercentMaxT: Maximum ratio of tension reinforcing

allowed in edge members.
• PercentMaxC: Maximum ratio of compression rein-

forcing allowed in edge members.
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites

Use the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > View/Revise
Spandrel Overwrites command to review and/or change the
wall spandrel overwrites. You may not need to assign any wall
spandrel overwrites; however the option is always available to
you.
The wall spandrel design overwrites are basic properties that ap-
ply only to the spandrels that they are specifically assigned to.
Note that inputting 0 for most spandrel overwrite items means to
use the ETABS default value for that item.
You can select one or more spandrels for which you want to
specify overwrites. In the overwrites form there is a checkbox to
the left of each item. You must check this box for any item you
want to change in the overwrites. If the check box for an item is
not checked when you click the OK button to exit the overwrites
form then no changes are made to the item. This is true whether
you have one spandrel selected or multiple spandrels selected. 48
Following is a description of the spandrel overwrite items:
• ThickLeft: Wall spandrel thickness at left side of span-

drel.

• DepthLeft: Wall spandrel depth at left side of spandrel.
• CoverBotLeft: Distance from bottom of spandrel to

centroid of bottom reinforcing on left side of beam.
• CoverTopLeft: Distance from top of spandrel to cen-

troid of top reinforcing on left side of beam.
• SlabWidthLeft: Slab width for T-beam at left end of

spandrel.
• SlabDepthLeft: Slab depth for T-beam at left end of

spandrel.
• ThickRight: Wall spandrel thickness at right side of

spandrel.
• DepthRight: Wall spandrel depth at right side of span-

drel.
• CoverBotRight: Distance from bottom of spandrel to

centroid of bottom reinforcing on right side of beam.
• CoverTopRight: Distance from top of spandrel to cen-

troid of top reinforcing on right side of beam.
• SlabWidthRight: Slab width for T-beam at right end of

spandrel.
• SlabDepthRight: Slab depth for T-beam at right end of

spandrel.
• Material: Concrete material property associated with

the spandrel.
48 • Consider Vc: Toggle switch for whether to consider Vc
in computing the shear capacity of the spandrel.

Define Pier Sections for Checking

To define a pier section with reinforcing for checking click the
Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Define Pier Sections for
Checking command. This command allows you to define a pier
section using the Section Designer utility. See the subsection ti-
tled "Initial Definition of a Wall Pier Section" later in this chap-
ter for more information.
Assign Pier Sections for Checking

Use the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Assign Pier Sec-
tions for Checking command to assign a pier a section that has
been defined using the Section Designer utility.

To run a shear wall design simply click Design menu > Shear
Wall Design > Start Design/Check of Structure. This option
will not be available if you have not first run a building analysis.
It will also be unavailable if there are no piers or spandrels in the
model.
If you have selected piers and/or spandrels when you click this
command then only the selected piers and/or spandrels are de-
signed. If no piers and/or spandrels are selected when you click
this command then all piers and spandrels are designed.
Interactive Wall Design

Right click on a pier or spandrel while the design results are dis-
48
tively design the pier or spandrel in the Wall Design dialog box.
If you are not currently displaying design results you can click
the Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Interactive Wall De-
sign command and then right click a pier or spandrel to enter the
interactive design mode for that pier or spandrel.
The following two subsections describe the features that are in-
cluded in the Wall Design dialog box.

Combos Button
You can click this button to access and make temporary revi-
sions to the design load combinations considered for the pier or
spandrel. This may be useful for example if you want to see the
results for one particular load combination. You can temporarily
change the considered design load combinations to be just the
one you are interested in and review the results.
The changes made here to the considered design load combina-

tions are temporary. They are not saved when you exit the Wall
Design dialog box regardless of whether you click OK or Can-
cel to exit it.
Overwrites Button
You can click this button to access and make revisions to the pier
or spandrel overwrites and then immediately see the new design
results. If you modify some overwrites in this mode and you exit
both the Overwrites form and the Wall Design dialog box by
clicking their respective OK buttons then the changes you made
When you exit the Overwrites form by clicking the OK button

the changes are temporarily saved. If you then exit the Wall De-
sign dialog box by clicking the Cancel button the changes you
made to the pier or spandrel overwrites are considered temporary
only and are not permanently saved. Permanent saving of the
overwrites does not actually occur until you click the OK button
in the Wall Design dialog box, not the overwrites dialog box.
Display Design Info

48 You can review some of the results of the shear wall design di-
rectly on the ETABS model using the Design menu > Shear
Wall Design > Display Design Info command. The types of
things you can display are reinforcing requirements, capacity ra-
tios and boundary element requirements.

Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites

The Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Reset All
Pier/Spandrel Overwrites command resets the pier and span-
drel overwrites for all pier and spandrel elements back to their
ing the Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites command. This
command automatically applies to all pier and spandrel ele-
ments.
Delete Wall Design Results

The Design menu > Shear Wall Design > Delete Wall Design
Results command deletes all of the shear wall results. It is not
necessary to make a selection before using the Delete Wall De-
sign Results command. This command automatically applies to
all pier and spandrel elements.
Deleting your shear wall results will reduce the size of your
ETABS database (*.edb) file.
At times ETABS automatically deletes your shear wall design

results. Following are some of the reasons that this might hap-
pen:

shear wall design results
• Anytime you use the Design menu > Shear Wall De-
sign > Select Design Combo command to change a de-
sign load combination ETABS deletes your shear wall
design results.

tions command to change a design load combination 48
ETABS deletes your shear wall design results.

Shear Wall Design command to change any of the shear
wall design preferences ETABS deletes your shear wall
design results.



new hinges.


Using Section Designer to Define Pier Reinforcing

This section provides basic instruction on using the Section De-
signer utility of ETABS to specify user-defined vertical rein-
forcing for wall piers. There are many options and features
available in Section Designer; it is intended to be used for much
more than just defining wall piers. This section does not try to
document all of the options and features. Instead it concentrates
on a few of the basic features which will help you define wall
piers and their vertical reinforcing.
48 Local Axes Definition and Orientation

Before you begin to draw a wall section in Section Designer it
is crucial that you understand the local axes definition for the
pier and that you understand the orientation that ETABS as-
sumes for the pier.
48 - 20 Using Section Designer to Define Pier Reinforcing

In Section Designer you see a plan view section of the pier, al-
ways. The positive local 2-axis is horizontal pointing to the right,
Tip: always. The positive local 3 axis is vertical pointing up, always
Be sure you (unless, of course, you turn your computer monitor upside
fully under- down). The local 1-axis points toward you.
stand the wall
pier orientation For both two-dimensional and three-dimensional piers the ori-
information entation of the pier local axes is automatically determined by
here if you are ETABS as described in Chapter 38. The orientation described is
specifying user- built into ETABS and you can not modify it.
defined flexural
reinforcing for You should carefully consider the local axes orientation before
a wall pier that
beginning to draw your pier section in Section Designer. This
is unsymmetri-
cal in plan.
will help you avoid having a pier section with the wrong ori-
entation.
Initial Definition of a Wall Pier Section
Starting Section Designer

You begin to define a wall pier section with user-defined vertical
reinforcing by clicking Design menu > Shear Wall Design >
Define Pier Sections for Checking. This command brings up
the Pier Sections dialog box where you can click the Add Pier
Section button to start a new section or click the Modify/Show
Pier Section button to view and/or modify a previously defined
pier section.
Tip: Clicking the Add Pier Section button brings up the Pier Section
Data dialog box. The following bullet items discuss the various
It is usually
areas in this dialog box:
easier and
quicker to start
• Section Name: This is the name of the pier section.
from the analy-
sis pier section
• Base Material: This is the material property used for the
48
geometry rather
than starting pier section
from scratch.
• Add Pier: The Add New Pier Section option allows you
to start the pier section from scratch. See the subsection
below titled "Creating a Pier Section from Scratch" for
more information.
Using Section Designer to Define Pier Reinforcing 48 - 21

The Start from Existing Wall Pier option allows you to

start with the geometry of an existing wall pier. When
you select this option you also specify a story and a wall
pier label so ETABS knows which existing pier geome-
try to use. In cases where the top and bottom geometry
of the pier is different ETABS uses the geometry at the
bottom of the pier. See the subsection below titled "Cre-
ating a Pier from the Geometry of an Existing Analysis
Pier Section" for more information.
• Check/Design: Select the Reinforcement to be Checked

option if you want to specify your own reinforcement
(location and size) and have ETABS check it.
Select the Reinforcement to be Designed if you want

ETABS to determine the required amount of reinforcing
for you. In this case you still lay out the reinforcing bars
in Section Designer. ETABS will use that layout and re-
port the required percentage of steel. In cases where you
use the design option you should, at the end of the de-
sign process, always specify your actual final reinforcing
and have ETABS check it.
• Define/Edit/Show Section: Once you have specified the

data in the other areas of the dialog box click the Section
Designer button to enter the section designer utility.
Here you can define the pier geometry and the reinforc-
ing.
When you are done with Section Designer close it and

return to the Pier Section data dialog box where you can
click the OK button to complete the definition of the
pier.
48
Creating a Pier Section from Scratch
Begin defining your pier section from scratch in Section De-
signer by drawing the concrete section. To do this click the
Draw Polygon Section button, , located on the side toolbar,
or select Draw menu > Draw Polygon. You can then proceed to
left click the mouse on each corner point of the polygon that de-
scribes the wall pier section. You can proceed around the poly-
gon in either a clockwise or a counter-clockwise direction. If you

double click on the last point Section Designer recognizes that

you have completed the polygon and draws the shape. Alterna-
tively you can press the Enter key on your keyboard after you
single click on the last point to finish the polygon.
Once the pier section is drawn you can add rebar as discussed in
the subsection below titled "Revising Rebar Size, Cover and
Spacing."
Creating a Pier from the Geometry of an Existing Analysis

Pier Section
When you choose to create a pier from the geometry of an ex-
isting analysis pier section the geometry of the pier is immedi-
ately displayed in Section Designer. You can modify the geome-
try of the section as discussed in the subsection below titled
"Modifying the Geometry of the Concrete Section." You can add
rebar as discussed in the subsection below titled "Revising Rebar
Size, Cover and Spacing."
Modifying the Geometry of the Concrete Section

You can revise the geometry of a polygon by changing the coor-
dinates of the corner points. To do this first click on the Re-
shaper button, , located on the side toolbar. Clicking the Re-
shaper button causes handles to appear on each corner of the
polygon (assuming you have created the polygon using one of
the methods discussed in the previous section). There are two
possible methods to change the geometry of the concrete section:
• Click on one of these handles with the left mouse button,

and while still holding the left mouse button down drag
the handle to a new location. Release the left mouse
button when you have dragged it to the correct location.
48
• Click on one of these handles with the right mouse but-
ton and the Change Coordinates dialog box pops up
which allows you to type in new coordinates for the cor-
ner point of the polygon.

Rebar line pattern

Figure 48-5: associated with
Rebar example Clear cover for
edge C
rebar line pattern Corner bar, typical
associated with at all corners
edge C Edge C
Edge D
Edge B
Clear cover for
rebar at edge D Edge A
Rebar line pattern
associated with
edge A
Revising Rebar Size, Cover and Spacing
General
Note: By default, for a polygon section, single rebar elements are pro-
The information
vided at each corner of the polygon and rebar line patterns are
provided here provided along each face of the polygon. Note the following
applies only to about these rebar elements:
the corner re-
bar and rebar • Rebar line patterns are defined by a rebar size, maximum
line patterns center-to-center spacing and clear cover.
that are part of
the polygon • The bars are spaced equally in a rebar line pattern. The
area object in equal spacing is measured from the center of the corner
Section De- bar at one end of the rebar line pattern to the center of
signer. It does the corner bar at the other end of the rebar line pattern.
not apply to
individual re- • Single rebar elements at the corners of a polygon are de-
bar elements fined simply by a bar size. The clear cover for these cor-
and rebar line
ner bars is determined from the clear cover of the line
patterns that
can also be
rebar on either side of the corner bar.
48 specified in
Section De-
To further illustrate the reinforcing, refer to Figure 48-5. The
signer but are figure shows a typical wall pier. The four edges of the pier are
not discussed in arbitrarily labeled Edge A, B, C and D for the purposes of this
this section discussion. Note the following about the reinforcing steel illus-
because they trated in Figure 48-5:
are not typi-
cally needed for • There are corner bars located at each of the four corners.
wall piers. Consider the corner bar in the upper left hand corner at
the intersection of edge C and edge D. This corner bar is

located such that the clear distance from edge D to the

bar is equal to the cover distance specified for the rebar
line pattern along edge D. This is true even though the
rebar size for the rebar line pattern has been set to
"None" as would usually be done for the reinforcing
along the edges that define the ends of the wall. Simi-
larly, the clear distance from edge C to the corner bar is
equal to the cover distance specified for the rebar line
pattern along edge C.
• The corner rebar size may be different at each corner of

the pier.
• As mentioned in the first bullet item of this list, the rebar

size associated with the rebar line pattern along edges B
and D is specified as "None." Note that the cover associ-
ated with these rebar line patterns is still valid, even
though the rebar size is "None." The cover is still used to
locate the corner bars.
• The rebar line pattern along an edge of the pier is paral-

lel to the edge of the pier and extends from the center of
the corner bar (or its projection perpendicular to the pier
edge) at one end of the considered edge to the center of
the corner bar (or its projection perpendicular to the pier
edge) at the other end of the considered edge. The rebar
line pattern is then divided into equal spaces whose
length does not exceed the specified spacing for the re-
bar line pattern.
• The rebar line pattern size, spacing and cover may be

different along each edge of the pier.
Methodology 48
To edit rebar line patterns along an edge of the member simply
right click on the rebar line pattern. This pops up the Edge Rein-
forcing dialog box where you can modify the edge rebar size,
maximum spacing and clear cover.

In the Edge Reinforcing dialog box there is also a check box

Tip:
which when checked applies the specified reinforcing to all
In Section De- edges of the polygon. Note that if you have already specified the
signer right rebar size along an edge of the polygon to be "None" then the
click on a rebar Apply to All Edges command does not apply the specified rein-
to bring up a
forcing size and spacing to that edge. It will, however, apply the
pop-up dialog
box where you
specified cover to that edge.
can edit the
To edit corner rebar simply right click on the rebar element. The
rebar size,
spacing and Corner Point Reinforcing dialog box appears. In this dialog box
cover. you can specify the size of the corner bar. There is also a check
box that allows you to say that this size applies to all corner bars.
Note that if you have already specified the corner rebar size to be
"None" then the Apply to All Corners command does not apply
the specified reinforcing size at that location.
Modifying Material Properties

The material properties used in Section Designer are the same
ones that are defined in ETABS using the Define menu > Mate-
rial Properties command. If you want to modify a material
property then you modify the property in ETABS itself, not in
the Section Designer utility.
Note that the material property defines both the concrete strength
and the rebar yield stress.
To review or change the material property associated with a pier

in Section Designer right click on the polygon area object that
defines the pier to bring up the Section Information dialog box.
In this dialog box one of the items you can change is the material
property.
48 Tips and Tricks
Distort Feature
Often when you work with wall piers in Section Designer you
find that the piers are very long (in the 2-axis direction) and very
skinny (in the 3-axis direction). This can make it difficult to
draw rebar in the pier. Section designer has a feature that allows
you to distort the view of the pier by applying a distortion factor

to the 3-direction. Note that this distortion factor only applies to

how you see the pier in Section Designer. It does not change the
actual coordinates or dimensions of the pier.
Tip: If you are having trouble seeing or defining rebar because of the
poor aspect ratio of a pier then click the View menu > Distort 3-
The distort
Direction command. This pops up the 3-Direction Distortion
feature makes it
easier to spec-
Factor dialog box that allows you to specify a distortion factor
ify rebar in a for the 3-axis direction. If your pier is 120 inches long by 6
pier that is long inches wide (120 inches in the 2-axis direction and 6 in the 3-
and skinny. axis direction) and you specify a 3-direction distortion factor of
2, then the pier will graphically appear to be 120 inches by 12
inches in Section Designer. Similarly, if the 3-direction distor-
tion factor is input as 5 the 120-inch by 6-inch pier will appear to
be 120 inches by 30 inches in Section Designer.
This feature can be very useful when you are working with wall
piers.
Interaction Diagrams and Moment-Curvature Plots

You can view an interaction diagram or a moment curvature plot
for your pier section at any time in Section Designer.
To view an interaction diagram simply click the Show Interac-

tion Surface button, , located on the top toolbar, or click the
Display menu > Show Interaction Surface command.
To view a moment-curvature plot simply click the Show Mo-

ment-Curvature Curve button, , located on the top toolbar,
or click the Display menu > Show Moment-Curvature Curve
command.
48
Pier Orientation
Take special care to be sure you are drawing your pier sections
in Section Designer with the correct orientation. See the section
titled "Local Axes Definition and Orientation" earlier in this

Assigning Pier Sections

Once you define a pier section with user-defined reinforcing you
must assign it to the pier. You can use the Design menu > Shear
Wall Design > Assign Pier Sections for Checking command to
do this. Note that you are also able to define the pier sections
through this same command.
48

References
References
ASCE, 1995
Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures -

ASCE 7-95, American Society of Civil Engineers, New
York, New York, 1995.
BOCA, 1996
The BOCA National Building Code/1996, Building Officials

and Code Administrators International, Inc., Country Club
Hills, Illinois, 1996.
CEN, 1994
ENV 1998-1-1:1994, Eurocode 8: Design Provisions for R

Earthquake Resistance of Structures - Part 1-1: General
Rules- Seismic Actions and General Requirements for
Structures, European Committee for Standardization, Brus-
sels, Belgium, 1994.
References - 1
R. W. Clough, I. P. King and E. L. Wilson, 1963
“Structural Analysis of Multistory Buildings,” Journal of the

Structural Division, ASCE, Vol. 89, No. 8, 1963.
R. D. Cook, D. S. Malkus and M. E. Plesha, 1989
Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, 3rd

Edition, John Wiley & Sons,New Tork, New York, 1989.
A. K. Gupta, 1990
“Response Spectrum Method,” Blackwell Scientific Publica-

tions, Ltd., 1990.
IBC, 1997
International Building Code 2000, International Code Coun-

cil, Birmingham, Alabama, November, 1997.
NBCC, 1995
National Building Code of Canada, National Research

Council of Canada, Ottawa, Canada, 1995.
NEHRP, 1997
NEHRP Recommended Provisions for Seismic Regulations

for New Buildings and Other Structures (FEMA 302),
Building Seismic Safety Council, Washington, D.C., 1997.
N. M. Newark and W. J. Hall, 1981
Earthquake Spectra and Design, Earthquake Engineering

Research Institute, Berkeley, California, 1982.
NZS, 1992
R
Code of Practice for General Structural Design and Design
Loadings for Buildings, Known as the Loadings Standard,
Standards New Zealand, Wellington, New Zealand, 1992.
References - 2
References
SEAOC, 1996
Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commen-

tary, Structural Engineers Association of California, Sacra-
mento, California, 1996.
UBC, 1994

UBC, 1997

D. W. White and J. F. Hajjar, 1991
“Application of Second-Order Elastic Analysis in LRFD:

Research to Practice,” Engineering Journal, AISC, Vol. 28,
No. 4, pp. 133–148.
E. L. Wilson, 1993
“An Efficient Method for the Base Isolation and Energy Dis-
sipation Analysis of Structural Systems,” ATC 17-1, Pro-
ceedings of Seminar on Seismic Isolation, Passive Energy
Dissipation, and Active Control, Applied Technology Coun-
cil, Redwood City, California, 1993.
E. L. Wilson, 1997
Three Dimensional Dynamic Analysis of Structures with

Emphasis on Earthquake Engineering, Computers and
Structures, Berkeley, California, 1997.
E. L. Wilson and M. R. Button, 1982

R
“Three Dimensional Dynamic Analysis for Multicomponent
Earthquake Spectra,” Earthquake Engineering and Struc-
tural Dynamics, Vol. 10.
References - 3
E. L. Wilson, H. H. Dovey and A. Habibullah, 1981a
“Theoretical Basis for CTABS80: A Computer Program for

Three-Dimensional Analysis of Building Systems,” Techni-
cal Report K-81-2, Computers/Structures International,
Oakland, California, 1981.
E. L. Wilson and A. Ibrahimbegovic 1989
“Simple Numerical Algorithms for the Mode Superposition

Analysis of Linear Structural Systems with Nonproportional
Damping,” Computers and Structures, Vol. 33, No. 2, 1989.
E. L. Wilson, A. D. Kiureghian and E. Bayo, 1981b
“A Replacement for the SRSS Method in Seismic Analysis,”

Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Vol. 9,
1981.
E. L. Wilson and I. J. Tetsuji, 1983
“An Eigensolution Strategy for Large Systems,” Computers

and Structures, Vol. 16.
E. L. Wilson, M. W. Yuan, and J. M. Dickens, 1982
“Dynamic Analysis by Direct Superposition of Ritz Vec-

tors,” Earthquake En-gineering and Structural Dynamics,
Vol. 10, pp. 813–823.
References - 4
Appendix 1
The ETABS Menu Structure

This appendix lays out the complete menu structure of ETABS.
The twelve menus available in ETABS are:
• File menu
• Edit menu
• View menu
• Define menu
• Draw menu
• Select menu
• Assign menu
• Analyze menu
• Display menu
A1
• Design menu
• Options menu
• Help menu
All of the commands available in each of these menus are listed

in this appendix. Submenu items are indented in the list.
A1 - 1
File Menu Commands

New Model...
Open ...
Save
Save As...
Import
Open ETABS7 .e2k Text File...
Open ETABS6 Text File...
Overwrite Story from SAFE .f2k Text File...
Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb File...
Export
Save Model as ETABS7 .e2k Text File...
Save Model as SAP2000 .s2k Text File...
Save Story as SAFE .f2k Text File...
Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File...
Save Story Plan as .DXF...
Save as 3D .DXF
Save Input/Output as Access Database File...
Save Graphics as Enhanced MetaFile...
Create Video...
Time History Animation...
Cyclic Animation...
Print Setup...
Print Preview for Graphics...
Print Graphics
Print Tables...
Input...
Analysis Output...
Steel Frame Design...
Concrete Frame Design...
Composite Beam Design...
Shear Wall Design...
User Comments and Session Log...
Display Input/Output Text Files...
A1 Exit
A1 - 2
Appendix 1 - The ETABS Menu Structure
Edit Menu Commands

Undo
Redo
Cut
Copy
Paste...
Delete
Add to Model from Template
Add 2D Frame...
Add 3D Frame...
Replicate...
Edit Grid Data...
Edit Story Data
Edit...
Insert Story...
Delete Story...
Edit Reference Planes...
Edit Reference Lines...
Merge Points...
Align Points/Lines/Edges...
Move Points/Lines/Areas...
Expand/Shrink Areas...
Merge Areas
Mesh Areas...
Join Lines
Divide Lines...
Auto Relabel All...
A1
A1 - 3
View Menu Commands

Set 3D View...
Set Plan View...
Set Elevation View...
Set Building View Limits...
Set Building View Options...
Rubber Band Zoom
Restore Full View
Previous Zoom
Zoom In One Step
Zoom Out One Step
Pan
Measure
Line
Area
Angle
Change Axes Location
Show Selection Only
Show All
Save Custom View...
Show Custom View...
Refresh Window
Refresh View
A1
A1 - 4
Define Menu Commands

Material Properties...
Frame Sections...
Wall/Slab/Deck Sections...
Link Properties...
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties...
Section Cuts...
Response Spectrum Functions...
Time History Functions...
Static Load Cases...
Response Spectrum Cases...
Time History Cases...
Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases...
Load Combinations...
Mass Source...
A1
A1 - 5
Draw Menu Commands

Select Object
Reshape Object
Draw Point Objects
Draw Line Objects
Draw Lines (Plan, Elev, 3D)
Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (Plan, Elev, 3D)
Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (Plan)
Create Secondary Beams in Region or at Clicks (Plan)
Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (Elev)
Draw Area Objects
Draw Areas (Plan, Elev, 3D)
Draw Rectangular Areas (Plan, Elev)
Create Areas at Click (Plan, Elev)
Draw Walls (Plan)
Create Walls in Region or at Click (Plan)
Draw Developed Elevation Definition...
Draw Dimension Line
Snap to
Grid Intersections and Points
Line Ends and Midpoints
Intersections
Perpendicular Projections
Lines and Edges
Fine Grid
Constrain Drawn Line to
None
Constant X
Constant Y
Constant Z
Constant Angle
A1
A1 - 6
Select Menu Commands

Select at Pointer/in Window
Select using Intersecting Line
Select on XY Plane
Select on XZ Plane
Select on YZ Plane
Select by Groups...
Select by Frame Sections...
Select by Wall/Slab/Deck Sections...
Select by Link Properties...
Select by Line Object Type...
Select by Area Object Type...
Select by Story Level...
Select All
Select Invert
Deselect
at Pointer/in Window
using Intersecting Line
on XY Plane
on XZ Plane
on YZ Plane
by Groups...
by Frame Sections...
by Wall/Slab/Deck Sections...
by Link Properties...
by Line Object Type...
by Area Object Type...
by Story Level...
All
Invert
Get Previous Selection
Clear Selection
A1
A1 - 7
Assign Menu Commands

Joint/Point
Rigid Diaphragm...
Panel Zone...
Restraints (Supports)...
Point Springs...
Link Properties...
Additional Point Mass...
Frame/Line
Frame Section...
Frame Releases/Partial Fixity...
Frame Rigid Offsets...
Frame Output Stations...
Local Axes...
Frame Property Modifiers...
Link Properties...
Frame NonLinear Hinges...
Pier Label...
Spandrel Label...
Line Springs...
Additional Line Mass...
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh...
Mesh It
Don't Mesh It
Cancel
Shell/Area
Wall/Slab/Deck Section...
Opening...
Rigid Diaphragm...
Local Axes...
Shell Property Modifiers...
Pier Label...
Spandrel Label...
A1 Area Springs...
Additional Area Mass...
(Note: Assign menu commands continue on the next page)
A1 - 8
Assign Menu Commands, continued

Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh...
Mesh It
Don't Mesh It
Cancel
Joint/Point Loads
Force...
Ground Displacement...
Temperature...
Frame/Line Loads
Point...
Distributed...
Temperature...
Shell/Area Loads
Uniform...
Temperature...
Group Names...
Clear Display of Assigns
Analyze Menu Commands

Set Analysis Options...
Run Analysis
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis
A1
A1 - 9
Display Menu Commands

Show Undeformed Shape
Show Loads
Joint/Point...
Frame/Line...
Shell/Area...
Set Input Table Mode...
Show Deformed Shape...
Show Mode Shape...
Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram
Support/Spring Reactions...
Frame/Pier/Spandrel Forces...
Shell Stresses/Forces...
Link Forces...
Show Energy Diagram...
Show Response Spectrum Curves...
Show Time History Traces...
Show Static Pushover Curve...
Show Section Cut Forces...
Set Output Table Mode...
A1
A1 - 10
Design Menu Commands

Steel Frame Design
Select Design Group...
Select Design Combo...
View/Revise Overwrites...
Set Lateral Displacement Targets...
Interactive Steel Frame Design
Display Design Info...
Make Auto Select Section Null...
Change Design Section...
Reset Design Section to Last Analysis...
Verify Analysis vs Design Section...
Reset All Steel Overwrites...
Delete Steel Design Results...
Interactive Concrete Frame Design
Reset All Concrete Overwrites...
Delete Concrete Design Results...
Composite Beam Design
Select Design Group...
Interactive Composite Beam Design
Make Auto Select Section Null... A1
Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites...
Delete Composite Beam Design Results...
(Note: Design menu commands continue on the next page)
A1 - 11
Design Menu Commands, continued

Shear Wall Design
View/Revise Pier Overwrites...
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites...
Define Pier Sections for Checking...
Assign Pier Sections for Checking...
Interactive Wall Design
Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites...
Delete Wall Design Results...
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure...
A1
A1 - 12
Options Menu Commands

Preferences...
Dimensions/Tolerances...
Output Decimals...
Steel Frame Design...
Concrete Frame Design...
Composite Beam Design...
Shear Wall Design...
Reinforcement Bar Sizes...
Live Load Reduction...
Colors
Display...
Output...
Windows
One
Two Tiled Vertically
Two Tiled Horizontally
Three
Four
Show Tips at Startup
Show Bounding Plane
Moment Diagrams on Tension Side
Sound
Lock Model
Show Aerial View Window
Show Floating Property Window
Show Crosshairs
Help Menu Commands A1

Search for Help on ...
About ETABS...
A1 - 13
Index
$et file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-20, 8-29, 20-4 modal, 33-2

2D view, 10-5, 10-6 nonlinear time history, 33-14, 33-17
3D view, 10-2, 10-8 nonlinear static, 33-22
p-delta, 33-18
A periodic time history (linear), 33-14
response spectrum (linear), 33-12
acceleration loads, 33-11 ritz-vector, 33-8
active degrees of freedom, 15-1 analysis log file, 43-1
add to model from template, 9-7 analysis sections, 45-1, 45-13, 46-2, 46-10, 47-1,
additional mass 47-12, 47-13
area, 14-56 angle drawing constraint, 12-22
line, 14-38 area object, 23-1
point, 14-14 assignments to, 14-48, 23-5
aerial view window, 4-8, 18-23 drawing, 12-9
align points, lines and edges, 9-20, 9-29 right click information, 23-6
Analyze menu commands type, 23-2
Set Analysis Options, 15-1 Assign menu commands
Run Analysis, 15-8 Joint/Point I
Run Static Nonlinear Analysis, 15-9 Rigid Diaphragm, 14-2
analysis, types Panel Zone, 14-3
eigenvector, 33-3 Restraints (Supports), 14-9
linear elastic static, 33-2 Point Springs, 14-10
linear time history, 33-14 Link Properties, 14-13
Additional Point Mass, 14-14
Index-1
Frame/Line automatic seismic loads

Frame Section, 14-22 1994 UBC, 28-6
Frame Releases/Partial Fixity, 14-23 1995 NBCC (Canadian), 28-21
Frame Rigid Offsets, 14-24 1996 BOCA, 28-17
Frame Output Stations, 14-28 1997 NEHRP, 28-30
Local Axes, 14-29 1997 UBC, 28-10
Frame Property Modifiers, 14-31 1997 UBC isolated, 28-14
Link Properties, 14-32 IBC2000, 28-25
Frame Nonlinear Hinges, 14-32 user defined, 28-36
Pier Label, 14-34 automatic wind loads
Spandrel Label, 14-35 1994 UBC, 29-6
Line Springs, 14-36 1995 NBCC (Canadian), 29-14
Additional Line Mass, 14-38 1996 BOCA, 29-11
Automatic Frame Mesh/No Mesh, 14-39 1997 UBC, 29-8
Shell/Area ASCE 7-95, 29-16
Wall/Slab/Deck Section, 14-48 user defined, 29-19
Opening, 14-49 avi file, 8-26
Rigid Diaphragm, 14-49 axes, 10-15, 21-2
Local Axes, 14-50
Shell Stiffness Modifiers, 14-51 B
Pier Label, 14-52
Spandrel Label, 14-53 beams, secondary, 8-10, 12-6
Area Springs, 14-54 black objects on white background, 10-18, 44-2
Additional Area Mass, 14-56 bounding plane, 18-3, 18-21
Automatic Membrane Floor Mesh/No Mesh, breaking (dividing, meshing) line objects, 9-35
14-57 buckling, 33-20, 33-21
Joint/Point Loads
Force, 14-16 C
Ground Displacement, 14-18
Temperature, 14-20 Cancel button, 4-14
Frame/Line Loads center of rigidity, 41-12
Point, 14-40 charts
Distributed, 14-42 response spectrum function, 11-29
Temperature, 14-46 response spectrum curve from time history re-
Shell/Area Loads sults, 16-29
Temperature, 14-60 time history function, 11-38
Uniform Surface, 14-58 time history trace, 16-34
I Group Names, 14-63
Clear Display of Assigns, 14-64
clear display of assignments, 14-64
codes, building
auto merge tolerance (preference), 18-2 1992 NZS 4203 (New Zealand), 11-37
auto relabel all, 23-5 1994 UBC, 11-34, 28-6, 29-6
auto select list, 11-11, 24-1 1995 NBCC (Canada), 11-35, 28-21, 29-14
auto zoom step (preference), 18-5 1996 BOCA, 11-35, 28-17, 29-11
1997 NEHRP, 11-36, 28-30
Index-2
Index
1997 UBC, 11-34, 28-10, 28-14, 29-8 Section Cuts, 11-27

1998 Eurocode 8, 11-37 Response Spectrum Functions, 11-29
ASCE 7-95, 29-16 Time History Functions, 11-38
IBC2000, 11-36, 28-25 Static Load Cases, 11-46
colors Response Spectrum Cases, 11-50
display colors, 18-15 Time History Cases, 11-56
frame element steel stress ratio colors, 18-17 Static Nonlinear/Pushover Cases, 11-63
object fill colors, 10-18, 18-15 Load Combinations, 11-63
output colors, 18-17 Mass Source, 11-64
shell element stress contour colors, 18-17 deformed shape, display, 16-7
view model by element or group colors, 10-17 deleting objects, 9-7
comments, user, 8-29 deleting a story level, 9-18
composite beam design process, 47-3 deselect, 13-6
concrete frame design process, 46-4 Design menu commands
constraints Steel Frame Design
drawing, 12-21 Select Design Group, 45-7
rigid diaphragm, 14-2, 14-49, 23-9, 23-16, 25-5 Select Design Combo, 45-8
control key (Ctrl), 4-9, 4-10 View/Revise Overwrites, 45-8
cookie cut meshing tools, 31-3 Set Lateral Displacement Targets, 45-9
coordinate systems, 21-1 Start Design/Check of Structure, 45-10
copying geometry, 9-2 Interactive Steel Frame Design, 45-11
create a new model, 4-11, 6-1, 8-1 Display Design Info, 45-11
crosshairs, 18-23 Make Auto Select Section Null, 45-11
coupled springs, 14-12 Change Design Section, 45-12
cumulative center of mass, 41-12 Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 45-13
current units, 20-3 Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 45-13
Reset All Steel Overwrites, 45-14
D Delete Steel Design Results, 45-14
damping Select Design Combo, 46-7
in link elements, 11-27 View/Revise Overwrites, 46-7
modal, 11-27, 11-50, 33-15 Start Design/Check of Structure, 46-8
database, Microsoft Access, 8-26, 42-1 Interactive Concrete Frame Design, 46-8
database, section properties, 11-7 Display Design Info, 46-9
database units, 20-4 Change Design Section, 46-9
decimal places (preference), 18-6 Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 46-10
deck span direction, 14-49, 32-14 Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 46-10
default.edb file, 6-5, 8-2
Define menu commands
Reset All Concrete Overwrites, 46-11
Delete Concrete Design Results, 46-11
I
Material Properties, 11-1 Composite Beam Design
Frame Sections, 11-6 Select Design Group, 47-7
Wall/Slab/Deck Sections, 11-21 Select Design Combo, 47-8
Link Properties, 11-26 View/Revise Overwrites, 47-9
Frame Nonlinear Hinge Properties, 11-27 Start Design/Check of Structure, 47-10
Index-3
Interactive Composite Beam Design, 47-10 Show Loads

Display Design Info, 47-11 Joint/Point, 16-2
Make Auto Select Section Null, 47-11 Frame/Line, 16-3
Change Design Section, 47-11 Shell/Area, 16-5
Reset Design Section to Last Analysis, 47-12 Set Input Table Mode, 16-6
Verify Analysis vs Design Section, 47-13 Show Deformed Shape, 16-7
Reset All Composite Beam Overwrites, 47-13 Show Mode Shape, 16-12
Delete Composite Beam Design Results, Show Member Forces/Stress Diagram
47-13 Support/Spring Reactions, 16-14
Shear Wall Design Frame/Pier/Spandrel Forces, 16-17
Select Design Combo, 48-11 Shell Stresses/Forces, 16-20
View/Revise Pier Overwrites, 48-12 Link Forces, 16-26
View/Revise Spandrel Overwrites, 48-15 Show Energy Diagram, 16-27
Define Pier Sections for Checking, 48-17 Show Response Spectrum Curves, 16-29
Assign Pier Sections for Checking, 48-17 Show Time History Traces, 16-34
Start Design/Check of Structure, 48-17 Show Static Pushover Curve, 16-39
Interactive Wall Design, 48-17 Show Section Cut Forces, 16-39
Display Design Info, 48-18 Set Output Table Mode, 16-40
Reset All Pier/Spandrel Overwrites, 48-19 divide lines, 9-35
Delete Wall Design Results, 48-19 Draw menu commands
Overwrite Frame Design Procedure, 17-2 Select Object, 12-1
design postprocessors, 6-5, 6-6, 6-9, 17-1, 24-2 Reshape Object, 9-37
design procedure, 17-2, 24-7 Draw Point Objects, 12-3
design process Draw Line Objects
composite beam design, 47-3 Draw Lines (Plan, Elev, 3D), 12-4
concrete frame design, 46-4 Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (Plan,
shear wall design, 48-8 Elev, 3D), 12-5
steel frame design, 45-3 Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (Plan),
design sections, 45-1, 45-13, 46-2, 46-10, 47-1, 12-6
47-12, 47-13 Create Secondary Beams in Region or at
developed elevation, 6-6, 10-7, 10-9, 12-11, 12-12 Clicks (Plan), 12-6
diaphragm, rigid Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (Elev),
assign to area object, 14-49 12-7
assign to point objects, 14-2 Draw Area Objects
display diaphragm extent, 10-29 Draw Areas (Plan, 3D), 12-9
dimension lines, 9-40, 12-17 Draw Rectangular Areas (Plan, Elev), 12-10
dimensions, measurements, 10-15 Create Areas at Click (Plan, Elev), 12-10
I dimensions, preferences, 18-2
displacement
Draw Walls (Plan), 12-10
Create Walls in Region or at Click (Plan),
ground (input static load), 14-18 12-12
deformed shape (static load), 16-7 Draw Developed Elevation Definition, 12-12
Display menu commands Draw Dimension Line, 12-17
Show Undeformed Shape, 16-1 Snap to
Grid Intersections and Points, 12-18
Index-4
Index
Line Ends and Midpoints, 12-19 Move Points/Lines/Areas, 9-29

Intersections, 12-19 Expand/Shrink Areas, 9-30
Perpendicular Projections, 12-19 Merge Areas, 9-32
Lines and Edges, 12-19 Mesh Areas, 31-2
Fine Grid, 12-19 Join Lines, 9-33
Constrain Drawn Line to Divide Lines, 9-35
None, 12-22 Auto Relabel All, 23-5
Constant X, 12-21 eigenvalue, 33-3
Constant Y, 12-21 eigenvector analysis, 33-3
Constant Z, 12-21 elevation, developed, 10-7, 12-11, 12-12
Constant Angle, 12-22 elevation, story level, 8-6, 9-17
draw mode, 4-12 elevation view, 10-6
dynamic load participation ratio, 41-8 energy diagram, 16-27
dxf export, 8-24, 8-25 export options
Save Model as ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-22
E Save Model as SAP2000 .s2k Text File, 8-23
Save Story as SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-23
e2k file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-21, 8-22, 8-29, 20-3 Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File, 8-24
ebk file, 20-4 Save Story Plan as .DXF, 8-24
edb file, 3-5, 4-12, 8-2, 8-7, 8-19, 8-20, 8-22, 8-24, Save as 3D .DXF, 8-25
20-4 Save Input/Output as Access Database File,
emf file, 8-26, 44-2 8-26
earthquake load See automatic seismic loads Save Graphics as Enhanced MetaFile, 8-26
edge select mode, 9-31 expand area objects, 9-30
Edit menu commands extend line objects, 9-25
Undo, 4-14
Redo, 4-14 F
Cut, 9-2
Copy, 9-2 fast restraints, 14-10
Paste, 9-2 fax number, 3-4
Delete, 9-7 File menu commands
Add to Model from Template New Model, 8-1
Add 2D Frame, 9-8 Open, 8-19
Add 3D Frame, 9-8 Save, 8-20
Replicate, 9-9 Save As, 8-20
Edit Grid Data, 9-14 Import
Edit Story Data Open ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-21
Edit, 9-17
Insert Story, 9-17
Open ETABS6 Text File, 8-21
Overwrite Story from SAFE .f2k Text File,
I
Delete Story, 9-18 8-22
Edit Reference Planes, 9-18 Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb File, 8-22
Edit Reference Lines, 9-18 Export
Merge Points, 9-19 Save Model as ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-22
Align Points/Lines/Edges, 9-20 Save Model as SAP2000 .s2k Text File, 8-23
Index-5
Save Story as SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-23 triangular, 11-46

Save Story as ETABS7 .edb File, 8-24 user-defined, 11-41
Save Story Plan as .DXF, 8-24 user-defined periodic, 11-41
Save as 3D .DXF, 8-25
Save Input/Output as Access Database File, G
8-26
Save Graphics as Enhanced MetaFile, 8-26 getting started
Create Video creating a model, 6-1, 8-1
Time History Animation, 8-26 installing ETABS, 2-1
Cyclic Animation, 8-27 global force balance, 43-3
Print Preview for Graphics, 8-27 graphical user interface, 4-1
Print Graphics, 8-27 grid line systems, 9-14, 21-1
Print Tables ground displacement, 14-18
Input, 8-28 groups, 14-63, 26-1
Analysis Output, 8-29 groups, designing by, 26-3
Steel Frame Design, 8-28 groups, section cuts, 26-4
Concrete Frame Design, 8-28 groups, selecting by, 13-4, 26-3
Composite Beam Design, 8-28
Shear Wall Design, 8-28 H
User Comments and Session Log, 8-29
Display Input/Output Text Files, 8-29 Help menu commands
Exit, 8-30 Search for Help on, 19-1
floating property window, 12-8, 12-12 About ETABS, 19-1
font size, 18-3, 18-4 height, story level, 8-6, 9-17
frame element internal forces, 35-2
frame section properties, 11-6, 14-22
frequency, 33-4, 41-3
I
functions, response spectrum import options
1992 NZS 4203 (New Zealand), 11-37 Open ETABS7 .e2k Text File, 8-21
1994 UBC, 11-34 Open ETABS6 Text File, 8-21
1995 NBCC (Canada), 11-35 Overwrite Story from SAFE .f2k Text File, 8-22
1996 BOCA, 11-35 Overwrite Story from ETABS7 .edb File, 8-22
1997 NEHRP, 11-36 incremental analysis, 33-22
1997 UBC, 11-34 initial p-delta analysis, 33-18
1998 Eurocode 8, 11-37 initialization of model, 8-2
from text file, 11-30 inserting a story level, 9-17
IBC2000, 11-36 installation
I user-defined, 11-32
functions, time history
hardware key device, 2-11
network server, 2-5
cosine, 11-44 network workstation, 2-6
from a file, 11-38
sentinel driver, 2-9
ramp, 11-44 single user, 2-4
sawtooth, 11-45 troubleshooting, 2-14
sine, 11-43 interactive composite beam design, 47-14
Index-6
Index
interactive steel frame design, 45-14 point load, 14-40

interactive concrete frame design, 46-11 temperature load, 14-46
interactive shear wall design, 48-17 point object
intersecting line select mode, 13-3 force load, 14-16
invert selection, 13-5 ground displacement, 14-18
invisible grid for snapping, 12-19 temperature load, 14-20
loads, displaying on model
J joint/point, 16-2
frame/line, 16-3
join lines, 9-33 shell/area, 16-5
joint See point object load cases
response spectrum, 11-50, 27-4
K static, 11-46, 27-2
static nonlinear (pushover), 11-63, 27-6
keyboard commands See inside front cover time history, 11-56, 27-5
load combinations, 27-6
load transformation, 32-1
L local axes
limits, viewing, 10-10 area object, 14-50, 23-17
line objects coordinate system, 9-15, 21-4
assignments to, 14-22, 24-5 frame element, 35-1
drawing, 12-3 line object, 14-29, 24-29
right click information, 24-7 link element, 14-13, 37-2
type, 24-3 panel zone, 14-8
line, reference, 9-18 point object, 25-12
line thickness (preference) shell element, 36-1
printer, 18-3 section cut, 11-29, 26-6
screen, 18-3 wall pier, 38-2
linear static analysis, 33-2 wall spandrel, 38-5
link element locking model, 4-13, 18-22
assigned to line objects, 14-32 log file, 43-1
assigned to panel zones, 14-5
assigned to point objects (grounded), 14-13 M
internal deformations, 37-4
internal forces, 37-6 magnifying the view See zoom
internal nonlinear springs, 37-2 major axis, 14-30
properties, 11-26 major direction, 14-30
live load reduction, 11-47, 18-10 mass, additional
area, 14-56
I
loads, assignment
area object line, 14-38
temperature load, 14-60 point, 14-14
uniform surface load, 14-58 mass per unit volume, 11-4
line object mass source, 11-64, 27-11
distributed load, 14-42 material property, 11-1
Index-7
maximum graphic font size (preference), 18-3 O

measurements
angle between two lines, 10-16 OK button, 4-14
perimeter and area of an area, 10-15 openings, 14-49
line length, 10-15 Options menu commands
membrane property, 11-21, 11-22, 30-1 Preferences
merge Dimensions/Tolerances, 18-2
areas, 9-32 Output Decimals, 18-6
points, 9-19 Reinforcement Bar Sizes, 18-7
tolerance, 9-19, 18-2 Live Load Reduction, 18-10
mesh areas Colors
automatic, 30-1 Display, 18-15
manual, 31-1 Output, 18-17
mesh line objects See divide lines Windows, 18-20
Microsoft Access See database, Microsoft Access Show Tips at Startup, 18-20
Microsoft Excel See spreadsheet, copying ge- Show Bounding Plane, 18-21
ometry to and from Moment Diagrams on Tension Side, 18-22
minimum graphic font size (preference), 18-4 Sound, 18-22
minor axis, 14-30 Lock Model, 18-22
minor direction, 14-30 Show Aerial View Window, 18-23
modal analysis, 33-2 Show Floating Property Window, 18-23
modal direction factors, 41-5 Show Crosshairs, 18-23
modal effective mass factors, 41-5 output
modal participation factors, 41-4 conventions, 34-1, 35-1, 36-1, 37-1, 38-1, 39-1,
modal periods and frequencies, 41-3 41-13
mode shapes, 16-12, 41-3 decimals (preferences), 18-6
modifiers display colors, 18-15
frame property, 14-31 displayed on screen, 16-1
shell stiffness, 14-51 onscreen output tables, 16-6, 16-40
modulus printed to printer or file, 8-27
shear, 11-3 stations, 14-28
Young's, 11-2 out file, 43-3
mouse, using, 4-9 overlapping area objects, 23-15
moving objects, 9-29 overturning moments, 41-13
overwrite frame design procedure, 17-2
N
P
I nonlinear
frame hinge properties (pushover), 11-27 pan, 10-13
link properties, 11-26, 37-2 pan margin (preference), 18-4
static analysis (pushover), 33-22 panel zone
time history analysis, 33-17 assignments, 14-3
nsrvgx.exe, 2-13 displacements, 34-3
nudging objects, 9-42 internal deformations, 34-4
Index-8
Index
internal forces, 34-5 refresh window, 10-14

p-delta analysis, 33-18 reinforcing
period, 41-3 bar sizes (preference), 18-7
perspective view, 10-8 beam, 11-17
phone number, 3-4 column, 11-19
piers relabeling objects, 23-5
labels, 14-34, 14-52, 48-1 replicating objects, 9-9
output forces, 16-17, 38-4 reshaper tool, 9-37
plan fine grid spacing (preference), 18-2 residual mass modes, 33-7
plan nudge value (preference), 18-3 response spectrum analysis, 33-12
plane response spectrum analysis output
bounding, 18-21 damping and accelerations, 41-10
reference, 9-18 modal amplitudes, 41-11
plate bending, 11-22 base reactions, 41-11
point object response spectrum curve
assignments to, 14-1, 25-3 from time history analysis results, 16-29
drawing, 12-3 input function, 11-29
on top of another point object, 25-12 restore previous selection, 13-5
output conventions, 34-1 restraints, 14-9
right click information, 25-3 right click
polyline, 24-31 on area object, 23-6
preferences, 18-1 on line object, 24-7
print on point object, 25-3
graphics, 8-27 right hand rule, 23-18
preview, 8-27 rigid diaphragm assignment
tables, 8-28 to area object, 14-49
to point objects, 14-2
Q ritz-vector analysis, 33-8
rotate 3D view, 10-5
quadrilaterals, drawing See Draw menu com- rubber band line, 12-4, 12-11, 13-3
mands rubber band window, 12-3, 12-5, 12-6, 12-7, 12-12,
quick keys See inside front cover 13-2
quitting ETABS, 8-30
S
R
saving model, 8-20
reactions, 16-14, 34-2 screen selection tolerance (preference), 18-3
readme.txt, 2-5
rectangles, drawing See Draw menu commands
screen snap to tolerance (preference), 18-3
screen line thickness (preference), 18-3
I
redo, 4-14 secondary beams, 12-6
reduction, live load, 18-10 section cuts
reference lines, 9-18 defining, 11-27, 26-4
reference planes, 9-18 output forces, 26-7, 39-1
refresh view, 10-14 section designer, 11-11, 48-20
Index-9
seismic load See automatic seismic loads spandrels

select all, 13-5 labels, 14-35, 14-53, 48-5
select edge of area object, 9-31 output forces, 16-17, 38-5
Select menu commands spreadsheet, copying geometry to and from, 9-3
Select at Pointer/in Window, 13-2 spring
Select using Intersecting Line, 13-3 forces, 16-14
Select on XY Plane, 13-4 properties
Select on XZ Plane, 13-4 area, 14-54
Select on YZ Plane, 13-4 line, 14-36
Select by Groups, 13-4 point, 14-10
Select by Frame Sections, 13-4 starting a new model, 4-11, 6-1, 8-1
Select by Wall/Slab/Deck Sections, 13-4 starting load vectors, 33-10
Select by Link Properties, 13-4 static analysis, 33-2
Select by Line Object Type, 13-5 static load participation ratio, 41-7
Select by Area Object Type, 13-5 static pushover curve, 16-39
Select by Story Level, 13-5 status bar, 4-5
Select All, 13-5 steel frame design process, 45-3
Select Invert, 13-5 story levels, 8-6, 9-17, 22-1
Deselect, 13-6 story shears, 41-13
Get Previous Selection, 13-5 support, technical
Clear Selection, 13-6 e-mail support, 3-5
self-mass, 11-4, 11-64 fax support, 3-4
self-weight, 11-4, 11-24, 11-47 phone support, 3-4
select mode, 4-12 training, at CSI in Berkeley, 3-6
sequential analysis See incremental analysis supports
shear wall design process, 48-8 area spring, 14-54
shell element faces, 36-2 line spring, 14-36
shell element section properties, 11-21 point spring, 14-10
shell element internal forces, 36-3 reactions, 16-14
shell element internal stresses, 36-8 restraints, 14-9
shift key, 4-9, 4-10
show all, 10-11 T
show selection only, 10-11
shrink area objects, 9-30 tables displayed onscreen
shrink factor (preference), 18-5 input tables, 16-6
similar stories feature, 12-2, 22-3 output tables, 16-40
snap to options static nonlinear analysis tables, 16-39
I intersections, 12-19
invisible grid, 12-19
time history trace tables, 16-38
telephone numbers
lines and edges, 12-19 fax, 3-4
middle and ends, 12-19 voice, 3-4
perpendicular, 12-19 templates, 8-6, 9-7, 11-42
points, 12-18 thick plate, 11-22
sound, 18-22
Index-10
Index
time history Draw Point Objects (displays flyout button),

analysis, 33-14 12-3
case, 11-56 Create Points (plan, elev, 3D), 12-3
function, 11-38 Draw Line Objects (displays flyout buttons),
trace, 16-34 12-3
time history types Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D), 12-4
linear, 33-14 Create Lines in Region or at Clicks (all
nonlinear, 33-14 views), 12-5
periodic, 33-14 Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (plan),
tips, showing at startup, 18-20 12-6
tolerances, preferences, 18-2 Create 2ndary Beams in Region or at Clicks
toolbar buttons (plan), 12-6
main (top) toolbar buttons Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (elev),
New Model, 8-1 12-7
Open .EDB File, 8-19 Draw Area Objects (displays flyout buttons),
Save Model, 8-20 12-9
Undo, 4-14 Draw Areas (plan, 3D), 12-9
Redo, 4-14 Draw Rectangular Areas (plan, elev), 12-10
Refresh Window, 10-14 Create Areas at Click (plan, elev), 12-10
Lock/Unlock Model, 18-22 Draw Walls (plan), 12-10
Run Analysis, 15-8 Create Walls in Region or at Click (plan),
Rubber Band Zoom, 10-11 12-12
Restore Full View, 10-12 Select All, 13-5
Restore Previous Zoom, 10-12 Restore Previous Selection, 13-5
Zoom In One Step, 10-13 Clear Selection, 13-6
Zoom Out One Step, 10-13 Set Intersecting Line Select Mode, 13-3
Pan, 10-14 Snap to Points, 12-18
3D View, 10-2, 10-5 Snap to Middle and Ends, 12-19
Plan View, 10-5 Snap to Intersections, 12-19
Elevation View, 10-6 Snap to Perpendicular, 12-19
Rotate 3D View, 10-5 Snap to Lines and Edges, 12-19
Perspective Toggle, 10-8 Snap to Invisible Grid, 12-19
Move Up in List, 10-5 training, at CSI in Berkeley, 3-6
Move Down in List, 10-5 trim line objects, 9-25
Object Shrink Toggle, 10-18
Set Building View Options, 10-16 U
Show Undeformed Shape, 16-1
Display Static Deformed Shape, 16-7
Display Mode Shape, 16-12
undeformed shape, display, 16-1
undo, 4-14
I
Display Member Force Diagram, 16-14 units, 20-1
Display Output Tables, 16-40 unlocking model, 4-13, 18-22
side toolbar buttons unstable end releases, 14-24
Pointer, 12-1
Reshaper, 9-37
Index-11
V Y
video, create and playback, 8-26 Young's modulus, 11-2
View menu commands
Set 3D View, 10-2 Z
Set Plan View, 10-5
Set Elevation View, 10-6 zoom
Set Building View Limits, 10-10 in one step, 10-13
Set Building View Options, 10-16 out one step, 10-13
Rubber Band Zoom, 10-11 previous zoom, 10-12
Restore Full View, 10-12 restore full view, 10-12
Previous Zoom, 10-12 rubber band zoom, 10-11
Zoom Out One Step, 10-13
Pan, 10-13
Measure
Line, 10-15
Area, 10-15
Angle, 10-16
Change Axes Location, 10-15
Show Selection Only, 10-11
Show All, 10-11
Save Custom View, 10-9
Show Custom View, 10-9
Refresh Window, 10-14
Refresh View, 10-14
W
walls
drawing See Draw menu commands, Draw
Area Objects
assigning pier labels to area objects, 14-52
assigning pier labels to line objects, 14-34
assigning spandrel labels to area objects, 14-53
assigning spandrel labels to line objects, 14-35
wind load See automatic wind loads
I windows, Options menu command, 18-20
windowing, 13-2
world wide web address, 3-3
Index-12

ETABS User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETABS User's Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ETABS User's Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Keyboard Shortcuts for Making Selections of Objects Onscreen

Keyboard Shortcuts for Various ETABS Menu Items

Ctrl+X Edit menu > Cut

Ctrl+A Select menu > Select All

Keyboard Shortcuts for Making Selections in List Boxes

Keyboard Shortcuts for Constraints Used While Drawing Objects

Keyboard Shortcuts for Constraints Used While Reshaping Objects

Open .EDB File Reshaper

Save Model Draw Point Objects (displays flyout button)

Redo Draw Line Objects (displays flyout buttons)

Refresh Window Draw Lines (plan, elev, 3D)

Run Analysis Create Columns in Region or at Clicks (plan)

Rubber Band Zoom Create 2ndary Beams in Region or at Clicks (plan)

Restore Full View Create Braces in Region or at Clicks (elev)

Restore Previous Zoom Draw Area Objects (displays flyout buttons)

Zoom In One Step Draw Areas (plan, 3D)

Zoom Out One Step Draw Rectangular Areas (plan, elev)

Pan Create Areas at Click (plan, elev)

3D View Draw Walls (plan)

Plan View Create Walls in Region or at Clicks (plan)

Elevation View Select All

Rotate 3D View Restore Previous Selection

Perspective Toggle Clear Selection

Move Up in List Set Intersecting Line Select Mode

Move Down in List Snap to Points

Object Shrink Toggle Snap to Middle and Ends

Set Building View Options Snap to Intersections

Show Undeformed Shape Snap to Perpendicular

Display Static Deformed Shape Snap to Lines and Edges

Display Mode Shape Snap to Invisible Grid

Display Member Force Diagram

Display Output Tables

ETABS USER’S MANUAL

Computers and Structures, Inc. First Edition

Further information and copies of this documentation may be obtained from:

Computers and Structures, Inc.

Phone: (510) 845-2177

ã Copyright Computers and Structures, Inc., 1978-1999.

CONSIDERABLE TIME, EFFORT AND EXPENSE HAVE GONE INTO THE

THE USER MUST EXPLICITLY UNDERSTAND THE ASSUMPTIONS OF THE

Special recognition is due Dr. Edward L. Wilson, Professor Emeritus, University of

C ETABS User’s Manual Chapter List

N. A. Expanded Table of Contents...................................... vi to xx

General Overview of ETABS

7 Overview of the ETABS Menus ............................. 7-1 to 7-2

Note: 8 The ETABS File Menu ......................................... 8-1 to 8-30

14 The ETABS Assign Menu .................................14-1 to 14-64

15 The ETABS Analyze Menu .................................15-1 to 15-9

16 The ETABS Display Menu ................................16-1 to 16-40

17 The ETABS Design Menu...................................17-1 to 17-6

18 The ETABS Options Menu................................18-1 to 18-23

19 The ETABS Help Menu.......................................19-1 to 19-2

N. A. Index .......................................................Index-1 to Index-12

N. A. Expanded Table of Contents......................................vi to xxi

Detailed Information on Selected ETABS Topics

20 Units ................................................................... 20-1 to 20-5

21 Coordinate Systems........................................... 21-1 to 21-7

22 Story Level Data................................................. 22-1 to 22-5

23 Area Objects .................................................... 23-1 to 23-21

28 Automatic Seismic Loads ................................. 28-1 to 28-37